microSTATION Param

2 E
Parameter guide
ii
About the Parameter Guide
ThemicroSTATIONParameterGuideisdividedintotwo
sections:QuickParametersandFullParameters.
Quick Parameter section
TheparametersthatcanbeeditedfromthemicroSTATION
itselfarecalledquickparameters.ThesearethemicroSTA
TIONsmostimportantparameters.
TheQuickParametersectionexplainstheseparameters.
Full Parameter section
Fullparametersaretheparametersthatcanbeeditedfrom
microSTATIONEditorinstalledonacomputerconnectedto
themicroSTATION.
Theseincludethedetailedsoundparameters,effectparame
ters,drumkits,anduserarpeggiopatterns.
TheFullParametersectionexplainstheseparameters.
Conventions in the
operation manuals
Abbreviations for the manuals: OG, PG
Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsareabbre
viatedasfollows.
OG:OperationGuide
PG:ParameterGuide
Procedure steps 1. 2. 3.
Theseindicatethestepsofaprocedure.
Symbols, , , Note, Tips
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,aMIDI
relatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
Example screen displays
Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensofthis
manualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmaynot
necessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheDisplayof
yourinstrument.
MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.
InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare
brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
* Apple,MacaretrademarksofAppleInc.,registeredin
theUS.andothercountries.
* WindowsXP,WindowsVista,andWindows7area
registeredtrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationinthe
U.S.andothercounties.
* Intel,IntelCore,andPentiumaretrademarksofIntel
CorporationintheU.S.andothercountries.
* Allproductnamesandcompanynamesarethetrade
marksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespective
owners.
iii
Table of contents
About the Parameter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Conventions in the
operation manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
microSTATION Quick parameters
............................................. 1
Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PROG PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PROG EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
OSC Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Filter/Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Filter/Amp EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Filter EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Amp EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Pitch EG/LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
OSC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
OSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Audition Riff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Knob Assign (Realtime Control Knob B Assign) . 9
Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ARP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IFX1, IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MFX1, MFX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Master Vol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Write Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
External Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
COMBI PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
COMBI EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Timb s (Timbre Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Timbre 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Timbre 02....16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Knob Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ARP (Arpeggiator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IFX1, IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MFX1, MFX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TFX (Total Effect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Master Vol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Write Combi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
External Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
An overview of Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
SEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Track Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Knob Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ARP (Arpeggiator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IFX1, IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MFX1, MFX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
TFX (Total Effect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Master Vol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Song Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
External Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Grid Seq (Grid Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Grid Sequence Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
System Exclusive events supported
in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
iv
Global/Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Effect SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
ARP (Arpeggiator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Bank Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Initial Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Scroll Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
M.Protect (Memory Protect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
MIDI Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
SEQ MIDI Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
ARP RTC MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
MIDI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
External Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PEDAL/SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Write Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Save All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Save PCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Save SEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Save To SMF
(Save Song as Standard MIDI File) . . . . . . .69
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
microSTATION Full parameters
........................................... 71
Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Mode Select, BROWSER, UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Realtime Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
OSC Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
OSC EG/LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
OSC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
OSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
About Relative (Rel) and Absolute parameters . 79
ARP/Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
OSC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Half-Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Key Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Program Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
OSC/Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
OSC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
OSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
PITCH EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
OSC1 Multisample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
OSC1 Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OSC2 Multisample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
OSC2 Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
OSC Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pitch EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Filter1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Filter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Filter1 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Filter1 LFO Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Filter1 EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Filter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Filter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Filter2 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Filter2 LFO Mod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Filter2 EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
v
Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Amp1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Amp2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Amp1 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Amp1 EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Amp2 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Amp2 EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
OSC 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
OSC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
OSC1 LFO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
OSC1 LFO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
OSC2 LFO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
OSC2 LFO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Common LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
AMS Mix/C.KeyTrk (AMS Mixer/
Common Keyboard Track) . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
OSC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
OSC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
OSC1 AMS Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
OSC 2 AMS Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Common KeyTrack (Common Keyboard Track)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
IFX (Insert Effect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
IFX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
OSC MFX Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
IFX Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
IFX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MFX&TFX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
MFX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
MFX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
TFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
UTILITY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mode Select, BROWSER, UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Realtime Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Program Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Timbre Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Arpeggiator Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Arpeggiator-A(B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Realtime Control Knob Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) . . . . . . . . . 145
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
MIDI/OSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Pitch/Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
MIDI Filter1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
MIDI Filter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Key/Vel Zone (Keyboard/Velocity Zone) . . . . . 152
Keyboard Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Velocity Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
IFX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
IFX Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
IFX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MFX&TFX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
MFX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
MFX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
TFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
UTILITY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
vi
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Mode Select, BROWSER, UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Realtime Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Track Select, Program Select, Pan, Volume . . . 163
Track Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Track Param (Track Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
MIDI/OSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Pitch/Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MIDI Filter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
MIDI Filter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Key/Vel Zone (Keyboard/Velocity Zone) . . . . . 171
IFX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
IFX Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
IFX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
MFX&TFX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
MFX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
MFX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
TFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
UTILITY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Global mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Mode Select, UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Realtime Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Basic/Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
User Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Sample Param . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Voice/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Creating a drum kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Arpeggio Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Fixed Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Creating a user arpeggio pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
UTILITY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Effect Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Effects in each mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Editing effect parameters
on the microSTATION itself . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
and Tempo Synchronization . . . . . . . . . .206
FX Control Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Effect I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Controlling the Insert Effects via MIDI . . . . . . . .211
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Controlling the Master Effects via MIDI . . . . . . .213
Total Effect (TFX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Using MIDI to control the Total Effect . . . . . . . . .214
Main Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Effect/Mixer Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Single size effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
000: No Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
001: St.Comp (Stereo Compressor) . . . . . . . . . . .217
002: Red Comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
003:St. Limitr (Stereo Limiter)................................. 218
004: MulLimitr (Multiband Limiter) . . . . . . . . . . .219
005: St.MstLmt (Stereo Mastering Limiter) . . . .219
006: St.Gate (Stereo Gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
007: St.P4EQ (Stereo Parametric 4-Band EQ) . .220
008: St.G7EQ (Stereo Graphic 7-Band EQ) . . . . .221
vii
009: St.Excitr (Stereo Exciter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
010: St.Isolat (Stereo Isolator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
011: St. Wah (Stereo Wah/Auto Wah) . . . . . . . . 222
012: St.VtgWah
(Stereo Vintage/Custom Wah) . . . . . . . . 223
013: VOX Wah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
014: St.RndFlt (Stereo Random Filter) . . . . . . . . 224
015: St.MMFltr (Multi Mode Filter)........................ 225
016: St.SubOsc (Stereo Sub Oscillator) . . . . . . . 226
017: Talk Mod (Talking Modulator) . . . . . . . . . . . 226
018: St.Decimt (Stereo Decimator) . . . . . . . . . . . 227
019: St. Record (Stereo Analog Record) . . . . . . 228
020: OD Wah (Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah) . . . . . . . 228
021: St.Gt Cab (Stereo Guitar Cabinet) . . . . . . . 229
022: St.Bs Cab (Stereo Bass Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . 230
023: Bass Amp.............................................................. 230
024: B.Amp Cab (Bass Amp Model+Cabinet) ... 231
025: TrebleBST (Treble Booster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
026: Tube Pre (Tube PreAmp Modeling) . . . . . 232
027: St.TubPre
(Stereo Tube PreAmp Modeling) . . . . . . 232
028: Mic Model (Mic Modeling + PreAmp) . . . 232
029: Stereo Phaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
030: Small Phs (Small Phaser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
031: OrangePhs (Orange Phaser) . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
032: BlackPhsr (Black Phaser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
033: U-VIBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
034: St.RndPhs (Stereo Random Phaser) . . . . . 234
035: St.EnvPhs (Stereo Envelope Phaser) . . . . . 235
036: 2Vo.Reso (2Voice Resonator) . . . . . . . . . . . 235
037: St.Tremlo (Stereo Tremolo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
038: TEX Treml (TEX Tremolo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
039: St. Env.Trm (Stereo Envelope Tremolo) .... 237
040: St.AutPan (Stereo Auto Pan) . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
041: St.PhsTrm (Stereo Phaser + Tremolo) . . . 238
042: St.Ring M (Stereo Ring Modulator) . . . . . . 239
043: P4EQ - Xctr
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Exciter) . . . . . . 240
044: P4EQ - Wah (Parametric 4-Band EQ -
Wah/Auto Wah) ............................................. 240
045: P4EQ - Phaser
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Phaser) . . . . . . 241
046: Comp - Wah
(Compressor - Wah/Auto Wah) . . . . . . . 241
047: Comp - Amp
(Compressor - Amp Simulation) . . . . . . 242
048: Comp - OD
(Compressor - Overdrive/Hi.Gain) .......... 242
049: Comp - P4EQ
(Compressor - Parametric 4-Band EQ) . 243
050: Comp - Phsr (Compressor - Phaser)............ 243
051: Lmtr - P4EQ
(Limiter - Parametric 4-Band EQ)............. 244
052: Limtr - Phsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
053: Xctr - Comp (Exciter - Compressor) . . . . . .245
054: Xctr- Lmtr ............................................................. 245
055: Xctr- Phsr .............................................................. 246
056: OD - Amp
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Amp Simulation) .. 246
057: OD - Phsr (Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Phaser)...... 247
058: Wah - Amp (Wah - Amp Simulation) . . . . .247
059: Deci - Amp
(Decimator - Amp Simulation) ................. 248
060: Deci - Comp (Decimator - Compressor) . .248
061: Amp - Trml (Amp Simulation- Tremolo) . .248
062: Organ Vib/Chorus
(Organ Vibrato/Chorus) .............................. 249
063: Rotary SP (Rotary Speaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
064: St.Chorus (Stereo Chorus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
065: VtgChorus (Vintage Chorus) . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
066: BlkChorus (Black Chorus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
067: St.HrmCho (Stereo Harmonic Chorus) . . . .252
068: St.Bi Mod (Stereo Biphase Modulation) .... 252
069: Mtap Cho (Multitap Chorus/Delay) . . . . . .253
070: Ensemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
071: Poly6 Ens (Polysix Ensemble) ........................ 254
072: St Flange (Stereo Flanger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
073: VtgFlange (Vintage Flanger) . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
074: St.RndFlg (Stereo Random Flanger) . . . . . .255
075: St.EnvFlg (Stereo Envelope Flanger) . . . . .255
076: St.Vibrat (Stereo Vibrato) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
077: St.AF Mod
(Stereo Auto Fade Modulation) ............... 257
078: Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
079: Detune .................................................................. 258
080: PitchSftr (Pitch Shifter) .................................... 258
081: P.Sft Mod (Pitch Shift Modulation) . . . . . . .259
082: P4EQ - Flng (Parametric 4-Band EQ -
Chorus/Flanger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
083: Comp - Flng
(Compressor - Chorus/Flanger) . . . . . . . .260
084: Lmtr - Flng (Limiter - Chorus/Flanger) . . . .261
085: Xctr - Flng (Exciter - Chorus/Flanger) ......... 261
086: OD - Flng
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Chorus/Flanger).... 262
087: Phsr - Flng (Phaser - Chorus/Flanger) . . . .262
088: GrainSftr (Grain Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
089: LCR Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
090: St.Delay (Stereo/CrossDelay) . . . . . . . . . . . .264
091: St.MtpDly (Stereo Multitap Delay) .............. 264
092: St.ModDly (Stereo Modulation Delay) . . . .265
093: St.DynDly (Stereo Dynamic Delay).............. 266
094: St.PanDly (Stereo Auto Panning Delay) . .266
095: Tape Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
096: Echo Plus .............................................................. 268
viii
097: Auto Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
098: SeqDlyBPM (Sequence BPM Delay) . . . . . 269
099: LCR BPM (L/C/R BPM Delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
100: St.DlyBPM (Stereo BPM Delay) . . . . . . . . . . 270
101: St.MtdBPM (Stereo BPM Multitap Delay) 270
102: St.ModBPM
(Stereo BPM Modulation Delay) .............. 271
103: St.ApdBPM
(Stereo BPM Auto Panning Delay) . . . . . 272
104: TapeE BPM (Tape Echo BPM) ........................ 273
105: Rev.Hall (Reverb Hall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
106: Rev.Plate (Reverb Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
107: Rev.Room1 (Reverb Room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
108: Rev.Room2 (Reverb Room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
109: R2.Spring (Reverb2 Spring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
110: R2.Hall (Reverb2 Hall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
111: R2.Plate (Reverb2 Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
112: R2.Room (Reverb2 Room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
113: Early Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
114: P4EQ - MDly (Parametric 4-Band EQ -
Multitap Delay) .............................................. 276
115: Comp - MDly
(Compressor - Multitap Delay) ................. 276
116: Lmtr - MDly (Limiter - Multitap Delay)....... 277
117: Xctr - MDly (Exciter - Multitap Delay) ......... 277
118: OD - MDly
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Multitap Delay) ..... 278
119: Flng - Dly
(Chorus/Flanger - Multitap Delay) . . . . . 278
120: Rev - Gate (Reverb - Gate) .............................. 279
Double Size effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
D00: St.MltLmt (Stereo Multiband Limiter) . . . 280
D01: OD/HG Wah
(Overdrive/Hyper Gain Wah) .................... 280
D02: GAmp + P4EQ (Guitar Amp Model +
Parametric 4-Band EQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
D03: GAmpCLEAN
(Guitar Amp Model CLEAN) . . . . . . . . . . . 282
D04: GAmpSUPER
(Guitar Amp Model SUPER) . . . . . . . . . . . 282
D05: GAmpTWEED
(Guitar Amp Model TWEED) . . . . . . . . . . 282
D06: GAmpUS-HG
(Guitar Amp Model US-HG) . . . . . . . . . . . 282
D07: B.TubeAmp
(Bass Tube Amp Model + Cabinet) ......... 282
D08: St. Mic
(Stereo Mic Modeling + PreAmp) . . . . . 283
D09: Vocoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
D10: Rotary OD (Rotary Speaker Overdrive) . . 284
D11: Mtap Cho (Multitap Chorus/Delay) . . . . . 285
D12: St.P.Sftr (Stereo Pitch Shifter) . . . . . . . . . . . 286
D13: Early Ref (Early Reflections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Alternate Modulation Source (AMS) . . . . . . . . . 287
Alternate Modulation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) List . . . . . .287
Alternate Modulation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Dynamic Modulation Source (Dmod) . . . . . . . . 292
Realtime Control Knob 14 Assign . . . . . . . . . . 294
Foot Switch Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Foot Pedal Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
MIDI transmission when the microSTATIONs
controllers are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
microSTATION and MIDI CCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Responses to standard MIDI controllers . . . . . .299
Parameters controlled by MIDI CCs #70-79 . . .301
MIDI applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
About MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Settings when connected to a MIDI device
or computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Messages transmitted and received
by the microSTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
MIDI Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
microSTATION Quick parameters
2
3
Program mode
ToplayprogramsyoulluseProgrammode,whichletsyou
dothefollowingthings.
Selectandplayprograms.
UsetheRealtimeControlknobstocontrolaprograms
soundorarpeggiator.
Editthemostimportantprogramparameters.
Page structure in Program mode
ThemicroSTATIONsProgrammodeisorganizedasatree
structurecontainingthefollowingpages.(p.3)
Fordetailsonhowtomovebetweenpages,andhowto
selectparametersandedittheirvalues,pleaserefertothe
microSTATIONOperationGuide.
PROG PLAY
InPROGPLAYyoucanselectandplayprograms.
YoucanalsousetheRealtimeControlknobstocontrolthe
programssoundsandthearpeggiatorwhileyouperform.
AllMIDIdatainPROGPLAYistransmittedand
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannel.(Channel
(GlobalMIDIChannel)onpage 60)
Tips: Auto Song Setup
BypressingtheRECbuttoninProgramorCombination
mode,youcanusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionwhich
automaticallycopiesthecurrentsettingstoasongandputs
themicroSTATIONintherecordreadycondition.When
youvethoughtofaphraseoranideaforasong,thislets
youinstantlyturnyourinspirationintoasong.(Tips:
AutoSongSetuponpage 30)
Program No.&Name [001...: program name]
Thisindicatestheprogram.
ThemicroSTATIONspreloadprogramsareorganizedinto
thefollowingsevencategories.Thecategoryoftheselected
programisshownbytheCATEGORYindicatorlocatedat
theleftofthefrontpaneldisplay.
Thepreloadprogramsincluderewritableprograms(atotal
of512programs),andthenonrewritableGMbankscon
tainingGM2capitalprograms(128),variationprograms
(129),andbankgdrums(9).
Note:Ifyouwanttoviewthenumberswithineachbank
ratherthanthenumbersshownwhenALLisselected,turn
NUMLOCKon(LEDlit)andpressthe14(ENTER)button.
EXTERNAL control
InPROGPLAY,ifyoupresstheEXTERNALbuttontoturn
ExternalControlon,andthenoperateknobs14,thedis
playwillbrieflyshowtheMIDIchannel,MIDICCnumber
andvaluethatareassignedbytheselectedexternalsetup.
ExternalsetupscanbeselectedinPROGEDIT:External
Setup.(ExternalSetuponpage 15)
IftheMIDICCnumberforaknobisturnedOffinthe
selectedexternalsetup,thenthevaluewillnotappear
whenyouoperatetheknob.
PROG EDIT
HereyoucaneditthemicroSTATIONsprogramquick
parameters.Thequickparametersaremajorparameters
thatcanbeeditedfromthemicroSTATIONitself.Ifyou
wanttoeditallparametersoftheprogram,youllneedto
usemicroSTATIONEditoronaconnectedcomputer.
OSC Common
Hereyoucanspecifyhowoscillators1and2willproduce
sound.
Voice Mode (Voice Assign Mode) [Poly, Mono]
Selectthebasicvoiceallocationmode.Dependingonwhich
oneyouselect,variousotheroptionswillappear,suchas
MonoLegatoandUnison(Monomodeonly).
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowingyou
playchords.
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically,producing
onlyonenoteatatime.
MonoLegato [Off, On]
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceModeissettoMono.
Legatorefertonotesthatareplayedinawaythatthey
soundsmoothandconnected;thenextnoteisplayedbefore
thelastnoteisreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplaying
detached.
On:Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,thenoteswithina
legatophrasewillsoundsmoother.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegatophrase
willsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnoteswillhavea
smoothersound,formoregentletransitionsbetweenthe
notes.
Off:Legatophrasingwillproducethesamesoundas
detachedplaying.
Category Explanation
ALL
Nocategory.Allprograms
001...512:ProgramsofbanksA,B,C,D
513...640:GM2capitalprograms
641...768:GM2variationprograms
769...777:GM2drumprograms
KEYBOARD
A.Piano,SynthE.P,RealE.P,
Clav/Harpsi,E.Organ,Pipe.Organ
STRINGS/BRASS/
WOODWIND
Strings,Vocal,Airy,Brass,Woodwind,
Reed
GUITAR A.Guitar,E.Guitar,Plucked
BASS&BASS SPLIT E.Bass,A.Bass,SynthBass
SYNTH Fast,Slow,Motion,Shortdecay
LEAD&SOLO
SPLIT
SynLead
DRUM/MALLET/
HITS
Natural,Dance,Perc,Bell,Mallet,SFX,
Hits
USER
Soundssavedasausercategory(not
includedinfactorysettings)
Program mode
4
OSC Common (p.3)
VoiceMode
MonoLegato
Unison
NumOfVoices
Detune
Thickness
PtchStrtch
Hold
Reverse
Filter/Amp (p.5)
Cutof
Resonance
Flt EG Int
AmpVel Int
Filter/Amp EG (p.5)
Attack
Decay
Sustain
Release
Filter EG (p.6)
Attack
Decay
Sustain
Release
Amp EG (p.6)
Attack
Decay
Sustain
Release
Pitch EG/LFO (p.6)
Attack
Decay
Sustain
Release
LFO1 Int
LFO (p.6)
LF01 Speed
LFO1 Fade
LFO1 Delay
LFO1 Stop
LF02 Speed
LFO2 Fade
LFO2 Delay
LFO2 Stop
CmnLFO Spd
PROG PLAY
OSC1 (p.7)
Play/Mute
Volume
Tune
Transpose
PtchSlope
Pitch JS+X
Pitch JSX
Portamento
PortaFingr
PortaMode
PortaTime
LFO1
LFO2
FltLFO1toA
FltLFO1toB
FltLFO2toA
FltLFO2toB
AmpLFO1Int
AmpLFO2Int
P.LFO1 AMS Int
P.LFO2 AMS Int
OSC2
Same as OSC1 parameters
Audition Rif (p.8)
,: 000: Of
Transpose
Knob Assign (p.9)
1-B
2-B
3-B
4-B
Tempo (p.9)
Tempo
Arp Setup (p.9)
Pattern
Octave
Resolution
Gate[%]
Velocity
Swing[%]
Sort
Latch
KeySync
Keyboard
Top Key
BottomKey
Top Vel
BottomVel
FX Routing (p.11)
Use Dkit Setting
Bus
FXCtrl Bus
OSC1 Send1
OSC1 Send2
OSC2 Send1
OSC2 Send2

PROG EDIT
IFX1 (p.11)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Chain
ChainTo
Pan(CC#8)
Bus
FX Ctrl
Send1
Send2
IFX2 (p.12)
Same as IFX1 parameters
IFX3 (p.12)
IFX4 (p.12)
IFX5 (p.12)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Pan(CC#8)
Bus
FX Ctrl
Send1
Send2
MFX1 (p.13)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Return2
Chain
ChainLevel
MFX2 (p.13)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Return2
TFX (p.13)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
MasterVol (p.13)
Master Vol
Command (p.14)
Copy ARP
Copy IFX
Swap IFX
Copy MFX/TFX
Write Program (p.14)
External Setup (p.15)
001: External
1. Gch/#001: 000
2. Gch/#002: 000
3. Gch/#003: 000
4. Gch/#004: 000
Filter/Amp
5
Unison [On, Off]
UnisoncanbeusedinMonomode.
On:WhenUnisonison,theProgramusestwoormore
stacked,detunedvoicestocreateathicksound.
UsetheNumOfVoicesandDetuneparameterstoset
thenumberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,andthe
Thicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthedetun
ing.
Off:TheProgramplaysnormally.
NumOfVoices (Number of Voices) [2...6]
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itappliesonly
whenUnisonisOn.
Detune [00...99 cents]
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnisonvoices,
incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThicknessparameter,
below,controlshowthevoicesaredistributedacrossthe
detuneamount.WhenThicknessisOff,thevoicesare
distributedevenly,centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
Detune[cents]onpage 85
Thickness [Off, 1...9]
ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuningfunc
tionfortheunisonvoices.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacrossthe
Detunerange,asshownabove.
19:Unisonvoiceswillbedetuneinanasymmetricalway,
increasingthecomplexityofthedetunefuction,andchang
ingthewaythatthedifferentpitchesbeatagainstone
another.Thiscreatesaneffectsimilartovintageanalogsyn
thesizers,whereoscillatorswouldfrequentlydriftslightly
outoftune.Highernumbersincreasetheeffect.
PtchStrtch [12...0...+12 (Rel)]
ThisspecialcontrolincreasestheOscillatorTuneparame
terwhileloweringtheTransposeparameter.Theresultis
thatthepitchstaysthesame,butthemappingofthesam
plestothekeyschanges.Youcanusethistocreateinterest
ingshiftsintimbre.
Hold [Off, On]
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasifyou
wereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryouliftyourfingers
fromthekeyboard.
BeawarethatunlessyousetSustainto0forAmpEG1
(andalsoAmpEG2iftheprogramusestwooscillators),the
soundwillcontinueindefinitely.
On:TheHoldfunctionisenabled.
EveniftheHoldfunctionisenabled,itmightbedis
abledforaspecificrangeofkeys(HoldBottom
Keyonpage 83).
Off:Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Reverse [PROG, Off, On (Rel)]
ThisswitchesReverseon/offforallmultisamplesusedby
bothoscillators.Ifthisison,thewaveformwillplayback
ward.BysettingthistoPROG,youcanreturnthesettingto
theprogramsoriginalsetting.
Tone parameters
ParametersfromFilter/AmptotheLFOgroupallowyouto
makeoverallmodificationstotheprogramssound.(the
microSTATIONEditorallowsfullparameterediting.)
WiththeexceptionofLFO1StopandLFO2Stop,these
parametersarerelativeparameters.Theyadjustthevalue
relativetothesettingspecifiedbyfullparameterediting.
Someparametersinthisgroupareinterrelatedwith
controlofcertainMIDICCmessages.Forthese,an
indicationsuchasCC#74appearsfollowingthe
parametervalue.
Filter/Amp
Hereyoucanadjustfilterandampsettingsforoscillators1
and2.
Filtersettingsletyouboostorattenuatespecificfrequency
regionsofthesound.
Ampsettingscontrolthevolume.
Note:RelativeparametersareindicatedbyRelfollowing
theparametervalue.Absoluteparametersareindicatedby
Absfollowingtheparametervalue.Formoreaboutthese
parameters,pleaserefertoRelative(Rel)andAbsolute
parameters(p.66).
Cutoff (Filter Cutoff) [99...+99 (Rel, CC#74)]
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.It
affectsbothFiltersAandB.
Resonance (Filter Resonance)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#71)]
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.Itaffects
bothFiltersAandB.
Flt EG Int (Filter EG Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#79)]
ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutofffrequency.
ItaffectsFiltersAandBsimultaneously.
99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum.Modula
tionisinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,asthe
originalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginalPrograms
EGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingthisparameterto
+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
AmpVel Int (Amp Velocity Intensity) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalestheeffectofvelocityontheAmplevel.
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
Program mode
6
Filter/Amp EG
HereyoucanadjustthesettingsforthefilterEGandamp
EGofoscillators1and2.
IntheFilter/AmpEGgroup,allfilterEGsandampEGsare
adjustedsimultaneously.Incontrast,eachparameteris
adjustedindependentlyintheFilterEGandAmpEG
groups.
AprogramcontainsthreeEGs:pitch,filter,andamp.These
respectivelyproducetimevaryingchangeinthepitch,tone,
andvolume.
Attack (Filter/Amp EG Attack Time)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#73)]
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs,along
withotherrelatedparameters.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmpEGs
StartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttackTime
AMS.
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,StartLevel
AMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefromtheirpro
grammedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange,theAttackLevel
willchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.(Alternate
Modulationonpage 91)
Decay (Filter/Amp EG Decay Time)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#75)]
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterandAmp
EGs.
Sustain (Filter/Amp EG Sustain Level)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#70)]
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
Release (Filter/Amp EG Release Time)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#72)]
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs.
Filter EG
HereyoucaneditthefilterEGenvelopeforoscillators1and
2.
Attack (Filter EG Attack Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterEGs.
Decay (Filter EG Decay Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterEGs.
Sustain (Filter EG Sustain Level) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterEGs.
Release (Filter EG Release Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterEGs.
Amp EG
HereyoucanedittheampEGenvelopeforoscillators1and
2.
Attack (Amp EG Attack Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheAmpEGs.
Decay (Amp EG Decay Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheAmpEGs.
Sustain (Amp EG Sustain Level) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheAmpEGs.
Release (Amp EG Release Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheAmpEGs.
Pitch EG/LFO
HereyoucaneditthepitchEGenvelopeforoscillators1
and2,andspecifythedepthoftheeffectthatLFO1will
haveonthepitch.
Attack (Pitch EG Attack Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalestheattacktimeofthePitchEG.
Decay (Pitch EG Decay Time) [99...+99(Rel)]
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG.
Release (Pitch EG Release Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG.
LFO1 Int (Pitch LFO1 Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#77)]
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99meansmaxi
mummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveornega
tive,astheoriginalProgram.
LFO
HereiswhereyoucanadjustLFOsettingsforoscillators1
and2.
EachoscillatorhastwoLFOs(LFO1andLFO2).Theresalso
acommonLFOthatcanbesharedbythetwooscillators.
LFO1andLFO2areindependentforeachvoice,butthe
commonLFOissharedbyallvoicesoftheprogram.Itsuse
fulwhenyouwanttoproduceauniformLFOeffectthatis
thesameforallvoices.
LFO1 Speed [99...+99 (Rel, CC#76)]
ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.
(Frequencyonpage 117)
LFO1 Fade [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.
(Fadeonpage 118)
LFO1 Delay [99...+99 (Rel, CC#78)]
ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.
(Delayonpage 118)
LFO1 Stop [PROG, Off, On (Abs)]
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO1isstopped
orrunning.
(Stoponpage 118)
ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginalvalues.
Forexample,ifyousetthistoPROGwhentheoscillator1
Level
Time
Attack Time
Decay Time
Slope Time
Release Time
Attack Level
Start Level
Sustain Level
Break Level
note-on note-of
Release
Level
OSC1
7
LFOisstoppedandoscillator2isplaying,theoriginalset
tingoftheparameterwillbeused.
LFO2 Speed [99...+99 (Rel)]
(Frequencyonpage 117)
LFO2 Fade [99...+99 (Rel)]
(Fadeonpage 118)
LFO2 Delay [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetimebetweennoteon
andtheonsetoftheLFO.
(Delayonpage 118)
LFO2 Stop [PROG, Off, On (Abs)]
ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO2isstopped
orrunning.
(Stoponpage 118)
CmnLFO Spd (Common LFO Speed) [99...+99 (Rel)]
ThisscalestheCommonLFOsfrequency.
OSC1
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsforoscillator1.
Play/Mute [Play, Mute]
SetsthePlay/Muteofoscillators1.
Play:Oscillator1willsound.
Mute:Oscillator1willbemuted(silent).
Toswitchanoscillatorsplay/mutestatus,pressthefront
panelPLAY/MUTEbuttontoturniton(theLEDattheleft
ofthebuttonwilllightup),andthenusethefunction01
buttontocontroltheplay/mutestatus.
Volume [000...127]
AdjuststhevolumeofOscillator1.
Tune [1200...+1200]
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromtheOscil
latorsTunesetting.(Tuneonpage 94)
Transpose [60...+60]
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromtheOscil
latorsTransposesetting.(Transposeonpage 94)
PtchSlope (Pitch Slope) [1.0...+2.0]
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
Pitch Slope, pitch, and note
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescausethepitchto
fallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthekey
boardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasifyoure
alwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecialeffects
sounds,forinstance.
Pitch JS+X [60...+12]
Thisspecifiesinsemitoneshowmuchthepitchwillchange
whenthejoystickismovedtotheright(orwhenapitch
bendmessageisreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthisto
apositivevalue.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseoneoctaveabovethe
originalpitch.
Pitch JSX [60...+12]
Thisspecifiesinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhen
thejoystickismovedtotheleft(orwhenapitchbendmes
sageisreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoanega
tivevalue.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfiveoctavesbelowthe
originalpitch.Youcanusethistocreateguitarstyledown
wardswoops.
Portamento (Portamento Enable) [Off, On]
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetweennotes,
insteadofchangingabruptly.
On:TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitchglidessmoothly
betweennotes.
Off:TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthedefaultstate.
PortaFingr (Portamento Fingered) [Off, On]
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamentothrough
yourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playinglegatowill
turnonPortamento,andplayingdetachedwillturnitoff
again.
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
On:TurnsonFingeredPortamento.
Off:TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.
PortaMode (Portamento Mode) [Rate, Time]
RatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglideagivendistanceinpitchfor
instance,onesecondperoctave.Putanotherway,gliding
severaloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthanglidingahalf
step.
TimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystakethesame
amountoftimetoglidefromonenotetoanother,regardless
ofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisisespeciallyusefulwhen
playingchords,sinceitensuresthateachnoteinthechord
willenditsglideatthesametime.
PortaTime (Portamento Time) [000...127]
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmeanlon
gertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.
ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnableis
turnedon.
Assigning portamento on/off to an assignable
pedal switch
Hereshowtoassigntheportamentoon/offfunctiontoa
pedalswitchconnectedtothemicroSTATIONsAssignable
PEDAL/SWjack.(Sw(FootSwitchfunction)on
page 65)
Adjustthesettingsasfollows.
1. AccesstheGLOBAL/MEDIA:ControllersPEDAL/SW
page.
2. SetTypetoSwitch,andSWtoPorta.SW.
Pitch
Note on keyboard
2oct
1oct
1oct
C4 C5
+2
+1
0
1
Program mode
8
Nowyoucanusethepedalswitchtoturnportamento
on/off.Whenyoudoso,MIDIcontrolchange(CC)#65
willbetransmitted.
CC#65canbereceivedtoturnportamentoon/off.
LFO1 [Triangle...Rnd6(Cnt)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFO1waveform.
SeeLFOwaveformonpage 8.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,butafew
willbenefitfrommoredetails:
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeisspecif
icallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformispositiveonly,
sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonlybendup,andnot
down.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyatfixed
intervalsoftime.
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthetiming.
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandomtim
ing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold;thetim
ingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsofRan
dom13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanusethemto
createmoregentlerandomvariations.
LFO2 [Triangle...Rnd6(Cnt)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFO2waveform,asshowninthe
graphicbelow
LFOwaveformbelow
FltLFO1toA (Filter LFO1 Intensity to A) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoffmod
ulationfromLFO1.
LFO modulation of Filter Cutoff
FltLFO1toB (Filter LFO1 Intensity to B) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoffmod
ulationfromLFO1.
FltLFO2toA (Filter LFO 2 Intensity to A) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoffmod
ulationfromLFO2.
FltLFO1toA(FilterLFO1IntensitytoA)onpage 8
FltLFO2toB (Filter LFO2 Intensity to B) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoffmod
ulationfromLFO2.
AmpLFO1Int (Amp LFO1 Intensity) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmpmodulationfrom
LFO1.Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
AmpLFO2Int (Amp LFO2 Intensity) [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmpmodulation
fromLFO2.Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseofthe
LFO.
P.LFO1 AMS Int (Pitch LFO1 AMS Intensity)
[12.00...+12.00]
Thisspecifiesthedepthanddirectionofthepitchmodula
tionproducedbyAMS(LFO1).
Withasettingof0,modulationwillnotbeapplied.Witha
settingof12.00,theAMS(LFO1)willapplyamaximumof
+/1octaveofpitchmodulation.
P.LFO2 AMS Int (Pitch LFO2 AMS Intensity)
[12.00...+12.00]
ThisissimilartoPitchLFO1AMSIntensity,above.
OSC2
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsforoscillator2.Theseset
tingsareavailableonlyforaprogramthatusestwooscilla
tors;theycannotbeeditedotherwise.
Theparametersarethesameasforoscillator1.
OSC1onpage 7
Audition Riff
Whenyouselectapreloadprogram,apreviouslyspecified
auditionriff(phrase)appropriateforthatsoundcanplay.
ThisiscalledtheAuditionfunction.
IfyoupresstheAUDITIONbuttontoturniton(theLEDat
theleftofthebuttonwilllightup),theauditionriffwill
playrepeatedly.
Hereshowtoselecttheauditionriffandtransposeit.
Audition Riff [000: Off...383: name]
Thisselectstheauditionriff.ThemicroSTATIONcontains
383auditionriffsthataresuitableforawiderangeofinstru
mentalsoundsandmusicalstyles.
Ifyouchoose000:Off,noriffwillplay.
Transpose [-24...+24]
Thistransposesthepitchoftheauditionriffinsemitone
steps.
Youcantchangetheplaybacktempooftheaudition
riff.Norcanyousetthearpeggiatortempowhilethe
auditionriffisplaying.
Thearpeggiatorwillbeoffwhiletheauditionriffis
playing.
Square
Sine
Saw
Triangle Step Tri4
(Step Triangle4)
Step Saw6
Step Saw4
Step Tri6
(Step Triangle6)
ExpSawDwn
(Exponential
Saw Down)
ExpTri
(Exponential
Triangle)
Guitar
ExpSawUp
(Exponential
Saw Up)
Rnd1(S/H)
(Random1
-S/H)
Rnd2(S/H)
(Random2
-S/H)
Rnd3(S/H)
(Random3
-S/H)
Rnd4(Cnt)
(Random4
-Continuous)
Rnd6(Cnt)
(Random6
-Continuous)
Rnd5(Cnt)
(Random5
-Continuous)
LFO waveform
Low setting High setting
Knob Assign (Realtime Control Knob B Assign)
9
Knob Assign (Realtime
Control Knob B Assign)
Hereyoucanselectthefunctionsthatareassignedtoknobs
14whenRealtimeControlBmodeisselected.
Knob1B [Off...MIDI CC#95, CC#102...119]
Hereyoucanselectthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whenRealtimeCon
trolBmodeisselected.
WhentheRealTimeControlissettoBmode,thefourknobs
ontherightfunctionasRealtimeknobs14.
Thesecanperformanumberofdifferentfunctions,suchas
modulatingsoundsoreffects,adjustingeffectssendlevels,
andsoon.
Thedefaultassignmentsforknobs14areKnobMod.1
(CC#17),KnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobMod.3(CC#20),and
KnobMod.4(CC#21),respectively.
SeeRealtimeControlKnob14Assignonpage 294.)
Tempo
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,whichappliesto
thearpeggiator,temposyncedLFOs,andtemposynced
effects.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifythetempo.
IfRealtimeControlCmodeisselected,youcanuseknob4
toadjustthetempo.
EXTisdisplayediftheGlobal/MediamodeClockissetto
Ext.MIDIorExt.USB.ThisisalsoshowniftheClockset
tingisAutoandMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfroman
externaldevice.IfthetemposourceisEXT,thearpeggiator,
LFO,andeffectswillsynchronizetoMIDIclockdatafrom
anexternalMIDIdevice.
ARP Setup
Hereyoucanspecifythearpeggiatorsettingsusedbythe
program.
Whenswitchingprograms,youhavetheoptionofhaving
thesearpeggiosettingsautomaticallyswitchtothesettings
storedinthatprogram.(LoadARP:onpage 59)
UsetheARPON/OFFbuttontoswitchthearpeggioon/off.
Whenon,theLEDtoleftofthebuttonwilllightup.
ThestatesoftheARPON/OFFbutton,ARPLATCHbutton,
andtheRealtimeControlCmodeARPGATEknob,ARP
VELOCITYknob,ARPSWINGknob,andTEMPOknobcan
besavedineachprogram.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,orrecordnotedatageneratedbythearpeg
giatorontoanexternalsequencer.(p.201)
Pattern [P0: UP...P4: RANDOM, 000...639: name]
Selectsthearpeggiopattern.
Note:000...639arerewritable.
Note:Youcanselectarpeggiopatterns000511byturning
ontheNUMLOCKkeyandusingthe01(1)10(0)buttons
and14(ENTER)buttontoselectthedesiredpattern.
Example: Preset pattern
Thewayinwhichthepatternisplayedwilldependonsettings
suchasOctaveandSort.P0...P4inthefollowingdiagrams
showhowthearpeggiowillbeplayedwhenOctaveissetto
1,andSortischecked.P4:RANDOMisonlyonepossibility.
P0:UP
P1:DOWN
P2:ALT1
P3:ALT2
P4:RANDOM
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Specifiesthenumberofoctavesinwhichthearpeggiowill
beplayed.
Preset/User No Contents
P0:UP...P4:RANDOM Presetarpeggiopatterns
000...511 Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
512...639 Userarpeggiopatterns
UP
DOWN
ALT1
ALT2
RANDOM
Octave: 4
UP
Program mode
10
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , ]
Specifiesthetimingresolutionofthearpeggio.Thenotesofthe
arpeggiowillbeplayedattheintervalyouspecify:, ,, ,, ,,
, , ,or,.Thespeedofthearpeggiopatternisdeterminedby
Gate[%] [000...100, Step]
Specifiesthelength(gatetime)ofeachnoteinthearpeggio.
000...100(%):Eachnotewillbeplayedwiththespecified
gatetime.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenauserarpeggiopattern
000...639isselectedforPattern.Whenthisisselected,the
gatetimespecifiedforeachstepwillbeused.
InRealtimeControlCmode,youcanalsousetheknob1
(ARPGATE)tocontrolthis.Turningtheknobtowardthe
leftshortensthegatetime,andturningittowardtheright
lengthensthegatetime.Whentheknobisinthe12oclock
position,thegatetimewillbeasspecifiedhere.
Velocity [001...127, Key, Step]
Specifiesthevelocityofthenotesinthearpeggio.
001...127:Eachnotewillsoundwiththespecifiedvelocity
value.
Key:Eachnotewillsoundwiththevelocityvalueatwhich
itwasactuallyplayed.
Step:Thisisavailablewhenanuserarpeggiopattern
000...639isselectedforPattern.Whenthisisselected,the
velocityspecifiedforeachstepwillbeused.
InRealtimeControlCmode,youcanalsousetheknob2
(ARPVELOCITY)tocontrolthis.Turningtheknobtoward
theleftwilldecreasethevelocity,androtatingittowardthe
rightwillincreasethevelocity.Whentheknobisatthe12
oclockposition,thevelocitywillbeasspecifiedhere.
Whenapreloaduserarpeggiopatternisselected,settingthe
Gate[%]orVelocitytoStepwilladdasenseofgroove
tothearpeggiopattern.
Swing[%] [100...+100]
Thisparametershiftsthetimingoftheoddnumberednotes
ofthearpeggio.
InRealtimeControlCmode,youcanalsouseknob3(ARP
SWING)tocontrolthis.
Sort [Off, On]
Thisspecifiestheorderinwhichthenotesyoupresswillbe
arpeggiated.
On:Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderoftheirpitch,
regardlessoftheorderinwhichyoupressedthem.
Off:Noteswillbearpeggiatedintheorderinwhichyou
pressedthem.
Latch [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornotthearpeggiowillcontinueplaying
afteryoutakeyourhandoffofthekeyboard.
On:Thearpeggiowillcontinueplayingafteryouremove
yourhandfromthekeyboard.
Off:Thearpeggiowillstopwhenyouremoveyourhand
fromthekeyboard.
YoucanalsousethefrontpanelARPLATCHbuttontocon
trolthisparameter.
KeySync [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherthearpeggiopatternwillbeginwhenyou
pressakey,orwhetheritwillalwaysfollowthe,
(Tempo).
On:Thearpeggiopatternwillstartplayingfromthebegin
ningwhenanoteonoccursfromaconditionwherenokeys
arepressed.Thissettingissuitablewhenyouareplayingin
realtimeandwantthearpeggiotoplayfromthebeginning
ofthemeasure.
Off:Thearpeggiopatternwillalwaysplayaccordingtothe
,(Tempo).
Keyboard [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherthenotesyouplayonthekeyboard
willbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingsoundedas
partofthearpeggio.
On:Thenotesyouplaywillbesoundedontheirown,in
additiontobeingsoundedaspartofthearpeggio.For
exampleifyousimultaneouslypresstwoormorenotes,
theywillbesoundedasusualinadditiontobeingplayedas
arpeggiatednotes.
Off:Onlythearpeggiatednoteswillbeheard.
Note:YoucanusethecommandCopyArpeggiatortocopy
arpeggiatorsettingsfromanotherprogramorcombination.
(CopyArpeggioonpage 14)
Top Key [C1...G9]
BottomKey [C1...G9]
Theseparametersspecifytherangeofnotes(keys)for
whichthearpeggiatorwillfunction.TopKeyistheupper
limit,andBottomKeyisthelowerlimit.
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaykeyswithinthe
specifiedrange.Keysoutsideofthisrangecanbeplayedin
thenormalmanner,andwillnotbeaffectedbythearpeggi
atoron/off.
ForexampleifyousetPatterntoP0:UP,Latchon,setTop
KeytoB3,andBottomKeytoC1,playinganoteB3or
lowerwilltriggerthearpeggiator.SinceLatchison,the
arpeggiowillcontinueevenafteryoureleasethekeys.You
canusetheC4andhigherkeystoplayconventionallyalong
withthearpeggiosoundedbytheB3andlowerkeys.To
changethearpeggio,playkeysintherangeofB3andbelow.
Top Vel [001...127]
Bottom Vel [001...127]
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesforwhichthearpeggiator
willfunction.TopVelistheupperlimit,andBottomVel
isthelowerlimit.
Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Swing
50 25 +25 +50
When Resolution =
ON, UP
Sort
OFF, UP
Sort
Playing B3 and lower
keys will trigger
arpeggio pattern
P0: UP
You can use C4 and higher keys
to perform along with the
arpeggio pattern.P
UP
FX Routing
11
Thearpeggiatorwilloperatewhenyouplaynoteswitha
velocity(playingstrength)thatiswithinthespecifiedrange.
Notesplayedwithavelocityoutsidethisrangewillbe
soundednormally,withoutregardtothearpeggiatoron/off.
Note:Notenumberandvelocitycanalsobeenteredby
holdingdowntheKEYbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
FX Routing
Hereyoucanspecifyhowtheeffectswillberouted.This
consistsmainlyofthefollowingsettings.
Inputanoscillatorsoutputtoaninserteffect.
InputanoscillatorsoutputtotheFXcontrolbus.
Inputanoscillatorsoutputtothemastereffect.
Use Dkit Set [Off, On]
Thissettingisshowniftheprogramsoscillatorusesadrum
kit.Iftheoscillatorusesamultisample,thissettingis
ignored.
On:TheFXroutingsettingsforeachkeywillbeasspecified
bythedrumkitusedbytheprogramsoscillator.Choosethe
Onsettingifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttoindividual
druminstruments.
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstruments
havethesameBussettingsaccordingtotheirtype,asfol
lows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Off:TheBus,FXCtrlBus,OSC1Send,OSC1Send2
settingswillbeused.Alldruminstrumentswillbesentto
thespecifiedbus.
Bus (Bus Select) [L/R, IFX1...IFX5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2.
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus.Normally
youwillchooseL/R.
IFX1IFX5:OutputtotheIFX15busses.
Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15busses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthepro
gramoscillatoroutputtobeconnectedinseriestoamaster
effect.UseOSC1Send1andOSC1Send2tospecifythe
sendlevels.
FXCtrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2]
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControlbus
(twochannelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
tocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.YoucanusetwoFX
Controlbusses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuson
page 207.
OSC1 Send1 [000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofoscillator
1willbesenttomastereffect1.Thisappliesonlywhen
BusissettoL/RorOff.
IfBusissettoIFX1IFX5,thesendlevelstomastereffects
1and2aresetbySend1andSend2afterpassing
throughIFX15.
OSC1 Send2 [000...127]
1willbesenttomastereffect2.(OSC1Send1)
OSC2 Send1 [000...127]
OSC2 Send2 [000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofOSC2
willbesenttomastereffects1and2.Theseparameterswill
bevalidwhenprogramusedtwooscillatorsandBusisset
toL/RorOff.
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91con
trolstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledontheglobal
MIDIChannelp.60.Theactualsendlevelisdeter
minedbymultiplyingthesevalueswiththesendlevels
ofeachoscillator.
IFX1, IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsfortheinserteffects.Thesecon
sistmainlyofthefollowing.
Selecttheeffecttypeforeachinserteffect15,andsetthe
effectparameters.
Turneachinserteffect15on/off.
Specifyhowtheinserteffectsareconnected,andadjust
mixersettingsforthesignalsthathavepassedthrough
theinserteffects.
Fortheinserteffects,thedirect(Dry)soundwillalwaysbe
stereoinput/output.Theinput/outputstructureoftheeffect
(Wet)soundwilldependonthetypeofeffect(p.208).
IFX1
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffect1.
IFX Select [S00...S63, D00...D10]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect1.
S00S63aresinglesizeandD00D10aredoublesizeeffects.
Ifyouuseadoublesizeeffect,thenextinserteffectwill
beunavailable.Forexampleifyouselectadoublesize
effectforIFX1,youwontbeabletouseIFX2.
IFX Parameters
Hereyoucansettheparametersfortheeffectthatsselected
byIFXSelect.Fordetailsontheeffectparameters,please
refertoEffectGuide(p.217).
PrincipaleffectparameterscanbeeditedfromthemicroS
TATIONitself.Toeditallparameters,youllneedtousethe
editor.
On/Off [Off, On]
Switchestheinserteffecton/off.
Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtotheoutput.
(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresnodifference
betweenOnandOff.)
Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC#92
(ontheglobalMIDIChannelp.60)toturnallinsert
effectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1
127restoretheoriginalsetting.
Chain [Off, On]
Thisconnectsinserteffectsinseries.
IfChainisOn,thisinserteffectwillbeconnectedinseries
withtheinserteffectselectedbyChainTo.
WiththeOnsetting,theupperlineofthedisplayshowsthe
inserteffectconnectionstatus.
Screen when insert effects 15 are all connected
Program mode
12
Example: IFX1ChainTo:IFX2
IFX1Chain:On
Inserteffects1and2willbeconnectedinseries.IfBusis
settoIFX1,theoscillatorsoutputwillbesentinseries
throughIFX1IFX2.Youcanconnectuptofiveinsert
effects(IFX1IFX5)inseries.Inthiscase,thePan(CC#8),
Bus,FxCtrlBus,Send1,andSend2settingsfollow
ingthelastinserteffectwillbeused.
ChainTo [IFX2...IFX5]
Thisselectstheconnectiondestinationinserteffect.
Ifyouveselectedadoublesizeeffect,youmustuse
cautionwhenspecifyingtheconnectiondestination.
ForexampleifyouvechainedIFX1IFX2,theconnec
tionwillbecancelledifyouselectadoublesizeeffect
forIFX1.UseChainTotospecifyaconnectionto
thefollowingeffect.
Pan (CC#8) (Post IFX PanCC#8)
[L000...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
Bus (Bus Select) [Off, L/R]
Specifiesthebuswherethesignalwillbesentimmediately
aftertheinserteffect.
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,whichpasses
throughTFXandthengoestotheOUTPUTL/Routputs.
Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheL/Routputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto:
UseSend1or2toroutethesignalentirelythroughthemas
tereffects,withoutsendingthedrysignaltotheoutputs.
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoaneffectsside
chain,suchasagateorvocoder,withoutbeingheard
directlyattheoutputs.
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControlbusses.
page 207.
IfyoureusingCtrl(FXControlBus)asaninputsig
nalfordoublesizeeffectD9:Vocoderetc.,afeedback
loopwilloccurifyououtputtothesamebusasspeci
fiedhere,andoscillationwilloccur.Setthiswithcareto
avoidcreatingaloop.
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalissentto
mastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBusissettoL/Ror
Off.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(p.60)isusedfor
thesemessages.
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects2,3,
and4.
IFX Select [S00...S61, D00...D09]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect.
IFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.
SeeOn/Offonpage 11.
Inserteffect2canbeconnectedtoIFX3IFX5.
Inserteffect4doesnotprovideaChainTosetting.Itcan
beconnectedonlytoinserteffect5.
SeeChainToonpage 12.
Chain [Off, On]
[L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFX1onpage 11.
IFX5
Youcantconnectfrominserteffect5toanotherinsert
effect.
IFX Select [S00...S61]
IFX5cannotusedoublesizeeffects(154170).
IFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
SeeOn/Offonpage 11.
[L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFX1onpage 11.
MFX1, MFX2
13
MFX1, MFX2
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsforthemastereffects.These
consistmainlyofthefollowing.
Selecttheeffecttypeforeachmastereffect,andsetthe
effectparameters.
Turneachmastereffecton/off.
Specifyhowthemastereffectsareconnected,andspecify
thelevelatwhichthesignalfromtheeffectsarereturned
totheL/Rbus.
Themastereffectsdonotoutputdirect(Dry)sound.The
returnlevelsReturn1andReturn2returntheeffect
(Wet)soundtotheL/RbusandmixthesignalintotheL/R
bus.
Althoughthemastereffectinput/outputsarestereoin/ste
reoout,buttheoutputmaybemonauraldependingonthe
typeofeffectthatisselected.(In/Outonpage 208)
MFX1
MFX Select [S00...S87, D00...D13]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.
IfyouchooseS00:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemaster
effectwillbemuted.
MFX Parameters
byMFXSelect.
Fordetailsontheeffectparameters,pleaserefertoEffect
Guide(p.217).
On/Off [Off, On]
Switchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,theoutput
willbemuted.
Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanusecontrol
change#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.Avalueof
0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restoretheorigi
nalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDI
Channel(p.60)isusedforthismessage.
Return 1 [000...127]
Thisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffecttothe
L/Rbus(afterwhichitpassesthroughTFX,andissentfrom
OUTPUTL/MONOandR).
Chain [Off, On]
On:Mastereffects1and2willbeconnectedinseries,inthe
orderofmastereffect1mastereffect2.
ChainLevel [000...127]
WhenChainOn/OffisOn,thisspecifiesthelevelofthe
signalsentfrommastereffect1tomastereffect2.
Ifyoureusingadoublesizeeffect,theChainsettings
willbeunavailable.
MFX2
MFX Select [000...120]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect2.
Formastereffect2,only000120singlesizeeffectscanbe
selected.
MFX2cannotusedoublesizeeffects.Additionally,if
youselectadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,youwontbe
abletouseMFX2.
IfyouchooseS00:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemaster
effectwillbemuted.
MFX Parameters
byMFXSelect.Fordetailsontheeffectparameters,please
On/Off [Off, On]
willbemuted.
Return 2 [000...127]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformastereffect2,
itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrommastereffect2to
theL/Rbus.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeReturn1.
TFX
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsforthetotaleffect,whichis
locatedatthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.Theseconsist
mainlyofthefollowing.
Selecttheeffecttypeforthetotaleffect,andsettheeffect
parameters.
Turnthetotaleffecton/off.
Forthetotaleffect,thedirect(Dry)soundwillalwaysbeste
reoin/stereoout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effect(Wet)soundwilldependontheeffecttype.
Althoughthetotaleffectsinput/outputisstereoin/stereo
out,theoutputmaybemonauraldependingonthetypeof
effectthatisselected.(In/Outonpage 208)
Afterthesignalhaspassedthroughthetotaleffect,itisout
putfromOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
TFX
TFX Select [S00...S61]
Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect.
TFXcannotusedoublesizeeffects.
TFX Parameters
byTFXSelect.
Guide(p.217).
On/Off [Off, On]
Thisturnstotaleffecton/off.Ifthisisoff,theinputwillbe
passeddirectlythrough.
Alternatively,youcansendcontrolchange#95toturn
thetotaleffectoff.Avalueof0turnsthetotaleffectoff,
andvaluesof1127restoretheoriginalsetting.The
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel
(p.60)isusedforthismessage.
Master Vol
Master Vol (Master Volume) [000...127]
Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthathas
passedthroughtotaleffect,andoutputfromOUTPUTL/
MONOandR.
Program mode
14
Command
Thesecommandsallowyoutodothingssuchascopying
arpeggiatororeffectsettings.Specifythecopysourceand
copydestination,gettheOK?prompt,andthenpressthe
buttontobegin.
Forcopyrelatedcommands,pleasenotethefollowing
pointswhenusingFromandSrctospecifythecopy
source.
IfyouspecifyProgramorCombiinFrom,theSrc
fieldwillshowabanknumbersuchasA000.This
indicationmatchesthebanknumbershownintheupper
rightofthedisplaywhenyouturnNUMLOCKonin
PROGPLAYorCOMBIPLAYandpressthefunction14
(ENTER)button.
IfyouspecifySonginFrom,theSrcfieldwillshowa
songnumber.Inthiscase,youcanchooseonlysong
numbersthatareloadedintothemicroSTATIONorthat
youcreatedonthemicroSTATION.
Copy Arpeggio
Thiscommandcopiesarpeggiosettings.
From [Program, Combi, Song]
Selectthecopysourcemode.
Src (Source) [A000: name...,
000: name...]
Selectthecopysource.
Srcs [A, B, A&B]
Ifyouselectacombinationorsongasthecopysource,this
specifieswhetheryoullbecopyingthesettingsofarpeggia
torAorB.
To [A, B]
Specifythecopydestinationarpeggiator.Thisisnotshown
ifSrcsissettoA&B.
Copy IFX
Thiscommandcopiestheinserteffectsettingsofadesired
program,combination,orsong.Thefollowingsettingswill
becopied.
Allsettingsoftheinserteffect(thecontentsoftheIFX
pageandtheeffectparameters,exceptforCtrlCh).
ThePan(CC#8),Bus,FXCtrl,Send1,and
Send2settingsthatfollowtheinserteffect.
000: name...]
Srcs [All IFXs, IFX1...IFX5]
Selecttheeffectthatyouwanttocopy.
IfyouselectAllIFXs,thesettingsofallinserteffectswillbe
copied.
To [IFX1...IFX5]
Specifythecopydestinationinserteffect.
ThisisnotshownifSrcsissettoAllIFXs.
Swap IFX
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsoftwoinserteffects.
Source1 [IFX1...IFX5]
Source2 [IFX1...IFX5]
Selectthetwoinserteffectswhosesettingswillbe
exchanged.
Copy MFX/TFX
Thiscommandcopieseffectsettingsfromaspecifiedpro
gram,combination,orsongtoamastereffectortothetotal
effect.
MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
000: name...]
Srcs [M1,2&TFX, IFX1...IFX5, MFX1, MFX2, TFX]
IfyouselectIFX1IFX5,settingswillbecopiedfromthecor
respondinginserteffect.Whencopyingfromaninsert
effect,theresultwillnotbecompletelyidenticalbecauseof
differencesintheroutingandthelevelsettings.
IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturn(returnlevel)set
tingwillalsobecopied.
To [IFX1...IFX5, MFX1, MFX2, TFX]
Specifythecopydestinationmastereffectortotaleffect.
ThisisnotshownifSrcsissettoM1,2&TFX.
Write Program
ThissavestheeditedprogramtothemicroSTATIONsmem
ory.Youcanusethistodothefollowing.
Savetheeditedcontent.
Renameaprogram.
Specifytheprogramscategory.
Copyaprogramtoadifferentbankorprogramnumber.
Besuretosaveimportantprograms.Aneditedprogram
cannotberecoveredifyouturnoffthepowerorselecta
differentprogrambeforeyouvesavedit.
Beforeyoucanwrite,youmustturnoffmemoryprotect
inGlobalmode.
Name [space, !...~]
Specifytheprogramname.Usethebuttonstoselecta
character,andusethebuttonstochangethecharacter.
Youcanenteruptotwentyfourcharacters.
Cat (Category) [KEYBOARD...USER]
Selectthecategoryfortheprogramyouresaving.
Thecategoryyouspecifyherecanbeusedwhenselecting
programsbycategoryinProgram,Combination,or
Sequencermodes.
To [A000...D127: name]
Specifythesavedestinationfortheprogram.ThemicroS
TATIONallowsyoutosave512programs.
Thesavedestinationisindicatedbybanknumber.This
banknumbermatchesthebanknumbershownintheupper
External Setup
15
rightofthedisplaywhenyouturnNUMLOCKoninPROG
PLAYandpressthefunction14(ENTER)button.Youcan
specifyA000D127;theGM2bankisnotavailableforsav
ing.
Note:ProgramsonthemicroSTATIONareinternallyman
agedbybankandnumber.Thesavedprogramwillbewrit
tentoabanknumberA000D127.
OK?
Pressthebuttontosavethedata.
Note:YoucanalsosavetheprogrambypressingtheWRITE
button.WhenyoupresstheWRITEbutton,aconfirmation
screenofOKwillappear.Whenyoudothis,theprogram
willbesavedbyoverwritingthecurrentlyselectedpro
gram.
External Setup
YoucanusethemicroSTATIONsexternalcontrolfunction
alitytocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice;presstheEXTER
NALbuttonanduseknobs14totransmitMIDIcontrol
changemessagesonthespecifiedMIDIchannel.
Setup Select [000...127: name]
Thisselectsthesetupthatwillbeusedforexternalcontrol.
Youcanchoosefrom128setups.
PreloadsetupdataisloadedwhenthemicroSTATIONis
shippedfromthefactory.Forexample,thesesetupsinclude
asetupthatletyoucontroltheKorgLegacyCollectionof
softwaresynthesizers,andasetupthatletsyoucontrol
DAWsoftware.(microSTATIONExternalSetup(PDF))
YoucanuseGlobal/Media:MIDIExternalSetuptoassign
thefunctionofeachknobinanexternalsetup(External
Setuponpage 64).
1 [MIDI Ch/MIDI CC#: Knob value]
Theseindicatetheassignmentsforknobs14intheselected
externalsetup.Fromtheleft,thesearetheMIDIchannel/
MIDIcontrolchange/currentknobvalue.Theknobvalue
canbeedited.
Program mode
16
17
Combination mode
YoulluseCombinationmodetoplaycombinations.This
modeletsyoudothefollowingthings.
Selectandplaycombinations.
Selecteachtimbresprogram,andedititsvolumeand
otherparameters.
UsetheRealtimeControlknobstocontrolthecombi
nationssoundsandarpeggiator.
Page structure in Combination mode
ThemicroSTATIONsCombinationmodeisorganizedasa
treestructurecontainingthefollowingpages.(p.18)
Fordetailsonhowtomovebetweenpages,andhowto
selectparametersandedittheirvalues,pleaserefertothe
microSTATIONOperationGuide.
COMBI PLAY
InCOMBIPLAYyoucanselectandplaycombinations.
YoucanalsousetheRealtimeControlknobstocontrolthe
combinationssoundsandarpeggiatorwhileyouperform.
TheAutoSongSetupfunctionautomaticallyconvertsthe
settingsofaprogramorcombinationintoasong,andputs
themicroSTATIONinrecordreadycondition.Thisfunc
tionseamlesslyunifiesprogramorcombinationperfor
mancewithsongproduction;ifyougetanideaforaphrase
orsongwhileplayingthearpeggiator,youcaninstantly
turnyourideaintoasong.
Combination No.&Name
[001..: combination name]
Thisindicatesthecombinationthatscurrentlyselected.
InthemicroSTATIONsCombinationmode,the256preloadcom
binationsareorganizedintothefollowingsevencategories.
Note:InCOMBIPLAYifyouturnNUMLOCKon(LEDlit)
andpressthefunction14(ENTER)button,thebankand
numberwillbeshownintherightsideofthedisplays
upperline.Forexamplewhenyouvesetthecategoryto
ALL,thisindicationletsyouviewthecombinationsbybank
numberratherthanbynumberwithinacategory.
EXTERNAL control
InCOMBIPLAY,ifyoupresstheEXTERNALbuttontoturn
ExternalControlon,andthenoperateknobs14,thedis
playwillbrieflyshowtheMIDIchannel,MIDICCnumber
andvaluethatareassignedbytheselectedexternalsetup.
ExternalsetupscanbeselectedinCOMBIEDIT:External
Setup.(ExternalSetuponpage 28)
IftheMIDICCnumberforaknobisturnedOffinthe
selectedexternalsetup,thenthevaluewillnotappear
whenyouoperatetheknob.
COMBI EDIT
HereyoucaneditthemicroSTATIONscombinationquick
parameters.Thequickparametersareparametersthatcan
beeditedfromthemicroSTATIONitself.Theseconsistof
thefollowing.
Volume,pitch,andnoterangesettingsforeachtimbre.
Adjustmentstothesoundoftheprogramusedbyeach
timbre.
MIDIfilterandcontrollersettings.
Arpeggiatorsettingsusedbythecombination.
Eachtimbresrouting,andsettingsfortheinserteffects,
mastereffects,andtotaleffect.
Ifyouwanttoeditallparametersofthecombination,youll
needtousemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditoronacon
nectedcomputer.
Timb s
(Timbre Parameters)
Herearethesettingsforthetimbresofthecombination.
Timbre 01
Program Select [001...: program name]
Selecttheprogramusedbythetimbre.
Thenumberandprogramnameareshown.Thecategoryis
shownbytheCATEGORYindicatorlocatedattheleftofthe
display.
Note:WhenthefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDislit,you
canpressafunctionbutton0116intheCOMBIPLAY
screentoaccesstheProgramSelectdisplayforthetimbre
ofthecorrespondingnumber.
Switching a timbres program
UsetheCATEGORYSELECTbuttonstoselecta
category,andthebuttonstoselectaprogram.
category,presstheNUMLOCKbutton(makingitlight)
toselectthenumlockstate,usefunctionbuttons0110
toenteraprogramnumber,andpressthe14(ENTER)
button.
TransmitaMIDIprogramchangefromaconnected
externalMIDIdevice.
SeeProgramSelectonpage 141.
Category Explanation
All
Nocategory.All383combinationscan
beselected.
001...128:A000...A127
129...256:B000...B127
257...384:C000...C127
KEYBOARD
A.Piano,SynthE.P,RealE.P,
Clav/Harpsi,E.Organ,Pipe.Organ
STRINGS/BRASS/
WOODWIND
Orchestral,World,Strings,Vocal,Airy,
Brass,Woodwind,Reed
GUITAR A.Guitar,E.Guitar,Plucked
BASS&BASS SPLIT BassSplit,Bass
SYNTH Fast,Slow,Motion,Shortdecay
LEAD&SOLO SPLIT SoloSplit,SynLead
DRUM/MALLET/
HITS
Natural,Dance,Perc,Bell,Mallet,SFX,
Hits
USER
Soundssavedasausercategory(none
infactorysettings)
Combination mode
18
Timbres
Timbre 01 ( p.17)
Program Select
Volume
Pan
Mute/Play
Solo
Bus
Drumkit IFX Patch
IFX1
IFX2
IFX3
IFX4
IFX5
FXCtrlBus
ARP Assign
Status
MIDI Ch.
OSC Mode
Portamnto
Transpose
Detune
Bend Range
Filter/Amp ( p.21)
Cutof
Resonance
Flt EG Int
AmpVel Int
Filter/Amp EG ( p.21)
Attack
Decay
Sustain
Release
Key Zone ( p.21)
Top
Top Slope
Btm Slope
Bottom
Vel Zone ( p.22)
Top
Top Slope
Btm Slope
Bottom
MIDI Filter ( p.22)
Prog Chg
Damper
JS X as AMS
JS+Y
JS-Y
Knob 1-A
Knob 2-A
Knob 3-A
Knob 4-A
Knob 1-B
Knob 2-B
Knob 3-B
Knob 4-B
FootSwitch
FootPedal
Timbre02
Same as Timbre01 parameters
Timbre16
Same as Timbre01 parameters
COMBI PLAY
Knob Assign ( p.23)
Knob 1B
Knob 2B
Knob 3B
Knob 4B
Tempo ( p.23)
Tempo
ARP ( p.23)
ARP-A Setup ( p.23)
Run
Pattern
Octave
Resolution
Gate[%]
Velocity
Swing[%]
Sort
Latch
KeySync
Keyboard
Top Key
BottomKey
Top Vel
BottomVel
ARP-B Setup
Same as ARP A paramters
IFX1 (p.25)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Chain
ChainTo
Pan(CC#8)
Bus
FX Ctrl
Send1
Send2
IFX2 (p.25)
IFX3 (p.25)
IFX4 (p.25)
IFX5 (p.25)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Pan(CC#8)
Bus
FX Ctrl
Send1
Send2
MFX1 (p.26)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Return1
Chain
Chain Level
MFX2 (p.26)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Return2
TFX (p.26)
S01: St. Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
MasterVol (p.26)
Master Vol
Command ( p.27)
Copy ARP
Copy IFX
Swap IFX
Copy MFX/TFX
Initialize
Copy Prog
Write Combi ( p.28)
External Setup (p.28)
001: External
1. Gch/#001: 000
2. Gch/#002: 000
3. Gch/#003: 000
4. Gch/#004: 000
COMBI EDIT
Timb s (Timbre Parameters) Timbre 01
19
Volume [000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbres.(Volumeon
page 142)
Tips:WhenthefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDislit,you
canpressafunctionbutton0116toviewandeditthe
parametersofthecorrespondinglynumberedtimbreinthe
display.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Thisspecifiesthepanofeachtimbre.
L001C064R127:AsettingofL001isfarleftandR127is
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducethepansettingof
theProgrammode.(Panonpage 141)
Thissettingmutesatimbre.
Play:Thetimbrewillproducesound.
Mute:Thetimbrewillbemuted(silent).
Bus (Bus Select) [DKit, L/R, IFX1...IFX5, Off]
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
IFX1IFX5:OutputtotheIFX1IFX5buses.
Off:ThetimbrewillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX1IF5buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthepro
gramoscillatoroutputofthetimbretobeconnectedin
seriestoamastereffect.UseOSC1Send1,OSC1Send2,
OSC2Send1,andOSC2Send2tospecifythesendlev
els.
DKit:Thiscanbeselectedonlyifthetimbresprogramisa
drumprogram.TheBus,FXCtrlBus,Send1,and
Send2settingsforeachkeyoftheselectedDkitwillbe
used.Selectthissettingifyouwanttoapplyanindividual
inserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
Note:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedruminstruments
havethesameBus(IFX/Output)Selectsettingsaccordingto
theirtype,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDKitPatch.
DrumKit Patch
Thisletsyoupatchthebusselectsettingforeachkeyofa
drumkit,temporarilychangingtheconnectiondestinations
totheinserteffects.
Thesesettingsareavailableiftheprogramusedbythetim
breisadrumprogramandBus(p.19)issettoDKit.
Thesesettingsareavailableifthebusselectsettingofa
drumkitissettoanyinserteffectIFX1IFX5.
Bus IFX1 [L/R, IFX1...IFX5, Off]
Chooseinserteffect15,L/R,orOffasthepatchdestination
oftheinserteffect.
Ifyouwanttoreturntothesettingsofthedrumkit,set
theseparameterstoIFX1:IFX1,IFX2:IFX2,IFX3:IFX3,IFX4:
IFX4,andIFX5:IFX5.
SendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbuseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
Controlbuses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.(FXControlBusonpage 207)
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
Foreachtimbre,theseparameterssetthesendleveltomas
tereffects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBusisset
toL/RorOff.
InthecaseofIFX1IFX5,theIFX15pagesettingsSend1
andSend2afterthesignalhaspassedthroughIFX1IFX5
willspecifythesendlevelstomastereffects1and2.
ControlchangeCC#93canbeusedtocontroltheSend
1level,andCC#91tocontroltheSend2,andmodify
theirrespectivesettings.Thesemessageswillbe
receivedontheMIDIchannel(p.20)specifiedfor
eachtimbre.
Theactualsendlevelsaredeterminedbymultiplying
thisvaluewiththesendlevelSend1andSend2(p.11)
foreachoscillatoroftheprogramselectedforthetim
bre.
ARP Assign [Off, A, B]
AssignsarpeggiatorAorBtoeachtimbres.WhentheARP
ON/OFFbuttonison,thearpeggiatorspecifiedforeachtim
brewilloperateaccordingtoArpeggiatorRunA,Band
thesesettings.
Off:Thearpeggiatorwillnotoperate.
A:ArpeggiatorAwilloperate.UsethesettingsintheArpA
Setuppagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtosetparame
ters.
B:ArpeggiatorBwilloperate.UsethesettingsintheArpB
Setuppagetoselectthearpeggiopatternandtosetparame
ters.
IftheStatus(p.20)ofthetimbreisINT,eachtimbre
116willbesoundedbythenotedatageneratedbythe
assignedarpeggiator,regardlessoftheMIDIChannel
(p.20)settingofthetimbre.
IfatimbreissettoEXTorEX2,MIDInotedatawillbe
transmittedontheMIDICh.ofthattimbre.
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorA(orB)willbetriggered
(operated)byallMIDIchannelsspecifiedfortheMIDI
Channelparameterofanytimbre116assignedto
arpeggiatorAorB.
IfLocalControl(LocalControlOn,p.61)isOFF,the
keyboardwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.Thearpeggia
torwillbetriggeredviaMIDIIN.TurnLocalControl
OFFifyouhaverecordedonlythetriggernotesonan
externalsequencer,andwishtoplaybacktheexternal
sequencertotriggerthemicroSTATIONsarpeggiator.
Ifyouwanttorecordthenotedatageneratedbythe
arpeggiatortoanexternalsequencer,turnLocalCon
trolON,andturnofftheechobackfunctiononyour
externalsequencer.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternal
sequencer,oruseanexternalsequencertorecord
arpeggionotedata.(p.311)
Example 1)
SettheMIDIChannel(p.20)oftimbres1and2toGch,
andsetStatus(p.20)toINT.AssignarpeggiatorAtotim
bre1andarpeggiatorBtotimbre2,andArpeggiatorA,B
Run(p.23)isturnon.
WhentheARPON/OFFbuttonisoff,timbres1and2
willsoundsimultaneously(layered)whenyouplaythe
keyboard.
WhentheARPON/OFFbuttonisturnedon,timbre1
willbeplayedbyarpeggiatorA,andtimbre2willbe
playedbyarpeggiatorB.
Combination mode
20
Example 2)
TheMIDIChannel(p.20)oftimbres1,2,3,4,and5areset
respectivelytoGch,Gch,02,Gch,and03.TheirStatus
(p.20)issetrespectivelytoINT,Off,INT,Off,andINT.
AssignarpeggiatorAtotimbres2and3,assignarpeggiator
Btotimbres4and5,andArpeggiatorA,BRun(p.23)is
turnon.
WhentheARPON/OFFbuttonisoff,playingthe
keyboardwillsoundonlytimbre1.(Timbres2and4are
receivingtheGch,buttheywillnotsoundsincetheir
StatusisOff.)
WhenyouturnontheARPON/OFFbutton,arpeggiator
Awillplaytimbres2and3,andarpeggiatorBwill
independentlyplaytimbres4and5.(ArpeggiatorsA
andBaretriggeredbynotedatareceivedfromanyMIDI
channelofanassignedtimbre.However,inthisexample,
theyarebeingtriggeredfromtheGch.)
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,arpeggiatorAwillplay
timbres2and3,butonlytimbre3,whoseStatusisINT
willsoundfromthekeyboard.Similarly,arpeggiatorB
willplaytimbres4and5,butonlytimbre5,whoseSta
tusisINTwillsoundfromthekeyboard.
Inthisway,youcanadjustsettingssothatatimbreis
silentwhenthearpeggiatorisoff,andsoundsonlywhen
thearpeggiatorison.
Thistypeofsettingisusedinpreloadedcombinations
whichsoundthedrumsonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.
Status [Off, INT, EXT, EX2]
ThisparametersetswhethertheTimbrecontrolstheinter
nalsounds,orexternalMIDIdevices.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTimbre.Withthissetting,the
TimbresProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbe
transmitted.
INT:Thetimbrewillsound,andwillalsosoundinresponse
toMIDImessagesfromanexternalMIDIdevice.MIDIdata
willnotbetransmitted.
EXT:Thetimbrewillnotsoundevenifitreceivesmessages
fromacontroller,butMIDIdatawillbetransmittedtoexter
naldevices.
EX2:TheBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)(settableonly
viatheeditor,p.145)LSBvalueandMSBvaluewillbe
used.InsteadoftheAg(d)banknumbersthatcanbe
selectedfromthemicroSTATIONitself,thebanknumber
specifiedforBankSelectwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
OtheraspectsarethesameasforEXT.
MIDI Ch. (MIDI Channel) [01...16, Gch]
ThisparameterallowsyoutosetstheMIDItransmit/receive
channelforeachtimbre.
Gch:Thetimbrewillusethechannelthathasbeenselected
astheglobalMIDIChannel(p.60).
WhenStatusisINT,MIDImessageswillbereceivedonthe
channelthatyouspecifyhere.Ifthissettingisthesameas
theglobalMIDIchannel,theinternaltonegeneratorwill
soundaccordingtotheinternalsettings.IfthisissettoEXT
orEX2,playingthemicroSTATIONwilltransmitMIDImes
sagesontheMIDIchannelthatsspecifiedhere.(Messages
willalsobetransmittedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDI
channel.)
Ifasetting0116matchestheglobalMIDIchannel,Gis
shownattheright.
OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, Mono, Legt]
ThisletsyouoverridetheProgramsstoredVoiceAssign
Modesettings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredVoiceMode(p.3)settings
willbeused.
Poly:Thetimbrewillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
Mono:Thetimbrewillplaymonophonically,regardlessof
theProgramssettings.
Legt(Legato):Thetimbrewillsoundmonophonically,and
willplaylegatoaccordingtotheProgramssetting.
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramssettingwill
determinethepriorityofthenotethatsoundswhenyou
playtwoormorenotes.
Portamnto (Portamento) [PRG, Off, 001...127]
Thisparameterallowsyoutoselectportamentosettingsfor
eachtimbre.(Portamentoonpage 146)
PRG:Portamentowillbeappliedasspecifiedbythepro
gramsettings.
Off:Portamentowillbeoff,eveniftheoriginalprogramset
tingsspecifiedPortamentotobeon.
001127:Portamentowillbeappliedwiththeportamento
timeyouspecifyhere,evenifitisturnedoffbytheprogram
settings.
Transpose [60...+00...+60]
Thisparameteradjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinsemitone
steps.12unitsequaloneoctave.(Transposeon
page 147)
Detune [1200...+0000...+1200]
Thisparameteradjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinonecent
units.(Detuneonpage 147)
+0000:Standardpitch.Asettingof+0100producesthesame
pitchasTranspose+01.
Bend Range [PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiesthemaximumamountofpitchchange(insemi
tones)thatwilloccurwhenthepitchbenderisused.
(BendRangeonpage 147)
PRG:Thepitchrangespecifiedbytheprogramwillbe
used.
24+24:Thissettingwillbeusedregardlessofthesetting
intheprogram.
Tone parameters
TheProgrammodetoneparametersintheFilter/Amp
throughFilter/AmpEGgroupscanbeeditedindividually
foreachtimbre.
Timbre 1 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Timbre 2 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
ARP Assign
A
B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Gch
Trigger
= Gch
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Timbre 2 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=Of
Timbre 3 MIDI Ch=2ch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
ARP Assign
A
A
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Gch, Ch2
Trigger
= Gch, Ch3
Timbre 4 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=Of B
Timbre 5 MIDI Ch=3ch Status=INT B
Of Timbre 1 MIDI Ch=Gch Status=INT
Sounded by normal
keyboard playing
Does not sound
Does not sound
MIDI IN/
USB B
INT
MIDI OUT/
USB B
EXT, EX2
Tone
generator
Timb s (Timbre Parameters) Timbre 01
21
TheseparametersareRelativeparameters.Theyapplyan
adjustmentthatisrelativetothesettingspecifiedbythe
programparameters.
Therelativeadjustmentissavedinthecombination,and
doesnotaffecttheoriginalprogram.
Someparametersinthesegroupsareinterrelatedwith
controlofcertainMIDICCmessages.Forthese,an
indicationsuchasCC#74appearsfollowingthe
parametervalue.
(AbouttheToneparametersonpage 149)
Filter/Amp
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsforthefilterandampofthe
programforeachofthetimbres.
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#71)]
bothFiltersAandB.
Filt EG Int (Filter EG Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#79)]
ItaffectsFiltersAandBsimultaneously.
99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum.Modula
tionisinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,asthe
originalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginalPrograms
EGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingthisparameterto
+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
AmpVel Int (Amp Velocity Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel)]
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99means
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positiveor
negative,astheoriginalProgram.
Filter/Amp EG
HereyoucanadjustsettingsforthefilterEGandampEGof
theprogramforeachofthetimbres.
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#73)]
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmpEGs
StartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttackTime
AMS.
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,StartLevel
willchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.(AMS(Alter
nateModulationSource)p.91)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#75)]
EGs.
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#70)]
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#72)]
Key Zone
Thesesettingsspecifythekeyboardrangeinwhichtimbres
116willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeyparametersspecifytherangeofnotesin
whichtimbres116willsound,andthetop/bottomslope
parametersspecifytherangeoverwhichtheoriginalvol
umewillbereached.
KeySplit:Bysettingtimbresofdifferentsoundstoranges
thatdonotoverlap,youcanplaydifferentsoundsindiffer
entrangesofthekeyboard.
Layer:Bysettingtherangestooverlap,youcanplaytwoor
moresoundswithasinglenote.
PositionalCrossfade:Ifyousettheslopes(thegrayedpor
tion)tooverlap,thesoundswilloverlap,andtheproportion
oftheoverlapwillchangeaccordingtothekeyboardloca
tion.
Top (Top Key) [C-1...G9]
Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbres.
Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Specifiestherangeofkeys(12isoneoctave)overwhichthe
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthetopkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplaydown
ward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctavebelow
thetopkey.
ward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesbelow
thetopkey.
Btm Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
volumewillbereachedstartingfromthebottomkey.
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
12:Thevolumewillincreasegraduallyasyouplayupward,
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethebot
tomkey.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethebot
tomkey.
Bottom (Bottom Key) [C1...G9]
Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)ofthenotesthatwill
soundeachtimbre.
TopKeyandBottomKeysettingscanalsobeinputbyhold
ingdowntheKEYbuttonandplayinganoteonthekey
board.
Bottom Key Top Key
Key
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
How volume will change according to keyboard location
Combination mode
22
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetop
keyofthesametimbre.Norisitpossibleforthetop
andbottomslopestooverlap.
Vel Zone (Velocity Zone)
SetstheTop/BottomVelocityparameterstospecifythe
rangeofvelocitiesthatwillsoundforeachtimbres,andset
theTop/BottomSlopeparameterstospecifytherangeover
whichthevolumewillchange.
Velocityswitch:Ifyousetdifferentvelocityzonesformulti
pletimbressothattheydonotsoundtogether,youcanplay
separatesoundsbyvaryingplayingdynamics.
Layer:Ifyousettwoormoretimbrestovelocityzonesthat
overlap,thesoundswillbeheardtogether.
VelocityCrossfade:Ifthesloperangesoverlap,different
soundswillbesoundedtogether,andyourplayingdynam
icswilldeterminetheproportionofeachsound.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametimbre,norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
Top (Top Velocity) [001...127]
Specifiesthemaximumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
Top Slope [000...120]
Specifiesthenumberofvelocitystepsoverwhichtheorigi
nalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheTopVelocity.
000:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
120:Thevolumewilldecreaseasthevelocityapproaches
thetopvelocity.
Btm Slope [000...120]
nalvolumewillbereached,startingfromtheBottomVeloc
ity.
000:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebot
tomvelocity.
thebottomvelocity.
Bottom (Bottom Velocity) [001...127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.
TopVelocityandBottomVelocitysettingscanalsobeinput
byholdingdowntheKEYbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
MIDI Filter
ThesesettingsallowyoutoapplyfilterstotheMIDIdata
thatwillbetransmittedandreceivedbyeachtimbres.For
exampleeveniftwotimbresarebeingplayedbythesame
MIDIchannel,youcanadjustthesettingssothatthe
damperpedalwillapplytoonebutnottheother.
On:Transmissionandreceptionorreception(AfterTouch)
ofMIDIdataisenabled.
IfStatus(p.20)issettoINT,effectsthatpertaintothis
settingisthatareturnedOnwillapplytothetimbrespro
gramwhenyouusethemicroSTATIONscontrollersor
whenMIDIdataisreceived.(TheEffectDynamicModula
tionfunctionisnotaffectedbythesesettings.)
WiththeEXTorEX2setting,thecorrespondingMIDIdata
willbetransmittedonthechannelofthattimbrewhenyou
usethemicroSTATIONscontrollers.MIDItransmit/receive
settingsfortheentiremicroSTATIONaremadeinGlobal/
MediamodeMIDIFilter(p.63).
MIDIfilteringforcontrollerswhosefunctionisuserassign
able(thefootswitchorfootpedal)willapplyifthatMIDI
controlchangeisassignedtothecontroller.Ifyouassignthe
samecontrolchangeasthedamperorjoystick,thedamper
orjoysticksettingwilltakepriority.Ifthesamecontrol
changeisassignedtomorethanonecontroller,turningOn
justoneofthemwillenablethatcontrolchange.
Off:TransmissionandreceptionofMIDIdataisdisabled.
Note:MIDICC#=MIDIcontrolchangemessagenumbers.
Prog Chg (Program Change) [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIprogramchangemessages
willbetransmittedandreceived.
Damper [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#64hold(damperpedal)
messageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
JS X as AMS [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIpitchbendmessages(theX
axisofthejoystick)willbereceivedtocontroltheAMS
effectassignedtoJSX.(ThisisnotafilterforMIDIpitch
bendmessagereception.)
JS+Y [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthejoystick,or
arealtimecontrolknobassignsetting)willbetransmitted
andreceived.
JSY [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthejoystick,or
andreceived.
Knob 1A [Off, On]
Knob 2A [Off, On]
Knob 3A [Off, On]
Knob 4A [Off, On]
Thesesettingsenableordisabletransmissionandreception
oftheMIDImessagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtime
ControlAmodeisselected.
Knob 1B [Off, On]
Knob 2B [Off, On]
Knob 3B [Off, On]
Knob 4B [Off, On]
oftheMIDImessagesassignedtoknobs14whenRealtime
ControlBmodeisselected.
Bottom Velocity Top Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Knob Assign Timbre 02....16
23
Foot Switch [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheassignableswitch
willbetransmittedandreceived.Thefunctionisassignedin
GLOBAL/MEDIA:ControllersPEDAL/SW.Thisfilterset
tingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeisassigned.
Foot Pedal [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheassignablepedal
GLOBAL/MEDIA:ControllersPEDAL/SW.Thisfilterset
tingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeisassigned.
Timbre 02....16
ThesearetheMIDIFiltersettingsfortimbres216.Theyare
thesameasfortimbre1.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTimbre01above.
Knob Assign
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whentheREALTIME
CONTROLSELECTbuttonhasselectedBmode.
Knob 1B [Off...MIDI CC#119]
Thefunctionsyouassignhereareactivewhenyouusethe
REALTIMECONTROLSELECTbuttontoselectBmode,
andoperateknobs14.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRealtimeControlKnob1
4Assignonpage 294.
Tempo
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentCombination,which
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandeffects,arpeggiator,and
temposyncedeffects.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifythetempo.
IfRealtimeControlCmodeisselected,youcanuseknob4
toadjustthetempo.
IfClock(MIDIClockp.62)issettoExt.MIDIor
Ext.USB,EXTisshown.ThisisalsoshownifClockis
AutoandMIDIclockdataisbeingreceivedfromanexter
naldevice.IftempoisEXT,arpeggiator,LFO,andeffects
willsynchronizetoMIDIclockdatafromanexternalMIDI
device.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeClock(MIDIClock
Source)onpage 62.
ARP (Arpeggiator)
Theseparametersspecifyhowthearpeggiatorwillfunction
withinthecombination.
Twoarpeggiatorscanrunsimultaneously.
Youcantakeadvantageofawiderangeofpossibilities;for
example,separatearpeggiopatternscanbeappliedtotwo
keysplitsounds,ortwodifferentarpeggiopatternscanbe
switchedusingvelocity.
YoucanalsousetheRealtimecontrolCmodeARPGATE
knob,ARPVELOCITYknob,ARPSWINGknob,and
TEMPOknobtocontrolthearpeggiatorinrealtime.
Tosavetheeditsyoumake,useWriteCombination.
ARP-A Setup
Run [Off, On]
ThisturnsarpeggiatorAon/off.
IfthisparameterisOn,andyoupresstheARPON/OFFbut
tontoturnitonandthenplaythekeyboard,arpeggiatorA
willoperateandwillsoundthetimbrethatsassignedbythe
ArpAssignsetting.
Pattern [P0...P4, 000...639: name]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Resolution [, , , , , , ]
Gate[%] [000...100, Step]
Swing[%] [100...+100]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Top Key [C1...G9]
BottomKey [C1...G9]
Top Vel (Top Velocity) [001...127]
Bottom Vel (Bottom Velocity) [001...127]
Theseparametersarethearpeggiatorsettingsforthecombi
nation.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeARPSetuponpage 9.
ARP-B Setup
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsfortheotherarpeggiator
(arpeggiatorB).Theparametersarethesameasforarpeggi
atorA(ARPA).
Arpeggiator settings in Combination and
Sequencer modes
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusetwo
arpeggiopatternssimultaneously,thankstothemicroSTA
TIONsdualarpeggiatorfunctionality.Thesettingsineach
ofthesemodesaremadeinasimilarway.
Thefollowingexampleshowshowtoadjustsettingsin
Combinationmode.
Thedualarpeggiatorfunctionalityletsyoudothefollow
ingthings.
Assignanarpeggiatorforeachtimbre.ChoosefromOff,
(arpeggiator)A,or(arpeggiator)B.
IndependentlyspecifywhetherAandBwilloperate.
Combination mode
24
Selectanarpeggiopatternandsetparametersindepen
dentlyforAandB.
AdjustScanZonepagesettingssothatyoucanuse
keyboardrangeorplayingvelocitytoswitchbetween
normalplayingandarpeggiatedplaying,ortoswitch
betweenarpeggiatorsAandB.
Adjustsettingsfortimbresthatwillbesilentwhenthe
arpeggiatorisOff,andwillsoundonlywhenthearpeg
giatorisOn.
Arpeggiator on/off
EachtimeyoupresstheARPON/OFFbutton,thearpeggia
torwillbeswitchedonoroff/.Theselectedarpeggiopattern
willbeginwhenyouplaythekeyboard.Theon/offsettingis
savedwhenthecombinationiswrittenintomemory.
IfARPAssignisOfforRunisoff,thearpeggiator
willnotoperateevenifthiskeyison.
Arpeggiator settings
1. UsetheCOMBIEDIT:TimbresTimbre0104parameter
ProgramSelecttoselectaprogramforeachtimbre.For
ourexamplehere,assignanydesiredprogramtotimbres
14.
2. SetStatustoINTfortimbres14,andsetthisOfffor
timbres516.SetMIDICh.toGchfortimbres14.
3. SetARPAssigntoassignthearpeggiatorstothe
timbres.
AssignarpeggiatorAtotimbres1and2,andassign
arpeggiatorBtotimbre3.
4. InCOMBIEDIT:ARPARPASetupandARPBSetup,
turnRunOn.
WhenyouturntheARPON/OFFbuttonon,arpeggia
torsAandBwillrun.
WhentheARPON/OFFbuttonison,timbres1and2
willbesoundedbyarpeggiatorA,andtimbre3willbe
soundedbyarpeggiatorB.
WhentheARPON/OFFbuttonisoff,playingthekey
boardwillsoundtimbres14asalayer.
5. InCOMBIEDIT:ARPARPASetupandARPBSetup,
edittheparametersofarpeggiatorsAandB.
TheavailableparametersforAandBarethesameasina
program(p.9).
6. InARPASetupandARPBSetup,theTopKeyand
BottomKeyparametersletyouspecifytheregionin
whicharpeggiatorsAandBwilloperate.
Supposeyouvemadethefollowingsettings:
ArpeggiatorATopKey=G9,BottomKey=C4
ArpeggiatorBTopKey=B3,BottomKey=C1
Withthesesettings,arpeggiatorAwilloperatewhenyou
playkeysC4orhigher,andarpeggiatorBwilloperate
whenyouplaykeysB3orlower.
7. IntheARPAandARPBpages,theTopVeland
BottomVelparametersletyouspecifytherangeof
velocitiesforwhicharpeggiatorsAandBwilloperate.
Supposeyouvemadethefollowingsettings:
ArpeggiatorATopVel=127,BottomVel=064
ArpeggiatorBTopVel=063,BottomVel=000
Withthesesettings,arpeggiatorAwilloperatewhenyou
playstrongly,andarpeggiatorBwilloperatewhenyou
playsoftly.
Inthisway,youcanswitchbetweenarpeggiatorsby
specifyingtherangeofkeysorvelocities,allowingyouto
createanevenbroaderrangeofvariation.
8. Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedcombinationtointernal
memory,disablethememoryprotectsettinginGlobal/
Mediamode,andthenwritethecombination(p.60).
Combination Category: BASS & BASS SPLIT 018:
DiscoSplit
Althoughthisisasomewhatsophisticatededitingtech
nique,wewilldescribethesettingsofoneofthepresetcom
binationsasanexample.
Beforeyouplay,makesurethattheglobalMIDIchannelis
setto01.
SelectcombinationCategory:BASS&BASSSPLIT018:Dis
coSplit,makesurethattheARPON/OFFbuttontoturnit
on,andplay.
ArpeggiatorAisassignedtoT(timbre)5and6.When
youplaythekeyboard,thedrumsarpeggiopatternwill
soundtheT6program.
TheABottomKeyandTopKey(COMBIEDIT:ARP)are
setsothatarpeggiatorAwilloperateonlyfornotesB3
andlower.
ArpeggiatorAisalsoassignedtoT5,butthisissothat
theT6programwillsoundonlywhenthearpeggiatoris
on.
NoticethetimbresettingsforT5andT6
Ifthearpeggiatorisoff,playingthekeyboardwillsound
thetimbre(s)thataresettoGchortotheglobalMIDI
channel(inthiscase,01).SincetheMIDIChannelofT6is
setto02,itwillnotsound.T5issettoGch,butsince
StatusisOffitwillnotsound.
NotesfromanyMIDIchannelthatisassignedtoatimbre
willtriggerthearpeggiator.Inthiscase,thesewillbe
MIDIChannel02andGch(globalMIDIchannel).When
thearpeggiatorison,playingthekeyboardwilltrigger
arpeggiatorA,whichisassignedtoT5(Gch).T6willbe
soundedbyarpeggiatorA.SincetheStatusofT5isOff,it
willnotsound.
SincetheStatusofT5isOff,itwillnotsound,regardless
ofwhetherthearpeggiatorisonoroff.Itisadummy
timbrethatcausesT6tosoundonlywhenthearpeg
giatorison.
Combination Category: BASS & BASS SPLIT 032:
Echo Jam
Beforeyouplay,makesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel
(p.60)issetto01.
SelectandplaycombinationCategory:BASS&BASSSPLIT
032:EchoJam.
ArpeggiatorAisassignedtoT4andT6,andarpeggiator
BisassignedtoT2.
WhenyouplayanoteB3orlower,theT4programwill
besoundedbythedrumsarpeggiopattern.
WhenyouplayanoteB4orhiger,theT2programwillbe
soundedbytheguitarriffarpeggiopattern.
TheABottomKeyandTopKey(p.21)aresetsothat
arpeggiatorsAwilloperateonlyforthenoteB3and
below.
TheBBottomKeyandTopKey(p.21)aresetsothat
arpeggiatorsBwilloperateonlyforthenoteC4and
above.
ArpeggiatorBisassignedtoT6aswell,butthissettingis
sothattheT4programwillsoundonlywhenthearpeg
giatorison.
Status MIDI Ch. Assign
T5 Off Gch A
T6 INT 02ch A
IFX1, IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5 Timbre 02....16
25
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsfortheinserteffects.Thesecon
sistmainlyofthefollowing.
effectparameters.
mixersettingsforthesignalsthathavepassedthrough
theinserteffects.
(Wet)soundwilldependonthetypeofeffect(p.208).
ThefollowingparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
However,inserteffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)andthe
Pan(CC#8),Send1,andSend2parametersthatfol
lowtheinserteffectwillbecontrolledbytheMIDIchannel
specifiedbyCh(ControlChannel),unlikeinProgram
mode.ThecontrolchangesusedarethesameasinProgram
mode(IFX1onpage 11).
IFX1
IFX Select [S00...S63, D01...D10]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect1.(IFXSelect
onpage 11)
IFX Parameters
byIFXSelect.(IFXParametersonpage 11).
Guide(p.217).
On/Off [Off, On]
Switchestheinserteffecton/off.(On/Offonpage 11).
Ctrl Ch (Control Channel) [01...16, G ch, All-R]
ThisparameterspecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillbeused
tocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod),panfollow
ingtheinserteffect(CC#8),Send1,andSend2.
ThechannelnumberofthetimbreroutedthroughthisIFX
willbefollowedbya*displayedattherightofCh0116.
IftwoortimbreswithdifferentMIDIchannelsettingsare
routedthroughthesameIFX,thisparameterspecifieswhich
ofthesechannelswillbeusedtocontroltheeffect.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(p.60)willbeusedtocon
troltheeffect.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.
AllR(AllRouted):Thechannelofanytimbrerouted
throughthiseffectcanbeusedtocontroltheeffect.(Chan
nelsofeachroutedtimbrewillbeindicatedby*.)
IftheBusparameter(p.19)issettoDKitforatimbre
forwhichadrumprogramisselected,theMIDIchannelof
thattimbrewillbeenabledifanyoftheinserteffectsIFX1
IFX5aresettoAllR,regardlessofthebusselectsettingof
eachkeyofthedrumkitortheDKitPatchsetting.
Chain [Off, On]
Pan (CC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFX1,IFX2,IFX3,IFX4,IFX5onpage 11.
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects24.
IFX Select [S00...S61, D01...D09]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffects24.(IFX
Selectonpage 12)
IFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
Switchestheinserteffecton/off.(On/Offonpage 11)
Ctrl Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...16, G ch, All-R]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCtrlCh(ControlChan
nel)onpage 25.
Chain [Off, On]
Pan (CC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
IFX5
IFX Select [000...61]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect.IFX5cannotuse
doublesizeeffects.
IFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.(On/Offon
page 11)
Ch (Control Channel) [Ch01...16, G ch, All-R]
nel)onpage 25..
Chain [Off, On]
Pan (CC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFX5onpage 12.
Combination mode
26
MFX1, MFX2
effectparameters.
totheL/Rbus.
(MFX1,MFX2onpage 13)
MFX1
MFX1 Select [S00...S87, D00...D13]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.(MFX
Selectonpage 13)
MFX Parameters
byMFXSelect.
Guide(p.217)
On/Off [Off, On]
willbemuted.(On/Offonpage 13)
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthatwillcontroldynamicmodu
lation(Dmod)forthemastereffect.(CtrlCh(Control
Channel)onpage 25)
0116:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedforcontrol.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(p.60)willbeusedfor
control.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
Return 1 [000...127]
Thisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffect1tothe
OUTPUTL/MONOandR).
Chain [Off, On]
ChainLevel [000...127]
WhenChainisOn,thisspecifiesthelevelofthesignal
sentfrommastereffect1tomastereffect2.
Ifyoureusingadoublesizeeffect,theChainsettings
willbeunavailable.
MFX2
MFX2 Select [000...120]
MFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
Return 2 [000...127]
SeeMFX1onpage 26..
TFX (Total Effect)
parameters.
(TFXonpage 13)
TFX
TFX Select [S00...S61]
TFXcannotusedoublesizeeffects.
TFX Parameters
byTFXSelect.
Guide(p.217).
On/Off [Off, On]
passeddirectlythrough.(On/Offonpage 13)
lation(Dmod)forthetotaleffect.(CtrlCh(Control
Channel)onpage 25)
0116:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedforcontrol.
Gch:TheglobalMIDIChannel(p.60)willbeusedfor
control.NormallyyouwillusetheGchsetting.
Master Vol
MONOandR.
Command Timbre 02....16
27
Command
Thesecommandsallowyoutodothingssuchascopyingor
initializingarpeggiatororeffectsettings.Specifythecopy
sourceandcopydestination,gettheOK?prompt,and
thenpressthebuttontobegin.
Forcopyrelatedcommands,pleasenotethefollowing
pointswhenusingFromandSrctospecifythecopy
source.
IfyouspecifyProgramorCombiinFrom,theSrc
fieldwillshowabanknumbersuchasA000.This
indicationmatchesthebanknumbershownintheupper
PROGPLAYorCOMBIPLAYandpressthefunction14
(ENTER)button.
IfyouspecifySonginFrom,theSrcfieldwillshowa
songnumber.Inthiscase,youcanchooseonlysong
numbersthatareloadedintothemicroSTATIONorthat
youcreatedonthemicroSTATION.
Copy ARP (Copy Arpeggio)
000: name...]
Srcs [A, B, A&B]
SeeCopyArpeggioonpage 14.
To [A, B]
Whencopyingfromaprogram,orwhencopyingAorB
(notboth)fromacombinationorsong,specifyeitherAorB
asthecopydestination.ThisisnotshownifSrcsissetto
A&B.
Copy IFX
gram,combination,orsong(CopyIFXonpage 14).
However,theCh(ControlChannel)settingisnotcopied.
Swap IFX
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)thesettingsoftwoinsert
effects(SwapIFXonpage 14).
However,theCh(ControlChannel)settingisnot
swapped.
Copy MFX/TFX
gram,combination,orsong.(CopyMFX/TFXon
page 14)
Initialize All
Thiscommandinitializesthesettingsofthecombination
thatscurrentlyselected.
Copy Prog (Copy from Program)
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofthespecifiedprogram
tothecombinationthatscurrentlyselected.
TheStatussetting(p.20)isautomaticallysettoINT.
MIDICh.(p.20)willnotchangeifWithArp?is
Yes,orwillautomaticallybesettoGchifWithArp?is
No.
ThePROGEDIT:KnobAssignsettingsofthecopy
sourceprogramwillbecopied.
From [A000...D127: name]
Selectthecopysourceprogram.
With FX? [Yes, No]
Specifywhethertheinserteffect15,mastereffect1and2,
andtotaleffectsettingswillbecopied.
About the Bus setting
RegardlessoftheWithFX?setting,ifthecopysource
programsUseDKitSetparameterisOn,Buswillbe
settoDKit.Inaddition,theDKitIFXPatchsettingwill
beresettothedefault.
IfWithFX?issettoYes,thecopysourceprograms
BusSelectsettingwillbecopied.IftheBussettingof
timbresotherthanthecopydestinationtimbreisIFX1
IFX5,itwillautomaticallybesettoL/R.
IfWithFX?issettoNo,theBussettingsofthecopy
sourceprogramandthecopydestinationtimbrewill
automaticallybesettoL/RiftheywerebothIFX1IFX5.
With Arp? [Yes, No]
Specifywhetherthecopysourceprogramsarpeggiatorset
tingswillbecopied.Thecopysourceprogramsarpeggiator
settingswillbecopiedtothearpeggiatorspecifiedbyTo
Arp,andassignedtothecopydestinationtimbre.
To Timbre [01...16]
Selectthecopydestinationtimbre.Parametersforthattim
brewillbeinitialized.Thecopysourceprogramwillbe
assignedtoProgramSelect(p.17).
To Arp [A, B]
Specifythecopydestinationarpeggiator(AorB).
Combination mode
28
Write Combi
ThissavestheeditedcombinationtothemicroSTATIONs
memory.Youcanusethistodothefollowing.
Savetheeditedcontent.
Renameacombination.
Specifythecombinationscategory.
Copyacombinationtoadifferentbankorcombination
number.
Besuretosaveimportantcombinations.Anedited
combinationcannotberecoveredifyouturnoffthe
powerorselectadifferentcombinationbeforeyouve
savedit.
Beforeyoucanwrite,youmustturnoffmemorypro
tectinGlobalmode.
Name [space, !...~]
Specifythecombinationname.Usethebuttonstoselect
acharacter,andusethebuttonstochangethecharac
ter.Youcanenteruptotwentyfourcharacters.
Cat (Category) [KEYBOARD...USER]
Selectthecategoryforthecombinationyouresaving.
To [A000...C127: name]
Specifythesavedestinationforthecombination.Themicro
STATIONallowsyoutosave384programs.
Thesavedestinationisindicatedbybanknumber.This
banknumbermatchesthebanknumbershownintheupper
COMBIPLAYandpressthefunction14(ENTER)button.
YoucanspecifyA000C127;theGM2bankisnotavailable
forsaving.
Note:CombinationsonthemicroSTATIONareinternally
managedbybankandnumber.Thesavedcombinationwill
bewrittentoabanknumberA000C127.
OK?
Pressthebuttontosavethedata.
Note:Youcanalsosavethecombinationbypressingthe
WRITEbutton.WhenyoupresstheWRITEbutton,aconfir
mationscreenofOKwillappear.Whenyoudothis,the
combinationwillbesavedbyoverwritingthecombination
External Setup
alitytocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice;presstheREAL
TIMECONTROLSEXTERNALbuttonanduseknobs14to
transmitMIDIcontrolchangemessagesonthespecified
MIDIchannel.
shippedfromthefactory.Forexample,theseincludesetups
thatletyoucontroltheKorgLegacyCollectionofsoftware
synthesizers,andsetupsthatletsyoucontrolDAWsoft
ware.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseemicroSTATIONExternal
Setups(PDF)
thefunctionofeachknobinanexternalsetup(p.64).
1 [MIDI ch/MIDI CC#: Knob value]
canbeedited.
29
Sequencer mode
An overview of Sequencer
mode
SequencerModeletsyourecordandplaybackMIDIdata
onsixteenMIDItracksandonemastertrack(containing
tempodata,etc.),usingtheinternalsoundgeneratoror
externalsoundmodules.
Thedualarpeggiator,GRIDSEQ(gridsequence)function,
thesophisticatedeffects,controllers,andthenumerous
otherfunctionsofthemicroSTATIONcanbeusedtogether
togiveyouawiderangeofpossibilitiesformusicproduc
tionorliveperformance.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermodeset
tings,thesongsyouverecordedwilldisappear.Ifyou
needtokeepthisdata,youmustsaveittoanSDcard
beforepoweringoff.
Ifyouwishtosavetheprograms,trackparameters,and
effects,settingsetc.selectedforasongasatemplate
song,usethesongcommandSaveTemplate.
WhenyouinitiallypowerupthemicroSTATION,itwill
notcontainanysongdata,soifyouwishtoplaybacka
songonthesequencer,youmustfirstloaddatafrom
media.(Loadonpage 68)
MIDI sequencer
Thesequencercanrecordamaximumof210,000MIDI
events,upto128songs,andasmanyas999measures
persong.
Timingresolutionisamaximumof,/480.
TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata,and
amastertrackthatcontrolsthetimesignatureand
tempo.
Thearpeggiatorcanbeusedduringplaybackor
recording.
Foreachsong,youcanusefivestereoinserteffects,two
stereomastereffects,andonestereototaleffect.
Sixteendifferenttemplatesongsarebuiltin,andcontain
programandeffectsettingssuitableforvariousmusical
styles.Uptosixteenoriginaltemplatesthatyoucreate
canbesavedasusertemplatesongs.
Atrackplayloopfunctionletsyouloopspecified
measuresindependentlyforeachtrack.
MIDI recording features
Variousmethodsofrecordingaresupported,inwhich
yourperformanceonthekeyboardandcontrollers
(includingMIDIcontrolevents)isrecordedasyouplay.
Youcanusethefrontpanelfunction0116buttonsto
easilyswitchtracks,selectarecordingtrack,orchangea
tracksplay/mutestatus.
TheGridSequencefunctionletsyouusethefrontpanel
function0116buttonsand0116LEDstosteprecord
phrasessuchasdrumpatternsinagridlikemanner.
MIDISystemExclusive(SysEx)messagescanbe
recordedandplayedback.SysExmessagesreceived
fromanexternalMIDIdeviceorparameterchanges
producedbyeditingtrackparametersoreffectparam
eterscanberecordedinrealtimeonanydesiredtrack.
Parameter-related features
WhentheStatusofatrackissettoINTorBTH,an
externalsequencercanbeusedtoplaythemicroS
TATIONasamultitimbraltonegenerator.Whenthe
StatusofatrackissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2,thesequencer
ofmicroSTATIONcanplayexternaltonegenerators.
(Statusonpage 38)
Toneparameters(Filter/Amp,Filter/AmpEG)letyou
maketemporaryadjustmentstothesoundofthe
programusedbyatrack,whileleavingtheoriginal
programunchanged.Whilecreatingasong,youcanuse
thiscapabilitytomakechangesinrealtimeby(for
example)softeningthetoneofthebasssoundorsharp
eningtheattackofthestringswithouthavingtoreturn
toProgrammodetoedittheprogramitself.(Tone
parametersonpage 39)
microSTATIONsAMS(AlternateModulation)capability
letsyouusecontrolchangesforrealtimecontrolofthe
parametersoftheprogramsusedinaprogram.ItsMIDI
SyncabilitiesletyousynchronizetheLFOspeedto
changesinthetempo.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)functionalityletsyou
controleffectparametersinrealtime.Youcanalsouse
MIDISynctosynchronizetheLFOspeedordelaytime
tochangesinthetempo.
TheMIDIclockmastercanbesettoInternal,Ext.USB,
Ext.MIDI,orAuto,allowingsynchronizedperformance
withanexternalMIDIdevice.(Clock(MIDIClock
Source)onpage 62)
Editing and operation features
TheAutoSongSetupfunctionletsyouinstantlysetup
programorcombinationsettingsofProgrammodeor
Combinationmodeasasong,sothatyoucanstart
recordingsimplybypressingtheSTART/STOPbutton.
SinceperformancesusingtheArpeggiatorinProgramor
Combinationmodeareseamlesslyintegratedwithsong
production,anyinspirationorideasforphrasesand
songsthatoccurtoyouwhileplayingcanbeimmedi
atelybeturnedintoasong.(Tips:AutoSongSetup
onpage 30)
ProgramandCombinationsettingscanbecopiedtoa
song.(CopyCombi(CopyfromCombination)on
page 50,CopyProg(CopyfromProgram)on
page 51)
AsongyoucreatedcanbeconvertedintoSMF(Standard
MIDIFile)data.SMFsongscanalsobeloaded.(Save
ToSMF(SaveSongasStandardMIDIFile)onpage 69)
Songdatayoucreatecanbesavedinadedicatedformat.
(SaveSEQonpage 69)
YoucanrewindorfastforwardMIDITrackswhile
listeningtothesound.
TheLOCATEbuttonletsyoumovequicklytoadesired
location.
WheneditingMIDItracks,youcanusethefrontpanel
0116buttonstoswitchtracksquickly.
Setup parameters & Musical data
EachsongconsistsofMIDItracks116,amastertrack,vari
oussongparameterssuchasthesongname,settingsforthe
arpeggiator,effectsettings.
Upto128suchsongscanbecreatedinthemicroSTATION.
MIDItracks116eachconsistoftrackparametersthat
specifythestartingstateofthetrack,andplaybackdata.
Themastertrackconsistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata.
Sequencer mode
30
MIDI tracks 116
Setup parameters
Program,Play/Rec/Mute,Pan*,Volume*,PlayLoop,Loop
StartMeasure,LoopEndMeasure,PlayIntro,Bus,FXCtrl
Bus,Send1,Send2,DkitPatch,Status,MIDIChannel,Bank
Select(WhenStatus=EX2)***,OSCMode***,OSCSelect,Por
tamento*,Transpose**,Detune**,BendRange**,Filter/Amp,
Filter/AmpEG,UseProgramsScale***,Delay(Mode,Time,
BaseNote,Times)***,MIDIFilter,KeyboardZone,Velocity
Zone,TrackName
Musical data
NoteOn/Off
ProgramChange(includingBankSelect)
PitchBend
AfterTouch(PolyAfter)
ControlChange
ExclusiveMessage
Master track
Setup parameters/Musical data
Timesignature*,Tempo*
*Whenyouchangethesettingduringrealtimerecording,
thiswillberecordedasmusicaldata(Programchangeand
Controlchangemessages).Thisallowsthestartingsettings
tobemodifiedduringtheplayback.
**Musicaldata(MIDIRPNdata)canbeusedtochangethe
startingsettingsduringplayback.
Otherparameters:Youcanadjustparametersduringreal
timerecordingandrecordthesechangesasMIDISystem
Exclusivemessages.Thismeansthatthesettingsatthestart
ofplaybackcanchangeasthesongprogresses.
***:TheseparametersaresupportedonlybymicroSTATION
Editor.
FordetailsonControlChangemessagesandRPN,please
seeControlchangeonpage 304,andUsingRPN
(RegisteredParameterNumbers)onpage 307.
FordetailsonMIDISystemExclusivemessages,please
seeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedinSequencer
modeonpage 55.
The Global mode SEQ Mode setting
InSequencermode,youwillnormallyusetheinternal
sequencerasthemasterthatcontrolstheinternalsound
generatororexternalMIDIsoundmodules.However,you
canalsousethemicroSTATIONasamultitimbralsound
modulethatcansimultaneouslyplaymultipletracksofper
formancedatafromanexternalMIDIsequencer.(Normally,
youlluseCombinationmodeifyouwanttousethemicroS
TATIONasamasterkeyboard.)
YoucanswitchthemicroSTATIONssettingasappropriate
forthesetwopurposes.ThissettingismadeinGlobal/
Media:MIDISEQModeTrk.
forMasteristheappropriatesettingifyouwanttousethe
microSTATIONsinternalsequencertocontrolanexternal
soundmodule,orusethemicroSTATIONinSequencer
modeasamasterkeyboard.Inthiscasewhenyouswitch
songsonthemicroSTATION,trackswhoseStatusissetto
EXTorBTHcantransmitMIDImessagessuchasprogram
changestosetupyourexternalMIDIsoundmodule.
forExtSeqistheappropriatesettingifyouwanttousethe
microSTATIONasamultitimbralsoundmoduleforyour
externalsequencer.WhenyouswitchsongsonthemicroS
TATION,MIDImessagessuchasprogramchangeswillnot
betransmitted(bytrackswhoseStatusisEXTorBTH).This
ensuresthatechobackfromyourexternalMIDIsequencer
willnotcausemicroSTATIONtracksofthecorresponding
MIDIchanneltoswitchtheirprogram,pan,orvolumeset
tings.
Thisfunctionautomaticallycopiesthesettingsofapro
gramorcombinationtoasong,andputsthemicroSTATION
inaconditionreadytorecord.
Procedure (example for Combination mode)
1. EnterCombinationmode.
2. Selectadesiredcombination,anduseCOMBIEDITto
editthearpeggiatoretc.asdesired.
Note:Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstate,executeWrite
Combi.
3. PresstheRECbutton.
ThedisplaywillindicateAutoSongSetupOK?
4. IfyouwanttobegintheAutoSongSetupfunction,press
thebutton;ifyoudecidenottothen,pressthe
button.
YoullautomaticallyswitchtoSequencermode,andthe
settingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtothesong.
Thecopydestinationsongwillbethefirstsongthats
currentlyunused.
Combinationsettingsappliedautomatically
TheresultwillbethesameaswhenyouusetheSong
commandCopyCombiwiththefollowingset
tings(p.50).
WithFX?=Yes
MultiRec?=Yes
Programsettingsappliedautomatically
TheresultwillbethesameaswhenyouusetheSong
commandCopyProgwiththefollowingsettings
(p.51).
WithFX?=Yes
WithARP?=Yes
ToTrack=01
ToARP=A
5. ThemicroSTATIONwillautomaticallybeinrecord
readymode,andthemetronomewillsoundaccordingto
theMetronomesettings(p.34).
6. PresstheSTART/STOPbuttontostartrealtime
recording.Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe
START/STOPbuttononceagain.
The Compare function
Whenyouperformrealtimerecordingortrackediting,this
functionallowsyoutomakebeforeandaftercomparisons.
IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPARELEDislit,the
LEDwillgodark.Thisnowbecomesthemusicaldatathat
willbeselectedwhentheCOMPARELEDisdark.
Operations for which Compare is available
Ingeneral,trackandpatterneventdatacannotbereturned
toitsoriginalstate.Comparingsongparametersispossible
onlyduringsongediting(whenexecutingasongcom
mand).
RecordingtoaMIDItrack
TrackEdit
EraseTrack,CopyTrack,EraseMeasure,Delete
Measure,InsertMeasure,RepeatMeasure,Copy
Measure,CreateControl,Quantize
Songcommands
Delete,CopySong
TheprogramwillnotbeaffectedbytheCompare,and
willnotreturntoitspriorstate.
SEQ
31
Operations for which Compare is not available
Editingsongparameters
SongcommandsotherthanthoselistedunderOpera
tionsforwhichCompareisavailable,above.
The microSTATIONs song parameter
page structure
ThemicroSTATIONsSequencermodeisorganizedasthe
treestructureshownonthefollowingpage.(p.32)
Fordetailsonhowtomovebetweenpages,selectparame
ters,andeditvalues,refertothemicroSTATIONOperation
Guide.
SEQ
Hereyoucanselectasongandviewthelocation.
Song Select [000...127: Song Name]
Selectthesongthatyouwanttorecordorplayback.
Creating a new song
UsetheSongcommandCreateNewtocreateanewsong.
UseLengthtospecifythenumberofmeasuresinthesong
thatwillbecreated.
Ifyouwanttochangethelengthofasongaftercreatingit,
usetheTrackEditSetSongLength.Whencreatinganew
song,youcanspecifythelengthtobesomewhatlongerthan
necessary,andafteryouhavefinishedrecordingandedit
ing,useSetSongLengthtospecifythecorrectlength.
ASongSelectmessageistransmittedwhenyouswitch
songsonthemicroSTATION.Youcanswitchsongson
themicroSTATIONremotely,bysendingaSongSelect
messagefromanexternalMIDIdevice.
IfTrk(Global/Media:MIDISEQMIDIOut)issetto
forMaster,andthesongisswitched,trackswhose
trackstatus(p.38)isEXT,EX2,orBOTHwilltransmit
BankSelect,ProgramChange,Volume,Panpot,Porta
mento,Send1/2,PostIFXPan,andPostIFXSend1/2
messagesontheMIDIchannelofthattrack.Thesemes
sageswillnotbetransmittedifTrackMIDIOutissetto
forExtSeq.
Location [001:01....999:16]
Thelocation(currentposition)inthesongisshownasthe
Measure(001999)andBeat(0116)intheupperlineofthe
display.
Youcannotspecifythelocationhere;tospecifythelocation,
usetheSetLocationpagesinPLAYorREC.
Selecting a track
YoucanselecttheMIDItracktoplayorrecordfromthe
keyboard.WiththefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDlit,
pressoneofthefunction0116buttonstoselectatrack.
YoucanalsousethismethodtoselectaMIDItracktoedit
whenusingacommandsuchasCopyTrack.
Whenyourealtimerecordontoasingletrack,theperfor
mancedatawillberecordedontothetrackyouselecthere.
Youllalsousethefunction0116buttonstoselectthe
desiredtrackswhenyourealtimerecordontomultiple
tracks.
Torenameatrack,useRename(p.41).
WhenyouplaythekeyboardofmicroSTATIONand
operateitscontrollers,theinternaltonegeneratorwill
soundaccordingtothesettings(programleveletc.)of
thetracksthatareselectedhere(ifStatusisINTor
BTH),andothertrackswhoseMIDIchannelsmatch
willalsosoundatthesametime(ifStatusisINTor
BTH).MessagewillalsobetransmittedontheMIDI
channelsofthesetracks(whoseStatusisEXT,EX2or
BTH).
PLAY
InthePLAYpage,thelocationisshownintheupperlineof
thedisplay.UseSet(SetLocation)tospecifythelocation.
Thelowerlineshowsplaybackrelatedparameters,and
allowsyoutoeditthem.
LOOP-P (Loop Play)
ThispageappearswhenyoupressthefrontpanelLOOP
buttontoturnLoopon,allowingyoutosetthefollowing
parameters.
Loop M: Start End [001...999]
Thisspecifiesthefirstandlastmeasurethatwillbelooped.
WhenLoopison,alltrackswillplayrepeatedlyaccording
tothissetting.
Tempo, Tempo Mode
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.Thistempoappliesto
songplayback,arpeggiator.
040.00300.00:WhentheTempoModeisManu(Man
ual),thistempowillbeusedforrecordingandplayback.
WhenTempoModeisRec,thistempowillberecordedon
themastertrack.
EXT:ThiswillappearwhenClock(MIDIClockp.62)is
settoeitherExt.MIDI,Ext.USBorAuto.Thetempoofthe
internalsequencerwillsynchronizewithMIDIClockmes
sagesreceivedfromanexternalsequencerorotherMIDI
device.
IfClockissettoInternal,theabovetemposetting(040.00
300.00)isused.IfyouveselectedAuto,operationwillauto
maticallyswitchfromInternaltoExternalifMIDIClock
dataisreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice.Thisindica
tionwillappear.
Note:IfRealtimeControlCmodeisselected,youcanalso
adjustthetempobyturningknob4(TEMPO).
Tempo Mode [Auto, Manu]
Auto:Thetempoofthemastertrackwillbeused.Youcan
specifythemastertracktempoeitherbysettingtheTrack
EditEditTempoparameter,orbyrecordingwithTempo
ModesettoRec.IfyouchoosetheAutosetting,youwont
beabletochangethe,(Tempo)settingduringsongplay
backorrecording.
Manu(Manual):The,(Tempo)settingwillbeused.
Sequencer mode
32
Play ( p.31)
Loop M001-001 (when Loop On)
Tempo, Tempo Mode
Set Location
Metronome
Metro Bus
Metro Lvl
Rec ( p.34)
Loop M001-001 (when Loop On)
Tempo, M (Recording Mode)
TS, Quantize
AutoRehrsl (when Loop On)
Set Location
Tempo, Tempo Mode
Metronome
Metro Bus
Metro Lvl
Metro Count
EDIT ( p.36)
Tracks ( p.36)
T01: TRACK 01 ( p.36)
Program Select
Volume
Pan
Play/Mute
Play Loop
Loop On/Of
Start M
End M
Play Intro
Bus
DkitPatch
IFX1
IFX2
IFX3
IFX4
IFX5
FXCtrl Bus
Send1
Send2
ARP Assign
Status
MIDI Ch.
OSC Mode
Portamento
Transpose
Detune
Bend Range
Flt/Amp
Cutof
Resonance
Flt EG Int
AmpVel Int
Flt/Amp EG
Attack
Decay
Sustain
Release
Key Zone
Top
Top Slope
Btm Slope
Bottom
Vel Zone
Top
Top Slope
Btm Slope
Bottom
MIDI Filter ( p.40)
Prog Chg
Damper
JS X asAMS
JS+Y
JS-Y
Knob 1-A
Knob 2-A
Knob 3-A
Knob 4-A
Knob 1-B
Knob 2-B
Knob 3-B
Knob 4-B
FootSwitch
FootPedal
Track02
Same as Track01 parameters
Track16
Same as Track01 parameters
Track Edit ( p.42)
Song Length
Erase Track
Copy Track
Erase Measure
Delete Measure
Insert Measure
Repeat Measure
Copy Measure
Create Control
Quantize
Edit Tempo
Edti Time Sig
Knob Assign ( p.45)
1-B
2-B
3-B
4-B
Tempo ( p.45)
, =120.00
ARP ( p.45)
Arp-A Setup
Run
Pattern
Octave
Resolution
Gate[%]
Velocity
Swing[%]
Sort
Latch
KeySync
Keyboard
Top Key
BottomKey
Top Vel
Bottom Vel
Arp-B Setup
Same as ARP A parameters
000: New Song
PLAY
33
Song Command ( p.48)
Memory Status
Create New
Rename
Delete
Copy Song
Load Template
Save Template
FF/REW Speed
Location Point
GM Initialize
Copy Combi
Copy Prog
GRID SEQ On ( p.51)
Loop End, Q
Tempo, Tempo Mode
Init Vel
Init Dur
KeySelect
Vel
Grid Edit
1-1: Vel/Dur
1-2: Vel/Dur
IFX1 ( p.46)
1: S01: St.Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Chain
Chain To
Pan(CC#8)
Bus
FXCtrl Bus
Send1
Send2
IFX2
IFX3
IFX4
IFX5
1: S01: St.Comp
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Pan(CC#8)
Bus
FXCtrl Bus
Send1
Send2
MFX1 ( p.47)
1: 000: St.Limiter
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Return1
Chain
ChainLevel
MFX2
1: 000: St.Limiter
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Return2
TFX
000:St.Limiter
Wet/Dry :32:68
:
:
FXParam
On/Of
Ctrl Ch
Master Volume( p.47)
Master Volume
Command ( p.48)
Copy ARP
Copy IFX
Swap IFX
Copy MFX/TFX
Sequencer mode
34
Set Location
Set (Set Location) [001:01....999:16]
Thisspecifiesthelocation.Thepositionwillchangetothe
measureyouspecifyhere.Fromtheleft,thesevaluesindi
catethemeasure(001999)andthebeat(0116).
IftheMIDIsourceclock(Clock(MIDIClock
Source)onpage 62)isInternal,changingthelocation
willtransmitasongpositionpointermessage.Ifthe
MIDIsourceclockisExt.andMIDIRcvExtRTC
(p.62)ison,thelocationwillchangewhenasong
positionpointermessageisreceivedfromthespecified
source.
WiththeAutosetting,themicroSTATIONwillauto
maticallyswitchtothesameoperationasExt.MIDI
whenitreceivesexternalMIDIclockdatafromadevice
connectedtotheMIDIINconnector.Otherwise,opera
tionwillbethesameasInternal.
Theadjustablerangeforthebeatandclockwilldepend
onthetimesignaturethatisspecifiedatthatpoint.
Metronome
Metronome [Rec, R&P, Off]
Rec:Themetronomewillsoundonlyduringrecording.
R&P:Themetronomewillsoundduringrecordingand
playback.
Off:Themetronomewillnotsoundduringplaybackor
recording.However,theprecountmetronomewillsound
beforerecordingbegins.
Metronome Bus Select
Metro Bus [L/R, L, R]
Selectstheoutputdestinationofthemetronomesound.
L/R:OutputfromOUTPUTL/MonoandR.
L:OutputfromOUTPUTL/Mono.
R:OutputfromOUTPUTR.
Metronome Level
Metro Lvl [000...127]
Setsthevolumeofthemetronome.
REC
Hereyoucanspecifyhowrecordingwilloccur.
WhenyoupresstheRECbuttontoentertherecordready
condition,thedisplaywillshowaRECgrouppage.The
mostrecentlydisplayedpageoftheRECgroupwillbethe
pagethatisshown.
IntheRECpages,theupperlineofthedisplayshowstheloca
tion.UseSet(SetLocation)tospecifythelocation.Inthe
lowerlineyoucanviewandeditrecordingrelatedparameters.
Loop-Recording (Loop Recording)
IfyoupressthefrontpanelLOOPbuttontoturnloop
recordingon,LoopAllTracksRecordingmodewillbe
selected;recordingwilloccurrepeatedlyoverthespecified
regionofmeasuresofthetracks,allowingyoutocontinue
addingdata.Thismodeisidealforcreatingdrumpatterns.
YoucantturnLOOPonwhenusingmultirecording.
NorcanyoumultirecordwhenLOOPison.
Loop M: Start End [001...999]
Thisspecifiestheregioninwhichrecordingwillrepeat
whenlooprecordingison.
Tempo, Recording Mode
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.(,(Tempo)on
page 31)
M (Recording Mode) [OVW, OVD, MPI, API]
Selectsthemethodofrealtimerecording.
IfyoupressthefrontpanelLOOPbuttontoturnloop
recordingon,thisparameterwillbeignored,andwill
notbedisplayed.ThedisplaywillindicateQ(Quan
tizeResolution),whichcanbeedited.
OVW(Overwrite):Withthismethod,thenewlyrecorded
dataoverwritesmusicaldatapreviouslyrecordedonthat
track.Ifyouusethismethodtorecordonatrackonwhich
datahasalreadybeenrecorded,allpreviousdatawillbe
replacedfromthemeasureatwhichyoubeganrecording
throughallsubsequentmeasures.Whenrecordingforthe
firsttime,youwillnormallyselectthismethod.
OVD(Overdub):Withthismethod,thenewlyrecorded
musicaldataisaddedtotheexistingdata.
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoadddatatoaprevi
ouslyrecordedtrack.Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwill
berecordingadditionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpat
tern,orrecordingthetempointhemastertrack.
Withthismode,datacanbeaddedwithouterasingthe
existingperformancedata.
MPI(ManualPunchIn):Withthismethod,themusical
datapreviouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly
recordeddata.
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtousetheRECbuttonor
afootswitchtorerecordselectedportionsofapreviously
recordedtrack.
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpresstheRECbuttonora
connectedpedalswitchatthedesiredlocationtostartor
stoprecording.
API(AutoPunchIn):Withthismethod,themusicaldatapre
viouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewlyrecordeddata.
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecordedtrack.
REC
35
Recordingwilloccuronlyoverthespecifiedarea,rewriting
itwiththenewlyrecordeddata.
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded.
Thenrecordingwillautomaticallystartandendwithinthe
specifiedarea.
Time Signature, Quantize
TS (Time Signature)
[**/**, 1/4...16/4, 1/8...16/8, 1/16...16/16]
Thisisthetimesignatureatthecurrentlocationofthesong.
Thetimesignaturecanbechangedateachmeasure.
**/**:ThiswillbedisplayedwhenyoupresstheRECbut
ton.Specifythiswhenyouwishtousethetimesignature
thatisalreadyrecordedforthatmeasure,andwishto
recordwithoutchangingthetimesignature.
1/4...16/4,1/8...16/8,1/16...16/16:Thisisthetimesignatureat
thecurrentlocationinthesong.
WiththefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDlit,usethe0116
buttonstoselectthetrackthatyouwanttorecord;then
presstheRECbuttonandspecifythetimesignaturehere.
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOPbuttontobeginrecord
ing,thetimesignatureyouspecifywillberecordedonthe
MasterTrackandonpreviouslyrecordedtracks.
BeawarethatifyoupresstheSTART/STOPbuttonduring
theprecounttostoprecording,thetimesignaturewillnot
berecorded.
Normally,youwillspecifythetimesignaturewhenyou
recordthefirsttrack,andselect**/**whenrecordingsubse
quenttracks.
Changing the time signature in the middle of a
song
Changingthetimesignaturebeforedataisrecorded:
Ifyouknowthelocationatwhichyouwishtochangetime
signatures,usetheTrackEditInsertMeasuretospecify
andinsertthetimesignaturewhereverdesired,andthen
recordyourmusicaldata.
Changingthetimesignatureafterdatahasbeenrecorded:
Ifyouwanttochangethetimesignaturemidwaythrougha
songthatalreadycontainsperformancedata,usetheTrack
EditEditTimeSig(p.45)tospecifyameasureand
changethetimesignature.
Ifthenumberofbeatsinameasureincreaseswhenyou
modifythetimesignature,restswillbeinsertedinthepor
tionthatwasadded.Converselyifthenumberofbeats
decreases,thatportionwillnotbeplayed.Howeverifyou
returntotheoriginaltimesignature,thedatathathadbeen
hiddenwillonceagainbeplayed.(Thedataitselfwillnotbe
erased.)
Q (Quantize Resolution) [Hi, ,_ , , , ,_ , ,, ,_ , ,, , ]
Withrealtimerecording,thetimingoftheMIDIdatayou
playcanbecorrected.
Hi(HighResolution):Timingwillnotbecorrected.Data
willberecordedatthemaximumresolution(,/192).
,_ ... , :Datawillbecorrectedtothenearestintervalofthe
specifiedtimingasitisrecorded.Forexampleifyouselect
,_,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest32ndnotetriplet
interval.Ifyouselect,,datawillbecorrectedtothenearest
quarternoteinterval.
BecausealltheMIDIdatabeingrecordedwillbecorrected
tothespecifiedtimingresolution,coarsesettingsofthis
parameterwillcausecontinuouscontrollerssuchaspitch
bendtoberecordedinstairstepfashion.
Insuchcases,useasettingofHitorecord,andthenusethe
TrackEditQuantizetocorrectonlythedesiredtypeof
data(notesetc.).Toavoidastifffeel,avoidrecordingata
lowresolutiontobeginwith.
Auto Rehearsal
TheAutoRehearsalfunctionletsyouselectandtryoutdif
ferentsoundsforthetrackwhileyouplaythekeyboard
withouthavingtoexitlooprecording,ortoworkouta
phrasebeforeyouactuallyrecordit.Thisisavailableand
displayedonlywhenloopisturnedon.
AutoRehrsl [Off, On]
Thisturnsautorehearsalon/off.Itspecifieshowfunction
buttons0116willoperatewhenyouusethemtoswitchthe
recordingtrackduringlooprecording.
Off:Autorehearsaloff.Whenyouswitchtherecording
track,recordingmodewillcontinuewithoutchange.
On:Autorehearsalon.Whenyouswitchtherecording
track,thefunctionbutton0116LEDcorrespondingtothe
selectedtrackwillblink,andyoullbeinrehearsalmode.
Inrehearsalmode,recordingwillnotoccurwhenyouplay
thekeyboard.Afteryouswitchtracks,youllnormallyselect
aprogramortryoutthephraseyouwillberecorded.Ifthis
isthecase,turnautorehearsalon.
Whenyourereadytoresumerecording,pressthefunction
button0116thatcorrespondstotheblinkingtrack.
Rehearsalmodewillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupressthe
button.
Set Location
Set (Set Location) [001:01....999:16]
Usethistospecifythelocation;youllmovetothespecified
measure.Fromtheleft,thenumbersindicatethemeasure
(001999)andbeat(0116).
Tempo, Tempo Mode
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.(,(Tempo)on
page 31)
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) Track 1 3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) Track 1 3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4) Track 2 3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) Track 2 Recording
1 (4/4) 2 (3/4)
Track 1
3 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) Track 1 3 (7/8)
1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) Track 2 3 (7/8)
3 (4/4)
4 (7/8)
Recording 1 (4/4)
Track 2
4 (7/8)
when Meter = **/** when Meter =7/8
Recording from measure 2 of track 2
, , , ,
, , , ,
, , , ,
Rest is inserted
Not played
,
, , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , ,
With a setting of ,
Sequencer mode
36
Tempo Mode [Auto, Manu, Rec]
Auto:ThetempowillfollowthetempooftheMasterTrack.
Youcanrecordmastertracktempodataeitherbyusingthe
TrackEditcommandEditTempo,orbysettingTempo
ModetoRecduringrecording.
WhenAutoisselected,itwillnotbepossibletomodifythe
,(Tempo)settingwhileasongisplayingorrecording(or
duringstandby).
Manu(Manual):The,(Tempo)settingwillbeused.
Rec:TempochangeswillberecordedontheMasterTrack.
Changing the tempo
WiththefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDlit,usefunction
buttons0116toselectatrack.PressRECtoenterrecord
standbymode.SetTempoModetoRec,startrecording,
andchangethe,(Tempo)value.YoucanalsoselectReal
timeControlsCmodeanduseknob4(TEMPO)tochange
thetempo.
ReccannotbeselectediftheLOOPbuttonison.
Ifyouchangethe,(Tempo)valueduringrecording,the
tempochangewillberecorded,causingthetempoto
changeduringthesong.
Youcanalsospecifytempochangesbyusingthetrackedit
commandEditTempo.
Note:Ifyouwanttorecordonlytempochanges,setM
(RecordingMode)(p.34)toOVD(OverDub).Thetempo
willberecordedonthemastertrackwithoutaffectingthe
performancedataofthetrackthatscurrentlyselectedby
functionbuttons0116.
Auto Punch In Measure
ThispageisdisplayedandcanbeeditedifM(Recording
Mode)issettoAPI(autopunchinrecording).
APIn Start M: StartEnd [M001...M999]
Thisspecifiesthemeasuresatwhichrecordingwillstartand
endwhenM(RecordingMode)issettoAPI(autopunch
inrecording).
Metronome
Metronome [Rec, R&P, Off]
Rec:Themetronomewillsoundonlyduringrecording.
R&P:Themetronomewillsoundduringrecordingand
playback.
Off:Themetronomewillnotsoundduringplaybackor
recording.However,theprecountmetronomewillsound
beforerecordingbegins.
Metronome Bus Select
Metro Bus [L/R, L, R]
Selectstheoutputdestinationofthemetronomesound.
L/R:OutputfromOUTPUTL/MonoandR.
L:OutputfromOUTPUTL/Mono.
R:OutputfromOUTPUTR.
Metronome Level
Metro Lvl [000...127]
Setsthevolumeofthemetronome.
Metronome Precount
Metro Count [0...2]
Specifiestheprecountthatwilloccurbeforerecording
begins.
Withasettingof0,recordingwillbegintheinstantyou
presstheSTART/STOPbutton(afterfirstpressingtheREC
button).
EDIT
Tracks
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforeachMIDItrack.
Track 01 (Track Number)
Program Select [001: Name...]
SelectstheprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachMIDItrack.
Theprogramyouselectherewillbeusedwhenthesongis
playedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Iftheprogramis
changedwhilerecording,theprogramchangewillbe
recordedasMIDIdata,andtheprogramwillchangeduring
playback.Youcanalsochangetheprogrammanuallydur
ingplayback.However,theprogramwillchangeatany
pointwhereprogramchangedataisalreadyrecorded.
IftheStatus(p.38)iseitherINTorBTH,programs
canbeselectedbyreceivingMIDIprogramchange
messages.Also,whenthesongischangedorwhenthe
songreturnstothebeginning,trackswhoseStatusis
EXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmitthebankandprogram
numbersviaMIDI.TrackswhoseStatusisEX2will
showBankasandwilltransmitthebanknumber
thatwasselectedintheBankSelect(p.166)parame
ter.(SeeGlobal/Media:MIDISEQModeTrk(Track
MIDIOut)onpage 62)
Switching the tracks program
WiththefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDlit,pressafunc
tionbutton0116;theProgramSelectpagewillappear.
Thispageletsyoueasilyperformbasicoperationssuchas
switchingtracksorselectingprograms.
Ifyouveaccessedtheeditpagefortrackparametersor
trackselectioninSEQEDIT:Tracks,simplyswitching
trackswillnotaccesstheProgramSelectpage.
Toswitchatracksprogram,useanyofthefollowingmeth
odsfromtheProgramSelectpage:
category,andusethebuttonstoselectaprogram.
category,presstheNUMLOCKbutton(lit)toturnnum
lockon,thenusefunctionbuttons0110toentera
programnumber,andfinallypresstheENTER(14)
button.
TransmitaMIDIprogramchangefromaconnected
externalMIDIdevice.(StatusmustbesettoINTor
BTH.)TheMIDIprogramchangenumberforthe
programthatscurrentlyselectedwillbeshowninthe
displayifyoupresstheNUMLOCKbutton(lit)toturn
numlockon,andthenpresstheENTER(14)button.
Youcanalsousetheabovemethodstoswitchprograms
whileasongisplaying.Ifyouswitchprogramswhile
EDIT Tracks
37
recording,theprogramchangedatawillberecorded,
andtheprogramwillswitchatthatpointinthesong
duringplayback.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Here,youcansetthepanofeachMIDItrack.
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducetheoscillatorpan
settingoftheProgrammode.
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan:#8parameterinIFX1
IFX5pagewilladjustthepanningofthesoundafterthe
InsertEffect.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMixeron
page 210.
RND:Thepanpositionwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
IfStatus(p.38)isINTorBTH,CC#10Pancanbe
receivedtocontrolthepanning.Whenreceiving
CC#10,avalueof0or1isfarleft,64iscenter,and127
isfarright.Whenyouchangethesongorreturntothe
beginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2
orBTHwilltransmitthepanyouspecifyhereasa
MIDImessage(exceptforRND).(SeeGlobal/Media:
MIDISEQModeTrkonpage62)
Volume [000...127]
Here,youcansetthevolumeofeachMIDItrack.
WhenStatus(p.38)isINTorBTH,CC#7Volume
canbereceivedtocontrolthevolume.Thevolumeofa
trackisdeterminedbymultiplyingtheMIDIVolume
(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11)values.Whenyou
changethesongorreturntothebeginningofthesong,
trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2orBTHwilltransmit
thevolumeyouspecifyhereasaMIDIVolumemes
sage.(SeeGlobal/Media:MIDISEQModeTrkon
page62)
ThisallowsyoutomutetheMIDItracks.
PressthefrontpanelPLAY/MUTEbuttontoturniton(LED
lit),andthenusefunctionbuttons0116toswitchtheplay/
mutestatusofeachtrack.
Play:Thetrackwillplay.
Mute:Thetrackwillbemuted.
DKit Patch
Thisletsyoupatchthebusselectsettingforeachkeyofa
drumkit,temporarilychangingtheconnectiondestinations
totheinserteffects.
Thesesettingsareavailableiftheprogramusedbythetim
breisadrumprogramandBus(p.37)issettoDKit.
Thissettingisavailableifadrumkitsbusselectsetting
isIFX1IFX5.
IFX1 [L/R, IFX1...IFX5, Off]
ChooseeachinserteffectspatchdestinationasIFX1IFX5,
L/R,orOff.
Ifyouwanttoreturntothesettingsofthedrumkit,set
IFX1:IFX1,IFX2:IFX2,IFX3:IFX3,IFX4:IFX4,andIFX5:
IFX5.
Bus [DKit, L/R, IFX1...IFX5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetracksprogramoscilla
tor.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBus(BusSelect)on
page 19.
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
Foreachtrack,theseparameterssetthesendleveltomaster
effects1and2.ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBusissetto
L/RorOff.WhenIFX1IFX5areselected,thesendlevelsto
mastereffects1and2aresetbytheSend1andSend2
parametersoftheIFX1IFX5page,andareappliedafterthe
soundhaspassedthroughIFX1IFX5.
TheSend1and2settingyouspecifyhereareusedduringplay
backorrecordingfromthebeginningofthesong.Ifyoumodify
thesesettingsduringrecording,yourchangeswillberecorded
asperformancedata;thesendamountswillchangeaccordingly
duringplayback.Youcanalsomodifythesesettingsduring
playback.HoweverifSend1and2datahasbeenrecorded,the
settingswillchangeaccordingtotherecordeddata.
IfStatus(p.38)iseitherINTorBTH,CC#93andCC
#91cancontrolsend1and2respectivelyandchange
theirsettings.Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothe
beginningofasong,trackswhoseStatusisEXT,EX2or
BTHwilltransmitthesesettingsviaMIDI.Thisdata
willbetransmittedontheMIDIchannelofeachtrack
assetbyMIDICh.(p.39).Theactualsendlevelis
determinedbymultiplyingthevalueoftheseparame
terswiththesendlevelsettingsoftheprogramusedby
thetrack(Send1andSend2p.11).(Trk(Track
MIDIOut)onpage 62)
SendstheoutputofthetracktoanFXControlbus(two
channelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXCtrlBus(FXControl
Bus)onpage 19.
ARP Assign [Off, A, B]
ThisindividuallyassignsarpeggiatorAorarpeggiatorBto
eachtracks.WhentheARPON/OFFbuttonisturnedon,the
arpeggiatorspecifiedforeachtrackwillrun,subjecttothe
ArpeggiatorRunA,Bsettingsandthesettingsmadehere.
Off:Neitherarpeggiatorwilloperate.
A:EnablesArpeggiatorA.UsetheARPApagetoselectthe
arpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left Center Right
Left Center Right
OSC1 OSC2 OSC1 OSC2 OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1 OSC2
Sequencer mode
38
B:EnablesArpeggiatorB.UsetheARPBpagetoselectthe
arpeggiopatternandsettheparameters.
Fortracksthatyouwishtorecord,selecteitherarpeggiator
AorB.Ifyouspecifyanarpeggiatorfortwoormoretracks,
thearpeggiatorwillplayeachofthetracksyouspecify.
YoucansetAandBtotwodifferentMIDIchannels,and
controlonefromthekeyboardandtheotherfromanexter
nalMIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIIN.Youcanalsouse
multitrackrecording(MultiREC)tosimultaneouslyrecord
thenotedatathatisgeneratedfromthetwoarpeggiators.
Example 1)
Ontracks1and2,setMIDIChannel(MIDICh.p.39)to
01andStatus(p.38)toINT.
AssignarpeggiatorAtotrack1andarpeggiatorBtotrack2.
TurnontheArpeggiatorA,BRunsetting.
Usethefrontpanelfunctionbuttons0116toselecttrack
1.
WiththeARPON/OFFbuttonoff,playthekeyboardand
tracks1and2willsoundsimultaneously.
WhenyouturnontheARPON/OFFbuttonandplaythe
keyboard,arpeggiatorAwilloperatefortrack1and
arpeggiatorBwilloperatefortrack2.
Example 2)
Fortracks1,2and3,settheMIDIChannel(MIDI
Ch.p.39)to01,02,and03respectively,andsetStatus
(p.38)toINT.
AssignarpeggiatorAtotracks1and2,andarpeggiatorBto
track3.
TurnontheArpeggiatorA,BRunsetting.
InTrackSelect,chooseTrack01.
PlayingthekeyboardwhentheARPON/OFFbuttonis
offwillplaythesoundassignedtotrack1.
onwillcausearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,
andproducesoundforbothtracks.
onwillcausearpeggiatorAtooperatefortracks1and2,
andproducesoundforbothtracks.
onwillcausearpeggiatorBtooperatefortrack3,and
playthesoundassignedtotrack3.
Alternatively,youcanusethe0116buttonstoselect
track1,startarpeggiatorAtoplaytracks1and2,and
useanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtothemicroS
TATIONsMIDIINtotransmitnotedataonMIDI
channel3totriggerarpeggiatorBandplaytrack3.
Thearpeggiatorcannotbetriggeredbythenotes
playedbythesequencer.
IfthetrackStatus(p.38)issettoINTorBTH,tracks
116wherearpeggiatorAorBareassignedwillbe
soundedbythenotedatageneratedbythearpeggiator,
regardlessoftheMIDIChannel(MIDICh.p.39)set
tingofthattrack.IfthetrackStatusissettoBTH,
EXT,orEX2,thetrackwilltransmitMIDInotedataon
theMIDIChannelofthattrack.
Inthiscase,arpeggiatorAorBwillbetriggeredbythe
MIDIChannelofanytrack116wherethecorrespond
ingarpeggiatorisassigned.
IftheLocalControlOn(LocalCtrlp.61)isturned
OFF,thearpeggiatorwillnotbetriggeredbynotedata
fromthekeyboard.Itwillbetriggeredbynotedata
receivedatMIDIIN.Ifyouwishtorecordjustthetrig
gernotesonanexternalsequencerandrunthemicroS
TATIONsarpeggiatorinthisway,turnLocalControl
OFF.
Ifyouwantthenotedatageneratedbythearpeggiator
toberecordedontheexternalsequencer,turnLocal
ControlON,andturnofftheechobackfunctionofthe
externalsequencer.(p.311)
Status [Off, INT, BTH, EXT, EX2]
ThissetswhethertheTrackcontrolstheinternalsounds,
externalMIDIdevices,orboth.
Off:UsethistodisabletheTrack.Withthissetting,the
TracksProgramwillnotsound,andMIDIdatawillnotbe
transmitted.
INT:Thetrackwillsoundwhenyouplaybacktheperfor
mancedatarecordedontheMIDItrack.IfyouselectaMIDI
trackthatissettoINT,themicroSTATIONssoundgenera
torwillproducesoundwhenplayed.MIDIdatawillnotbe
transmittedtoanexternaldevice.
BTH:BothINTandEXTareoperative.Whenthemusical
datarecordedintheMIDItrackisplayedback,orwhenyou
selectaMIDItrackthatissettoBTHandplaythecontrol
lersofthemicroSTATION,theinternaltonegeneratorofthe
microSTATIONwillsound,andMIDIdatawillalsobe
transmittedtoanexternaldevice.
EXT:WhenthemusicaldatarecordedintheMIDItrackis
playedback,orwhenyouselectaMIDItrackthatissetto
EXTandplaythecontrollersofthemicroSTATION,MIDI
datawillbetransmittedtoanexternaldevice,buttheinter
naltonegeneratorofthemicroSTATIONwillnotsound.
Whenyouselectanothersongorreturntothebeginningof
thesong,theprogramchange,volume,panpot,portamento,
sends1and2,postIFXpan,andpostIFXsends1and2of
eachMIDItracksettoEXTwillbetransmittedviaMIDI.
(Trk(TrackMIDIOut)onpage 62)
EX2:ThisenablesyoutospecifyaparticularMIDIBank
SelectmessagefortheTrack,insteadofautomaticallyusing
theBankoftheselectedmicroSTATIONProgram.Usethe
parametersbelow,labeledBankSelectMSB(WhenStatus
=EX2),tosettheBankSelectmessageasdesired.Inother
respectsthisisthesameasEXT,describedabove.
MIDIdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelthatisspecifiedseparatelyforeachMIDItrack
bytheMIDIChannel.
Track2 MIDI Ch=1ch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
ARP Assign
A
B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Ch1
Trigger
= Ch1
Pattern - B
Pattern - A
Pattern - A Track2 MIDI Ch=2ch Status=INT
Arpeggiator
A
Arpeggiator
B
ARP Assign
A
A
Pattern - A
Pattern - B
Trigger
= Ch1, Ch2
Trigger
= Ch3
Track3 MIDI Ch=3ch Status=INT B
Recorded data
Keyboard and
controller operations
Received data
Status
internal
tone
generator
MIDI
OUT
internal tone
generator
MIDI
OUT
INT Yes No Yes
EXT,EX2 No Yes No
BTH Yes Yes Yes
EDIT Tracks
39
MIDI Ch. (MIDI Channel) [01...16]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthattheMIDItrackwilluseto
transmitandreceivemusicaldata.TheMIDIchannelyou
specifyherewillbethereceivechannelwhenStatusis
INT,thetransmitchannelwhenitisEXTorEX2,andthe
receive/transmitchannelwhenitisBTH.TrackssettoINT
whichhavethesameMIDIchannelwillsoundandbecon
trolledidenticallywhentheyreceiveMIDIdataordata
fromthesequencertracks.
OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, Mono, Legt]
Mode(VoiceMode(VoiceAssignMode)onpage 3)set
tings,ifdesired.
PRG:TheProgramsstoredVoiceAssignModesettingswill
beused.
Poly:Thetrackwillplaypolyphonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
Mono:Thetrackwillplaymonophonically,regardlessofthe
Programssettings.
Legt(Legato):Thetrackprogramwillsoundmonophonically,
andwillplaylegatoaccordingtotheProgramssetting.
WiththeMNorLGTsettings,theProgramssettingwill
determinethepriorityofthenotethatsoundswhenyou
playtwoormorenotes.
Portamento [PRG, Off, 001...127]
MakeportamentosettingsforeachMIDItrack.
Theportamentosettingyoumakeherewillbeusedwhen
thesongisplayedorrecordedfromthebeginning.Ifyou
changethesettingwhilerecording,itwillberecordedas
partofthemusicaldata.(HoweverifyousetthistoPRG,it
willnotberecorded.)Youcanchangethissettingduring
playback.HoweverifyouplaybackanyPortamentoOn/Off
dataorPortamentoTimedatathatwaspreviouslyrecorded,
thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
WhenthetrackwhoseStatusisINTorBTH,MIDI
controlchangeCC#05(PortamentoTime)andCC#65
(PortamentoSwitch)canbereceivedtocontrolthisand
changethesetting.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05Porta
mentoTimewillnotbereceived.)
Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothebeginningof
thesong,trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2will
transmitthissettingviaMIDI.IfthisisOff,CC#65with
avalueof0willbetransmitted.Ifthisis001127,a
CC#65of127andCC#05of1127willbetransmitted.
IfthisissettoPRG,nothingwillbetransmitted.
ThisdataistransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelspecifiedforeachtrackbyMIDICh.(Trk
(TrackMIDIOut)onpage 62)
Transpose [60...+00...+60]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinsemitonesteps.12
unitsequaloneoctave.
Detune [1200...+0000... +1200]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinonecentunits.
+0000:Normalpitch.
TransposeandDetunedonotaffectthenotes
transmittedviaMIDIOut.TransposeandDetune
canbecontrolledviaMIDIRPNmessagesreceivedon
theTracksMIDIchannel.Thewaythatthisworks
dependsonwhetherornottheTrackusesaDrumPro
gram.
Programsthatuseoneortwooscillatorscanreceive
MIDIRPNcoarsetunemessagestocontrolthe
Transposesettingandfinetunemessagestocon
troltheDetunesetting.
Drumprogramswhichuseadrumkitcanreceive
MIDIRPNcoarsetuneandfinetunemessagesto
controltheDetunesetting.Therangeofcontrolis
atotalof+/1octavewhencoarsetuneandfinetune
areaddedtogether.
Bend Range [PRG, 24...+0...+24]
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccurwhen
thepitchbenderisoperated,insemitoneunits.
used.
intheprogram.
AslongasthissettosomethingotherthanPRG,you
cancontroltheBendRangeusingMIDIRPNPitch
BendChangemessages.
Tone parameters
TheProgrammodetoneparametersintheFilter/Amp
throughtheFilter/AmpEGgroupscanbeeditedindividu
allyforeachtrack.
TheseparametersareRelativeparameters.Theyapplyan
upwardordownwardadjustmenttothevalueofthepro
gramparameter.
Thesechangesaresavedinthesong,anddonotaffectthe
originalprogram.
Someparametersinthesegroupsareinterrelatedwith
controlbyspecificMIDICCmessages.Thevaluesof
theseparametersarefollowedbyanindicationsuchas
CC#74.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInteractionbetween
parametersandMIDICCsonpage 79.
Filter/Amp:
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#71)]
bothFiltersAandB.
Filt EG Int (Filter EG Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#79)]
ItaffectsFiltersAandBsimultaneously.(FiltEGInt(Fil
terEGIntensity)onpage 21)
AmpVel Int (Amp Velocity Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel)]
(AmpVelInt(AmpVelocityIntensity)onpage 21)
Filter/Amp EG:
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#73)]
withotherrelatedparameters.(Attack(Filter/AmpEG
AttackTime)onpage 21)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#75)]
EGs.
Sequencer mode
40
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#70)]
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#72)]
Key Zone:
Here,youcanspecifythekeyzonesinwhichMIDItracks1
16willsound.
Thetop/bottomkeysettingsspecifythezoneinwhichMIDI
tracks116willsound,andthetop/bottomslopesettings
specifythekeyrangeoverwhichthevolumewillchange
startingfromthetop/bottomkey.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKeyZoneonpage 21.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/recep
tion.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecordedinto
theinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromtheinter
nalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbetransmitted.
Top [C1...G9]
soundforeachMIDItrack.
Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthetopkey.
ward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctavebelow
thetopkey.
ward,andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesbelow
thetopkey.
Btm Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
0:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginallevelfromthebottom
key.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumeoneoctaveabovethebot
tomkey.
andwillreachtheoriginalvolumesixoctavesabovethebot
tomkey.
Bottom [C1...G9]
TopKeyandBottomKeysettingscanalsobeinputbyhold
board.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomkeyabovethetop
keyofthesametrack.Norisitpos
Vel Zone (Velocity Zone):
Here,youcansettheTop/BottomVelocityparametersto
specifytherangeofvelocitiesthatwillbesoundedbyMIDI
tracks116,andTop/BottomSlopespecifytherangeover
whichthevolumewillbeadjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeVelZone(VelocityZone)
onpage 22.
ThesesettingsdonotaffectMIDItransmission/recep
tion.Allnotedatathatisreceivedwillberecordedinto
theinternalsequencer,andallnotedatafromtheinter
nalsequencerorfromthekeyboardwillbetransmitted.
Itisnotpossibletosetthebottomvelocitygreaterthan
thetopvelocityforthesametrack.Norcanthetop
slopeandthebottomslopeoverlap.
Top [1...127]
track.
Top Slope [000...120]
000:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthetop
velocity.
thetopvelocity.
Btm Slope [000...120]
ity.
000:Thevolumewillbeattheoriginalvaluefromthebot
tomvelocity.
thebottomvelocity.
Bottom [001...127]
Specifiestheminimumvelocitythatwillbesoundedby
eachMIDItrack116.
TopVelocityandBottomVelocitysettingscanalsobeinput
byholdingdowntheKEYbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
MIDI Filter:
Prog Chg (Program Change) [Off, On]
willbereceived.
Damper [Off, On]
messageswillbereceived.
Bottom Key Top Key
Key
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
Bottom Velocity Top Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Bottom Slope
Top Slope
EDIT Tracks
41
JS X asAMS [Off, On]
bendmessagereception.)Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 287.
JS+Y [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthejoy
stick,orarealtimecontrolknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
JSY [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthejoy
stick,orarealtimecontrolknobassignsetting)willbe
received.
Knob 1A [Off, On]
Knob 2A [Off, On]
Knob 3A [Off, On]
Knob 4A [Off, On]
ThesesettingsenableordisablereceptionoftheMIDImes
sagesassignedtoknobs14whentheRealtimeControl
Amodeisselected.
Knob 1B [Off, On]
Knob 2B [Off, On]
Knob 3B [Off, On]
Knob 4B [Off, On]
sagesassignedtoknobs14whentheRealtimeControlB
modeisselected.
Foot Switch [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheAssignableswitch
willbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal/Media:
ControllersPEDAL/SWpage.Thisfiltersettingisvalid
whenaMIDIcontrolchangeisassigned.
SpecifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheAssignablepedal
willbereceived.ThefunctionisassignedinGlobal/Media:
ControllersPEDAL/SWpage.Thisfiltersettingisvalid
whenaMIDIcontrolchangeisassigned.
Play Loop
Loop [Off, On]
SpecifiesloopingforaMIDItrack.
On:ThattrackwillloopbetweenStartMandEndM.
Start M (Loop Start Measure) [001...999]
Specifiesthefirstmeasureoftheloop.
End M (Loop End Measure) [001...999]
Specifiesthelastmeasureoftheloop.
Play Intro [Off, On]
On:AfterthemeasuresbeforethespecifiedStartMare
playedonce,theregionofStartMEndMwillbe
playedrepeatedly.
Forexample,youcanusethisonadrumtracktomakeit
playafillinandthenbeginlooping.
Off:PlaybackwillbeginfromtheStartM,andwillbegin
loopingimmediately.
ThissettingisvalidifLoopisOnandStartMisset
tootherthan001.
Examples:SetStartM:003andEndM:004
IfPlayIntroisturnedOn
Thetrackwillloopasfollows:
M001M002M003M004M003M004M003M004...
IfPlayIntroisturnedOff
Thetrackwillloopasfollows:
M003M004M003M004M003M004M003M004...
YoucantakeadvantageofPlayLooptomaketherealtime
recordingprocessmoreefficient.
Rename
Rename [!...~]
Hereyoucaneditthenameofthetrack.Usethebut
tonstoselectacharacter,andusethebuttonstospecify
thedesiredcharacter.Youcanenteruptotwentyfourchar
acters.
Track02...Track16 (Track Number)
Here,youcansettheparametersfortracks216.Theset
tingsarethesameasfortrack1.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrack01(TrackNum
ber)onpage 36.
Sequencer mode
42
Track Edit
ThesecommandsletyoueditMIDItracks116andthemas
tertrack.ForMIDItracks,youcancopy,move,insert,or
deletespecifiedmeasuresortracks.
Forthemastertrack,youcaneditthetempoandtimesigna
ture.
Usefunctionbuttons0116toselectatrackandaccessthe
editpage.Settheparametersasdesired,accesstheOK?
displayandpressthebuttontobegintheoperation.
Song Length
Thiscommandchangesthelength(numberofmeasures)of
thesong.Executingthiswillchangethelengthofthemaster
track,changingthenumberofmeasuresthatwillplay.
Length [001...999]
Specifythelengthofthesong.
AnydatainmeasuresbeyondthespecifiedLength
willbedeleted.
Erase Track
Thiscommanderasesdatafromthespecifiedtrack.
Itisnotpossibletoerasejustthemastertrackalone.
Track [01...16]
Specifythetrackwhosedatawillbeerased.
All Tracks [No, Yes]
No:Theperformancedatawillbeerasedonlyfromthetrack
youspecifiedinTrack.
Yes:Theperformancedatawillbeerasedfromalltracks.
Copy Track
Thiscommandcopiesperformancedatafromthecopy
sourcetracktothespecifieddestinationtrack.Beawarethat
thetrackdatainthecopydestinationwillbeerasedwhen
youbeginthecopytrackoperation.
From Track [01...16]
Specifythecopysourcetrack.Thetrackthatscurrently
selectedwillbethedefault.
To Track [01...16]
Specifythecopydestinationtrack.
Erase Measure
Thiscommanderasesvarioustypesofperformancedata
fromthespecifiedmeasures.Youcanalsousetheerase
measurecommandtoeraseonlyaspecifictypeofdata.
Unlikethedeletemeasurecommand,theerasemeasure
commandwillnotcausetheperformancedataofsubse
quentmeasurestomoveforward.
Track [01...16]
Specifythetrackfromwhichyouwanttoerasedata.
TrksM***M*** [001...999]
Specifythemeasuresfromwhichyouwanttoerasedata.
Kind [All, Note, Ctrl Chg, AfterT, PitchBend,
Prog Chg, SysEX]
Selectthetypeofdatathatyouwanttoerase.
All:Alltypesofdatainthetrackwillbeerased.
Note:Notedatawillbeerased.
CtrlChg:Controlchangedatawillbeerased.
AfterT:Bothchannelpressureandpolyphonickeypressure
willbeerased.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbeerased.
ProgChg:Programchangedatawillbeerased.
SysEX:Systemexclusivedatawillbeerased.
All Tracks [Yes, No]
Specifywhetherdatawillbeerasedfromalltracksorfrom
onlythespecifiedtrack.
No:ThedataspecifiedbyKindwillbeerasedonlyfrom
theselectedtrack.
Yes:ThedataspecifiedbyKindwillbeerasedfromall
tracks.
Ifcontroldataextendsacrosstheboundarybetween
theerasedregionofmeasuresandanunerasedregion,
onlythedatawithinthespecifiedregionwillbeerased.
Beawarethatifthereisnotedatathatsustainsacross
severalmeasures,erasinganinterveningmeasurewill
causethatnotedatatobeerasedfromthesubsequent
measureaswell.
Delete Measure
Thiscommanddeletesthespecifiedmeasures.Whenyou
usethedeletemeasurecommand,theperformancedatathat
followsthedeletedmeasureswillmoveforwardtofillthe
gap.
Track [01...16]
Specifythetrackfromwhichyouwanttodeletemeasures.
TrksM***M*** [001...999]
Specifythemeasurestobedeleted.
Specifywhetherthemeasureswillbedeletedfromalltracks
orfromonlythespecifiedtrack.
No:Themeasureswillbedeletedonlyfromthespecified
track.
Yes:Themeasureswillbedeletedfromalltracks.
IfyouusethiscommandwithAllTrackssettoNo,
themastertrackwillnotbedeleted.Thetimesignature
andtempodatawillremainasitwas,meaningthatthe
timesignatureandtempowillchangeforthemeasures
thatweremovedforwardbythedeletion.
Before erasure 2 1 5 4 3
No data
After erasure
Example: If you erase measures 2--3, measures 2--3 will be empty.
2 1 5 4 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1
7 8
5 4 3
Before
deletion
After
deletion
Example: If you delete measures 35, the performance data of measures 68
will move forward.
EDIT Track Edit
43
IfyouselectthiscommandwithAllTrackssettoYes,
theperformancedataofalltracksincludingthemaster
trackwillbedeletedfromthespecifiedmeasures,and
thetimesignatureandtempowillalsomoveforward
bythecorrespondingnumberofmeasures.
Ifanydataextendsacrosstheboundarybetween
deletedandundeletedmeasures,thedatawillbe
deletedonlyfromthespecifiedregion.
Ifyoudeletemeasuresfromwithinaregionthatnote
dataextendsacross,thenotedatawillbedeletedfrom
thefollowingmeasuresaswell.
Insert Measure
Thiscommandinsertsthespecifiednumberofmeasures
intothespecifiedtrack.Whenyouselecttheinsertmeasure
command,theperformancedatafollowingtheinsertloca
tionwillbemovedbackward.
Ifyouinsertmeasuresatalocationwithinanotethatiscon
nectedbyatie,anoteoffwillbecreatedimmediatelybefore
theinsertlocation,andtherestofthatnotewillbeerased.
Track [01...16]
Specifythetrackinwhichmeasureswillbeinserted.
at Measure [001...999]
Specifythelocationatwhichmeasureswillbeinserted.
Length [001...999]
Specifythenumberofmeasuresthatwillbeinserted.
Time Sig [**/**, 1/4...16/16]
Specifythetimesignatureofthemeasuresthatwillbe
inserted.
Ifyouwantthetimesignatureoftheinsertedmeasuresto
matchtheexistingtimesignature,choose**/**.Withanyset
tingotherthan**/**,thetimesignatureoftheinsertedmea
sureswillbechanged,sothatalltrackswillbethespecified
timesignature.
Specifywhethermeasureswillbeinsertedintoalltracks.
No:Measureswillbeinsertedonlyintothetrackyouspec
ify.Theperformancedatafollowingtheinsertlocationwill
bemovedbackwardbythenumberofmeasuresinserted;be
awarethatthetimesignatureandtempowillnotmove.
Yes:Measureswillbeinsertedintoalltracksincludingthe
mastertrack.Performancedatafollowingtheinsertedmea
sureswillplayinthesamewayasbeforeyouexecutedthis
command.
Repeat Measure
Thiscommandcopiesperformancedatafromthespecified
regionofmeasuresfromatrackandinsertsitthespecified
numberoftimes.Whenyouusetherepeatmeasurecom
mand,thedatawillbeinsertedstartingatthemeasurethat
followsToEndofMeasure,andtheperformancedatathat
followedthisinsertlocationwillbemovedbackward.If
youveturnedonPlayLoop(p.41)forasong,and
wouldliketoexpandtherepetitionsintoperformancedata,
thiscommandprovidesaconvenientwaytodoso.
Track [01...16]
SpecifythetrackwheretheRepeatMeasurecommandwill
beused.
TrksM***M*** [001...999]
Specifytheregionofmeasuresthatwillberepeated.
Times [002...999]
Specifythenumberoftimesthattheregionwillrepeat.
ForexampleifyousetFromMeasureto001,ToEndof
Measureto004,andTimesto002,thentheperformance
dataofmeasures14willbeinsertedatmeasures58,with
theresultthatmeasures14willbeplayedtwice.
No:Theperformancedatawillbeinsertedintothetrack
thatscurrentlyselected.Performancedatafollowingthe
insertlocationwillbemovedbackwardbythenumberof
measuresinserted,butthetimesignatureandtempowill
notmove.
Yes:Theperformancedatawillbeinsertedintoalltracks
includingthemastertrack.Performancedatafollowingthe
insertedmeasureswillplayasitdidbefore.
Track 2 2 (3/4) 1 (4/4) 3 (3/4)
Track 1 2 (3/4) 1 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 4 (4/4) 5 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 5 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 4 (4/4) Track 2
1 (4/4) 3 (3/4) 5 (4/4) 2 (3/4) 4 (4/4) Track 1
Before deletion
After deletion
Example: If you delete measures 23 (3/4 time signature) from track 2, the performance data that
was in measures 45 will move forward, and the time signature will change to 3/4 time.
Time signature = */*
Track 2 5 (2/4) 4 (5/4) 1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 3 (7/8)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (7/8) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (7/8)
Track 2
5 (2/4) 4 (5/4) Track 2 1 (4/4) 2 (4/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4)
1 (4/4) 2 (4/4) 4 (5/4) 5 (2/4) 3 (3/4) Track 1
Track 1
Track 1
Track 2
Track 1
Time signature = 7/8
Before insertion
Insert two measures
Before insertion
After insertion
After insertion
Insert two measures
Measures 45 will be the previously-specifed
time signature.
Measures 23 will have a time signature of 7/8, and measures
45 will be the previously-specifed time signature.
Track 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
Track 1
Before Repeat
Measure
After Repeat
Measure
When you use the Repeat Measure operation on measures 1--4
with Time set to 2, measures 1--4 will be inserted at measures 5--8.
Sequencer mode
44
Copy Measure
Thiscommandcopiesperformancedatafromthecopy
sourcetothespecifiedmeasure.
WhenyouusetheCopyMeasurecommand,thetrackdata
atthecopydestinationwillbeoverwritten.
From Track [01...16]
Specifythecopysourcetrack.
TrksM***M*** [001...999]
Specifytheregionofcopysourcemeasures.
No:Theperformancedatawillbecopiedfromthetrack
thatscurrentlyselected.Beawarethatalthoughtheperfor
mancedataatthecopydestinationwillbeoverwritten,the
timesignatureandtempowillnotbeoverwritten.
Yes:Theperformancedataofalltracksincludingthemaster
trackwillbecopied.
To [S000...S127]
Specifythecopydestinationsong.
To Track [01...16]
Specifythecopydestinationtrack.ThisisavailableofAll
TracksisNo.
To Measure [001...999]
Specifythestartingmeasurewherethedatawillbecopied.
Create Control (Create Control Data)
Thiscommandcreatescontrolchange,aftertouch,orpitch
benddatainthespecifiedregionofaMIDItrack.
Track [01...16]
SpecifythetrackwhereyoullusetheCreateControlData
command.
From [001:01...999:16]
To [001:01...999:16]
Specifytheregioninwhichthecontroldatawillbecreated.
Kind [CC#000...119, AfterT, PitchBend]
Specifythetypeofperformancedata(event)thatwillbecre
ated.
CC#000...119:Controlchangedatawillbecreated.
AfterT:Aftertouchdatawillbecreated.
PitchBend:Pitchbenddatawillbecreated.
Start Val (Start Value) [000...127]
End Val (End Value) [000...127]
Specifythevaluesofthecontroldataatthestartandendof
theregion.
Bydefault,StartValwillbesettothecurrentvalueatthe
startposition.Ifyouwanttocreatecontroldatathat
changessmoothlyfromthestartposition,leaveStartVal
atthissetting,andchangeonlytheEndVal.
ExecutingtheCreateControlDatacommandwill
occupyalargeamountofsequencermemory.This
meansthatyoumaybeunabletousethecommandif
thereisinsufficientmemoryremaining.Insuchcases,
youshouldfirstusetheQuantizecommandtodelete
unneededcontroldata.Alternatively,youcanapplythe
Quantizecommandtodatathatwascreatedbythe
CreateControlDatacommand.
Quantize
ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingoftherecordedMIDI
data(notedata,controlchange,aftertouch,pitchbend,pro
gramchange,etc.).
WhenyouusetheQuantizecommand,theperformance
datawillbemodifiedasfollows.
IfyouusetheQuantizecommandonnotedata,the
timingofeachnoteonwillbecorrected,butthelength
(duration)willnotchange.
IfyousetthequantizeresolutiontoHi,correctionwillbe
appliedatthebaseresolution(,/480),meaningthatnote
datawillnotbeaffected.Forexample,continuously
varyingdatasuchasjoystickoraftertouchoccupiesa
largeamountofmemory,butwhenyouuseQuantize,
multipleitemsofsuchdatathatchangewithinasingle
intervalofthespecifiedquantizeresolutionwillbe
combinedintoasingleitem,conservingmemory.
Memorywillalsobeconservedsinceitemsofcontrol
dataoftheidenticaltimingandidenticalvaluewillbe
combinedintoone.
Track [01...16]
SpecifythetrackwheretheQuantizeoperationwillbe
applied.
From [001:01...999:16]
To [001:01...999:16]
SpecifythetrackwheretheQuantizeoperationwillbe
applied.
Kind [Note, Others]
Selectthetypeofperformancedata(events)thatwillbe
quantized.
Note:Notedatawillbequantized.UseBottomandTop
tospecifytherangeofnotes.
Others:Performancedataotherthannoteswillbequan
tized.
Bottom [C1...G9]
Top [C1...G9]
Specifytherangeofnotes.Makethesesettingsifyouveset
KindtoNote.Bottomspecifiesthelowestnoteand
Topspecifiesthehighestnote.Thissettingallowsyouto
quantizeonlyspecificnotes(forexample,justthesnare
notesinadrumtrack).Ifyouwanttoapplyquantizationto
allnotes,setthesetoC01andG9.
Track 1
(copy-source)
2 (4/4) 1 (4/4) 5 (3/4) 4 (3/4) 3 (4/4)
Track 2 (copy-
destination)
6 (3/4) 7 (4/4)
Example: When you copy the performance data from measures 5--7 of track 1
to measure 3 of track 2, measures 3--5 of track 2 will be overwritten.
2 (4/4) 1 (4/4) 5 (3/4) 4 (3/4) 3 (4/4) 6 (3/4) 7 (4/4)
Location 0
3:00 3:120 3:240 3:360 4:00 4:120 4:240
After touch
127
100
Previous data
Start location End location
End Value
Start Value
default
value
The controller is aftertouch. The start location is 3:240, end location is 4:120,
and end value is 100. This will cause aftertouch values to change starting at
3:240, and reach a value of 100 at 4:120.
EDIT Knob Assign
45
Resolution [Hi...1/4]
Specifythetimingintervalwheredatawillbeadjusted.
Acoarserresolutionwillsavememory,butwillalsomake
theperformancedatachangemoreabruptly.
Swing [-300%...+300%]
Applyafeelofswingtotherhythm.Forexample,thislets
youeasilygiveasubtleshufflefeeltoasquare16beat.
Withsettingsotherthan0%,thepositionofnotesateven
numberedbeatsofthespecifiedResolutionwillbe
adjustedtogivetherhythmasenseofswing.
Withasettingof+100%,noteswillbemoved1/3oftheway
fromintervalsofthespecifiedResolution.Withasetting
of+300%,notesatevennumberedbeatswillbemovedall
thewaytothepositionofthenextoddnumberedbeat.
Edit Tempo
Thiscommandeditsthetempodataofthemastertrack.
Mode [Create, Erase]
Specifyhowthemastertrackwillbeedited.
Create:Tempodatawillbecreatedinthespecifiedregion.
Erase:Tempodatawillbeerasedfromthespecifiedregion.
From [001:01...999:16]
To [001:01...999:16]
Specifytheregioninwhichtempodatawillbeedited.
IfModeisErase,thisspecifiestheregionfromwhich
tempodatawillbeerased.
IfModeisCreate,thisspecifiestheregioninwhich
tempodatawillbecreated.
Start [030.00...300.00]
End [030.00...300.00]
WhenModeissettoCreate,thesefieldsspecifythestart
ingandendingvaluesofthetempodatathatwillbecre
ated.(StartVal(StartValue)onpage 44)
Edit Time Sig.
Thiscommandeditsthetimesignaturesettingofthemas
tertrack.
M [001...]
Specifythemeasurewhosetimesignaturewillbechanged.
TS [1/4...16/16]
Specifythetimesignature.
Knob Assign
Here,youcanassignthefunctions(mainlytypesofcontrol
change)thatknobs14willhavewhenRealTimeControlB
mode.
Knob 1B [Off, ...MIDI CC#119]
REALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbuttontoselectBmode,
andoperateknobs14.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRealtimeControlKnob1
4Assignonpage 294.
Tempo
Thisspecifiesthetempoofthesong.Songplayback,arpeg
giator,LFOs,andeffectscanbesynchronizedtothetempo
youspecifyhere.
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Specifythetempo.(,(Tempo)onpage 31)
ARP (Arpeggiator)
Here,youcanspecifyhowthearpeggiatorwilloperatein
Sequencermode.Thesesettingscanbemadeforeachsong.
InSequencermode(asinCombinationmode),youcanrun
thetwoarpeggiatorssimultaneously.
Thisallowsyoutoapplydifferentarpeggiopatternstotwo
soundsthathavebeensplitacrossthekeyboard,oruse
velocitytoswitchbetweentwodifferentarpeggiopatterns,
etc.
InSequencermodeyoucanrecordtheperformancedata
thatsgeneratedbythearpeggiators.Whendoingso,you
canchangethearpeggiopatternorparameterswhileyou
record,andselectRealtimeControlCmodeandoperatethe
knobstomodifythearpeggiopattern.
Itisnotpossibletosetindependenttemposforthe
arpeggiatorandthesequencer.
WhenMIDIClock(Clock(MIDIClockSource)on
page 62)isInternal,thearpeggiatorcanbesynchronizedto
theinternalsequencer.
WhenyouturnonthearpeggiatorandpresstheSTART/
STOPbutton,thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizewiththe
sequencer.
WhenyoupresstheSTART/STOPbutton,thearpeg
giatorandsequencerwillbothstop.Ifyouwishtostop
onlythearpeggiator,presstheARPON/OFFbuttonto
turnoff.
WhenthearpeggiatorKeySyncisoff,youcanturnonthe
ARPON/OFFbuttonandplaythekeyboardtostartthe
arpeggiatorduringtheprecountbeforerealtimerecording
begins.Thatway,thearpeggiatorperformancewillbe
recordedfromthebeginningofthepatternwhenrecording
starts.
IfMIDIClockSource(Clock(MIDIClockSource)
onpage 62)issettoExt.MIDIorExt.USB,youcancon
trolthisinthesamewaybyusingMIDIrealtimeclock
commandsreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevicecon
nectedtotheMIDIINorUSBconnector.Inthiscase,
Swing=0%
Swing=+100%
Swing=-100%
Swing=+200%
Swing=+300%
+100%
0%
+200%
+300%
-100%
beat 1 beat 2 beat 3 beat 4
When "Resolution" = ,
Sequencer mode
46
sequencerstart/stopcanalsobecontrolledusingthe
microSTATIONsequencersSTART/STOPbutton.
ARP-A Setup
Run [Off, On]
Pattern [P0...P4, 0000 (INT)...1023(INT),
1024 (USER)...1151(USER)]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Gate[%] [000...100, Step]
Swing[%] [100...+100]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Top Key [C1...G9]
BottomKey [C1...G9]
Top Vel [001...127]
BottomVel [001...127]
These are the arpeggiator A parameters for the song.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeARPSetuponpage 9,
ARP(Arpeggiator)onpage 23.
ARP-B Setup
Hereyoucanmakesettingsfortheotherarpeggiator
(arpeggiatorB).Theparametersarethesameasforarpeggi
atorA(ARPA).
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsfortheinserteffects.These
effectparameters.
themixersettingsforthesignalsthathavepassed
throughtheinserteffects.
(Wet)soundwilldependonthetypeofeffect(In/Out
onpage 208).
(IFX1,IFX2,IFX3,IFX4,IFX5onpage 11)
However,inserteffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)andthe
Pan(CC#8),Send1,andSend2parametersthatfol
lowtheinserteffectwillbecontrolledbytheMIDIchannel
specifiedbyCh(ControlChannel),unlikeinProgram
mode.ThecontrolchangesusedarethesameasinProgram
mode.(IFX1onpage 11)
Thepan(CC#8),send1and2settingsyoumakeherewillbe
usedwhenthesongisplayedorrecordedfromthebegin
ning.IfyouchangethesettingswhilerecordingaMIDI
track,thechangeswillberecordedaspartofthemusical
data,andthesettingswillchangewhenthedataisplayed
back.Youcanalsochangethesesettingsduringplayback.
Howeverifpan(CC#8),send1,or2datahasbeenrecorded,
thesettingswillchangeaccordingly.
IfStatusiseitherINTorBTH,CC#8,CC#93,and
CC#91canbereceivedtocontrolthepanfollowingthe
inserteffect,send1,orsend2respectively,andchange
theirsettings.Whenyouswitchsongsorreturntothe
beginningofthesong,trackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,
orEX2willtransmitthesesettingsviaMIDI.
MessagesaretransmittedandreceivedontheMIDI
channelspecifiedbytheCh(ControlChannel)set
tingofeachinserteffect.(Global/Media:MIDISEQ
ModeTrkp.62)
IFX1
IFX Select [S00...S63, D01...D10]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect1.(IFXSelect
onpage 11)
IFX Parameters
byIFXSelect.(IFXParametersonpage 11)
Guide(p.217).
On/Off [Off, On]
SeeOn/Offonpage11.
nel)onpage 25.
Chain [Off, On]
Pan (CC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFX1onpage 11.
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects24.
SeeIFX2,IFX3,IFX4onpage 12.
IFX Select [S00...S61, D01...D09]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffects24.
SeeIFXSelectonpage 12.
IFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
SeeOn/Offonpage 11.
EDIT MFX1, MFX2
47
nel)onpage 25..
Chain [Off, On]
Pan (CC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
(IFX1,IFX2,IFX3,IFX4,IFX5onpage 11)
IFX5
SeeIFX5onpage 12.
IFX Select [000...61]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect.IFX5cannotuse
doublesizeeffects.
IFX Parameters
On/Off [Off, On]
SeeOn/Offonpage 11.
nel)onpage 25..
Chain [Off, On]
Pan (CC#8) [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFX5onpage 12.
MFX1, MFX2
effectparameters.
totheL/Rbus.
(MFX1,MFX2onpage 13)
MFX1, MFX2
MFX Select [S00...S87, D00...D13]
MFX Parameters
MFX On/Off [Off, On]
SeeMFX1,MFX2onpage 13.
SeeCtrlCh(ControlChannel)onpage 25.
Return 1 [000...127]
Chain On/Off [Off, On]
Chain Level [000...127]
SeeMFX1,MFX2onpage 13.
TFX (Total Effect)
parameters.
(TFXonpage 13)
TFX
TFX Select [000...61]
TFX Parameters
SeeTFXonpage 13.
SeeCtrlCh(ControlChannel)onpage 25.
TFX On/Off [Off, On]
SeeTFXonpage 13.
Master Vol
MONOandR.
Sequencer mode
48
Command
Copy ARP
SeeCopyArpeggioonpage14,27.
Copy IFX
gram,combination,orsong(CopyIFXonpage 14).
Swap IFX
effects(SwapIFXonpage 14).
swapped.
Copy MFX/TFX
gram,combination,orsong(CopyMFX/TFXon
page 14).
Song Command
Thesecommandsletyouperformsongoperationssuchas
creatinganewsong,copyingasong,orrenamingasong.
Settheparametersasdesired,accesstheOK?prompt,
andthenpressthebuttontobegin.
Memory Status
Thisdisplaystheremainingamountofsequencermemory.
Create New (Create New Song)
Thiscommandcreatesanewsong.
Length [001...999]
Specifythelengthofthesongthatwillbecreated,asanum
berofmeasures.
Note:Ifyouwanttochangethelengthaftercreatingasong,
usetheTrackEditcommandSetSongLength(p.42).
Whencreatinganewsong,youcansetthesonglengthtobe
longerthanyouexpecttoneed,andthenuseSetSong
Lengthtorespecifythelengthwhenyouvefinished
recordingandediting.
Rename (Rename Song)
Hereyoucaneditthenameofthesong.Usethebuttonsto
selectacharacter,andusethebuttonstospecifythe
desiredcharacter.Youcanenteruptotwentyfourcharacters.
Delete (Delete Song)
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedsong.
Whenyouusethiscommand,themusicaldata,settingdata,
andeffectssettingsetc.ofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillbe
erased,andthememoryareaallocatedtothatsongwillbe
freed.
Copy Song (Copy From Song)
Thiscommandcopiesallsettingsandperformancedata
fromaspecifiedsongtothesongthatscurrentlyselected.
Whenyouusethiscommand,thesettingsandperformance
dataofthecurrentlyselectedsongwillallbedeletedand
overwrittenbythecopysourcedata.
From [S000...]
Selectthecopysourcesong.
Load Template
Thiscommandloadsatemplatesong.
Thebuiltinsequencercontainssixteendifferentpresettem
platesongs(P0015)thatcontainsettingsforprogramsand
effectsappropriateforvariousmusicalstyles.Youarealsofree
tocreateyourownfavoritesettingsforprograms,trackparam
eters,andeffects,andsavethemasoneofsixteenusertem
platesongs(U0015).(SaveTemplateonpage 48)
From [P00...P15, U00...U15]
Selectthetemplatesongthatwillbeloaded.
Note:Adrumcategoryprogramisassignedtotrack1for
eachofthesixteenpresettemplatesongs.
Save Template
Thiscommandsavestheprogramselections,trackparame
ters,andeffectsettingsetc.ofthecurrentsongasauser
templatesongU0015.
To [U00...U15]
Selecttheusertemplatesong(U0015)thatwillbethesave
destination.Whenyouselectthecommand,allsettingsof
thesavedestinationusertemplatesongwillbedeletedand
overwritten.
FF/REW Speed
Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedatwhichfastforwardor
rewindwilloccurwhenyoupressthe(FF)buttonor
(REW)button.
Speed [1...4]
Specifythespeedoffastforwardandrewind.
Thissettingisrelativetotheplaybacktempo.Asettingof1
isthesamespeedastheplaybacktempo.Settingsof24are
respectivelytwotimes,threetimes,orfourtimestheplay
backtempo.
Note:Thefastforwardorrewindspeedmaybeslowerin
areaswheretheperformancedataisconcentrated.Thefast
forwardandrewindspeedswilldifferdependingon
whetheranareacontainsdenselypackedperformancedata.
IgnoreTmpo (Ignore Tempo) [Off, On]
IfthisisOn,fastforwardandrewindwillignoretheplay
backtempoandthedurationofthenotes.
Thefastforwardandrewindspeedswilldifferdependingon
whetheranareacontainsdenselypackedperformancedata.
IfthisisOff,fastforwardandrewindwilloccuratthe
speedspecifiedbySpeed.
Song Command Command
49
Location Point
WhenyoupresstheLOCATEbutton,youwillmovetothe
locationspecifiedhere.
Loc (Location) [001: 01...999: 16]
Thisspecifiesthelocationwhereyoullmovewhenyou
presstheLOCATEbutton.
Fromtheleft,thevaluesindicatethemeasure(001999)and
beat(0116).
Ifyousetthisto001:01andpresstheLOCATEbutton,youll
returntothebeginningofthesong.
Note:Whenthisdialogboxisnotopen,youcanholddown
theWRITEbuttonandpresstheLOCATEbuttontoassign
thecurrentlocationastheLocvalue.
GM Initialize
ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystemOnmessagetothe
Sequencermode,resettingalltrackstotheGMsettings.
PleaseseeGMInitializeListbelow.
InSequencermode,whenaGMSystemOnmessageis
receivedfromanexternaldevice,orifaGMSystemOn
messageisrecordedinthesequencedata,themicroS
TATIONwillberesettosettingsappropriateforGM
justasifyouhadexecutedthiscommand.However,in
thesecases,thevariousmastereffectsandtotaleffect
parameterswillnotbereset.
GM Initialize List
*:AppropriateprogramsfromtheKEYBOARDDRUMS/MALLET/HITScategoriesareassignedtoeachtrack.
Page Parameter Track 19, 1116 Track 10
TrackParameter EDITTracks
ProgramSelect G001* g(d)001*
Play/Mute Settingremainsunchanged
Pan C064 C064
Volume 100 100
Bus L/R L/R
Send1 0 0
Send2 40 40
FXCtrlBus
ARPAssign Settingremainsunchanged
Status Settingremainsunchanged
MIDICh. Settingremainsunchanged
OSCMode Settingremainsunchanged
Portamnto Off Off
Transpose +00 +00
Detune +0000 +0000
BendRange +02 +02
KeyZone C1...G9(Slope=000) C1...G9
VelZone 001...127(Slope=000) 001...127
MIDIFilter On On
Arpeggiator ARP Variousparameters Settingremainsunchanged
IFX
IFX1
IFX2
IFX3
IFX4
IFX5
EffectType Settingremainsunchanged
Pan:#8 Settingremainsunchanged
FXCtrlBus Settingremainsunchanged
Send1,Send2 Settingremainsunchanged
Otherparameters Settingremainsunchanged
MFX
MFX1
MFX2
MFX1EffectType St.Chorus
MFX2EffectType ReverbSmoothHall
Chain Off
Level 127
Return1 127
Return2 50
MFXOtherparameters Settingremainsunchanged
TFX TFX Settingremainsunchanged
MasterVolume MasterVol Settingremainsunchanged
Sequencer mode
50
Copy Combi (Copy from Combination)
Thiscommandcopiestheparametersofthespecifiedcom
binationtothesettingdataofthesongthatscurrently
selected.
Note:Onlythetimbresusedbythecombinationwillbecop
ied.TimbresinthecombinationwhoseStatusisOffwill
notbecopied.IfanytimbresaresettoMute,thecorre
spondingtracksofthesongwillbesettoaStatusofOff.
with FX? [No, Yes]
Specifieswhetherthecombinationseffectsettingswillbe
copied.
Multi Rec? [No, Yes]
Specifieswhetherthetracksettingswillbeadjustedor
tracksaddedsothatthesameperformanceandsoundwill
bereproducedduringplaybackaswhenyouweremulti
recordingwiththearpeggiatorson.
Note:Thissettingcompensatesforthestateofthearpeggia
torsinthecombination.Whencopyingacombinationthat
waswrittenwiththearpeggiatorsturnedoff,itisassumed
thatthearpeggiatorswillbeoffinthesongaswell.Ifyou
wantthearpeggiatorstobeoninthesong,writethecombi
nationwiththearpeggiatorsturnedon,andthencopyitto
yoursong.
IfthisisYes,theMIDIchannelsandothersettingsofthe
trackwillbeadjusted.TherecordingtrackandthePlay/
Mutesetting(p.37)willalsobesetautomatically.M
(RecordingMode)(p.34)willbesettoOVW(Overwrite).
(Beawarethattheautomaticallyspecifiedrecordingtrack
andPlay/Mutesettingswillberesetwhenyoureselect
thesong.)
Note:Seebelowfordetailsonthesettingsthatareadjusted.
Thesettingslistedherewillbeadjustedautomatically.
Dependingonthesettingsofthecombination,itmaybe
necessarytomakeotherchangestothetracksettingsin
additiontothoselistedhere.
If the recorded performance is not reproduced
correctly during playback
fyouusethesongcommandCopyCombitocopytheset
tingsofacombination,andthenperformmultitrack
recordingwiththearpeggiatorturnedon,theremaybe
casesinwhichtheperformanceduringrecordingisnot
reproducedcorrectlyduringplayback.
MultipletracksthataresettothesameMIDIchannelarecom
binedintoasinglestreamofperformancedataduringrecord
ing.IfthereisatrackwiththesameMIDIchannelasthetrack
beingplayedbythearpeggiator,thedataplayedbythearpeg
giatorwillbecombinedwiththeperformancedatathatwas
playedmanually,andallofthisdatawillbesoundedbyeach
trackofthesamechannel(ifStatusisINT).
Insuchcases,youcansolvetheproblembycreatingatrack
thatwilldrivethearpeggiatoronadifferentMIDIChannel.
Iftherecordedperformanceisnotreproducedbytheplay
back,checkthefollowingconditions.
Thesettingsdescribedherewillbedoneautomaticallyifyou
selectCopyCombiwithMultiRec?settoYes.Normally
youwillusetheYessettingwhenexecutingthiscommand.In
thiscase,thecorrectionsdescribedherewillnotbenecessary,
butyoucanviewtheseautomaticallyappliedcorrectionshere.
ARPAssginsetting(p.37)
MIDICh.settings(p.39)
1. IfArpeggiatorRunAandBareturnedon,andthe
arpeggiatorisassignedtoatrack,makesurethatgrobal
MIDIChannel(p.60)issettootherthan01.
MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannelissetto01.
1* IftheMIDIChannelofmultipletracksoperatedby
thearpeggiatorissetonlyto01,refertothelinesfor
01only.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare01and
oneotherchannel,suchas01and02,thenrefertothe
linesfor0102,etc.IftheMIDIChannelsettingsare
01andmultipleotherMIDIchannels,suchas01and02
and03,thenrefertothelinefor010203,etc.
2* Correctionisnecessaryonlyifthetracksoperatedbya
singlearpeggiatorareusingonlyMIDIChannel01.
Insomecases,correctionmayalsobenecessaryifthe
twoarpeggiatorsusethesameMIDIchannel.
Dependingonthecombinationsettings,itmayalsobe
necessarytochangethetracksettingsaswell.
Theprecedingillustrationshowstheexampleofcopyingthe
combinationCategory:BASS&BASSSPLIT032:EchoJam
withMultiRECissettoYesinCopyCombi.Selectanew
song,andselectthecopytoseetheresult.(Formoreabout
thearpeggiatorsettingsinthiscombination,seepagep.23)
Usingthesesettingsasanexample,determinewhethercor
rectionisnecessary,andifso,whatneedstobecorrected.
ArpeggiatorRunAandBareturnedon,andMIDIChannel
01and02areselected.Correctionisnecessaryforoneofthe
arpeggiators.Ifyouperformmultitrackrecordingwith
thesesettings,theMIDIchannelsofT01,02,03,andarethe
same,sothehighregisterguitar(T02),thelowregisterbass
(T01)playedbyarpeggiatorB(T02)willhavetheirperfor
mancedatacombinedintoonestream,andtheperformance
willnotbereproducedatplayback.(T06isadummytrack
usedtotriggerarpeggiatorA.)
1. SothatthebassplayedbyarpeggiatorBcanberecorded
separately,changetheMIDIchannelofT03.
ChangetheT02MIDIChannelto03.
2. AddsettingsfortriggeringarpeggiatorB.
Fortrack8(oranyunusedtrack),turnStatusOff,and
settheMIDIChannelto01.(T08willbeadummytrack
usedtotriggerarpeggiatorB.)
3. Setthetrack8AssigntoB.
Thiswillproducethefollowingsettings
Thiscompletestheadjustments.WiththefrontpanelTIM
BRE/TRACKLEDlit,usethefunctionbuttons0116to
selectthetrackwhoseMIDIchannelis01.Selecttrack1
Track T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08
Assign Off B Off A Off A Off Off
Track T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08
Status INT INT INT INT INT Off INT Off
MIDICh. 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01
ArpeggiatorRun MIDI Channel 1* Correction
If either A or B are
checked
01 only Correction required
01 02, 01 03, etc. No correction required
If both A and B are
checked
01 only Correction required
01 02, 01 03, etc.
Correction required for
only one
01 02 03, etc.
No correction required/
Correction required 2*
Track T01 T02 T03 T04 T05 T06 T07 T08
Assign Off B Off A Off A Off B
Status INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Off
MIDICh. 01 03 01 02 01 01 01 01
External Setup Command
51
through8astherecordingtrack,andproceedwithmulti
trackrecording.
Copy Prog (Copy from Program)
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromtheprogramyouspec
ifytothesongthatscurrentlyselected.
ThisisthesamefunctionasinCombinationmode;for
details,pleaseseeCopyProg(CopyfromProgram)on
page 27
ThiscommandinSequencermodediffersfromitsbehavior
inCombinationmodeinthatthechannelsassignedtothe
tracksofthesongwillbepreservedregardlessoftheWith
Arp?settingofthecopydestinationtracksMIDICh..
External Setup
alitytocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice;presstheEXTER
NALbuttonanduseknobs14totransmitMIDIcontrol
changemessagesonthespecifiedMIDIchannel.
shippedfromthefactory.Forexample,theseincludesetups
thatletyoucontroltheKorgLegacyCollectionofsoftware
synthesizers,andsetupsthatletsyoucontrolDAWsoft
ware.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseemicroSTATIONExternal
Setup(PDF)
thefunctionofeachknobinanexternalsetup(p.64).
canbeedited.
Grid Seq (Grid Sequence)
Whenthesequencerisstopped,youcanpresstheGRID
SEQbuttontousetheGridSequencefunction.Thisletsyou
easilycreatedrumpatternsetc.byusingfunctionbuttons
0116toturneachstepofagridon/off.Whenyouplayback
thesequencer,thefunction0116LEDswilllightupinsyn
chronizationwiththesequencer,allowingyoutoviewthe
drumpatternetc.youcreated.
Note:Youcantturngridnoteson/offduringplaybackor
recording.
What is the grid?
Thefollowingillustrationshowsonemeasureofan8beat
patternwithallstepsofthegridturnedoff.
Theverticallinesindicate8thnotes.Sincetheillus
trationshowsonemeasure,thereareeightverticallines.
Notes(notenumbers)areindicatedbyhorizontallines.
Thefourhorizontallinesherecorrespondtofourdrum
sounds.
Eachintersectionbetweenaverticalandhorizontalline
isapossiblenoteonthegrid.
Youcancreateadrumpatternbyturningon(addinga
symbolat)gridstepswhereyouwanteachinstrumentto
sound.
About the grid sequence Compare function
TheComparefunctionisavailablewhenthegridsequence
isoff.WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREbuttontoturnCom
pareon(theLEDwilllightup),youllreturntothestate
immediatelypriortowhenyouturnedGridSequenceon.
Whengridsequenceison,theCOMPAREbuttonisunavail
able;theCompareoperationcannotbeused.
Heresanexampleofusingthisfunction.
1. Startwithgridsequenceturnedoff.
2. Turngridsequenceon,andcreateahihatpattern.
3. Turngridsequenceoff.
4. PresstheCOMPAREbuttontoturnCompareon(LED
lit).
Youllreturntothestateofstep1.
5. PresstheCOMPAREbuttontoturnCompareoff(LED
unlit).
Youllbeinthestatefollowingstep2,withthehihatpat
ternhavingbeencreated.
6. Turngridsequenceon,andcreatethesnarepattern.
7. Turngridsequenceoff.
8. TurnCompareon(LEDlit).
Youllreturntothestatefollowingstep2,withthehihat
patternhavingbeencreated.
9. TurnCompareoff(LEDunlit).
Youllbeinthestatefollowingstep6,withthesnarepat
ternhavingbeencreated.
Bb3 open hi-hat
Ab3 closed hi-hat
D3 snare
C3 kick
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bb3 open hi-hat
Ab3 closed hi-hat
D3 snare
C3 kick
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sequencer mode
52
Grid Sequence Parameters
WhenyoupresstheGRIDSEQbuttontoturnGrid
Sequenceon,theGRIDSEQgrouppagewillappear.The
upperlineshowsthenameofthekey(thegridkey)whose
gridstepsyoureediting,andtheloopregion.
Grid key: [C3 (C1...C9)]
[C3]:Iftherearenoteeventsintheloopregion,thekeyis
showninsquarebrackets[].
(C3):Iftherearenonoteeventsintheloopregion,thekeyis
showninparentheses().
YoucanselectthegridkeybyholdingdowntheKEYbutton
andplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
Loop region: 001002
Thisindicatestheloopregion.Whengridsequenceison,
playbackofalltrackswillloopaccordingtothissetting.The
numberattheleftistheloopstartmeasure,andthenumber
attherightistheloopendmeasure.
Thelowerlineofthedisplayshowsgridsequencesetting
parameters.
Loop End, Quantize
LpEnd (Loop End) [001...999]
Thisspecifiesthelastmeasurethatwillbelooped.
Thegridislimitedtoamaximumof64steps.Thismeans
thattherangethatyoucanselectislimitedbytheloopstart
measure,Q(Quantize),andTS(TimeSignature)set
tings.
IftheloopstartisM001,TSis4/4,andQis8th,you
canspecifyuptomeasures18(eightmeasures).
canspecifyuptomeasures1624(eightmeasures).
canspecifyuptomeasures14(fourmeasures).
Note:LoopStartissetautomaticallyaccordingtotheloop
startsettingofSEQ:PLAYLOOPPorSEQ:RECLOOPR
whenloopisturnedonorgridsequenceisturnedoff.Ifyou
wanttochangethissetting,turnloopon,turngridsequence
off,andmakethesettinginthePLAYorRECgroup
(p.34).
Note:TheTSsettingwillusethesettingofthePLAYor
RECgroupmadewhengridsequenceisoff.Ifyouwantto
changethissetting,youcandosointhePLAYorRECgroup
(p.35).
Q (Quantize) [,_, ,, ,_,, , ,_, ,, ,]
Specifythenotevalueofeachgridstep.Thissettingis
linkedwiththequantizesettingofthePLAYorRECgroups
(settingsotherthanHi).
Note:IfyouchangetheLpEndorQsetting,thegrid
LEDsforwhichinputisnowpossiblewilllightupforan
instant.
Example: Loop: 001002 (two measures), TS: 4/4, Q: 8th
ThelowerrowoffunctionLEDs(0916)indicatethegrid
(notevalues).
TheupperrowoffunctionLEDs(0108)indicatetheloca
tion.Inthisexampleitindicatesthemeasure,buttheloca
tionindicatedwilldifferdependingonthesettings.
Whenyoupressafunctionbutton0108,thegridLEDsthatallow
inputforthatmeasure(location)willlightupforaninstant.
First measure
Second measure
First measure
First beat, second beat
First measure
Third beat, fourth beat
Second measure
Second measure
Grid Seq (Grid Sequence) Grid Sequence Parameters
53
Tempo, Tempo Mode
, (Tempo) [040.00...300.00, EXT]
Setthetempoofthesong.Thiswillalsochangethespeedat
whichthefunctionbutton0916LEDslightduringplay
back.(,(Tempo)onpage 31)
Tempo Mode [Auto, Manu]
Specifythetemposettingofthesong.(TempoModeon
page 31)
Initial Velocity
Init Vel (Initial Velocity) [001...127]
Specifytheinitialvelocityforthegridnote.Whenyouturn
agridnoteon,thevalueyouspecifyherewillbeinputfor
thatnote.
Note:Youcanselectthekeyofthegridnotebyholding
downtheKEYbuttonandplayingthekeyboard.IfVelis
settoAsPlayed,thevelocitywithwhichyouplaythekey
boardwillautomaticallybesetastheInitVelvalue.
(Vel(Velocity)onpage 53)
Note:Changingthissettingafterturningagridnoteonwill
notaffectthepreviouslyinputgridnote.Ifyouwanttoper
formgridinputwiththenewsetting,turnthatgridnoteoff,
andthenonagain.Thevelocityvalueofagridnotecanbe
editedintheGridEditpageevenafterthatgridnoteis
turnedon.(GridEditonpage 53)
Initial Duration
Init Dur (Initial Duration) [1%...100%]
Specifytheinitialvalueforthedurationofthegridnotes
youinput.Whenyouturnagridnoteon,thisvaluewillbe
inputasitsduration.Normallywhenusingadrumpro
gram,thedurationvaluewillnotaffecttheactualduration
ofthenote,sotheresnoneedtospecifythis.Thissetting
willbemeaningfulwhenyoureusingthegridtocreatea
bassphrase.
Note:Changingthissettingafterturningagridnoteonwill
notaffectthepreviouslyinputgridnote.Ifyouwanttoper
formgridinputwiththenewsetting,turnthatgridnoteoff,
andthenonagain.Thedurationvalueforagridnotecanbe
editedintheGridEditpageevenafterthatgridnoteis
turnedon.(GridEditonpage 53)
Grid Key Select
Key Select [C-1 ... G9]
Selectthegridkey.Normallyyoullselectthegridkeyby
holdingdowntheKEYbuttonandpressinganoteonthe
keyboard,butyoucanalsousethissettingtoselectthekey.
Thissettingislinkedwiththegridkeyindication()[]in
theupperlineofthedisplay.
Velocity Mode
Vel (Velocity) [As Played, Fixed]
AsPlayed:WhenyouholddowntheKEYbuttonandplay
thekeyboardtoselectthegridkey,thevelocitywithwhich
youplaythekeyboardwillbeautomaticallyassignedasthe
InitVelvalue.Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplay
thekeyboardtoauditionthesoundwhileinputtinggrid
notes.Normally,youllleavethissettoAsPlayed.
Fixed:TheInitVelvaluewillnotchangewhenyouhold
downtheKEYbuttonandplaythekeyboardtoselectthe
gridkey.
Note:WhenGridSequenceison,youcanpresstheREC
buttonandthentheSTARTbuttontorealtimerecord.This
letsyouaddconventionalkeyboardplayingtoaphraseyou
recordedusingGridSequence.Eveninthiscase,thesetting
youmakeherewillbeapplied.Thenoteswillberecorded
withthekeyboardvelocityifAsPlayedisselected,orwith
theInitVelsettingifFixedisselected.
Grid Edit
Grid Select [1-1 ... 8-8]
Thisselectsthegridnumber.
Thenumberattheleftcorrespondstotheupperlineoffunc
tionbuttonsandLEDs0108.
Thenumberattherightcorrespondstothelowerlineof
functionbuttonsandLEDs0916.
Thegridnumbersyoucanselectarelimitedbythenumber
ofloopmeasures,theQ(Quantize)setting,andtheTS
(TimeSignature)setting.
Note:Youcanalsospecifythegridkeyforeditingbyhold
board.
Sequencer mode
54
Inthisexample,thefollowingnumberscorrespond.
Firstmeasure:11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18
Secondmeasure:21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28
Inthisexample,thefollowingnumberscorrespond.
Firstmeasure,firstandsecondbeats:11,12,13,14,15,
16,17,18
Firstmeasure,thirdandfourthbeats:21,22,23,24,25,
26,27,28
Secondmeasure,firstandsecondbeats:31,32,33,34,3
5,36,37,38
Secondmeasure,thirdandfourthbeats:41,42,43,44,4
5,46,47,48
Vel (Velocity) [---, 001...127, ***]
:Thisindicatesthatthegridnoteisoff.Youcanalsoturn
agridnoteoffbychangingthegridonvalueof001127to
.
001...127:Thisindicatesthevelocityvalueofagridnotethat
isturnedon.Byeditingthisvalue,youcan(forexample)
addvariationtoapatternthatwascreatedbyenteringhi
hatnoteswiththesamevelocityvaluespecifiedbytheInit
Velsetting.
***:Thisindicatesthattherearemultiplenoteevents
betweengridintervals.
ForexampleifapatternwascreatedusingaQsettingof
16th,andyouthenchangetheQsettingto8th,there
mightbetwonoteeventswithinasinglegridinterval.
Also,ifyouturnGridSequenceonforatrackthatwasreal
timerecorded,thenoteeventswillbeconvertedtoagrid.In
thiscaseaswell,itispossiblefortwoormorenoteeventsto
existwithinasinglegridinterval.
Insuchcases,thedisplayshows***toindicatethattwoor
morenoteeventsexist.Ifyouchange***to001127atthis
time,thetwoormorenoteeventswillbedeleted,andanew
gridnotewillbeturnedon.Thetwoormorenoteevents
willbecomeonenoteevent.
Dur (Duration) [---, 001%...999%, Tie, ***]
:Thisindicatesthatthegridnoteisoff.
001%...999%:Thisindicatesthedurationofagridnotethat
ison.Youcaneditthisaslongasitdoesnotexceedthemea
sureboundary.
Tie:IfyouturnGridSequenceonforatrackthatwasreal
timerecorded,thenoteeventswillbeconvertedtoagrid.In
thiscase,tieeventswillbeshownasatiegridevent.
IfyouchangetheQtoafinersettingthanwhenthegrid
notewasturnedon,thuscausingDurtoexceed999%,it
willalsobeshownasatiegridevent.
Youcannotchangethedurationvalueofatiegridevent.
Atiegrideventcanbedeletedbyturningitoff.
First measure
Second measure
First measure
First measure
Third beat, fourth beat
Second measure
Second measure
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode Grid Sequence Parameters
55
System Exclusive events supported in Sequencer mode
YoucanrecordandplaybackSystemExclusiveevents,and
edittracksthatcontainSystemExclusiveevents.
SysEx messages that can be recorded in real-time
Thefollowingexclusivemessagescanberecordedinreal
time:
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI
device.
ParameterchangesinSequencermode(seetablebelow).
MasterVolumeuniversalexclusivemessagesassignedto
thefootpedalorarealtimecontrolknob.
Parameter change messages that you can realtime-record in Sequencer mode
Themaximumamountofexclusivedatathatcanbe
recordedatonceisapproximately320Kbytes.Thissize
willdecreaseifothereventsexistwithinthesamemea
sure.
Youcannotsimultaneouslyrecordexclusivemessages
receivedfromanexternalMIDIdeviceandparameter
changesproducedbyediting.
Theeventsthatwillberecordedarecontrolledbythe
Global/Media:MIDISEQMIDIOutParam.For
ControlChange,onlycontrolchangemessageswillbe
recorded.ForSysEX,onlyparameterchangesand
exclusivemessageswillberecorded(Param(Param
eterMIDIOut)onpage 62).
Parametereditsmadebyexecutingasongcommand
arenotrealtimerecorded.
Recording internal parameter changes
YoucanuseSysExforautomationofinternalmicroSTA
TIONeffectsandProgramparameters.
Asanexample,letsrecordashortphraseontrack1,addan
inserteffect,andthenrecordparameterchangesforthat
effectonanunusedtrack.
Note:Inorderforsystemexclusivemessagestobe
recorded,theGlobal/Media:MIDIMIDIFilterSysExset
tingmustbeOn.GotoGlobal/Mediamode,andmakesure
thatthissettingisOn.
1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack1,andsendit
toinserteffect1.Thenrecordaphraseofaboutsixteen
measures.
Usetrack1ProgramSelect(p.36)toselectthe
desiredprogram.
Setthetrack1Bus(p.37)toIFX1,routingthesound
toinserteffect1.Thenselectthedesiredeffectforinsert
effect1(p.46).
WiththefrontpanelTIMBRE/TRACKLEDlit,usethe
functionbuttons0116toselecttrack1.PressRECand
Front panel/Page Parameter
Frontpanel
ARP
ON/OFFbutton,LATCHbutton,ARPGATEkonb,ARPVELOCITYknob,ARPSWINGknob,
TEMPOknob
REALTIME
CONTROLS
SELECTbutton,EXTERNALbutton
TrackParam EDITTracks
ProgramSelect,Volume,Pan,PLAY/MUTE
OSCMode,Portamento
Transpose,Detune,BendRange
DKitPatchIFX1,IFX2,IFX3,IFX4,IFX5,Bus,Send1,Send2,FxCtrlBus
ARPAssign
KnobAssign RealtimeControlknobAssignparameters
ARP
ARPASetup Allparameters
ARPBSetup Allparameters
IFX1 Alleffectparameters
MFX1 Alleffectparameters
MFX2 Alleffectparameters
TFX Alleffectparameters
MasterVolume MasterVol
Sequencer mode
56
thenSTART/STOP,andrecordaphraseofaboutsixteen
measures.
2. Usethe0116buttonstoselecttrack9,andrecorda
parameterchange.
Note:Selectanemptytrackatthispoint.Ifyouwantto
recordintoaMIDItrackthatalreadycontainsrecorded
data,setM(RecordingMode)(p.34)toOVD(Over
dub),andthenproceedwithrecording.
Usethe0116buttonstoselecttrack9,pressREC,and
thenpressSTART/STOPtobeginrecording.
Attheappropriatemomentduringrecording,edita
parameterthatcanberealtimerecorded.
Therearevariouswaystoeditthesoundofthetrackin
realtime:youcanselectadifferenteffectforinserteffect
1,edittheeffectparametervalues,oreditthetone
parameters(p.39)
Note:Fordetailsonparametersthatcanberealtime
recorded,refertoParameterchangesthatcanbereal
timerecordedinSequencermode(p.55).
3. Stoprecording.
Note:Exclusivemessagesarealwaysrecordedonthe
currenttrackthatsselectedbythe0116buttons.Inthis
example,theywillberecordedonMIDItrack9.
4. Accessthepageoftheparameter(e.g.,toneparameter)
thatyourealtimerecorded,andplayback;thechanges
yourecordedwillbereproduced.
Compatibility of the microSTATIONs
song data
Thefollowingtwotypesofsongdatacanbeloadedfrom
mediaintothemicroSTATIONssequencerandplayed.
Song data that was saved in the microSTATIONs
dedicated format
ThisdataisspecificallyforthemicroSTATION.
Sincethisformatallowsevendetailedsettingsuniquetothe
microSTATIONtobefaithfullyreproduced,werecommend
thatyouusethisformattosavesongdatathatyouintendto
playbackonthemicroSTATION.
Standard MIDI file
ThisformatisnotabletoreproducethemicroSTATIONs
performancewiththecompletefidelitythatispossible
whenusingthededicatedformat(althoughtherewillbeno
problemwithtypicalperformances),butiscompatiblewith
anyotherdevicethatsupportsSMF.
UseGlobal/Mediamodetosaveorloadsongdata.
Dataincludingexclusiveeventsisalsosupported.
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDIdevice,
suchasXGorGSdata,ortheparameterchangesproduced
wheneditingtrackparameters(Recordinginternal
parameterchangesonpage 55)canberealtimerecorded
ontothedesiredtrack.
RecordedGM,XG,orGSexclusivemessageswillnot
bereproducedonthemicroSTATIONduringplay
back.Therecordeddataisincludedinthesongdataas
exclusiveevents,soitcanbesavedtoorloadedfrom
mediaasusual.Exclusivemessagesarealsosupported
forSMF(StandardMIDIFile)loadingorsaving(Load
SMF,SavetoSMF).Thisallowsrecordedexclusive
eventstobesavedasSMF,orexclusivemessages
includedinSMFtobeconvertedintosongdata.
57
Global/Media mode
Global/Mediamodeiswhereyoucanadjustsettingsforthe
microSTATIONitself,suchasthefollowing.
Settingsfortheoveralltuning,suchasmastertuningand
transpose,andsettingssuchasvelocitycurveandafter
touchcurve.
Effectandarpeggiatoron/offstatus,andmemoryprotect
settings.
MIDIrelatedsettingssuchasglobalMIDIchanneland
MIDIfilter,andexternalsetupsettings.
Assignmentsforapedalconnectedtotherearpanel.
SavingvarioustypesofinternalmemorydatatoanSD
cardinsertedinthemicroSTATION.
Loadingdatafrommediaintointernalmemory.
Renamingordeletingfiles,orformattingmedia.
Note:IfthemicroSTATIONisconnectedtoyourcomputer,
youcanusethemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorappli
cationtoedituserscales,drumkits,anduserarpeggiopat
ternsaswellastheparametersthatcanbeeditedfromthe
microSTATIONitself(p.186).
IfyouwanttokeepthesettingyoumakeinGlobal
mode,youmustwritethembeforeturningthepower
off.UsetheWriteGlobalcommand(WriteGlobal
onpage 66).
Page structure in Global/Media mode
ThemicroSTATIONsGlobal/Mediamodeisorganizedinto
thetreestructureshownonthefollowingpage.(p.58)
Fordetailsonhowtomovebetweenpages,selectparame
ters,andedittheirvalue,refertothemicroSTATIONOper
ationGuide.
Basic
MTune (Master Tune)
[50cents (427.47Hz)...+50cents (452.89Hz)]
ThisadjuststheoveralltuningoftheentiremicroSTATION
inonecentunits(semitone=100cents),overarangeof50
cents.Withasettingof0,thefrequencyofA4willbe440
Hz.
TheA4pitchgivenhereiswhenEqualTemperamentis
selectedasthescale.Ifadifferentscaleisselected,A4
maynotbe440Hz.
Transpose [12...+00...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitonestepsovera1octave
range.
Thissettingisappliedatthelocation(PreMIDIorPostMIDI)
specifiedbyConvt(ConvertPosition)(p.61).
MIDI number transmitted by themicroSTATION
Note:IfConvertPositionissettoPreMIDI,thenotenum
berstransmittedfromthemicroSTATIONwillbeaffected
bytheKeyTransposesetting.
MTunecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversalSys
temExclusivemessageMasterFineTuning(F0,7F,nn,
04,03,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/mm=value).
TransposecanbecontrolledbytheMIDIuniversal
SystemExclusivemessageMasterCoarseTuning(F0,
7F,nn,04,04,vv,mm,F7:nn=MIDIchannel,vv/
mm=value).
ThesemessagesarereceivedontheglobalMIDIchan
nelspecifiedbyChannel(p.64).
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,MIDI
RPNmessagescanbereceivedtocontrolthetuning
andtranspositionoftheprogramortimbre(Combina
tionmode)ortrack(Sequencermode).IncomingMIDI
RPNFineTunemessageswillmakerelativeadjust
mentstothetuningspecifiedbytheMTunesetting.
MIDIRPNCoarseTunemessageswillmakerelative
adjustmentstothepitchspecifiedbytheTranspose
setting.InProgrammode,thesemessageswillbe
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedby
Channel(p.64),andinothermodestheywillbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre
ortrack.(Transpose,Detunep.20,p.39)
Vel Curve (Velocity Curve) [1...8]
Thisspecifiesthewaythatthevolumeand/ortonewill
changeinresponsetovariationsinkeyboardplaying
dynamics(velocity).
ThecurvesyoucanselectwilldependontheConvt(Con
vertPosition)(p.61)setting.IfthesettingisPreMIDI,the
curveisappliedimmediatelyafterthekeyboard.Iftheset
tingisPostMIDI,thecurveisappliedimmediatelybefore
thesoundgenerator.
InthecaseofPreMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamicsare
modifiedasshownbytransmissioncurves18(lowerleft
diagram),andreceptionisfixedatcurve4linear(diagram
atlowerright).
InthecaseofPostMIDI,yourkeyboardplayingdynamics
aretransmittedaccordingtotransmissioncurve4linear
(lowerleftdiagram),andwillbeinterpretedaccordingto
receptioncurve18(lowerrightdiagram).
IfyoureusingthemicroSTATIONasaMIDIsoundmodule,
andwanttoadjusttheoverallbrightnessofthesound,set
Convt(ConvertPosition)(p.61)toPostMIDIandselect
theappropriatevelocitycurve.

1,2,3:Stronglyplayednoteswillbeaffected.
4(Normal):Thenormalcurve
5,6:Producesaneffectevenifyoudonotplayvery
strongly.
12 0 +12
24...84
(C1...C6)
36...96
(C2...C7)
48...108
(C3...C8)
1
MAX
127
Velocity
efect
Velocity (MIDI InTG)
1
8
6
5
4
3
2
7
Soft
127
Strong
1
Velocity (KBDMIDI Out)
1
2
3
8
6
5
4
7
Received Table
Curve 4
Curve 18
Transmitted Table
Curve 18
PreMIDI
Global Convert Position
KBD
MIDI
Curve 4
TG
PostMIDI
For a setting of PostMIDI For a setting of PreMIDI
Global/Media mode
58
GLOBAL/MEDIA Mode
Basic ( p.57)
MTune
Transpose
Vel Curve
AT Curve
Efect SW
IFX1-5
MFX1&2
TFX
ARP
All ARP
Load ARP
With Prog
With Combi
Bank Map
Initial Song
P00: InitSongTemplete
Scroll Text
Memory Protect
Prog
Combi
Song
Drum Kit
ARP U.Pat
MIDI ( p. 60)
Channel
Local Ctrl
Convt
Note Recv
MIDI Clock
Clock
Rcv ExtRTC
SEQ MIDI Out
Trk
Param
ARP RTC MIDI
MIDI Out
MIDI Filter
Prog Chg
Bank Chg
Combi Chg
Afer Touch
Ctrl Chg
SysEx
External Setup
000: External Set 000
Knob 1
Channel
CC#
Knob 4
Channel
CC#
127: External Set 127
Knob 1
Channel
CC#
Knob 4
Channel
CC#
Controllers ( p. 65)
PEDAL/SW
Type
Sw
Pdl
Polarity
ARP RTC CC#
SW-ON/OFF
SW-LATCH
KNOB1-GATE
KNOB2-VEL
KNOB3-SWING
Command ( p.66)
Load All Demo
Half Dmpr Calib
Reset ARP CC#
Pedal Calib
Write Global ( p.66)
Media ( p.67)
Load
Load PCG
Load Programs
Load Prog Bank
Load a Prog
Load Combinations
Load Combi Bank
Load a Combi
Load Drum kits
Load Dkit INT
Load a Dkit
Load Arp Patterns
Load Arp INT
Load a Arp
Load Global Setting
Load SNG
Load a Song
Load SMF
Save All
Save PCG
Save SEQ
Save To SMF
Rename
Delete
Format
Basic Effect SW
59
7:Thiscurveproducesarelativelyconsistenteffectforsoftly
playednotes.
8:Thiscurveproducesanevenmoreconsistenteffect.
Eachcurvehasitsowncharacteristics,soyoushouldselect
thecurvethatbestsuitsyourownplayingstyleandthe
resultsyouwanttoobtain.
AT Curve (Aftertouch Curve) [1...8]
Thisspecifiesthewaythatincomingaftertouchdatawill
affectthevolumeortonewhenConvt(ConvertPosition)
issettoPostMIDI.
ThissettinghasnoeffectwhenConvt(ConvertPosi
tion)issettoPreMIDI.
Thiscurveisappliedimmediatelybeforethetonegenerator.
TheaftertouchCurvesettingselectsthecurvethatisapplied
totheincomingaftertouch.
1,2:Thiscurveproduceschangewhenstrongaftertouch
pressureisapplied.
3(Normal):Thenormalcurve.
4,5:Thiscurveproduceschangeevenwhenlightpressureis
applied.
6,7:Thesecurvesproducechangein24or12steps.Curve
number7allowschangeovertwelvesteps,sowhenusing
aftertouchtomodifythepitch,youcansettherangeof
modificationtooneoctave,anduseaftertouchtovarythe
pitchinsemitonesteps.
8:Thisisarandomcurve.Usethiswhenyouwishtocreate
specialeffects,ortouseaftertouchtoapplyunpredictable
modulation.
However,solelyinthecaseof0or127,thevaluewillnotbe
random;0or127willbeappliedconstantly
Withasettingofaftertouch,thesettingyoumakehere
willbeappliedimmediatelybeforethemicroSTA
TIONsinternaltonegenerator,meaningthatitwill
affectthedatareceivedviaMIDI,butwillnotaffectthe
transmitteddata.
Effect SW
IFX 15 [Off, On]
On:AllinserteffectsIFX1IFX5willbeoff.
Off:TheinserteffectOn/OffsettingsintheIFX1IFX5
pagesofProgram,Combination,orSequencermodewillbe
used.
MFX1&2 [Off, On]
On:MasterEffect1and2(MFX1,2)willbeoff.
Off:ThemastereffectOn/OffsettingsintheMFX1and
MFX2pagesofProgram,Combination,andSequencer
modeswillbeused.
TFX [Off, On]
On:Totaleffect(TFX)willbeoff.
Off:ThetotaleffectOn/OffsettingofProgram,Combina
tion,andSequencermodeswillbeused.
WhenIFX15Off,MFX1&2Off,orTFXOffset
tingsareswitched,controlchangemessagesCC#92
(effectcontrol2),CC#94(effectcontrol4),andCC#95
(effectcontrol5)willbetransmittedrespectively.The
transmitteddatawillbe0foroff,and127foron.
ARP (Arpeggiator)
All ARP [Off, On]
On:Allarpeggiatorwillbeoff.Thearpeggiatorwillnot
operateeveniftheARPON/OFFbuttonison.
Off:ThearpeggiatorsettingsandARPON/OFFbuttonset
tingsinProgram,Combination,andSequencermodeswill
beused.
Load ARP:
With Prog [Off, On]
On:Whenyouswitchprograms,thearpeggiatorsettings
storedinthatprogramwillbeused.Normallyyouwilluse
theOnsetting.
Off:Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchangeevenifyou
switchprograms.UsethissettingifyouwanttoswitchPro
gramsoundswithoutchangingthephrasesfromthearpeg
giator.
With Combi [Off, On]
On:Whenyouswitchcombinations,thearpeggiatorset
tingsstoredinthatcombinationwillbeused.Normallyyou
willusetheOnsetting.
Off:Thearpeggiatorsettingswillnotchangeevenifyou
switchcombinations.Usethissettingifyouwantonlyto
switchcombinationsoundswithoutchangingthephrases
fromthearpeggiator.
Bank Map
Bank Map [KORG, GM(2)]
Thisspecifiesthemappingofprogramsandcombinations
relativetoBankSelectcontrolchangemessages(CC#0
upperbyteandCC#32lowerbyte).
Thebankselectmessagesshowninthetablebelowwillbe
received(R)andtransmitted(T)forProgrambanksAD,
GM,g(1)g(9),g(d)andCombinationbanksAC.
1
0
MAX
127
After Touch (MIDI InTG)
3
4
5
7
2
6
8:RANDOM
Aftertouch
efect
Bank Bank Map: KORG Map: GM(2)
A 00.00R/T 63.00R/T
B 00.01R/T 63.01R/T
C 00.02R/T 63.02R/T
D 00.03R/T 63.03R/T
GM, 121.00R/T,56.00R 121.00R/T,56.00R,00.00R
g(1)...g(9) 121.01...09R/T 121.01...09R/T
g(d) 120.00R/T,62.00R 120.00R/T,62.00R
Global/Media mode
60
Initial Song
Initial Song
[P00...P15, U00...U15: name, Initialized]
Thisselectsthetemplatesongthatwillbeloadedasthe
defaultsongsettingsforSequencermodewhenthepoweris
turnedon.
P00...P15:Preloadtemplatesong.(VNL)
U00...U15:Usertemplatesong.
Initialized:Initializedsong.
Scroll Text
ScrollText [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherprogramnames,combinationnames,
andsongnameswillbescrollediftheycontainalarger
numberofcharactersthancanbeshowninthedisplay.
Off:Scrolloff(defaultsetting).
On:Scrollon.
M.Protect (Memory Protect)
Program [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalprogrammemory.
On:Internalprogrammemorywillbeprotected,andthe
followingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingaprogram
Loadingpreloadedprogramdata
Loadingprogramdatafrommedia
ReceivingprogramdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernalprogrammemory.
Combi [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalcombinationmemory.
On:Internalcombinationmemorywillbeprotected,and
thefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingacombination
Loadingpreloadedcombinationdata
Loadingcombinationdatafrommedia
ReceivingcombinationdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernalcombinationmemory.
Song [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalsongmemory.
However,whenthepoweristurnedoff,thesongdatain
songmemorywillbelostregardlessofthissetting.
On:Internalsongmemorywillbeprotected,andthefollow
ingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Recordingtothesequencer
Loadingpreloadedsongdata
Loadingsongdatafrommedia
ReceivingsongdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernalsongmemory.
Drum Kit [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaldrumkitmemory.
On:Internaldrumkitmemorywillbeprotected,andthe
Writingadrumkit
Loadingpreloadeddrumkitdata
Loadingdrumkitdatafrommedia
ReceivingdrumkitdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernaldrumkitmemory.
ARP U.Pat (Arpeggio User Pattern) [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
On:Internaluserarpeggiopatternmemorywillbepro
tected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeper
formed.
Writingauserarpeggiopattern
Loadingpreloadarpeggiopatterndata
Loadinguserarpeggiopatterndatafrommedia
ReceivinguserarpeggiopatterndataviaMIDIdata
dump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
MIDI
Here,youcanadjustMIDIrelatedsettingsthataffectthe
entiremicroSTATION.
Channel (Global MIDI Channel) [01...16]
SetstheglobalMIDIchannel.TheglobalMIDIchannelis
usedinthefollowingcases.
Whentransmittingandreceivingperformancedatain
Programmode(PROGPLAY).
WhenselectingcombinationsviaMIDIinCombination
mode(COMBIPLAY).
Whencontrollingtimbresoreffectsthathavebeensetto
Gchinvariousmodes
WhentransmittingandreceivingSystemExclusive
messages
MIDI received
InProgrammode,MIDIdataisreceivedontheglobalMIDI
channel,butinCombinationmodeorSequencermode,
MIDIdataisreceivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedfor
eachtimbreortrack.
InCombinationmode,programchangesreceivedonthe
globalMIDIchannelwillswitchthecombination(p.63).
UsetheglobalMIDIchanneltoswitchIFX15(CC#92),
MFX1&2(CC#94)andTFX(CC#95)on/off.
TocontrolthepanfollowingIFX,sends1/2,MFX1/2and
TFX,usetheglobalMIDIchannelwhenintheProgram
mode;whileintheCombination,orSequencermodes,use
thechannelspecifiedseparatelybyCtrlChforIFX15,
MFX1&2,andTFX.BysettingCtrlChtoGch,youcan
controltheseparametersfromtheglobalMIDIchannel.
MIDI output when playing the microSTATION
InProgrammode,thisdatawillbetransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel.InCombinationmode,datawillbetransmit
tedsimultaneouslyontheglobalMIDIchannelandonthe
MIDIchannelsoftimbreswhoseStatus(p.20)issetto
EXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,musicaldatawillbetransmittedonthe
channelspecifiedforthecurrentlyselectedtrack(whose
StatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2).
External mode
WhentheRealtimeControlsEXTERNALisselectedineach
mode,youcanuseknobs14tocontrolaconnectedsoft
wareorhardwareMIDIdevice.
MIDI M.Protect (Memory Protect)
61
TheMIDICC#(controlchange)messagesaretransmittedon
theMIDIchannelspecifiedintheGlobal/Media:MIDI
ExternalSetup.
Local Ctrl (Local Control) [Off, On]
On:YoullbeabletousethemicroSTATIONsknobs,key
board,orjoysticketc.tocontrolthemicroSTATIONssound
generatorsection.ChoosetheOnsettingifyoureplaying
themicroSTATIONbyitself.
Off:ThemicroSTATIONsknobs,keyboard,andjoysticketc.
willbeinternallydisconnectedfromthetonegeneratorsec
tion.
ThismeansthatyourperformanceonthemicroSTATION
(i.e.,operationsofthekeyboardorjoystick,ortheplayback
ofthesequencer)willnotproducesound.
ChoosetheOffsettingifechobackfromyourexternal
sequenceriscausingeachnotetobesoundedtwice.
IfLocalControlisOff,MIDItransmission/reception
willoccurnormally.Playingthekeyboardwillcause
thecorrespondingnotedatatobetransmitted,and
receivednotedatawillplaythemicroSTATIONsinter
nalsounds.
Note:EvenifLocalControlisOn,notesplayedbackbythe
internalsequencerwillnottriggerthearpeggiator.
Convt (Convert Position) [PreMIDI, PostMIDI]
ThissettingspecifiesthelocationwheretheTransposeand
VelocityCurvesettingswillbeapplied.Thissettingwill
affecttheMIDIdatathatistransmittedandreceived,and
thedatathatisrecordedontheinternalsequencer.
WhenusingthemicroSTATIONskeyboardtoplaythe
internaltonegenerator,theTranspose,VelocityCurve,and
aftertouchCurvesettingswillalwaystakeeffectregardless
ofthissetting.
PreMIDI:VelocityCurve,andTransposewillbeappliedto
thedatathatistransmittedfromthemicroSTATIONskey
board.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,andTransposesettings
willaffectthedatathatistransmittedfromMIDIOUTwhen
themicroSTATIONskeyboardisplayed,andthedatathat
isrecordedontheinternalsequencer.
MIDIdatareceivedfromMIDIINorthedataplayedback
bytheinternalsequencerwillnotbeaffected.
PostMIDI:VelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,andTranspose
willbeappliedtodatabeforeitentersthetonegenerator.
ThismeansthattheVelocityCurve,aftertouchCurve,and
Transposesettingswillaffectthedatathatissenttothe
internaltonegeneratorwhenyouplaythemicroSTATIONs
keyboard,whentheinternalsequencerisplayedback,or
whendataisreceivedfromMIDIIN.
Thissettingwillnotaffectthedatathatistransmittedfrom
MIDIOUTorrecordedontheinternalsequencerwhenyou
playthemicroSTATIONskeyboardorplaybackthe
sequence.
Note Recv (Note Receive) [All, Even, Odd]
Thissettingspecifieswhetherevennumbered,oddnum
bered,orallnotenumberswillbesoundedwhennotedata
isreceivedfromthemicroSTATIONskeyboardorfroman
externalMIDIdevice.ByconnectingthemicroSTATIONto
anothermicroSTATIONandsettingoneinstrumenttoEven
andtheothertoOdd,youcaneffectivelydoublethe
polyphonybydividingthenotesbetweenthetwoinstru
ments.
All:Allnotenumberswillbereceived.Normallyyouwill
leavethissettoAll.
Even:Evennumberednotes(C,D,E,F#,G#,A#)will
sound.
Odd:Oddnumberednotes(C#,D#,F,G,A,B)willsound.
ThissettinghasnoeffectontheMIDIdatathatis
received
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Record
Sequencer
OFF
ON
Trigger
Tone
generator
Arpeggiator
Local
Control
Local
Control
OFF
ON
Play
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Record
Sequencer
Local
Control
OFF
ON
Tone
Generator
While the internal sequencer is playing
(The playback of the internal sequencer will not be sent to the arpeggiator.)
Velocity
Curve=4
Aftertouch
Curve=3
Tone
generator
Play
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Transmitted Table
Record
Sequencer
No
Transpose
Scale
microSTATION
Velocity
Curve
Note number
change
Transpose
Received Table
Velocity
Curve
Aftertouch
Curve
Tone
generator
Play
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Record
Sequencer
Transpose Scale
Pitch change
microSTATION
Velocity
Curve=4
No
Transpose
Transmitted Table Received Table
ODD EVEN
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
Another microSTATION
microSTATION and another microSTATION
Ex 1.
Ex 2.
MIDI keyboard etc.
ODD
microSTATION
MIDI OUT MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
EVEN
Another microSTATION
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI Patchbay
Global/Media mode
62
MIDI Clock
Clock (MIDI Clock Source)
[Internal, Ext.MIDI, Ext.USB, Auto]
UsethissettingtosynchronizethemicroSTATIONsarpeg
giatorandinternalsequencerwithanexternalMIDIdevice
(e.g.,sequencerorrhythmmachine)andcomputer.
Internal:Thearpeggiatorandtheinternalsequencerwill
operateaccordingtotheinternalclock.
SelecttheInternalsettingwhenusingthemicroSTATION
byitself,orwhenyouwantthemicroSTATIONtobethe
master(controllingdevice)sothatconnectedexternalMIDI
deviceswillsynchronizetothemicroSTATIONMIDIClock.
Ext.MIDI:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwill
operateinsynchronizationtotheMIDIClockinputfroman
externalMIDIdevice.
Ext.USB:Thearpeggiatorandinternalsequencerwilloper
ateinsynchronizationwiththeMIDIClockfromacom
puter(forexampleasequencerorDAWapplication),
connectedtotheUSBconnector.
Auto:ThemicroSTATIONwillbasicallyfunctionthesame
asifyouwereusingtheInternalsetting.Howeverifexter
nalMIDIClockmessagesarereceivedfromtheMIDIINor
USBconnector,themicroSTATIONwillautomatically
switchtoExt.MIDIandExt.USB.
Note:IfyouselectAutowhenanexternalMIDIsequencer
andcomputerisconnected,themicroSTATIONwillauto
maticallyswitchtoInternaloperationiftheexternal
sequencerisnottransmittingMIDIClockmessages,allow
ingthearpeggiatortooperateandparametersforwhich
MIDI/TempoSyncisturnedontofunction.
Note:IfafterreceivingaMIDIClock,Start,orContinue
messagefromtheMIDIINorUSBconnector,nonewMIDI
Clockmessageisreceivedwithinanintervalof500ms,orif
youstartthemicroSTATIONssequencerfromthefront
panelwithouthavingreceivedaMIDIClock,Start,orCon
tinuemessagefromtheMIDIINandUSBconnector,the
microSTATIONwillautomaticallyswitchtoInternalopera
tion.
Rcv ExtRTC
(Receive Ext.Realtime Command Clock) [Off, On]
Off:EvenifClockissettoExt.MIDI,orifsettoAutoand
themicroSTATIONissynchronizedtoexternalMIDIClock
messages,MIDICommonmessagesandRealtimemessages
(SongPositionPointer,Start,Continue,Stop)willnotbe
received.(SongSelectmessageswillbereceived.)
Usethissettingiftheabovemessagesfromanexternal
MIDIsequencerareinadvertentlyresettingthemicroSTA
TIONssongsettings.
On:TheaboveCommonmessages(includingSongSelect)
andRealtimemessageswillbereceived.
ThisparametercannotbesetifClockisInternal.
SEQ MIDI Out
Trk (Track MIDI Out) [for Master, for ExtSeq]
ThissettingspecifieswhatwillbetransmittedviaMIDI
whenyouswitchsongsinSequencermode.
forMaster:NormallyinSequencermode,theinternal
sequencercanrecordorplaybackaperformanceonthe
microSTATIONskeyboard.Inthiscase,tracksthataresetto
EXTorBTHwillcontrolexternalMIDIsoundmodules.You
canadjustsettingsinasongsothatwhenyouselectthat
songonthemicroSTATION,tracksthataresettoEXTor
BTHwilltransmitprogramchangesorotherMIDImes
sages*tosetupyourexternalMIDIsoundmodules.
forExternalSequencer:Choosethissettingifyouwantto
usethemicroSTATIONinSequencermodeasamultitim
bralsoundmoduledrivenbyanexternalsequencer.With
thissetting,eventhetracksthataresettoEXTorBTHwill
nottransmitprogramchangesorotherMIDImessages*
whenyouswitchsongsonthemicroSTATION.Thispre
ventsprogramsettingsorotherparametersfortrackssetto
thesameMIDIchannelfrombeingoverwrittenbythemes
sagesechoedbackfromyourexternalMIDIsequencer.
* Applicable parameters
ProgramSelect:CC#00bankselect(LSB),CC#32bank
select(MSB),programchange
Pan:CC#10pan
Volume:CC#7volume
Portamento:CC#65portamentoOn/Off,CC#5porta
mentotime
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
(PostFX)Pan(CC#8)postinserteffectpan
Param (Parameter MIDI Out) [CC, SysEx]
ThissettingspecifieswhethercontrolchangesorSystem
Exclusivemessageswillbetransmittedwhenyouedita
parameterinSequencermode.
CC:Datafortheeditedparameterwillbetransmittedasa
controlchange.
SysEx:Datafortheeditedparameterwillbetransmittedas
aparameterchange.
Forthesetooperate,CtrlChgorSysEx(p.63)mustbe
turnedonrespectively.
* Applicable parameters
Pan:CC#10pan
Volume:CC#7volume
Send1/2:CC#93send1level,CC#91send2level
MIDI ARP RTC MIDI
63
ARP RTC MIDI
MIDI Out [CC, SysEx]
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPON/OFFbutton,ARPLATCH
button,orwhenyouoperateknobs14withRealtimecon
trolsCmodeselected.
CC:OperatingtheARPON/OFFbutton,ARPLATCHbut
ton,orknobs14willtransmittheMIDIcontrolchange
messagesthatareassignedinGlobal/Media:Controllers
ARPRTCCC#SWON/OFF,SWLATCH,and
KNOB1GATEKNOB4SWING.
SysEx:OperatingtheARPON/OFFbutton,ARPLATCH
ON/OFF,orknobs14willtransmitMIDISystemExclusive
parameterchangemessagesfortheparameters(arpeggia
toron/off,Latchon/off,Gate,Velocity,Swing)assignedto
thebuttonsandknobs.
MIDI Filter
Prog Chg (Enable Program Change) [Off, On]
On:Programchangeswillbetransmittedandreceived.
InProgrammode(PROGPLAY),theprogramwillbe
switchedwhenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedon
theglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyChannel(p.60).
Whenyouswitchprograms,aprogramchangemessage
willbetransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel.
InCombinationmode(PROGPLAY),thecombinationwill
beswitchedwhenaprogramchangemessageisreceivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.However,itispossibletosetthe
CombiChgparametersothatthecombinationisnot
switched.Whenaprogramchangeisreceivedonthechan
nelspecifiedforeachtimbrebyMIDICh.(p.20),the
programofthattimbrewillbeswitched.However,thepro
gramchangesforeachtimbrewillbeaffectedbythesetting
oftheProgChgparameter(p.22).
Whenyouswitchcombinations,aprogramchangemessage
willbetransmittedontheglobalMIDIchannel,andalso
transmittedsimultaneouslyonthechanneloftimbres
whoseStatus(p.20)issettoEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,incomingprogramchangemessageson
achannelthatcorrespondstoatrackwhoseStatus
(p.38)issettoINTorBTHwillswitchprogramsonthat
track.
Whenyouselectasongorplaybacksequencerdata,pro
gramchangeswillbetransmittedonthechannelsoftracks
whoseStatusissettoBTH,EXT,orEX2.(Trk(Track
MIDIOut)onpage 62)
Off:Programchangeswillnotbetransmittedorreceived.
Bank Chg (Enable Bank Change) [Off, On]
On:TheBankSelectcontrolchangemessagewillbetrans
mittedtogetherwithprogramchangemessages.Thisis
validwhenProgChgisturnedon.
Off:BankSelectmessageswillnotbetransmittedor
received.
Whenrecordingontheinternalsequencer,bankselectmes
sageswillberecordedregardlessofthissetting.However
forplayback,thissettingwillapply.
Combi Chg (Enable Combination Change)
[Off, On]
On:WheninCOMBIPLAY,anincomingprogramchange
messageontheglobalMIDIchannelsetbyChannel
(p.60)willswitchcombinations.
ThisisvalidwhenProgChgisturnedon.
Anincomingprogramchangeonachannelotherthanthe
globalMIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofanytimbre
thatmatchesthatMIDIchannel.
Off:Anincomingprogramchangemessageontheglobal
MIDIchannelwillswitchtheprogramofanytimbrewhose
MIDICh.(p.20)matchestheglobalMIDIchannel.The
combinationwillnotbeswitched.
Theprogramchangesforeachtimbrewillbeaffectedbythe
settingoftheProgChgparameter(p.22).
AfterTouch (Enable Aftertouch) [Off, On]
On:MIDIaftertouchmessageswillbetransmittedand
received.
Off:MIDIaftertouchmessageswillneitherbetransmitted
norreceived.
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecorded
withaftertouchdata;i.e.,aftertouchwillbetransmittedvia
MIDI.
PerformingonthemicroSTATIONskeyboardwilltransmit
neitherchannelaftertouchnorpolyphonicaftertouch.How
ever,sincethemicroSTATIONdoessupportaftertouchasan
AlternateModulationSource(AMS),itcanreceiveafter
touchtocontrol.
Ctrl Chg (Enable Control Change) [Off, On]
On:Controlchangemessageswillbetransmittedand
received.
Off:Controlchangemessageswillneitherbetransmitted
norreceived.
Thissettinghasnoeffectwhenyouusetheinternal
sequencertoplaybacksequencedatathatwasrecorded
withcontrolchangedata;i.e.,thecontrolchangesprevi
ouslyrecordedintothesequencerwillbetransmittedvia
MIDI.
SysEx (Enable System Exclusive) [Off, On]
On:Systemexclusivedatawillbetransmittedandreceived.
TurnthisOnifyouwantparameterchangesandothersys
temexclusivedatatoberecordedontheinternalsequencer.
YoushouldalsoturnthisonifyouveconnectedthemicroS
TATIONtoyourcomputerfordatatransferoreditingvia
theeditingsoftware.
Off:Systemexclusivedatawillnotbetransmittedor
received.
Global/Media mode
64
External Setup
Theassignmentsyoumakeinthisexternalsetupwilldeter
minetheMIDIcontrollerandMIDIchannelthatistransmit
tedbyeachknobwhenRealtimecontrolsEXTERNALis
selected.
Inthispage,youcancreateupto128differentexternalset
ups.Forinstance,youmightmakeonesetupforcontrolling
severaldifferentpiecesofMIDIgearonstage,anotherfor
controllingasoftwaresynthesizer(suchasoneofKorgs
LegacyCollectionsynths),andsoon.
TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefromthePro
gram.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeingaseparate
realtimecontrolswhichjusthappenstosharemicroSTA
TIONsknobs.
WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselectedeven
whenyouchangePrograms,orswitchtoCombinationor
Sequencermodes.Thismakesiteasytoselectdifferent
microSTATIONsoundswithoutdisruptinganyexternal
MIDIcontrol,andviceversa.
Aftereditingthesetups,makesuretosaveyoureditsusing
thecommandWriteGlobal.
Forsetupexamples,pleaseseemicroSTATIONExternal
Setup(PDF).
External Setup
Here,youcancreateExternalsetups.
Setup Select
[000: External Set 000...127: External Set 127]
ThisselectstheExternalSetuptoedit.Youcanassigna
nametoeachsetup.
Knob 1...4:
Channel [Ch01...16, Glb]
ThissetstheMIDIChannelfortheknob.Eachcansendona
differentchannel,ifdesired.
GlbmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobalMIDI
Channel,assetinGlobal/Mediamode.
CC# [Off, 000...119]
ThissetstheMIDICCsentbytheknob.
Using external setups
Note:Beforeyoucontinue,youllneedtomakesettingsso
thatMIDIdatacanbetransmittedfromthemicroSTATION
toyourcomputerapplicationorMIDIdevice.
Inthefollowingexplanation,wellusetheexampleofPro
grammode.
1. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgrammode(theLED
willlightup).
2. PresstheEXTERNALbuttontosettheRealtimeControls
inExternalmode.
3. SelectthePROGEDIT:ExternalSetuppage.
4. InSetupSelect,selecttheexternalsetupthatyouwant
touse.
Afteryouvemadeyourselection,returntoPROGPLAY.
5. WhenyouoperateRealtimeControlknobs14,MIDI
controlchanges(CC#)willbetransmittedonthe
assignedMIDIchannel.
Thedisplaywillindicatetheassignmentoftheknobyou
operated(theMIDIchannelandMIDIcontrolchange)
andthevaluethatistransmitted.
Note:ThemicroSTATIONskeyboardandothercontrol
lerswilloperateastheynormallydoineachmode.
6. SwitchtoCombinationmode.
7. OperateRealtimeControlsknobs14inthesameway.
Thesettingswillbemaintained,allowingyoutocontrol
yourconnectedMIDIequipment.
EvenifyouchangeprogramsinProgrammodeorswitch
toCombinationmode,thatsetupwillremain
unchanged.ThismeansthatyoucanselectothermicroS
TATIONsoundswithoutchangingthesettingsthatcon
trolyourexternalMIDIdevice,orswitchtoadifferent
externalMIDIdevicecontrolsetupwithoutchanging
sounds.
YoucanselectexternalsetupsintheExternalSetuppage
ofeachmode.
Saving an external setup
ThecontentyoueditinGlobal/Mediamodeissaved
untilyouturnoffthepower,butwillbelostwhenyou
turnoffthepower.Ifyouwanttokeepyoursettings,
youmustexecuteWriteGlobalSetting(orUpdate
GlobalSetting).
1. PresstheGLB/MEDIAbuttontoenterGlobal/Media
mode.
2. UsethebuttonstoselectMIDI,andthenpressthe
button.
3. UsethebuttonstoselectExternalSetup,andpress
thebutton.Theexternalsetupselectionpage(000:
ExternalSet000)willappear.
4. Usethebuttonstoselecttheexternalsetthatyou
wanttoedit,andthenpressthebutton.
Theknobselectionscreenwillappear.
5. Usethebuttonstoselecttheknobthatyouwantto
edit,andthenpressthebutton.
6. PressthebuttontoselectMIDIChannel,andusethe
buttonstospecifytheMIDIchannelonwhichthe
knobwilltransmit.
7. Pressthebuttontoreturn,andthenusethe
buttonstomakethedisplayindicateCC#.
PressthebuttontoselectCC#,andspecifytheMIDI
controlchangethattheknobwilltransmit.
8. Pressthebuttontoreturntotheknobselectionscreen,
andspecifytheMIDIchannelandMIDIcontrolchange
fortheotherknobs.
Controllers PEDAL/SW
65
Controllers
PEDAL/SW
Type [Damper, Switch, Pedal]
Thisspecifiesthetypeoftheswitchorpedalthatiscon
nectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.
Damper:Choosethisifahalfdamperpedalisconnected.
Switch:Choosethisifapedalswitchisconnected.
Pedal:Choosethisifavolumepedalisconnected.
Sw (Foot Switch function)
[List of Foot Switch Assign]
ThisisshownifTypeissettoSwitch.Specifythefunction
thatwillbecontrolledbythepedalswitch(PS1,soldsepa
rately)connectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.
(ListofFootSwitchassignmentsonpage 295)
Pdl (Foot Pedal function)
[List of Foot Pedal Assign]
ThisisshownifTypeissettoPedal.Specifythefunction
thatwillbecontrolledbythefootvolumepedal(XVP10or
EXP2,soldseparately)connectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/
SWjack.
(ListofFootPedalassignmentsonpage 296)
Polarity [-KORG, +]
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthedamperpedalorpedal
switchthatsconnectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.
IfyouveconnectedaKorgdamperpedal(separatelysold
DS1H)oraKorgpedalswitch(separatelysoldPS1),
choosetheKorgsetting,sincetheseproductsusea()
polarity.Ifyouveconnectedadamperpedalorpedal
switchthatusesa+()polarity,choosethe+setting(:
opentype,:closedtype).Ifthispolaritysettingisincor
rect,usingthedamperpedalorpedalswitchwillnotpro
ducethecorrectresult.Ifyouhavenotconnectedadamper
pedalorpedalswitch,leavethissetto().
Using a connected foot switch to select programs
Youcanassignaprogramswitchingfunctiontothefoot
switchconnectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.This
allowsyoutostepthroughtheprogramnumbersoneby
one,eitherupwardordownward.
Ifyoureperforminganddonotwanttotakeyourhandsoff
thekeys,thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoquicklyswitch
programs.
Therearetwowaystouseafootswitchtochangeprograms.
OnemethodistoassigntheProgramUp/Dwnfunctionto
thefootswitch.TheothermethodistoassigntheValueInc/
Decfunctiontothefootswitch.Asdescribedbelow,youcan
usethemethodthatsbestforyoursituation.
Assigning the Program Up/Dwn function to the
foot switch
IfyouassigntheProgramUp/Dwnfunctiontothefoot
switch,youllbeabletousethefootswitchtodirectlycon
trolprogramchanges,makingtheprogramincrementor
decrement.Normallyyoullusethismethod.
1. ConnectyourfootswitchtotherearpanelDAMPER/
PEDAL/SWjack.
UseaseparatelysoldPS1pedalswitch.
2. PresstheGLB/MEDIAbuttontoenterGlobal/Media
mode.
3. SettheGLOBAL/MEDIA:ControllersPEDAL/SW
TypetoSwitch.
4. SetSwtoeitherProgramUporProgramDwn.
IfyouchooseProgramUp,theprogramnumberwill
incrementtothenextprogrameachtimeyoupressthe
footswitch.
IfyouchooseProgramDwn,theprogramnumberwill
decrementtotheprecedingprogrameachtimeyoupress
thefootswitch.
5. SetPolaritytomatchthepolarityofthepedalyouve
connected.
ChooseKORGifyouveconnectedtheseparatelysold
PS1pedalswitch.
Nowyoucanpressthefootswitchtostepthroughthe
programs.
6. Ifyouwanttokeepthissettingevenwhenthepoweris
turnedoff,besuretowriteit(WriteGlobalon
page 66).
7. PressthePROGbuttontoenterPROG:PLAY,andthen
pressthefootswitchtochangeprograms.
Note:Thissettingworksinthesamewaytoselectcombi
nations.
ARP RTC CC#
Here,youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothearpeg
giatorbuttonsandknobs14whenrealtimecontrolsC
modeisselected.
Whenyouoperateaswitchorknobs14whenrealtimecon
trolsCmodeisselected,theassignedcontrolchangemes
sagewillbetransmittedfromtheMIDIOUTconnector.
Theassignedcontrolchangemessagescanalsobereceived
fromanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtotheMIDIIN
connector,andusedtocontrolthecorrespondingarpeggia
tor.
SW ON/OFF [Off, 000...119]
AssignsacontrolchangemessagesentbytheARPON/OFF
button.ThedefaultsettingisCC#14.
SW LATCH [Off, 000...119]
AssignsacontrolchangemessagesentbytheARPLATCH
ON/OFFbutton.ThedefaultsettingisCC#31.
KNOB1 GATE [Off, 000...119]
Assignsthecontrolchangemessagesentbyknob1when
realtimecontrolsCmodeisselected.Thedefaultsettingis
CC#22.
KNOB2 VEL [Off, 000...119]
CC#23.
KNOB3 SWING [Off, 000...119]
CC#24.
Global/Media mode
66
Command
Load All Demo
Thiscommandloadsalldemosongdatathatsinthemicro
STATIONsmemory.
Beforeyouusethiscommand,youllneedtoturnoff
MemoryProtect(p.60)forthedatayouintendto
load.Ifyouattempttousethecommandwhilemem
oryprotectison,amessageofMemoryProtected
willappear,andthedatawontbeloaded.
HalfDmpr Calib
(Half Damper Calibration)
IfthedamperpedalconnectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SW
jackdoesnotcontrolthehalfdampereffectappropriately,
youcanadjustthepedalcalibrationasfollows.
Sincetheoperationofahalfdamperpedalisdelicate,
pleaseusetheseparatelysoldDS1H.Ifadifferent
pedalisused,youmightnotobtaintheappropriate
effect,oritmightnotbepossibletomakeadjustments.
1. ConnectyourhalfdamperpedaltotheDAMPER/
PEDAL/SWjack.
2. SelecttheHalfDmprCalibcommand,andthenpress
thebuttontomakethedisplayindicateDone?
3. Depressthehalfdamperpedal,andthenreleaseit.
4. Pressthebuttontoapplythepedalcalibration.
Ifcalibrationwasunsuccessful,theerrormessageCant
Calibratewillappear.Trytheprocedureagainfrom
step2.
Reset ARP CC#
ThisautomaticallyassignstheMIDIcontrolchangemes
sagesforeachcontrolleroftheGlobal/Media:Controllers
ARPCC#Assign.
To [All Off, CC Default]
SettheTofieldtothedesiredresetmethod.
AllOff:AllsettingswillbeOff.
CCDefault:Theparameterswillberesettothetypicalset
tings,includingthestandardsettingsforthecontrollers.
IfyouwanttousethecontrollerswithanexternalMIDI
device,werecommendusingthissetting.
(YouarealsofreetoassigndifferentMIDIcontrolchange
messagestothecontrollers,ifyouwish.)
Thedefaultvaluesareshowninthetablebelow.
Reset ARP CC# Default
Pedal Calib (Pedal Calibration)
Thiscommandadjuststhesensitivityofthefootpedalcon
nectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.Thefootpedal
sensitivityisadjustedtothestandardsettingwhenthe
microSTATIONisshipped.Ifyourfootpedaldoesnotwork
appropriately,youcanadjustthepedalcalibrationasfol
lows.
PleaseusetheseparatelysoldEXP2footcontrolleror
XVP10expression/volumeasthefootpedal.Ifadiffer
entpedalisused,youmightnotobtaintheappropriate
effect,oritmightnotbepossibletomakeadjustments.
1. ConnectyourfootpedaltotheASSIGNABLEPEDAL/
SWjack.
2. SelectthePedalCalibcommand,andthenpressthe[>]
buttontomakethedisplayindicateDone?
3. Slowlyadvancethepedalfullyawayfromyourself,and
thenreturnittowardyourself.(Calibrationwilloccur
correctlyevenifyourepeatthisoperationmorethan
once.)
4. Pressthebuttontoapplythepedalcalibration.
Ifcalibrationwasunsuccessful,theerrormessageCant
Calibratewillappear.Trytheprocedureagainfrom
step2.
Note:ThesettingisstoredinthemicroSTATIONsmem
orywhenyouperformthecalibration.
Write Global
ThiscommandwritesGlobal/Mediamodesettings(except
forDrumKitsandArpeggioPatterns).
TheEffectSWsettingwillnotbesaved.
Controllers CC Default
ARPON/OFF CC#14
ARPLATCH CC#31
KNOB1GATE CC#22
KNOB2VEL CC#23
KNOB3SWING CC#24
Media PEDAL/SW
67
Media
Thismodeletsyousavevarioustypesofinternalmemory
datatoanSDcardinsertedinthemicroSTATION,orload
datafrommediaintointernalmemory.Youcanalsodelete
filesorformatanSDcard.
Youcanusethefollowingmedia.
SD cards
MSDOSformatFAT16orFAT32aresupported.
Recognizablecapacity:FAT32:upto2terabytes
(2,000Gbytes)
FAT16:upto2Gbytes
Note:SDHCmemorycardsaresupported.
About files and directories
ThemicroSTATIONusesfilesanddirectoriesonthemedia
tomanagedatainahierarchicalstructure.
OnthemicroSTATION,filesanddirectoriesthatcanberec
ognizedbyMSDOS(i.e.,thatcanbereadbyanMSDOS
computer)arecalledDOSfilesandDOSdirectories.
DifferenttypesofDOSfilearedistinguishedbythefile
nameextensionoftheDOSfile.
DOSfileswiththefollowingfilenameextensionarerecog
nizedasStandardMIDIFiles(SMF).However,filesthatare
notinSMFformatcannotbeloaded.
WhenyouformatanSDcardonthemicroSTATION,orsave
dataforthefirsttime,adirectorynamedKorg/MICRO_ST
willbecreatedintherootdirectory.Whenyousavedata,a
filebelowthisdirectorywillbecreatedwithanautomati
callyassignedname.
Whensaving,thesefilenameextensionswillbeautomati
callyassignedtothefileaccordingtothetypeofdataitcon
tains.Pleasenotethatifyouuseyourcomputertochange
thefilenameextension,thefilewillbeconsideredanunde
finedfileifyouattempttoloadit,andwillbetreatedasa
StandardMIDIFile.
Extension Type
.PCG
Programs,combinations,drumkits,global
settings,arpeggiopatterns(dedicatedmicro
STATIONformat)
.SNG Songs(dedicatedmicroSTATIONformat)
.MID StandardMIDIFiles(SMFformat)
.EXL MIDIexclusivedata
DOS fles
All track .SNG fle
1 song
(S000-127)
All user
arpeggio patterns
1 user
arpeggiopattern
bank INT, USER
.PCG fle All programs 1 program
bank A...D
1 program
All combinations 1 combination
bank A...C
1 combination
1 drum kit
Global settings
All drum kits
User
1 drum kit
bank INT, USER
Undefned DOS fle
DOS directory
DOS fles
.MID fle
Global/Media mode
68
Load
Thesecommandsloadtheselectedfileordirectoryinto
internalmemory.
Load PCG
Loadsdatafroma.PCGfile.
All PCG
Alldatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Load All Programs
Allprogramdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Load All Bank A/Bank B/Bank C/Bank D
Allprogramdataintheselectedbankwillbeloadedinto
theloaddestinationbankyouspecify.
To [Bank A, B, C, D]
Specifytheloaddestinationbank.
Load a Program
Datafortheselectedprogramwillbeloadedintotheload
destinationprogramnumberyouspecify.
Note:Theselectedprogramcanbeplayedfromthekey
boardevenbeforeitsloaded;thisallowsyoutoauditionthe
programbeforeactuallyloadingit.
To [A000...D127: Name]
Specifytheloaddestinationbankandprogramnumber.
Load All Combinations
Allcombinationdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Load All Bank A/Bank B/Bank C
Allcombinationdataintheselectedbankwillbeloaded
intotheloaddestinationbankyouspecify.
To [Bank A, B, C]
Load a Combi
Datafortheselectedcombinationwillbeloadedintothe
loaddestinationcombinationnumberyouspecify.
Note:Theselectedcombinationcanbeplayedfromthekey
combinationbeforeactuallyloadingit.
To [A000...C127: Name]
Specifytheloaddestinationbankandcombinationnumber.
Load All Drum Kits
Alldrumkitdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Load All INT/USER
Alldrumkitdataintheselecteddrumkitbankwillbe
loadedintotheloaddestinationdrumkitbankyouspecify.
To [INT, USER]
Ifyouselectdrumkitbank(INT)andspecify(USER)as
theloaddestination,drumkits000015willbeloaded.
Ifyouselectdrumkitbank(USER)andspecify(INT)as
theloaddestination,thedrumkitswillbeloadedinto
000015.
Load a Drum Kit
Datafortheselecteddrumkitwillbeloadedintotheload
destinationdrumkitnumberyouspecify.
Note:Theselecteddrumkitcanbeplayedfromthekey
drumkitbeforeactuallyloadingit.
To [00...47: Name]
Specifytheloaddestinationdrumkit.
All Arp Patterns
Alluserarpeggiopatterndatainthe.PCGfilewillbe
loaded.
Load INT/USER
Alluserarpeggiopatterndataoftheselecteduserarpeggio
patternbankwillbeloadedintotheloaddestinationuser
arpeggiopatternbankyouspecify.
To [INT, USER]
Specifytheloaddestinationuserarpeggiopatternbank.If
youselectuserarpeggiopatternbankINTandspecify
USERastheloaddestination,userarpeggiopatterns000
511willbeloaded.IfyouselectUSERandspecifyINTas
theloaddestination,thedatawillbeloadedintouserarpeg
giopatterns000511.
Load an Arp
Dataforthesingleuserarpeggiopatternyouselectwillbe
loadedintotheuserarpeggiopatternnumberyouspecifyas
theloaddestination.
Note:Theselecteduserarpeggiopatterncanbeplayedfrom
thekeyboardevenbeforeitsloaded;thisallowsyouto
auditiontheuserarpeggiopatternbeforeactuallyloadingit.
To [000...639]
Specifytheloaddestinationuserarpeggiopattern.
Load Global Setting
Theglobalsettingdatainthe.PCGfilewillbeloaded.
Thisconsistsoftheparametersotherthanthedrumkitsand
userarpeggiopatterns.
ThememoryprotectandEffectSWsettingswillnotbe
loaded.
Media Save All
69
Load SNG
Datainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Load All SNG
Alldatainthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Locate [Append, Clear]
Specifyhowthesongdatafromthe.SNGfilewillbeloaded.
Append:Thesongwillbeloadedafterthelastsongdata
thatalreadyexistsininternalmemory.Atthistime,thesong
datainthe.SNGfilebeingloadedwillbepackedforward.
Selectthiswhenyouwanttoaddsongdatafrommedia
withouterasingthesongdatathatcurrentlyexistsininter
nalmemory.
Clear:Allsongdatacurrentlyexistingininternalmemory
willbeerased,andthesongdatawillbeloadedinthestate
inwhichitwassaved.Selectthiswhenyouwanttorepro
ducethesavedstateimmediatelyafterpoweron,etc.
Load a Song
Dataforthesinglesongyouselectwillbeloadedintothe
loaddestinationsongnumberyouspecify.
To [S000...S127: Name]
Specifytheloaddestinationsong.
Load SMF
TheselectedStandardMIDIFilewillbeloadedintothe
loaddestinationsongyouspecify.Systemexclusivemes
sagesanduniversalexclusivemessagesincludedintheSMF
datawillbeloadedasexclusiveevents.
To [S000...S127: Name]
Specifytheloaddestinationsong.
GS/XGsoundmapsandmessagesarenotsupported.
Dependingonthecontentofthedata,theplayback
mightnotbecorrect,butthedatawillbepreservedif
SysExisOn.
Ifyouselectanundefinedfileandstartloading,the
datawillbeloadedintotheloaddestinationsongyou
specify.Howeverifthefileformatisinvalid,anerror
messagewillappearandtheoperationwillnotbeexe
cuted.
Programbanksandprogramnumbersloadedinthe
songwillfollowtheBankMapsettings(p.59).If
BankMapisKorg,bankAwillbeselectedforbank
select00.00(MSB.LSB).IfBankMapisGM(2),bank
Gwillbeselected.
Save All
Allprograms,combinations,drumkits,globalsettings,and
userarpeggiopatternsfrominternalmemorywillbesaved
tomediaasa.PCGfile,andthesongdatawillbesavedto
mediaasa.SNGfile.
Whensaving,adirectorynamedKORG/MICRO_STwill
beautomaticallycreatedintherootdirectory.The.PCGand
.SNGfileswillbenamedautomatically,andsavedinthe
MICRO_STfolder.
YoucanusetheRenamecommandtochangethefile
namesthatareautomaticallyassignedtoeachfile.
IftheMediumFulldialogboxappears,delete
unneededfilestocreatefreespaceonthemedia,and
thenstartthesaveagain.Alternatively,savetodifferent
media.
Save PCG
Allprograms,combinations,drumkits,globalsettings,and
userarpeggiopatternsfrominternalmemorywillbesaved
asa.PCGfiletotheMICRO_STfolderofthemedia.
Save SEQ
Allsongsfrominternalmemorywillbesavedasa.SNGfile
totheMICRO_STfolderofthemedia.
Save To SMF
(Save Song as Standard MIDI File)
Songdatafrominternalmemorywillbesavedasa.MIDfile
(StandardMIDIFile)totheMICRO_STfolderofthemedia.
Systemexclusiveeventsanduniversalexclusiveevents
includedinthesongdatawillbesavedasexclusivemes
sages.
Thesongdata(MIDItrackdata)savedbythiscommandcan
beplayedbyanotherdevicethatsupportsStandardMIDI
Files.Howeverifyouplantoplaybackthedataonthe
microSTATION,youshouldsaveitusingSaveSEQ,since
themicroSTATIONsowndedicatedsongdataformatwill
allowahigherdegreeofreproducibility.
Song [S000...S127: Name]
Selectthesongthatyouwanttosave.
Format [0, 1]
0(Format0):SixteentracksofMIDIdatawillbecombined
intoonetrackandsaved.
1(Format1):Eachtrackwillbesavedseparately.
Rename
Thiscommandrenamestheselectedfileordirectory.Thisis
availableonlyifaDOSfileorDOSdirectoryisselected.
Global/Media mode
70
Delete
Thiscommanddeletestheselectedfileordirectory.Thisis
availableonlyifaDOSfileorDOSdirectoryisselected.
Format
ThiscommandformatstheselectedmediausingQuickFor
mat.
Whenyouusetheformatcommand,avolumelabel(aname
foreachitemofmedia)ofNEWVOLUMEwillbe
assignedtothemedia,andaMICRO_STfolderwillbe
automaticallycreatedintherootdirectory.
PressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillnottakeyouback
tothepreviousstateafteryouveusedtheformatcom
mand.
microSTATION Full parameters
72
73
Program mode
IfyouconnectthemicroSTATIONtoyourcomputer,youll
beabletousethemicroSTATIONEditorapplicationtoedit
allofthemicroSTATIONsparameters.
Thischapterexplainstheeditableparametersthatare
shownintheeditor.Fordetailsonhowtoselectaparameter
andedititsvalue,refertothemicroSTATIONEditor/Plug
InEditorUsersGuideincludedintheaccessarydisc.
Page structure
Panel / Page Main content
Panel
Programselection.Tempoadjustment.(p.74)
Realtimecontrol.ExternalControl.(p.74)
Arpeggiatoron/off,latchon/off.(p.74)
Quick
Oscillatorplay/mute,solo,andvolumesettings.
(p.76)
Edittheprogramquickparameters.
Realtimecontrolsknobfunctionassignments.
(p.80)
Arpeggiatorsettings.(p.80)
Basic
Basicprogramsettingssuchasvoiceassignment
mode.(p.84)
(p.86)
OSC/Pitch Multisampleselectionandpitchsettings.(p.91)
Filter Filter1and2(tone)settings.(p.99)
Amp Amp1and2(volume)settings.(p.110)
LFO LFOsettings.(p.116)
AMSMIX/
Common
KeyTrack
AMSmixersettings.(p.121)
Commonkeyboardtrackingsettings.(p.127)
IFX
Oscillatoroutput,andsendlevelstothemaster
effects.(p.129)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,andsettings.
(p.131)
MFX/TFX
Mastereffectrouting,selection,andsettings.
(p.135)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(p.136)
Program mode
74
Panel
ThemicroSTATIONEditorspanelletsyoudothefollowing
things.
Selectprogramsandadjustthetempo.
Switchtherealtimecontrolmode,andusetheknobsto
editineachmode.
Usetheexternalcontrolknobs.
Turnthearpeggiatoron/offandarpeggiatorlatchon/off.
Mode Select, BROWSER,
UTILITY
Mode button [PROG, COMBI, SEQ, GLOBAL]
Clickabuttontoselectthemodethatyouwanttoedit.
BROWSER button
ClickingtheBROWSERbuttonopensaprogramsoundlist.
SelectaprogramfromthelistandclicktheOKbuttonto
loadtheprogram.
Note:Youcanclickaprograminthelisttoselectit,andthen
auditionthatprogramfromthekeyboard.
UTILITY button
Theutilityfunctionsarevariouscommandsavailablein
eachpage.Theavailableutilitycommandswilldiffer
dependingonthepage.Thesecommandsalsoletyousave
orloadtheeditedorcreateddataonyourcomputer,andto
importsystemexclusivedata.ClicktheUTILITYbuttonand
chooseacommandfromthemenuthatappears.
UTILITYCommandonpage 137
Display
Program Select [A000...D127: name]
Toselectaprogram,clickthebuttonsshowntothe
rightoftheprogramname.
Tempo [040.00...300.00]
Thisindicatesthetempo.Tosetthetempo,usePROGEDIT
Tempo,=,oruseknob4inRealtimeControlCmode.
Thearpeggiator,LFOs,andeffectswillsynchronizetothe
specifiedtempo.
Realtime Controls
Select buttons [A, B, C]
Theseselecttherealtimecontrolmode.
ClickabuttonA,B,orCtoswitchmodes.
Realtime Control Knob 1...4
Theseknobscontrolthefunctionthatisassignedforeach
realtimecontrolmode.
EXTERNAL button [Off, On]
Pressingthisbuttonwillswitchtoexternalcontrol,allowing
youtousetheknobstocontrolanexternalMIDIdeviceor
computerapplication.
Arpeggiator
ARP ON/OFF button [Off, On]
Thisturnsthearpeggiatoron/off.
ARP LATCH ON/OFF button [Off, On]
ThisturnsthearpeggiatorsLatchfunctionon/off.Ifthisis
on,thearpeggiowillkeepplayingevenafteryoutakeyour
handsoffthekeyboardwhilethearpeggiatorisrunning.
Quick Overview
75
Quick
IntheQuickpageyoulldomainlythefollowingthing.
Edittheprogramsquickparameters.
InPROGPLAY,allMIDIdataistransmittedandreceived
ontheglobalMIDIchannelChannel(p.62).
Overview
Theoverviewshowsthestateofthemainparametersthat
makeuptheprogram.
ByclickingthegraphicofafilterorEG,oranarpeggiatoror
effectsetting,youcanjumptothepageforthatparameter.
Program mode
76
OSC Common
OSC Common
Voice
Theseparametersspecifyvoicesettingsforoscillators1and
2atthesametime.
Voice Mode (Voice Assign Mode) [Poly, Mono]
MonoLegato [Off, On]
Unison [On, Off]
NumOfVoices (Number of Voices) [2...6]
Detune [00...99 cents]
SeeOSCCommononpage 3.
Oscillator
Theseparametersadjustthetranspose,hold,andreverse
settingsforoscillators1and2atthesametime.
Transpose [12...0...+12 (Rel)]
Hold [Off, On]
Reverse [PROG, Off, On (Rel)]
SeeOSC1onpage 7.
Filter/Amp
Filter
Theseparametersadjustthefilterforoscillators1and2at
thesametime.
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#71)]
Flt EG Int (Filter EG Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#79)]
SeeFilter/Amponpage 5.
Amp
Thisparameteradjuststheampvelocityintensityforoscilla
tors1and2atthesametime.
Vel. Int (Amp Velocity Intensity) [99...+99 (Rel)]
SeeFilter/Amponpage 5.
Quick OSC EG/LFO
77
OSC EG/LFO
OSC EG
Filter/Amp EG
TheseparametersadjustthefilterEGandampEGenve
lopesforoscillators1and2atthesametime.
Attack Time [99...+99 (Rel, CC#73)]
Decay Time [99...+99 (Rel, CC#75)]
Sustain Level [99...+99 (Rel, CC#70)]
Release Time [99...+99 (Rel, CC#72)]
SeeFilter/AmpEGonpage 6.
Filter EG
TheseparametersadjustthefilterEGenvelopeforoscilla
Attack Time [99...+99 (Rel)]
Decay Time [99...+99 (Rel)]
Sustain Level [99...+99 (Rel)]
Release Time [99...+99 (Rel)]
Amp EG
TheseparametersadjusttheampEGenvelopeforoscilla
Attack Time [99...+99 (Rel)]
Decay Time [99...+99 (Rel)]
Sustain Level [99...+99 (Rel)]
Release Time [99...+99 (Rel)]
Pitch EG/LFO
TheseparametersadjustthepitchEGenvelopeforoscilla
tors1and2atthesametime.Youcanalsoadjustthedepth
oftheLFO1effect.
Attack (Pitch EG Attack Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
Decay (Pitch EG Decay Time) [99...+99(Rel)]
Release (Pitch EG Release Time) [99...+99 (Rel)]
LFO1 Int (Pitch LFO1 Intensity)
[99...+99 (Rel, CC#77)]
SeePitchEG/LFOonpage 6.
OSC LFO
LFO1
TheseparametersadjustLFO1foroscillators1and2atthe
sametime.
Speed [99...+99 (Rel, CC#76)]
Fade [99...+99 (Rel)]
Delay [99...+99 (Rel, CC#78)]
Stop [PROG, Off, On (Abs)]
SeeLFOonpage 6.
LFO2
TheseparametersadjustLFO2foroscillators1and2atthe
sametime.
Program mode
78
Speed [99...+99 (Rel)]
Fade [99...+99 (Rel)]
Delay [99...+99 (Rel)]
Stop [PROG, Off, On (Abs)]
SeeLFOonpage 6.
Common LFO
ThisparameteradjuststhecommonLFOforoscillators1
and2atthesametime.
Speed [99...+99 (Rel)]
SeeLFOonpage 6.
OSC1
OSC1
Play:Oscillator1willsound.
Mute:Oscillator1willbemuted(silent).
Solo [Off, On]
SwitchestheSolostatuson/offforoscillator1.
Note:TheSoloOn/Offsettingisnotsavedwhenyouwrite
theprogram.
Volume [000...127]
ThisslideradjuststhevolumeofOscillator1.
Pitch
Theseparametersadjustpitchrelatedsettingsforoscillator1.
Tune [1200...+1200]
PtchSlope (Pitch Slope) [1.0...+2.0]
Pitch JS+X [60...+12]
Pitch JSX [60...+12]
SeeOSC1onpage 7.
Portamento
Theseparametersadjustportamentosettingsforoscillator1.
Portamento [Off, On]
Fingered [Off, On]
Mode [Rate, Time]
Time [000...127]
SeeOSC1onpage 7.
Quick OSC2
79
LFO
TheseparametersadjustLFOsettingsforoscillator1.
LFO1 Waveform [Triangle...Rnd6(Cnt)]
LFO2 Waveform [Triangle...Rnd6(Cnt)]
Filter LFO1 Intensity to A [99...+99]
Filter LFO1 Intensity to B [99...+99]
Filter LFO 2 Intensity to A [99...+99]
Filter LFO2 Intensity to B [99...+99]
Amp LFO1 Intensity [99...+99]
Amp LFO2 Intensity [99...+99]
Pitch LFO1 AMS Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
Pitch LFO2 AMS Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
SeeOSC1onpage 7.
OSC2
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsforoscillator2.Theseset
tingsareavailableonlyforaprogramthatusestwooscilla
tors;otherwise,thispagewillbeunavailable.
Theparametersarethesameasforoscillator1.
SeeOSC1onpage 7.
About Relative (Rel) and
Absolute parameters
Relativeparametershaveanindicationof(Rel)
followingtheparametervalue.
ThemicroSTATIONstoneparametersareoftwotypes:Rel
ativeandAbsolute.Inthecaseofabsoluteparameters,asin
gleparameteradjustsasingleprogramparameter.Inthe
caseofrelativeparameters,asingleparametersimultane
ouslyadjuststhevalueoftwoormoreprogramparameters.
Forinstance,Filter/AmpEGAttackTimeaffectsatotalof
sixProgramparameters.ThevalueoftheRelativeparame
tershowstheamountofchangetotheseunderlyingPro
gramparameters.
IftheRelativeparameterissetto0(thesliderinthedisplay
isatthecenterposition),thevalueofthecorrespondingpro
gramparameterwillnotchange.
Thedefinitionsofhigherandlowersettingscanvary,
dependingonthespecificparameter.Unlessnotedother
wise,theyworkasfollows:
WhentheRelativeparameterisat+99(themaximum),the
Programparametersareallattheirmaximumaswell.Simi
larly,whentheRelativeparameterisat99(theminimum),
theProgramparametersareatzero.
Relative parameter scaling
AfewoftheProgramparameterscontrolledbytheRelative
toneparameterarebipolar,meaningthattheycanbeeither
positiveornegative(insteadofjustpositive).WhenthesePro
gramparametersaresettonegativevalues,thetoneparame
termaybehavedifferentlyfromthedescriptionabove.
Forinstance,iftheEGIntensityissettoanegativevalue,
theRelativetoneparametervalueswillrangefrom0to99,
theinverseofthediagramabove.EGSustainworksdiffer
ently;ifitssettoanegativevalue,toneparametervalues
rangefrom0downtotheprogrammedvalue,andthenup
to+99,asshownbelow.
Relative parameter scaling: EG Sustain
Saving parameter Edits
Parametereditsaresavedintwodifferentways,depending
onwhethertheparameterisRelativeorAbsolute.
Relative:EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesound
immediately,butdontchangetheunderlyingProgram
parametersettingsuntiltheProgramissaved.Whenthe
Programissaved,themicroSTATIONcalculatesthecom
binedeffects,andsavestheresultsintotheProgramparam
etersdirectly.Atthatpoint,alloftheRelativeparameters
areresetto0.
Absolute:EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediately
reflectedinthecorrespondingonscreenparameters,and
viceversa.
Interaction between parameters and MIDI CCs
Anumberoftheparameterscanaffectparametersthatare
alsomodulatedbydedicatedMIDICCs.ThespecificCC
numbersarenotedinthedescriptionsfortheindividual
parameters.
ParametersandtheCCsworkindependently.Itspossible,
forinstance,toreducethevalueofaparameter,andthenfor
aCCtoincreaseitagain.
Thisallowsyoutofirsteditaparameter,andthenuseCCs
toadjusttheeditedresult.
99
00
Relative parameter Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
0 99 +99
99
99
00
Relative parameter Value
Parameter
Value
As Programmed
0 99 +99
Program mode
80
ARP/Controllers
Audition
Whenyouselectapreloadprogram,apreviouslyspecified
riff(phrase)appropriateforthatsoundcanplay.Thisis
calledtheAuditionfunction.
Audition Riff [000: Off...383: name]
Thisselectstheauditionriff.ThemicroSTATIONcontains
383auditionriffsthataresuitableforawiderangeofinstru
mentalsoundsandmusicalstyles.
Ifyouchoose000:Off,noriffwillplay.
Transpose [-24...+24]
Thistransposesthepitchoftheauditionriffinsemitone
steps.
Youcantchangetheplaybacktempooftheaudition
riff.Norcanyousetthearpeggiatortempowhilethe
auditionriffisplaying.
Thearpeggiatorwillbeoffwhiletheauditionriffis
playing.
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whenControlAssign
RealtimeControlBmodeisselected.
Realtime Control Knob Assign
REALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbuttontoselectB,and
operateknobs14.
(KnobAssign(RealtimeControlKnobBAssign)on
page 9)
Arpggiator Setup
Hereyoucanajustarpeggiatorsettingsfortheprogram.
ThecontentsoftheparametersarethesameasinmicroS
TATIONQuickParameters(ARPSetuponpage 9).
Pattern [P0...P4, U000(INT)...U639(USER): name]
Selectsthearpeggiopattern.(Patternonpage 9)
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , ]
Specifiesthetimingresolutionofthearpeggio.
(Resolutiononpage 10)
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
beplayed.(Octaveonpage 9)
Gate [000...100(%), Step]
(Gate[%]onpage 10)
(Velocityonpage 10)
Swing [100...+100(%)]
ofthearpeggio.(Swing[%]onpage 10)
Sort [Off, On]
arpeggiated.(Sortonpage 10)
Quick ARP/Controllers
81
Latch [Off, On]
(Latchonpage 10)
Key Sync. [Off, On]
(Tempo).(KeySynconpage 10)
Keyboard [Off, On]
partofthearpeggio.(Keyboardonpage 10)
Program mode
82
Basic
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsfortheProgram.
Amongotherthings,youcan:
SetuptheProgramtobeaSingle,aDouble,oraDrum
Kit
Selectthebasicscaleoftheprogram.
Enable/disablethehalfdamperfunction
CreatekeyboardsplitsettingsforOSC1,OSC2,and
Hold.
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor
monophonically
OSC Mode
Oscillator Mode [Single, Double, Drums]
ThisspecifiestheProgramsoscillatorassignment;whether
itwilluseoneortwooscillators,oradrumkit.
Single:Theprogramwilluseoneoscillator(Oscillator1,Fil
ter1,Amplifier1).Inthiscase,theprogramwillnormally
haveamaximumof80notepolyphony.
Double:Theprogramwillusetwooscillators(Oscillator1/
2,Filter1/2,Amplifier1/2).Inthiscasetheprogramwill
normallyhaveamaximumof40notepolyphony.
Drums:Theprogramwilluseoneoscillator(aswhenSingle
isselected),butOscillator1willbeassignedadrumkit
insteadofamultisample.Inthiscasetheprogramwillnor
mallyhaveamaximumof80notepolyphony.
Scale
Type [Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale03]
SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey
parameter,below,isveryimportant.
EqualTemperament:Thisisthemostwidelyusedscaleby
far,inwhicheachsemitonestepisspacedatequalpitch
intervals.
EqualTemperamentallowseasymodulation,sothata
chordprogressionplayedinthekeyofCsoundsroughly
thesameasthesameprogressionplayedinF#.Sacrificed,
however,issomeofthepurityofindividualintervals
offeredbythescalesbelow.
PureMajor:Inthistemperament,majorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
PureMinor:Inthistemperament,minorchordsofthe
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune.
Arabic:Thisscaleincludesthequartertoneintervalsused
inArabicmusic.
Pythagoras:ThisscaleisbasedonancientGreekmusicthe
ory,andisespeciallyeffectiveforplayingmelodies.Itpro
ducescompletelypurefifths,withoneexception,atthe
expenseofdetuningotherintervalsthirdsinparticular.
AsmuchasPythagorasmighthavelikedtodoso,itsnot
possibletomakeallthefifthspurewhilealsokeepingthe
octaveintune.Forthesakeoftheoctave,oneofthefifths
theintervalfromthesharpfourthdegreetothesharpfirst
degreeismadequiteflat.
Werkmeister(WerkmeisterIII):Thisscalewasoneofthe
manytemperamentsystemsdevelopedtowardstheendof
theBaroqueperiod.TheseWellTemperedtuningswere
aimedatallowingrelativelyfreetranspositionalthough
Basic Half-Damper Control
83
youllstillnoticethatthedifferentkeysmaintaintheirown
distinctcharacteristics,unlikeEqualTemperament.
J.S.Bachwasreferringtothesenewscalesinhistitle,The
WellTemperedClavier.Assuch,thisgroupareparticu
larlyappropriateforlatebaroqueorganandharpsichord
music.
Kirnberger(KirnbergerIII):ThisisasecondWellTem
peredtuning,datingfromtheearly18thcentury.
Slendro:ThisisanIndonesiangamelanscale,withfive
notesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usetheC,D,F,GandAnotes.Other
keyswillplaythenormalequaltemperedpitches.
Pelog:ThisisanotherIndonesiangamelanscale,withseven
notesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usethewhitekeys.Theblackkeys
willplaytheequaltemperedpitches.
Stretch:Thistuningisusedforacousticpianos.
UserAllNotesScale:Thisisauserprogrammedscalewith
differentsettingsforall128MIDInotes.Youcansetupthis
scaleinGlobalmode(p.186).
UserOctaveScale0003:Theseareuserprogrammed
scaleswithsettingsforeachofthe12notesinanoctave.You
cansetthemupinGlobalmode(p.186).
Key (Scale Key) [C...B]
Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqualTemperament,
thecombinationoftheselectedscaleandtheKeyset
tingmayskewthetuningofthenote.Forexample,A
abovemiddleCmightbecome442Hz,insteadofthe
normal440Hz.YoucanusetheGlobalModesMaster
Tune(p.182)parametertocorrectthis,ifnecessary.
Random [0...7]
Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchforeach
note.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbecompletelysta
ble;highervaluescreatemorerandomization.
Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstrumentsthat
havenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalogsynths,tape
mechanismorgansoracousticinstruments.
Half-Damper Control
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuousfoot
pedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoastandard
footswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermoresubtlecontrolof
sustain,whichcanbeespeciallyusefulforpianosounds.
ThemicroSTATIONwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf
damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPER/PEDAL/
SWinput.Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocali
bratethepedal,usingtheHalfDamperCalibrationcom
mandintheGlobalcommand.(HalfDmprCalib(Half
DamperCalibration)onpage 66)
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperworkjust
likeastandardfootswitch.InconjunctionwiththeEnable
HalfDamperparameter,below,intermediatepositions
allowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similartothedamper
pedalofanacousticpiano.
Enable Half-Damper [On, Off]
On:HalfDamperpedals,normalsustainpedals,andMIDI
CC#64willallmodulatetheAmpEG,asdescribedbelow.
Off:thepedalsandMIDICC#64willstillholdnotesas
usual,butwillnotmodulatetheAmpEG.
Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time
TheamountofmodulationdependsonwhethertheAmp
EGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewithmostacoustic
pianosounds),orsetto1ormore.Themodulationiscontin
uous,from1x(nochange)to55timeslonger;thetable
belowshowsaselectionofrepresentativepoints.
Half-Damper modulation of Amp EG Release Time
Key Zone
Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopandbottom
keylimitsforOscillators1and2.Also,youcancontrolthe
keyboardrangeoverwhichtheHoldparametertakes
effect.
OSC1
Bottom Key [C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeywhereOscillator1willplay.
Top Key [C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeywhereOscillator1willplay.
OSC2
ThissetsthelowestkeywhereOscillator2willplay.
Top Key [C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeywhereOscillator2willplay.
Hold
Hold [On, Off]
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasifyou
wereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryouliftyourfingers
fromthekeyboard.
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(andAmp
EG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwillplayforthe
entirelengthofthemultisample(s).
On:TheHoldfunctionisenabledfortherangesetbythe
HoldBottomandHoldTopparameters,below.
Off:Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Hold Bottom Key [C1...G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
CC#64
Value
Multiply Amp EG Release Time by
If Sustain = 0 If Sustain = 1 or more
0 1x 1x
32 2.1x 2.1x
64 3.2x
3.2x
80 5.9x
96 22.3x
127 55x
Program mode
84
Hold Top Key [C1...G9]
ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Using Hold with Drum Kits
Holdcanbeespeciallyusefulfordrumprograms,sinceit
letsthedrumsamplesringoutnaturally.Ingeneral,when
yousettheOscillatorModetoDrums,itsgoodtosetHold
toOn.
OnceyouveturnedonHoldforadrumprogram,thefunc
tioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasisaccordingtoset
tingswithintheselectedDrumKit.
IfakeysEnableNoteOffRecvparameter(p.191)is
unchecked,thenotewillbeheld.
IfthekeysEnableNoteOffRecvparameterischecked,it
willnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbeheld
regardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffRecvsetting.
Using Hold with Acoustic Pianos
Holdisalsousefulforsimulatingthetopoctavesofan
acousticpiano,inwhichnotesalwayssustainuntiltheyfade
outnaturally,regardlessofhowlongyouholdthekey.
TheHoldBottomKeyandHoldTopKeyparameters
aredesignedforexactlythispurpose.Theyletyoulimitthe
effectoftheHoldparametertoaspecificrangeofthekey
board.
Program Basic
Voice Assign Mode
Mode (Voice Assign Mode) [Poly, Mono]
Selectthebasicvoiceallocationmode.Dependingonwhich
oneyouselect,variousotheroptionswillappear,suchas
PolyLegato(Polymodeonly)andUnison(Monomode
only).
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowingyou
playchords.
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically,producing
onlyonenoteatatime.
Poly
Poly Legato [Off, On]
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
toPoly.
Legatomeanstplayingnotessothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnoteis
released.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached.
On:Whenyouplayalegatophrase,onlythefirstnoteof
thatphrase(andwithinapproximatelythefirst30msec)will
usethenormalmultisamplestartpointspecifiedbyStart
Offset(p.89);allsubsequentnoteswillusethelegato
startpointspecifiedforeachmultisample.
Thisisausefulwaytosimulatethepercussiveattackofa
tonewheeltypeorgan.
Off:NoteswillalwaysusethesettingoftheStartOffset,
regardlessofwhetheryouplaylegatoordetached.
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave
anyeffect.
Single Trigger [Off, On]
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeis
settoPoly.
On:Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,theprevious
notewillbesilencedbeforethenextnoteissounded,sothat
thetwodonotoverlap.
Off:Whenyouplaythesamenoterepeatedly,thenoteswill
overlap.
Mono
Mono Legato [Off, On]
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceModeissettoMono.
Legatorefertonotesthatareplayedinawaythatthey
soundsmoothandconnected;thenextnoteisplayedbefore
thelastnoteisreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplaying
detached.
On:Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,thenoteswithina
legatophrasewillsoundsmoother.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegatophrase
willsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnoteswillhavea
smoothersound,formoregentletransitionsbetweenthe
notes.
Off:Legatophrasingwillproducethesamesoundas
detachedplaying.
Mono Mode [Normal, Use Legato Offset]
ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatoisOn.
Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,themultisample,envelopes,
andLFOswillnotbereset;onlythepitchoftheoscillator
willchange.Thissettingisparticularlyeffectiveforwind
instrumentsandanalogsynthsounds.
Withthisoption,thepitchmayoccasionallybeincor
rect,dependingonwhichmultisampleyouplay,and
whereonthekeyboardyouplay.
UseLegatoOffset:Whenyouplaylegato,thesecondand
subsequentnoteswillusethelegatostartpointspecifiedfor
eachmultisample,ratherthantheStartOffset(p.89)set
ting.
Thisiseffectivewhenusedwithamultisampleforwhich
youveassignedaspecificlegatooffsetpoint.Forexample,
youmightuseittocontroltheattackofabreathy,slow
attacksaxsound.Onsomemultisamples,thiswillhaveno
effect.
EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
detachedplaying.
Priority [Low, High, Last]
PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono.
Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmorethan
onenoteisbeinghelddown.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,mono
phonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
Unison [On, Off]
UnisoncanbeusedinMonomode.
On:WhenUnisonison,theProgramusestwoormore
stacked,detunedvoicestocreateathicksound.
UsetheVoicesandDetuneparameterstosetthenum
berofvoicesandamountofdetuning,andtheThickness
parametertocontrolthecharacterofthedetuning.
Off:TheProgramplaysnormally.
Basic Program Basic
85
Voices (Number of Voices) [2...6]
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itappliesonly
whenUnisonisOn.
Detune [cents] [00...99 cents]
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnisonvoices,
incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThicknesparameter,
below,controlshowthevoicesaredistributedacrossthe
detuneamount.WhenThicknessisOff,thevoicesaredis
tributedevenly,centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
Forinstance,letssaythattheVoicesparameterissetto3,
Detuneissetto24,andThicknesisOff:
Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwowill
notbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedupby12
cents.
Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto24
andThicknessisstillOff,buttheNumberofvoicesissetto
4:
Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewillbe
detunedupby4cents,andvoice4willbedetunedupby12
cents.
ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuningfunc
tionfortheunisonvoices.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacrossthe
Detunerange,asshownabove.
19:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetricalway,
increasingthecomplexityofthedetunefuction,andchang
ingthewaythatthedifferentpitchesbeatagainstone
another.Thiscreatesaneffectsimilartovintageanalogsyn
thesizers,whereoscillatorswouldfrequentlydriftslightly
outoftune.Highernumbersincreasetheeffect.
Voice Detune
1 12
2 0
3 +12
Voice Detune
1 12
2 4
3 +4
4 +12
Program mode
86
Controllers
change)thatareassignedtoknobs14whenControlAssign
RealtimeControlBmodeisselected.
REALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbuttontoselectB,and
operateknobs14.
(KnobAssign(RealtimeControlKnobBAssign)on
page 9)
Basic ARP
87
ARP
Hereyoucanadjustsettingsforthearpeggiatorusedbythe
program.
TheparametersarethesameasmicroSTATIONquick
parametersArpSetup.(ARPSetuponpage 9)
Arpggiator Setup
Pattern [P0...P4, U000(INT)...U639 (USER): name]
Selectsthearpeggiopattern.
(Patternonpage 9)
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , ]
Specifiesthetimingresolutionofthearpeggio.(Resolu
tiononpage 10)
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
beplayed.(Octaveonpage 9)
Gate [000...100(%), Step]
(Gate[%]onpage 10)
(Velocityonpage 10)
Swing [100...+100(%)]
ofthearpeggio.(Swing[%]onpage 10)
Sort [Off, On]
arpeggiated.(Sortonpage 10)
Latch [Off, On]
(Latchonpage 10)
Key Sync. [Off, On]
(Tempo).(KeySynconpage 10)
Keyboard [Off, On]
partofthearpeggio.(Keyboardonpage 10)
Scan Zone
Top Key [C1...G9]
Theseparametersspecifytherangeofnotes(keys)for
whichthearpeggiatorwillfunction.(TopKeyon
page 10),(BottomKeyonpage 10)
Top Velocity [001...127]
Bottom Velocity [001...127]
Thereparameterspecifytherangeofvelocitiesforwhich
thearpeggiatorwillfunction.(TopVelonpage 10),
(BottomVelonpage 10)
Program mode
88
OSC/Pitch
Thesepagescontrolthefirstandmostbasicelementsof
sounds:theMultisamplesthattheoscillatorsplay,andthe
pitchusedtothem.Forinstance,youcan:
SelectMultisamplesforSingleandDoublePrograms,or
DrumKitsforDrumPrograms.
Setupvelocitysplits,crossfades,andlayersforSingle
andDoublePrograms.
Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingtheoctave,fine
tuning,andsoon.
Controlpitchmodulationusingavarietyofcontrollers
suchasLFO,pitchEG,andthejoystick.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Drums,onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesfor
Oscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
OSC1
ThissettingwilldependontheOscillatorModesetting.
IfitisSingleorDouble,eachoscillatorcanuseuptofour
multisamples.InDrummode,thereisoneOscillator,andit
playsasingleDrumKit.
Multisamples, and Drum Kits
MultisamplesandDrumKitsallowyoutoplaysamplesin
differentways.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacrossthe
keyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitarMultisample
mighthavesixsamplesoneforeachstring.
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
playingdrumsamples.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers
Asmentionedabove,unlessyoureinDrummode,each
Oscillatorhasfourvelocityzones,namedHighthrough
Low.EachofthesezonescanplayaMultisample,andhas
eachseparatesettingsforLevel,StartOffset,andsoon.
Eachofthezonescanfadeintothenext,tocreatesmoother
velocitytransitions.Zonescanevenbelayeredtogether,two
atatime.
Youcanstackamaximumoftwovelocityzones,causing
twosamplestosoundsimultaneously(layering).Youcan
alsousevelocitytosmoothlyfadebetweenthesamplesof
thesetwozones(velocitycrossfading).
Oscillator Mode Single, Double
High:
Thesearethesettingsforthefirstandhighestvelocityzone.
IfyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingleMul
tisample,justsetupHighasdesired,andthensettheBot
tomVel.(BottomVelocity)to1andtheRangetoOff.
Multisample On/Off [Off, On]
ThisspecifieswhethertheHighmultisamplewillsound.It
willsoundifthisisOn.
Bank [Mono, Stereo]
ThisisdisplayedifMultisampleOn/OffisOn.
YoucanchoosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereoMulti
samples.NotethatstereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceas
manyvoicesasmonoMultisamples.
Mono:Internalmonauralmultisamples.
Stereo:Internalstereomultisamples.
OSC/Pitch OSC2
89
Multisample select [List of Multisample]
ThisspecifiesamultisampleforHigh.
Somemultisampleshaveanupperlimit;notesplayed
abovethatlimitwillnotsound.
Mid Hi, Mid Lo, Low
Thesearethesettingsforthesecond,third,andfourth
velocityzones.TheparametersforMidHiandMidLoare
exactlythesameasthoseforHigh,asdescribedabove.
TheparametersforLowarealsosimilartothoseforHigh,
exceptthatLowhasnosettingsforBottomVel.(whichis
alwaysfixedat1),Xfd,orCurve.
Oscillator Mode Drums
What is a drum kit?
Drumkitscanbecreatedoreditedonlybyusingthe
includedmicroSTATIONEditor;theycannotbeeditedfrom
themicroSTATIONitself.
DrumkitsarecreatedoreditedinGlobalmode.Toeach
noteofthekeyboard,youcanassignuptofourdrum
instrumentsamples,anduselayering,crossfading,orveloc
ityswitchingtoswitchbetweenthem.Then,inProgram
mode,youcanmakefilterandampsettings,andspecify
effectsandroutingtotheaudiooutputjacks.
Fordetails,pleaseseeCreatingaDrumKitonpage 192.
TouseadrumkitinaProgram,setOscillatorModeto
Drums,andchooseoneofthe144userdrumkitsorthenine
GM2drumkits.
High (DKit):
TheseparametersappearwhentheOscillatorModeisset
toDrums.
Multisample (DrumKit)
[000...031 (INT), 032...047(USER), 048...056 (GM)]
Thisselectsadrumkit.
Note:For000(INT)047(USER),youcanuseGlobal:Drum
Kittoedittheinstrumentassignments.
OSC2
HereyoucanselectthemultisampleforOscillator2.
ItisonlyavailablewhentheOscillatorModeissettoDou
ble;ifitsnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1.
(OSC1onpage 88)
PITCH EG
ThisdisplaysthepitchEGenvelopespecifiedinthePitch
EGpage.
OSC1 Multisample
Programssoundsarebasedonmultisamples,andthispage
letsyousetupallofthebasicmultisamplerelatedsettings.
SelectMultisamplesfortheOscillator(inaSingleor
DoubleProgram),orselecttheDrumKitforaDrum
Program
SettheOscillatorsbasicpitch
Createvelocitysplitsandcrossfadesbetween
Multisamples
What is a multisample?
Asampleisadigitalrecordingofaparticularinstrumentor
waveform(orothernaturalorartificiallyprocessedsound)
recordedataspecificpitch.Amultisampleisacollectionof
similarlyvoicedsamples,usedtocreatethesametypeof
soundpiano,bass,guitar,strings,organacrosstheentire
keyboard,asthebasisofaprogram.Theoscillatorsofsingle
anddoubleprogramsusemultisamples.Thereare360mul
tisamplesavailableinthisinstrument.
Youcanassignuptofourmultisamplestoeachoscillator
andswitchbetweenthembyvelocity.
High
Start Offset [Off, 1st...8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
Multisamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.
TheStartOffsetspecifieswhethertousethenormalstart
point(Off),ortouseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st
8th).
SomeMultisamplesmayhavefewerthan8prepro
grammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepointscan
beselected.
Offset Level [0...127]
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.The
Ampsectioncanmodifythisbasiclevelextensivelywith
envelopes,LFOs,keyboardtracking,andothermodulation;
formoreinformation,pleaseseeAmponpage 110.
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel.
Reverse [Off, On]
Thisplaystheselectedmultisampleinreversewithoutloop
ingit.
Ifanindividualsamplewithinthemultisampleisalready
settoreverse,itwillplayinreversewithoutthissetting.
On:Themultisamplewillplayinreverse.
Off:Themultisamplewillplaynormally.
Program mode
90
Crossfade
Bottom Vel (Bottom Velocity) [1...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocitywheretheMultisamplewill
sound.HighsBottomVel.canbeequalto,butnotlower
than,thatofMidHi.
Range (Crossfade Range) [Off, 1...127]
ThissetstherangeofvelocitiesoverwhichHighwillfade
intoMidHi,goingupfromtheBottomVel.
Forinstance,iftheBottomVel.issetto64,andthe
Rangeissetto20,MidHiwillstarttofadeinatvelocities
of84andbelow.
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheRange,theOscillatorwill
usetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
Curve [Linear, Power, Layer]
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linearand
Power(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwoMultisamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermaybe
moreappropriateforagivenpairofMultisamples.Layer,
truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwoMultisamples
togetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%of
theirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,
thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,tryusing
Powerinstead.
Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwosamples
willeachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumeinthemid
dleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreateabumpin
thevolumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttryselectingLin
earinstead.
LayermeansthatthetwoMultisampleswillbelayered
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
Crossfade Curves
Mid High, Mid Lo, Low
velocityzones.TheparametersforMidHiandMidLoare
exactlythesameasthoseforHigh,asdescribedabove.
TheparametersforLowarealsosimilartothoseforHigh,
exceptthatLowhasnosettingsforBottomVel.(whichis
alwaysfixedat1),Range,orCurve.
Bottom Velocity = 64
Xfade Range = 20
Curve = Linear
84
Xfade
Power
Xfade
Layer
Linear
Volume
MS1
MS2
Velocity
Volume
MS1
MS2
Velocity
Volume
MS1
MS2
Velocity
Xfade
OSC/Pitch OSC1 Pitch
91
OSC1 Pitch
ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforOscillator1spitch
modulation.Forexample,youcan:
SpecifypitchbendcontrolledbythejoystickX(oran
incomingpitchbendmessage)settoindependentBend
UpandBendDown,orcontrolledbyanincoming
messageCC#16(theribboncontrolmessageetc).
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchangeswhen
youplayupanddownthekeyboard.
AssignAMSmodulationforpitch.
SetupinitialamountsofpitchmodulationfromthePitch
EGandLFO1/2,aswellasAMSmodulationofLFOand
EGamounts.
SetupPortamento.
Alternate Modulation
AlternateModulationletsyouusecontrollers,envelopes,
LFOs,etc.tomodulateProgramparameters.Youcanuse
onecontrollertomodulatemultipleparameterssimultane
ously.Youcanalsocreatecomplexmodulationsetupsin
which(forexample)anenvelopemodulatesthefrequency
ofanLFO,andthatLFOisthenusedtomodulateafilter.
Programsprovide48types(88destinations)foralternate
modulation.
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)referstoanyofthe
assignablemodulationsourcesinthemicroSTATION,
including:
ControllersofthemicroSTATIONitself,suchasthe
joystickandtherealtimeknobs
IncomingMIDIcontrollers
ModulatorssuchastheFilter,Pitch,andAmpEGs,the
LFOs,ortheAMSMixers
Intensityisaparameterthatsusedtosetthedegree(speed,
depth,amountetc.)ofhowAMSwillcontrolthemodula
tion.
Anumberoffrequentlyusedmodulationroutings,suchas
usingthejoysticktovarythepitch,areprovidedasaddi
tional,dedicatedroutings,separatefromAMS.
NotethatnotallAMSsourcesmaybeavailableforsome
modulationdestinations.
FordetailsonalternatemodulationandAMS,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)onpage 287.
Tips for using AMS
Whenadjustingsettingsforalternatemodulation,thinkof
theeffectthatyouwishtoproduce,whattypeofmodula
tionwillbenecessarytoproducethateffect,andwhat
parameteroftheoscillator,filter,oramplifierneedstobe
controlled.
Next,selectasource(AMS)andsettheIntensity.Ifyoupro
ceedlogicallyinthisway,youwillachievethedesired
effect.
Forexampleinaguitarsoundprogramwhereyouwantto
usethejoysticktocontrolthefeedback,youwouldmake
assignmentssothatthejoystickcontrolsthefilterfrequency
andresonance.
Program mode
92
Pitch
Pitch Slope [1.0...+2.0]
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
Pitch Slope, pitch, and note
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescausethepitchto
fallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthekey
boardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasifyoure
alwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecialeffects
sounds,forinstance.
Ribbon (CC#16) [12...+12]
Thisspecifiesinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhen
CC#16isreceived.
Withapositive(+)setting,thepitchwillrisewhenthevalue
ofCC#16ishigherthanthecentervalueof64.Withanega
tive()setting,thepitchwillfall.
JS (+X) [60...+12]
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheright(orwhenapitchbendmes
sageisreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoaposi
tivevalue.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseoneoctaveabovethe
originalpitch.
JS (X) [60...+12]
Specifyinsemitoneshowthepitchwillchangewhenthe
joystickismovedtotheleft(orwhenapitchbendmessage
isreceived).Fornormalpitchbend,setthistoanegative
value.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfiveoctavesbelowthe
originalpitch.Youcanusethistocreateguitarstyledown
wardswoops.
AMS (Pitch) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontrolthepitch.
ForalistofAMSsources,AMS(AlternateModulation
Source)Listonpage 287.
AMS Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchmodula
tion,insemitones.
ForexampleifyousetAMS(Pitch)toJS+Y:CC#01andthen
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,thepitchwillriseif
thisparameterissettoapositive(+)value,orfallifthis
parameterissettoanegative()value.
Pitch EG
Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGonOscillator
1sfrequency,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMSmodulation.
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,positiveval
uesfromtheEGraisethepitch,andnegativevalueslower
thepitch.
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,theeffectof
theEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmeanlowerpitches,
andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigherpitches.
AMS (Pitch EG) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountofthePitchEG.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEGAMS
modulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitialIntensity
areaddedtogethertodeterminethePitchEGsfinaleffect.
Withpositive(+)values,greatermodulationwillincrease
theeffectofthePitchEG,asshowninexampleBbelow.
Withnegative()values,greatermodulationwillintroduce
theoppositeeffectofthePitchEGlikeinvertingthepolar
ityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveraldifferent
ways:
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
parameter,andthenreducethisamountwithAMS.In
thiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimplydiminished,
andnotactuallyinverted,asshowninexampleC.
YoucanalsosettheAMSIntensityamounttobegreater
thantheinitialIntensity.Inthiscase,theEGwillhavea
positiveeffectwithlowmodulationamounts,andan
invertedeffectathighermodulationamountsasshown
inexampleD.
Pitch EG AMS
Portamento
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetweennotes,
insteadofchangingabruptly.
Enable [Off, On]
(Portamento(PortamentoEnable)onpage 7)
Fingered [Off, On]
(PortaFingr(PortamentoFingered)onpage 7)
Mode [Rate, Time]
(PortaMode(PortamentoMode)onpage 7)
Time [000...127]
(PortaTime(PortamentoTime)onpage 7)
Pitch
Note on keyboard
2oct
1oct
1oct
C4 C5
+2
+1
0
1
Change
to Pitch
Change
to Pitch
A. Original EG B. Intensity = +6.00
C. Intensity = 3.00 D. Intensity = 24.00
OSC/Pitch OSC2 Multisample
93
LFO1
LFO1andLFO2canbothcontrolthepitch.Youcancontrol
thestrengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthreedifferent
ways:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe
LFO1Int.parameter.
UseJS+YInt.toadjusttheamountofLFOproduced
byJS+Yoperations.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
LFO1 Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch,in
semitones,beforeanyJS+YInt.orAMSmodulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
JS+Y Intensity [12.00...+12.00]
SpecifythedepthofpitchmodulationproducedbyOSC1
LFO1whenthejoystickismovedinthe+Y(away)direction
(orwhenCC#1isreceived).(Joystickcontrolinthe+Ydirec
tioniscalledJS+Y.)
ThisparametersetsthemaximumamountofLFOmodula
tionaddedbyJS+Y,insemitones.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe+Y
directionwillcausetheOSC1LFO1toproducedeeperpitch
modulation.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.You
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyLFO1Int.,above.Forexample:
1. SetLFO1Int.to+7.00.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthepitch,
bendingitbyaperfect5th.
2. SetJS+YInt.to7.00.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickup,theeffectoftheLFO
willfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthetop
ofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelledout.
AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
amountoftheLFOthatsappliedtopitch.
Source)Listonpage 287..
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(LFO1)
modulationforpitch.
Withasettingof0,modulationwillnotbeapplied.Witha
settingof12.00,theOSC1LFO1willapplyamaximumof+/
1octaveofpitchmodulation.
ForexampleifAMS(LFO1)issettoJS+Y:CC#01andyou
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,pitchmodulationfrom
OSC1LFO1willbeappliedinpositivephaseifthisisaposi
tive(+)value,orappliedinnegativephaseifthisisanega
tive()value.
LFO1Int.,JS+YInt.,andAMS(LFO1)settingsare
summedtodeterminethedepthanddirectionofpitchmod
ulationproducedbyOSC1LFO1.
LFO2
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothoseforLFO1.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptionsunder
LFO1,above.
OSC2 Multisample
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsforOscillator2.Itis
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;if
not,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,as
describedunderOSC1Multisampleonpage 89.
OSC2 Pitch
ThispagecontrolsthepitchsettingsforOscillator2.Itis
describedunderOSC1Pitchonpage 91.
Program mode
94
OSC Common
Hereiswhereyoucanspecifythepitchofeachoscillator,
thedelaytimeuntiltheoscillatorwillbeginsounding,and
thevelocityzone.
Frequency
Oscillator Mode Single, Double
OSC1, OSC2
Octave [32', 16', 8', 4']
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheOscillator,inoctaves.The
defaultis+0[8].Thestandardoctaveofamultisampleis+0
[8].
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
octave.
Tune [1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Freq Ofs [Hz] (Frequency Offset)
[10.0Hz ... +10Hz]
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
Oscillator Mode Drums
Octave [32', 16', 8', 4']
Thisadjuststhepitchinoctaveunits.Whenusingadrum
kit,settheOctaveto8.
Wheneditingadrumprogram,youmustsetthis
parameterto8.Withothersettings,thesoundsofthe
drumkitwillbeassignedtothewrongnotesofthe
keyboard.
Thisadjuststhelocationoftheinstrumentsintheselected
drumkit.Unlessyouneedtochangethis,leaveitat0.
Tune [1200...+1200]
Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentunits.Thepitchofeach
drumkitcanbeadjustedinGlobal:Drumkit.
Freq Ofs [Hz] [10.0Hz ... +10Hz]
Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz.Frequency
OffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,whenusedtodetune
thetwooscillators,itcancreateaconstantbeatfrequency
acrosstherangeofthekeyboard.
OSC/Pitch OSC Common
95
Note-On Control
OSC1
Delay [ms] [0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator1actuallybeginstosound.
ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelayingone
oscillatorinrelationtotheother.
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthesoundby
aparticularamountoftime,thesoundwillplayassoonas
youreleasethekey.Youcanusethistocreatetheclick
heardwhenaharpsichordnoteisreleased,forinstance.
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalsobestto
settheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0.
Mode [Key, Key + Damper]
Normally,youplaynotessimplybypressingkeysonthe
keyboard.Inspecialcases,however,youcansetthisparam
etersothatyoumustfirstbeholdingdownthedamper
pedal,andthenpressakey,inordertoplayanote.For
instance,thiscanbeusefulwhenmodelingthebehaviorofa
pianosoundboard.
Keyisthenormalmode.
WhenyouselectKey+Damper,noteswillonlysoundifthe
damperpedalisbeinghelddown.Whenthedamperpedal
isreleased,allnoteswillbestoppedeveniftheyarestill
beinghelddown.
OSC2
Delay [ms] [0000ms...5000ms, KeyOff]
Mode [Key, Key + Damper]
Thisspecifiesthetimefromwhenyoupressakeyuntil
oscillator2actuallybeginstosound.
SeeOSC1DelayandMode,above.
Velocity Zone
Youcanspecifythevelocityzoneforeachofthefourmulti
samplesoftheoscillator.Hereyouwillspecifythevelocity
zoneforeachoscillator.
Thesevelocityzonestakeprecedenceoverthevelocityset
tingsfortheindividualHighLow.
OSC1
OSC Top [001...127]
ThissetsthehighestvelocitywheretheOscillator1will
sound.
Note:TheOSC1Topvelocitymustbegreaterthanthe
OSC1Bottomvelocity.
OSC Bottom [001...127]
ThissetsthelowestvelocitywheretheOscillator1will
sound.
OSC2
OSC2 Top [001...127]
OSC2 Bottom [001...127]
Thisspecifiesthemaximumandminimumvelocityvalues
whereoscillator2willsound.
SeeOSC1TopandOSC1Bottom,above.
OSC 1/2 Velocity Zone Window:
Thisshowsthevelocityzone.
ThisgraphicreflectstheOSC1multisampleandOSC2mul
tisampleBottomVel.,Range,andCurve,andthe
VelocityZoneOSC1Top,OSC1Bottom,OSC2Top,
andOSC2Bottomsettings.
Bottom Velocity = 64
Xfade Range = 20
Curve = Linear
84
Program mode
96
Pitch EG
ThePitchEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreatecom
plex,timevaryingchangestothepitchofOscillators1and
2.TheparametersonthispagecontroltheshapeoftheEG.
Forinstance,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationtimeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthepitch,usethe
PitchEGparametersontheOSC/PitchOSC1Pitchpage
andOSC2Pitchpage,asdescribedunderPitchEGon
page 92.
Differences from the other EGs
ThePitchEGisdifferentfromtheFilterandAmpEGsin
severalways:
ThesinglePitchEGissharedbybothOscillator1and
Oscillator2.
TheSustainlevelisalways0.
TheLevelmodulationhastwoAMSsourcesinsteadof
one,andtheTimemodulationhasoneAMSsource
insteadofthree.
Pitch EG is also an AMS source
YoucanusethePitchEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselectthePitchEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
Envelope
Pitch EG
Theenvelopemovestoaspecifiedleveloverthespecified
time,andthenmovestothenextspecifiedleveloverthe
specifiedtime.Itproducesamodulationsignalcorrespond
ingtothismovement.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfourlevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
EG Value Actual Time
10 10ms
20 44ms
30 104ms
40 224ms
50 464ms
60 944ms
70 1.8seconds
80 3.8seconds
Note-on or reset Note-of
Attack
Time
Start
Level
Decay
Time
Release
Time
Release
Level
Attack
Level
Change to
Pitch
Sustain Level
(Always 0)
Time
Break
Level
Slope
Time
OSC/Pitch Pitch EG
97
Attack [00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStartlevel
totheAttacklevel.
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansettheStart
levelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstartinstantaneouslyat
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay [00...99]
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevelto
theBreaklevel.
Slope [00...99]
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheBreak
leveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitchEGisalways
0).OnceitreachestheSustain,theEGwillstaythereuntil
noteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release [00...99]
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromtheSustain
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Level
Eachofthefourlevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethepitch(orotherAMSdestina
tion)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negativelevelswill
makeitgodown.
Notethat,unliketheFilterandAmpEGs,thePitchEGs
SustainLevelisalways0.
Start [99...+99]
ThissetstheinitialEGlevelatnoteon.
Attack [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
Break [99...+99]
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendofthe
Decaytime.
Release [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Curve
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthismanual
showenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraightlines.Inactual
ity,though,envelopesaremorelikelytobemadeoutofcurves.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchangequicklyat
first,andthenslowdownasitapproachesthenextpoint.
Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurvedshapes
naturally.ThemicroSTATIONgoesastepfurtherthanvin
tagesynths,however,andletsyoucontroltheamountof
curvatureseparatelyforeachofthefourenvelopesegments.
Pitch EG Curve
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremainthe
same.However,greatercurvaturewilltendtosoundfaster,
becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyatthebeginning.
Different curve settings for up and down
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvaturearesuit
ableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegmentswhichgo
down.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,suchas
DecayandRelease.
Attack [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthetransition
fromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
Decay [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthetransition
fromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
Slope [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthetransition
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitch
EGisalways0).
Release [0L (Linear), 1...9, 10E (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthetransi
tionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
Level Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouusetwodifferentAMSsourcestocon
troltheLevelparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthetwo
AMSsources,theStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevelseach
havetheirownmodulationintensities.
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,you
cancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestotheEG
shape,asshownbelow.
Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevelreached
attheendofthesegment.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecaytime,
youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecaytimeorthe
Breaklevel.
ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attack
level,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatarealready
sounding,unlesstheEGisthenrestartedviaEGReset.
Pitch EG Level Modulation
90 10.9seconds
99 87.3seconds
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Original Shape
Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Negative AMS on Attack
Negative AMS on Start,
Attack, and Break
Positive AMS on Start,
Attack, and Break
Program mode
98
AMS1
Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
parameters.
Start [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSmodula
tionfortheStartlevel.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMS1sourcetoVelocityandset
Startto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
harder.IfyousettheStartto99instead,theStartlevel
willdecreaseasyouplayharder.
Attack [99...+99]
tionfortheAttacklevel.
Break [99...+99]
tionfortheBreaklevel.
AMS2
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourceforcontrollingtheEGs
Levelparameters.TheStart,Attack,Decay,andBreaklevels
sharethissource,buteachhasitsownmodulationintensity.
TheparametersofAMS2areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,
above.
Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe
TimeparametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,andSlope
timessharethisAMSsource,buteachhasitsownmodula
tionintensity.
Pitch EG Time Modulation
AMS
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTimeparam
eters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbeusefulhere,
forinstance.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)onpage 287.
Attack [99...+99]
tionfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityandset
Attackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerathigher
velocities.IfyousettheAttackto99instead,theAttack
timewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvalueforinstance,
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheAttack
timealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcutthe
Attacktimealmostinhalf.
Decay [99...+99]
tionfortheDecaytime.
Slope [99...+99]
tionfortheSlopetime.
EG Reset
AMS Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestartpoint.
Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFOtotriggerthe
EGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisinadditiontotheini
tialnoteon,whichalwayscausestheAlternateModulation
Threshold [99...+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset.
WhentheThresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.Whenthe
Thresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhenpassing
throughthethresholdmovingdownwards.
Note:ForseveralLFOwaveformtypes,oriftheLFOcycleis
fast,theLFOoutputmaynotalwayskeepupwithhighval
uessuchas+99or99.
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack= +
Decay= +
Slope= +
Attack=
Decay=
Slope=
Softly played note.
Original Shape.
Strongly played note.
Times are longer.
Reaches Sustain more
slowly.
Times are shorter.
quickly.
Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off
Filter Filter1
99
Filter
Filteringcanmakesubtleordramaticchangestotheoscilla
torstimbre.Eachoscillatorhastwomultimoderesonantfil
ters,AandB,aswellasadedicatedfilterenvelopeand
keyboardtrackinggenerator.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallaspectsofthefilters.Among
otherthings,youcan:
Adjustbasicsettingsforeachoscillatorsfilters,
includingrouting,modes,cutoff,resonance,etc.
Setupfiltermodulation,includingkeyboardtracking,
thefilterenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMScontrol.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesforOscillator2sfil
terswillbegrayedout.
Filter1
ThispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforOscillator1s
FilterAandFilterB.Forexample,youcan:
Setupthefilterstoproduceasingle12dB/octfilter,dual
12dB/octfiltersineitherserialorparallelrouting,ora
single24dB/octfilter.
SeteachofthetwofilterstoLowPass,HighPass,Band
Pass,orBandRejectmodes.
Setthecutoff,resonance,andinputandoutputlevelsof
eachfilter,includingmodulationofresonanceand
outputlevel.
Routing [Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB(4Pole)]
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.This
parametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthefiltersare
used,andifbothareused,itcontrolshowtheyarecon
nectedtoeachother.
Single:ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,12dB/
octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject).Whenthis
optionisselected,thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayed
out.
Serial:ThisusesbothFilterAandFilterB.Theoscillator
firstgoesthroughFilterA,andthentheoutputofFilterAis
processedthroughFilterB.
Parallel:ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.Theoscil
latorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsofthetwo
filtersarethensummedtogether.
24dB/oct:Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4pole,
24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPassandBandReject).In
comparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesasharperrolloff
beyondthecutofffrequency,aswellasaslightlymoredeli
cateresonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthisgeneral
typeoffilter.
When24dB/octisselected,onlythecontrolsforFilterAare
active;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Program mode
100
Serial and Parallel Routing
12db/oct / 24db/oct
Filter A Type [LPF, HPF,BPF, BRF]
Thefilterwillproduceverydifferentresultsdependingon
theselectedfiltertype.Theselectionswillchangeslightly
accordingtotheselectedFilterRouting,toshowthecorrect
cutoffslopeindBperoctave.
LPF:Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhicharehigher
thanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthemostcommon
typeoffilter,andisusedtomakebrighttimbressound
darker.
HPF:Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhicharelower
thanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethistomaketimbres
soundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BPF:Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,bothhighsand
lows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutofffrequency.
Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlowfrequencies,its
effectcanchangedramaticallydependingonthecutoffset
tingandtheoscillatorsmultisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBandPassfil
tertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonographsounds.With
higherresonancesettings,itcancreatebuzzyornasaltim
bres.
BRF:Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfiltercutsonlythe
partsofthesoundthataredirectlyaroundthecutofffre
quency.TrymodulatingthecutoffwithanLFOtocreate
phaserlikeeffects.
Filter Types and Cutoff Frequency
Filter B Type [LPF, HPF,BPF, BRF]
FilterBisavailableiftheRoutingisSerialorParallel.Oth
erwise,allparametersinthissectionareunavailable,and
cannotbeedited.
ThefilterBparametersarethesameasforfilterAFilter
ATypeonpage 100.
FilterA
Filter
Bypass [Off, On]
ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
WhenBypassisOn,FilterAwillhavenoeffect.
Frequency [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,inincrements
of1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectofthecutofffre
quencywillchangedependingontheselectedFilterType.
Input Trim [00...99]
Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.Ifyou
noticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywithhighRes
onancesettings,youcanturntheleveldownhere,oratthe
Output.
Filter A (Low Pass) Oscillator Filter B (High Pass)
Oscillator
Filter A (Low Pass)
Filter B (High Pass)
Low Pass:
12dB/oct
Low Pass:
24dB/oct
Low Pass
High Pass
Band Pass
Band Reject
Cutof Frequency
Filter Filter2
101
Resonance
Level [00...99]
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesthatarearoundthe
cutofffrequency.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,andfrequencies
beyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminishsmoothly.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbreof
thefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormoreextreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasasepa
rate,whistlingpitch.
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,pleasesee
KeyFollowonpage 103.
AMS Source (Resonance) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheResonance
amount.ForalistofAMSsources,AMS(AlternateModu
lationSource)Listonpage 287.
AMS Intensity [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonancemod
ulation.
Forexample,ifVelocityhasbeenselected,changesinkey
boardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.Withpositive(+)
values,theresonancewillincreaseasyouplaymore
strongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonancewill
approachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.With
negative()values,theresonancewilldecreaseasyouplay
morestrongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlytheresonance
willapproachthelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.
TheresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingtheResonance
andAMSIntensityvalues.
Output Level
Level [00...99]
ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanusethisto
balancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhentheRoutingis
settoParallel,ortoturndownthevolumetoavoidclipping
laterinthesignalchain.
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheoutputlevel
ofFilterA.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS)onpage 287.
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheoutputlevel
modulation.
Filter B
cannotbeedited.
ThefilterBparametersarethesameasforfilterA(Fil
terAonpage 100).
Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfilter2settings.Itis
describedunderFilter1,onpage99.
Low resonance value High resonance value
Resonance
Program mode
102
Filter1 Modulation
Hereyoucaneditthefilterkeyboardtrackingandfilter
modulationforoscillator1.Thesesettingsincludethefol
lowing.
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,andcontrol
howthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff.
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfiltercutoff.
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff.
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissettoSerialor
Parallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilterBwillbe
grayedout.
Keyboard Track
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplayhigher
pitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingrecreatesthis
effectbyraisingthelowpassfiltercutofffrequencyasyou
playhigheronthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkey
trackingisnecessaryinordertomakethetimbreconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
ThemicroSTATIONkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuch
morecomplex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.
How it works: Keys and Ramps
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,or
slopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.Thebottomand
topkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopoftheMIDIrange,
respectively.YoucansettheotherthreekeysnamedKey
Low,Center,andKeyHightobeanywhereinbetween.
ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchangebetween
eachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLoCent(LowCenter)
Rampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesamebetweenthe
KeyLowkeyandtheCenterkey.
TheKeyvaluewillbethebreakpoint,andtheslopeofthe
lowerandhigherregionsonthekeyboardisspecifiedbythe
Ramp.
AttheCenterkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtracking
hasnoeffect.
Break Key
Low Key [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenoteatwhichthetwoslopedlinesinthe
lowerrangewillbeconnected.
Center Key [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointforthe
centerofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrack
inghasnoeffectonthefiltercutoff,oronanyAMSdestina
tions.
High Key [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotewherethetwoslopedlinesinthe
upperrangewillbeconnected.
Intensity
Intensity to A [99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterAscutofffrequency.TheoveralleffectoftheKey
boardTrackisacombinationofthisIntensityvalueandthe
overallKeyboardTrackshape.
Withpositivevalues(+),theeffectwillbeinthedirection
specifiedbykeyboardtracking;iftherampgoesup,thefil
tercutoffwillincrease.
Withnegativevalues(),theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;iftherampgoesup,thefiltercutoffwilldecrease.
Filter Filter1 Modulation
103
Keyboard Track Shape and Intensity
Intensity to B [99...+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwillaffect
FilterBscutofffrequency.
Ramp:
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtrackingout
putincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenterKey;nega
tiverampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegativeramp
settingswillchangedependingonwhethertherampisto
theleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
BtmLo(BottomLow)andLoCent(LowCenter):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playloweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgohigher.
CentHi(CenterHigh)andHiTop(HighTop):negative
rampsmakethekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyou
playhigheronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgoup.
Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationoftheramp
values,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoA(B)parameters.
WhenIntensitytoA(B)issetto+99,arampof50changes
thefilterfrequencyby1octaveforeveryoctaveofthekey
board,andarampof+99changesthefrequencyby2
octavesforeveryoctaveofthekeyboard.
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDInote
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,usenega
tivevalues.
Low-Center [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.
Center-High [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
High-Top [Inf, 99...+99, +Inf]
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositiveval
ues.
+Inf and Inf ramps
+InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Infor
Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextremehighestor
lowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
+Inf and Inf Ramps
Note:IfyousettheCentHirampto+InforInf,theHiTop
parameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyousettheLo
Centrampto+InforInf,theBtmLorampwillbegrayed
out.
Key Follow
TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthefilter
frequencytracksthepitchofthekeyboard:
1. SettheFilterFrequencyto30.
2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensitytoAto+99.
3. SettheBottomLowandLoCenterrampsto50.
4. SettheCenterHighandHighToprampsto+50.
5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
ThesettingsfortheLowKeyandHighKeydont
matterinthiscase.
Filter Keyboard Track is also an AMS source
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectFilterKbdTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
Filter EG
TheFilterEGmodulatestheFilterAandBcutofffrequen
ciesovertime.YoucancontrolhowstronglytheEGwill
affectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGappliedtothe
filter.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
appliedtothefilter.
Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresultsare
addedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
TosetuptheEGitself,includingattackandreleasetimes,
levels,andsoon,pleaseseeFilter1EGonpage 107.
Low Key Center Key High Key
Intensity = +99 (Original Shape)
Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
Intensity = +50 (Less Efect)
Intensity = 0 (No Efect)
Ramp = Inf
Ramp = +Inf
Ramp = 50
Low Key Center Key HighKey
Program mode
104
Velocity to A [99...+99]
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilter
EGappliedtoFilterA.
Velocity control of Filter EG
Withpositive(+)values,playingmorestronglywillincrease
theeffectoftheFilterEG,asshowninexampleBabove.
Withnegative()values,playingmorestronglywillintro
ducetheoppositeeffectoftheFilterEGlikeinvertingthe
polarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethisinseveraldifferent
ways:
YoucansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththeIntensity
toA/Bparameters,andthenreducethisamountwith
velocity.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGissimply
diminished,andnotactuallyinverted,asshownin
exampleCabove.
YoucanalsosettheVelocitytoA/Bamountssothatthey
aregreaterthantheinitialamountsofIntensitytoA/B.In
thiscase,theEGwillhaveapositiveeffectatlowveloc
ities,andaninvertedeffectathighvelocitiesasshown
inexampleD.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterAs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
TheFilterEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to99.
Positivevaluesincreasethecutofffrequency,andnegative
valuesdecreasethecutofffrequency.Forinstance,pleasesee
thegraphicVelocitycontrolofFilterEG,above.TheEG
shapeinexampleArisesupatfirst,andthenfallsbelow0
towardstheend.
WhenIntensitytoAissettoapositive(+)value,theEGs
effectwillmatchitsshape.WhentheEGrisesabove0,the
cutofffrequencywillincrease.
Withnegative()values,theeffectwillbeintheopposite
direction;whentheEGrisesabove0,thefiltercutoffwill
decrease.
Velocity to B [99...+99]
ThisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheFilter
EGappliedtoFilterB.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
VelocitytoA,above.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilterBs
cutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMSmodulation.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIntensitytoA,above.
AMS Source (Filter EG) [List of AMS Sources]
amountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwo
filtersshareasingleAMSsource,withseparateintensity
settings.Otherwise,theAMSmodulationwillworkinthe
samewayastheVelocitytoAparameter,describedabove.
AMS Int to A [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMSmodu
lationforFilterA.
AMS Int to B [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMSmodu
lationforFilterB.
Filter Modulation
ThissectionletsyouassignanytwoAMSsourcestocontrol
FilterA,andanothertwoAMSsourcestocontrolFilterB.
ThismodulationisaddedtothebasicFilterAandBcutoff
frequencies,assetontheFilter1page.
Filter A
AMS1 Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrollingFilter
Ascutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,pleasesee
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)onpage 287.
AMS1 Intensity [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS1.
AMS2 Source [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourceforcontrolling
FilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,please
seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)onpage 287.
AMS2 Intensity [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS2.
Filter B
cannotbeedited.
ThefilterBparametersarethesameasforfilterA(Fil
terAonpage 100).
B. Velocity to A = +50
C. Velocity to A = 25 D. Velocity to A = 99
In all examples below, Intensity to A = +50
Original
Filter Cutof
Original
Filter Cutof
A. Original EG
Filter Filter1 LFO Mod.
105
Filter1 LFO Mod.
LFO1,LFO2,andtheCommonLFOcanallmodulateFilter
AandBscutofffrequencies.Youcancontrolthestrengthof
eachLFOsmodulationindependentlyforeachfilter,in
threedifferentways:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe
IntensitytoAandBparameters.
UseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheLFO.
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthethree
LFOs,anddososeparatelyforbothFilterAandFilterB.
TheresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotalLFO
effect.
LFO 1
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYInttoAorAMSmodulation.
canproduceinterestingeffectsbyusingthesameLFOto
modulatetwodifferentparameters(suchasFilterAandFil
terB),butwithonesettoapositiveintensity,andtheother
settoanegativeintensity.
LFO modulation of Filter Cutoff
JSY Int to A [99...+99]
ThisadjuststhedepthofhowtheLFOwillmodulatethe
cutofffrequencyoffilterAwhenyoumovethejoystick
fromthecenterintheYdirection(towardyourself)(or
whenCC#2isreceived).(JoystickcontrolintheYdirection
iscalledJSY.)
canalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountoftheLFO,as
setbyIntensitytoA,above.Forexample:
1. SetIntensitytoAto+50.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthefilter
cutoff.
2. SetJSYIntensitytoAto50.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickdown,theeffectofthe
LFOwillfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayat
thebottomofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycan
celledout.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterBscutoff
frequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
JSY Int to B [99...+99]
ThisletsyouuseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO
appliedtoFilterB.(JSYInttoAonpage 105)
AMS Source (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
amountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwofil
tersshareasingleAMSsource,butwithseparateintensity
settings.
Low setting High setting
Program mode
106
AMS Int to A [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
modulationforFilterA.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettings
meanthatYS+YwillincreasetheamountofLFO1appliedto
FilterA.
AMS Int to B [99...+99]
modulationforFilterB.
LFO 2
LFO1,above.
Common LFO
TheparametersfortheCommonLFOareidenticaltothose
forLFO1.Formoreinformation,pleaseseethedescriptions
underLFO1,above.
NotethatwhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeachvoice,
theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesintheProgram.
Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthevoicestohave
anidenticalLFOeffect.
Filter Filter1 EG
107
Filter1 EG
TheFilterEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreatecom
plex,timevaryingchangestothecutofffrequenciesofFil
tersAandB.Theparametersonthispagecontroltheshape
oftheEG.Amongotherthings,youcan:
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsandtimes
ofeachsegment.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,forsubtle
controloverthemodulationshapeoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestarttheEG.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthefilters,usethe
FilterEGparametersontheFilter1Modulationpage,as
describedunder(FilterEGonpage 6).
Filter EG is also an AMS source
YoucanusetheFilterEGasanAMSsourcetomodulate
otherparameters,justlikethekeyboardtrackingandLFOs.
SimplyselecttheFilterEGintheAMSlistforthedesired
parameter.
Envelope
Filter EG
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymovingfrom
oneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,andthenmoving
toanotherleveloveranotherperiodoftime,andsoon.
Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,theamountof
timeittakestogofromeachofthelevelstothenext,andthe
shape(fromlineartocurved)ofeachtransition.
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveornegative.
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orotherAMS
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;negativelev
elswillmakeitgodown.
Start [99...+99]
ThissetstheinitialEGlevelatnoteon.
Attack [99...+99]
Break [99...+99]
Decaytime.
Sustain [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Release [99...+99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Attack
Time
Start
Level
Decay
Time
Release
Time
Release
Level
Attack
Level
Change to
flter cutof
Sustain
Level
Time
Break
Level
Slope
Time
Program mode
108
Time
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
Attack [00...99]
totheAttacklevel.
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay [00...99]
theBreaklevel.
Slope [00...99]
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Release [00...99]
leveltotheReleaselevel.
Curve
TheexplanationofthefilterEGcurveissameasforpitch
EGcurve.
SeeCurveonpage 97.
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
Level Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrolthe
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,andBreak
levelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneachhavediffer
entmodulationintensities.
(LevelModulationonpage 97)
AMS
SelectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevelparameters.
Start [99...+99]
harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,thestartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
Attack [99...+99]
Break [99...+99]
Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Filter EG Time Modulation
AMS1
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTimeparam
forinstance.
Attack [99...+99]
Attackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
10 10ms
20 44ms
30 104ms
40 224ms
50 464ms
60 944ms
70 1.8seconds
80 3.8seconds
90 10.9seconds
99 87.3seconds
Note-on Note-of Note-on Note-of Note-on Note-of
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Softly played note.
Original Shape
Attack=+, Decay=+,
Slope=+, Release=+
Stongly played note.
Times are longer.
Reaches Sustainmore
slowly.
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
Stongly played note.
Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustainmore
quickly.
Filter2 Filter2
109
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmakethe
Attacktimealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcut
theAttacktimealmostinhalf.(Seep.291)
Decay [99...+99]
Slope [99...+99]
Release [99...+99]
tionfortheReleasetime.
AMS2, AMS3
TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,respectively,
forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.Eachhasitsown
intensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,andRelease.Theparam
etersofbothAMS2andAMS3areidenticaltothoseof
AMS1,above.
EG Reset
(AMSSourceonpage 98)
(AMS(AlternateModulationSource)Listonpage 287)
(Thresholdonpage 98)
Filter2
Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfilter2settings.Itis
(Filter1onpage 99)
Filter2 Modulation
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfiltermodulation.Itisavail
ableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;ifnot,
thepagewillbegrayedout.
(Filter1Modulationonpage 102)
Filter2 LFO Mod.
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sLFOfiltermodulation.Itis
describedunder?314:LFOMod.(Modulation),?onpage
36.
(Filter1LFOMod.onpage 105)
Filter2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sFilterEG.Itisavailableonly
whentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;ifnot,thepage
willbegrayedout.
(Filter1EGonpage 107)
Program mode
110
Amp
Oscillators1and2haveseparatecontrolsforvolume(also
calledamplitude,orampforshort);pan;andaswellas
dedicatedampenvelopesandkeyboardtrackinggenera
tors.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolalloftheserelatedparameters.
Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
Controlamplevelandmodulation,includingkeyboard
tracking,theampenvelope,LFOmodulation,andAMS
control.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
onlyOscillator1sampandpanareactive;thepagesfor
Oscillator2willbegrayedout.
Amp1
ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmpsection.
Here,youcan:
Settheinitialvolumelevel.
Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
Level [000...127]
ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumelevelofOscillator1,before
keyboardtracking,velocity,andothermodulation.
The OSC Mixer and volume
YoucancontroltheOscillatorvolumedirectlyfintheOSC
Mixerpage(p.76).Thisisaseparateparameter,inaddi
tiontoAmpLevel.
MIDI and volume
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumeviaMIDI
usingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression(CC#11).
Whenusedoneatatime,thetwocontrollersworkin
exactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127isequalto
theAmpLevelsetting,andlowervaluesreducethe
volume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,the
onewiththelowervaluedeterminesthemaximumvol
ume,andtheonewiththehighervaluescalesdown
fromthatmaximum.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60).
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.AsettingofL001
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,andR127
tothefarright.
WhenthisissettoRND,thepanpositionwillbedifferent
foreachnoteon.
YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A
CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,64
placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythePan
parameter,and127placesthesoundatthefarright.
ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60).
Pan AMS Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralistof
AMSsources,pleaseseeAlternateModulationSource
(AMS)onpage 287.
Pan AMS Intensity [99...+99]
tionforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andPanAMSSource
issettoNoteNumber,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethe
soundtomovetowardtherightasyouplayhigherthanC4,
Amp Amp2
111
andtowardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.Negative()
intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
Use DKit Setting [Off, On]
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeisset
toDrums.
UnlikestandardPrograms,DrumKitscanhaveadifferent
pansettingforeverynote.Thisparameterletsyouchoose
whethertousetheDrumKitpansettings,ortousethePro
gramspansettinginstead.
On:TheProgramwillusetheDrumKitspernotepanset
tings;panAMSwillstillapply.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:TheProgramwillignoretheDrumKitssettings,and
usetheProgrampaninstead.
AllkeysofthedrumkitwillusethePan(p.191)setting.
Amp2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasiclevelandPansettings.
ItisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1
(Amp1onpage 110).
Amp1 Modulation
ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmplevel
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan:
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrolthe
Amplevel.
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel.
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel.
Thetotaleffectofthemodulationcanincreasethevolumeto
amaximumoftwotimeslouderthantheAmpLevelset
ting.
Keyboard Track
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyouplayup
anddownthekeyboard.Usually,someamountofkeytrack
ingisnecessaryinordertomakethevolumeconsistent
acrosstheentirerange.
microSTATIONskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeoverupto
fourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,youcan:
Makethevolumeincreaseveryquicklyoverthemiddle
ofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowlyornotat
allinthehigheroctaves.
Makethevolumeincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike
effects.
slopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.
BreakKeyonpage 102
Break Key:
Low Key [C1...G9]
Center Key [C1...G9]
High Key [C1...G9]
BreakKeyonpage 102
Ramp:
SeeRamp:onpage 103.
Differences from other Keyboard Tracks
ThereareseveraldifferencesbetweentheAmpkeyboard
trackingandtheFilterandCommonkeyboardtracking.
Forexample,theresultsoftheRampvaluesaredifferent.As
showninthegraphicAmpKeyboardTracking,below,
negativeslopesaremoresteepthanpositiveslopes.
Also,theampdoesnothaveseparatecontrolofIntensity.
Instead,Intensityisalwaysfixedatthemaximumamount,
allowingkeyboardtrackingtochangethevolumefrom
completesilencetotwiceasloudastheprogrammedlevel.
rangeandtheKeyLowkey.Fornormalkeytrack,usenega
tivevalues.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyLowandCenterkeys.
99 97 95 48 25
+99 +50 +25
High Key: C4 Low Key: D1 Center Key: G2
Change to
Ramp values:
Ramp values:
Amp Keyboard Tracking
Louder x2
Silence
No change
Volume
Program mode
112
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandKeyHighkeys.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheKeyHighkeyandthetopof
theMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositiveval
ues.
+Inf and Inf ramps
Whenarampissetto+Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgoto
itshighestvalue(doubletheprogrammedvolume)overa
singlehalfstep.
Similarly,whenarampissettoInf,thekeyboardtracking
willgotoitslowestvalue(completesilence)overasingle
halfstep.
IfyousettheCenterHighrampto+Infor
Inf,theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Simi
larly,ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the
BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout.
Amp KTrk is also an AMS source
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand
LFOs.SimplyselectAmpKbdTrkintheAMSlistforthe
desiredparameter.
Amp Modulation
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbybothvelocityandan
AMSsource.
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmpEG
levelparameters.Theresultingvolumeisdeterminedby
multiplyingthevolumechangesoftheampEGbyother
valuessuchasAMS.Iftheseoriginallevelsarelow,the
maximumvolumeavailablewithmodulationwillalsobe
reduced.
Velocity
Intensity [99...+99]
Withpositive(+)values,thevolumewillincreaseasyou
playharder.
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseasyou
playharder.
Velocity modulation of Amp level, with Amp EG
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
Amp1level.ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS)onpage 287.
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthemodulation.
Forexample,ifAMSSourceissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positive
(+)valuesofthisparameterwillmakethevolumeincrease
whenmovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection.
Notethatiftheothermodulationsettingshavealready
raisedthevolumetoitsmaximumlevel(doubletheAmp
LevelandAmpEGlevelsettings),thevolumecannotbe
increasedanyfurther.
LFO1
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofLFO1seffectonthe
oscillatorsvolume.
Negative()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscaletheamount
oftheLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.ForalistofAMS
sources,pleaseseeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)
onpage 287.
modulationfortheAmplevel.
LFO2
LFO1,above.
Ramp Change in level
Inf
Silentinonehalf
step
99
Silentinonewhole
step
95 Silentinoneoctave
48
Silentintwo
octaves
25
Silentinfour
octaves
00 nochange
+25 x2infouroctaves
+50 x2intwooctaves
+99 x2inoneoctave
+Inf x2inonehalfstep
Low velocity High velocity
Time
Volume
Time
Amp Amp1 EG
113
Amp1 EG
Theseparametersletyoucreatetimevaryingchangesinthe
volumeofoscillator1.
Envelope
Theseparametersspecifyhowtheamp1EGwillchange
overtime.
Amp EG
Level:
Start [00...99]
Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
Attack [00...99]
Break [00...99]
Decaytime.
Sustain [00...99]
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnote
off(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Time:
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow.
Attack [00...99]
totheAttacklevel.
itsmaximumvalue.
Decay [00...99]
theBreaklevel.
Slope [00...99]
leveltotheSustainlevel.OnceitreachestheSustainlevel,
theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff(unlessitisresetvia
AMS).
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Release
Time
Attack
Level
Sustain
Level
Break
Level
Slope
Time
Start
Level
Volume
Time
10 10ms
20 44ms
30 104ms
40 224ms
50 464ms
60 944ms
70 1.8seconds
80 3.8seconds
90 10.9seconds
99 87.3seconds
Program mode
114
Release [00...99]
leveltosilence.
Curve
TheexplanationoftheampEGcurveissameasforpitch
EGcurve.
SeeCurveonpage 97.
fromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
Level Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrolthe
LevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,andBreak
levelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneachhavediffer
entmodulationintensities.
LevelModulationonpage 97
AMS
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevelparam
eters.
Start [99...+99]
harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevelwill
decreaseasyouplayharder.
Attack [99...+99]
Break [99...+99]
Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsourcesto
controltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthethree
AMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,andReleasetimes
eachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
Amp EG Time Modulation
AMS1
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTimeparam
forinstance.
Attack [99...+99]
At(Attack)to+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlongerat
highervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAt(Attack)to99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8willmaketheseg
menttimealmosttwiceaslong,andasettingof8willcut
thesegmenttimealmostinhalf.
Decay [99...+99]
Slope [99...+99]
Release [99...+99]
tionfortheReleasetime.
AMS2, AMS3
TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,respectively,
forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.Eachhasitsown
intensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,andRelease.Theparam
etersofbothAMS2andAMS3areidenticaltothoseof
AMS1,above.
Note-on Note-of Note-on Note-of Note-on Note-of
y, y p ( )
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Softly played note.
Original Shape.
Attack= +, Decay= +,
Slope= +, Release= +
Times are longer.
Reaches Sustain
more slowly.
Attack=, Decay=,
Slope=, Release=
Times are shorter.
quickly.
Amp Amp2 Modulation
115
EG Reset
AMS [List of AMS Sources]
AMSSourceonpage 98
O4]C4] eE-4C4)E eE4]]
WeeO E OC_] l
Thresholdonpage 98
Amp2 Modulation
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampmodulation.Itisavail
ableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;ifnot,
thepagewillbegrayedout.
(Amp1Modulationonpage 111).
Amp2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampEG.Itisavailableonly
willbegrayedout.
(Amp1EGonpage 113).
Program mode
116
LFO
EachoftheOscillators1,2hastwoLFOs,whichyoucanuse
tomodulatethefilter,amp,pitch,andmanyotherparame
ters.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsoshareasingleCommonLFO,simi
lartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalogsynths.
Thesepagesletyousetupalloftheparametersforallfive
LFOs.
OSC 1
HereyoucanspecifytheLFO1andLFO2waveformsfor
oscillator1.Thesesettingsallowyoutodothefollowing
things.
SelectthebasicwaveformforLFO1and2,anduse
Shapetomodifyit.
SpecifythefrequencyforLFO1and2.
LFO1, LFO2
Waveform [Triangle...Random6 (Continuous)]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
graphicbelow.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,butafew
willbenefitfrommoredetails:
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeisspecif
icallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformispositiveonly,
sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonlybendup,andnot
down.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyatfixed
intervalsoftime.
Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthetiming.
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandomtim
ing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold;thetim
ingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsofRan
dom13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanusethemto
createmoregentlerandomvariations.
Square
Sine
Saw
Triangle Step Tri4
(Step Triangle4)
Step Saw6
Step Saw4
Step Tri6
(Step Triangle6)
ExpSawDwn
(Exponential
Saw Down)
ExpTri
(Exponential
Triangle)
Guitar
ExpSawUp
(Exponential
Saw Up)
Rnd1(S/H)
(Random1
-S/H)
Rnd2(S/H)
(Random2
-S/H)
Rnd3(S/H)
(Random3
-S/H)
Rnd4(Cnt)
(Random4
-Continuous)
Rnd6(Cnt)
(Random6
-Continuous)
Rnd5(Cnt)
(Random5
-Continuous)
LFO waveform
LFO OSC 2
117
Frequency [00...99]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeanymodulation.
Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,asshowninthetable
below.
ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeedsmuch
fasterandmuchslowerthanareavailablethroughthisbasic
setting.
Start Phase [180...+180, Random]
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartofthe
note,instepsof5degrees.
IfKeySyncisOff,theStartPhasewillapplyonlytothe
firstnoteofthephrase.
Shape [99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyoucansee
inthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethewaveformseither
moreroundedormoreextreme.Itcanalsobeusefulto
emphasizecertainvalueranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFOto
modulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehighvalue
range,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthehigherfrequen
cies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,thefilterwillspend
moretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
LFO Shape
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3wave
forms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or99.When
theseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout.
OSC 2
LFO1, LFO2
HereyoucanspecifytheLFO1andLFO2waveformsfor
oscillator2.
TheparametersarethesameastheLFO1andLFO2settings
foroscillator1(OSC1onpage 116).
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.
Waveformonpage 116
Frequency [00...99]
Frequencyonpage 117
Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartofthe
note,instepsof5degrees.
StartPhaseonpage 117
Shape [99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.
Shapeonpage 117
Common
Thisisasingle,CommonLFO,globalforallvoicesinthe
ProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsomevintageanalog
synths.
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.
Waveformonpage 116
Frequency [00...99]
Frequencyonpage 117
TheResetAMS,describedabove,letsyouresettheCom
monLFO.ThisisthephasefromwhichtheLFOwillstart
whenitisreset.
Shape [99...+99]
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.
Shapeonpage 117
Frequency Value Frequency in Hz
00 0.014Hz
10 0.112Hz
20 0.422Hz
30 0.979Hz
40 1.79Hz
50 2.84Hz
60 4.14Hz
70 5.69Hz
80 7.49Hz
90 9.53Hz
99 26.25Hz
99+Fine99 32Hz
+99
0
99
Shape = 0 (original waveform)
Shape = +99
Shape = 99
Program mode
118
OSC1 LFO1
ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFOofOscilla
tor1.Forinstance,youcan:
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMScontrollers
tomodulatethefrequency.
UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhetherthe
LFOrunsseparatelyforeachvoice,orissynchronized
acrossallofthevoices
UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhow
longtheLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,andwhetherit
startsabruptlyorfadesinslowly.
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo.
OSC 1 LFO 1
Shape AMS Src [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
Shape AMS Int [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
Stop [Off, On]
On:InsteadoftheLFOfunctioningnormally,itwillignore
theFreqsetting.TheLFOwillmaintaintheinitialvalue
(determinedbythecombinationofWaveform,Phase,
Shape,andOffset)untilthenoteoff.
Sincethevaluewillchangeonlyatnoteon,usingaRandom
waveformwillproduceafixedvaluethatchangesrandomly
ateachnoteon(oratthefirstnoteon).
Off:TheLFOwillfunctionnormally.
Key Sync. [Off, On]
On:WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstartseachtimeyou
pressakey,andanindependentLFOrunsforeachnote.
Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off:WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFOstartsfromthephase
thatsdeterminedbythefirstnoteinthephrase,sothatthe
LFOsforallnotesbeingheldaresynchronizedtogether.The
FadeandDelaysettingswillonlyapplytothefirstnotes
LFO.
NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFOspeed
maystillbedifferentifyoumodulatetheFrequencybynote
number,velocity,keyscaling,orothernotespecificAMS
sources.
Offset [99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOforvibrato.
IftheOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecenteredonthenotes
originalpitch,bendingitbothupanddown.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowillonly
raisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote.
Offset settings and pitch change produced by vibrato
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform,whichis
designedtoemulatebendingastringonaguitarsothatthe
pitchonlygoesup,andnotdown.Becauseofthis,thewave
formiscenteredon50,andnoton0.Ofcourse,youcan
alwaysuseanegativeOffsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0
again!
SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,itsimpor
tanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalaftertheShapefunction,
asshownbelow:
How the LFO signal is affected by Shape and Offset
Fade [00...99]
TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimplystarting
immediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameterspecifiesthe
timefromwhentheLFObeginstoplayuntilitreachesits
maximumamplitude.
IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill
beginafterthedelayiscomplete.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothefirst
noteinthephrase.
LFO Fade and Delay
Delay [00...99]
ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts.
WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothefirst
noteofthephrase.
Frequency Modulation
Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsources(AMS)to
adjustthespeedoftheLFO.
AMS1:
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcefortheLFO1sfrequency.
NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1sfrequency.
ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1(Frequency).TheInt
ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
Ofset = 99 Ofset = 0 Ofset = +99
Pitch
Ofset Shape Waveform
Fade Delay
Note-on Note-of
LFO OSC1 LFO2
119
WhenAMSisatitsmaximumvalue(forexamplebymov
ingthejoystickfullyawayfromyourself),theAMSaffects
thefrequencyasshownbelow:
IntMod Src (Intensity Mod AMS)
[List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsasecondaryAMSsourcetoscaletheintensityof
AMS1.
IntMod Int [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntModSrc.
EvenifthemainAMS1Intensityissetto0,IntModSrc
canstillcontrolthefinalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/
99range.
Forexample,ifSourceissettothePitchEG,andIntMod
SrcissettoJS+Y:CC#01,positivesettingsmeanthatYS+Y
willincreasetheintensityofthePitchEGmodulationofthe
LFOFrequency.
AMS2:
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourcefortheLFO1sfre
quency.
ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromSource.
Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync.
MIDI/Tempo Sync. [Off, On]
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theLFOwillsynchronize
tothesystemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoorMIDI
Clock.TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNote
andTimesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFre
quencyandFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOff,theFrequencyandFre
quencyModulationsettingswilldeterminethespeedofthe
LFO,andthetemposettingswillhavenoeffect.
Base Note [, ]
ThissetsthebasicspeedoftheLFO,relativetothesystem
tempo.Thevaluesrangefroma32ndnotetoawholenote,
includingtriplets.
Times [01...32]
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.Forinstance,if
theBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,andTimesisset
to03,theLFOwillcycleoveradottedeighthnote.
OSC1 LFO2
ThisisOscillator1ssecondLFO.Itsparametersareexactly
thesameasthoseforthefirstLFOexceptthatLFO1cannot
modulateLFO2.
OSC1LFO1onpage 118
OSC2 LFO1
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfirstLFO.Itisavailableonly
willbegrayedout.
OSC1LFO1onpage 118
OSC2 LFO2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2ssecondLFO.Itisavailable
onlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;ifnot,the
pagewillbegrayedout.
Itsparametersareexactlythesameasthoseforthefirst
LFOexceptthatLFO1cannotmodulateLFO2.
OSC1LFO1onpage 118
Intensity Change to LFO Frequency
+99 64x Faster
+82 32x
+66 16x
+49 8x
+33 4x
+16 2x
16 1/2x Slower
33 1/4x
49 1/8x
66 1/16x
82 1/32x
99 1/64x
Program mode
120
Common LFO
Differences from LFO1/2
TheCommonLFOstartsrunningassoonasyouselectthe
Program,andonlyresetswhenyoutellittodosoexplicitly
viatheResetSourcecontrol,below.Thisisdifferentfrom
LFO1/2sKeySyncparameter,whichresetswheneverall
notesarereleased.
TheCommonLFOspersistencecanbehandyifyouwantto
createaconstantrhythmwithanLFO,andthenplay
underneaththatrhythmwithoutretriggeringit.For
instance,youcanuseaMIDIcontrollerinyoursequencerto
resettheCommonLFOeveryfewbars,regardlessofwhat
notesarebeingplayed.
TheCommonLFOhasmostofthesamecontrolsasLFO1/2.
However,itdoesnotincludetheDelay,Fade,andKey
Syncsettings,sincetheseonlymakesenseforpervoiceLFOs.
Common LFO
Shape AMS Src [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourceforcontrollingtheLFOsShape.
Modulatingtheshapecandramaticallyaltertheeffectofthe
LFOtryitout!
Shape AMS Int [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS(Shape)
modulation.
Stop [Off, On]
On:InsteadoftheLFOfuctioningnormally,itwillignore
theFreqsetting.Instead,theLFOsimplygeneratesasingle
valuewhentheProgramisselected,andthenholdsthat
valueuntilyouselectanotherProgram,oruntilyoureset
theLFOviaAMS.
Note:ThisisdifferentfromLFO1/2,inwhichthevalueis
resetwitheverynoteon.
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandomwave
formstocreatestatic,randommodulation,withthevalue
changingonlywhenyoufirstselecttheProgram.
Off:WhenStopisOff,theLFOwillfunctionnormally.
Reset AMS [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheLFOtotheStartPhase.
TheLFOresetswhentheAMSvaluepassesthehalfwaymark:
+50formostAMSsources,or64forMIDIcontrollers.
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOsKey
Sync.setting,setthistoGate2+Damper.
Offset [99...+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsarecentered
around0,andthenswingallthewayfrom99to+99.This
parameterletsyoushifttheLFOupanddown,sothatfor
instanceitscenteredon50,andthenswingsfrom49to
+149.
Foracompletedescription,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1
(Offsetonpage 118).
Frequency Modulation
TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyModulation
settingsforLFO1.
FrequencyModulationonpage 118.
Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync
TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequencyMIDI/
TempoSyncforLFO1.
FrequencyMIDI/TempoSync.onpage 119.
AMS Mix/C.KeyTrk (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) OSC1
121
AMS Mix/C.KeyTrk (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track)
EachOscillatorhastwoAMSMixers,whicharesimplebut
powerfultoolsforcombiningandmodifyingAMSsignals.
ThetwoOscillatorsalsosharetwoCommonkeyboard
trackinggenerators,inadditiontothededicatedkeyboard
trackingfortheFilterandAmp.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallofthesemodulationsources.
NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,only
Oscillator1sAMSMixersareactive;thepagesforOscillator
2willbegrayedout.
OSC1
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcan
alsousethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvari
ousways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,and
more.
YoucanselecttheoutputoftheAMSmixersasanAMS
sourceinthesamewayasanLFOorEQ.
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputstothe
AMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,ifyou
useLFO1asaninputtoanAMSMixer,youcanusethepro
cessedversionoftheLFOtocontroloneAMSdestination,
andtheoriginalversiontocontrolanother.
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,by
usingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
AMS Mixer1:
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,
Shape, Quantize, Gate Control]
ThiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedbyAMS
Mixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedindetailover
thenextseveralpages.
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeA+B:onpage 122..
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewiththeother.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAmtAxB:onpage 122.
OffsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfromanAMS
source.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOffset:on
page 123.
Smoothingspecifiesthesmoothnessofmovementbetween
twovalues.Youcanusethistosmoothsuddenchangessuchas
anabruptmovementofthejoystickorsharpangleofthe
LFO.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSmoothing:on
page 123.
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Formoreinforma
tion,pleaseseeShape:onpage 123.
Quantizeturnssmoothtransitionsintodiscretesteps.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeQuantize:onpage 124.
GateControlusesathirdAMSsourcetoswitchbetween
twoAMSinputs(orafixedvalue).Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeGateControl:onpage 125.
AMS Mixer2:
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,
Shape, Quantize, Gate Control]
ThisisthesecondAMSMixerforOscillator1.Theparame
tersareexactlythesameasthoseforAMSMixer1.
AMSMixer1:onpage 121.
Program mode
122
OSC 2
ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator2.
TheseareavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
OSC1onpage 121
OSC1 AMS Mix
AMS Mixer1
A+B:
AMS Mixer, Type = A+B
A+BmergestwoAMSsourcesintoone.Thiscanbehandy
whenyouneedtoaddonemoremodulationsourcetoa
parameter,butyouvealreadyusedupalloftheavailable
AMSslots.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOtomodulate
FilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatitwouldbeinter
estingtoscalethatparameterwithanEGaswell.Resonance
hasonlyasingleAMSinput,butyoucaneasilymergethe
LFOandtheEGtogetherusingtheA+BAMSMixer:
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonanceAMS
source.
AMS Mixer A+B example
AMS A Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSinput.
ForalistofAMSsources,AlternateModulationSource
(AMS)onpage 287.
AMS A Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSAinput.
AMS B Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthesecondAMSinput.
(AMS)onpage 287.
AMS B Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSBinput.
Amt AxB:
AMS Mixer, Type =Amt A x B
ThisMixerTypeusesAMSBtoscaletheamountofAMSA.
Forinstance,youcancontroltheamountofLFO1withthe
FilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthePitchEGwiththe
joystick.
AMS Mixer Amt AxB example
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsource,whichcanthenbescaled
byAMSB.
(AMS)onpage 287.
AMS A Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialamountofAMSA,beforemodula
tionfromAMSB.InputfromAMSBthenaddstothisinitial
amount.
EvenifAmountAissetto0,AMSBcanstillcontrolthe
finalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
AMS B Source [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsource,toscaletheamountof
AMSA.
(AMS)onpage 287.
AMS B Amount [99...+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSBmodula
tionofAMSA.
Forexample,ifAMSAissettoLFO1andAMSBissetto
theFilterEG,positivesettingsmeanthattheEGwill
increasetheamountofLFO1.
Tips: Using a foot switch to turn an AMS source
on/off
YoucanuseAmtAxBasagatecontrolforanAMSsource.
(Youllneedtoconnectafootswitch,setGlobal:Controllers
TypeSW/PedaltoSwitch,andsetFootSWFunctionto
AMS A
AMS B
Amt A
Amt B
Output
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
A+B Output
AMS A
AMS B
Amt B
Output
Amt A
AMS A: LFO
AMS B: EG
Amt A*B Output
AMS Mix/C.KeyTrk (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) OSC1 AMS Mix
123
FootSwitch(CC#82)beforeyoucontinuewiththefollowing
procedure.)
1. AssignAMSAtoadesiredsource,andsetAMSA
Amountto0.
2. AssignAMSBSourcetoFootSwitch(CC#82),andset
AMSBAmountto+99.
Nowyoucanusethefootswitchconnectedtothemicro
STATIONtoturnAMSAon/off.
Offset:
AMS Mixer, Type = Offset
Thissimpleprocessoraddsaconstantoffsettotheinput,
andalsoallowsyoutodoublethegainofanAMSsource.
Forinstance,youcanusethistoconvertabipolarLFO(both
negativeandpositive)toaunipolarLFO(positiveonly).To
dothis:
1. SelecttheLFOastheAMSAinput.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto50.
ThiscutstheoverallleveloftheLFOinhalf,sothat
insteadofswingingbetween99and+99,itonlyswings
between50and+50.
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto50.
Thisadds50totheLFOlevel,sothatitnowswings
between0and+99,asshownbelow.
AMS Mixer Offset examples
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobeoffset.
(AMS)onpage 287.
Offset Amount [199...+199]
ThiscontrolsthebasiclevelofAMSA.
+199doublestheoriginalsignallevel,while199doubles
thelevelandinvertsthephase.Thevaluesareclippedonly
attheoutput;internally,theycanbegreaterthanthenormal
rangeof99to+99.
Offset [199...+199]
ThiscontrolstheamountofoffsetforAMSA.
SettingOffsetto+199shiftsanAMSinputof99alltheway
to+99.InconjunctionwithhighAMSAAmountvalues,this
canbeusefulforcreatingclippedshapes,suchasshownin
thelastoftheAMSMixerOffsetexamples,above.
Smoothing:
ThisMixerTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,creatingmore
gentletransitionsbetweenvalues.Youhaveseparatecontrol
oftheamountofsmoothingduringtheattack(whenthesig
nalisincreasing)anddecay(whenitsdecreasing).
ThehighertheAttackandDecaysettings,themorethe
inputwillbesmoothed.
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,creating
moregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Highersettingscreate
autofadeeffects,transformingaquickgestureintoalonger
fadeinand/orfadeoutevent.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeofprogram
mablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs.Forinstance,
youcanturnablipintoasimpleenvelopeshape,as
shownbelow.
AMS Mixer Smoothing examples
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobesmoothed.
(AMS)onpage 287.
Attack [00...+99]
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,highervalue.
HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes.
DependingonhowquicklytheAMSinputvalueischang
ing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatthevalueisnever
quitereached,asshowninAMSMixerShapeexamples,
above.
Decay [00...+99]
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhowlongit
takesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
Shape:
ThisMixerTypeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.This
appliesdeformationtotheAMSinput.Youcanusethisto
customizeacontrollercurve,suchastheexponentialcurve
ofthejoystickorthelogarithmiccurveofvelocitycontrol.It
canalsoaltertheshapeofprogrammablemodulation
sources,suchasEGsandLFOs.
AMS A
Amt A
Output
Ofset A
AMS A: LFO
+99
0
99
Ofset = +50, Amount = 50
+99
0
99
Ofset = 99, Amount = +199
Clipped
at Output
+99
0
99
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack
and Short Release:
Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Release:
Program mode
124
Note:ShapeonlyaffectsAMSsignalswhichalreadyhave
someamountofslope,suchasEGs,triangleandsineLFOs,
andsoon.Itdoesnotaffectsignalswhichonlycontain
abrupttransitions,suchassquarewaves.
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobeshaped.
(AMS)onpage 287.
Shape [99...+99]
Thiscontrolstheamountofcurvature,andwhetherthe
curvesareconcaveorconvex.Asyoucanseeinthegraphic
examples,theshapewilltendtoemphasizecertainvalue
ranges,anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO,
throughShape,tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeempha
sizesthehighvaluerange,thefilterwillspendmoretimeat
thehigherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,the
filterwillspendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
Mode [Symmetric, Asymmetric]
ThisselectswhethertheShapeparameterwillproduceone
ortwocurves.ThegraphicAMSMixerShapeexamples
mayhelptovisualizehowthisworks.
Asymmetricwillproduceasinglecurve,extendingfrom
99to+99.
Symmetricwillproducetwomatchingcurvesextending
outwardsfrom0to99and+99,respectively.
Bipolar and Unipolar AMS sources
TounderstandShape,ithelpstounderstandthedifference
betweenbipolarandunipolarAMSsources.
Bipolarsourcescanswingallthewayfrom99to+99,with
0inthemiddle.MostLFOsarebipolar,forinstance;sois
PitchBend.
Generally,bipolarAMSsourceswillworkbetterwiththe
Asymmetricmode,butSymmetricmayalsoproduceinter
estingresults.
Unipolarsourcesonlygofrom0to99,with50inthemid
dle.MIDIcontrollers,suchasJS+Y(CC#1),areallunipolar.
Inpractice,EGsareusuallyprogrammedtobeunipolar,
eventhoughtheFilterandPitchEGsdoallowbothpositive
andnegativelevels.
Withunipolarsources,itsalmostalwaysbettertousethe
Symmetricmode.TheAsymmetricmodecancauseoffsets
andotherstrangeresults.
AMS Mixer Shape examples
Quantize:
ThisMixerTypechangestheinputfromacontinuoussignal
intoaseriesofdiscretesteps.Insteadofmovingsmoothly
betweenvalues,itwillsnapimmediatelyfromonevalueto
another.
YoucanusethistochangetheshapeofLFOsorEGs,orto
forceacontrollertolandonafewspecificvalues.
AMS Mixer Quantize examples
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
Symmetric
Asymmetric
Bipolar Triangle Wave
Symmetric Asymmetric
Bipolar Sawtooth Wave
Shape = 0 (original waveform)
Shape = +99
Shape = 99
+99
0
99
Asymmetric
(not recommended)
Unipolar Triangle Wave
Symmetric
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
+99
0
99
Unipolar (e.g., JS+Y) Bipolar (e.g., LFO)
Original
AMS A
Quantize
Steps = 8
Quantize
Steps = 16
AMS Mix/C.KeyTrk (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) OSC1 AMS Mix
125
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobequantized.
(AMS)onpage 287.
Steps [2...32]
Thiscontrolstheseverityoftheeffect.Thelowerthenum
berofsteps,themoresteppytheoutputwillbe.
Forinstance,whenthisissetto2,therewillbestepsat0,
50,and99.WithabipolarAMSinput,therewillalsobe
stepsat50and99.
Asanotherexample,whenitissetto5,therewillbestepsat
0,20,40,60,80,and99(aswellas20,40,60,80,and99
forbipolarinputs).
Tip: Quantized Joystick Pitch Bend
Youcanusethejoysticktocreatequantizedpitchbendsthat
simulateslidingacrossthefretsofaguitar,orjumpbend
soundscausedbydifferencesinthelengthofthetubeofa
trumpet.Todoso:
1. SelecttheAMSMixerastheOscillatorPitchAMSinput.
2. SetthePitchAMSIntensitytoanyexacthalfstepvalue,
suchas+5.00,+7.00,etc.
3. SettheJS(+X),JS(X)amountto0.00.
4. IntheAMSMixer,selecttheJSXasAMSA.
5. SettheNumberOfStepstothesamenumberyouused
inStep2.
Now,playingthejoystickwillcreatequantizedpitchbends.
JSXwillstillproducesmoothpitchbends,asusual,soyou
canusebothtechniquestogether.
Gate Control:
AMS Mixer, Type = Gate Control
ThisMixerTypeletsyousetuptwodifferentAMSsources
(orfixedAMSamounts),andthenswitchbetweenthetwo
usingathirdAMSsource.
Itssimilartoanaudiogatewithasidechain,butwitheven
moreflexibilitysinceyougettochoosewhathappenswhen
thegateisclosed(belowthethreshold),aswellaswhenits
open(abovethethreshold).
Youcanalsochoosewhetherthegatewillbeabletoopen
andclosecontinuouslyinresponsetothecontrolsource,or
whetheritonlyopensorclosesatthebeginningofthenote,
andthenstaysthatwayoverthenotesentireduration.
YoucanusetheGateto:
Useafootswitch(orothercontroller)toapplypitch
bendorothereffectstosomenotes,butnottoothers
Theparameterwillbeappliedwhenthecontroller
reachesaspecificthreshold.Forexample,thevelocity
valuecouldcontrolthefilterresonanceonlyifthe
velocityvalueexceeds90.
Usethejoystick,switches,orcontrollerstochange
betweentwoseparateLFOs(orotherAMSsources).
Gate Output:
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceislessthantheThresh
old,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMSsource
selectedunderBelowThreshold.
IfthevalueoftheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequal
totheThreshold,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueor
AMSsourceselectedintheAt&AboveThresholdparame
ter.
Below Thresh. [Fixed Value, AMS A]
ThisselectswhetherBelowThresholdusesapresetvalue,or
theselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value [99...+99]
ThisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhentheCon
trolSourceislessthantheThreshold.Thisonlyapplies
whenBelowThresholdissettoFixedValue.
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.This
onlyapplieswhenBelowThresholdissettoAMSA.
At & Above Thresh. [Fixed Value, AMS B]
ThisselectswhetherAt&AboveThresholdusesapreset
value,ortheselectedAMSsource.
Fixed Value [99...+99]
ThisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhentheCon
trolSourceisgreaterthanorequaltotheThreshold.This
onlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThresholdissettoFixed
Value.
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughtheGate
whentheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltothe
Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&AboveThresholdis
settoAMSB.
Gate Control:
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontrolthegate.
Control At Note-On Only [Off, On]
Whenthisisenabled(On),thevalueoftheControlSource
atnoteonwillselecttheoutput(BelowThresholdorAt&
AboveThreshold).Theselectedoutputwillthenremain
activethroughoutthedurationofthenote,regardlessofany
subsequentchangeintheControlSourcesvalue.
Notethattheoutputvalueitselfcancontinuetochange;
onlytheselectionofBeloworAt&Aboveisfixed.
ThissetsthevalueoftheControlSourcewherethegate
opensorcloses.
Tips: Examples of using Gate
Using a foot switch to apply pitch bend to specific notes
ByusingControlAtNoteOnOnly,youcanapplyan
effectonlytoaspecificnoteon.Forexample:
1. SetGateControlSourcetoFootSW:#82.(Youllneed
toconnectafootswitch,setGlobal:ControllersType
SW/PedaltoSwitch,andsetFootSWFunctionto
FootSwitch(CC#82)beforeyoucontinuewiththefol
lowingprocedure.)
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn.
3. SettheThresholdto50.
Control
Below
At & Above
Fixed Value
AMS
Fixed Value
AMS
Program mode
126
4. SetBelowThresholdtoaFixedValueof+00.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoAMSB:JSX.
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocontrol
thepitch.
7. Turnoffthefootswitch,andwhileholdingdowna
chord,movethejoystickintheXdirection.Thepitch
willnotchange.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandset
PitchJS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
8. Turnonthefootswitch,andaddanewnotetothe
previouschord.
9. MovethejoystickintheXdirection;pitchbendwillbe
appliedonlytothenewlyplayednote.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoupressedonthefootswitch)willnot.
Selective pitch-bend, using only the joystick
YoucanalsouseasingleAMSsourceasboththeControl
Sourceandavaluesource:
1. SettheControlSourcetoJSX.
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
3. SettheThresholdto00.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoAMSA:JSX.
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
6. OntheOSCPitchpage,assigntheAMSMixertocontrol
thepitch.
7. Withthejoystickinthecenter,playachord,andholdit
throughstep9.
8. Bendthejoysticktotheleft,andthenplayanewnote
abovethechord.
(Ifthepitchchanges,gototheOSCPitchpageandset
PitchJS(+X)andJS(X)to+00.)
Usethejoysticktobendthepitchofthenewnote.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played
beforeyoubentthejoystickdown)willnot.Thismethodis
particularlygoodforbendingthetopnoteofachordupto
pitch.
Generating a static value
Sometimes,itcanbehandytohaveapresetvalueasan
AMSsource.TheGateisonewaytocreatethis.Todoso:
1. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&AboveThresholdto
FixedValue,andenterthesamevalueintoeach.
Now,theAMSmixerwillalwaysgeneratethisstaticvalue.
AMS Mixer 2
ThisisthesecondAMSMixerforOscillator1.Theparame
tersareexactlythesameasthoseforAMSMixer1.
AMSMixer1onpage 122.
OSC 2 AMS Mix
ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator2.
OSC1AMSMixonpage 122
AMS Mix/C.KeyTrk (AMS Mixer/Common Keyboard Track) Common KeyTrack (Common Key-
127
Common KeyTrack (Common Keyboard Track)
ThetwoOscillatorssharetwoCommonkeyboardtracking
generators,inadditiontoeachOscillatorsdedicatedkey
boardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp.Youcanusethese
CommonkeytracksasAMSsourcesformodulatingmost
AMSdestinations.
TheCommonKeyboardTrackparametersaresharedbythe
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesarecalculated
individuallyforeachvoice.
What does Keyboard Tracking do?
Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythemodu
lationamountasyouplayupanddownthekeyboard.This
canbeusefulformakingthetimbreconsistentacrossthe
entirerange,oradjustingparametersaccordingtopitch.
ThemicroSTATIONkeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycom
plex,ifdesired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeover
uptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,you
can:
Makethemodulationincreaseveryquicklyoverthe
middleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemoreslowly
ornotatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethemodulationincreaseasyouplayloweronthe
keyboard.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike
effects.
Common Keyboard Tracking
slopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.
BreakKeyonpage 102
Keyboard Track 1
Key
Low Break [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointconnect
ingthetwoslopedlinesinthelowregion.
Center [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointinthecen
terofkeyboardtracking.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtracking
hasnoeffectontheAMSdestinations.
Low Break Center High Break
+99
+50
00
50
99
Ramp:
+99
+99
99
0
99
Ramp:
AMS
AMS
Ramp = +99
Ramp = 50
At the Center Key, the AMS value is always 0.
Program mode
128
High Break [C1...G9]
Thisspecifiesthenotethatwillbethebreakpointconnect
ingthetwoslopedlinesinthehighregion.
Ramp:
SeeRamp:onpage 103.
rangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkeytrack,use
negativevalues.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenterkeys.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreakkeys.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthetop
oftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositive
values.
ThetablebelowshowshowtheRampsaffecttheAMSout
put:
+Inf and Inf ramps
+Inf and Inf Ramps
Note:IfyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,the
HighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,ifyouset
theLowCenterrampto+InforInf,theBottomLowramp
willbegrayedout.
Keyboard Track 2
ThisisthesecondCommonkeyboardtrackinggenerator.
ItsparametersareexactlythesameasthoseforKeyboard
Track1.
KeyboardTrack1onpage 127
Ramp value AMS change
Inf goesto99in1halfstep
99 20peroctave
50 10peroctave
0 nochange
+50 +10peroctave
+99 +20peroctave
+Inf goesto+99in1halfstep
Ramp = Inf
Ramp = +Inf
Ramp = 50
Low Key Center Key High Key
IFX (Insert Effect) IFX Routing
129
IFX (Insert Effect)
Here,youcanadjustsettingsfortheinserteffects.For
instance,youcan:
Sendtheoutputofaoscillatortoaninserteffect
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect
Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 205.
IFX Routing
Thisgraphicshowsanoverviewoftheinserteffects,includ
ingtheroutingoftheoscillatorstotheeffects,theeffects
namesandon/offstatus,chainingbetweentheeffects,and
theoutputbuswheretheinserteffectsarethemselves
routed.
Thispageletsyouadjusttheroutingoftheoscillatorstothe
inserteffects.
IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtotheoutput.
(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresnodifference
betweenOnandOff.)
Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtimeyou
pressthebutton.
Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC#92
(ontheglobalMIDIChannel(p.184)toturnallinsert
effectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1
127restoretheoriginalsetting.
IFX1 [S00...S63, D00...D10]
IFX2 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX3 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX4 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX5 [000...061]
IFX5cannotusedoublesizeeffects(D00D10).Ifyouusea
doublesizeeffect,thenextinserteffectwillbeunavailable.
ForexampleifyouselectadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,you
wontbeabletouseIFX2.
OSC MFX Send
OSC1
Send to MFX1 [000...127]
1willbesenttomastereffect1.ThisappliesonlywhenBus
SelectissettoL/RorOff.
IfBusSelectissettoIFX1IFX5,thesendlevelstomaster
effects1and2aresetbyIFXSetuppageSend1andSend
2afterpassingthroughIFX15.
Send to MFX2 [000...127]
1willbesenttomastereffect2.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeSendtoMFX1onpage 129.
Program mode
130
OSC2
Send to MFX1 [000...127]
Send to MFX2 [000...127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputofOSC2
willbesenttomastereffects1and2.Theseparameterswill
bevalidwhenOscillatorModeissettoDouble(p.82)
andBusSelectissettoL/RorOff.
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91con
trolstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledontheglobal
MIDIchannelChannel(p.60).Theactualsendlevel
isdeterminedbymultiplyingthesevalueswiththe
sendlevelsofeachoscillator.
Use Dkit Setting [Off, On]
ThisisshownifOscillatorMode(p.82)issettoDrums.
IfOscillatorModeissettoSingleorDouble,thissettingis
ignored.
On:TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2settings(p.191)foreachkeyoftheselecteddrum
kitwillbeused.Turnonthisifyouwanttoapplyanindi
vidualinserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
havethesameBus(IFX/Output)settingsaccordingto
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Off:TheBusSelect,FXControlBus),SendtoMFX1,
SendtoMFX2settingswillbeused.Alldruminstruments
willbesenttothespecifiedbus.
Routing
Thispageletsyouadjusttheoutputbusoftheoscillators
andFXcontrolbus.
Bus Select
Bus Select [L/R, IFX1...IFX5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2.
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus.Normally
youwillchooseL/R.
IFX1IFX5:OutputtotheIFX15busses.
Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15busses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthepro
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1toMFX1andSend2
toMFX2tospecifythesendlevels.
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2]
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControlbus
(twochannelmonoFXCtrl1or2).
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparatesound
Controlbusses(eachisatwochannelmonobus)tocontrol
effectsinvariousways.
page 207.
IFX (Insert Effect) IFX Setup
131
IFX Setup
IFX1
Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1,itson/
offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixersettings.
Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereoin
andout.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIn/Outonpage 208.
Chain to [IFX2...IFX5]
Youcanchainuptofiveinserteffectstogetherinseries,to
createmorecomplexeffects.Setupthechainusingthis
parameter,andthenenableitusingtheChainparameter,
below.
Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.For
example,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2throughIFX5.
Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
chainedtoIFX5.
ThePan,Bus,FXControlBus,andSend1/2settingsapply
onlytothelasteffectinthechain.However,anyeffectinthe
chaincanbesenttotheFXControlbuses.
Chain [Off, On]
Thisconnectsinserteffectsinseries.IfChainisOn,this
inserteffectwillbeconnectedinserieswiththeinserteffect
selectedbyChainTo.
Example: IFX1ChainTo:IFX2
IFX1Chain:On
Inserteffects1and2willbeconnectedinseries.IfBusis
settoIFX1,theoscillatorsoutputwillbesentinseries
throughIFX1IFX2.Youcanconnectuptofiveinsert
effects(IFX1IFX5)inseries.Inthiscase,thePan,Bus,
FxCtrlBus,Send1,andSend2settingsfollowingthe
lastinserteffectwillbeused.
Pan [L000...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
Specifiesthebuswherethesignalwillbesentimmediately
aftertheinserteffect.
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,whichpasses
throughTFXandthengoestotheOUTPUTL/Routputs.
Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Off:ThesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheL/Routputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto:
UseSend1orSend2toroutethesignalentirely
throughthemastereffects,withoutsendingthedry
signaltotheoutputs.
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoaneffects
sidechain,suchasagateorvocoder,withoutbeing
hearddirectlyattheoutputs.
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControlbusses.
page 130.
IfyoureusingFXControlBusasaninputsignalfor
Vocoderetc.,afeedbackloopwilloccurifyououtput
tothesamebusasspecifiedhere,andoscillationwill
occur.Setthiswithcaretoavoidcreatingaloop.
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalissentto
mastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBus(BusSelect)is
settoL/RorOff.
Program mode
132
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI
channelspecifiedbyChannel(p.60)isusedfor
thesemessages.
IFX2, IFX3, IFX4, IFX5
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects2,3,
4,and5.
Inserteffect4doesnotprovideaChainTosetting.Itcan
beconnectedonlytoinserteffect5.
Youcantconnectfrominserteffect5toanotherinsert
effect.
Chain [Off, On]
Pan [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIFX1onpage 131.
IFX (Insert Effect) IFX1
133
IFX1
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffectthat
youselectedintheIFXRoutingpage.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannelChannel(p.60).Formore
information,pleaseseeDmodList(DynamicModula
tionSourceList)onpage 292.
Insert Effect 1 (IFX1)
IFX1 Parameters:
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersfortheinserteffect
selectedintheIFXpageIFXRouting.
Fordetailsoninserteffects,refertoInsertEffects(IFX1
IFX5)onpage 208.
ThemicroSTATIONEditorallowsyoutoeditalloftheeffect
parameters.
Inthetablesonpage217andfollowingthatexplainthe
effectparameters,itemslistedintheFullparametersec
tionaretheparametersthatcanbeeditedusingthemicroS
TATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersfortheinserteffects
selectedintheInsertFXSetuppage.
TheparametersforIFX2IFX5arethesameasforIFX1.
Program mode
134
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect)
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthemastereffectsand
totaleffect.Forinstance,youcan:
Routeasoundtothemastereffectsandtotaleffect
Makedetailedsettingsforthemastereffectsandtotal
effect
page 205.
MFX&TFX Routing
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsandtotal
effect,andturnthemon/off.
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotaleffectis
insertedintotheL/Rbus.
MFX1, MFX2
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound(Dry).
AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2returnlevelstoreturn
thesignaltotheL/RbusandmixitwiththeL/Rbussignal.
Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingonthe
selectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural.
On/Off [Off, On]
Thisswitchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,theout
putwillbemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenonandoff
eachtimeitispressed.
Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanusecontrol
change#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.Avalueof
0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restoretheorigi
nalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecifiedby
Channel(p.60)isusedforthismessage.
MFX1 [S00...S87, D00...D13]
MFX2 [000...120]
Theseselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1and2.
Ifyouchoose000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemaster
effectwillbemuted.
Formastereffect1,S01S87aresinglesizeandD00D13are
doublesizeeffects.
Formastereffect2,only000120singlesizeeffectscanbe
selected.
Return1, Return2
Return 1 [000...127]
Return 2 [000...127]
Thesespecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffecttothe
OUTPUTL/MONOandR).
TFX
Thesearetheparametersforthetotaleffect,whichisplaced
atthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.Afterpassingthroughthe
totaleffect,thesoundisoutputtoOUTPUTL/MONOand
R.
Forthetotaleffect,thedirectsound(Dry)isalwaysstereo
in/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound
(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffecttype.
Thetotaleffectisstereoinandstereoout,buttheoutput
maybemonauraldependingonthetypeofeffectyouselect.
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect) Routing
135
On/Off [Off, On]
passeddirectlythrough.Thesettingwillalternatebetween
on/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
Alternatively,youcansendcontrolchange#95toturn
thetotaleffectoff.Avalueof0turnsthetotaleffectoff,
andvaluesof1127restoretheoriginalsetting.The
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedbyChannel(p.60)is
usedforthismessage.
TFX [00...61]
TFXcannotusedoublesizeeffects(154170).
Master Volume
Master Volume [000...127]
MONOandR.
Routing
Chain
Mastern FX Chain [Off, On]
Level [000...127]
WhenthechainisOn,thissetsthelevelwherethesoundis
sentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenextmastereffect.
Ifyouselectadoublesizeeffect,theChainsettings
willbeignored.
Program mode
136
MFX1
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyouchoose
forMFX1intheMFX/TFXpage.
globalMIDIChannelChannel(p.60).Formore
information,pleaseseeDmodList(DynamicModula
tionSourceList)onpage 292.
MFX1 Parameters
Here,youcanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
selectedintheMFX/TFXpage.
page 205.
microSTATIONEditorallowsyoutoeditalloftheeffect
parameters.
tionaretheparametersthatcanbeeditedusingmicroSTA
TIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
MFX2
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMasterEffect2.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheMFX/TFXpage.
TheparametersforMFX2isthesameasforMFX1.
TFX
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofTFX.Toselect
differenteffectstypes,usetheMFX/TFXpage.
TheparametersforTFXisthesameasforMFX2.
UTILITY Command TFX
137
UTILITY Command
Procedure for utility commands
1. ClicktheUTILITYbutton,andchooseacommandfrom
themenuthatappears.
2. Adjustthesettingsinthedialogbox.
Fordetailsonthecontentsofeachdialogbox,refertothe
explanationforeachcommand.
3. ClicktheOKbuttontobegin,orclicktheCancelbuttonif
youdecidenottocontinue.
Write Program
ThiscommandsavestheeditedprogramtothemicroSTA
TIONsinternalmemory.Youcanusethistodothefollow
ing.
Savethechangesyoumade.
Renameaprogram.
Specifythecategoryofaprogram.
Copyaprogramtoadifferentbankandprogramnumber.
Select Category [KEYBOARD...USER]
Specifythecategoryoftheprogramthatyouresaving.
Select Sub Category
Specifythesubcategoryoftheprogramyouresaving.
New Name [characters]
Specifytheprogramname.
Choose Destination [000...127: name]
Specifythesavedestinationfortheprogram.
Copy Oscillator
Thiscommandisusedtocopythesettingsfromoneoscilla
tortoanother.
CopyOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Quick,Basic,OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQpages.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheoscillatorthatyouwant
tocopy.
2. UseProgramtoselectthebankandnumberofthe
copysourceprogram.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationoscillator.
Swap Oscillator
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsofoscillators1and2.
SwapOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Quick,Basic,OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQpages.
Note:ThiscanbeselectedonlyifOscillatorMode(p.82)is
Double.
Copy EG
ThiscommandcopiesEGsettings.
CopyEGisavailableonallofthetabsundertheOSC/Pitch,
Filter,Amp/EQpages.
1. UseFromtoselectthecopysourceEG.
2. UseProgramtoselectthecopysourceprogram.
3. UseTotoselectthecopydestinationEG.
Copy LFO
ThiscommandcopiesLFOsettings.
CopyLFOisavailableontheLFOpages.
1. UseFromtoselectthecopysourceLFO.
2. UseProgramtoselectthecopysourceprogram.
3. UseTotoselectthecopydestinationLFO.
Swap LFO 1&2 of OSC1
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofOSC1LFO1toOSC1
LFO2,andviceversa.
SwapLFO1&2ofOSC1isavailableonalloftheLFO
pages,exceptfortheCommonLFOtab.
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,thiscom
mandwillerasethatmodulationrouting(sincetheLFOs
cannotmodulatethemselves).
Swap LFO 1&2 of OSC2
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofLFO1toLFO2,and
viceversa.
SwapLFO1&2isavailableonalloftheLFOpages,except
fortheCommonLFOtab.
Double;ifnot,thecommandwillnotbedisplayed.
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,thiscom
mandwillerasethatmodulationrouting(sincetheLFOs
cannotmodulatethemselves).
Copy Arpeggiator
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheARPtaboftheBasic
page.
1. UsetheFromfieldspecifythesourceofthearpeggioset
tings(mode,bank,number)thatyouwishtocopy.
2. IfyouarecopyingfromCombination,orSong,specify
whetheryouwishtocopyfromAorB.
Copy Insert Effect
Thiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromwithinthecur
rentProgram,fromotherPrograms,Combinations,or
Songs.
CopyInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
TobegintheCopyInsertEffectcommand,presstheOKbut
ton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Ifyourecopyingfromamastereffect,theresultwill
notbeidenticalduetodifferencesintheroutingand
levelsettingsofthemastereffects.
From (Mode) [Program, Combination, Song]
ThisselectswhetheryoullcopyfromaProgram,aCombi
nation,oraSongsettings.
From (Bank and Number) [Bank and Number]
ForProgramsandCombinations,thisselectstheBankand
Numberfromwhichtocopy.Whenthisparameteris
selected,youcanalsousethefrontpanelBANKbuttonsto selectBanks.
Program mode
138
(Effects select) [IFX 15, MFX 1&2, TFX]
Selectwhichoftheeffectsyouwishtocopy.
Youcanalsocopyfromamastereffectandtotaleffect.
All [check-box]
Whenthisisenabled,thesettingsofallinserteffects(the
contentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheeffectparametersof
IFX15,butnotCtrlCh)willbecopied.
To [IFX 15]
Thisselectstheinserteffectcopydestination.
Swap Insert Effect
Thiscommandexchangestheeffects,andtheirinternal
parameters,betweentwoIFX.
SwapInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
AlloftheparametersshownontheIFX15pageswillbe
copied.
OtherIFXparameterswillnotbeaffected,includingPan,
Sends1and2,Chain,andFXControlBus.
1. InSource1andSource2,selecteachoftheinserteffects
thatyouwishtoswap.
Copy MFX/TFX
Thiscommandletsyoucopyanydesiredeffectsettings
fromProgram,Combination,orSong.
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFXpages.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcemode,bank,
andnumber.
2. YoucancopyfromaninserteffectbyselectingIFX15.
Ifyoucopyfromaninserteffect,theresultmaynotbe
exactlythesame,duetodifferencesinroutingandlevel
settings.
IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturnlevelwillbecop
iedatthesametime.
YoucancopysettingsfromatotaleffectbyselectingTFX.
IfyoucheckAllMFXs,allmastereffectsettingswillbe
copied.
IfyoucheckTFX,alltotaleffectsettingswillbecopied.
MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
3. InTo,specifythecopydestinationmastereffectsor
totaleffect.
ThisisnotshownifcopysourceissettoM1,2&TFX.
Load
LoadsthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditordatathat
waspreviouslysavedonthecomputer.
Save
SavesdatafromthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorto
yourcomputerasdedicatedfile.
AllData(.MSTall):Alldata(program,combination,song
settings,globalsettings).
AllProg(.MSTapr):Allprogramdata.
BankProgram(.MSTbpr):Programdataofthebankthats
currentlyselected.
Program(MSTpr):Aprogramdatathatscurrentlyselected.
Note:Thesefunctionsloadorsavethedataasdedicated
filesfortheeditorapplication.
Receive All
ReceivesalldatafromthemicroSTATIONdataintotheeditor.
Note:ThesequencerperformancedataofSequencermode
isexcepted.
Transmit All
TransmitsalldatainthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor
tothemicroSTATIONandwritesitintointernalmemory.
Receive All Prog/Current Prog Bank
ReceivethecorrespondingdatafromthemicroSTATION
intothemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
Transmit All Prog/Current Prog Bank
TransmitallprogramdatafromthemicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditortothemicroSTATIONandwritesit.
Transmit Current Prog Bank
Transmitprogrambankdatathascurrentlyselectedbank
fromthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditortothemicro
STATIONandwritesit.
Receive Current Prog
ReceivetherespectivedatafromthemicroSTATIONinto
themicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
Transmit Current Prog
Transmittheprogramdatathatscurrentlyselectedfromthe
microSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditortothemicroSTA
TIONandwritesit.
Note:TheseReceiveandTransmitcommandsuseKORG
SysExMIDIDumptosendorreceivedata,ortosynchro
nizethedatabetweenthemicroSTATIONandthesoftware.
Donttouchthekeyboardorthemouseofyourcomputer
whiledataisbeingsentorreceived.Also,donttouchthe
panelswitchesorthekeyboardofthemicroSTATION.
Import
LoadsPCGdatafromthemicroSTATIONintothemicroS
Export
DatacreatedinmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorcanbe
savedasPCGdataforthemicroSTATION.
All Sound Off
Dependingonthehostapplication,hungnotesmay
occurewhileusingthehostsfunctions.Ifthishappens,
pleaseusethiscommand.
139
Combination mode
ByconnectingthemicroSTATIONtoyourcomputerand
usingthemicroSTATIONEditorapplication,youllbeable
toeditallofthemicroSTATIONsparameters.
Thischapterexplainstheeditableparametersthatare
shownintheeditor.Fordetailsonhowtoselectparameters
andedittheirvalue,refertothemicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditorUsersGuidefoundontheaccessarydisc.
Page structure
Panel Selectcombinations,specifythetempo.
Play
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreach
timbre.(p.142)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(p.143)
Common
Realtimecontrolsknobfunctionassign
ments.(p.144)
TimbreParam
Variousparametersettingsforeach
timbre(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,
Pitchsetting,etc.)(p.145)
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.
(p.150)
Key/VelZone
Keysplitandlayersettings.
(Keyzoneandvelocityzone)(p.152)
IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffect
sendlevelsettings.(p.153)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(p.155)
MFX/TFX
Mastereffectrouting,selection,and
settings.(p.157)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.
(p.158)
Combination mode
140
Panel
microSTATIONEditorspanelletsyoudothefollowing
things.
Selectcombinations,andspecifythetempo
editineachmode.
Turnthearpeggiatoron/off,andturnthearpeggiatorslatch
on/off
UTILITY
BROWSER button
ClickingtheBROWSERbuttonopensacombinationsound
list.SelectacombinationfromthelistandclicktheOKbut
tontoloadthecombination.
Note:Youcanclickacombinationinthelisttoselectit,and
thenauditionthatcombinationfromthekeyboard.
UTILITY button
Display
Combination Select [A000...C127: name]
Toselectacombination,clickthebuttonsshownatthe
rightofthecombinationname.
Tempo [040.00...300.00]
Thisindicatesthetempo.Tosetthetempo,useCOMBI
EDITTempo,=,oruseknob4inRealtimeControlC
mode.
specifiedtempo.
Realtime Controls
Theseselecttherealtimecontrolmode.
ClickabuttonA,B,orCtoswitchmodes.
Arpeggiator
Play Program Select
141
Play
ThisisthePlaypageofCombinationmode.Amongother
things,youcan:
Selectaprogramforeachtimbre,andspecifyitsPlay/
MuteandSoloOn/Offstatus.
UsetheRealtimecontrolstomakesimpleeditsfor
programparameters.
Program Select
Timbre 01...16 (Timbre Number):
Program Select [001...]
Hereyoucanselecttheprogramusedbyeachtimbre.Click
ProgramSelect,andchoosefromthemenuthatappears.
WhenyouselectaCombinationonthemicroSTATION,
aMIDIprogramchangefortheselectedcombination
numberwillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDIChan
nel(p.60).
Atthesametime,bankselect,programchange,and
volume(CC#7)messageswillbetransmittedonthe
MIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbrewhoseStatus
(p.145)issettoEXTorEX2.However,thesemessages
willnotbetransmittedfortimbresthataresettothe
sameMIDIchannelastheglobalMIDIchannel.
Inthiscase,EX2timbreswillshowtheProgramBank
as,andwilltransmitthebanknumberthatwas
specifiedinBankSelect(WhenStatus=EX2)(p.145).
WhenyouplayonthemicroSTATIONkeyboardand
controllers,MIDImessagesaretransmittedonthe
globalMIDIchannel.Atthesametime,timbreswhose
StatusissettoEXTorEX2willtransmitthesamemes
sagesontheirownMIDIchannel.
Ifbankselectandprogramchangemessagesare
receivedonaMIDIchannelthatmatchestheMIDI
channelofatimbrewhoseStatusisINT,theprogramof
thattimbrewillchange.HoweveriftheMIDIchannel
oftheincomingmessagematchestheglobalMIDI
channelMIDIChannel,thenthecombinationwill
change.
Ifyoudonotwantthecombinationtochange,youcan
eitherchangetheglobalMIDIchanneltoaMIDIchan
nelotherthanthechannelonwhichtheprogram
changemessagesarebeingreceived,oryoucanturnoff
CombinationChange(p.185).Youcanalsouncheck
BankChangesothatonlytheprogramnumberwill
changeandthebankwillremainthesame.
Ifyouwishtochangetheprogramassignedtocertain
timbreswithoutchangingthecombination,youcan
alsosetEnableProgramChange(p.185)sothatthe
programwillchangeoncertaintimbresbutnotonoth
ers.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
farright.AsettingofC064willreproducethepansettingof
theProgrammode.
Combination mode
142
Ifamonoinserteffectisinuse,thesettingsyoumakehere
willbeignored.Inthiscase,thePan(CC#8)parameterin
IFXIFXSetuppagewilladjustthepanningofthesound
aftertheinserteffect(Mixeronpage 210).
RND:Theoscillatorpanwillchangerandomlyateachnote
on.
IfStatus(p.145)issettoINT,CC#10(pan)messages
canbereceivedtocontrolthesetting.CC#10valuesof0
or1willplacethesoundatthefarleft,64atcenter,and
127atthefarright.(excludeRND)Pansettingscanbe
controlledbymessagesreceivedontheMIDIChan
nel(p.145).
Volume [000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbre116.
Thevolumeofeachtimbreisdeterminedbymultiply
ingthisvolumevaluewiththeMIDIvolume(CC#7)
andexpression(CC#11).
IfStatus(p.145)hasbeensettoINT,incomingMIDI
CC#7orCC#11messageswillcontrolthevolumeofa
timbre.(Howeverthesemessageswillnotaffecttheset
tingofthisparameter.)
IfStatusisEXTorEX2,thevalueofthisparameterwill
betransmittedasMIDICC#7whenthecombinationis
changed.Howeverthiswillnotbetransmittedbya
timbrethatissettothesameMIDIchannelasthe
globalMIDIchannel.Thismessageistransmittedon
theMIDIChannel(p.145)specifiedforeachtimbre.
Play:Thetimbrewillproducesound.
Mute:Thetimbrewillbemuted(silent).
Solo On/Off [Off, On]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtimbre.
Arpeggiator Info
ThisshowsthearpeggiatorAandBsettingsusedbythe
screen.
Byclickingaparameternameetc.,youcanjumptothe
arpeggiatoreditingpage.
FX Info
Thisshowstheon/offstatusandeffecttypeoftheinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectusedbythecombina
tion.
Byclickinganeffectnameetc.,youcanjumptotheeffect
editingpage.
Timbre Mixer
Youcansetthepan,andvolumeforeachoftheTimbres1
16.
Timbre Mixer
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePlay/Muteonpage 142.
Solo [Off, On]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtimbre.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePanonpage 141.
Volume [000...127]
Adjuststhevolumeofeachtimbre.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeVolumeonpage 142.
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L001
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R127 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left Center Right
Left Center Right
OSC1 OSC2 OSC1 OSC2 OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=L032
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=R096
Pan (CC#10)
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1:
Amp1 Pan=C064
OSC2:
Amp2 Pan=C064 Left Center Right
Pan (CC#10)
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1 OSC2
Common Arpeggiator Assign
143
Common
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsforthearpeggiator,and
selectthefunctionsthatareassignedtoknobs14whenthe
REALTIMECONTROLSELECTbuttonhasselectedB
mode.
Arpeggiator Assign
Arpeggiator Assign [Off, A, B]
AssignsarpeggiatorAorBtoeachtimbre116.Whenthe
ARPON/OFFbuttonison,thearpeggiatorspecifiedfor
eachtimbrewilloperateaccordingtoArpeggiatorRunA,
Bandthesesettings.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeARPAssignonpage 19.
Arpeggiator Run A, B [Off, On]
Thisturnsarpeggiatoron/off.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRunonpage 23.
Arpeggiator-A(B)
withinthecombination.Twoarpeggiatorscanrunsimulta
neously.
Thisoffersavarietyofpossibilities,suchasapplyingsepa
ratearpeggiopatternstotwosoundsthathavebeen
assignedasakeyboardsplit,orusingvelocitytoswitch
betweentwoarpeggiopatterns.
YoucanalsousetherealtimecontrolsCmodeARPGATE
Tosavetheeditsyoumake,useWriteCombination.
Setup
Pattern [P0...P4, 000...639: name]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Gate [000...100%, Step]
Swing [100...+100%]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthecombina
tion.
Scan Zone
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorsAandB.
Top Key [C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilltriggerarpeggia
torA/B.TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Keyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Combination mode
144
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilltriggerarpeggiator
A/B.TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Note:Thevaluesoftheseparameterscanalsobeenteredby
holdingdowntheKEYbuttonandplayinganoteonthe
keyboard.
andoperateknobs14.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeRealtimeControl
Knob14Assignonpage 294.
Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) Scale
145
Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters)
Scale
TimbrecanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeScaleonpage 82.
Type (Combis Scale)
[Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale3]
Selectsthescale.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTypeonpage 82.
Key [C...B]
Thisselectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKey(ScaleKey)on
page 83.
Random [0...7]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(p.145)isINT,thissettingwillaffectthe
pitchproducedbythemicroSTATION.IfStatusis
EXT,thissettingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenote
messagestransmittedviaMIDI.
MIDI/OSC
HereyoucanadjustMIDIsettingsforeachtimbre.
Timbre 01...16 (Timbre Number)
MIDI
Status [Off, INT, EXT, EX2]
ThisparametersetswhethertheTimbrecontrolstheinter
nalsounds,orexternalMIDIdevices.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStatusonpage 20.
MIDI Channel [01...16, Gch]
ThisparameterallowsyoutosetstheMIDItransmit/receive
channelforeachtimbre.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDICh.(MIDIChan
nel)onpage 20.
Bank Select MSB (When Status = EX2) [000...127]
Bank Select LSB (When Status = EX2) [000...127]
Specifiesthebanknumberthatwillbetransmittedwhen
StatusissettoEX2.TheupperlineistheMSB,andthe
lowerlineistheLSB.ThissettinghasnoeffectifStatusis
otherthanEX2.
Combination mode
146
OSC
Force OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, Mono, LGT]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOscillatorModeon
page 82.
OSC Select [BTH, OSC1, OSC2]
Thisparameterspecifieswhetherthetimbresprogramwill
playOSC1,OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorModeisDouble,thisset
tingletsyouspecifythatonlyOSC1orOSC2willsound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbytheset
tingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.Programswillnotsoundif
OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
Thisparameterallowsyoutoselectportamentosettingsfor
eachtimbre.
PRG:Portamentowillbeappliedasspecifiedbythepro
gramsettings.
Off:Portamentowillbeoff,eveniftheoriginalprogramset
tingsspecifiedPortamentotobeon.
001127:Portamentowillbeappliedwiththeportamento
timeyouspecifyhere,evenifitisturnedoffbytheprogram
settings.
IftheStatus(p.145)issettoINT,CC#05(porta
mentotime)andCC#65(portamentoswitch)messages
willbereceivedandwillcontrolandchangetheseset
tings.(IfthesettingisPRG,CC#05,portamentotime
willnotbereceived.)Thesemessageswillbereceived
ontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbrebyMIDI
Channel(p.145).
Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) Pitch/Other
147
Pitch/Other
Here,youcanadjustpitch,scale,anddelaytimefromnote
onsettingsforeachtimbre.
Pitch
Transpose [60...+00...+60]
Thisparameteradjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinsemitone
steps.12unitsequaloneoctave.
WhenStatusisINT,thisparameterwillaffectthe
pitchessoundedbythemicroSTATION.WhenStatus
isEXT,thisparameterwillaffectthenotenumbersof
theMIDInotemessagesthataretransmitted.Forexam
pleifyoucreatesettingsof+04and+07respectivelyfor
twotimbresthataresettoEXT,playingtheCkeywill
transmitaCnotenumberontheglobalMIDIchannel,
andatthesametimewillalsotransmitEandGnote
numbersontheMIDIchannelsofthosetimbres.
Detune [1200...+0000...+1200]
Thisparameteradjuststhepitchofeachtimbreinonecent
units.
+0000:Normalpitch.
TransposeandDetunecanbecontrolledviaMIDIRPN
messages.Thewaythatthisworksdependsonwhether
ornottheTimbreusesaDrumProgram.
IftheTimbredoesnotuseaDrumProgramforexam
ple,ifitusesaSingleorDoubleProgramthenMIDI
RPNCoarseTunewillcontrolTranspose,andRPNFine
TunewillcontrolDetune.
IftheTimbreusesaDrumProgram,MIDIRPNCoarse
TuneandFineTunewillbecombinedtocontrol
Detune.Theoverallrangeis1octaveforcoarsetune
andfinetunetogether.
Bend Range [PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiesthemaximumamountofpitchchange(insemi
tones)thatwilloccurwhenthepitchbenderisused.
used.
intheprogram.
TheMIDIRPNPitchBendChangemessagecanbe
receivedtocontrolthisandchangethesetting.(How
everitwillnotbereceivedifthisparameterissetto
PRG.)ThismessageisreceivedontheMIDIchannelfor
eachtimbresetbyMIDIChannel(p.145).
Delay
Delay Time [ms] [0000...5000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetim
brebeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.isset
toOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
Tempo Sync (MIDI/Tempo Sync) [Off, On]
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetimbrepro
ducessoundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunitsrelativeto
the,(Tempo).
On:SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBaseNoteand
TimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBaseNote=
,,Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytimewill
beequivalentto1000ms.
Off:ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelayTimesetting.
Combination mode
148
Base Note [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Note Times [01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetim
brebeginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevaluerela
tivetothe, (Tempo).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote(,)and
Timesto02,thattimbrewillsoundwithadelayofahalf
note().Evenifyouchange,(Tempo)(p.140),thedelay
timewillalwaysbeahalfnote().Ifyouusetheseparame
terstospecifyadelayofahalfnote().Inthiscase,a
Tempoof60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,anda
Tempoof120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
Other
Use Prog Scale [Off, On]
AtimbrecanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale(p.82).
On:Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
Off:ThescalespecifiedbyType(CombisScale)(p.145)
willbeused.
Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) Tone
149
Tone
Hereyoucanadjustthesoundofeachtimbresprogram.
Thesesettingsaresavedineachcombination,anddonot
affecttheoriginalprograms.
Filter/Amp
Cutoff [99...+99] (Rel, CC#74)
Resonance [99...+99] (Rel, CC#71)
Filter EG Int [99...+99] (Rel, CC#79)
Amp Vel Int [99...+99] (Rel)
Filter/Amp EG
Attack [99...+99] (Rel, CC#73)
Decay [99...+99] (Rel, CC#75)
Sustain [99...+99] (Rel, CC#70)
Release [99...+99] (Rel, CC#72)
About the Tone parameters
TheToneparametersofacombinationhavethefollowing
characteristics.
TheyallowyoutoeditsomeoftheToneparametersof
theprogramselectedforthetimbre.
Theycanbesetindividuallyfortimbres116.
AlloftheToneparametersareRelativeparameters.
ParametersthatareinterrelatedwithspecificMIDICC
messagesarefollowedbyanindicationsuchas
(CC#74).
FormoreaboutRelativeparameters,refertoRelative(Rel)
andAbsoluteparameters(p.79)
Saving your edits of Relative parameters
ThewaythatRelativeandAbsoluteparametersaresaved
willdifferinProgrammode,butinCombinationmode
therearenodifferencesinhowtheseparametersaresaved.
Thechangesyoumakearesavedinthecombination,and
willnotaffecttheoriginalprograms.
Combination mode
150
MIDI Filter1
thatwillbetransmittedandreceivedbyeachtimbre.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIFilteronpage 22.
Program Change [Off, On]
willbetransmittedandreceived.
After Touch [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
received.
Damper [Off, On]
Portamento SW [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#65portamentoon/off
bendmessagereception.)
JS+Y [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#1(the+Yaxisofthejoystick,or
andreceived.
JSY [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDICC#2(theYaxisofthejoystick,or
andreceived.
Ribbon (CC#16) [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDICC#16(specifiedasthe
assignmentofarealtimecontrolknob)willbetransmitted
orreceived.
Foot SW [Off, On]
Specifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheassignableswitch
Global:Basic/ControllersControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
Specifieswhetherornottheeffectoftheassignablepedal
Global:Basic/ControllersControllerspage.
ThisfiltersettingisvalidwhenaMIDIcontrolchangeis
assigned.
Other CC [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherornotMIDIcontrolmessagesnotcovered
intheprecedingitemsMIDIFilterwillbetransmittedand
received.
Timbre Param (Timbre Parameters) MIDI Filter2
151
MIDI Filter2
TheseareMIDIfiltersettingsfortheknobswhentheREAL
TIMECONTROLSELECTbuttonisusedtoselectRealtime
ControlAmodeorBmode.
UsetheCommonControllerspagetoassignthefunctions
thatknobs14willperformwhenRealtimeControlBmode
isselected.
RTC Knob A1 [Off, On]
EnablesordisablestransmissionandreceptionofMIDI
CC#74(themicroSTATIONsfiltercutofffrequency).Thisis
assignedtoknob1whenRealtimeControlAmodeis
selected.
CC#71(themicroSTATIONsfilterresonancelevel).Thisis
selected.
CC#79(themicroSTATIONsfilterEGintensity).Thisis
selected.
CC#72(themicroSTATIONsfilter/ampEGreleasetime).
Thisisassignedtoknob4whenRealtimeControlAmodeis
selected.
RTC Knob B1 [Off, On]
oftheMIDImessagesassignedtoknobs14whentheReal
timeControlBmodeisselected.
Combination mode
152
Key/Vel Zone (Keyboard/Velocity Zone)
Keyboard Zones
Thesesettingsspecifythekeyboardrangeinwhichtimbres
willsound.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKeyZoneonpage 21.
Top Key [C-1...G9]
soundeachtimbre.
Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTopSlopeonpage 21.
Bottom Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBtmSlopeonpage 21.
soundeachtimbre.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBottom(BottomKey)on
page 21.
Keyboard Zone Map
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesinwhich
eachtimbrewillsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportion.
Velocity Zone
SetstheTop/BottomVelocityparameterstospecifythe
rangeofvelocitiesthatwillsoundforeachtimbres,andset
theTop/BottomSlopeparameterstospecifytherangeover
whichthevolumewillchange.Formoreinformation,please
seeVelZone(VelocityZone)onpage 22.
timbre.
Top Slope [000...120]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTopSlopeonpage 22.
Bottom Slope [000...120]
ity.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBtmSlopeonpage 22.
Specifiestheminimumvelocityvaluethatwillsoundeach
timbre.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBottom(Bottom
Velocity)onpage 22.
Velocity Zone Map
Thisareaindicatesthenoteandvelocityrangesinwhich
eachtimbrewillsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesand
velocitiesthatwillsound,andshowtheslopeportion.
IFX (Insert Effect) IFX Routing
153
IFX (Insert Effect)
Inthispageyoucanadjustthesettingsfortheinserteffects.
Thesesettingsconsistmainlyofthefollowing.
Specifytheroutingforeachtimbre.
Selecttheeffecttypeforinserteffects15,andeditthe
effectparameters.
Specifyon/offandchainsettingsforinserteffects15.
Adjustmixersettingsfollowingtheinserteffects.
IFX Routing
Thisshowsthestatusoftheinserteffects.
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(BusSelect),the
nameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,chaining,and
theoutputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.
Thetypeofinserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechainset
tingscanbeeditedintheIFXSetuppage.
IFX1 [S00...S63, D00...D10]
IFX2 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX3 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX4 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX5 [000...061]
SeeIFXRoutingonpage 129.
Routing
Specifiesthebuswheretheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
timbres116willbesent.Youcanalsosetthesendlevelsto
themastereffectsfromthispage.
Routing
Bus Select [DKit, L/R, IFX1...IF5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetimbresprogramoscil
lator.ThisparametercanalsobeeditedfromtheIFXRout
ingpage.
L/R:OutputtotheL/Rbus.
IFX1IFX5:OutputtotheIFX15buses.
Off:ThetimbrewillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus,or
IFX15buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwantthepro
seriestoamastereffect.UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(to
MFX2)tospecifythesendlevels.
Tip:Youcancreateawidevarietyofroutingsbyusingeach
timbresBusSelectandtheChaintoandChainset
tings(p.155)thatfollowtheinserteffect.
Example: Inserting a single IFX into multiple timbre
Combination mode
154
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and then
inserting an IFX at the final stage
Example: Sharing a portion of a timbres IFX chain with another
timbre
DKit:Thiscanbeselectedonlyifthetimbresprogramisa
drumprogram(OscillatorModeDrums).
TheBus(IFX/Output),FXControlBus,Send1,and
Send2settingsforeachkeyoftheselectedDkitwillbe
used.Turnonthissettingifyouwanttoapplyanindividual
inserteffecttoeachdruminstrument.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Ifyouwanttoedittheseroutings,usetheDrumKitIFX
Patch.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDrumKitIFXPatchon
page 154.
FX Ctrl Bus [Off, 1, 2]
SeeFXCtrlBusonpage 154.
Send1 (MFX1) [000...127]
Send2 (MFX2) [000...127]
SeeSendtoMFX1onpage 129.
DrumKit IFX Patch
ThispatchestheBus(IFX/Output)settingsforeachkeyof
adrumkit,temporarilychangingtheinserteffectconnec
tiondestinations.
Note:Youcanutilizethisparameteriftheprogramassigned
tothetimbreisadrumprogramandBusOutissetto
DKit.TheBus(IFX/Output)settingofeachkeyinthe
drumkitmustbesettooneofIFX15.
155
IFX Setup
Here,youcanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
5,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixer
settings.Forinserteffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoinandout.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe
effectsound(Wet)dependsontheeffecttype.
Fordetailedexplanationsoftheindividualeffects,please
seetheEffectGuideonpage 205.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIFXSetuponpage 131.
However,unlikeinProgrammode,youcanuseadifferent
MIDIchanneltomodulateeacheffect,ifdesired.This
includesthepostIFXPan,Send1,andSend2settings,
aswellastheeffectsdynamicmodulation(Dmod).Toset
theMIDIchannel,usetheControlChparameteronthe
IFX15.
IFX1
Chain [Off, On]
Pan [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
SeeIFXSetuponpage 131.
Control Ch
[Ch01...16, Global Channel, All-Routed]
ingtheinserteffectPan,Send1,andSend2.
nel)onpage 25.
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersforinserteffects25
selectedintheIFXSetuppage.Theseparametersarethe
sameasinProgrammode.
SeeIFXSetuponpage 131.
Combination mode
156
IFX1
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheInsertFXRouting.
IFX1 Parameters:
IFX Parameters
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersfortheinserteffect.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeEffectGuideonpage 205.
parameters.
selectedintheIFXRouting.Theparametersarethesameas
ininserteffect1.
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect) MFX&TFX Routing
157
Inthispageyoucanadjustthesettingsforthemastereffects
andthetotaleffect.Thesesettingsconsistmainlyofthefol
lowing.
Specifytheroutingforthemastereffects.
Selecttheeffecttypeforthemastereffectsandthetotal
effect,andedittheeffectparameters.
Turneacheffecton/off.
EditthereturnleveltotheL/Rbusforthemastereffect
outputs.
MFX&TFX Routing
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
MFX1, MFX2
Here,youcanadjustsettingsforthemastereffect1,2.
MFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
MFX2 On/Off [Off, On]
MFX1 [S00...S87, D00...D13]
MFX2 [000...120]
SeeMFX&TFXRoutingonpage 134.
Return1, Return2
Return 1 [000...127]
Return 2 [000...127]
TFX
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsforthetotaleffect.
TFX [000...153]
Master Volume
MONOandR.
Routing
Chain
Master FX Chain [Off, On]
Chain Level [000...127]
SeeChainonpage 135.
Combination mode
158
Control Channel
MFX1 [1...16, Global Channel]
TFX [1...16, Global Channel]
lation(Dmod)forthemasterandtotaleffect.
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
MFX1
forMFX1intheMFX/TFXRouting.
globalMIDIChannelChannel(p.184).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDmodList(Dynamic
ModulationSourceList)onpage 292.
MFX1 Parameters
page 205.
parameters.
MFX2
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheMFX/TFXRouting.
TFX
UTILITY Command TFX
159
UTILITY Command
themenuthatappears.
Write Combination
ThissavestheeditedcombinationtothemicroSTATIONs
memory.
Select Category [KEYBOARD...USER]
Select Sub Category
New Name [charactors]
Specifythecombinationname.
To [A000...C127: name]
Specifythesavedestinationforthecombination.
Initialize Combination
Thiscommandinitializesthesettingsofthecombination
InitializeCombinationisavailableonallofthetabsunder
theQuick,Commonpages.
Copy from Program
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofthespecifiedprogram
tothecombinationthatscurrentlyselected.
CopyfromProgramisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Quickpages.
SeeCopyProg(CopyfromProgram)onpage 27.
Copy Arpeggiator
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableonCommonpage.
SeeCopyARP(CopyArpeggio)onpage 27.
Copy Insert Effect
gram,combination,orsong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyIFXonpage 14.
Swap Insert Effect
effects.
swapped.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapIFXonpage 14.
Copy MFX/TFX
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 14.
Load
Save
AllData(.MSTall):Alldata(program,combination,song,
globaldata).
AllCombi(.MSTacm):Allcombinationdata.
BankCombi(.MSTbcm):Combinationdataofthebank
Combi(.MSTcm):Acombinationdatathatscurrently
selected.
Receive All
Receivesalldata(program,combination,song,globaldata)
fromthemicroSTATIONdataintotheeditor.
isexcepted.
Transmit All
Transmitsalldata(program,combination,songsettings,
globalsettings)inthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor
tothemicroSTATIONandwritesitintointernalmemory.
Receive All Combi
ReceivestheallcombinationdatafromthemicroSTATION
Receive Current Combi Bank
Receivesthecombinationdataofthebankthatscurrently
selectedfromthemicroSTATIONintothemicroSTATION
Editor/PlugInEditor.
Transmit All Combi
TransmitstheallcombinationdatafromthemicroSTA
TIONEditor/PlugInEditortothemicroSTATIONand
writesit.
Combination mode
160
Transmit Current Combi Bank
Transmitsthecombinationdataofthebankthatscurrently
selectedfromthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorto
themicroSTATIONandwritesit.
Receive Current Combi/
Receivesthecombinationdatathatscurrentlyselecedfrom
themicroSTATIONintothemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugIn
Editor.
Transmit Current Combi
Transmitsthecombinationdatathatscurrentlyselected
STATIONandwritesit.
Import
Export
DatacreatedinmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorcanbe
savedasPCGdataforthemicroSTATION.
All Sound Off
Dependingonthehostapplication,hungnotesmayoccur
whileusingthehostsfunctions.Ifthishappens,pleaseuse
thiscommand.
161
Sequencer mode
IfyouconnectthemicroSTATIONtoyourcomputeranduse
themicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor,youllbeableto
editallofthemicroSTATIONsparameters.
Thischapterexplainstheparametersthatcanbeviewed
andeditedinmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.For
detailsonhowtoselectaparameterandedititsvalue,refer
tothemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorUsersGuide
providedintheaccessarydisc.
PerformancedatarecordedonthemicroSTATIONitself
cannotbeeditedorsavedusingmicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditor.
Page structure
Panel
Selectasong,specifythetempo.
Realtimecontrol.Externalcontrol.(p.162)
Turnthearpeggiatoron/off,turnlatchon/off.
(p.162)
Play
Programselectionforeachtrack.(p.163)
Panandvolumesettingsetc.foreachtrack.
(p.163)
Simplearpeggiatorediting.(p.164)
Common
(p.165)
TrackParam
Variousparametersettingsforeachtrack
(MIDIchannel,OSCselection,Pitchsetting,
Timedelayfromnoteontobeginningof
sound.etc.)(p.166)
MIDItransmit/receivefiltersettings.(p.169)
Key/VelZone
Keysplitandlayersettings.(Keyzoneand
velocityzone)(p.171)
IFX
Oscillatoroutputbusandmastereffectsend
levelsettings.(p.172)
Inserteffectrouting,selection,andsettings.
(p.172)
MFX/TFX
Mastereffectrouting,selection,andsettings.
(p.175)
Totaleffectselectionandsettings.(p.175)
Sequencer mode
162
Panel
microSTATIONEditorspanelletsyoudothefollowing
things.
Selectsongs,andspecifythetempo
editineachmode.
Turnthearpeggiatoron/off,andturnthearpeggiators
latchon/off
UTILITY
BROWSER button
ClicktheBROWSERbuttontoviewasonglist.Selectasong
inthelistandclicktheOKbuttontoloadthesong.
UTILITY button
Display
Song Select [A000...C127: name]
Toselectasong,clickthebuttonsshownattherightof
thesongname.
Tempo [040.00...300.00]
Thisindicatesthetempo.Tosetthetempo,useSEQEDIT
Tempo,=,oruseknob4inRealtimeControlCmode.
specifiedtempo.
Realtime Controls
Theseselecttherealtimecontrolmode.ClickabuttonA,B,
orCtoswitchmodes.
Arpeggiator
on,thearpeggiowillkeepplayingevenafteryoutakeyou
Play Track Select, Program Select, Pan, Volume
163
Play
Track Select, Program Select,
Pan, Volume
Track Select [1...16]
Toselectatrack,clickatracknumber116attheleftof
ProgramSelect.Thiswillselectthetracksthatwillsound
duringplayback,orthetracksthatwillberecorded.
Track 01...16 (Track Number):
Program Select [Category: 000...127: Name]
SelectstheprogramthatwillbeusedbyeachMIDItrack.
(ProgramSelectonpage 36)
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Here,youcansetthepanofeachMIDItrack.
(Panonpage 37)
Volume [000...127]
Here,youcansetthevolumeofeachMIDItrack.
(Volumeonpage 37)
Arpeggiator Info
ThisshowsthearpeggiatorAandBsettingsusedbythe
screen.
Byclickingaparameternameetc.,youcanjumptothe
arpeggiatoreditingpage.
FX Info
Thisshowstheon/offstatusandeffecttypeoftheinsert
effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectusedbythesong.
Byclickinganeffectnameetc.,youcanjumptotheeffect
editingpage.
Track Mixer
UsethistomuteaMIDItrack.
(Play/Muteonpage 37)
Solo [On, Off]
TurnstheSolofunctionon/offforeachtrack.Onlytracks
withSoloOnwillsound.Othertrackswillbemuted.
Thesettingwillalternateon/offeachtimeyoupresstheSolo
button.
IfMIDItrackswhoseStatus(p.38)isBTH,EXT,or
EX2aremutedbyMuteorbytheSolofunction,note
on/offmessageswillnotbetransmittedontheMIDI
channelselectedforthosetracks.
Solosettingsarenotsavedwiththesong.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Here,youcansetthepanofeachMIDItrack.(Panon
page 37)
Volume [000...127]
Here,youcansetthevolumeofeachMIDItrack.(Vol
umeonpage 37)
Sequencer mode
164
Common
Hereyoucanadjustthesettingsforthearpeggiator,andselect
thefunctionsthatareassignedtoknobs14whentheREAL
TIMECONTROLSELECTbuttonhasselectedBmode.
Arpeggiator Assign
Arpeggiator Run A, B [Off, On]
Thisturnsarpeggiatoron/off.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRunonpage 46.
Arpeggiator Assign [Off, A, B]
AssignsarpeggiatorAorBtoeachtrack116.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeARPAssignonpage 37.
ArpeggiatorA(B)
withinthesong.Twoarpeggiatorscanrunsimultaneously.
Thisoffersavarietyofpossibilities,suchasapplyingsepa
ratearpeggiopatternstotwosoundsthathavebeen
assignedasakeyboardsplit,orusingvelocitytoswitch
betweentwoarpeggiopatterns.
YoucanalsousetherealtimecontrolsCmodeARPGATE
Setup
Pattern [P0...P4, 000...639: name]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Gate [000...100%, Step]
Swing [100...+100%]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
Here,youcanmakearpeggiatorsettingsforthecombina
tion.
Scan Zone
Thesesettingsspecifythenoteandvelocityrangesthatwill
triggerarpeggiatorsAandB.
Top Key [C1...G9]
Specifiestherangeofnotes(keys)thatwilltriggerarpeggia
torA/B.TopKeyspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Keyspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Specifiestherangeofvelocitiesthatwilltriggerarpeggiator
A/B.TopVelocityspecifiestheupperlimit,andBottom
Velocityspecifiesthelowerlimit.
Play Common
165
andoperateknobs14.
ForalistofAMSsources,pleaseseeRealtimeControl
Knob14Assignonpage 294.
Sequencer mode
166
Track Param (Track Parameters)
Scale
Thisspecifiesthescalethatthesongwilluse.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeScaleonpage 82.
Type (Songs Scale)
[Equal Temperament...User Octave Scale15]
Selectsthescale.
Key [C...B]
Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKey(ScaleKey)on
page 83.
Random [0...7]
Asthisvalueisincreased,anincreasinglyrandomdeviation
willbeaddedtothepitchateachnoteon.
IfStatus(p.38)isINT,thissettingwillaffectthepitch
producedbythemicroSTATION.IfStatusisEXT,this
settingwillaffectthenotenumberofthenotemessages
transmittedviaMIDI.
MIDI/OSC
HereyoucanmakeMIDIsettingsforeachtimbre.
Track 01...16 (Track Number)
MIDI
Status [Off, INT, BTH, EXT, EX2]
ThissetswhethertheTrackcontrolstheinternalsounds,or
externalMIDIdevices.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeStatusonpage 38.
MIDI Channel [01...16]
SpecifiestheMIDIchannelthattheMIDItrackwilluseto
transmitandreceivemusicaldata.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDICh.(MIDIChan
nel)onpage 39.
Bank Select MSB (When Status=EX2) [000...127]
Bank Select LSB (When Status=EX2) [000...127]
SpecifiesthebanknumberthatwillbetransmittedwhenStatus
issettoEX2.TheupperlineistheMSB,andthelowerlineisthe
LSB.ThissettinghasnoeffectifStatusisotherthanEX2.
OSC
TheseparametersspecifyhoweachMIDItrackwillbe
sounded.
Force OSC Mode [PRG, Poly, MN, LGT]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOSCModeonpage 39.
OSC Select [BTH, OS1, OS2]
SpecifieswhethertheMIDItracksprogramwillplayOSC1,
OSC2,orboth.
ForprogramswhoseOscillatorMode(p.82)isDouble,
thissettingletsyouspecifythatonlyOSC1orOSC2will
sound.
BTH(Both):OSC1and2willsoundasspecifiedbytheset
tingsoftheprogram.
OS1:OnlyOSC1willsound.
OS2:OnlyOSC2willsound.PCMprogramswillnotsound
ifOscillatorModeissettoSingleorDrums.
MakeportamentosettingsforeachMIDItrack.Formore
information,pleaseseePortamentoonpage 39.
Track Param (Track Parameters) Pitch/Other
167
Pitch/Other
Here,youcanmakepitch,scale,anddelaytimefromnote
onsettingsforeachtrack.
Pitch
Transpose [60...+00...+60]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinsemitonesteps.
12unitsequaloneoctave.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTransposeonpage 39.
Detune [1200...+0000... +1200]
AdjuststhepitchofeachMIDItrackinonecentunits.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDetuneonpage 39.
Bend Range [PRG, 24...+00...+24]
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangethatwilloccurwhen
thepitchbenderisoperated,insemitoneunits.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBendRangeonpage 39.
Delay
Thisspecifiesthetime(delay)fromwhentheMIDItracks1
16receiveanoteonmessageuntilthesoundbegins.
Delay Time [ms] [0000...5000ms, KeyOff]
Specifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntiltheMIDI
trackbeginstoproducesound,inunitsofms(1/1000thofa
second).ThissettingisavailableifMIDI/TempoSync.is
settoOff.
KeyOff:Thenotewillbeginsoundingatnoteoff.Inthis
case,thesoundwillnotdieawayifthesustainlevelofthe
programsampEGisotherthan0.Thissettingisusedwhen
creatingharpsichordsounds.
Normallyyouwillsetthisto0000.
Tempo Sync (MIDI/Tempo Sync) [Off, On]
Thetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrackproduces
soundwillbespecifiedinnotelengthunitsrelativetothe,
(Tempo).
On:SpecifythedelaytimeintermsofaBaseNoteand
TimesrelativetotheTempo.ForexampleifBaseNote=,,
Times=01,andTempo=60BPM,thedelaytimewillbe
equivalentto1000ms.
Off:ThedelaytimewillbesetbytheDelayTimesetting.
Base Note [, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ]
Note Times [01...32]
Itspecifiesthetime(delaytime)fromnoteonuntilthetrack
beginstoproducesound,intermsofanotevaluerelativeto
the ,(Tempo).
UseBaseNotetospecifythedesirednotevalue,anduse
Timestoextendthatnotevaluebythespecifiedmultiple.
ForexampleifyousetBaseNotetoaquarternote(,)and
Timesto02,thattrackwillsoundwithadelayofahalfnote
().Evenifyouchange,(Tempo),thedelaytimewill
alwaysbeahalfnote().Ifyouusetheseparametersto
specifyadelayofahalfnote().Inthiscase,aTempoof
60.00BPMwillproducea2000msdelay,andaTempoof
120.00BPMwillproducea1000msdelay.
Other
Here,youcanadjustthesettingsforthescaleforeachMIDI
track.
Use Prog Scale [Off, On]
MIDItrackcanusethescalethatisspecifiedbyScale
(p.82).
On:Thescalespecifiedbytheprogramwillbeused.
Off:ThescalespecifiedbyScalewillbeused.
Sequencer mode
168
Tone
Hereyoucanadjustthesoundoftheprogramforeach
MIDItrack.Theadjustmentswillnotaffecttheoriginalpro
grams,butwillbesavedforeachsong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAbouttheToneparame
tersonpage 149.
Filter/Amp
Cutoff [99...+99] (Rel, CC#74)
Resonance [99...+99] (Rel, CC#71)
Filter EG Int [99...+99] (Rel, CC#79)
Amp Vel Int [99...+99] (Rel)
SeeFilter/Amp:onpage 39.
Filter/Amp EG
Attack [99...+99] (Rel, CC#73)
Decay [99...+99] (Rel, CC#75)
Sustain [99...+99] (Rel, CC#70)
Release [99...+99] (Rel, CC#72)
SeeFilter/AmpEG:onpage 39.
Track Param (Track Parameters) MIDI Filter 1
169
MIDI Filter 1
thatwillbetransmittedandreceivedbyeachtrack.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIFilteronpage 22.
Program Change [Off, On]
After Touch [Off, On]
Damper [Off, On]
Portamento SW [Off, On]
JS+Y [Off, On]
JSY [Off, On]
Ribbon (CC#16) [Off, On]
Foot SW [Off, On]
Other CC [Off, On]
SeeMIDIFilter:onpage 40.
Sequencer mode
170
MIDI Filter 2
TheseareMIDIfiltersettingsfortheknobswhentheREAL
TIMECONTROLSELECTbuttonisusedtoselectRealtime
ControlAmodeorBmode.
UsetheCommonControllerspagetoassignthefunctions
thatknobs14willperformwhenRealtimeControlBmode
isselected.
sagesassignedtoknobs14whentheRealtimeControl
Amodeisselected.
sagesassignedtoknobs14whentheRealtimeControlB
modeisselected.
Key/Vel Zone (Keyboard/Velocity Zone) MIDI Filter 2
171
Key/Vel Zone (Keyboard/Velocity Zone)
Keyboard Zone
Here,youcanspecifythekeyzonesinwhichMIDItracks1
16willsound.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeKeyZone:onpage 40.
Top Key [C1...G9]
Top Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Bottom Slope [00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10,
12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48, 60, 72]
Key Zone Map
ThisareaindicatesthenoterangesinwhicheachMIDItrack
(116)willsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatetherangeofnotesthatwill
sound,andshowtheslopeportioninadifferentcolor.
Velocity Zone
Here,youcansettheTop/BottomVelocityparametersto
specifytherangeofvelocitiesthatwillbesoundedbyMIDI
tracks116,andTop/BottomSlopespecifytherangeover
whichthevolumewillbeadjusted.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeVelZone(Velocity
Zone):onpage 40.
track.
Top Slope [0...120]
Bottom Slope [0...120]
ity.
Specifiestheminimumvelocitythatwillbesoundedby
eachMIDItrack116.
Vel Zone Map
ThisareaindicatesthevelocityrangesinwhicheachMIDI
track(116)willsound.
Thedisplayuseslinestoindicatethevelocityofnotesthat
willsound,andshowtheslopeportioninadifferentcolor.
Sequencer mode
172
IFX (Insert Effect)
Inthispageyoucanadjustthesettingsfortheinserteffects.
Thesesettingsconsistmainlyofthefollowing.
Specifytheroutingforeachtrack.
Selecttheeffecttypeforinserteffects15,andeditthe
effectparameters.
Specifyon/offandchainsettingsforinserteffects15.
Adjustmixersettingsfollowingtheinserteffects.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIFX1,IFX2,IFX3,IFX4,
IFX5onpage 46.
IFX Routing
Thisareashowstheinserteffectrouting(BusSelect),the
nameoftheassignedeffect,theon/offstatus,chaining,and
theoutputbusthatfollowstheinserteffect.
Thetypeofinserteffect,theon/offstatus,andthechainset
tingscanbeeditedintheIFXSetuppage.
IFX1 [S00...S63, D00...D10]
IFX2 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX3 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX4 [S00...S61, D00...D09]
IFX5 [000...061]
SeeIFXRoutingonpage 129.
Routing
Specifiesthebuswheretheprogramoscillator(s)usedby
MIDItracks116willbesent.Youcanalsosetthesendlev
elstothemastereffectsfromthispage.
Bus Select [DKit, L/R, IFX1...5, Off]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforthetrackprogramsoscilla
tor(s).
SeeBus(BusSelect)onpage 155.
nel)onpage 25.
Send1 (MFX1) [000...127]
Send2 (MFX2) [000...127]
Foreachtrack,theseparameterssetthesendleveltomaster
effects1and2.SeeSend1onpage 19.
DrumKit IFX Patch
ThispatchestheBus(IFX/Output)settingsforeachkeyof
adrumkit,temporarilychangingtheinserteffectconnec
tiondestinations.SeeDrumKitPatchonpage 19.
173
IFX Setup
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1through
5,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthepostIFXmixer
settings.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIFXSetuponpage 155.
IFX1
Chain To [IFX2...IFX5]
Chain [Off, On]
Pan [L000...C064...R127]
Send1 [000...127]
Send2 [000...127]
Control Ch [Ch1...16, Global Channel, All Routed]
tocontroleffectdynamicmodulation(Dmod).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXCtrlBus(FXControl
Bus)onpage 25.
ininserteffect1.
Sequencer mode
174
IFX1
Here,youcansettheeffectparametersoftheinserteffect
youchoseintheIFXRouting.
IFX1 Parameters
IFX Parameters
Hereyoucanedittheeffectparametersfortheinserteffect.
ininserteffect1.
MFX/TFX (Master/Total Effect) MFX&TFX Routing
175
Inthispageyoucanadjustthesettingsforthemastereffects
andthetotaleffect.Thesesettingsconsistmainlyofthefol
lowing.
Specifytheroutingforthemastereffects.
Selecttheeffecttypeforthemastereffectsandthetotal
effect,andedittheeffectparameters.
Turneacheffecton/off.
EditthereturnleveltotheL/Rbusforthemastereffect
outputs.
MFX&TFX Routing
TheseparametersarethesameasinProgrammode.
MFX1, MFX2
Here,youcanselectthesettingsforthemastereffect1,2.
On/Off [Off, On]
MFX [S00...S87, D00...D13]
MFX2 [000...120]
Return1, Return2
Return 1 [000...127]
Return 2 [000...127]
TFX
TFX [00...61]
Master Volume
MONOandR.
Routing
Chain
Master FX Chain [Off, On]
Level [000...127]
SeeChainonpage 135.
Control Channel
TFX [1...16, Global Channel]
lation(Dmod)forthemasterandtotaleffect.
Ch01Ch16:ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillbeusedfor
control.
Sequencer mode
176
MFX1
forMFX1intheMFX/TFXRouting.
globalMIDIChannelChannel(p.184).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDmodList(Dynamic
ModulationSourceList)onpage 292.
MFX1 Parameters
page 205.
MFX2
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheMFX/TFXRouting.
TFX
UTILITY Command TFX
177
UTILITY Command
themenuthatappears.
Write SEQ
Thiscommandsavestheeditedsong.Youcanusethistodo
thefollowingthings:
SavethechangesyouvemadeinmicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditor.
Renamethesong.
Copythesongtoadifferentnumber.
New Name [characters]
Specifythesongname.
Choose Destination [S000...127: name]
Specifythesavedestinationforthesong.
ChooseDestinationonlyallowsyoutoselectan
existingsongasthesavedestination.Ifyouwantto
saveanewsong,clicktheBROWSEbutton,choosethe
desirednumberinthesonglistthatappears,createa
newsong,andsavethatnumber.
Rename Song
Here,youcanrenametheselectedsong.Anameofupto24
characterscanbeinput.
Delete Song
Thiscommanddeletesthecurrentlyselectedsong.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDelete(DeleteSong)on
page 48.
DeleteSongisavailableontheQuick,Common,Track
Param,KeyZone/VelZonepages.
Copy From Song
Thiscommandcopiesallofthesettingdataandmusical
datafromthespecifiedsongtothesongthatscurrently
selected.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDelete(DeleteSong)on
page 48.
CopyFromSongisavailableontheQuick,Common,Track
GM Initialize
ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystemOnmessagetothe
Sequencermode,resettingalltrackstotheGMsettings.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeon
page 49.
GMInitializeisavailableontheQuick,Common,Track
Copy From Combi
(Copy from Combination)
Thiscommandcopiestheparametersofthespecifiedcom
binationtothesettingdataofthesongthatscurrently
selected.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyCombi(Copyfrom
Combination)onpage 50.
CopyFromCombiisavailableontheQuick,Common,
TrackParam,KeyZone/VelZonepages.
Copy from Program
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromtheprogramyouspec
ifytothesongthatscurrentlyselected.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyProg(Copyfrom
Program)onpage 51.
CopyFromProgramisavailableontheQuick,Common,
TrackParam,KeyZone/VelZonepages.
Copy Arpeggiator
Thiscommandcanbeusedtocopyarpeggiosettingsfrom
anotherlocationtothecurrentprogram.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyARPonpage 48.
CopyArpeggiatorisavailableontheARPtaboftheQuick
pageandCommonpage.
Copy Insert Effect
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyIFXonpage 14.
Swap Insert Effect
effects.
swapped.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSwapIFXonpage 14.
Copy MFX/TFX
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCopyMFX/TFXon
page 14.
Load
LoadsmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditordatathatwas
previouslysavedonthecomputer.
Sequencer mode
178
Save
AllData(.MSTall):Alldata(program,combination,song
settings,globalsettings).
AllSEQ(.MSTasq):Allsongsettingsdata.
SEQ(MSTsq):Asongsettingsdatathatscurrentlyselected.
Receive All
ReceivesalldatafromthemicroSTATIONdataintotheedi
tor.
isexcepted.
Transmit All
TransmitsalldatainthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEdi
tortothemicroSTATIONandwritesitintointernalmem
ory.
Receive SEQ
ReceivethecorrespondingsongdatafromthemicroSTA
TIONintothemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
Transmit SEQ
TransmitthecorrespondingsongdatafromthemicroSTA
writesit.
Receive 1 SEQ
ReceivetherespectivesongdatafromthemicroSTATION
Transmit 1 SEQ
SeeTransmitCurrentProgonpage 138.
Import
SeeImportonpage 138.
Export
SeeExportonpage 138.
All Sound Off
sometimeoccurredwhileoperatingthehostsfunctions.If
thissymptomoccurs,pleaseexecutethiscommand.
179
Global mode
ByconnectingthemicroSTATIONtoyourcomputerand
usingmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugIneditor,youllbeable
toeditallofthemicroSTATIONsparameters.
Thischapterexplainstheparametersthatyoucanviewand
editinmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.Fordetailson
howtoselectaparameterandmodifyitsvalue,refertothe
microSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorUsersGuide
includedontheaccessarydisc.
ForsomeoftheparametersshowninmicroSTATION
Editor/PlugInEditor,thesettingofthemicroSTA
TIONitselfisdisplayedingray,andcannotbeeditedin
microSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
Page structure
SoftwareSetup
StartupsettingsformicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditor.
Basic/Controllers
Basicoverallsettings.(p.182)
Controllersettingssuchasthepedals
connectedtotherearpanel.(p.183)
CC#assignmentsforArpeggiocontrollers.
(p.183)
MIDI
MIDIsettingsforthisinstrument.(p.184)
ExternalModesettings.(p.185)
UserScales
Scalesettingscreatedbytheuser.Youcan
specify4typesofoctavescale,andonefull
rangescale.(p.186)
Category
Edittabcategorynamesforprogramsand
combinations.(p.187)
DrumKit Editdrumkits.(p.188)
ArpeggioPattern CreatingArpeggiopattern.(p.195)
Global mode
180
Panel
ThemicroSTATIONEditorspanelletsyoudothefollowing
things.
Selectprogramsandadjustthetempo.
editineachmode.
Turnthearpeggiatoron/offandarpeggiatorlatchon/off.
Mode Select, UTILITY
UTILITY button
Display
Displayshowsthecontentsofthemodeyouhadselected
beforeenteringGlobalmode.
Tempo [040.00...300.00]
Thisindicatesthetempo.
WheneditingthearpeggiopatternintheArpeggioPattern
page,youcanuseRealtimeControlCmodeknob4toadjust
theplaybacktempo.
Realtime Controls
Select button [A, B, C]
Thesebuttonsselecttherealtimecontrolmode.
InGlobalmode,selectingAmodeorBmodeandoperating
theknobswillnotdoanything.OnlyCmodewillbeavail
ablewheneditingthearpeggiopatternintheArpeggioPat
ternpage.
Theseknobscontrolthefunctionsthatareassignedforeach
RealtimeControlmode.
InGlobalmode,onlyRealtimeControlCmodeisavailable
wheneditingthearpeggiopatternintheArpeggioPattern
page.
Arpeggiator
InGlobalmode,thearpeggiatorbuttonsareavailableonly
wheneditinganarpeggiopattern.
Software Setup Arpeggiator
181
Software Setup
GlobalmodeSoftwareSetupletsyouspecifythedefaultset
tingsthatthemicroSTATIONEditorwillusewhenitstarts
up.ThissettingissavedwhenyouusetheUTILITYcom
mandSaveasDefault,andwillberememberedthenext
timeyoustartup.
Total Recall & Data Sync Settings
Hereyoucanspecifytheeditordatathatwillbesavedand
loadedaspartofthesongdatabyyourDAWsoftware.This
settingletsyousaveonlythedatayouneed.Whenthe
microSTATIONEditorstartsup,thetypesofdatathat
youvecheckedherewillalsobeloadedautomaticallyfrom
themicroSTATIONthatsconnectedtoyourcomputer.(In
otherwords,thisdatawillbesynchronized.)Sinceadata
dumprequiresacertainamountoftime,youmaywishto
shortenthestartuptimebyusingtheLoadDataFileAuto
maticallyfunctioninsteadofthisfunction,orbyusingthe
UTILITYcommandLoadtoloadapreviouslysaveddata
fileintothemicroSTATIONEditor.
Auto Load File
Load data file automatically at starting up
WhenthemicroSTATIONEditorstartsup,thedatafilethat
youspecifyherewillautomaticallybeloadedintotheedi
tor.Afterthisprocessiscompleted,thedatayoucheckedin
TotalRecall&DataSyncSettingwillbeloadedviadata
dump.
Local Control
Auto Local Control
ThissettingautomaticallysetsthemicroSTATIONsLocal
Controlsettingtotheappropriatestatewhenyoustartup
theeditor.Werecommendthatyounormallyleavethis
parameteron.ThemicroSTATIONsLocalControlsetting
willberesettoitsoriginalstatewhenyouclosetheeditor.
MIDI Settings
HereyoucanadjustthesettingsforMIDIconnections
betweenthemicroSTATIONEditorandthemicroSTATION.
MIDI IN Port / MIDI OUT Port
ThisselectstheconnectionportforthemicroSTATIONand
themicroSTATIONEditor.Thenameofthecurrentlycon
nectedMIDIportisshown.Youwontneedtochangethis
settingifthemicroSTATIONandthemicroSTATIONEditor
areconnectedcorrectly,sincethemicroSTATIONEditorwill
searchforthemicroSTATIONwhenitstartsup,andwill
specifytheMIDIportautomatically.
Global mode
182
Basic/Controllers
SettingsintheBasic/ControllersCategorypagesare
rememberedwhilethemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugIn
Editorisrunning,butwillreturntothesettingspriorto
startupwhenyouclosethemicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditor.ByclickingtheDUMPbuttonlocatedin
theupperrightofeachGlobalmodepage,thesettings
atthattimewillbesavedonthemicroSTATIONitself.
Basic Setup
Here,youcanadjustmastertunesettings,on/offsettingsfor
thearpeggiator,bankmapsettings,andmemoryprotect.
TheparametersisthesameasformicroSTATIONQuick
parameters.
Basic
Master Tune
[50cent (427.47Hz)...+50cent (452.89Hz)]
ThisadjuststheoveralltuningoftheentiremicroSTATION
inonecentunits(semitone=100cents),overarangeof50
cents.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMTune(MasterTune)on
page 57.
Key Transpose [12...+00...+12]
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitonestepsovera1octave
range.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTransposeonpage 57.
Velocity Curve [1...8]
Thisspecifiesthewaythatthevolumeand/ortonewill
changeinresponsetovariationsinkeyboardplaying
dynamics(velocity).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeVelCurve(Velocity
Curve)onpage 57.
After Touch Curve (MIDI IN) [1...8]
Thisspecifiesthewaythatincomingaftertouchdatawill
affectthevolumeortonewhenConvertPosition(p.184)is
settoPostMIDI.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeATCurve(Aftertouch
Curve)onpage 59.
ARP
All ARP Off [Off, On]
Allarpeggiatorwillbeoff.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAllARPonpage 59.
Load ARP when changing: Program [Off, On]
Whenyouswitchprograms,thearpeggiatorsettingsstored
inthatprogramwillbeused.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWithProgonpage 59.
Load ARP when changing: Combination [Off, On]
Whenyouswitchcombinations,thearpeggiatorsettings
storedinthatcombinationwillbeused.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWithCombionpage 59.
System Preference
Bank Map [KORG, GM(2)]
Thisspecifiesthemappingofprogramsandcombinations
relativetoBankSelectcontrolchangemessages(CC#0
upperbyteandCC#32lowerbyte).
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBankMaponpage 59.
ScrollText [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherprogramnames,combinationnames,
andsongnameswillbescrollediftheycontainalarger
numberofcharactersthancanbeshowninthedisplay.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInitialSongonpage 60.
Basic/Controllers Arpeggiator
183
Initial Song
[P00...P15, U00...U15: name, Initialized Song]
Thisselectsthetemplatesongthatwillbeloadedasthe
defaultsongsettingsforSequencermodewhenthepoweris
turnedon.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeInitialSongonpage 60.
Memory Protect
Program [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalprogrammemory.
On:Internalprogrammemorywillbeprotected,andthe
Writingaprogram
Loadingpreloadedprogramdata
Loadingprogramdatafrommedia
ReceivingprogramdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernalprogrammemory.
Combination [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalcombinationmemory.
On:Internalcombinationmemorywillbeprotected,and
thefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Writingacombination
Loadingpreloadedcombinationdata
Loadingcombinationdatafrommedia
ReceivingcombinationdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernalcombinationmemory.
Song [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternalsongmemory.
However,whenthepoweristurnedoff,thesongdatain
songmemorywillbelostregardlessofthissetting.
On:Internalsongmemorywillbeprotected,andthefollow
ingwriteoperationscannotbeperformed.
Recordingtothesequencer
Loadingpreloadedsongdata
Loadingsongdatafrommedia
ReceivingsongdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernalsongmemory.
Drum Kit [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaldrumkitmemory.
On:Internaldrumkitmemorywillbeprotected,andthe
Writingadrumkit
Loadingpreloadeddrumkitdata
Loadingdrumkitdatafrommedia
ReceivingdrumkitdataviaMIDIdatadump
Off:Datacanbewrittentointernaldrumkitmemory.
ARP User Pattern [Off, On]
Thissettingprotectstheinternaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
On:Internaluserarpeggiopatternmemorywillbepro
tected,andthefollowingwriteoperationscannotbeper
formed.
Writingauserarpeggiopattern
Loadingpreloadarpeggiopatterndata
Loadinguserarpeggiopatterndatafrommedia
ReceivinguserarpeggiopatterndataviaMIDIdatadump
Off):Datacanbewrittentointernaluserarpeggiopattern
memory.
Controllers
Foot Switch & Pedal / Damper
Type [Damper, Switch, Pedal]
Thisspecifiesthetypeoftheswitchorpedalthatiscon
Foot Switch function [List of Foot Switch Assign]
ThisisshownifTypeissettoSwitch.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSw(FootSwitchfunc
tion)onpage 65.
Foot Pedal function [List of Foot Pedal Assign]
ThisisshownifTypeissettoPedal.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePdl(FootPedalfunc
tion)onpage 65.
Damper/Switch Polarity [() KORG Standard, (+)]
Setthistomatchthepolarityofthedamperpedalorpedal
switchthatsconnectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePolarityonpage 65.
ARP Controllers
Here,youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothearpeg
giatorbuttonsandknobs14whenrealtimecontrolsC
modeisselected.
SW ARP ON/OFF [Off, 000...119]
SW LATCH [Off, 000...119]
Knob1 GATE [Off, 000...119]
Knob2 ARP VELOCITY [Off, 000...119]
Knob3 ARP SWING [Off, 000...119]
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeARPRTCCC#on
page 65.
Global mode
184
MIDI
Here,youcanadjustMIDIrelatedsettingsthataffectthe
entiremicroSTATION.
TheparametersisthesameasformicroSTATIONQuick
parameters.(p.184)
MIDI
Basic
MIDI Channel (Global MIDI Channel) [1...16]
SetstheglobalMIDIchannel.TheglobalMIDIchannelis
usedinthefollowingcases.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeChannel(GlobalMIDI
Channel)onpage 60.
Local Control On [Off, On]
Setsthelocalcontrolon.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeLocalCtrl(LocalCon
trol)onpage 61.
Convert Position [PreMIDI, PostMIDI]
ThissettingspecifiesthelocationwheretheTransposeand
VelocityCurvesettingswillbeapplied.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeConvt(ConvertPosi
tion)onpage 61.
Note Receive [All, Even, Odd]
Thissettingspecifieswhetherevennumbered,oddnum
bered,orallnotenumberswillbesoundedwhennotedata
isreceivedfromthemicroSTATIONskeyboardorfroman
externalMIDIdevice.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeNoteRecv(Note
Receive)onpage 61.
MIDI Clock
MIDI Clock
[Internal, External MIDI, External USB, Auto]
UsethissettingtosynchronizethemicroSTATIONsarpeg
giatorandinternalsequencerwithanexternalMIDIdevice
(e.g.,sequencerorrhythmmachine)andcomputer.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeClock(MIDIClock
Source)onpage 62.
Receive Ext. Realtime Commands [Off, On]
TheaboveCommonmessages(includingSongSelect)and
Realtimemessageswillbereceived.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeRcvExtRTC(Receive
Ext.RealtimeCommandClock)onpage 62.
SEQ Mode
Track MIDI Out
[for Master, for External Sequencer]
ThissettingspecifieswhatwillbetransmittedviaMIDI
whenyouswitchsongsinSequencermode.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTrk(TrackMIDIOut)on
page 62.
Param. MIDI Out
[Control Change, SysEx-Param Change]
ThissettingspecifieswhethercontrolchangesorSystem
Exclusivemessageswillbetransmittedwhenyouedita
parameterinSequencermode.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeParam(ParameterMIDI
Out)onpage 62.
MIDI External
185
MIDI Out Routing
ARP Controllers
[Control Change, SysEx-Param Change]
ThisspecifiestheMIDImessagesthatwillbetransmitted
whenyouoperatetheARPON/OFFbutton,ARPLATCH
button,orwhenyouoperateknobs14withRealtimecon
trolsCmodeselected.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIOutonpage 63.
MIDI Filter:
Enable Program Change [Off, On]
Programchangeswillbetransmittedandreceived.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgChg(EnablePro
gramChange)onpage 63.
Bank Change [Off, On]
TheBankSelectcontrolchangemessagewillbetransmitted
togetherwithprogramchangemessages.Thisisvalidwhen
ProgChgisturnedon.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeBankChg(EnableBank
Change)onpage 63.
Combination Change [Off, On]
WheninCOMBIPLAY,anincomingprogramchangemes
sageontheglobalMIDIchannelsetbyChannel(p.60)
willswitchcombinations.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCombiChg(EnableCom
binationChange)onpage 63.
Enable After Touch [Off, On]
MIDIaftertouchmessageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeAfterTouch(EnableAfter
touch)onpage 63.
Enable Control Change [Off, On]
Controlchangemessageswillbetransmittedandreceived.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCtrlChg(EnableControl
Change)onpage 63.
Enable Exclusive [Off, On]
Systemexclusivedatawillbetransmittedandreceived.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSysEx(EnableSystem
Exclusive)onpage 63.
External
Theassignmentsyoumakeinthisexternalsetupwilldeter
minetheMIDIcontrollerandMIDIchannelthatistransmit
tedbyeachknobwhenRealtimecontrolsEXTERNALis
selected.
ExternalsetupnamescanbeassignedonlybyusingmicroS
TATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.UsetheRenameExternal
Setuputilitytoassignaname.
External
Setup (External Mode Setup) [000...127: name]
ThisselectstheExternalSetuptoedit.Youcanassigna
nametoeachsetup.
Knob 1...4:
MIDI Channel [Ch01...16, Gch]
ThissetstheMIDIChannelfortheknob.Eachcansendona
differentchannel,ifdesired.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeChannelonpage 64.
CC# [Off, 000...119]
ThissetstheMIDICCsentbytheknob.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeCC#onpage 64.
Global mode
186
User Scale
Here,youcanselectthesettingsforfourdifferentUser
OctaveScalesandoneUserAllNotesScale.
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeselectedfromthefol
lowingpages.
Prog:BasicScale
Combi:TimbreParamScale
Seq:TrackParamScale
Ifyouwanttokeeptheuserscaleyouvespecified,you
mustsaveit.EitherusetheutilitycommandWrite
GlobalSetting.orclicktheDUMPbuttonlocatedin
theupperright.
User Octave Scale
User Octave Scale [User Octave Scale 00...03]
SelectstheUserOctaveScalethatyouwanttoedit.
Tune [99...+99]
Adjustspitchsettingsforeachnoteintheoctave.
Whenyouadjustthepitchofeachnoteintheoctave(CB)
inonecentsteps,yoursettingswillbeappliedtoalloctaves.
Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
ByusingtheutilitycommandCopyScale,youcancopyset
tingsfromapresetscale(otherthanStretch)orfromanother
userscale.
User All Notes Scale
Tune [99...+99]
Makesindependentpitchsettingsforeachofthe128notes.
Adjustthepitchofeachofthe128notes(C1G9)inone
centsteps.Thisadjustmentisrelativetoequaltemperament.
Asettingof99lowersthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
belownormalpitch.
Asettingof+99raisesthepitchapproximatelyasemitone
abovenormalpitch.
Usethehorizontalscrollbartomovetothekeyrangethat
youwanttoset,andselectthekeythatyouwanttospecify.
ByusingtheutilitycommandCopyScale,youcancopyset
tingsfromapresetscale(includingStretch)oranotheruser
scale.
Category External
187
Category
l
Programs,andCombinationsareorganizedintosubcatego
ries.
YoucanassignaProgramorCombinationtoacategoryand
subcategoryduringtheutilitycommandWriteprocess.
Tosavechangestosubcategorynames,youllneedto
writetheGlobalsettings.Todoso,usetheutilitycom
mandWriteGlobalSetting.
Themaincategorycannotbeedited,fixed.
Sub-Category Name
Mode:
Mode [Program, Combination]
Selectthemodethatincludesthecategoryyouwanttospec
ify.
Main Category [00...17]
Selectthemaincategorythatincludesthesubcategory
whosenameyouwanttospecify.
Sub Category [00...07]
Selectasubcategory,andspecifyitsname.Youcanspecify
eightsubcategoriesforeachcategory.
Global mode
188
Drum Kit
Here,youcancreatedrumkitsbyassigningadruminstru
ment(drumsample)toeachkey.
DrumkitscanbecreatedonlybyusingmicroSTATIONEdi
tor/PlugInEditor.
Adrumkityoueditherecanbeusedinthesamewayasa
multisampleoscillator(whenOscillatorModeisSingleor
Double)andprocessedthroughthefilter,amp,andeffects
etc.Todothis,settheOscillatorModetoDrumsinthe
microSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorProgrammode:Basic
page,andselectingthedrumkitasanoscillatorintheOSC/
PitchOSC1Multisamplepage.
Whenyouwishtoeditadrumkit,enterProgrammode,
selectaprogramthatusesadrumkit(i.e.,whoseOscillator
ModeisDrums),andthenmovetothispage.Aprogram
thatusesadrumkitwillalreadyhavefilter,amp,andeffect
settingsetc.suitablefordrumsounds.
YoumustsetOctave(p.80)to+0[8].Withanysetting
otherthan+0[8],thekeylocationsanddrumsoundswill
notcorrespondcorrectly.
EvenifaprogramwithanOscillatorModeofSingleor
DoubleisselectedinProgrammode,theprogramwill
soundusingitsownfilterandampsettingsetc.Effectswill
soundaccordingtothesettingsoftheprogramyouselected.
UseWriteDrumKitstosaveanediteddrumkitinto
themicroSTATIONitself.IfyoupoweroffthemicroS
TATIONbeforesaving,theediteddrumkitcannotbe
recovered.Whenyousave,alldrumkitswillbesaved.
Whenyoueditadrumkit,allprogramsthatusethat
drumkitwillbeaffected.
TurnonSysExintothemicroSTATIONitself.
Fordetailedstepbystepinstructionsoncreatingdrumkits,
pleaseseeCreatingaDrumKitonpage 192.
Drum Kit
Here,youcanselectadrumkitandspecifyHighLow
(Drumsample14)asthedrumsamplesassignedtoeach
key.Here,youcanalsoeditdrumsampleparametersfor
eachDS.
Drum Kit [00(INT)...47(USER)]
Selectsthedrumkitthatyouwishtoedit.
Note:Ifyouwanttorenamethedrumkit,usetheutility
commandRenameDrumkit.
Key [C1...G9]
Selectsthekeywherethedrumsample(anditssettings)
willbeassigned.
UsetheVALUEcontrollertospecifythekey.IfKeyChase
ischecked,youcanalsoselectthekeybyholdingdownthe
KEYbuttonandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.Youcan
assignfourdrumsamples(DS1,2,3,4)toeachkey,and
switchbetweenthembyvelocity.
IfyouturnAssignOn,thekeyselectedherewillapplyfor
thefollowingdrumsampleparameters,velocitysettings,
VoiceAssignMode,andMixerparameters.
Assign [Off, On]
On:ThedrumsamplesassignedbyHighLowwillsound.
NormallyyoullchoosetheOnsetting.
Off:Theassigneddrumsampleswillnotbeused;instead,
thedrumsamplesofthekeytotherightwillsound,and
theirpitchwillbeasemitonelowerthanthekeytotheright.
ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttoplaydrumsamplesat
differentpitches.
No. (Bank) Contents
00(INT)...26(INT) Preloadeddrumkits
27(USER)...47(USER) Userdrumkits
Drum Kit Sample Param
189
High Sample:
Specifythefirstdrumsample.
On/Off [Off, On]
On:CheckthisifyouwanttouseHigh.Theselecteddrum
samplewillsound.
Off:DS1(High)willnotbeused.Thedrumsamplewillnot
sound.
Normally,youwillstartbyusingDS1(beforeusingDS14).
Ifyoudontwanttoswitchdrumsamplesbyvelocity,turn
ononlyDS1.Ifyoureusingmultiplevelocityswitched
drumsamples,adjustthesettingsasfollows.
Onevelocityzone
DS1:On,DS2:Off,DS3:Off,DS4:Off
Twovelocityzones
DS1:On,DS2:On,DS3:Off,DS4:Off
Threevelocityzones
DS1:On,DS2:On,DS3:On,DS4:Off
Fourvelocityzones
DS1:On,DS2:On,DS3:On,DS4:On
Bank [Mono, Stereo]
Drumsample Select
[List of installed Drumsample]
SpecifytheDS1drumsamplebybankanddrumsample
number.
BankselectseitherMonoorStereodrumsamples.However,
stereodrumsampleswillusetwiceasmanyvoicesasmono
drumsamples.
Mono:Monauraldrumsamples.
Stereo:Stereodrumsamples.
YoucanclickDrumsampleSelecttoopenthedrumsam
plelist,andchooseadrumsamplefromthelist.
YoucanalsoclicktheCategorybutton,specifyacategory
fromthemenuthatappears,andchooseadrumsample
fromthatcategory.
Itisnotpossibletoeditthecategorynamesofdrum
samples,ortoreassignthecategory.
IfyouchooseBankMono:
Monodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.TheLchannelorR
channelofthestereodrumsamplesselectableviaBank:Ste
reocanalsobeselectedasmonodrumsamples.Inthese
cases,LorRisshownfollowingthedrumsampleofthe
samename.
IfyouchooseBankStereo:
Onlystereodrumsampleswillbedisplayed.
Mid High Sample:
Mid Low Sample:
Low Sample:
velocityzones.
Sample Param
Hereyoucanseteachdrumsamplessampleparameters
(transpose,tune,attack,decay,filtercutoff,resonance
amount)andvelocityzone.Thesampleparametersettings
areaddedtothesettingsoftheprogram.
High Sample
Hereyoucaneditthesampleparametersandvelocityzone
forthefirstdrumsample(High).
Level [99...+99]
Specifiesthevolume.
Keysforwhichavalueof+99isspecifiedwillsoundata
volumetwiceashighastheampleveloftheprogramwhich
usesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof0isspecified
willsoundatthevolumeoftheampleveloftheprogram
whichusesthatdrumkit.Keysforwhichavalueof99is
specifiedwillnotsound.
Start Offset [Off, 1st...8th]
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthebeginning,
drumsamplescanhaveupto8differentpreprogrammed
alternatestartingpoints.However,youcantselectdrum
samplesforwhichstartandoffsetarenotspecified.
Withdrumsamples,theStartOffsetspecifieswhetherto
usethenormalstartpoint(Off),ortouseoneofthealter
natestartpoints(1st8th).
Somedrumsamplesmayhavefewerthan8prepro
grammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlytheavailablepointscan
beselected.
Rev. (Reverse) [Off, On]
Thisletsyouplaytheselecteddrumsamplebackwards,
withoutlooping.However,somepresetdrumsamplescan
notbereverseplayed,andconsequently,theycannotbe
selected.
On:Thedrumsamplewillplaybackinreverse.
Thelocationatwhichreverseplaybackstartsandendsis
alreadyspecifiedforeachdrumsample.
Off:Thedrumsamplewillplaybacknormally.
Adjuststhepitchinsemitonesteps.+12isoneoctaveup,
and12isoneoctavedown.
Tune [99...+99]
Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1octave.A
centis1/100ofasemitone.
Cutoff [64...+63]
Adjustthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.Thecutofffre
quencyforeachkeyanddrumsampleisdeterminedby
addingthisvaluetothefilterFrequency(p.100)ofthe
programthatusesthisdrumkit.
Resonance [64...+63]
Thisadjuststhefilterresonance.Thisoffsetvalueforeach
keyanddrumsampleisappliedtothefilterResonance
Level(p.101)oftheprogramsthatusethisdrumkit.
Attack [64...+63]
Adjuststheattacktimeofthevolume(Amplifier).The
attacktimeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvalue
totheampEGAttackTimeoftheprogramthatusesthis
drumkit.
Global mode
190
Decay [64...+63]
Adjuststhedecaytimeofthevolume(Amplifier).Thedecay
timeforeachkeyisdeterminedbyaddingthisvaluetothe
ampEGDecayTimeoftheprogramthatusesthisdrumkit.
Bottom Vel. [1...127]
Thissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichthedrumsamplewill
sound.HighsBottomVel.canbeequalto,butnotlower
than,thanthatofMidHigh.
Forexampletocreateasimplesetupthatusesonlyone
drumsample,specifytheHighsettings,andthensetBot
tomVel.to1andXFadeRangetooff.
XFade Range [Off, 1...127]
ThisspecifiesthevelocityrangestartingatBottomVel.
overwhichHighwillfadeoutandMidHighwillfadein.
Forinstance,iftheBottomVel.issetto64,andtheXFad
Rangeissetto20,MidHighwillstarttofadeinatveloci
tiesof84andbelow.
WhenvelocitiesarewithintheXFadRange,theOscillator
willusetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasitwouldnormally.
Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
XFade Curve [Linear, Power, Layer]
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linand
Pwr(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetunethewaythat
thetwodrumsamplesmixtogether;oneortheothermay
bemoreappropriateforagivenpairofdrumsamples.Lyr
(Layer),truetoitsname,letsyoulayerthetwodrumsam
plestogetherwithoutanycrossfading.
Lin(Linear)meansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%
oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Some
times,thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;ifso,try
usingPwr(Power)instead.
Pwr(Power),shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwo
sampleswilleachbeataround70%oftheirfullvolumein
themiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,thismaycreatea
bumpinthevolumelevel,inwhichcaseyoumighttry
selectingLin(Linear)instead.
Lyr(Layer)meansthatthetwodrumsampleswillbelay
eredtogether,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe
crossfade.
Crossfade Curves
ThegraphicintheVelocitySplitpageshowsthezoneand
crossfadesettings.
Mid High Sample, Mid Low Sample,
Low Sample
Hereyoucaneditthesampleparametersforthesecond,
third,andfourthdrumsamples.RefertoHighSample.
TheMidHighandMidLowvelocityzonesettingsarethe
sameasforHigh.ThesettingsforLowaresimilartoHigh,
withtheexceptionthatLowdoesnothaveBottomVel.,
XFadeRange,andXFadeCurveparameters.Bottom
Vel.isalwaysfixedat1.
Bottom
Velocity
Xfade
Range/Curve
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Volume
Volume
Drum Kit Voice/Mixer
191
Voice/Mixer
Specifythevoiceassign,pan,andeffectroutingetc.foreach
keyofthedrumkit.
Voice Assign Mode
Single Trigger [Off, On]
On:Evenwhenthesamekey(note)isplayedrepeatedly,the
previousnotewillbehaltedbeforethenewnoteisbegun,
sothatthenoteswillnotoverlap.Normallyyouwillleave
thisOff.
Exclusive Group [Off, 001...127]
001127:Thisallowsyoutoassignkeystoanyof127
groups.Keysassignedtothesamegroupwillbetreatedasa
singlegroup,andwillbeplayedmonophonicallywithlast
notepriority.Forexampleyoumightassignclosedand
openhihatsoundstothesamegroupsothattwoormore
hihatsoundscannotsoundsimultaneously.
Off:Keyswillnotbegrouped.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
Enable Note On Recv [Off, On]
On:Noteonmessageswillbereceived.Normallyyouwill
Onthis,butyoucanOffitifyoudonotwantspecificnotes
tosound.
Enable Note Off Recv [Off, On]
On:Noteoffmessageswillbereceived.Normallyyouwill
uncheckthis.ThisparameterisvalidwhenHold(p.83)is
On(HoldOn).Inthecaseofadrumprogram,youwillnor
mallyselectHoldOn.InthiscaseifEnableNoteOff
ReceiveisOn,noteoffmessageswillbereceived,andthe
soundwillstop(thereleasesegmentoftheEGwillbegin)
whenthekeyisreleased.
Mixer
InProgrammode,Drumkitswillsoundusingtheset
tingsoftheselectedprogram.PanisvalidifUse
DKitSetting(p.111)isOn.Bus(IFX/Output),FX
ControlBus,andSend1/2arevalidifUseDKitSet
ting(p.130)ischecked.Beawarethatwhileeditinga
drumkit,theeditedresultswillnotbereflectedunless
thesesettingshavebeenmade.
Pan [RND, L001...C064...R127]
Specifiesthepanningforeachkey.
L001placesthesoundatfarleft,andR127placesthesignal
atfarright.WithasettingofRandom,thedrumsamplewill
bepannedrandomlyateachnoteon.
Bus (IFX/Output) [L/R, IFX 1...IFX5, Off]
Foreachkey,specifythebuswherethesoundwillbesent.
Forexample,youmightsendSnaresoundstoIFX1andKick
soundstoIFX2toapplyseparateinserteffects,andsendthe
remainingsoundstoL/Rwithoutapplyinginserteffects.
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)set
tings.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Global mode
192
Foreachkey,youcanselectwhetherthesignalwillbesent
toFXControlbus(stereotwochannel)FXCtrl1or2.
Normallyyouwillleavethisoff,butyoucanusethissetting
ifyouwanttocontrolaneffectbyplayingaspecifickey.
Youcanusethiswiththefollowingeffects:
Vocoders:
D09:Vocoder
Compressorandgatetypeeffects:
S03:St.Limitr
S06:St.Gate
Example: Limiter (Combination)
Compressortypeeffectsusetheleveloftheaudioinputto
controlthelevelgainoftheaudiooutput.
Fortheseeffects,theenvelopedetectionsourcecanbeeither
theaudioinputitself(theusualmethod)orFXControlBus
1or2.
Theexampleshowninthediagramisofasplitcombination
inwhichtheleveloftimbre1(Pad,playedfromthelowkey
range)isbeingcontrolledbytimbre2(Guitar,withIFX2
OD/Wahinserted,playedfromthehighkeyrange).Youcan
adjustthesettingssothatwhenyouplaytheguitarsound,
thevolumeofthepadwilldecreaseautomatically.Sendthe
postIFX2signalviaFXControlBustoFXCtrl1,andsetthe
IFX1:St.LimiterEnvelopeSourceparametertoFXControl1.
Send1 (to MFX1) [000...127]
Send2 (to MFX2) [000...127]
Foreachkey,specifythesendlevelstomastereffects1and
2.
ThesesettingsarevalidwhenBus(IFX/Output)issettoL/
RorOff.IfBus(IFX/Output)issettoIFX1IFX5,thesend
leveltomastereffects1and2willbedeterminedbythePro
gram,Combination,orSequencermodeFXRoutingpage
parametersSend1andSend2whicharelocatedafterthe
soundpassesthroughIFX1IFX5.
Creating a drum kit
UsemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditorifyouwantto
createoreditadrumkit.
Itsnotpossibletocreateoreditadrumkitonthe
microSTATIONitself.
Before you start editing
Drum Program selection
DrumKitsareeditedinGlobalmode.Whileyourein
Globalmode,youllplaythekitthatyoureeditingasifyou
wereplayingitfromwithintheProgram,Combination,or
SongwhichwasselectedbeforeyouenteredGlobalmode.
So,beforeyouenterGlobalmode,itsbesttoselectaPro
gramwhichisalreadysetupfordrums,withtheappropri
ateEGsettings,effects,andsoon.JustusetheProgram
Categoryselect,andchooseadrumProgram.
OSC1/Basic Octave setting
TheOscillatorsOctavesettingneedstobe+0[8].AllDrum
KitProgramsshouldhavethissettingalready.Ifyoure
unsure,youcancheckthisyourself:
1. AccessthePROGOSC/PitchOSC1Commonpage.
2. CheckthattheOctaveparameter(nearthetopofthe
page)issetto+0[8].
Withasettingotherthan+0[8],therelationshipbetween
thekeysandtheDrumKitsoundmapwillbeincorrect.
Make sure that Memory Protect is disabled
Beforeyoustartediting,gototheGlobal:Basic/Controllers
page,andlookintheMemoryProtectsection.Makesure
thatDrumKitisnotchecked(protected)ifso,youwontbe
abletomakeanyedits.
Drum Kits may be used by more than one Program
WhenyoueditaDrumKit,allProgramsthatusethatDrum
Kitwillbeaffected.Toavoidchangingthefactoryvoicing,
youmaywishtocopyDrumKitstoemptylocationsinthe
USERbanksbeforeediting.
Backing up a Drum Kit
GlobalmodedoesnothaveaComparefunctionthatreturns
theeditedresulttothestatepriortoediting.Beforeyou
begineditingauserDrumKit,itsagoodideatouseCopy
DrumKittocopythatDrumKittoavacantnumber.
Creating a Drum Kit
Specifying the key where you will assign a drum-
sample
1. SelecttheProgramthatyouwishtousewhileeditingthe
DrumKit.
2. PresstheMODEGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode.
3. AccesstheGlobal:DrumKitSampleParampage.
4. UsetheDrumKitparameter,atthetopofthepage,to
selecttheDrumKitthatyouwishtoedit.
GMdrumkits48(GM)56(GM)cannotbeselected
here.(ItisnotpossibletoeditorwriteaGMdrumkit.)
Ifyouwishtomodifythesettingsofoneofthedrum
kits48(GM)56(GM),youcanuseCopyDrumKitto
copyitto00(INT)26(USER),andtheneditthecopy.
IFX1
S03: Stereo Limiter
Timbre1
: Pad
Bus Select
: IFX1
Ctrl Bus
(FX Control Bus)
: 1
Envelope Source
: FX Control 1
Limiter (Combination)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1) Timbre2
: Guitar
split
IFX2
S20: OD/
Hi.Gain Wah
Bus Select
: IFX2
Bus Select
: L/R
Program
B
Program
A
Drum Kit Creating a drum kit
193
5. UsetheKeyparametertoselectthenotethatyouwishto
edit.
IfChaseOnisOn,youcanalsoholddowntheKEY
buttonandplayanoteonthekeyboard.
6. UsetheAssigntospecifywhetherthekeywillhaveits
ownsettings,orusethesamesettingsasthenexthigher
note.
IfAssignisOn,thekeywillhaveitsownsettings.This
isthedefault.
IfAssignisOff,thekeywonthaveitsownsettings.
Instead,itwillusethesamesettingsasthenexthigher
noteexceptthatthedrumsampleswillbeplayedata
lowerpitch.Theamountofpitchchangedependsonthe
PitchSlopeparameter,ontheProg:OSC/PitchOSC
Commonpage.
Creating a velocity crossfade
Forthiskey,letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfadebetween
twostereodrumsamples.
1. Ontheleftsideofthepage,makesurethatHighand
MidHighareturnedOn.
2. Similarly,makesurethatMidLowandLowareturnedOff.
3. SelectStereoastheBankforHighandMidHigh.
4. ClicktheDrumsampleforHigh.
Adrumsamplelistorganizedbycategorywillbedis
played.Thedrumsamplesareorganizedintocategories
suchasbassdrumandsnare.
Youcanclicktheupperbuttontoviewalistforadif
ferentcategory.
5. SelectaDrumsamplebytouchingitsnameinthelist.
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.
6. DothesameforMidHigh.
NowthatyouveassignedDrumsamplestoHighand
MidHigh,letssetupthevelocityrangesandcrossfades.
7. SetMidHighsBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade
RangetoOff.
8. SetHighsBottomVelocityto80.
Now,MidHighwillsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at
velocitiesof79orlessandHighwillsoundwhenyou
playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore.
9. Next,setHignsXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto
Linear.
Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworangestaper
ingintooneanother.Between80and100,MidHighwill
fadeout,andHighwillfadein,creatingagradualveloc
itytransitioninsteadofahardsplit.
Fine-tuning the sound of each sample
1. Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwoDrumsamples.
Thiscanbeveryusefulincreatingasmoothvelocitysplit
orcrossfade.
2. Asnecessary,specifythetuning,EGparameters,and
filter.
3. AdjustTune,Attack(AmpEGAttack),Decay(AmpEG
Decay),CutoffandResonanceforeachdrumsample.
4. RepeatSpecifyingthekeywhereyouwillassigna
drumsampleonpage 192tosetupeachkeyofthe
DrumKit.
Youcanalsocopysettingsfromonekeytoanother,
usingtheCopyKeySetuputilitycommand.
Using Exclusive Groups
1. AccesstheDrumKitVoice/Mixerpage.
2. UsetheExclusiveGroupstomakeonedrumsoundcut
offanotherdrumsoundsuchasclosedandopenhi
hats.
Forexample,letssaythatyouveassignedanopenhi
hatandaclosedhihattothesameexclusivegroup:
Playtheopenhihatsound.
Whileitsstillringing,playtheclosedhihat.
Theopenhihatsoundwillbecutoffsimulatingthe
actionofaphysicalhihat.
Using Hold
TheProgramHoldparametercanbeespeciallyusefulfor
drumprograms,sinceitletsthesamplesringoutnaturally
regardlessofhowlongyouholddownthenote.Theway
thatthisworksdependsonsettingsinboththeProgramand
theDrumKit,asdescribedbelow.
ToenableHold:
1. AccessthePROG:Basicpage.
2. UnderKeyZone,makesurethattheHoldcheckboxis
checked.
OnceyouveturnedonHoldfortheProgram,thefunc
tioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasisaccordingto
settingswithintheDrumKit.
3. AccesstheGlobal:DrumKitVoice/Mixerpage.
4. Foreachkey,settheEnableNoteOffReceiveparameter
asdesired.
IfthisparameterisOff,thekeywillbeheld.
IfitisOn,thekeywillnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbeheld
regardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceivesetting.
Controlling effects for each key
DrumKitshavetheirown,builtinmixers.Foreachkey,you
cancontroltheInsertEffectsbussing,MasterEffectssends,
andpan.
Touseseparatebussettingsforeachkey:
1. AccessthePROG:IFXpage.
2. MakesurethattheUseDKitSettingisOn.
WhenUseDKitSettingisOn,theProgramwillusethe
BusSelectandEffectsSendsettingsforeachkeyofthe
DrumKit.
WhenUseDKitSettingisoff,theProgramwillignore
theDrumKitsBusSelectandEffectsSendsettings.
Global mode
194
UsetheBus(IFX/Output)Selectparametertosenddrum
soundsthroughtheirownInserteffects,ortotheL/R
outputs.
Ifyoulike,youcansendeachnotetoitsownInsert
effect,ortotheindividualaudiooutputs,inadditionto
theL/Routputs.
Forexample,youmightsendallsnaresoundstoIFX1,all
kicksoundstoIFX2,andtheremainingsoundstoL/R.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
4. UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)tosetthe
sendlevelstothemastereffects.
Controlling pan for each key
Touseseparatepansettingsforeachkey:
1. AccessthePROG:AmpAmp1page.
2. UnderPan,makesurethattheUseDKitSettingisOn.
WhenUseDKitSettingisOn,theProgramwillusethe
pansettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKit.
4. UsePantospecifythepanningforeachkey.
Saving Drum Kits
Onceyouvespentallthistimeediting,youllwanttosave
yourwork.
ThecontentsofyoureditinginGlobalmodearepreserved
aslongasthepowerison,butwillbelostwhenyouturnoff
thepower.Ifyouwanttokeepyouredits,youmustsaveby
usingtheWriteDrumKitsfunction.
Thiswillsavealldrumkits.
Arpeggio Pattern Common
195
Arpeggio Pattern
Here,youcancreateuserarpeggiopatterns.
Inthispage,themicroSTATIONwillcontinuetosoundasit
didbeforeenteringGlobalmode.
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromProgrammode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternthatisselectedby
theprogram.Evenifthepreviouslyselectedprograms
arpeggiatoristurnedoff,itcanbeturnedonbytheARP
ON/OFFbutton.
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromCombinationmode:
Youreditingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternthatis
selectedbythecombination.Evenifthepreviouslyselected
combinationsarpeggiatoristurnedoff,itcanbeturnedon
bytheARPON/OFFbutton.
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(p.143)parameterAorBis
Off.Additionally,thearpeggiatorwillnotoperateifithas
notbeenassignedtoatimbreinArpeggiatorAssign
(p.143).
IfyouenteredGlobalmodefromSequencermode:Your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedforthe
selectedsong.EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefromset
tingsinwhichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcanuse
theARPON/OFFbuttontoturniton.
However,itisnotpossibletoturnonanarpeggiatorfor
whichtheArpeggiatorRun(p.164)parameterAorBis
notchecked.Additionally,thearpeggiatorwillnotoperate
ifithasnotbeenassignedtoatrackinArpeggiatorAssign
(p.164).
Ineachoftheabovecases,youcanmodifythesettingsof
thearpeggiopatternevenifthearpeggiatorisnotturned
on.Wheneditingapattern,itisagoodideatoturnonthe
arpeggiatorandmakesurethatitisthepatternthatyou
wishtoedit.
Ifyouwanttheediteduserarpeggiopatternsettingsto
bebackedupevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff,you
mustwritethemintomemory.SelecttheWriteArpeg
gioPatternutilitycommandtoaccesstheWriteArpeg
gioPatterndialogbox.ThenpresstheOKbuttonto
writetheediteddata.
Fordetailsoncreatinganarpeggiopattern,seepage246.
Common
Arpeggiator Select [A, B]
IfthemicroSTATIONwaspreviouslyinCombinationor
Sequencermodeandyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern,
youmustselecteitherarpeggiatorAorBasthepatternto
edit.Youreditingwillapplyonlytotheselectedone.Bwill
notbedisplayedifthepreviousmodewasProgrammode.
Pattern
[P0: UP...P4: RANDOM, U000(INT)...U511(INT),
U512(USER)...U639(USER): name]
Selectsthepatternthatyouwanttoedit.
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditanarpeggiopattern(suchasapre
loadedarpeggiopattern)thatisalsousedbyanotherpro
gram,itisagoodideatousetheutilitycommandCopy
ArpeggioPatterntocopythearpeggiopatterntoanunused
numberU512(USER)...U639(USER),andthentoeditthe
copy.
Note:Ifyouwanttoeditthearpeggiopatternname,usethe
utilitycommandRenameArpeggioPattern.
Length [01...48]
Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggiopattern.Thearpeggio
patternwillplaythenumberofstepsyouspecifyhereatthe
P0:UP...P4:RANDOM Presetarpeggiopatterns
U000(INT)...U511(INT) Preloadedarpeggiopatterns
U512(USER)...U639(USER) Userarpeggiopatterns
Global mode
196
notevalueintervalspecifiedbyResolution,andwillthen
beginagain.Thisisnotvalidforpresetarpeggiopatterns
P0P4.
Resolution [, , , , , , , , , , , ]
Octave [1, 2, 3, 4]
Sort [Off, On]
Latch [Off, On]
Key Sync. [Off, On]
Keyboard [Off, On]
SeeARPSetuponpage 9.
Pattern,,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,
Latch,KeySync.,andKeyboardareparameters
thatcanbesetinProgram,Combination,andSong,but
youcanalsosetthemhere.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntotheorigi
nalmodeandwritethem.Theseparameterscannotbe
writtenbytheWriteArpeggioPatternscommandin
thispage.
Setup
TheseparametersarenotvalidforpresetpatternsP0
P4.
Arpeggio Tone Mode [Normal, Fixed Note]
ThisselectstheTonetypeofthearpeggiopattern.
Normal:Thisistheconventionalarpeggiatortype.Each
Toneinthearpeggiowillplaybasedonthenotenumberof
thekeysthatyouarepressingonthekeyboard.
FixedNote:Thenotenumberofeachtoneisfixed.Thenote
numbersplayedonthekeyboardwillbeignored,andthe
arpeggiowillsoundusingspecifiedpitches.Notenumbers
fromthekeyboardwillonlycontrolthetriggertimingofthe
arpeggiator.FixedNotemodeisidealforarpeggiopatterns
thatyouareusingasdrumpatterns.
IntheEdit,theToneindicatorswillbewhenNormalis
selectedhere,orOwhenFixedNoteisselected.
Arpeggio Type [As Played...Up&Down]
Specifiestherelationshipbetweenthearpeggionotesspeci
fiedfromthekeyboardandtheToneateachstep.
AsPlayed:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thosesteps
willnotsound.
AsPlayed(Fill):IftherearemoreTonesinastepthan
arpeggionotesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),the
lastplayednote(SortisOff),orthehighestnote(SortisOn)
willsoundforthosesteps.
RunningUp:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturntothefirstnote(ifSortisOff),orthelowestnote
(ifSortisOn)andsoundit.
Up&Down:IftherearemoreTonesinastepthanarpeggio
notesspecified(notesplayedonthekeyboard),thearpeggio
willreturninreversedirectionfromthelastarpeggionote
backtowardthefirst.
Example
IfyousetLengthto04,StepNo.01toTone0,StepNo.02to
Tone1,StepNo.03toTone2,StepNo.04toTone3,and
simultaneouslyplaythreenotestoproduceanarpeggio,the
followingresultswillbeproduceddependingontheArpeg
gioType.
AsPlayed:012rest012rest0...
AsPlayed(Fill):012201220...
RunningUp:012001200...
Up&Down:012101210...
Octave Motion [Up, Down, Both, Parallel]
SpecifiestheoperationwhenOctaveissetto24octaves.
Up:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendwithinthespecifiedrange
ofoctaves.
Down:Noteswillrepeatedlydescendwithinthespecified
numberofoctaves.
Both:Noteswillrepeatedlyascendanddescendwithinthe
specifiednumberofoctaves.
Parallel:Thenotesofthespecifiedoctaveswillsound
simultaneously.
Fixed Note
Fixed Note Mode [As Played, All Tones]
WhentheArpeggioToneModeisFixedNote,specifiesthe
conditionthatwilltriggertheTones.
TriggerAsPlayed:TheToneswillbetriggeredaccordingto
thenumberofkeyspressed.
TriggerAllTones:Pressingasinglekeywilltriggerall
Tones.
Example
WewilluseanArpeggioToneModeFixedNotepatternon
drums.Tone0isassignedanotenumberthatwillsounda
kick,Tone1asnare,andTone2ahihat.
WithasettingofTriggerAsPlayedandArpeggioTypeisAs
Played,pressingonekeywillsoundonlyTone0(kick).
PressingtwokeyswillsoundTone0(kick)andTone1
(snare).PressingthreekeyswillsoundallthreeTones02
(kick,snare,hihat).IftheVelocityofeachToneissetto
Key,eachTonewillbesoundedatthevelocitywithwhich
eachkeywasplayed.
WithasettingofTriggerAllTones,playingonekeyissuffi
cienttosoundallthree;Tone0(kick),Tone1(snare),and
Tone2(hihat).IftheVelocityofeachToneissettoKey,
theToneswillbesoundedatthecorrespondingvelocity
eachtimeakeyispressed.
Tone 0011 [C1...G9]
SpecifiesthenotenumberfortheselectedTone0011.
Edit
Here,youcaninputTones011foreachstep01to48.Step
canbeamaximumof48steps,andTonecorrespondstoup
totwelvenotesforthe(upto)twelvekeyspressedsimulta
neously.IfSort(p.10)ischecked,thenotesthatwere
pressedwillcorrespondinascendingorderofpitchtoTones
0,1,etc.IfSortisunchecked,thenotesthatwerepressed
willcorrespondtoTones0,1,etc.intheorderinwhichthey
werepressed.
TheseparametersarenotvalidforpresetpatternsP0
P4.
Tone Grid
Thearpeggiopatternisdisplayedonthegrid.
WhenArpeggioToneModeisNormal,thedisplaywill
indicate.WhensettoFixedNote,thedisplaywillindi
cateO.
Arpeggio Pattern Creating a user arpeggio pattern
197
Step No. (Step Number) [01...48]
Selectsthestepthatyouwishtoedit,andset/reseteach
Tone.WhentheStepNo.isselected,usethenumerickeysto
inputtheTones.Numerickeys09correspondtoTones09,
correspondstoTone10,and.toTone11.Eachtime
youpressakey,theTonewillbesetorreset.
WhenArpeggioToneModeisNormal,thedisplaywill
indicate.WhensettoFixedNote,thedisplaywillindi
cateO.
IfyouwishtodeleteallTonesofastep,usetheDeleteStep
utilitycommand.Toinsertablankstep,usetheInsertStep
utilitycommand.
Pitch Offset [48...+48]
Foreachstep,thepitchcorrespondingtotheTonecanbe
raisedorloweredinsemitonesteps.Thisletsyoumakeset
tingsforthesametoneineachsteptocreateamelody,orto
makesettingsfortwoormoretonesineachsteptoplaypar
allelchords.
Gate [Off, 001...100%, Legato]
Off:ThatstepwillnotsoundevenifToneshavebeenspeci
fied.
Legato:NoteswillcontinuesoundinguntilthesameToneis
soundednext,oruntilthepatternreturnstothebeginning.
Atthistime,thedisplaywillchangetoor.
ThissettingisvalidwhentheProgram,Combination,or
SongparameterGate(p.164)issettoStep.Whenadjust
ingthissetting,makesurethatGateissettoStepinthe
previousmodebeforeenteringthispage.
Velocity [001...127, Key]
Key:TheToneofthestepwillsoundwiththevelocityat
whichthekeywasplayed.
001127:Thespecifiedvelocityvaluewillalwaysbeused.
ThissettingisvalidwhentheProgram,Combination,or
SongparameterVelocity(p.164)issettoStep.
Whenadjustingthissetting,makesurethatVelocityisset
toStepinthepreviousmodebeforeenteringthispage.
Flam [99...+99]
Specifieshowthenotetimingwillbeskewedwhentwoor
moreTonesarespecifiedinthesamestep.
00:AllToneswillsoundsimultaneously.
+01+99:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedintheorder
oftheTonenumber.(WhenSortisON,fromlownoteto
highnote.WhenSortisOFF,intheorderinwhichkeys
werepressed.)
0199:Thetimingofthenoteswillbeskewedinthe
oppositedirectionas+.
Tosimulatechordsstrummedonaguitar,trysetting+
valuesforoddnumberedstepsandvaluesforeven
numberedsteps.
ThisisnotvalidforpresetpatternsP0P4.
Creating a user arpeggio
pattern
About user arpeggio patterns
ThepatternsthatcanbeselectedonthemicroSTATIONs
arpeggiatorarecalledarpeggiopatterns.Therearetwo
typesofarpeggiopatterns:presetarpeggiopatternsand
userarpeggiopatterns.
Preset arpeggio patterns:
Therearefivepatterns;UP,DOWN,ALT1,ALT2,andRAN
DOM.
Theoperationofthesepatternsisfixed,andcannotbe
edited.
User arpeggio patterns:
Thereare640patternsU000(INT)U639(USER)whichcan
developchordsorphrasesinawidevarietyofways,based
onthepitchesthatyouplayonthekeyboardorthetiming
withwhichyouplaythem.
InmicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor,Setupyoucan
modifytheseuserarpeggiopatterns,orcreateanewuser
arpeggiopatternfromaninitializedcondition.Editeduser
arpeggiopatternscanbewrittentointernalmemoryareas
U000(INT)U639(USER)(p.203).
Editing a user arpeggio pattern
Ifyouwanttoeditauserarpeggiopattern,youmust
firstmakesurethatmemoryprotectisOff.(p.183)
IfyouenterthismodefromtheProgrammode,yourediting
willapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedfortheselected
program.
1. InProgrammode,selectaprogramwhichusesthe
arpeggiopatternyouwishtoedit,oraprogramthatyou
wishtouseasabasisforeditingthearpeggiopattern.
2. PresstheARPON/OFFbuttontoturnthearpeggiatoron
(LEDwilllightup).
EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefromaprogramin
whichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcanusethe
ARPON/OFFbuttontoturniton.
3. SelecttheGlobal:ArpeggioPatternpage.
4. ArpeggiatorSelectwillautomaticallybesettoAwhen
younavigatetothispagefromProgrammode.
InPattern,selectthearpeggiopatternthatyouwishto
edit.
Forthisexample,selectanemptyuserarpeggiopattern.
Ifablankpatternisselected,playingthekeyboardwill
notstartanarpeggio.Althoughpresetarpeggiopat
ternsP0P4canbeselected,theycannotbeedited.
Whenyoueditauserarpeggiopattern,thechanges
willhaveaneffectanytimethatthispatternisusedin
Program,Combination,orSong.
Global mode
198
5. InLength,specifythelengthofthepattern.
Afterthepatternhasplayedforthelengthspecified,it
willreturntothebeginning.Thissettingcanalsobe
changedduringorafterediting.Forthisexample,setit
to08.
Note:ForthepreloadarpeggiopatternsU000U639,sim
plychangingtheLengthcansignificantlychangethe
characterofthepattern.Trychangingthelengthandlis
teningtotheresult.
6. Adjustthesettingsforthe,(Tempo),Resolution,
Octave,Sort,Latch,KeySync.,andKeyboard
parameters.
Theseareprogramparameters,buttheycanbesetfrom
hereaswell.
IfafteraccessingthispagefromProgrammode,you
modifytheseparametersandwishtokeepyour
changes,returntoProgrammodeandwritethepro
gram.TheseparametersarenotsavedbyWrite
ArpeggioPattern.
InArpeggioPatternSetup,specifyhowthearpeggiowillbe
developed.
Thesesettingscanbechangedduringorafterediting(see
page243).
7. SelecttheEditpage.
ApatternconsistsofStepsandTones.
Step:Auserarpeggiopatternconsistsofupto48steps.
Thehorizontalaxisofthegridrepresentsthesteps.The
arpeggiatorwillplaystartingatthefirststep,atintervals
ofthenotevaluespecifiedbytheResolution.Use
StepNo.toselectthestep,andspecifyPitchOffset,
Gate,Velocity,andFlamforeachstep.
Tone:Eachstepisabletoplayachordofuptotwelve
Tones(ToneNo.0011).Theverticalaxisofthegrid
representstheTone.Youcanclickonthegridtoentera
tone.Eachtimeyouclickagrid,thecorrespondingtone
willturnonoroff.
Creating an example pattern
1. ClicktheStep01,Tone00.
9. Whenyouplaythekeyboardasshownintheillus
tration,thearpeggiatorwillbeginplaying.
Tone0correspondstothepitchofthelowestkeyof
chordyouplayonthekeyboard.(IfSortisunchecked,it
willcorrespondtothepitchofthefirstnoteyouplay.)
10.Forsteps0108,adjustthesettingsforPitchOffset,
Gate,Velocity,andFlam.
PitchOffset:Thisoffsetsthepitchofthearpeggionote
insemitonesupordown.Youcaninputthesametone
foreachstep,andchangethePitchOffsetvalueforeach
tocreateamelodyusingasingletone.(See?Melodypat
tern?)
Gate:Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggionoteforeach
step.WithasettingofLegato,thenotewillcontinue
soundingeitheruntilthenextnoteofthesametoneor
untiltheendofthepattern.WithasettingofOff,the
notewillnotsound.
Velocity:Specifiesthestrengthofthenote.Withaset
tingofKey,thenotewillsoundatthestrengthwith
whichitwasactuallyplayed.
TheGateandVelocitysettingsyoumakeherewillbe
validiftheGateandVelocityparameters(PROG:
BasicARPpage)oftheprogramselectedinProgram
modearesettoStep.Iftheseparametershaveasetting
otherthanStep,theGateandVelocitythatwerespeci
fiedforeachindividualstepwillbeignored,andall
notesofthearpeggiowillsoundaccordingtotheset
tingsinPROG:BasicARPpage.Besuretoverifythe
settingsoftheprogram.
WhenspecifyingGateandVelocity,selecttheRealtime
controlsCmode,andsetknob1(GATE)andknob2
(VELOCITY)tothecenterposition(12oclock).
Tone No.
Step No.
Length: 8
199
11.Ifyouwanttoedittheuserarpeggiopatternname,click
theUTILITYbuttonandchooseRenameArpeggio
Patternfromthemenuthatappears.
Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithoutwriting,theeditedcon
tentswillbelost.
12.Ifyouwishtosavethestateoftheprogramatthesame
time,returntoProgrammodeandwritetheprogram.
(p.137)
Other examples of creating a user arpeggio pat-
tern
Melody pattern
SetPitchOffsetto+00.
6. ForStep06,donotenteratone.
SetPitchOffsetto02.
Chordal pattern
SetGatetoLegato.
3. ClicktheStep03,Tone01,02,03,04.
SetGatetoLegato.
Note:Tosimulatethetimingnuancesofastrummedguitar
chord,selectFlam.InProgrammode,selectanacousticgui
tarprogram,andchoosetheuserarpeggiopatternthatyou
createdhere.IntheArpeg.PROG:BasicARPpage,set
GatetoStep.
ThenreturntotheGlobal:ArpeggioPatternpage.Forodd
numberedsteps,setFlamtoapositive(+)value.Foreven
numberedsteps,setFlamtoanegative()value.
Drum pattern
Youcanusethearpeggiatortoplayarhythmpatternby
usingFixedNotewithadrumprogram.
1. InProgrammode,selectadrumkitprogram.
Forthisexample,selectthepresetprogramStandardkit
(Category:DRUM/MALLET/HITS).
2. InGlobal:ArpeggioPatternpage,andparameter
settings.
ArpeggioToneMode:SetthistoFixedNote.Thiswill
causethetonetoalwayssoundatthespecifiedpitch.
FixedNoteMode:IfyousetthistoTriggerAllTones,
playingasinglenoteonthekeyboardwillsoundall
tones.
IfyousetthistoTriggerAsPlayed,thetoneswillbe
soundedaccordingtothenotesyouplayonthekey
board(p.196).
Global mode
200
Letsinputthefollowingrhythmpattern.
3. AdjustthesettingsforToneNo.andFixedNoteNo.
SelectToneNo.,andsetFixedNoteNo.tothenote
numberthatwillbesoundedbythattone.Foreachhori
zontalline(Tone)inthescreen,youwillspecifythe
drumsample(notenumber)ofthedrumkit.
EachTonewillbedisplayedasasmallcircle.
Forthisexample,setToneNo.andFixedNoteNo.asfol
lows.
Thedrumsamplesthatcorrespondtoeachnotenumberwill
differdependingonthedrumkit.Itisconvenienttoaudi
tionthedrumsoundsfromthekeyboard,andtheninput
FixedNoteNo.TurnontheChaseonandbyholding
downtheKEYbuttonandplayingthedesiredkey.
4. Inputthekick(Tone00).
ClicktheStep01,Tone00.
ThenclicktheStep05,Tone00.
5. Inputthesnare(Tone01).
6. Inputtheclosedhihat(Tone02).
7. Inputtheopenhihat(Tone03).
IfFixedNoteModeissettoTriggerAllTones,playing
asinglenoteonthekeyboardwillcausetherhythmpat
terntoplay.
IfFixedNoteModeissettoTriggerAsPlayed,playing
asinglenoteonthekeyboardwillcauseonlythekick
(Tone00)toplay.
Playingtwonotesonthekeyboardwillcauseonlythe
kick(Tone00)andsnare(Tone01)toplay.Inthisway,the
numberofkeysthatyouplaywillbeplayedbythesame
numberoftones.
8. Settheparametersforeachstep.
UseVelocityetc.toaddaccentstotherhythmpattern.
TheGateandVelocitysettingsyoumakeherewill
bevalidiftheGateandVelocityparameters(PROG:
BasicARPpage)oftheprogramselectedinProgram
modearesettoStep.Iftheseparametershaveasetting
otherthanStep,theGateandVelocitythatwerespeci
fiedforeachindividualstepwillbeignored,andthe
notesofthearpeggiowillbesoundedaccordingtothe
settingsofthePROG:BasicARPpage.Checktheset
tingsoftheprogram.
WhenspecifyingGateandVelocity,selectrealtimecon
trolsCmode,andsetknob1(GATE)andknob2
(VELOCITY)tothecenterposition(12oclock).
Dual arpeggiator editing
Herewewilluseacombinationasanexampleinourexpla
nation.
Thesameprocedureapplieswheneditinganarpeggiopat
terninSequencermode.
IfyouhaveenteredthismodefromtheCombinationmode,
thearpeggiopatternselectedbythecombinationwillbe
affectedbyyourediting.
1. InCombinationmode,selectacombinationthatusesthe
arpeggiopatternyouwishtoedit.
Forthisexample,selectacombinationwherebotharpeg
giatorsAandBareassigned.
2. PresstheARPON/OFFbuttontoturnonthearpeggiator
(LEDwilllightup).
Evenifthearpeggiatorhadbeenturnedoffwhenyou
movedhere,youcanusetheARPON/OFFbuttonto
turniton.However,ifArpeggiatorRunAorBareOff,
andifArpeggiatorAssign,issettooff,thenthearpeg
giatorwillnotoperate.
3. SelecttheGlobal:ArpeggioPatternpage.
4. IfyouaccessedthispagefromCombinationmode,use
theArpeggioSelectAandBtoselectthearpeggiator
thatyouwishtoedit.
IfthisisA,youreditingwillapplytotheparametersand
userarpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorA.
IfthisisB,youreditingwillapplytotheparametersand
userarpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorB.
5. SwitchbetweenarpeggiatorsAandB,andedittheir
respectiveuserarpeggiopatterns.
Ifyouwishtostoponeofthearpeggiators,returnto
Combinationmode,andinCONBIEDIT:ARPArpAor
theArpBpageandturnofftheArpeggiatorRun.
6. Tomodifythenameofauserarpeggiopattern,usethe
Tone No. Fixed Note No.
00 C2(kick)
01 F2(snare)
02 F#3(closedhihat)
03 A#3(openhihat)
201
UtilitycommandRenameArpeggioPattern.(Seepage
255)
7. Ifyouwishtosavetheediteduserarpeggiopatternin
internalmemory,youmustwritetheuserarpeggio
pattern.
Inthiscase,bothuserarpeggiopatternswillbewritten
simultaneously.Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithoutwrit
ing,theeditedcontentswillbelost(p.203).
8. Ifyouwishtosavethestateofthecombinationatthe
sametime,returntoCombinationmodeandwritethe
combination.(p.203)
Note:Wheneditingauserarpeggiopattern,payatten
tiontotheglobalMIDIchannel,thechannelofeach
track,andthearpeggiatorassignments,andmakesure
thatthearpeggiatoryouarehearingisthepatternthat
youwishtoedit.
Regarding arpeggiator synchronization
Key Sync. parameter
Thetimingofthearpeggiatornotesdependsonthestateof
thearpeggiatorKeySync..
IfthisisOn,thearpeggiatorwillstartrunningatthefirst
noteonthatoccursafteryouvetakenyourhandscom
pletelyoffthekeyboard.
IfthisisOff,thearpeggiatorwillruninsynchronization
withtheinternal/externalMIDIclock.
Below,wewillexplainhowsynchronizationoccurswhen
theKeySync.isOff(SynchronizationwithSongStartand
withMIDIrealtimeStartmessagesareexcluded).
Synchronization between arpeggiators A and B
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thetwoarpeggiators
canrunsimultaneously.Inthiscase,ifonearpeggiatoris
alreadyrunning,andyouthenruntheotherarpeggiator
(withKeySync.isOff),thesecondarpeggiatorwillsyn
chronizetothe,(Tempo)basedonthefirstarpeggiator.
IfKeySync.isOn,arpeggiatorsAandBwillrunindepen
dently,eachattheirowntempo.
Synchronization between the arpeggiator and
sequencer in Sequencer mode
If song playback is stopped
Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe,(Tempo)
basedontheinternalMIDIclocktiming.
While playing back or recording a song
Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothebeatbasedonthe
timingofthesong.
Synchronization with Song Start
Ifthearpeggiatoristurnedon(ARPON/OFFbuttonis
on)andisrunning,itwillresettothebeginningofits
arpeggiopatternwhenaSongStartisreceived.(Thisis
unaffectedbytheKeySync.setting.)
InSequencermodewhenKeySync.isOffandtheARP
ON/OFFbuttonison,ifyoustartthearpeggiatorby
pressingakeyduringtheprecountbeforerecording
begins,thearpeggiatorwillstartitspatternassoonas
recordingbegins,andwillberecorded.
Synchronization with external sequencer playback
If,(Tempo)isEXT(i.e.,ifGlobal:MIDIMIDIClock,
ClockisExt.MIDIorExt.USB)inProgram,Combination,
orSequencermodes,thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
MIDIClockandStartmessagesreceivedfromaconnected
MIDIdevice.
Note:SynchronizationwilloccurinthesamewayifMIDI
ClockisAutoandMIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeing
receivedfromaconnectedMIDIdevice.
Synchronization with external MIDI clock
Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe,(Tempo)timing
oftheexternalMIDIclock.
Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages
Ifthearpeggiatoristurnedonandrunning,anincoming
MIDIrealtimeStartmessagewillresetthearpeggiatortothe
beginningofitspattern(ThisisunaffectedbytheKey
Sync.setting).
Global mode
202
UTILITY Command
themenuthatappears.
2. Adjustsettingsinthedialogbox.
Save as Default
Writes(saves)theglobalmodeSoftwareSetupsettingsof
theeditorasthedefaultsettingsthatwillbeusedwhenyou
startuptheeditor.
Note:SaveasDelaultisavailableonalloftheSoftware
Setuppage.
Write Global Setting
ThiscommandwritesGlobalmodesettings(exceptfor
DrumKitsandArpeggioPatterns).
Note:Tosavethedrumkit,usetheutilitycommand.
(WriteDrumKits)
Note:Tosavethearpeggiopattern,usetheutilitycom
mand.(WriteArpeggioPatterns)
Select Auto Load File
IntheSoftwareSetuppage,useLoaddatafileautomati
callytoselectthedesiredfile.
Note:RefertoLoaddatafileautomatically.
SelectAutoLoadFileisavailableonalloftheSoftware
Setuppage.
Rename External Setup
Thisletsyourenametheexternalsetup.
RenameExternalSetupisavailableontheExternaltabof
theMIDIpage.
Reset Controller MIDI Assign
ThisautomaticallyassignstheMIDIcontrolchangemes
sagesforeachcontrolleroftheGlobal:ControllersARP
Controllers.
SeeResetARPCC#onpage 66.
ResetControllerMIDIAssignisavailableontheBasic/Con
trollerpage.
Copy Scale
Thiscommandcopiesdatafromapresetscaletoauserscale
orcopiesauserscaletoanotheruserscalelocation.
Fordetailsonthepresetscales,pleaseseeType(p.82).
CopyScaleisavailableontheUserScalepage.
1. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthecopysourcescale.
IfyouselectPureMajororPureMinor,specifytheKey
(locatedattheright)aswell.
StretchcannotbeselectedifToisUserAllNotesScale.
2. InTo,selectsthecopydestinationscale.
Write Drum Kits
Thissavesalldrumkits00(INT)47(USER).
Youmustwriteanediteddrumkitifyouwanttokeepit.
Editeddrumkitscannotberecoveredifyouturnoffthe
powerbeforesavingthem.
Rename Drum Kit
Thisrenamesadrumkit.
RenameDrumKitisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
DrumKitpage.
Copy Drum Kit
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanotherdrumkittothe
currentlyediteddrumkit.
CopyDrumKitisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
DrumKitpage.
Drumkits48(GM)56(GM)cannotbeedited,butyoumay
copythemtoanotherdrumkitandtheneditthem.
Selectthecopysourcedrumkit(From).
WhenyouusetheCopyDrumKitfunction,theset
tingsofthedrumkitthatscurrentlyselectedwillbe
overwritten.
Copy Key Setup
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanindividualkeyto
anotherkey.Youcanalsocopysettingsfromtwoormore
contiguouskeysatonce.
CopyKeySetupisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
DrumKitpage.
1. IntheFromKeyfields,selecttherangeofkeysthat
youwishtocopy.
2. IntheToKeyfield,selectthecopydestinationkey.If
youselectedtwoormorekeysintheFromKeyfield,
theirsettingswillbecopiedtothekeysstartingattheTo
Keyandcontinuingupward.
Swap Key Setup
Thiscommandexchanges(swaps)thesettingsofonekey
withthesettingsofanotherkey.
SwapKeySetupisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
DrumKitpage.
UseSourceKey1andSourceKey2tospecifythekeys
whosesettingsyouwanttoswap.
UTILITY Command Creating a user arpeggio pattern
203
Write Arpeggio Patterns
ThiscommandwritesuserarpeggiopatternsU000U639.
WriteArpeggioPatternsisavailableontheArpeggioPat
ternpage.
Pattern,,(Tempo),Octave,Resolution,Sort,
Latch,KeySync,andKeyboardareparameters
thataresetinProgram,Combination,andSong.The
Writeoperationusedheredoesnotsavetheseparame
ters.
IfyoumoveherefromProgramorCombinationmode
andsettheseparameters,youmustreturntotheorigi
nalmodeandwritethem.
Rename Arpeggio Pattern
Thiscommandrenamestheselecteduserarpeggiopattern.
PresetpatternsP0P4cannotberenamed.
RenameArpeggioPatternsisavailableontheArpeggioPat
ternpage.
Copy Arpeggio Pattern
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofanotheruserarpeggio
patterntothecurrentlyselectedarpeggiopattern.
ItisnotpossibletocopyfromapresetarpeggiopatternP0
P4.
SelectthecopysourcearpeggiopatternFrom.
CopyArpeggioPatternsisavailableontheArpeggioPat
ternpage.
BeawarethatwhenyouusetheCopyArpeggioPat
ternfunction,allsettingsofthearpeggiopatternthats
currentlyselectedwillbeoverwritten.
Initialize Steps
Thiscommandinitializesthestepparameters(Tone,
PitchOffset,Gate,Velocity,Flam)ofthearpeggio
pattern.
Emptywillinitializealltonestoablankstate.
Fullwillinitializealltonestoafullstate.
InitializeStepsisavailableontheArpeggioPatternpage.
Copy Step
Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsofaspecificstep.Theset
tingsoftwoormoreadjacentstepscanalsobecopied
together.
CopyStepisavailableontheArpeggioPatternpage.
1. InFromStep,selecttherangeofstepsthatyouwishto
copy.
2. InToStep,selectthecopydestinationstep.
IfyouselectedmorethanonestepinFromStep,the
stepswillbecopiedstartingatToStepandcontinuing
throughthestepstotheright.
Delete Step
Thiscommanddeletesthestepparameters(Tone,Pitch
Offset,Gate,Velocity,Flam)ofthestepnumber
thatscurrentlyselected.Subsequentstepswillmoveone
columntowardtheleft.
DeleteStepisavailableontheArpeggioPatternpage.
Insert Step
Thiscommandinsertsanemptystepintothestepnumber
thatscurrentlyselected.Subsequentstepswillbemoved
onesteptotheright.
InsertStepisavailableontheArpeggioPatternpage.
Rotate Step
Thiscommandrotatesthestepsettings.
SelecttheDirectionofrotation.
RotateStepisavailableontheArpeggioPatternpage.
Forexample,supposethereisapatternofLength4.
IfyouselectForward,thesettingsofStep1willberewritten
to2,Step23,Step34,Step41.
IfyouselectBackward,thesettingsofStep1willberewrit
tento4,Step21,Step32,Step43.
Load
Save
Receive All
ReceivesalldatafromthemicroSTATIONdataintotheedi
tor.
isexcepted.
Transmit All
TransmitsalldatainthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEdi
tortothemicroSTATIONandwritesitintointernalmem
ory.
Receive Global Data
ReceivestheglobaldatafromthemicroSTATIONintothe
microSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor.
Receive Arpeggio Pattern
ReceivesthearpeggiopatterndatafromthemicroSTATION
Transmit Global Data
TransmitstheglobaldatafromthemicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditortothemicroSTATIONandwritesit.
Transmit Arpeggio Pattern
TransmitsthearpeggiopatterndatafromthemicroSTA
writesit.
Global mode
204
Receive Current Arpeggio Pattern
Receivesthearpeggiopatterndatathatscurrentlyselected
fromthemicroSTATIONintothemicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditor.
Transmit Current Arpeggio Pattern
Transmitsthearpeggiopatterndatathatscurrentlyselected
STATIONandwritesit.
Import
Export
DatacreatedinthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor
canbesavedasPCGdataforthemicroSTATION.
All Sound Off
occurewhileusingthehostsfunctions.Ifthishappens,
pleaseusethiscommand.
205
Effect Guide
Overview
ThemicroSTATIONprovidesfiveinserteffects,twomaster
effects,andatotaleffect,togetherwithamixersectionthat
controlstheroutingoftheseeffects.
Foreachoftheseeffectprocessors,youcanchoosefrom134
differenttypesofeffects,groupedintothefollowingcatego
ries:
Classification of 134 effects
Effects in each mode
Program mode
WithPrograms,youcanuseinserteffectstoprocessthe
finalsoundinthesamewaythatyouusetheFilter,Driver,
Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)toprocessthesoundfromthe
oscillators(OSC1&2).Thenthemastereffectsareusedto
createoverallambiencesuchasreverb,andusethetotal
effecttomakefinaladjustments.Allofthesesettingscanbe
madeindependentlyforeachprogram.
Combination, Sequencer mode
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethetrack
EQandinserteffectstoprocesstheprogramsoundofeach
timbre/track.Youcanthenusethemastereffectstocreate
overallambience,andusethetotaleffecttomakefinal
adjustments.
InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsforeach
combination,andinSequencermodeyoucanmakethem
foreachsong.
InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsormod
ifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,sothat
effectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffectparameterswillbe
modifiedautomaticallyasthesongplaysback.
Editing effect parameters on the
microSTATION itself
OnthemicroSTATIONitself,youcanonlyeditthemain
parametersofeacheffect.
Onthetablesthatexplaintheeffectparametersonpage217
andfollowing,theparameternamesarelistedineitherFull
parameterorQuickparameter.Ifaparametersnameis
listedintheQuickparametercolumnorifthiscolumn
indicates(samenameasfullparameter),thatparame
tercanbeeditedonthemicroSTATIONitself.
parameters.YoullusemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor
toperformdetailededitingofparameterssuchasdynamic
modulation.
Effect type Contents
Dynamics:000006
Effectswhichcontrolvolume,suchas
compressors,limiter,andgates
EQ/Filter:007019
Effectswhichcontrolfrequencycontent,
suchasEQ,multimodefilter,exciter,and
wah
Overdrive/Amp/
Mic:020028
Overdriveandampmodelingeffectssuch
asguitar/bassampsandmics
Phaser/
Modulation:029
042
Pitchandphasemodulationeffectssuch
aschorusandflanger
MonoMono
Serial(Dyn/EQ/
Phs):043061
Othermodulationeffectssuchastremolo
androtaryspeaker,andpitchshifters
OrganFX:062063 Delays
Chorus/Flanger/
PitchMod:064081
Reverbandearlyreflections
MonoMono
Serial(Cho/Flng):
082087
Mono&Monochaineffectsthatinter
nallyconnecttwomonoeffectsinseries
Delay:088104
Mono&Monoparalleleffectsthatallow
twomonoeffectstobeappliedtoLandR
independently
Reverb/ER:105113 Doublesizeeffects
MonoMono
Serial(Delay):
114120
Effectswhichcontrolvolume,suchas
compressors,limiter,andgates
DoubleSize:
D00D13(121134)
Effectswhichcontrolfrequencycontent,
suchasEQ,multimodefilter,exciter,and
wah
Oscillator1 Filter1 Driver1 Amplifer1
Oscillator2 Filter2 Driver2 Amplifer2 EQ Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 1, 2
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
Program mode
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1 EQ
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16 EQ
Audio Track 1 EQ
Audio Track 16 EQ
Insert Efect 112 Total Efect 1, 2
Master Efect 1, 2
Return
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Send
Effect Guide
206
Dynamic modulation (Dmod) and
Tempo Synchronization
Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
Dynamicmodulationletsyoucontrolcertaineffectsparam
etersinrealtime,usingeitherthebuiltincontrollersor
MIDI.Theseeffectparametersaremarkedwiththelogo
.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeDynamicModulation
Sources(Dmod)onpage380.
Tempo Synchronization
Youcansynchronizesomeeffectsparameters,suchasLFO
speedsanddelaytimes,tothesystemtempo.Thisletsyou
synctheeffectstoProgramLFOs,Arpeggiator,theinternal
sequencer,oranexternalMIDIclock.
Theseeffectsparametersaremarkedwiththelogo .
Synchronizing LFOs
MosteffectswithLFOs,suchasS11:St.Wah,canbesynchro
nizedtotempo.ThisappliestotheindividualeffectsLFOs.
TosetupLFOstosynchronizetotempo:
1. SetMIDISynctoOn.
2. SettheBPMasdesired.
Tosynchronizetothesystemclock,setBPMtoMIDI.
TosettheLFOtoaspecifictempo,separatefromthesys
temclock,setBPMtothedesiredtempo(between40.00
and300.00BPM).
3. UsetheBaseNoteandTimes(x)parameterstoset
therhythmicvalueoftheLFO.
Forinstance,ifyousetBaseNoteto1/8andTimes
(x)to2,eachcycleoftheLFOwilllastforaquarternote
(twoeighthnotes).
Synchronizing Delay Times
DelayswithBPMintheirtitlewillsynctotempo.
Forinstance,youmightsetupeffect102:StereoBPMDelay
formastereffect2asfollows:
1. SetLDelayBaseNoteto1/32,andTimes(x)to4
2. SetRDelayBaseNoteto1/32,andTimes(x)to6
Inthiscase,theleftchanneldelaytimewillcorrespond
tofour32ndnotes,andtherightchanneldelaytimewill
correspondtosix32ndnotes.
Ifthetempo,BaseNote,andTimessettingscombine
toexceedthemaximumdelaytime,anindicationsuchas
TimeOver?:OVERisdisplayed(onlyonthemicroS
TATIONitself).Pleaseadjustthesettingssothatthis
indicationdoesnotappear.(Themaximumdelaytime
willdependontheeffect.)
Dynamic modulation to control an effect parame-
ter in realtime
UsethemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditortomake
thesesettings.
1. EnterProgrammode,andselectadesiredprogram.
2. AccesstheMFX/TFXpageMFX2.
3. InMFX&TFXRouting,setMFX2to099:L/C/RBPM
Delay.
Verifythatthedelaysoundisbeingoutput.
Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay level via
the Joystick
4. SetInputLvlDmodto+100.
5. SetSourcetoJS+Y:#01.Thedelaysoundwill
disappear.
Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythejoy
stick.Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyou,thedelay
soundwillgraduallyincrease.
Using a foot switch connected to the DAMPER/PEDAL/SW
jack to vary the feedback level via Dmod
6. ConnectafootswitchtotherearpanelDAMPER/
PEDAL/SWjack.
7. EnterGLOBALmode,andinBasic/Controllers
Controller,settheFootSwitch/Pedal/DamperTypeSw/
PedaltoSwitch,andsetFootSwitchFunctiontoFoot
Switch.
8. AccesstheProgrammodeMFX/TFXpageMFX2,andset
theL/R/CBPMDelayparameterCDelaySourceto
FootSW:#82andAmountto+30.
Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfand
pressthefootswitch,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,
andthedelaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.The
Amountsettingspecifiesthefeedbacklevelthatwillbe
ineffectwhenthefootswitchispressed.IfAmountis
setto10,pressingthefootswitchwillreducethefeed
backlevelto0.
Finally, we can use the MIDI/Tempo Sync function to syn-
chronize the delay time to the arpeggiator tempo.
9. SetBPMtoMIDI.
10.ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimesas
desired.
Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNoteto,andTimesto
x4sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable.The
delaytimewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote.
11.SwitchtoRealtimeControlCmode,andturnknob4
(TEMPO);thedelaytimewillchange.
Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)
pressthefootswitch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,andthe
delayswillbecomelonger.
12.WhenyouturnontheARPON/OFFbutton,arpeggiator
willbeginplaying.
Selectanydesiredarpeggiator.WhenyouswitchtoReal
timeControlCmodeandturnknob4(TEMPO),the
delaytimewillchangeinsynchronizationwiththe
changingtempoofthearpeggiatorplayback.
Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmayhear
someunexpectednoiseifyouchangetheknob4
(TEMPO)whilethedelayissounding.Thisisbecause
thedelaysoundbecomesdiscontinuous,andisnota
malfunction.
Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFOfre
quencytothetempo.SettheeffectparametersMIDI
SynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.(TempoSynchroni
zation)
BPM/MIDI Sync: LFO
LFO
BPM/MIDI Sync: Delay Time
Lch
Rch
Dry Wet
Dry Wet
Overview FX Control Bus
207
FX Control Bus
TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffectssidechains.
Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwithoneaudiosignal
(thesidechain),whiletheeffectprocessesacompletelydif
ferentaudiosignal.
Thisisconvenientforusewithvocodersandlimiters,gates,
etc.Youcanuseavoicetypetimbretomodulateasynth
typeinputtocreaterhythmicvocodereffects.Limiteror
gatetypeeffectsareoftenusedtocontrolaninputusinga
differentsound.
microSTATIONincludestwotruestereoFXControlBuses,
whichcanbeusedwiththefollowingeffects:
Vocoder
D09:Vocoder
Limiter, and gate effects
S03:StereoLimiter
S06:StereoGate
Example: Limiter (Combination)
Compressortypeeffectsusetheleveloftheaudioinputto
controlthelevelgainoftheaudiooutput.
Fortheseeffects,theenvelopedetectionsourcecanbeeither
theaudioinputitself(theusualmethod)orFXControlBus
1or2.
Theexampleshowninthediagramisofasplitcombination
inwhichtheleveloftimbre1(Pad,playedfromthelowkey
range)isbeingcontrolledbytimbre2(Guitar,withIFX2
OD/Wahinserted,playedfromthehighkeyrange).Youcan
adjustthesettingssothatwhenyouplaytheguitarsound,
thevolumeofthepadwilldecreaseautomatically.Sendthe
postIFX2signalviaFXControlBustoFXCtrl1,andsetthe
IFX1:St.LimiterEnvelopeSourceparametertoFXControl1.
Example: Vocoder (Combination)
Vocodereffectsproducetheirdistinctivesoundbyusingan
audiosignal(themodulator)tomodulateadifferentaudio
signal(thecarrier).
Asshownintheillustration,usingtheoutputoftimbre1as
thecarrierandthevoicetypeoutputoftimbre2asthemod
ulatorallowsyoutocreatedistinctivetalkingeffects.
Example: Rhythmic Vocoder (Combination)
Thevocoderisauniqueeffectthatusesoneaudiosignal
(themodulator)tomodulateanotheraudiosignal(thecar
rier).Byusinganarpeggiateddrumpatternasthemodula
tor,youcanproducearhythmvocodereffect.Asshownin
theillustration,thisexamplesendsthedrumpatternplayed
bythetimbre2arpeggiatortotheFXControlbusandusesit
asthevocodersmodulator.
Fortimbre1(thecarrier),setBustoIFX1,sendingitto
IFX1:vocoder.Fortimbre2(themodulator),setFXControl
Busto1,sendingittoFXcontrolbus1.SetIFX1:Vocoders
ModSrctoFXCtrl1sothatthearpeggiateddrumpattern
signaloftimbre2willbethemodulatorforthevocoder.
Effect I/O
Toachievethebesttonalquality,signalssenttotheeffects
shouldbeatthemaximumlevelbelowclipping.Also,use
theWet/DryparameterfortheInsertEffects,TotalEffect
andtheWet/DryorReturn1,2parameterfortheMas
terEffectstoadjusttheeffectoutputlevel.
Iftheinputlevelistoolow,theSNratiomaydecrease.
Ontheotherhand,iftheinputlevelistoohigh,clip
pingmayoccur.
Thefollowingtableshowstheparametersrelatedtothe
levelsettings:
Program mode
Combination mode/Sequencer mode
*1 Someeffectsmaynothavetheseparameters.
IFX1
S03: St.Limiter
Timbre1
: Pad
Bus Select
: IFX1
Ctrl Bus
(FX Control Bus)
: 1
Env Src: FXCtrl1
Limiter (Combination)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1) Timbre2
: Guitar
split
IFX2
S20: OD/Wah
Bus Select
: IFX2
Bus Select
: L/R
Program
B
Program
A
IFX1
D09: Vocoder
Timbre1
: Pad
Bus Select
: IFX1
FX Control Bus
: 1
Mod Src
: FXCtrl1
Vocoder (Combination)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
(Carrier)
(Modulator)
Timbre2
: Voice
Input
OSC 1/2 Volume
Send1/2
Effect Trim parameter
*1
Output
Effect Wet/Dry parameter
Return1, 2
Master Volume
Input
Volume
Send1/2
Effect Trim parameter
*1
Output
Effect Wet/Dry parameter
Return1, 2
Master Volume
IFX1
D09: Vocoder
Timbre1
: Pad
Bus Select
: IFX1
FX Control Bus
: 1
Mod Src
: FXCtrl1
Rhythmic Vocoder (Combination)
Bus Select
: L/R
(FX Control Bus1)
(Carrier)
(Modulator)
Arpeggiator
Timbre2
: Drums
Effect Guide
208
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5)
In/Out
InsertEffects(IFX15)haveastereoinputandastereoout
put.IfyousettheWet/DryparametertoDry(noeffect),the
inputsignalwillbepassedthrough,instereo,withoutbeing
processedbytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effectapplied),the
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing
ways:
Input/outputvariationsforeacheffectareshowninupper
leftoftheblockdiagramsstartingonpage217.
Ifyouselect000:NoEffect,stereoinputsignalsareoutput
instereowithoutbeingprocessed.
Ineachmode,youcanuseIFX1IFX5On/Offtoturnthe
effecton/off.Ifaneffectisoff,itwillbebypassed.Justas
when000:NoEffectisselected,thestereoinputsoundwill
besentthroughasastereooutput.
ThemicroSTATIONcanalsoturnIFX1IFX5offsepa
ratelyfromthesettingoftheOn/Offbuttonbyreceiv
ingMIDIcontrolchangemessageCC#92.Value0will
turnthemoff,andvalue1127willturnthemon.
YoucanalsouseEffectSW(p.59)toturnIFX15on
andoff.ThisMIDIcontrolisperformedontheglobal
MIDIchannel(p.60).
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(D00:St.MltLmtD13:EarlyRef)use
twiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
YoucanusedoublesizeeffectsforinserteffectsIFX1IFX4
andmastereffectMFX1.However,theeffectofthenumber
thatfollowsitwillbeunavailable.Forexampleifyouve
selectedadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,youwontbeableto
useIFX2.IfyouveselectedadoublesizeeffectforMFX1,
youwontbeabletouseMFX2.
Routing
Youcanuseuptofivechannels(IFX15)fortheInsert
Effectsinanymode.
Program mode
UseBustosetthedestinationbusoftheoscillatoroutput.
L/R:SendtheoutputtotheL/Rbus.Instead,itissentto
OUTPUTL/MONOandRaftertheTFX.
IFX15:ThesignalissenttoInsertEffectsIFX15.
Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus,orIFX15
buses.ChoosetheOffsettingifyouwanttoconnectthe
oscillatoroutputtoamastereffectinseries.UseOSC1
Send1,OSC1Send2,OSC2Send1,andOSC2Send2to
adjustthesendlevel.
UseOSC1Send1,OSC1Send2,OSC2Send1,andOSC2
Send2tospecifythesendlevelfortheMasterEffects.This
settingiseffectiveifBusissettoL/RorOff.
IfBusissettoIFX15,useSend1andSend2(p.12)
tospecifythesendlevelofthepostIFXsignal.
Send1respondstoCC#93,andSend2respondsto
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2,mul
tipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
Intheexampleshowninthenextdiagram,Oscillators1and
2outputsbeingsenttoIFX1.
Ifyouwanttoconnectinserteffectsinseries,turnChain
OnanduseChainTotospecifythechaindestination.
Effectscanbechainedonlyinascendingorderoftheirnum
ber;forexampleIFX1canbechainedtoIFX2throughIFX5,
andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3throughIFX5.Youcancre
ateachainofuptofiveinserteffectsinseries,IFX1through
IFX5.
WhentheInsertEffectsareconnectedinseries,thevaluesof
thePan(CC#8),Bus,Send1,andSend2parameters
forthepostIFXsignalwillbeused.
Inthefollowingillustration,ChainisOnandChainTo
issettothenextIFX,creatingaseriesconnectionof
IFX1IFX2IFX3.ThePan(CC#8),Bus,andSend1
andSend2settingsafterthesignalhaspassedthrough
IFX3willbeused.
For a drums program
IftheprogramsOscillatorMode(whichyoucaneditin
theeditor)isDrums,theUseDKitSettingwillbevalid.
Seethefollowingillustration.
IfthisisOn,theBus(IFX/Output),FXControlBus,
Send1,andSend2(whichyoucaneditinthemicroS
TATIONEditor/PlugInEditor)ofeachkeyoftheassigned
drumkitwillbevalid.
Forexample,youcansendasnaresoundtoIFX1toapply
theGateeffect,akicksoundtoIFX2toapplyEQ,andother
soundstoOUTPUTL/MONOandRwithoutapplyingany
InsertEffects.
Tip:Inmostofthepreloadeddrumkits,thefollowingtypes
ofdruminstrumenthavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settings.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Mono In - Mono Out
Mono In - Stereo Out
Efect
Efect
Efect +
Efect +
Wet
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX5) Routing
209
Ifyoudeselectthebox,alldruminstrumentoutputsare
senttothebusspecifiedbyBus(p.12).Youmayapply
anyInsertEffectstoalldruminstruments,regardlessofthe
DrumKitsettings.
IfthisisOff,theoutputofalldruminstrumentswillfollow
theBussetting.Thisletsyouapplyaninserteffecttoall
druminstruments,regardlessofthesettingsofthedrumkit.
Combination and Sequencer modes
UseBusfortimbres(Combination)andtracks(Sequencer)
toselectanInsertEffecttoapplytothecorrespondingtim
bresandtracks.Youcanroutemultipletimbresandtracks
toasingleInsertEffect.
Tip:Youcanuseeachtimbre/tracksBus,postIFXChain
toandChainparameterstocreateavarietyofroutings.
Example: Inserting one IFX into two or more timbres
Example: Inserting a separate IFX into each timbre, and inserting
another IFX later
Example: Sharing part of a timbres IFX chain with another timbre
AswithProgrammode,selectL/R,IFX15,orOffforeach
timbreandtrack.
Send1andSend2becomeavailableifBus(BusSelect)
hasbeensettoL/RorOff.IfyouvesetBus(BusSelect)to
IFX15,useSend1andSend2(p.19,p.37)following
theinserteffecttoadjustthesendlevels.
CC#91.Atthistime,theactualsendlevelusesthevalue
oftheSend1and2settingsforOscillators1and2of
thePrograms(selectedforthetimbresandtracks),mul
tipliedbytheSend1and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
ThefollowingdiagramshowsanexampleofCombination
mode.TheTimbre1outputissenttoIFX1andtheTimbre2
outputissenttoIFX2accordingtotheBussetting.Other
timbresaresenttoL/R.Theoutputsignalpassesthrough
theTFX,thengoestoOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Inthefollowingillustration,theIFX1ChainisOnand
ChaintoissettoIFX2,sothattheoutputofIFX1issentto
IFX2.
Timbre1isbeingprocessedbyIFX1:S01:St.Compand
IFX2:S29:St.Phasereffects.Timbre2isbeingprocessedby
theIFX2:S29:St.Phasereffect.TheRoutingMapareaofthe
nextdiagramshowsthesesettings.(Withthesesettings,
IFX35arenotbeingused.)
Drum Programs in Combination and Sequencer modes
Ifyouveselectedadrumprogram(OscillatorMode=
Drums)foratimbre(inCombinationmode)ortrack(in
Sequencermode),theDKitsettingwillbeavailableasa
choiceforBus(seethefollowingdiagram).
WiththeDKitsetting,settingssuchastheBus(IFX/Out
put)settingofeachkeyofthedrumkit(whichyoucanedit
inthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor)willbevalid,
andeachdruminstrumentwillbeoutputtothebusdestina
tion.Forexample,snaresoundscouldbesenttoIFX1,kick
soundstoIFX2,andothersoundstoL/MONOandR.
WithsettingsotherthanDKit,theoutputofalldruminstru
mentswillfollowtheBussettingofeachtimbre/track.
Thisletsyouapplyaninserteffecttoalldruminstruments,
regardlessofthesettingsofthedrumkit.
An example of when a double-size effect is selected for IFX1 and IFX4
Effect Guide
210
Drum Kit IFX Patch
IfBusissettoDKit,youllbeabletosettheDKitPatch.
ThisoptionallowsyoutochangetheroutingoftheInsert
EffectstemporarilybychangingBus(IFX/Output)Select
foreachkey.
Forexample,assumethattheDrumKitkeyassignmentis
setsothatasnaresoundisroutedtoIFX1andakicksound
isroutedtoIFX2etc.,IFX13.Inthiscase,ifyouwishto
assignIFX1and2totheProgramsusedbyothertimbres
andtracks,youcanviewtheroutingsothattheseDrumKit
soundsareroutedtoIFX3andIFX5respectively.
PatchingispossibleonlyiftheBus(IFX/Output)settingof
eachkeyofthedrumkit(whichyoucaneditinthemicroS
TATIONEditor/PlugInEditor)isassignedtoaninsert
effect.Thestateofthesesettingscanalsobeviewedinthe
Routingmapoftheeditor.ChooseDKitPatch,andthen
presstheOKbuttontoconfirm.
Ifyouwanttoreverttotheoriginalsettingsofthedrumkit,
usetheDrumKitIFXPatchwiththesettingsIFX1IFX1,
IFX2IFX2,IFX3IFX3,IFX4IFX4,andIFX5IFX5.
Inthefollowingdiagram,DrumProgramisassignedto
Timbre1,andnormalProgramsareassignedtoTimbres2
and3.BusissettoDKitforTimbre1,IFX1forTimbre2,
andIFX2forTimbre3.WithTimbre1,theBus(IFX/Output)
SelectforDrumKitsettingbecomeseffective.
UsetheDKitPatchparameterifyouwantthedrumpro
gramtouseeffectsotherthantimbres2and3.Temporarily
sendthedrumkitIFX1toIFX3,IFX2toIFX4,andIFX3to
IFX5.Executingwiththesesettingswilltemporarilychange
theeffectswherethedrumkitisbeingsent.
Mixer
InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,theinsert
effectpages(IFX1IFX5)allowyoutospecifythePan
(CC#8),busselectBus,FXControlbusFXCtrl,and
mastereffectsendlevelsSend1andSend2forthesig
nalthathaspassedthroughtheinserteffect.
IfyouhaveturnedontheChaintoconnecttheInsert
Effectsinseries,theseparametersPan(CC#8)Send2forthe
postIFX(lastInsertEffectinthechain)signalbecomeeffec
tive.
Pan: CC#8
ThisparameterenablesyoutosetthepanofthepostIFX
signal.
Ifyouareusingthestereoin/stereooutInsertEffects,set
thisparametertoC064toenablethePansettingsforthe
oscillators,timbres,tracks.
Ifyouareusingmonoin/stereooutormonoin/monoout
InsertEffects,thePansettingsfortheoscillators,timbres,
andtracksareignored,andtheyaresettoCenter.Usethe
Pan(CC#8)parametertosetthepan.L000ishardleft,and
R127ishardright.
Formoreabouteffecttypessuchasstereoin/stereoout,See
In/Outonpage 208.
YoucancontroltheseparametersviaCC#8.
Bus (Bus Select)
Thisparameterenablesyoutospecifythedestinationbus
forthepostIFXsignals.
L/RisacommonsettingtosendsignalstotheTotalEffect
(TFX)beforetheyareroutedtotheOUTPUTL/MONOand
Routputs.
IfsettoOff,thesignalwillnotbesenttotheL/Rbus.
ChoosethissettingifyouwanttousetheSend1or
Send2levelstoroutethesignalthroughamastereffectin
series(i.e.,notasasendeffect).
Insert Effect = Stereo In Stereo Out
OSC1: Amp1 Pan = L001
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R127 Left Center Right
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
Left Center Right
Left Center Right
OSC1 OSC2
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R096
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC2: Amp2 Pan = R127 Left Center Right
Post IFX Pan: CC#8
C064
Left Center Right
L032
L001
R096
R127
OSC1 OSC2
Insert Effect = Mono In - Stereo Out
Mono In - Mono Out
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) Controlling the Insert Effects via MIDI
211
FX Ctrl (FX Control Bus)
ThisspecifiestheFXControlbusthatfollowstheinsert
effect.TheFXControlbuses(FXControl1,2)aremonotwo
channelbuses.
ThemicroSTATIONprovidestwo(monotwochannel)
effectcontrolbuses,givingyouawiderangeofwaystocon
troleffects.
FXControlbusescanbeusedwithvocoder,limiter,and
gatetypeeffects.
FordetailsontheeffectsthatbeusedwithFXControlbuses,
SeeFXControlBusonpage 207.
Send1, Send2
Theseparametersenableyoutosetthesendlevelofthesig
nalsroutedtoMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thesignalis
sentinstereotomastereffectsMFX1andMFX2.Thisis
validwhenBus(BusSelect)isL/RorOff.
Ifyourenotusinganinserteffect:
InProgrammode,thePROGEDIT:FXRoutingOSC1
Send1,OSC1Send2,OSC2Send1andOSC2Send
2settingswillspecifythesendlevelstothemaster
effects.
InCombinationorSequencermodes,theSend1and
Send2settingsofeachtimbre/trackwillspecifythe
sendlevelstothemastereffects.
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
CC#91.
Controlling the Insert Effects via
MIDI
UsingtheDynamicModulation(Dmod)functionenables
youtocontrolalleffectparametersinrealtimeduringper
formancefromthecontrollersofthemicroSTATIONora
connectedMIDIsequencer.Youcanalsocontrolthe
Pan(CC#8),Send1,andSend2parametersinthesame
way.
Program mode
YoucancontroltheparametersontheglobalMIDIchannel
(p.60).
Combination mode
TheIFX1IFX5pagesletsyouspecifythecontrolchannel
Ch(ControlChannel)forIFX1IFX5.Youcanchoosefrom
CH0116,Gch,orAllR(AllRouted).
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbedis
playedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthetim
brethatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftheroutedtimbres
havedifferentMIDIchannelsettings,thisparameterisused
tospecifythechannelthatwillcontroltheinserteffect.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel.Thisisacommonsetting.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.
IfyouveselectedadrumprogramforaCombination
modetimbreoraSequencermodetrack,andsetits
BustoDKit,theMIDIchannelofthattimbre/track
willbevalidifanyoneofIFX15issettoAllR,regard
lessofthedrumkitsBus(IFX/Output)(p.191)set
tingortheDKitPatchsetting.
Sequencer mode
UseChparameters(p.46)oftheIFX1IFX5pagestoset
upthecontrolchannelsforIFX1IFX5.Selectanappropriate
optionfromCh0116andAllRouted.
Ch0116:Selectthiswhenyouwanttocontroleachinsert
effectfromadifferentchannel.An*symbolwillbedis
playedattherightoftheMIDIchannelCh0116ofthetrack
thatisroutedtoeachinserteffect.Iftwoormoretrackswith
differingMIDIchannelsCh0116arebeingsenttoasingle
inserteffect,thisparameterisusedtospecifytheonetrack
thatwillcontroltheinserteffect.
AllR:Selectthisoptiontocontroltheparametersonallthe
channels(channels116thathavea*mark)thatare
routedtothecorrespondingInsertEffects.AllRisatypical
option.Ifyouwishtocontroltheparametersonasingle
channel,youmayselectitfromCh0116.
Note:Sinceexclusivemessagescanberecordedin
Sequencermode,youcanusethemtoautomaticallyswitch
effectsormodifyeffectparametervaluesduringthesong
playback.
Master Effects (MFX1, 2)
In/Out
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereoin/
stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesendlevel
totheMasterEffects.(ForSend1and2,seeRoutingand
Mixer.)
MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed)signal
specifiedinWet/Dry.OnlytheWet(processed)signalwill
beoutput.TheoutputsignalsfromtheMasterEffectsare
routedtotheL/Rbuswiththeoutputlevelspecifiedby
Return1andReturn2.
ThisoutputismixedwiththeL/Rbusoutput,andthensent
tothetotaleffect.
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.Thepro
cessedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowingways,
accordingtothetypeofeffects001134.
Ineachmode,theMFXMFX1andMFX2On/Offparame
tersturnthemastereffectson/off.Whenoff,theoutputis
mutedinthesamewayas000:NoEffect.
SeparatelyfromthesettingofthisOn/Offbutton,
MFX1andMFX2canbeswitchedoffbyreceivinga
Mono In - Mono Out
Efect
Efect
Efect +
Efect +
Wet
Effect Guide
212
MIDIcontrolchangeCC#94.Value0willturnthemoff,
andvalue1127willturnthemon.Youcanalsouse
EffectSW(p.59)toturnMFX1and2onandoff.This
MIDIcontrolisperformedontheglobalMIDIchannel
(p.60).
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(D00:St.MltLmtD13:EarlyRef)use
twiceasmuchspaceasothereffects.
YoucanuseadoublesizeeffectformastereffectMFX1.If
youveselectedadoublesizeeffect,MFX2wontbeavail
ableforuse.
Routing
IfyouarenotusinganyInsertEffectsinanymode,theMas
terEffectssendlevelsaredeterminedbytheSend1and
Send2parametersspecifiedindependentlyfortheoscilla
tors(Programmode),timbres(Combinationmode),tracks
(Sequencermode).
Forexample,sinceyoucanadjustthemastereffectsendlev
elsforeachtimbre/track,youcanadjustthesettingssothat
reverbisapplieddeeplytothepiano,lightlytothestrings,
andnotatalltothebass.
Ifyoureusinginserteffects,usethepostIFXSend1and
Send2toadjustthesendamounts.
Program mode
UsetheOSC1Send1,OSC1Send2,OSC2Send1,and
OSC2Send2parametersortheSend1andSend2
parametersforthepostIFX15signals,tosettheMaster
Effectsendlevel.
IfyouhavesetBustoL/RorOff,OSC1Send1,OSC1
Send2,OSC2Send1,andOSC2Send2(p.11)are
effective.Theseparameterscanbesetforoscillators1and2
individually.
IfyouhavesetBustoIFX1IFX5,Send1andSend2
forthepostIFX15signalsareeffective.Ifyouareusingthe
InsertEffectsinchain(series),theSend1andSend2
parametersforthepostIFX(lastIFX)areeffective.
(Mixeronpage 210)
Send1respondstoCC#93andSend2respondsto
CC#91ontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60).Atthis
time,theactualsendlevelusesthevalueoftheSend1
and2settingsforOscillators1and2,multipliedbythe
Send1and2valuesreceivedviaMIDI.
IfyouhaveselectedDrumsforOscillatorMode(which
youcaneditinthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor)of
aProgram,theUseDKitSet(p.11)becomesavailable.
Ifyouturnonthis,Send1andSend2levelsforeachkey
oftheselectedDrumKitbecomeeffective.
IfBus(IFX/Output)(p.191)issettoL/RorOfffora
druminstrumentkey,Send1(toMFX1)and
Send2(toMFX2)(p.192)becomeeffective.
IfBus(IFX/Output)issettoIFX15,thepostIFX15
Send1andSend2(p.12)becomeeffective.
Ifthisisoff,OSC1Send1,OSC1Send2,OSC2Send1,
andOSC2Send2(p.11),andthepostIFX15Send1
andSend2(p.12)willbevalidforalldruminstruments,
inthesamewayaswhenOscillatorModeisSingleorDou
ble.
UseSend1andSend2(p.19,p.37)fortimbres(Combi
nation)andtracks(Sequencer)tosettheSend1and2levels
foreachtimbreandtrack.AswithProgrammode,ifBus
issettoL/RorOff,Send1andSend2becomeeffective.
TheactuallevelsusetheseSend1and2levelvalues,multi
pliedbythesendlevelvaluesofoscillators1and2.
Send level
ForexampleifyousettheprogramsOSC1Send1to127,
OSC1Send2to064,OSC2Send1to064,OSC2Send2
to127,andthecombinationsSend1to064andSend2to
127,theactualsendlevelsofthecombinationwillbeasfol
lows.
OSC1Send1=127(100%)*064(50%)=064(50%)
OSC1Send2=064(50%)*127(100%)=064(50%)
OSC2Send1=064(50%)*064(50%)=032(25%)
OSC2Send2=127(100%)*127(100%)=127(100%)
IfIFX15isselectedforBus,usetheSend1andSend2
parametersforthepostIFXsignals.
CC#91.IfSend1andSend2foreachtimbre/track
areeffective,theparameterwillbecontrolledonthe
MIDIchannelssetforthecorrespondingtimbresand
tracks.IftheSend1andSend2parametersforthe
postIFX15signalsareeffective,theycanbecon
trolledontheMIDIchannelsassignedtoIFX15.
AnexampleforCombinationmodeisgivenbelow.Inthe
followingdiagram,BusissetsothatTimbre1isroutedto
IFX1,Timbre2toIFX2,Timbres3and4toIFX3,Timbres5
16toL/R.
Inthiscase,useSend1andSend2forthepostIFX1
(S01:St.Comp)signaltosetthesendleveloftheTimbre1
routedtotheMasterEffect.(Inthisexampletheyaresetto
035and000.)
Inthesameway,useSend1andSend2forthepostIFX2
signaltosetthesendlevelsofTimbres2,andusethe
Send1andSend2parametersforthepostIFX3signalto
setthesendlevelsofTimbres3and4.
Fortimbres516,theSend1andSend2settingsinthe
precedingillustrationwillbevalid(inthiscase,thesend
levelswillbetheprogramsSend1andSend2settings
foreachoscillatormultipliedbytheseSend1andSend
settings).
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) Mixer
213
BusDKitisvalidifyouveselectedadrumtrackfora
Timbre(Combination)orTrack(Sequencer).
IfyouselectDKit,theBus(IFX/Output)(p.191)settings
foreachkeybecomeeffective,andeachdruminstrument
soundwillberoutedtothecorrespondingbuses.Atthis
time,theactualsendlevelsusetheseSend1and2values,
multipliedbytheSend1and2settingsforeachDrumKit
key.
IfadrumkitsBus(IFX/Output)issettoL/RorOff(which
youcaneditinthemicroSTATIONEditor/PlugInEditor),
thelevelswillbetheseSend1andSend2settingsmul
tipliedbythesendlevelsyouspecifyinOSC1Send1and
OSC1Send2(p.11),justasinothercases(Oscillator
ModeSingleorDouble).
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,useSend1and
Send2forthepostIFXsignal.
Mixer
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaredeterminedbythe
sendlevels.IntheMFX1andMFX2pagesofeachmode,
youcanspecifytheeffectparameters,outputlevel,and
chaining(seriesconnection)betweenthetwomastereffects.
1. Return1, Return2
Theseadjusttheamountofsignalthatisreturnedfromthe
mastereffectsMFX1andMFX2outputstotheL/Rbus.
TheleftsidevalueoftheWet/DryparameterfortheMFX1
or2effectistheoutputlevelofthatmastereffect.(Inother
wordsifWet/Dryis25:75,theoutputlevelis75%.Itis100%
ifWet,and0%ifDry.)
TheWet/DryvaluemultipliedbytheReturn1orReturn2
valueissenttotheL/Rbus.Thissoundisthenmixedwith
theoscillatoroutputBusL/RortheBusL/Routputthat
followstheinserteffect.
Forexample,withMFX1Wet/Drysetto50:50(50%)and
Return1setto64(50%),theresultanteffectlevelwillbe
25%.Theeffectlevelismaximum(100%)whenWet/Dryis
settoWetandReturn1issetto127.
2. Chain
IfthisisOn,themastereffectswillbeconnectedintheorder
ofmastereffect1mastereffect2.
Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,theoutputof
MFX1:S64:StereoChorusisaddedtotheinputofMFX2:
105:Rev.Hall.
3. Chain Level
ThisspecifiesthesignallevelfromMFX1toMFX2when
Chainison.
Controlling the Master Effects via
MIDI
Inthesamewayasforinserteffects,parametersofthemas
tereffectscanalsobecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamic
Modulation(Dmod)fromthemicroSTATIONscontrollers
oranexternalMIDIdeviceduringperformanceorfromthe
sequencer.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel
(p.60).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrolchannel
forMFX1andMFX2arespecifiedbytheCh(ControlChan
nel)settingintheMFX1and2pages(p.25,p.46,p.155,
p.173).YoucanchooseCh0116orGch.
Ch0116:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparam
etersforeachMasterEffectondifferentchannels.
Gch:Selectthisoptionifyouwishtocontroltheparameters
ontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60).Thisisthenormalset
ting.
Note:SinceSequencermodeletsyourecordandplayexclu
sivemessagesandedittracksthatincludeSystemExclusive
events,youcanusethemtoswitcheffectsormodifyeffect
parametervaluesduringsongplayback.
Effect Guide
214
Total Effect (TFX)
In/Out
ThetotaleffectTFXisstereoinandstereoout.TheDry
(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dryparametersendstheste
reoinputsounddirectlytothestereooutput.Thewayin
whichtheWet(processed)sideisoutputdependsonthe
typeofeffect,asfollows.
Ineachmode,theTFXOn/Offparameterturnsthetotal
effecton/off.Whenoff,theeffectisbypassed.Thestereo
inputsignalisoutputunchangedinstereo,justaswhen000:
NoEffectisselected.
SeparatelyfromthisOn/Offbutton,MIDIcontrol
changeCC#95canbereceivedtoturnTFXoff.Acon
trolchangevalueof0turnsthemoff,andavalueof1
127restoresthemtothepriorsetting.Youcanalsouse
EffectSW(p.59)toturnoffTFXinthesameway.This
iscontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60).
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(D00:St.MltLmtD13:EarlyRefl)cant
beusedforthetotaleffect.
Routing
ThetotaleffectTFXiaplacedimmediatelybeforetheOUT
PUTL/MONOandRoutputs.Effect(TFX)isavailableinall
modes.
IftheBussettingforanoscillator(Programmode),timbre
(Combinationmode),track(Sequencermode),orthepost
insertBusissettoL/R,thesignalwillbeoutputfromthe
OUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.
ThesoundfromMFX1and2isroutedthroughTFX,and
thenoutputtoOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
Mixer
MASTER (Master Volume)
Thissetsthelevelofthefinaloutputafterpassingthrough
thetotaleffect.
Using MIDI to control the Total
Effect
InthesamewayasforInsertandMasterEffects,theTotal
EffectcanbecontrolledinrealtimeviaDynamicModula
tion(Dmod).YoucanuseeitherthebuiltinmicroSTA
TIONscontrollersoranexternalMIDIdevice,duringlive
performanceorfromasequencer.
Program mode
EffectparametersarecontrolledontheglobalMIDIchannel
(p.60).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thecontrolchannel
forTFXisspecifiedbytheCh(ControlChannel)(p.25,
p.46,p.155,p.173)settingintheTFXpage.Youcanchoose
Ch0116orGch.
Ch0116:Choosefromthesesettingsifyouwanttocontrol
eachtotaleffectonaseparatechannel.
Gch:Choosethissettingifyouwanttocontrolthetotal
effectontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60)
InSequencermode,youcanrecordandplaybackexclusive
messages,andedittracksthatincludeSystemExclusive
events.Thisletsyouswitcheffectsorvarythevalueofeffect
parameterswhileasongplays.
Main Outputs
ThemainL/MONOandRoutputsofthemicroSTATION
areoutputfromtheOUTPUTL/MONO,Rjacks,andthe
headphonejack.
Mono In - Mono Out
Efect
Efect
Efect +
Efect +
Wet
Effect/Mixer Block Diagram Using MIDI to control the Total Effect
215
Effect/Mixer Block Diagram
Program mode
P
a
n

O
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

1
S
e
n
d
1
I
F
X
2

B
u
s
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
1

B
u
s
I
F
X
1
C
h
a
i
n

&

C
h
a
i
n

t
o
M
F
X
2
M
F
X
1
R
e
t
u
r
n
1

/

2
A
U
D
I
O

O
U
T
P
U
T
L
/
M
o
n
o
,

R
I
F
X
4

B
u
s
I
F
X
4
I
F
X
3

B
u
s
I
F
X
3
I
F
X
5
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

O
f
f

O
s
c
i
l
l
a
t
o
r

2
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
s
t
e
r
e
o
I
n
s
e
r
t

E
f
f
e
c
t
s
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
P
a
n
:

C
C
#
8
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
l
e
c
t

f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R
S
e
n
d
2
s
t
e
r
e
o
M
a
s
t
e
r

E
f
f
e
c
t
s
L
/
R

B
u
s
s
t
e
r
e
o
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

I
F
X
1
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
C
h
a
i
n

E
f
f
e
c
t

/

M
i
x
e
r

B
l
o
c
k

D
i
a
g
r
a
m

i
n

P
r
o
g
r
a
m

M
o
d
e
I
F
X
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
S
e
n
d
1

/

2
M
F
X
/
T
F
X
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
F
X
M
a
s
t
e
r

L
e
v
e
l
S
e
l
e
c
t

f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R

I
F
X
1
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
3

I
F
X
4

I
F
X
5
O
f
f
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
o
t
a
l

E
f
f
e
c
t
O
f
f
F
X

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

B
u
s
m
o
n
o

x

2
I
F
X
5

B
u
s
Effect Guide
216
P
a
n
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

1
S
e
n
d
1
I
F
X
2

B
u
s
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
1

B
u
s
I
F
X
1
C
h
a
i
n

&

C
h
a
i
n

t
o
M
F
X
2
M
F
X
1
R
e
t
u
r
n
1

/

2
A
U
D
I
O

O
U
T
P
U
T
L
/
M
o
n
o
,

R
I
F
X
4

B
u
s
I
F
X
4
I
F
X
3

B
u
s
I
F
X
3
I
F
X
5

B
u
s
I
F
X
5
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

O
f
f
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

2
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
s
t
e
r
e
o
I
n
s
e
r
t

E
f
f
e
c
t
s
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
P
a
n
(
C
C
#
8
)
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
S
e
l
e
c
t

f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R
S
e
n
d
2
s
t
e
r
e
o
M
a
s
t
e
r

E
f
f
e
c
t
s
L
/
R

B
u
s
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
C
h
a
i
n

E
f
f
e
c
t

/

M
i
x
e
r

B
l
o
c
k

D
i
a
g
r
a
m

i
n

C
o
m
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
/
S
e
q
u
e
n
c
e
r

M
o
d
e
I
F
X
P
o
s
t

I
F
X
S
e
n
d
1

/

2
M
F
X
/
T
F
X
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
s
t
e
r
e
o
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
F
X
M
a
s
t
e
r

L
e
v
e
l
S
e
l
e
c
t

f
r
o
m
:
L
/
R

I
F
X
1
I
F
X
2
I
F
X
3

I
F
X
4

I
F
X
5
O
f
f
s
t
e
r
e
o
T
o
t
a
l

E
f
f
e
c
t
O
f
f
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

L
/
R
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

I
F
X
1
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

3
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

4
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

I
F
X
4
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=

O
f
f
T
i
m
b
r
e
/
T
r
a
c
k

1
6
B
u
s

S
e
l
e
c
t
=
L
/
R
F
X

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

B
u
s
m
o
n
o

x

2
Single size effects 000: No Effect
217
Single size effects
000: No Effect
Selectthisoptionwhenyoudonotuseanyeffects.The
InsertEffect/TotalEffectsectionoutputsunprocessed
signalsandtheMasterEffectsectionmutestheoutput.
001: St.Comp (Stereo Compressor)
Thiseffectcompressestheinputsignaltoregulatethelevel
andgiveapunchyeffect.Itisusefulforguitar,piano,and
drumsounds.Thisisastereocompressor.Youcanlinkleft
andrightchannels,oruseeachchannelseparately.
Envelope
Thisparameterselectswhethertheleftandrightchannels
arelinkedtocontrolbothsignalssimultaneously,orwhether
eachchanneliscontrolledindependently.
Sensitivity
Output Level
TheSensitivityparametersetsthesensitivityofthe
compressor.Ifthisparameterissettoahighervalue,lower
levelsoundswillbeboosted.WithahigherSensitivity,the
overallvolumelevelishigher.Toadjustthefinalvolume
level,usetheOutputLevelparameter.
Attack
Thisparametercontrolstheattacklevel.
002: Red Comp
Whenplayingchordsonanelectricpianoorsimilar
instrument,itshelpfultouseacompressortokeepeach
notesmoothandwellbalanced.Inadditiontoadistinctive
percussiveaccent,itwillalsoprovidealongsustain.This
effectmodelsapopularcompressorwithacleansound
thatsperfectforpopandfunkmusic.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Envelope
L/R Mix,
L/R Individ-
ually
Determines whether
the left and right
channels are linked or
used separately p.217
Sensitivity Sens 1...100
Sets the sensitivity
p.217
Attack 1...100
Sets the attack level
p.218
EQ Trim PreEQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
Lo EQ Freq
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
mid-low) of the low-
range equalizer
Hi EQ Freq
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
high-range equalizer
Pre LEQ
Gain [dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
Sets the gain of the
Low EQ
Pre HEQ
Gain [dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
High EQ
Output
Level
Out Level 0...100
Sets the output level
of the compressor
p.227
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the compressor
output level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for the
compressor output
level
Wet/Dry ?
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
Selects a modulation
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
LEQ HEQ
Compressor
Compressor
Envelope Select
Output Level
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Full
premiered
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Sensitivity Sens 1...100 Sets the sensitivity
Attack 1...100 Sets the attack level
Level Out Level 0...100
of the compressor
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the compressor
output level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for the
compressor output
level
Sensitivity=100
Sensitivity=40
Dry
Wet
Time
Level
Compressor - Sensitivity
L
o
u
d
e
r

Dry
Wet
Time
Level
Attack=80
Attack=20
Compressor - Attack
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Envelope - Control
Output Level
Compressor
Effect Guide
218
003:St. Limitr (Stereo Limiter)
TheLimiterregulatestheinputsignallevel.Itissimilarto
theCompressor,exceptthattheLimitercompressesonly
signalsthatexceedthespecifiedleveltolowerunnecessary
peaksignals.TheLimiterappliesapeakingtypeEQtothe
triggersignal(whichcontrolsthedegreeoftheLimiter
effect),allowingyoutosetanybandwidthtobecovered.
Thiseffectisastereolimiter.Youcanlinkleftandright
channels,oruseeachchannelindividually.
Envelope Source
ByselectingFXControl1orFXControl2youcanusethe
signalofFXControlBus1or2asthetriggersignal.
Forinstance,youmightuseadifferent,unprocessedsound
asthetrigger,orapplyalimitertriggeredbyadifferent
timbre(Combination)ortrack(Sequence).Formore
information,pleaseseeFXControlBusonpage 207.
Envelope
WhenL/RMixisselectedforthisparameter,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinkedtocontroltheLimiterusingthe
mixedsignal.IfLOnly(orROnly)isselected,theleftand
rightchannelsarelinked,andtheLimiteriscontrolledvia
onlytheleft(orright)channel.
WithL/Rindividually,theleftandrightchannelscontrolthe
Limiterindividually.
Ratio
Threshold [dB]
Gain Adjust [dB]
ThisparametersetsthesignalcompressionRatio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
Attack
Release
Theseparameterssettheattacktimeandreleasetime.A
higherattacktimewillcausethecompressiontobeapplied
moreslowly.
Full
premiered
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Envelope
Source
Env Src
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the trigger
source to use: the
input signal, FX
Control Bus 1, or FX
Control Bus 2 p.218
FX Control
Trim
0...100
Sets the trigger input
level from FX Control
Bus 1/2
Envelope
L/R Mix,
L Only, R
Only, L/R
Individually
Selects from linking
both channels,
controlling only from
left channel, only
from the right
channel, or
controlling each
channel individually
p.218
Ratio
1.0 : 1
50.0 : 1,
Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.218
Threshold
[dB]
Thresh[dB] 40...0
Sets the level above
which the
compressor is applied
p.218
Attack 1...100
Sets the attack time
p.218
Release 1...100
Sets the release time
p.218
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Gain [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the output gain
p.218
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the output gain
Amount 63...+63
Sets the modulation
amount of the output
gain
Side PEQ
PEQ Insert
Off, On
Toggles between on/
off of the trigger
signals EQ p.219
Side PEQ
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Switches between
effect output monitor
and trigger signal
monitor p.219
Side PEQ
Cutoff [Hz]
20...12.00k
Sets the EQ center
frequency for the
trigger signal p.219
Side PEQ Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the EQ
bandwidth for the
Side PEQ
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
Sets the EQ gain for
the trigger signal
p.219
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Limiter
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Trigger Monitor
+
Envelope Select
Input Level
Output Level
Threshold
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder
L
o
u
d
e
r

Time
Level
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry Ratio=1.0 : 1
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=1
Release=1
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=100
Release=100
Dry
Wet
Wet
Release
Attack
Limiter - Attack / Release
Single size effects 004: MulLimitr (Multiband Limiter)
219
Trigger Monitor
TurningthisparameterOnwillcausethetriggersignaltobe
output,insteadoftheeffectsound.Usethisparameterto
checkthetriggersignalwithEQapplied.
Usually,thisshouldbesettoOff.
PEQ Insert
PEQ Cutoff [Hz]
Q
Gain [dB]
TheseparametersareusedtosettheEQamountthats
appliedtothetriggersignal.
TheLimiterdetermineswhetherthecompressionisapplied
ornot,basedonthepostEQtriggersignal.Settingthe
equalizerallowsyoutosettheLimitertorespondtoany
frequencyband.
004: MulLimitr (Multiband Limiter)
ThiseffectappliestheLimitertothelowrange,midrange,
andhighrangeoftheinputsignal.Youcancontrol
dynamicsforeachrangetoadjustthesoundpressureofthe
lowrange,midrange,andhighrangeinadifferentway
fromtheEQ.
Low Offset [dB]
Mid Offset [dB]
High Offset [dB]
Theseparameterssetthegainofthetriggersignal.
Forexample,ifyoudonotwanttoapplycompressiontothe
highrange,reducetheHighOffsetvaluedownbelowthe
Thresholdlevel.Inthisway,thehighrangelimiterwill
notrespond,andcompressionwillnotbeapplied.
005: St.MstLmt
(Stereo Mastering Limiter)
Thisisastereolimiterthatisoptimizedformasteringsongs.
006: St.Gate (Stereo Gate)
Thiseffectmutestheinputsignalwhenitfallsbelowa
specifiedlevel.Youcanalsoinverttheon/offstatusofthe
gate,orusenoteon/offmessagestoturnthegateon/off
directly.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Ratio
1.0 : 1...50.0 : 1,
Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.218
Threshold
[dB]
Thresh[dB] 40...0
which the
p.218
Attack 1...100
p.218
Release 1...100
p.218
Low Offset
[dB]
LowOfs[dB] 40...0
Gain of the low-range
Mid Offset
[dB]
MidOfs[dB] 40...0
Gain of the mid-range
High Offset
[dB]
Hi Ofs[dB] 40...0
Gain of the high-
range trigger signal
p.219
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Gain [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.218
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the output gain
Amount 63...+63
Sets the modulation
gain
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Gain Adjust
Mid Offset
Low Offset
High Offset
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Low
Mid
High
Band-Pass Filters
+ Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Full
premiered
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Threshold
[dB]
Trsh[dB] 30.0...0.0
which the
p.218
Out Ceiling
[dB]
Ceil[dB] 30.0...0.0 Sets the output gain
Release [ms] Rel[ms] 0.50...1000.0
p.218
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
premiered
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Envelope
Source
Env Src
D-mod,
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the source to
control the gate: D-
mod control, or use
the input signal or FX
Control Bus 1 or 2 as a
trigger p.218
Fx Control
Trim
0...100
Sets the trigger input
level from FX Control
Bus 1/2
Envelope
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Selects the control
signal: left and right
linked, left only, or
right only p.218
Mid Source Off...Tempo
Selects the source
that will control the
gate when Envelope
Src = D-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Limiter
Out Ceiling
Out Ceiling
Envelope - Control +
Left
Right
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Envelope Source
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Trigger Monitor
+
Envelope Select
Gate Delay
Gate Delay
D
-mod
Effect Guide
220
Threshold
Attack
Release
Thresholdspecifiesthelevelwheregatingoccurswhen
EnvelopeSelectissettoL/RMix,LOnly,orROnly.
AttackandReleasespecifytheattacktimeandrelease
timeofthegate.
Polarity
Thisinvertsthepolarityofthegateon/offoperation.With
thesetting,thegatewillclosewhentheinputsignal
exceedsthespecifiedlevel.Thedirectioninwhichthe
modulationsourceopensorclosesthegatewillalsobe
reversed.
Delay Time [ms]
Thissetsthedelaytimefortheinputtothegate.Whenusing
shorterAttackTimesettings,youcanlengthentheDelay
Timesothatthesoundisinputafterthegateopens.
007: St.P4EQ
(Stereo Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Thisisastereo4bandparametricequalizer.Youcanselect
peakingtypeorshelvingtypeforBand1and4.Thegainof
Band2canbecontrolledbydynamicmodulation.
Band1 Type
Band4 Type
SelectsafiltertypeforBand1and4.
Polarity +,
Switches the polarity
of gating p.220
Threshold 0...100
Sets the level where
gating is applied
p.220
Attack 1...100
p.220
Release 1...100
p.220
Side PEQ
PEQ Insert
Off, On
Switches the trigger
signal equalizer on/
off p.219
Side PEQ
Trigger
Monitor
Off, On
Switches between
monitoring the effect
output and the
Side PEQ
PEQ Cutoff
[Hz]
20...12.00k
Sets the center
frequency of the
equalizer for the
Side PEQ Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the bandwidth of
the equalizer for the
Side PEQ
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0
equalizer for the
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Input Level
Output Level
Threshold
Louder
L
o
u
d
e
r

Threshold
Attack=1
Release=1
Attack=100
Release=100
Dry
Wet
Wet
Attack Release
Gate - Attack / Release
Gate - Threshold
Full
premiered
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Trim 0...100 Sets the input level
Band1 Type B1Type
Peaking,
Shelving-
Low
Selects the type of
Band 1 p.220
Band4 Type B4Type
Peaking,
Shelving-
High
Selects the type of
Band 4 p.220
Band2
Dynamic
Gain Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source of
the Band 2 gain p.221
Amount [dB] 18.0...+18.0
Sets the modulation
amount of Band 2
gain p.221
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
B1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q B1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
B1 Gain[dB] 18.0...+18.0
Sets the gain of Band
1
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
B2 F[Hz] 50...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2 Q B2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Gain [dB]
B2 Gain[dB] 18.0...+18.0
2
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
B3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q B3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
B3 Gain[dB] 18.0...+18.0
3
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
B4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q B4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
B4 Gain[dB] 18.0...+18.0
4
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4
PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ
LEQ
LEQ
HEQ
HEQ
PEQ PEQ PEQ PEQ
Trim
Trim
D
-mod
Single size effects 008: St.G7EQ (Stereo Graphic 7-Band EQ)
221
Q
Theseparameterssetthebandwidthofeachequalizer.The
higherthevalue,thenarrowerthebandbecomes.
Band2 Dynamic Gain Source
Amount [dB]
YoucancontrolthegainofBand2usingthemodulation
source.
008: St.G7EQ
(Stereo Graphic 7-Band EQ)
Thisisastereo7bandgraphicequalizer.Thebargraphof
thegainsettingforeachbandgivesyouaclear,visualidea
offrequencyresponses.Youcanselectacenterfrequency
settingforeachbandfromtwelvetypes,accordingtothe
sound.
Type
Thisparameterselectsacombinationofcenterfrequencies
foreachband.Thecenterfrequencyofeachbandisshown
ontherightsideofthescreen.
Youcanconfigurea21BandGraphicEQrangingfrom80
Hzto18kHzifyouroutethreeGraphic7BandEQeffectsin
series,withasettingof7:Low,9:Mid,and11:Highforeach
EQ.
009: St.Excitr (Stereo Exciter)
ThiseffectisacombinationoftheExciter.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Type
1:Wide 1,
2:Wide 2,
3:Wide 3,
4:Half Wide
1, 5:Half
Wide 2,
6:Half Wide
3, 7:Low,
8:Wide Low,
9:Mid,
10:Wide Mid,
11:High,
12:Wide
High
Selects a combination
of center frequencies
for each band p.221
Band1 [dB] B1 18.0...+18.0 Sets the gain of Band 1
3dB
3dB
Band1 Cutoff Band4 Cutoff
0dB
+Gain
-Gain
Band1 Type=Peaking
Band1 Type=Shelving Low
Band4 Type=Peaking
Band4 Type=Shelving High
Parametric 4EQ - Band1, Band4 Type
Band2 Cutoff
Band2 Cutoff
0dB
+6dB
+15dB
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0
Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= +9.0
D
-mod
0dB
+6dB
- 9dB
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0
Band2 Gain Mod Amount[dB]= -15.0
D
-mod
Parametric 4EQ - Band2 Gain Mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4
Trim
Trim
Band5 Band6 Band7
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Exciter Blend Blend 100...+100
Sets the intensity
(depth) of the Exciter
effect p.222
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the Exciter intensity
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the Exciter
intensity
Emphasis
Freq
Frequency 0...70
Sets the frequency to
be emphasized p.222
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the frequency to be
emphasized
Amount 70...+70
Sets the amount of
modulation of the
frequency to be
emphasized
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the Enhancer width
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the
Enhancer width
EQ Trim PreEQ Trim 0...100
Sets the 2-band EQ
input level
Lo EQ Freq
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
Hi EQ Freq
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
LEQ Gain
[dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
Low EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
High EQ
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
EQ Trim
Delay
Delay
Depth
D
-mod
Exciter
Exciter
Enhancer
Effect Guide
222
Exciter Blend
Thisparametersetsthedepth(intensity)oftheExcitereffect.
Positivevaluesgiveafrequencypattern(tobeemphasized)
differentfromnegativevalues.
Emphasis Freq
Thisparametersetsthefrequencytobeemphasized.Higher
valueswillemphasizelowerfrequencies.
010: St.Isolat (Stereo Isolator)
Thisisastereoeffectthatseparatestheinputsignalintolow,
mid,andhighfrequencybands,andcontrolsthevolumeof
eachbandindependently.Forexampleyoucanseparately
boostorcutthekick,snare,andhihatsoundsfromadrum
signalinrealtime.
011: St. Wah
(Stereo Wah/Auto Wah)
Thisstereowaheffectallowsyoutocreatesoundsthatrange
fromvintagewahpedalsimulationstoautowah
simulations,aswellasawidevarietyofothersettings.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Low/Mid
[Hz]
Lo/Mid[Hz] 100...500
Sets the frequency at
which the low and
mid bands are
divided
Mid/High
[Hz]
Mid/Hi[Hz] 2000...6000
which the mid and
high bands are
divided
Low
Gain [dB]
Low G[dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the low-
frequency gain
Low
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the source
that will modulate
low-frequency gain
Low
Amount
72...+72
Sets the amount by
which the low-
frequency gain will
be modulated
Mid
Gain [dB]
Mid G[dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the mid-
frequency gain
Mid
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for mid-frequency
gain
Mid
Amount
72...+72
Sets the amount by
which the mid-
frequency gain will
be modulated
High
Gain [dB]
HighG[dB]
Inf,
59...+12
Sets the high-
frequency gain
High
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for high-frequency
gain
High
Amount
72...+72
Sets the amount by
which the high-
frequency gain will
be modulated
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
Isolator
Low
Mid
High
Trim
Low
Mid
High
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Frequency
Bottom
Freq Btm 0...100
Sets the lower limit of
the wah center
frequency p.223
Frequency
Top
Freq Top 0...100
Sets the upper limit of
the wah center
frequency p.223
Sweep Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control
from auto-wah,
modulation source,
and LFO p.223
Source Src Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the wah when
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Respns 0...100
Sets the response
speed when Sweep
Mode = Auto or D-mod
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the sensitivity of
auto-wah p.223
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the sweep curve
of auto-wah p.223
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
Sets the speed of the
LFO p.223
Source Off...Tempo
source for LFO speed
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
When this is on, the
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
individual effect p.223
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
notes that specify the
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Resonance 0...100
Sets the resonance
amount
LPF Off, On
Switches the wah low
pass filter on and off
Output Level Out Level 0...100
of the effect sound
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
effect output level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the effect
output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
D
-mod
Envelope Sens
Envelope Shape
Response
Wet / Dry
Wah
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
LFO
Wah
+
Single size effects 012: St.VtgWah (Stereo Vintage/Custom Wah)
223
Frequency Bottom
Frequency Top
Thesweepwidthanddirectionofthewahfilterare
determinedbytheFrequencyTopandFrequency
Bottomsettings.
Sweep Mode
Thisparameterchangesthewahcontrolmode.Setting
SweepModetoAutowillselectanautowahthatsweeps
accordingtoenvelopechangesintheinputsignallevel.
Autowahisfrequentlyusedforfunkguitarpartsandclav
sounds.
WhenSweepModeissettoDmod,youcancontrolthe
filterdirectlyviathemodulationsourceinthesamewayasa
wahpedal.
WhenSweepModeissettoLFO,theeffectusesLFOto
sweepincycle.
Envelope Sens
Thisparametersetsthesensitivityoftheautowah.Increase
thevalueiftheinputsignalistoolowtosweep.Reducethe
valueiftheinputsignalissohighthatthefilterisstopped
temporarily.
Envelope Shape
Thisparameterdeterminesthesweepcurvefortheauto
wah.
LFO Freq [Hz]
BPM/MIDI Sync
WhenBPM/MIDISync=Off,theLFOspeedusestheLFO
Freq[Hz]parametersetting.WhenBPM/MIDISync=On,
theLFOspeedfollowstheBPM,BaseNote,and
Timessettings.
BPM
Base Note
Times
OnecycleofLFOsweepisobtainedbymultiplyingthe
lengthofanote(,)(selectedforBaseNote,inrelation
tothetempospecifiedinBPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoif
BPMissettoMIDI)bythenumberspecifiedintheTimes
parameter.
LFO Type
withintheeffectitself.SincethisletsyouusethesameLFO
formultipleeffects,itsusefulwhenyouwanttoapply
varioustypesofmodulationinsynchronization.
012: St.VtgWah
(Stereo Vintage/Custom Wah)
Thiseffectsimulatesthetonalcharacterofavintagewah
pedal.Youcancustomizethetoneandrangesettings.
Max
D
-mod
Frequency
Bottom=25
Top=75
H
i
g
h
e
r
Max Zero
Higher D
-mod
Frequency
Bottom=60
Top=30
H
i
g
h
e
r
Zero
Higher
Frequency
Bottom=25
Top=75
H
i
g
h
e
r
Frequency
Bottom=75
Top=25
H
i
g
h
e
r
Sweep Mode=Auto
Envelope Envelope Time
Wah
Woo Woo
Woo
Envelope
Wah Wah
Time
Woo
Woo
Wah
Wah
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Time
Level
Envelope
value = 0...-100
value = 0...+100
Envelope Shape
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Mode
Preset,
Custom
Selects either preset
or custom settings
p.224
Shape 100...+100
Sets the curve of the
sweep p.224
Invert Off, On
Inverts the polarity of
the sweep
Frequency
Bottom
CstmFrqBtm 0...100
the wah center
frequency when
Mode = Customp.224
Frequency
Top
CstmFrqTop 0...100
the wah center
frequency when
Mode = Customp.224
Resonance
Bottom
CstmResBtm 0...100
resonance amount
when Mode=Custom
p.224
Resonance
Top
CstmResTop 0...100
resonance amount
when Mode=Custom
p.224
Sweep Mode
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control
from auto-wah,
modulation source,
and LFO p.223
Selects the
modulation source
for the wah when
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Manual 0...100
Sets the center
frequency when
Sweep Mode=D-mod
and Source=Off
Envelope
Sens
0...100
Sets the auto-wah
sensitivity
Response 0...100
Sets the speed of
response when
Sweep Mode=Auto or
D-mod
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.223
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Mode
Preset Setting
Custom Parameters
D
-mod
Envelope Sens
Shape / Invert
Response
Wet / Dry
Wah
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
LFO
Wah
+
Effect Guide
224
Shape
Thisparameterspecifiesthesweepcurveofthewah.It
appliestoallcontrolviaautowah,modulationsource,and
LFO,andletsyouadjustsubtlenuancesofthewaheffect.
Mode
Frequency Bottom
Frequency Top
Resonance Bottom
Resonance Top
IfMode=Preset,thissimulatesavintagewahpedal.Inthis
case,internallyfixedvaluesareusedforFrequencyBottom/
TopandResonanceBottom/Top,andthesesettingswillbe
ignored.ThesettingsforFrequencyBottom/Topand
ResonanceBottom/ToparevalidifMode=Custom.
013: VOX Wah
ThismodelsthelegendaryVOXV847andV848Clyde
McCoywahpedals.Itsdistinctivetone,soundingasthough
itwerewrungfromthethroat,madethispedalafavoriteof
manypromusicians.
014: St.RndFlt
(Stereo Random Filter)
Thisstereobandpassfilterusesastepshapewaveformand
randomLFOformodulation.Youcancreateaspecialeffect
fromfilteroscillation.
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
of the effect sound
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
effect output level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Type V847, V848
Selects the type of
wah
Open 1...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Close 1...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Mode SweepMode
Pedal(Dmod)
, Auto
Switches between
pedal wah and auto-
wah
Pedal Source Src 0...100
Specifies the
modulation source
that will use the pedal
wah
Pedal
Manual
0...100
Sets the center
frequency for the
pedal wah when the
modulation source is
not moved
Auto Sensi-
tivity
0...100
Sets the auto-wah
sensitivity
D
-mod
Auto Sensitivity
Envelope
Mode
Pedal(D-mod)
Auto
Wet / Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
+ Wah
Attack / Polarity
Auto Polarity
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Specifies whether the
auto-wah sweep is
normal or inverted
Auto Attack
Sets the auto-wahs
attack speed
Wet/Dry
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source
source for Wet/Dry
Amount
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Manual 0...100
Sets the filter center
frequency
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the filter center
frequency
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for the filter
center frequency
Depth 0...100
Sets the modulation
depth of filter center
frequency
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
filter modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of filter
modulation
Resonance 0...100
Sets the resonance
amount
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Step-Tri,
Random
Selects the LFO
Waveform p.225
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
used for both LFO
speed and step speed
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
Step Freq
[Hz]
Step[Hz] 0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step
speed (speed that
changes in steps
p.225
Amount
50.00...
+50.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO step
speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Filter
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Filter
LFO Phase
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
Single size effects 014: St.RndFlt (Stereo Random Filter)
225
Phase [deg]
Offsettingtheleftandrightphasesaltershowmodulationis
appliedtotheleftandrightchannels,creatingaswelling
affect.
LFO Waveform
LFO Freq [Hz]
Step Freq [Hz]
WhenLFOWaveformissettoStepTri,LFOisastep
shape,trianglewaveform.TheLFOFreq[Hz]parameter
setstheoriginaltrianglewaveformspeed.Changingthe
StepFreq[Hz]parameterenablesyoutoadjustthewidth
ofthesteps.
WhenLFOWaveformissettoRandom,theStepFreq
[Hz]parameterusesarandomLFOcycle.
BPM
Step Base Note
Times
ThewidthofanLFOstep,oracycleofrandomLFO,is
obtainedbymultiplyingthelengthofanote(,)(selected
forStepBaseNote,inrelationtothetempospecifiedin
BPM,ortheMIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI)
bythenumberspecifiedintheTimesparameter.
Wet/Dry
Theeffectsoundsphasewillbereversedwhenyousetthis
parameterintherangeofvaluesfromWetto1:99.
015: St.MMFltr
(Multi Mode Filter)
Thisisamultimodefilterwithfourtypes;lowpass,highpass,
bandpass,andbandreject.YoucanuseLFOordynamic
modulationtovarythecutofffrequencyorresonance.
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.225
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.225
Step Base
Note
,...
Selects the type of
notes to specify the
LFO step speed
p.225
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO step speed
p.225
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
0 +90 +180 [degree]
0 [degree] 90 180
LFO Phase
Step Frequency
LFO Frequency
Step Frequency
Step-Tri Random
Random Filter LFO
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Filter Type FilterType
LPF, HPF, BPF,
BRF
Selects the type of
filter
Cutoff 0...100
Sets the cutoff
frequency (center
frequency)
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the cutoff
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the cutoff
Resonance 0...100
Sets the resonance
amount
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the source that
will modulate the
amount of resonance
Amount 100...+100
Sets the amount by
which the resonance
will be modulated
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between the
left and right p.225
Depth LFO Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of how
the LFO will modulate
the cutoff frequency
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the system
tempo; 40300 sets the
tempo manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Drive SW Off, On
Switches distortion
on/off within the filter
Output Level DriveLevel 0...100 Sets the output level
Drive Gain 0...100
Sets the distortion
amount
Low Boost 0...100
Sets the amount of
low-range boost
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Multimode Filter Driver
Driver
Trim Output
Output Trim
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
LPF
HPF
BPF
BRF
Filter Type
Multimode Filter
Effect Guide
226
016: St.SubOsc
(Stereo Sub Oscillator)
Thiseffectaddsverylowfrequenciestotheinputsignal.Itis
veryusefulwhensimulatingaroaringdrumsoundor
emphasizingpowerfullowrange.Thiseffectisdifferent
fromtheequalizerinthatyoucanaddverylowrange
harmonics.Youcanalsoadjusttheoscillatorfrequencyto
matchaparticularnotenumber,foruseasanoctaver.
OSC Mode
Note Interval
Note Fine
TheOSCModeparameterselectstheoscillatoroperationmode.
WhenNote(KeyFollow)isselected,theoscillatorsfrequencyis
determinedbasedonthenotenumber,allowingyoutouseitasan
octaver.TheNoteIntervalparametersetsthepitchoffsetfrom
theoriginalnotenumberbysemitonesteps.TheNoteFine
parameterallowsyoutofinetuneinstepsofcents.
Env. Pre LPF
Thisparametersetstheupperlimitofthefrequencyrange
whereverylowharmonicsareadded.Adjustthisparameterif
youdonotwanttoaddlowerharmonicstothehigherrange.
017: Talk Mod (Talking Modulator)
Thiseffectaddsanunusualcharacter,likeahumanvoice,to
theinputsignal.Modulatingthetoneviadynamic
modulation,youcancreateaninterestingeffectthatsounds
asiftheguitarorsynthesizeristalking.
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
OSC Mode Osc
Note (Key
Follow),
Fixed
Determines whether
the oscillator frequency
follows the note
number or whether it is
fixed p.226
Note Interval NoteIntrvl 48...0
Sets the pitch difference
from the note number
when OSC Mode=Note
(Key Follow) p.226
Note Fine 100...+100
Fine adjustment of
the oscillator
frequency p.226
Fixed Freq
[Hz]
Fixed[Hz] 10.0...80.0
Sets the oscillator
frequency when OSC
Mode=Fixed
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation
source for the oscil-
lator frequency when
OSC Mode=Fixed
Amount 80...+80
Sets the oscillator
frequency modulation
amount when OSC
Mode=Fixed
Env. Pre LPF Env Pre LPF 1...100
Sets the upper limit of the
frequency range for which
very low harmonics are
added p.226
Env. Sens Env Sens 0...100
with which very low
harmonics are added
Env. Shape 100...+100
Sets the oscillators
volume envelope
curve
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Wet / Dry
Note No.
OSC Mode
Fixed
Note (Key Follow)
Sine Oscillator
Fixed Frequency
Pitch
Note Interval, Fine
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope Sens
Envelope Shape
Envelope Shape
D
-mod
Pre LPF
Envelope Sens Pre LPF
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Sweep Mode D-mod, LFO
Switches between
modulation source
control and LFO
control
Manual
Voice Ctrl
Manual
Bottom,
1...49, Center,
51...99, Top
Voice pattern control
Selects the
modulation source
that controls the
voice pattern
Voice Top A, I, U, E, O
Selects a vowel sound
at the top end of
control p.227
Voice Center A, I, U, E, O
in the center of
control p.227
Voice
Bottom
A, I, U, E, O
at the bottom end of
control p.227
Formant
Shift
FormntSft 100...+100
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied p.227
Resonance 0...100
Sets the Level of
resonance of the
voice pattern p.227
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.223
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
D
-mod
Voice Top: A
Voice Center: I
Voice Bottom: U
A - I - U - E - O Talking Modulator
LFO
D-mod
LFO
Sweep Mode
Single size effects 018: St.Decimt (Stereo Decimator)
227
Voice Top
Voice Center
Voice Bottom
Theseparametersassignvowelstothetop,center,and
bottompositionofthecontroller.
E.g.:WhenVoiceTop=A,VoiceCenter=I,andVoice
Bottom=U:
IfSweepModeissettoDmodisselectedasthe
modulationsource,movingyourfingerfromtherighttoleft
ofwillchangethesoundfromatoi,thenu.
IfSweepModeissettoLFO,thesoundwillchange
cyclicallyfromatoi,u,i,thena.
Formant Shift
Thisparameteradjuststhefrequencylevelwheretheeffect
isapplied.Ifyouwishtoapplytheeffecttoahigherrange
sound,setthisparametertoahighervalue;toapplythe
effecttoalowerrangesound,setthistoalowervalue.
Resonance
Thisparametersetstheintensityofresonanceforthevoice
pattern.Alargervaluewilladdmorecharactertothesound.
018: St.Decimt (Stereo Decimator)
Thiseffectcreatesaroughsoundlikeacheapsamplerby
loweringthesamplingfrequencyanddatabitlength.You
canalsosimulatenoiseuniquetoasampler(aliasing).
Pre LPF
Ifasamplerwithaverylowsamplingfrequencyreceivesvery
highpitchedsoundthatcouldnotbeheardduringplayback,it
couldgeneratepitchnoisethatisunrelatedtotheoriginalsound.
SetPreLPFtoOntopreventthisnoisefrombeinggenerated.
IfyousettheSamplingFretoabout3 kHzandsetPre
LPFtoOff,youcancreateasoundlikearingmodulator.
Resolution [bit]
Output Level
IfyousetasmallervaluefortheResolutionparameter,the
soundmaybedistorted.Thevolumelevelmayalsobe
changed.UseOutputLeveltoadjustthelevel.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Pre LPF Off, On
Selects whether the
harmonic noise caused
by a decrease in
sampling frequency is
generated or not p.227
Sampling
Freq [Hz]
Fs [Hz]
1.00k...
48.00k
Sets the sampling
frequency
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the sampling
frequency
Amount
48.00k...
+48.00k
Sets the modulation
amount of the
sampling frequency
Depth LFO Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of the
sampling frequency
LFO modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the LFO
the sampling frequency
+ Max
Zero
D
-mod
Max
Voice Bottom Voice Center Voice Top
U
I
A A
O
E
JS X
JS +Y
JS Y
etc
Zero
+ Max
Talking Modulator Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Pre LPF
High Damp Output Level
High Damp Output Level
Sampling Frequency
Decimator
Decimator
D
-mod
LFO
Resolution
Resolution
Amount 100...+100
Sets the LFO
modulation amount of
the sampling frequency
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of cut of
the high range
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
Resolution
[bit]
Bit Reso 4...24
Sets the data bit
length p.227
Output Level OutLevel 0...100
p.227
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the output level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
level
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
When this is on, the LFO
speed is set by BPM,
Base Note, and Times,
instead of Frequency
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40300
sets the tempo
manually for this
individual effect
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Effect Guide
228
019: St. Record
(Stereo Analog Record)
Thiseffectsimulatesthenoisecausedbyscratchesanddust
onanalogrecords.Italsoreproducessomeofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
Flutter
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedepthofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
Click Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutosettheleveloftheclicknoise
thatoccursonceeveryrotationoftheturntable.This
simulationreproducesrecordnoise,andthenoisegenerated
afterthemusiconavinylrecordfinishes.
020: OD Wah
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
ThisdistortioneffectutilizesanOverdrivemodeandaHi
Gainmode.Controllingthewaheffect,the3bandEQ,and
theampsimulationwillallowyoutocreateversatile
distortionsounds.Thiseffectissuitableforguitarandorgan
sounds.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
Pre EQ Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the EQ center
frequency
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the EQ band
width
Gain [dB] PEQ [dB] 18.0...+18.0 Sets the EQ gain
Speed Spd/RPM 33 1/3, 45, 78
Sets the r.p.m. of a
record
Flutter 0...100
Sets the modulation
depth p.228
Noise
Density
Noise Dens 0...100 Sets the noise density
Noise Tone 0...100 Sets the noise tone
Noise Level NoiseLevel 0...100 Sets the noise level l
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the noise level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the noise
level
Click Level ClickLevel 0...100
Sets the click noise
level p.228
Source Off...Tempo
source for the click
noise level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the click
noise level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Analog Record
Simulation
Pre EQ
Pre EQ
EQ Trim
EQ Trim
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Wah Off, On
Switches Wah on/off
p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that switches the Wah
on and off
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
Selects the switching
mode for the
modulation source
on and off p.229
Sweep
Range
10...+10
Sets the range of Wah
p.229
Selects the
modulation source
that controls the Wah
p.229
Drive Mode Mode
Overdrive,
Hi-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and hi-gain
distortion
Drive 1...100
Sets the degree of
distortion p.229
Pre Low Cut 0...10
Sets the low range
cut amount of the
distortion input p.229
Output Level 0...50
p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
level
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Low EQ
(shelving type)
Gain [dB] Low G[dB] 18...+18
Sets the gain of Low
EQ
Mid1Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
Gain [dB] Mid1 G[dB] 18...+18
Sets the gain of Mid/
High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
High EQ 2
Direct Mix 0...50
Sets the amount of
the dry sound mixed
to the distortion
Speaker
Simulation
SpeakerSim Off, On
Switches the speaker
simulation on/off
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Direct Mix
Pre Low-cut
D
-mod
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Drive
Driver
Single size effects 021: St.Gt Cab (Stereo Guitar Cabinet)
229
Wah
TheWahparameterswitchesthewaheffecton/off.
Switch Mode
Thisparametersetshowthewaheffectisswitchedonand
offviathemodulationsource.
WhenSwitchMode=Moment,thewaheffectisusually
turnedoff.Itisturnedononlywhenyoupressthepedalor
usethejoystick.
Whenavalueforthemodulationsourceislessthan64,
offspeedisselected,andwhenthevalueis64or
higher,onisselected.
WhenSwitchMode=Toggle,thewaheffectisswitched
betweenonandoffeachtimeyoupressthepedalorusethe
joystick.
Theswitchwillbeturnedon/offeachtimethevalueof
themodulationsourceexceeds64.
Sweep Range
Source
Thisparametersetsthesweeprangeofthewahcenter
frequency.Anegativevaluewillreversethedirectionof
sweep.Thewahcenterfrequencycanbecontrolledbythe
modulationsourcespecifiedintheSourceparameter.
Pre Low Cut
Cuttingthesignalinthelowrangebeforeitisinputtothe
Distortionwillcreateasharpdistortion.
Drive
Output Level
Thedegreeofdistortionisdeterminedbythelevelofinput
signalandthesettingofDrive.RaisingtheDrivesetting
willcausetheentirevolumeleveltoincrease.Usethe
OutputLevelparametertoadjustthevolumelevel.The
OutputLevelparameterusesthesignallevelinputtothe
3BandEQ.Ifclippingoccursatthe3BandEQ,adjustthe
OutputLevelparameter.
021: St.Gt Cab
(Stereo Guitar Cabinet)
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofaguitaramps
speakercabinet.
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
l
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Type Cab
Selects the type of
the cabinet
TWEED -
1x12
Open-back cabinet
with one 12" speaker,
typically used for
blues
TWEED -
4x10
Open-back cabinet
with four 10"
speakers
BLACK - 2x10
Open-back cabinet
with two 10" speakers
BLACK - 2x12
American open-back
cabinet with two12"
speakers
VOX AC15 -
1x12
Vox AC15 open-back
cabinet with one 12"
Blue speaker
VOX AC30 -
2x12
Vox AC30 open-back
cabinet with two 12"
Blue speakers
VOX AD412 -
4x12
VOX AD412 closed-
back cabinet with
four 12" speakers
UK H30 -
4x12
Closed-back classic
cabinet with four 30W
12" speakers
UK T75 -
4x12
Closed-back cabinet
with four 75W 12"
speakers
US V30 -
4x12
Closed-back cabinet
with four 30W 12"
speakers
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Trim
Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Effect Guide
230
022: St.Bs Cab
(Stereo Bass Cabinet)
Thissimulatestheacousticalcharacterofabassamps
speakercabinet.
023: Bass Amp
Thissimulatesabassamp.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Cabinet Type Cab
Selects the cabinet
type
LA - 4x10
Four 10" speakers / LA
sound cabinet
MODERN -
4x10
Four 10" aluminum-
cone speakers /
modern cabinet
METAL -
4x10
Four 10" aluminum-
cone speakers /
modern cabinet
CLASSIC -
8x10
Eight 10" speakers /
classic cabinet
UK - 4x12
Four 12" speakers /
UK-manufactured
cabinet
STUDIO -
1x15
One 15" speaker /
studio combo cabinet
JAZZ - 1x15
One 15" speaker / jazz
combo cabinet
VOX AC100 -
2x15
Two 15" speakers /
cabinet for Vox AC100
US - 2x15
Two 15" speakers /
US-manufactured
cabinet
UK - 4x15
Four 15" speakers /
UK-manufactured
cabinet
LA - 1x18
One 18" speaker /
LA sound cabinet
COMBI -
1x12 & 1x18
One 12" and one 18"
speaker combination
cabinet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Trim
Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Cabinet Simulator
Cabinet Simulator
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Type Amp
Selects the amplifier
type
LA STUDIO
An amp that is typical
of the LA sound.
JAZZ
COMBO
A combo amp
favored by jazz
bassists.
GOLD PANEL
An amp distinctive for
its eye-catching gold
panel and clean
sound.
SCOOPED
An amp typical of 80s
sounds.
VALVE2
A tube amp suitable
for rock.
VALVE
A tube amp with the
ULTRA LO switch
turned ON.
CLASSIC
A tube amp whose
basic character
changes according to
the setting of the
value dial.
Volume 0...100 Sets the output level
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
level
Bass 0...100
Sets the bass (low
range) level
Middle 0...100
Sets the middle (mid
range) level
Mid Range 0...4
Sets the mid-
frequency range
Treble 0...100
Sets the treble (high
range) level
Presence 0...100
Sets the presence
(high-frequency tone)
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Bass Amp Model
Single size effects 025: TrebleBST (Treble Booster)
231
024: B.Amp Cab
(Bass Amp Model+Cabinet)
Thissimulatesabassampandspeakercabinet.
Amp Type
Cabinet Type
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and
Cabinets:
025: TrebleBST (Treble Booster)
Thiseffectmodelsafamousboost/overdriveeffectthatwas
developedinordertoproduceaguitarorchestraeffect,
anddesignedforusewiththeVOXAC30.Youcanusethis
toaddclearboosttothesignal,orapplyittoanorgansound
toaddanoverdrivethatgeneratesrichovertones.Three
controlsallowabroadrangeofsettings,lettingyoucreatea
widevarietyofoverdrivesounds.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Amp Type Amp
LA STUDIO,
JAZZ
COMBO,
GOLD PANEL,
SCOOPED,
VALVE2,
VALVE,
CLASSIC
Selects the type of
amplifier p.230
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
level
Bass 0...100
Sets the bass (low
range) level
Middle 0...100
range) level
Mid Range 0...4
Sets the mid-
frequency range
Treble 0...100
range) level
Presence 0...100
Sets the presence
Cabinet On CabinetSim Off, On
Switches the cabinet
simulator on/off
Cabinet Type Cab
LA - 4x10,
MODERN -
4x10,
METAL -
4x10,
CLASSIC -
8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO -
1x15,
JAZZ - 1x15,
VOX AC100 -
2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI -
1x12 & 1x18
Selects the cabinet
type p.230
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Bass Amp Model1 Cabinet Simulator
Amp Type Cabinet Type
LA STUDIO LA - 4x10, LA - 1x18
JAZZ COMBO JAZZ - 1x15
GOLD PANEL MODERN - 4x10
SCOOPED METAL - 4x10
VALVE2 CLASSIC - 8x10
VALVE CLASSIC - 8x10
CLASSIC COMBI - 1x12 & 1x18
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Drive 1...100
Sets the gain for
overdrive
Level 0...100 Sets the output level
Tone 1...100
Sets the tone for
overdrive
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...
99:1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Treble Booster
Effect Guide
232
026: Tube Pre
(Tube PreAmp Modeling)
Thiseffectsimulatesatwostagevacuumtubepreamp.You
canmakeindividualsettingsfortwovacuumtubes
connectedinseries.Thisletsyoucreatethewarmsound
typicalofvacuumtubes.
Saturation [%]
Withhighersettingsofthisvalue,thewaveformwillchange
athighgainlevels,tendingtocausedistortion.Lower
settingsofthisvaluewillproducelinearresponse.
Tube1 Bias
Thisexpressestheeffectthatchangesinvacuumtubebias
haveonthedistortionofthewaveform.Highersettingsof
thisvaluewillproducedistortionevenatlowgainlevels.
Sincethiswillalsochangetheovertonestructure,youcan
useittocontrolthetonalcharacter.
Tube1 Phase
WiththeWetInvertsetting,thephaseofthesignalwillbe
invertedbetweenstage1andstage2.SinceBiasisapplied
totheinvertedsignalinstage2,thiswillchangethetonal
character.
027: St.TubPre
(Stereo Tube PreAmp Modeling)
Thisisastereovacuumtubepreampsimulator(See026:
TubePre(TubePreAmpModeling)onpage 232.).
028: Mic Model
(Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
Thiseffectsimulatesamicandvacuumtubepreamp.You
canchoosefromvarioustypesofmicandpositionstocreate
differingsoniccharacters.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Tube1
Low Cut [Hz]
T1 L[Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Sets the cutoff
frequency for the low
cut filter of stage 1
Tube1
High Cut
[Hz]
T1 H[Hz]
53...20.00k,
Thru
Sets the cutoff
frequency for the high
Tube1
Gain [dB]
T1 G[Hz] 24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain for
stage 1
Tube1
Saturation
[%]
T1 Saturat 0...100
Sets the input/output
response for stage 1
p.232
Tube1 Bias T1 Bias 0...100
Sets the bias voltage
for stage 1 p.232
Tube1 Phase T1 Phase
Normal,
Wet Invert
Turns phase reversal
on/off p.232
Tube2
Low Cut [Hz]
T2 L[Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Sets the cutoff
frequency for the low
Tube2
High Cut
[Hz]
T2 H[Hz]
53...20.00k,
Thru
Sets the cutoff
frequency for the high
Tube2
Gain [dB]
T2 G[Hz] 24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain for
stage 2
Tube2
Saturation
[%]
T2 Saturat 0...100
response for stage 2
p.232
Tube2 Bias T2 Bias 0...100
Sets the bias voltage
for stage 2 p.232
Tube2
Output Level
[dB]
Lvl [dB] 48.0...+0.0 Sets the output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
+ Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
+
Invert
-
Mic/Pre Amp - Saturation
In
Out
Saturation = 0
Saturation = 50
Saturation = 100
Bias = 0
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Mic Type Mic
Vintage
Dynamic,
Multi
Condenser,
Percussion
Condenser,
Drums Dynamic,
Vocal Dynamic,
Multi Dynamic,
Vocal
Condenser,
Vocal Tube,
Kick Dynamic
Selects the type of
mic
Mic Position Mic Posit
Close, On,
Off, Far
Sets the mic
placement distance
p.233
Tube
Low Cut [Hz]
T L[Hz]
Thru,
21...8.00k
Sets the frequency of
the low cut filter
In
Out
Satulation = 50
Bias = 0
Bias = 50
Bias = 100
Mic/Pre Amp - Bias
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2
Tube Pre Amp1 Tube Pre Amp2
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Invert
+ Tube Pre Amp Mic Simulation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Single size effects 029: Stereo Phaser
233
Mic Position
Thisexpressestheeffectthatthemicpositionhasonthe
sound.TheClosesettingistheclosestmicposition,andthe
Farsettingisthefarthest.
029: Stereo Phaser
Thiseffectcreatesaswellbyshiftingthephase.Itisvery
effectiveonelectricpianosounds.Youcanaddspreadtothe
soundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftandrightLFOsfrom
eachother.
Resonance
Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedbackvalueis
different.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhentheeffect
soundismixedwiththedrysound,ifyousetapositivevalue
forbothResonanceandWet/Dry,andifyousetanegative
valueforbothResonanceandWet/Dry.
High Damp [%]
Thisparametersetstheamountofdampingoftheresonanceinthe
highrange.Increasingthevaluewillcuthighrangeharmonics.
030: Small Phs (Small Phaser)
ThismodelsaclassicphaserthatwasborninNewYork
duringthe1970s.Withawarm,richtone,itisalsolovedby
manyelectricpianoplayers.
Color
Thisletsyouchoosebetweentwotypesofphasersound.
TurningthisOnproducesadeeperphaseshifteffectwitha
distinctivemodulation.
Tube
High Cut
[Hz]
T H[Hz]
53...20.00k,
Thru
Sets the frequency of
the high cut filter
Tube
Gain [dB]
T G[Hz] 24.0...+24.0
Sets the input gain to
the vacuum tube
preamp
Tube
Saturation
[%]
T Saturat 0...100
response of the
preamp p.232
Tube Bias T Bias 0...100
Sets the bias level of
the preamp p.232
Tube Output
Level [dB]
Lvl [dB] 48.0...+0.0
of the preamp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Shape 100...+100
Changes the
curvature of the LFO
Waveform p.224
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.223
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Manual 0...100
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
Left
Right
Resonance
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Phaser
Phaser
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the LFO
modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of LFO
modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the LFO
modulation depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation depth
Resonance 100...+100
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the resonance
damping amount in
the high range p.233
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.233
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0
LFO
Color Off, On
Switches the tone of
the phaser sound
p.233
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.233
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Phaser
LFO
Color
Effect Guide
234
031: OrangePhs (Orange Phaser)
Thismodelsastandardmodelofanalogphaserthat
achievedgreatpopularity.Itgivesasenseofmovementto
electricpianosounds,addingarichsoundingphaseshift
effect.
032: BlackPhsr (Black Phaser)
ThismodelsaDanishmadefourstagephaserthatfeatured
awiderange.
033: U-VIBE
Thismodelsafamouschorus/vibratopedaleffect.
Simulatingarotaryspeaker,thiseffectproduceda
fascinatinglylushtone.
Mix
Wet/Dry
TheMixparameterspecifiestheamountofeffectsound
relativetothedirectsound.Asettingof0producesthe
directsound,asettingofabout50produceschorus,anda
settingof100producesavibratoeffect.IfyousettheWet/
DryparametertoWet,thesoundwillbeoutputwiththemix
balancespecifiedbyMix.
034: St.RndPhs
(Stereo Random Phaser)
Thisisastereophaser.Theeffectusesastepshape
waveformandrandomLFOformodulation,creatinga
uniquephasingeffect.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0
LFO
Depth 0...100
modulation
Resonance 0...100
Sets the resonance
amount
Manual 1...100
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0
vibration
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of
vibration
Mix 0...100
Sets the effect mix
level
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.234
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Phaser
LFO
Resonance
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ U-VIBE
LFO
Mix
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Manual 0...100
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the LFO
modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation
Depth 0...100
modulation
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the resonance
damping amount in
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Step-Tri,
Step-Sin,
Random
Selects the LFO
Waveform p.225
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO p.223
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
commonly used for
LFO speed and step
speed
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
Step Freq
[Hz]
Step [Hz] 0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step
speed p.225
Amount
50.00...
+50.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO step
speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Left
Right
Resonance
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Phaser
Phaser
Single size effects 035: St.EnvPhs (Stereo Envelope Phaser)
235
035: St.EnvPhs
(Stereo Envelope Phaser)
Thisstereophaserusesanenvelopegeneratorfor
modulation.Youwillobtainthesamepatternofphasing
eachtimeyouplay.YoucanalsocontrolthePhaserdirectly
usingthemodulationsource.
036: 2Vo.Reso (2Voice Resonator)
Thiseffectresonatestheinputsignalataspecifiedpitch.
Youcansetthepitch,outputlevel,andpansettingsfortwo
resonatorsindividually.Youcancontroltheresonance
intensityviaanLFO.
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Step Base
Note
,...
Selects the type of
LFO step speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.233
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
L Manual
Bottom
L Manu Btm 0...100
the frequency range
for the effect on the
left channel
L Manual
Top
L Manu Top 0...100
the frequency range
left channel
R Manual
Bottom
R Manu Btm 0...100
the frequency range
right channel
R Manual
Top
R Manu Top 0...100
the frequency range
right channel
Sweep Mode EG, D-mod
Determines whether
the flanger is
controlled by the
envelope generator
or by the modulation
source p.255
Selects the
modulation source
that triggers the EG
(when EG is selected
for Sweep Mode), or
modulation source
that causes the
flanger to sweep
(when D-mod is
selected for Sweep
Mode) p.255
EG Attack 1...100
Sets the EG attack
speed p.256
EG Decay 1...100
Sets the EG decay
speed p.256
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the resonance
damping amount in
the high range
p.233
EG Attack/Decay
EG
D-mod
Sweep Mode
D
-mod
Phaser
Phaser
Left
Right
Resonance
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.233
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Control
Mode
Control
Manual, LFO,
D-mod
Switches the controls
of resonance intensity
p.236
LFO/D-mod
Invert
Mod Invert Off, On
Reverses the Voice 1
and 2 control when
LFO/D-mod is
selected p.236
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Dmod
Source
Src Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that controls
resonance intensity
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Mod. Depth 100...+100
Sets the amount of
resonance intensity
control via LFO/D-
mod
Trim 0...100
Sets the input level at
the resonator
Voice1
Pitch
V1 Pitch C0...B8
Sets the voice1 Pitch
for resonance p.236
Voice1
Fine [cents]
50...+50
Fine-adjusts the voice
1 pitch for resonance
p.236
Voice1
Level
V1 Level 0...100
Sets the Voice1
output level
Voice1
Resonance
V1 Reso 100...+100
Sets the intensity of
resonance when
Control Mode =
Manual p.236
Voice1
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount of resonant
sound in the high
range p.236
Voice1
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Voice1 stereo
image
Left
Right
Resonance
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
High Damp
High Damp
Trim
Trim
+
Level
Level Pan
Pan
Control Mode
D
-mod
LFO
Manual
Invert: On/Off
Resonator
Resonator
Pitch, Fine [cents]
Effect Guide
236
Control Mode
Voice 1 Resonance
Voice 2 Resonance
Thisparameterdeterminestheresonanceintensity.
WhenControlMode=Manual,theResonance
parametersetstheintensityofresonance.IftheResonance
parameterhasanegativevalue,harmonicswillbechanged,
andresonancewilloccuratapitchoneoctavelower.
WhenControlMode=LFO,theintensityofresonance
variesaccordingtotheLFO.TheLFOswaysbetween
positiveandnegativevalues,causingresonancetooccur
betweenspecifiedpitchesanoctaveapartinturn.
WhenControlMode=Dmod,theresonanceiscontrolled
bythedynamicmodulationsource.IfJSXisassignedasthe
modulationsource,thepitchanoctavehigherandlowercan
becontrolled,similartowhenLFOisselectedforControl
Mode.
LFO/D-mod Invert
WhenControlMode=LFOorDmod,thecontrolled
phaseofeitherVoice1or2willbereversed.Whenthe
resonancepitchissetforVoice1(Resonancehasapositive
value),Voice2willresonateatapitchanoctavebelow
(Resonancehasanegativevalue).
Voice 1 Pitch
Voice 1 Fine [cents]
Voice 2 Pitch
Voice 2 Fine [cents]
ThePitchparameterspecifiesthepitchofresonancebynote
name.TheFineparameterallowsforfineadjustmentin
stepsofcents.
High Damp [%]
Thissetstheamountofdampingamountforthehigh
frequenciesoftheresonantsound.Lowervaluescreatea
metallicsoundwithahigherrangeofharmonics.
037: St.Tremlo (Stereo Tremolo)
Thiseffectmodulatesthevolumeleveloftheinputsignal.
Theeffectisstereo,andoffsettingtheLFOoftheleftand
rightphasesfromeachotherproducesatremoloeffect
betweenleftandright.
LFO Waveform
ThisparametersetsthebasicshapeoftheLFO.TheVintage
waveformmodelsclassicguitaramptremolo.
Voice2
Pitch
V2 Pitch C0...B8
Sets the voice 2 Pitch
for resonance p.236
Voice2
Fine [cents]
50...+50
Fine-adjusts the voice
2 pitch for resonance
p.236
Voice2
Level
V2 Level 0...100
Sets the Voice2
output level
Voice2
Resonance
V2 Reso 100...+100
resonance when
Control Mode =
Manual p.236
Voice2
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount of resonant
sound in the high
range p.236
Voice2
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Voice2 stereo
image
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 :99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Depth 0...100
modulation
Source Off...Tempo
source of the depth of
modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the depth
of modulation
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Triangle,
Sine,
Vintage, Up,
Down
Selects the LFO
Waveform p.236
LFO
Shape
100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
LFO
Phase [deg]
180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
LFO
Source
Off...Tempo
LFO
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
LFO
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
LFO
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
LFO
Base Note
,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
LFO
Times
x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down LFO Shape
Tremolo
Tremolo
Tremolo - LFO Waveform
Triangle Sine Vintage Up Down
Single size effects 038: TEX Treml (TEX Tremolo)
237
LFO Phase [deg]
Thisparameterdeterminesthedifferencebetweentheleft
andrightLFOphases.Ahighervaluewillsimulatetheauto
paneffectinwhichthesoundispannedbetweenleftand
right.
038: TEX Treml (TEX Tremolo)
Thismodelsthehighlyacclaimedtremolocircuitthatwas
builtintoaUSmadecomboamp.TheSpreadsettinglets
youcreateapaneffectthatwaversbetweenleftandright.
039: St. Env.Trm
(Stereo Envelope Tremolo)
Thiseffectusestheinputsignalleveltomodulateastereo
tremolo(LFOvolumemodulation).Forinstance,youcan
createatremoloeffectthatbecomesdeeperandfasterasthe
inputgetsmorequiet.
LFO Freq [Hz]
Envelope Amount [Hz]
Tremolo Depth
Tremolo Amount
Thegraphicbelowshowsanexampleoftremolo
modulationwithnegativemodulationofbothDepthand
Frequency.Atthestartofthenote,theinputisat
maximumvolume.ThisslowsdowntheLFOFrequency
to1.0Hz,butalsomodulatestheDepthto0sothe
tremolodoesnthaveanyeffect.
Astheinputvolumediesdown,theFrequencyspeedsup;
theDepthalsoincreases,makingthetremoloeffect
increasinglyaudible.Whentheinputvolumeapproaches
silence,theDepthisatitsmaximum(100)and
Frequencyisat8Hz.
040: St.AutPan (Stereo Auto Pan)
Thisisastereoin,stereooutautopanner.ThePhaseand
Shapeparametersletsyoucreatevariouspanningeffects,
suchasmakingtheleftandrightinputsseemtochaseeach
otheraroundthestereofield.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0
Sets the tremolo
speed
Depth 0...100
Select the tremolo
depth
Spread 0...100
Sets the width of the
stereo image of the
effect sound
Level Adjust 1...100 Sets the output level
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Envelope
Sens
Env Sens 0...100
Sets the envelopes
sensitivity to the
input signal
Envelope
Shape
100...+100
Sets the envelopes
curvature
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine, Vintage
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Spread
LFO
Tremolo
Tremolo
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Envelope Sens
+
Envelope
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage
Envelope Shape
Tremolo
Tremolo
LFO
Shape
100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
LFO
Phase [deg]
180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.237
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.237
LFO
Amount [Hz]
EnvA[Hz]
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the amount
added to or subtracted
from the Frequency
when the envelope is
at maximum p.237
Tremolo
Depth
Depth 0...100
Sets the initial
amount of tremolo
p.237
Tremolo
Amount
DepthEnvA 100...+100
Sets the amount
added to or subtracted
from the Depth when
the envelope is at
maximum p.237
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Depth 0...100
modulation
Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
Time
Shimmer
LFO Frequency[Hz]=8.0
Envelope Amount[Hz]= 7.0Hz
Depth=100
Envelope Amount= 100
Dry Envelope
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Pan
Pan
LFO: Tri / Sin
Depth
Effect Guide
238
LFO Shape
YoucanchangethepanningcurvebymodifyingtheLFOs
Shape.
LFO Phase [deg]
Thisdeterminesthephasedifferencebetweentheleftand
rightLFOs.Whenyougraduallychangethevalueaway
from0,thesoundsfromtheleftandrightchannelswillseem
tochaseeachotheraround.Ifyousettheparameterto+180
or180,thesoundsfromeachchannelwillcrossovereach
other.
Youllonlyheartheeffectofthisparameteriftheinputis
truestereo,withdifferentsignalsintheleftandright
channels.
041: St.PhsTrm
(Stereo Phaser + Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesastereophaserandtremolo,with
linkedLFOs.Swellingphasermodulationandtremolo
effectssynchronizewitheachother,creatingasoothing
modulationeffectparticularlysuitableforelectricpiano.
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the depth of
modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the depth
of modulation
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO
Shape
100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.238
LFO
Phase [deg]
180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.238
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
LFO
Source
Off...Tempo
LFO
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
LFO
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
LFO
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
individual effect
p.223
LFO
Base Note
,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
LFO
Times
x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
L-In
Left Center Right
Output Stereo Image
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
L-In
R-In
LFO Phase = 0 degrees LFO Phase = 90 degrees LFO Phase = 180 degrees
Stereo Auto Pan - LFO Phase
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Phaser
Manual
Phs Manual 0...100
Sets the phaser
frequency range
Phaser
Resonance
Phs Reso 100...+100
Sets the phaser
resonance amount
Phaser
Depth
Phs Depth 0...100
Sets the phaser
modulation depth
Phaser
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the phaser
modulation depth
Phaser
Amount
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for the
phaser modulation
depth
Phaser
Wet/Dry
Pyhs W/D
Wet, 2 :
98...Dry... 2 :
98, Wet
Sets the balance
between the phaser
effect and dry sounds
p.239
LFO Phase
Type
Type
Phs - Trml,
...
Phs LR - Trml
LR
Selects the type of
the tremolo and
phaser LFOs p.239
Phaser - Tremolo,
Phaser - Tremolo
Spin,
Phaser - Tremolo LR,
Phaser LR - Tremolo,
Phaser LR - Tremolo
Spin, Phaser LR -
Tremolo LR
LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase
difference between
the tremolo and
phaser LFOs p.239
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
LFO
Source
Off...Tempo
LFO
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the LFO speed
modulation amount
LFO
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
LFO
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
LFO
Base Note
,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
LFO
Times
x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Tremolo
Shape
100...+100
Sets the degree of the
tremolo LFO shaping
Tremolo
Depth
Trml Depth 0...100
Sets the tremolo
modulation depth
Tremolo
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the tremolo
modulation depth
Phaser
Phaser
Left
Right
Resonance
LFO Type
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Phaser Wet / Dry
Phaser Wet / Dry
LFO
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Tremolo
Tremolo
Single size effects 042: St.Ring M (Stereo Ring Modulator)
239
Type
LFO Phase [deg]
SelectthetypeofphaserLFOandtremoloLFOforthe
Typeparameter.Howtheeffectsoundmovesorrotates
dependsonthetypeofLFO.SelectingLFOPhaseenables
youtooffsetthetimingofthephaserpeakandcontrola
subtlemovementandrotationofthesound.
Phaser Wet/Dry
Wet/Dry
(Phaser)Wet/Drysetsthebalancebetweenthephaser
outputandthedrysound.(OUTPUT)Wet/Drysetsthe
balancebetweenthefinalphaserandtremolooutputlevel
andthedrysound.
042: St.Ring M
(Stereo Ring Modulator)
Thiseffectcreatesametallicsoundbyapplyingthe
oscillatorstotheinputsignal.UsetheLFOorDynamic
Modulationtomodulatetheoscillatortocreatearadical
modulation.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywithanote
numberwillproducearingmodulationeffectinspecifickey
ranges.
OSC Mode
Thisparameterdetermineswhetherornottheoscillator
frequencyfollowsthenotenumber.
Pre LPF
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthedampingamountof
thehighrangesoundinputtotheringmodulator.Ifthe
inputsoundcontainslotsofharmonics,theeffectmay
sounddirty.Inthiscase,cutacertainamountofhighrange.
Fixed Freq [Hz]
ThisparametersetstheoscillatorfrequencywhenOSC
ModeissettoFixed.
Note Offset
Note Fine
TheseparametersfortheoscillatorareusedwhenOSC
ModeissettoNote(KeyFollow).TheNoteOffsetsets
thepitchdifferencefromtheoriginalnoteinsemitonesteps.
TheNoteFineparameterfineadjuststhepitchincent
steps.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywiththenote
numberproducesaringmodulationeffectinthecorrectkey.
Tremolo
Amount
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the
tremolo modulation
depth
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.239
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Pre LPF 0...100
Sets the damping
amount of the high
range input to the
ring modulator p.239
OSC Mode OSC
Fixed, Note
(Key Follow)
Switching between
specifying the oscil-
lator frequency and
using a note number
p.239
Fixed Freq
[Hz]
Fixed[Hz] 0...12.00k
Sets the oscillator
frequency when OSC
Mode is set to Fixed
p.239
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the oscillator
frequency when OSC
Mode is set to Fixed
Amount
12.00k...
+12.00k
Sets the modulation
amount of the oscil-
lator frequency when
OSC Mode is set to
Fixed
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
Note No.
OSC Mode
Fixed
Note (Key Follow)
Fixed Frequency
Pitch
Note Offset, Fine
Sine Oscillator
LFO
Direct Mix
Note Offset 48...+48
Sets the pitch
difference from the
original note when
OSC Mode is set to
Note (Key Follow)
p.239
Note Fine 100...+100
Fine-adjusts the oscil-
lator frequency p.239
Direct Mix 0...100
Direct signal (after
passing through the
pre-low-pass filter)
mixed into the ring
modulation output
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
LFO Depth 0...100
modulation for the
oscillator frequency
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the depth of
modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the depth
of modulation
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Effect Guide
240
043: P4EQ - Xctr
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Exciter)
Thiseffectcombinesamonofourbandparametricequalizer
andanexciter.
044: P4EQ - Wah
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Wah/Auto Wah)
andawah.Youcanchangetheorderoftheconnection.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Parametric 4-Band EQ
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
E1 G[dB] 18...+18
1
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 G[dB] 18...+18 Sets the gain of Band 2
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
Exciter
Exciter
Blend
X Blend 100...+100
Sets the intensity
effect
Emphasis
Freq
F Freq 0...70
Sets the frequency
range to be empha-
sized p.222
Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+ Exciter
Parametric 4Band EQ Exciter
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2 Q E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Gain [dB]
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
Wah
Sweep Mode W Sweep
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control
from auto-wah,
modulation source,
and LFO p.223
Selects the
modulation source
for the wah when
Sweep Mode=D-mod
LFO Freq
[Hz]
W LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Frequency
Bottom
W Freq Btm 0...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Frequency
Top
W Freq Top 0...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Resonance W Reso 0...100
Sets the resonance
amount
LPF Off, On
[W]Wet/Dry W W/D
Dry,1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the wah effect
balance
[W]Source Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the wah
[W]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the wah
Routing Route
P4EQ Wah,
Wah P4EQ
Changes the order of
the parametric
equalizer and wah
connection
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ
Routing
Wah/Auto Wah
D
-mod
Envelope
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
LFO
LFO
Wah
Single size effects 045: P4EQ - Phaser (Parametric 4-Band EQ - Phaser)
241
045: P4EQ - Phaser
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Phaser)
andaphaser.
046: Comp - Wah
(Compressor - Wah/Auto Wah)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandawah.Youcan
changetheorderoftheconnection.
Wet/Dry
Dry,1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Trim E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1 Q E1 G[dB] 18...+18 Sets the gain of Band 1
Band1
Gain [dB]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Gain [dB]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Phaser
LFO Freq
[Hz]
P LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Manual P Manual 0...100
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
Depth P Depth 0...100
modulation
Resonance P Reso 100...+100
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
Output
Mode
P Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser
output mode p.261
[Phs]Wet/
Dry
P W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the phaser effect
balance p.225, p.233
[Phs]Source Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the phaser
[Phs]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the phaser
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
Sensitivity C Sens 1...100
p.217
Attack C Attack 1...100
p.217
Output Level C Level 0...100
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
Sets the gain of High
EQ
Wah/Auto Wah
Frequency
Bottom
W Freq Btm 0...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Frequency
Top
W Freq Top 0...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Sweep Mode W Sweep
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control
from auto-wah,
modulation source,
and LFO
Selects the
modulation source
for the wah when
Sweep Mode=D-mod
LFO Freq
[Hz]
W LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Sets the resonance
amount
LPF Off, On
[W]Wet/Dry W W/D
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the wah effect
balance
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the wah
[W]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the wah
Routing Route
Comp Wah,
Wah Comp
Switches the order of
the compressor and
wah
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Compressor
Routing
Wah/Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
Envelope
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
LFO
LFO
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
Effect Guide
242
047: Comp - Amp
(Compressor - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
048: Comp - OD
(Compressor - Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandanoverdrive/
highgaindistortion.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Level C Level 0...100
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Amp Simulation
Amp Type A Amp Type SS, EL84, 6L6
Selects the type of
guitar amplifier
Routing Route
Comp
Amp,
Amp
Comp
the compressor and
amp simulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Compressor
Routing
Amp Simulation
Amp Simulation Filter
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Overdrive/Hi-Gain
Drive Mode O Mode
Overdrive,
Hi-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and high-
gain distortion
Drive O Drive 1...100
Sets the degree of
distortion p.229
Level O Out Level 0...50
Sets the overdrive
output level p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the overdrive
output level
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
amount of the
overdrive output level
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
(shelving type)
Low Gain
[dB]
O Low [dB] 18...+18
EQ
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Mid1 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
Mid1 Gain
[dB]
O Mid1 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Mid2 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
Mid2 Gain
[dB]
O Mid2 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 2
[O]Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the overdrive
effect balance
[O]Source Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the overdrive
[O]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the overdrive
Routing Route
Comp
OD/HG, OD/
HG Comp
the compressor and
overdrive
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Compressor
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
Wet / Dry
Single size effects 049: Comp - P4EQ (Compressor - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
243
049: Comp - P4EQ
(Compressor - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
050: Comp - Phsr
(Compressor - Phaser)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandaphaser.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
E1 G[dB] 18...+18
1
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2 Q E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Gain [dB]
E2 G[dB] 18...+18
2
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
E3 G[dB] 18...+18
3
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
E4 G[dB] 18...+18
4
Routing Route
Comp
P4EQ, P4EQ
Comp
the compressor and
parametric EQ
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Comp
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Phaser
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
P LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
modulation
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
Output
Mode
P Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser
output mode p.260
[Phs] Wet/
Dry
P W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
[Phs]Source Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the phaser
[Phs]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the phaser
Routing
Comp
Phaser,
Phaser
Comp
the compressor and
phaser p.261
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Effect Guide
244
051: Lmtr - P4EQ
(Limiter - Parametric 4-Band EQ)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandafourband
parametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Ratio
Threshold [dB]
Gain Adjust [dB]
Thisparametersetsthesignalcompression[L]Ratio.
Compressionisappliedonlywhenthesignallevelexceeds
theThresholdvalue.
AdjusttheoutputlevelusingtheGainAdjustparameter,
sincecompressioncausestheentireleveltobereduced.
052: Limtr - Phsr
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Limiter
Ratio L Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.244
Threshold
[dB]
L Trsh[dB] 40...0
which the
p.244
Attack L Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time
Release L Release 1...100 Sets the release time
[Gain Adjust
[dB]
L G [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter
output gain p.244
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2 Q E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Gain [dB]
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
Routing Route
Lmt P4EQ,
P4EQ Lmt
the limiter and
parametric EQ
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Limiter
Trim
Parametric 4Band EQ
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Limiter
Ratio L Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.244
Threshold
[dB]
L Trsh[dB] 40...0
which the
p.244
Gain Adjust
[dB]
L G [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter
output gain p.244
Phaser
LFO Freq
[Hz]
P LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
modulation
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
Output
Mode
P Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser
output mode p.260
[Phs] Wet/
Dry
P W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
[Phs] Source Off...Tempo
Selects the phasers
Wet/Dry modulation
source
[Phs]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the phasers Wet/
Dry modulation
amount
Routing
Limiter
Phaser,
Phaser
Limiter
the limiter and phaser
p.261
Input Level
Output Level
Threshold
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Ration=Inf : 1
Louder
L
o
u
d
e
r

Time
Level
Threshold
Ratio=Inf : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Dry Ratio=1.0 : 1
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Single size effects 053: Xctr - Comp (Exciter - Compressor)
245
053: Xctr - Comp
(Exciter - Compressor)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandacompressor.You
canchangetheorderoftheeffects.
054: Xctr- Lmtr
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandalimiter.Youcan
changetheorderoftheeffects.
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Exciter
Blend X Blend 100...+100
Sets the intensity
effect p.222
Emphasis
Freq
F Freq 0...70
Sets the frequency
range to be empha-
sized p.222
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
[LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Level C OutLevel 0...100
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Routing Route
Xct Cmp,
Cmp Xct
the exciter and
compressor
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Exciter
Exciter
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Exciter
Sets the intensity
effect p.222
Emphasis
Freq
F Freq 0...70
Sets the frequency
range to be
emphasized p.222
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
[LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Limiter
Ratio L Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.244
Threshold
[dB]
L Trsh[dB] 40...0
which the
p.244
Gain Adjust
[dB]
L G [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter
output gain p.244
Routing Route
Xct Lmt,
Lmt Xct
the exciter and limiter
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Effect Guide
246
055: Xctr- Phsr
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandaphaser.
056: OD - Amp
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonooverdrive/highgaindistortion
andanampsimulation.Youcanchangetheorderofthe
effects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Exciter
Sets the intensity
effect p.222
Emphasis
Freq
F Freq 0...70
Sets the frequency
range to be empha-
sized p.222
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
[LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Phaser
LFO Freq
[Hz]
P LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
modulation
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
Output
Mode
P Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser
output mode p.260
[Phs] Wet/
Dry
P W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the phaser
[Phs]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the phaser
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Overdrive/Hi-Gain
Drive Mode O Mode
Overdrive,
Hi-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and high-
gain distortion
Sets the degree of
distortion p.229
Sets the overdrive
output level p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the overdrive
output level
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
amount of the
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
(shelving type)
Low Gain
[dB]
O Low [dB] 18...+18
EQ
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Mid1 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
Mid1 Gain
[dB]
O Mid1 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Mid2 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
Mid2 Gain
[dB]
O Mid2 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 2
Amp Simulation
Selects the type of
guitar amplifie
Routing
OD Amp,
Amp OD
the overdrive and
amp
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Amp Simulation
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Single size effects 058: Wah - Amp (Wah - Amp Simulation)
247
057: OD - Phsr
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Phaser)
andaphaser.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
058: Wah - Amp
(Wah - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonowahandanampsimulation.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Overdrive/Hi-Gain
Drive Mode O Mode
Overdrive,
Hi-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and high-
gain distortion
Sets the degree of
distortion p.229
Sets the overdrive
output level p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the overdrive
output level
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
amount of the
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
(shelving type)
Low Gain
[dB]
O Low [dB] 18...+18
EQ
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Mid1 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
Mid1 Gain
[dB]
O Mid1 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Mid2 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
Mid2 Gain
[dB]
O Mid2 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 2
Phaser
LFO Freq
[Hz]
P LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
modulation
Sets the resonance
amount p.233
Output
Mode
P Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the phaser
output mode p.261
[Phs] Wet/
Dry
P W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the phaser
[Phs]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the phaser
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Phaser
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Routing
OD/HG
Phaser,
Phaser
OD/HG
the overdrive and
phaser p.261
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Wah/Auto Wah
Frequency
Bottom
W Freq Btm 0...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Frequency
Top
W Freq Top 0...100
the wah center
frequency p.223
Sweep Mode W Sweep
Auto,
D-mod,
LFO
Selects the control
from auto-wah,
modulation source,
and LFO p.223
Selects the
modulation source
for the wah when
Sweep Mode=D-mod
LFO Freq
[Hz]
W LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Sets the resonance
amount
LPF Off, On
[W]Wet/Dry W W/D
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the wah effect
balance
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the wah
[W]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
for the wah
Amp Simulation
Selects the type of
guitar amplifier
Routing Route
Wah Amp,
Amp Wah
the wah and amp
simulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Wet / Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Amp Simulation
Wah/Auto Wah
Wah
D
-mod
Envelope
Sweep Mode
D-mod
Auto
LFO
LFO
Effect Guide
248
059: Deci - Amp
(Decimator - Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandanamp
simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
060: Deci - Comp
(Decimator - Compressor)
Thiseffectcombinesamonodecimatorandacompressor.
061: Amp - Trml
(Amp Simulation- Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoampsimulationandatremolo.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Decimator
Pre LPF D Pre LPF Off, On
Turn the harmonic
noise caused by
lowered sampling on
and off p.227
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of high-
range damping
Sampling
Freq [Hz]
D Fs[Hz]
1.00k...48.00
k
Sets the sampling
frequency
Resolution D Bit Reso 4...24
Sets the data bit
length p.227
Level D OutLevel 0...100
Sets the decimator
output level p.227
Amp Simulation
Selects the type of
guitar amplifier
Routing Route
Dec Amp,
Amp Dec
the decimator and
amp simulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Decimator
Pre LPF P Pre LPF Off, On
Turn the harmonic
noise caused by
lowered sampling on
and off p.227
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the ratio of high-
range damping
Sampling
Freq [Hz]
D Fs[Hz]
1.00k...48.00
k
Sets the sampling
frequency
Resolution D Bit Reso 4...24
Sets the data bit
length p.227
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Decimator
Routing
Amp Simulation
Pre LPF High Damp
Output Level
Decimator
Resolution
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Decimator
Routing
Pre LPF High Damp
Output Level
Decimator
Resolution
Compressor
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Level D OutLevel 0...100
Sets the decimator
output level
p.227
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Routing Route
Dec Cmp,
Cmp Dec
the decimator and
compressor
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Amp Simulation
Selects the type of
guitar amplifier
Tremolo
LFO
Waveform
T LFO
Triangle,
Sine,
Vintage, Up,
Down
Selects the LFO
Waveform p.236
LFO Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
LFO Freq
[Hz]
T LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Depth T Depth 0...100
modulation
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Amp Simulation Tremolo
Amp Simulation Filter Tremolo
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down LFO Shape
Single size effects 063: Rotary SP (Rotary Speaker)
249
062: Organ Vib/Chorus
(Organ Vibrato/Chorus)
Thiseffectsimulatesthechorusandvibratocircuitryofa
vintageorgan.Themodulationspeedanddepthcanbe
customized.
Control Mode
Preset Type
Custom Mix
Custom Depth
Custom Speed
IfControlMode=Preset,youcanusePresetTypetoselect
theeffect.Inthiscase,theCustomMix/Depth/Speedsettings
areignored.IfControlMode=Custom,theCustomMix/
Depth/Speedsettingsarevalid,andthePresetTypesetting
isignored.
Amount
IfPresetType=V1andSource=JS+Y,youcansetthisto+5
andmoveJS+Ytocontroltheeffectintheorderof
V1C1V2C2V3C3.
063: Rotary SP (Rotary Speaker)
Thiseffectsimulatesarotaryspeaker,andobtainsamore
realisticsoundbysimulatingtherotorinthelowrangeand
thehorninthehighrangeseparately.Theeffectalso
simulatesthestereomicrophonesettings.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Trim 0...100 Sets the input level
Control
Mode
Mode
Preset,
Custom
Selects either preset
or custom settings
p.249
Preset Type
V1, C1, V2,
C2, V3, C3
Selects the effect type
when Mode=Preset
V1/V2/V3 are varia-
tions of vibrato, and
C1/C2/C3 are varia-
tions of chorus p.249
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that will change the
effect type
Amount 5...+5
Sets the modulation
amount for changing
the effect type p.249
Custom Mix
Vibrato,
1:99...99:1,
Chorus
Sets the mix level of
the direct sound
when Mode=Preset
p.249
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
mix level of the direct
sound
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for
controlling the mix
level of the direct
sound
Custom
Depth
0...100
Sets the vibrato
depth p.249
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that will control
vibrato depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for
controlling the
vibrato depth
Custom
Speed
0.02...20.00
Sets the vibrato
speed p.249
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for controlling the
vibrato speed
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount for
controlling the
vibrato speed
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
+ Vibrato/Chorus
Mode
Preset Setting
Custom Parameters
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Mode Mode SW Rotate, Stop
Switches between
speaker rotation and
stop
Source Off...Tempo
source for Rotate/
Stop
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
Sets the switch mode
for Rotate/Stop
modulation p.250
Speed
Switch
Speed SW Slow, Fast
rotation speed
between slow and
fast p.250
Source Off...Tempo
source for Slow/Fast
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
for Slow/Fast
modulation p.250
H/R Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Sets the level balance
between the high-
frequency horn and
low-frequency rotor
Manual
Speed
Off...Tempo
Sets a modulation
source for direct
control of rotation
speed p.250
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
How quickly the horn
rotation speed in the
high range is
switched p.250
Horn Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-
range side) horn
rotation speed.
Standard value is
1.00. Selecting Stop
will stop the rotation
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Determines how
quickly the rotor
rotation speed in the
low range is switched
p.250
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
Speaker Simulation
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Horn
Rotary Speaker
Rotor
+
Effect Guide
250
Switch Mode
Thisparametersetshowthemodulationsourceswitches
betweenrotationandstop.
WhenSwitchMode=Toggle,thespeakerrotatesorstops
alternatelyeachtimeyoupressthepedalormovethe
joystick.ViaMIDI,rotationwillswitchbetweenstartand
stopeachtimethemodulationamountexceeds64.
WhenSwitchMode=Moment,thespeakerrotatesby
default,andstopsonlywhenyoupressthepedalormove
thejoystick.ViaMIDI,modulationvaluesabove64makethe
speakerrotate,andvaluesbelow64makeitstop.
Speed Switch
Thisparametercontrolshowtherotationspeed(slowand
fast)isswitchedviathemodulationsource.
WhenSwitchMode=Toggle,thespeedwillswitch
betweenslowandfasteachtimeyoupressthepedalor
movethejoystick.ViaMIDI,thespeedwillswitcheachtime
themodulationamountexceeds64.
WhenSwitchMode=Moment,thespeedisusuallyslow.
Itbecomesfastonlywhenyoupressthepedalormovethe
joystick.ViaMIDI,modulationvaluesabove64setthespeed
toFast,andvaluesbelow64setittoSlow.
Manual Speed
Ifyouwishtocontroltherotationspeedmanually,instead
ofswitchingbetweenSlowandFast,selectamodulation
sourceintheManualSpeedparameter.Ifyoudontwant
tousemanualcontrol,setthistoOff.
Horn Acceleration
Rotor Acceleration
Onarealrotaryspeaker,therotationspeedacceleratesor
deceleratesgraduallyafteryouswitchthespeed.The
HornandRotorAccelerationparameterssetthe
transitiontimesbetweenfastandslowspeeds.
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Thisisasimulationofstereomicrophonesettings.
Effects064120canbeselectedonlyforthemastereffect.
ThemastereffectdoesnotoutputaDry(direct)sound;only
theWet(effect)soundisoutput,andthenmixedwiththe
Dry(direct)soundintheL/Rbus.
Theparameternamesandeffectblockdiagramsareshown
inthesamewayasfortheothereffectsthatcanalsobeused
asaninserteffect,butpleasenotethefollowingpoints.
Wet/Dryparameter:ThiscontrolstheleveloftheWet
(effect)sound.TheDry(direct)soundisnotoutput.
TheoutputfortheDry(direct)soundisnotshowninthe
effectblockdiagram.
(In/Outonpage 211)
064: St.Chorus (Stereo Chorus)
Thiseffectaddsthicknessandwarmthtothesoundby
modulatingthedelaytimeoftheinputsignal.Youcanadd
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftand
rightLFOsfromeachother.
Rotor Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-
frequency) rotor
speed. Standard
value is 1.00.
Selecting Stop will
stop the rotation
Mic Distance 0...100
Sets the distance
between the micro-
phone and rotary
speaker p.250
Mic Spread 0...100
Sets the angle of left
and right micro-
phones p.250
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Mic Spread
Microphone Microphone
Mic Distance Mic Distance
Rotary Speaker (Top View)
Rotary Speaker - Mic Placement
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Pre EQ Trim PreEQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
LEQ Gain
[dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
Low EQ
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
HEQ Gain
[dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
High EQ
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
l
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency
p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Chorus
Chorus
Left
Right
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
LEQ HEQ
LFO: Tri / Sine
Single size effects 065: VtgChorus (Vintage Chorus)
251
L Pre Delay [ms]
R Pre Delay [ms]
Settingtheleftandrightdelaytimeindividuallyallowsyou
tocontrolthestereoimage.
065: VtgChorus (Vintage Chorus)
Thismodelsafamouschorusunitthatwasbuiltintoa
guitaramp.Althoughitdoesnotprovideachorusand
vibratoselectswitch,youcanusetheWet/DryandBus
settingstoproducetheireffect.TheSpeed,Depth,and
Manualparametersallowanevenwiderrangeofsounds
thantheoriginalunit.
Wet/Dry
Output Mode
Forthemastereffects,Wet/Dryadjuststheoutputlevelof
theeffectsound.
WhenOutputModeisMono,LandRwilloutputthe
samevibratoeffect.Normally,youllproduceachoruseffect
byadjustingthereturnleveltomixtheprocessedsound
withthedirectsound.IfyouturnBusOffandadjustthe
settingssothatnoneofthedirectsoundismixedin,a
vibratoeffectwillbeproduced.
IfOutputModeisST(LD&RW),thedirectsoundwillbe
pannedtoL,andtheeffectsoundwillbepannedtoRfor
output.Normally,youllmixthedirectsoundandeffect
soundbyadjustingthereturnlevel,applyingchorusonlyto
theRchannel,andproducingastereoeffectthatsspreadto
theleftandright.IfyouturnBusOff,panthedirectsound
andeffectsoundtotheleftandright,andoutputthemfrom
stereospeakers,theeffectsoundanddirectsoundwillbe
pannedinstereo,producingaclearandspaciouschorus
effect.
066: BlkChorus (Black Chorus)
ThismodelsaDanishmadestereochorus+pitchmodulator
&flanger.Althoughthiseffectwasoriginallyintendedfor
guitar,itwasalsousedbynumerouskeyboardplayers.
Usedwithelectricpiano,itproducesadistinctivetone.
Mode
Intensity
IncreasingtheIntensityvaluewillstrengthenthe
modulationeffect.Thiscontrolstheeffect,direct,and
feedbackvalues.Thevaluesthatarecontrolledwilldepend
ontheModesetting.
L Pre Delay
[ms]
L Dly[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
for the left channel
p.251
R Pre Delay
[ms]
R Dly[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
for the right channel
p.251
Depth 0...100
modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the LFO
modulation depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation depth
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of LFO
Depth 0...100
Sets the modulation
depth
Manual 1...100
Sets the sweep
frequency
Output
Mode
Out 0, 1
Sets the outpu mode
0: Mono
1: ST (L-D& R-W)
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...
99:1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100 ... +100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Chorus
LFO
Output Mode
Mono
Stereo
(L-D&R-W)
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the LFO speed
Intensity 1...100
LFO modulation
Mode 0, 1, 2
Select a mode
0: Chorus
1: Pitch Modulation
2: Flanger
Width 0...2
Sets the LFO
modulation depth
Input Gain 1...1000 Sets the input gain
Output
Mode
Out Mode 0, 1
Select a output mode
0: Mono
1: Stereo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99 ...
99:1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100 ... +100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Chorus
LFO
Input Gain
Mode & Intensity
Mono
Stereo
Output Mode
-
+
+
+
Effect Guide
252
067: St.HrmCho
(Stereo Harmonic Chorus)
Thiseffectapplieschorusonlytothehigherfrequencies.
Thiscanbeusedtoapplyachoruseffecttoabasssound
withoutmakingthesoundthinner.Youcanalsousethis
chorusblockwithfeedbackasaflanger.
High/Low Split
Thisparametersetsthefrequencythatsplitsthehighand
lowrange.Onlythehighrangewillbesenttothechorus
block.
Feedback
Setsthefeedbackamountofthechorusblock.Increasingthe
feedbackwillallowyoutousetheeffectasaflanger.
068: St.Bi Mod
(Stereo Biphase Modulation)
ThisstereochoruseffectaddstwodifferentLFOstogether.
YoucansettheFrequencyandDepthparametersforeach
LFOindividually.DependingonthesettingoftheseLFOs,
verycomplexwaveformswillcreateananalogtype,
unstablemodulatedsound.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Pre Delay
[ms]
Delay[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
from the original
sound
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feed back
amount of the chorus
block p.252
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the high range
damping amount of
the chorus block
High/Low
Split
H/L Split 1...100
Sets the frequency
split point between
the low and high
range p.252
Low Level 0...100
Sets the low range
output level
High Level 0...100
Sets the high range
(chorus) output level
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency
p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Depth 0...100
modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the LFO modulation
depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation depth
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Low Level
Low Level
High Level
High Level
High/Low Split Point
High Damp
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
LFO1
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects LFO1
waveform
LFO1 Freq
[Hz]
LFO1[Hz] 0.02...30.00 Sets the LFO1 speed
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
LFO1&2 speed
Amount
30.00...
+30.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO1
speed
Depth1 0...100
Sets the depth of
LFO1 modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
LFO1&2 modulation
depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO1
modulation depth
LFO2
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects LFO2
waveform
LFO2 Freq
[Hz]
LFO2[Hz] 0.02...30.00 Sets the LFO2 speed
Amount
30.00...
+30.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO2
speed
Depth2 0...100
Sets the depth of
LFO2 modulation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO2
modulation depth
Phase Sw
0 deg,
180 deg
Switches the LFO
phase difference
between left and
right
L Pre Delay
[ms]
L Dly[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
p.251
R Pre Delay
[ms]
R Dly[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
p.251
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount p.252
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Chorus/Flanger
Left
Right
Feedback
180 [degree]
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
LFO1: Tri / Sine
LFO2: Tri / Sine
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
Single size effects 069: Mtap Cho (Multitap Chorus/Delay)
253
069: Mtap Cho
(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
ThiseffecthasfourchorusblockswithadifferentLFO
phase.Youcancreateacomplexstereoimagebysetting
eachblocksdelaytime,depth,outputlevel,andpan
individually.Youcanalsofixsomeofthechorusblocksto
combinethechorusanddelayeffects.
070: Ensemble
ThisEnsembleeffecthasthreechorusblocksthatuseLFOto
createsubtleshimmering,andgivesthreedimensional
depthandspreadtothesound,becausethesignalisoutput
fromtheleft,right,andcenter.
Shimmer
ThisparametersetstheamountofshimmeringoftheLFO
waveform.Increasingthisvalueaddsmoreshimmering,
makingthechoruseffectmorecomplexandricher.
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Tap1
Feedback
100...+100
Sets the Tap1
feedback amount
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
Tap1 feedback
amount and effect
balance
Amount 100...+100
Sets the Tap1
feedback amount and
modulation amount
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...13.00
LFO
Tap1
Delay (000)
[ms]
Tap1 [ms] 0...1000
Sets the Tap1 (LFO
phase=0 degrees)
delay time
Depth Tap1 Depth 0...30
Sets the Tap1 chorus
depth
Level Tap1 Level 0...30
Sets the Tap1 output
level
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
Sets the Tap1 stereo
image
Tap2
Delay (180)
[ms]
Tap2 [ms] 0...1000
Sets the Tap2 (LFO
phase=180 degrees)
delay time
depth
level
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
image
Tap3
Delay (090)
[ms]
Tap3 [ms] 0...1000
Sets the Tap3 (LFO
phase=90 degrees)
delay time
depth
level
LFO1
LFO2
Bi-Phase Modulation LFO
Depth1
Depth2
+
Left
Right
Feedback Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Level
Level
Level
Level
Pan
Pan
Pan
Pan
LFO: Triangle
Tap1 Delay
Tap2 Delay
Tap3 Delay
Tap4 Delay
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
90 [degree]
270 [degree]
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
image
Tap4
Delay (270)
[ms]
Tap4 [ms] 0...1000
Sets the Tap4 (LFO
phase=270 degrees)
delay time
depth
level
Pan
L6...L1, C,
R1...R6
image
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed 1...100
LFO
Source Off...Tempo
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
Depth 0...100
modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the LFO modulation
depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation depth
Shimmer 0...100
Sets the amount of
shimmering of the
LFO waveform p.253
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO
Shimmer
+ Ensemble
Time
Level
Ensemble LFO
Shimmer
Effect Guide
254
071: Poly6 Ens (Polysix Ensemble)
ThismodelstheensembleeffectbuiltintotheclassicKorg
PolySixprogrammablepolyphonicsynthesizer.
072: St Flange (Stereo Flanger)
Thiseffectgivesasignificantswellandmovementofpitch
tothesound.Itismoreeffectivewhenappliedtoasound
withalotofharmonics.Thisisastereoflanger.Youcanadd
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftand
rightLFOsfromeachother.
Feedback
Wet/Dry
ThepeakshapeofthepositiveandnegativeFeedback
valueisdifferent.Theharmonicswillbeemphasizedwhen
theeffectsoundismixedwiththedrysoundifyouseta
positivevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/Dry,andif
yousetanegativevalueforbothFeedbackandWet/
Dry.
High Damp [%]
Thisparametersetstheamountofdampingofthefeedback
inthehighrange.Increasingthevaluewillcuthighrange
harmonics.
073: VtgFlange (Vintage Flanger)
Thismodelsaclassicanalogflanger.Itishighlyeffectivefor
chordingonclavitypekeyboardsorelectricpiano.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Depth 0...100
effect
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
effect depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the amount by
which the effect
depth will be
modulated
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Delay Time
[ms]
Delay[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
from the original
sound
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the feedback
damping amount in
the high range
p.254
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
+
Polysix
Ensemble
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Flanger
Flanger
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.254
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Speed [Hz] 0.10...10.0 Sets the speed of LFO
Depth 0...100
modulation
Resonance 0...100
Sets the resonance
amount
Manual 1...100
Sets the sweep
frequency
LFO Reset
Source
Off...Tempo Selects a modulation
source for LFO reset
Reset Offset 0...100 Sets the offset
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Flanger
LFO
Feedback
LFO Sync
Reset Offset
Single size effects 074: St.RndFlg (Stereo Random Flanger)
255
074: St.RndFlg
(Stereo Random Flanger)
Thestereoeffectusesastepshapewaveformandrandom
LFOformodulation,creatingauniqueflangingeffect.
075: St.EnvFlg
(Stereo Envelope Flanger)
ThisFlangerusesanenvelopegeneratorformodulation.
Youwillobtainthesamepatternofflangingeachtimeyou
play.YoucanalsocontroltheFlangerdirectlyusingthe
modulationsource.
Sweep Mode
Source
Thisparameterswitchestheflangercontrolmode.With
SweepMode=EG,theflangerwillsweepusingthe
envelopegenerator.Thisenvelopegeneratorisincludedin
theenvelopeflanger,andnotrelatedtothePitchEG,Filter
EG,orAmpEG.
TheSourceparameterselectsthesourcethatstartsthe
envelopegenerator.Ifyouselect,forexample,Gate,the
envelopegeneratorwillstartwhenthenoteonmessageis
received.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Delay Time
[ms]
Delay[ms] 0.0...50.0
Sets the delay time
from the original
sound
LFO
Waveform
LFO
Step-Tri,
Random
Selects the LFO
Waveform p.225
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
used for both LFO
speed and step speed
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
Step Freq
[Hz]
Step[Hz] 0.05...50.00
Sets the LFO step
speed (speed that
changes in steps)
Amount
50.00...
+50.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO step
speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Step Base
Note
,...
Selects the type of
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO step speed
p.225
Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the feedback
damping amount in
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.254
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Flanger
Flanger
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
L Delay Time
Bottom [ms]
L Btm[ms] 0.0...50.0
the left-channel delay
time
L Delay Time
Top [ms]
L Top[ms] 0.0...50.0
the left-channel delay
time
R Delay Time
Bottom [ms]
R Btm[ms] 0.0...50.0
the right-channel
delay time
R Delay Time
Top [ms]
R Top[ms] 0.0...50.0
the right-channel
delay time
Sweep Mode EG, D-mod
Determines whether
the flanger is
controlled by the
envelope generator
or by the modulation
source p.255
Selects the
modulation source
that triggers the EG
(when Sweep Mode =
EG), or the
modulation source
that causes the
flanger to sweep
(when Sweep Mode =
D-mod) p.255
EG Attack 1...100
Sets the EG attack
speed p.256
EG Decay 1...100
Sets the EG decay
speed p.256
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
p.254
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the feedback
damping amount in
the high range
p.254
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.254
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
EG Attack/Decay
EG
D-mod
Sweep Mode
D
-mod
Flanger
Flanger
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Effect Guide
256
WhenSweepMode=Dmod,themodulationsourcecan
controltheflangerdirectly.Selectthemodulationsource
usingtheSourceparameter.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSourceparameterissmallerthan64,
andtheeffectisonwhenthevalueis64orhigher.The
EnvelopeGeneratoristriggeredwhenthevalue
changesfrom63orsmallerto64orhigher.
EG Attack
EG Decay
AttackandDecayspeedaretheonlyadjustableparameters
onthisEG.
076: St.Vibrat (Stereo Vibrato)
Thiseffectcausesthepitchoftheinputsignaltoshimmer.
UsingtheAutoFadeallowsyoutoincreaseordecreasethe
shimmeringspeed.
AUTOFADE Source
Fade-In Delay [ms]
Fade-In Rate
LFO Freq Mod
WhenLFOFreqModissettoAUTOFADE,youcanuse
themodulationsourceselectedinAUTOFADESourceasa
triggertoautomaticallyfadeinthemodulationamount.
WhenMIDISyncissettoOn,youcannotusethis.
TheFadeInRateparameterspecifiestherateoffadein.
TheFadeInDelayparameterdeterminesthetimefrom
AutoFademodulationsourceOnuntilthefadeinstarts.
ThefollowingisanexampleoffadeinwheretheLFO
speedisincreasedfrom1.0Hzto4.0Hzwhenanoteon
messageisreceived.
AUTOFADESource=Gate1,LFOFreqMod=AUTOFADE,
LFOFreq[Hz]=1.0,Amount=3.0
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthedynamic
modulationsourcespecifiedfortheAUTOFADE
Sourceparameterissmallerthan64,andtheeffectis
onwhenthevalueis64orhigher.TheAutoFade
functionistriggeredwhenthevaluechangesfrom63or
smallerto64orhigher.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
AUTOFADE
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that starts AutoFade
p.256
l
Fade-In
Delay [ms]
00...2000
Sets the fade-in delay
time p.256
Fade-In Rate 1...100
Sets the rate of fade-
in p.256
LFO Freq
Mod
LFO Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
Switches between D-
mod and AUTOFADE
for the LFO frequency
modulation p.256
Vibrato
Depth
Depth 0...100
modulation
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the LFO modulation
depth
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the LFO
modulation depth
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Amount Amt
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Vibrato
Vibrato
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO Shape
Fade-In Delay LFO Frequency AutoFade
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
AUTOFADE
AutoFade
Note On All Note Off
Fade-In Rate
Source=Gate1
LFO Freq. Mod=AUTOFADE
LFO Frequency[Hz]=1.0
Amount=+3.0
LFO Frequency
=1.0+3.0=4.0Hz
LFO Frequency
=1.0Hz
Gate1 Signal
AUTOFADE
Fade-In Dealy
Single size effects 078: Doppler
257
077: St.AF Mod
(Stereo Auto Fade Modulation)
Thisstereochorus/flangereffectenablesyoutocontrolthe
LFOspeedandeffectbalanceusingautofade,andyoucan
spreadthesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleftandright
LFOsfromeachother.
078: Doppler
ThiseffectsimulatestheDopplereffectofamovingsound
withachangingpitch,similartothesirenofanpassing
ambulance.Mixingtheeffectsoundwiththedrysoundwill
createauniquechoruseffect.
LFO Mode
Source
LFO Sync
TheLFOModeparameterswitchesLFOoperationmode.
WhenLoopisselected,theDopplereffectwillbecreated
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
AUTOFADE
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that starts AutoFade
p.256
Fade-In Rate 1...100
Sets the rate of fade-
in p.256
Fade-In
Delay [ms]
00...2000
Sets the fade-in delay
time p.256
LFO Freq
Mod
LFO Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
Switches between D-
mod and AUTOFADE
for the LFO frequency
modulation p.256
Wet/Dry
Mod
W/D Mod
D-mod,
AUTOFADE
Switches between D-
mod and AUTOFADE
for the effect balance
modulation p.256
Mod Delay
L Delay [ms]
L Dly[ms] 0.0...500.0
Sets the left channel
delay time
Mod Delay
R Delay [ms]
R Dly[ms] 0.0...500.0
Sets the right channel
delay time
Depth 0...200
modulation
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the feedback
damping amount in
the high range
p.254
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.225
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Amount [Hz] Amt
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225, p.254
source for Wet/Dry
Amount Amt 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
AutoFade LFO Frequency
Wet / Dry
Delay
Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Pitch Depth 0...100
Sets the pitch
variation of the
moving sound p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
pitch variation
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of pitch
variation
Pan Depth 100...+100
Sets the panning of
the moving sound
p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
panning
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of panning
LFO Mode Loop, 1-Shot
Switches LFO
operation mode
p.257
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
LFO reset p.257
LFO Sync Off, On
Switches between
LFO reset on and off
when LFO Mode is set
to Loop p.257
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Pan Depth
D
-mod
+
Trigger LFO Mode = 1-Shot
Doppler
LFO
Effect Guide
258
repeatedly.IfLFOSyncissettoOn,theLFOwillbereset
whenthemodulationsourcespecifiedwiththeSource
parameteristurnedon.
WhenLFOModeissetto1Shot,theDopplereffectis
createdonlyoncewhenthemodulationsourcespecifiedin
theSourcefieldisturnedon.Atthistimeifyoudonotset
theSourceparameter,theDopplereffectwillnotbe
created,andnoeffectsoundwillbeoutput.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueforthemodulationsource
specifiedfortheSourceparameterissmallerthan64,
Dopplereffectistriggeredwhenthevaluechanges
from63orsmallerto64orhigher.
Pitch Depth
WiththeDopplereffect,thepitchisraisedwhenthesound
approaches,andthepitchisloweredwhenthesoundgoes
away.Thisparametersetsthispitchvariation.
Pan Depth
Thisparametersetsthewidthofthestereoimageofthe
effectsound.Withlargervalues,thesoundseemstocome
andgofrommuchfurtheraway.Withpositivevalues,the
soundmovesfromlefttoright;withnegativevalues,the
soundmovesfromrighttoleft.
079: Detune
Usingthiseffect,youcanobtainadetuneeffectthatoffsets
thepitchoftheeffectsoundslightlyfromthepitchofthe
inputsignal.Comparedtothechoruseffect,amorenatural
soundthicknesswillbecreated.
Input Lvl Dmod [%]
Source
Thisparametersetsthedynamicmodulationoftheinput
level.
080: PitchSftr (Pitch Shifter)
Thiseffectchangesthepitchoftheinputsignal.Youcan
selectfromthreetypes:Fast(quickresponse),Medium,and
Slow(preservestonalquality).Youcanalsocreateaneffect
inwhichthepitchisgraduallyraised(ordropped)usingthe
delaywithfeedback.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Pitch Shift
[cents]
Pitch [c] 100...+100
Sets the pitch
difference from the
input signal
Source Off...Tempo
source for pitch shift
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for pitch shift
Delay Time
[ms]
0...1000 Sets the delay time
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
Pitch
H
i
g
h
e
r
Doppler - Pitch / Pan Depth
L
o
w
e
r
Original Pitch
Left
Center
Right
Pitch Depth
Pan Depth
< < < < < <<<<<< >>>>>> > > > > >
Volume Louder Louder
Pan Depth
= () value
Pan Depth
= (+) value
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
Input Level
+
High Damp
Delay
Feedback
Detune
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Mode
Slow,
Medium,
Fast
Switches Pitch Shifter
mode p.259
Shift
[1/2tone]
Pitch 24...+24
Sets the pitch shift
amount by steps of a
semitone p.259
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
pitch shift amount
p.259
Amount 24...+24
Sets the modulation
amount of pitch shift
amount p.259
Fine [cents] Fine [c] 100...+100
amount by steps of a
cent p.259
Amount
[cents]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount p.259
Delay Time
[ms]
0...2000 Sets the delay time
Feedback
Position
Pre, Post
Switches the
feedback connection
p.259
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount p.259
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Input Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
Max Zero
Higher
D
-mod
Input Level
Max Zero
Higher
D
-mod
x1.0
x0.5 Input Level Dmod= +100
Input Level Dmod= +50
L
o
u
d
e
r
x1.0
x0.5
Input Level Dmod= 100
Input Level Dmod= 50
Input Level Dmod
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level
Input Level
+
High Damp
Delay
Feedback
Pitch Shifter
Feedback Position
Pre
Post
Single size effects 081: P.Sft Mod (Pitch Shift Modulation)
259
Mode
Thisparameterswitchesthepitchshifteroperatingmode.
WithSlow,tonalqualitywillnotbechangedtoomuch.With
Fast,theeffectbecomesaPitchShifterthathasaquick
response,butmaychangethetone.Mediumisinbetween
thesetwo.Ifyoudonotneedtosettoomuchpitchshift
amount,setthisparametertoSlow.Ifyouwishtochange
thepitchsignificantly,useFast.
Shift [1/2tone]
Source
Amount
Fine [cents]
Amount [cents]
TheamountofpitchshiftwillusethevalueofthePitch
ShiftplustheFinevalue.Theamountofmodulationwill
usethePitchShiftAmountvalueplustheFineAmount.
ThesameModulationSourceisusedforbothPitchShift
andFine.
Feedback Position
Feedback
WhenFeedbackPositionissettoPre,thepitchshifter
outputisagaininputtothepitchshifter.Therefore,ifyou
specifyahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitch
willberaised(orlowered)moreandmoreeachtime
feedbackisrepeated.
IfFeedbackPositionissettoPost,thefeedbacksignalwill
notpassthroughthepitchshifteragain.Evenifyouspecify
ahighervaluefortheFeedbackparameter,thepitch
shiftedsoundwillberepeatedatthesamepitch.
081: P.Sft Mod
(Pitch Shift Modulation)
Thiseffectmodulatesthedetunedpitchshiftamountusing
anLFO,addingaclearspreadandwidthtothesoundby
panningtheeffectsoundanddrysoundtotheleftandright.
Thisisespeciallyeffectivewhentheeffectsoundanddry
soundoutputfromstereospeakersaremixed.
Pitch Shift [cents]
Depth
Theseparameterssettheamountofpitchshiftandamount
ofmodulationbymeansoftheLFO.
Pan
Wet/Dry
ThePanparameterpanstheeffectsoundanddrysoundto
theleftandright.WithL,theeffectsoundispannedleft,and
thedrysoundispannedright.WithaWet/Dry=Wetsetting,
theeffectanddrysoundwillbeoutputinaproportionof
1:1.
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Pitch Shift
[cents]
Pitch [c] 100...+100
Sets the pitch
difference from the
input signal p.259
Depth 100...+100
Sets the LFO
modulation depth for
pitch shift amount
p.259
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the depth of
modulation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sqr
Pan
+ Pitch Shifter
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the depth
of modulation
Pan
L, 1 : 99...99 :
1, R
Sets the panning
effect sound and dry
sound separately
p.259
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Square
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.259
l
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Pitch
H
i
g
h
e
r
Pitch Shift Mod - Pitch Shift / Depth
L
o
w
e
r
Original Pitch
Pitch Shift (+ value)
LFO Waveform=Triangle
Depth (+value)
LFO Waveform=Square
Depth (value)
Effect Guide
260
082: P4EQ - Flng
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Chorus/Flanger)
andachorus/flanger.
Output Mode
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
083: Comp - Flng
(Compressor - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandachorus/
flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
E1 G[dB] 18...+18
1
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2 Q E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Gain [dB]
E2 G[dB] 18...+18
2
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
E3 G[dB] 18...+18
3
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
E4 G[dB] 18...+18
4
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
F Dly[ms] 0.0...1350.0 Sets the delay time
Depth F Depth 0...100
modulation
Feedback F F.back 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
Output
Mode
F Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output
mode for the chorus/
flanger p.260
[Cho/Fln]
Wet/Dry
F W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.225, p.254
[Cho/Fln]
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the chorus/flanger
[Cho/Fln]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ Chorus/Flanger
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
modulation
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
Output
Mode
F Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output
flanger p.261
[Cho/Fln]
Wet/Dry
F W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.225, p.254
[Cho/Fln]
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
[Cho/Fln]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Routing Route
Cmp Flg,
Flg Cmp
the compressor and
chorus/flanger p.261
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Comp
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Single size effects 084: Lmtr - Flng (Limiter - Chorus/Flanger)
261
Output Mode
Routing
WhenWetInvertisselected,therightchannelphaseofthe
chorus/flangereffectsoundisinverted.Thiscreatespseudo
stereoeffectsandaddsspread.
However,ifamonoinputtypeeffectisconnectedafterthis
effect,theleftandrightsoundsmaycanceleachother,
eliminatingthechorus/flangereffects.
WhenRoutingissettoFlangerComp,OutputMode
willbesettoNormal.
084: Lmtr - Flng
(Limiter - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandachorus/flanger.
085: Xctr - Flng
(Exciter - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandachorus/flanger.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Limiter
Ratio L Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.244
Threshold
[dB]
L Trsh[dB] 40...0
which the
p.244
Gain Adjust
[dB]
L G [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter
output gain p.244
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
modulation
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Output
Mode
F Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output
flanger p.261
[Cho/Fln]
Wet/Dry
F W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.225, p.254
[Cho/Fln]
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
[Cho/Fln]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Routing Route
Lmt Flg,
Flg Lmt
the limiter and
chorus/flanger
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Chorus/Flanger
LFO: Tri / Sine
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Exciter
Sets the intensity
effect p.222
Emphasis
Freq
X Freq 0...70
Sets the frequency
range to be empha-
sized p.222
Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
modulation
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
Output
Mode
F Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output
flanger p.260
[Cho/Fln]
Wet/Dry
F W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.225, p.254
[Cho/Fln]
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
[Cho/Fln]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry Route
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter
Effect Guide
262
086: OD - Flng
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Chorus/Flanger)
andachorus/flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
087: Phsr - Flng
(Phaser - Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonophaserandachorus/flanger.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Overdrive/Hi-Gain
Drive Mode O Mode
Overdrive,
Hi-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and high-
gain distortion
Sets the degree of
distortion
p.229
Sets the overdrive
output level
p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the overdrive
output level
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
amount of the
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
(shelving type)
Low Gain
[dB]
O Low [dB] 18...+18
EQ
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Mid1 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
Mid1 Gain
[dB]
O Mid1 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Mid2 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
Mid2 Gain
[dB]
O Mid2 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 2
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
modulation
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
Output
Mode
F Out
Normal, Wet
Invert
Selects the output
flanger p.261
[Cho/Fln]
Wet/Dry
F W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.225, p.254
[Cho/Fln]
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
[Cho/Fln]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Chorus/Flanger
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Routing Route
OD Flg,
Flg OD
the overdrive and
chorus / flanger
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Phaser
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
P LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Sets the frequency
where the effect is
applied
modulation
Sets the resonance
amount
p.233
Wet/Dry P W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
balance
p.225, p.233
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
modulation
Sets the feedback
amount p.254
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Output
Mode
F Out
Normal,
Wet Invert
Selects the output
flanger p.260
[Cho/Fln]
Wet/Dry
F W/D
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger
p.225, p.254
[Cho/Fln]
Source
Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
[Cho/Fln]
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Chorus/Flanger
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
LEQHEQ EQ
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Phaser
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
LFO: Tri / Sine LFO: Tri / Sine
Normal
Wet Invert
Output Mode
+
Single size effects 088: GrainSftr (Grain Shifter)
263
088: GrainSftr (Grain Shifter)
Thiseffectcutsextremelyshortsamples(grains)fromthe
inputsignalwaveformandplaysthemrepeatedly,givinga
mechanicalcharactertothesound.
Duration
LFO Sample Cycle [Hz]
Durationsetsthelengthofthesampledgrain,andthe
LFOSampleCyclecontrolshowoftenanewgrainis
sampled.InbetweenSampleCycles,thecurrentgrainis
repeatedcontinuously.
089: LCR Delay
ThismultitapdelayoutputsthreeTapsignalstotheleft,
right,andcenterrespectively.Youcanalsoadjusttheleft
andrightspreadofthedelaysound.
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Duration 0...100
Sets the duration of
the grain p.263
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the source
that will modulate
the duration of the
grain
Amount 100...+100
Sets the amount by
which the grain
duration will be
modulated
LFO Sync Src Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that will reset the LFO
LFO Sample
Cycle [Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
which the grain will
be switched p.263
Source Off...Tempo
Amount
20.00...
+20.00
Sets the modulation
amount of LFO speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1: 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Sample Cycle
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO
D
-mod
Trigger
Grain Shifter
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Level
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Spread 0...50
stereo image of the
effect sound
p.264
L Delay
Time [ms]
L Dly[ms] 0...2730
Sets the delay time of
TapL
Level L Level 0...50
of TapL
C Delay
Time [ms]
C Dly[ms] 0...2730
TapC
of TapC
C Delay
Feedback
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount of TapC
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the TapC feedback
amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the TapC
feedback amount
R Delay
Time [ms]
R Delay[ms] 0...2730
TapR
Level R Level 0...50
of TapR
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
In
Out
Sample Cycle / Duration
Sample Cycle
Duration
C Delay
R Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
+
Level
Level
Level
Effect Guide
264
High Damp [%]
Low Damp [%]
Theseparameterssetthedampingamountofhighrange
andlowrange.Thetoneofthedelayedsoundbecomes
darkerandlighterasitfeedsback.
Spread
Thisparametersetsthepanwidthoftheeffectsound.The
stereoimageiswidestwithavalueof50,andtheeffect
soundofbothchannelsisoutputfromthecenterwitha
valueof0.
090: St.Delay (Stereo/CrossDelay)
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeedback
delayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossoverbetween
theleftandrightbychangingthefeedbackrouting.
091: St.MtpDly
(Stereo Multitap Delay)
TheleftandrightMultitapDelayshavetwotaps
respectively.Changingtheroutingoffeedbackandtap
outputallowsyoutocreatevariouspatternsofcomplex
effectsounds.
Mode
Youcanchangehowtheleftandrightdelaysignalsare
pannedbymodifyingtheroutingoftheleftandrightdelay
asshowninthefigureabove.Youneedtoinputdifferent
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Level
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Stereo/Cross Mode Stereo, Cross
Switches between
stereo delay and
cross-feedback delay
L Delay [ms] L Dl[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the delay time
R Delay [ms] R DL[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the delay time
L Feedback L F.back 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount for the left
channel
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
feedback amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the left
channel feedback
R Feedback R F.back 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount for the right
channel
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the right
channel feedback
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Spread 50...+50
stereo image of the
effect sound p.264
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Delay
Delay
Stereo/Cross
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Spread
Stereo/Cross
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Level
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Mode
Normal,
Cross
Feedback,
Cross Pan1,
Cross Pan2
Switches the left and
right delay routing
p.264
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Tap1
Time [ms]
Tap1[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
Level 0...100
level p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
Tap2[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the Tap2 feedback
amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the Tap2
feedback amount
Spread 100...+100
stereo image of the
effect sound
p.264
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the effect sounds
stereo image width
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
sounds stereo image
width
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Delay
Feedback
Tap1 Level Mode Mode
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Mode: Normal Mode: Cross Feedback Mode: Cross Pan1 Mode: Cross Pan2
Single size effects 092: St.ModDly (Stereo Modulation Delay)
265
soundstoeachchannelinorderforthisparametertobe
effective.
Tap1 Level
ThisparametersetstheoutputlevelofTap1.Settinga
differentlevelfromTap2willaddauniquetouchtoa
monotonousdelayandfeedback.
092: St.ModDly
(Stereo Modulation Delay)
ThisstereodelayusesanLFOtosweepthedelaytime.The
pitchalsovaries,creatingadelaysoundwhichswellsand
shimmers.Youcanalsocontrolthedelaytimeusinga
modulationsource.
Dmod Modulation
Whenthemodulationsourceisusedforcontrol,this
parameterreversestheleftandrightmodulationdirection.
LFO Dmod Sync
Source
L LFO Phase [deg]
R LFO Phase [deg]
IfLFOSyncisOn,theLFOwillberesetbythemodulation
sourcethatisreceived.
TheSourceparametersetsthemodulationsourcethat
resetstheLFO.Forexample,youcanassignGateasa
modulationsourcesothatthesweepalwaysstartsfromthe
specifiedpoint.
LLFOPhaseandRLFOPhasesetthephaseobtained
whentheleftandrightLFOsarereset.Inthisway,youcan
createchangesinpitchsweepfortheleftandrightchannels
individually.
Theeffectisoffwhenavalueofthemodulationsource
specifiedintheSourceparameteris63orsmaller,
LFOistriggeredandresettotheLLFOPhaseandR
LFOPhasesettingswhenthevaluechangesfrom63or
smallerto64orhigher.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Modulation
Mode
Mod Mode LFO, D-mod
Switches between
LFO modulation
control and
modulation source
control
Dmod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Reversed L/R control
by modulation source
p.265
Selects the
modulation source
that controls delay
time
Response 0...30
Sets the rate of
response to the
modulation source
LFO Dmod
Sync
Off, On
Switches LFO reset
off/on
p.265
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that resets the LFO
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency
p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
L Delay
Delay Time
[ms]
L Dl[ms] 0.0...259.0
Sets the delay time
Feedback L F.back 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount of left delay
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Modulation Mode
D-mod
LFO
D
-mod
Delay
Delay
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
Response
LFO Sync
L Depth 0...200
left LFO modulation
L LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase
obtained when the
left LFO is reset p.265
R Delay
Delay Time
[ms]
R Dl[ms] 0.0...259.0
Sets the delay time
Feedback R F.back 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount of right delay
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase
obtained when the
right LFO is reset
p.265
R Depth 0...200
right LFO modulation
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Effect Guide
266
093: St.DynDly
(Stereo Dynamic Delay)
Thisstereodelaycontrolsthelevelofdelayaccordingtothe
inputsignallevel.Youcanusethisasaduckingdelaythat
appliesdelaytothesoundonlywhenyouplaykeysata
highvelocityoronlywhenthevolumelevelislow.
Control Target
Thisparameterselectsnolevelcontrol,delayoutputcontrol
(effectbalance),orfeedbackamountcontrol.
Polarity
Threshold
Offset
Attack
Release
TheOffsetparameterspecifiesthevaluefortheControl
Targetparameter(thatissettoNone),expressedasthe
ratiorelativetotheparametervalue(theWet/Dryvalue
withControlTarget=OutputLevel,ortheFeedback
valuewithControlTarget=Feedback).
WhenPolarityispositive,theControlTargetvalueis
obtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebytheOffset
value(iftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold),orequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelexceedsthethreshold.
WhenPolarityisnegative,ControlTargetvalueequalsthe
parametervalueiftheinputlevelisbelowthethreshold,or
isobtainedbymultiplyingtheparametervaluebythe
Offsetvalueifthelevelexceedsthethreshold.
TheAttackandReleaseparametersspecifyattacktime
andreleasetimeofdelaylevelcontrol.
094: St.PanDly
(Stereo Auto Panning Delay)
Thisstereodelayeffectpansthedelaysoundleftandright
usingtheLFO.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Control
Target
Control
None, Out,
FB
Selects from no
control, output, and
feedback p.266
Polarity +,
Reverses level control
p.266
Threshold 0...100
Sets the level where
the effect is applied
p.266
Offset 0...100
Sets the offset of level
control p.266
Attack 1...100
of level control p.266
Release 1...100
of level control p.266
L Delay [ms] L Dl[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the delay time
R Delay [ms] R Dl[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the delay time
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Spread 100...+100
stereo image of the
effect sound p.264
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Delay
Left
Right
Feedback Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
High DampLow Damp
Threshold
Delay
FB Out
Control Target Attack, Release Envelope +
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Pan Depth Pan Depth 0...100
Sets the panning
width
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the panning width
Amount 100...+100
Set the modulation
amount of the
panning width
L Delay
Delay Time
[ms]
L Dl[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the delay time
Sets the feedback
amount for the left
channel
R Delay
Delay Time
[ms]
R Dl[ms] 0.0...274.0
Sets the delay time
Sets the feedback
channel
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
Dynamic Delay
Threshold
Dry
Envelope
Wet
Target=Output Level
Polarity= ()
Wet
Target=Output Level
Polarity= (+)
Delay Time
Time
(Ducking Delay)
Release
Attack
Level
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Pan
Pan
LFO: Tri / Sin
Depth
Delay
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
Single size effects 095: Tape Echo
267
095: Tape Echo
Thiseffectsimulatesatapeechounitwiththreeplayback
heads.Thedistortionandtonalchangetypicalofmagnetic
tapearealsoreproduced.
Tap1 Delay [ms]
Source
Amount
Tap2 Position [%]
Tap3 Position [%]
ThedelaytimeforTap2and3isspecifiedasaproportion
(%)relativetoDelay(Tap1).Evenifyouusedynamic
modulationtocontrolDelay(Tap1),Tap2and3will
changeatthesameproportion.
Feedback Amount
Feedback Level
ThefeedbackoutputfromTap1,2,and3ismixedaccording
totheFeedbackAmount,andthenthefinalamountof
feedbackisspecifiedbyFeedbackLevel.
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.238
Panning Freq
[Hz]
Pan[Hz] 0.02...20.00
Sets the panning
speed
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
Switches between
using the frequency
of the panning speed
and using the tempo
and notes p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...
Selects the type of
delay time for the
panning speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
delay time for the
panning speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Trim 0...100 Sets the input gain
Pre Tone 0...100
Sets the tone of the
input
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
which pitch variation
will occur
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of
pitch variation
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range
Saturation 0...100
Sets the distortion
amount
Tap1
Delay [ms]
Dly-T1[ms] 0...539
Sets the delay time
(tap1) p.267
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the delay time p.267
Amount
2700...
+2700
Sets the modulation
amount of delay time
p.267
Level 0...100
level
Pan L, 1...99, R
Sets the stereo image
of tap1
Feedback
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Tap1
feedback amount
p.267
Wah Flatter
D
-mod
Tap2/3
Position
+
Tape
Saturation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan Level
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Feedback Amt
High / Low Damp Pre Tone
Delay
(1)
(2)
(3)
Delay Time
Tap2
Position [%]
0...100
Sets the position of
Tap 2 relative to the
Tap 1 delay time the
depth of pitch
variation
p.267
Level 0...100
level
Pan L, 1...99, R
of tap2
Feedback
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
p.267
Tap3
Position [%]
0...100
depth of pitch
variation
p.267
Level 0...100
level
Pan L, 1...99, R
of tap3
Feedback
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Tap3
feedback amount
p.267
Feedback
Level
Feedback 0...100
Sets the amount of
feedback for Taps 1, 2,
and 3 p.267
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
feedback amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Effect Guide
268
096: Echo Plus
Thismodelsafamousanalogtapeechounit.Ontheoriginal
device,echowascreatedbyaplaybackhead,andthe
delaytimewasspecifiedbyadjustingthespeedofthe
motor.Thewarmthandsubtletyoftheechoesitgenerated
madethislofiunitafavoritewithmanypromusicians.
097: Auto Reverse
Thiseffectrecordstheinputsignalandautomaticallyplays
itinreverse(theeffectissimilartoatapereversesound).
Rec Mode
Reverse Time [ms]
WhenRecModeissettoSingle,youcansetupto
2,640msecforReverseTime.Ifrecordingstartsduringthe
reverseplayback,theplaybackwillbeinterrupted.
WhenRecModeissettoMulti,youcanmakeanother
recordingduringthereverseplayback.However,the
maximumReverseTimeislimitedto1,320msec.
Ifyouwishtorecordaphraseorrhythmpattern,setRec
ModetoSingle.Ifyourecordonlyonenote,setRec
ModetoMulti.
TheReverseTimeparameterspecifiesthemaximum
durationofthereverseplayback.Thepartinexcessofthis
limitwillnotbeplayedinreverse.Ifyouwishtoaddshort
piecesofthereverseplaybackofsinglenotes,makethe
ReverseTimeshorter.
Envelope
Source
Threshold
Theseparametersselectthesourcetocontrolthestartand
endofrecording.
WhenEnvelopeissettoDmod,theinputsignalwillbe
recordedonlywhenthevalueofthemodulationsource
selectedbytheSourceparameteris64orhigher.
WhenEnvelopeissettoInput,theinputsignalwillbe
recordedonlywhenitslevelexceedstheThresholdlevel.
Whenrecordingiscompleted,reverseplaybackstarts
immediately.
Response
Thisparameterenablesyoutosetthespeedoftheresponse
totheendofrecording.Setasmallervaluewhenyouare
recordingaphraseorrhythmpattern,andsetahighervalue
ifyouarerecordingonlyonenote.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Time [ms] Dly-T1[ms] 0...539 Sets the delay time
Feedback 0...100
Sets the amount of
feedback
Tone 1...100
delay sound
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Rec Mode Single, Multi
Sets the recording
mode p.268
Reverse Time
[ms]
Revers 20...2640
Sets the maximum
duration of the
reverse playback
p.268
Envelope Env Sel
D-mod,
Input
Selects whether the
start and end of
recording is
controlled via the
modulation source or
the input signal level
p.268
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Delay
Feedback
Low Damp Tone
Input Level
D-mod
Input
D-mod
Envelope Select
D
-mod
Envelope Control
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Auto Reverse
Direct
Mix
Rec/Reverse Play
Control
Selects the
modulation source
that controls
recording when
Envelope Select is set
to D-mod p.268
Threshold 0...100
Sets the recording
start level when
Envelope Select is set
to Input p.268
Response 0...100
response to the end
of recording p.268
Direct Mix Direct
Always On,
Always Off,
Cross Fade
Selects how a dry
sound is mixed p.269
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Rec Rec
Mode/Reverse Time
Input
Mode = Single
Mode = Multi
Time
Reverse Time Reverse Time
Envelope Select = Input
Reverse Reverse
Single size effects 098: SeqDlyBPM (Sequence BPM Delay)
269
Direct Mix
WithAlwaysOn,adrysoundisusuallyoutput.With
AlwaysOff,drysoundsarenotoutput.WithCrossFade,a
drysoundisusuallyoutput,anditismutedonlywhen
scratching.
SetWet/DrytoWettousethisparametereffectively.
098: SeqDlyBPM
(Sequence BPM Delay)
Thisfourtapdelayenablesyoutoselectatempoand
rhythmpatterntosetupeachtap.
BPM
Rhythm
WiththetempospecifiedbytheBPMparameter(orthe
MIDIClocktempoifBPMissettoMIDI),thelengthof
onebeatequalsthefeedbackdelaytime,andtheinterval
betweentapsbecomesequal.Selectingarhythmpatternwill
automaticallyturnthetapoutputsonandoff.WhenBPM
issettoMIDI,thelowerlimitoftheBPMis44.
099: LCR BPM (L/C/R BPM Delay)
TheL/C/Rdelayenablesyoutomatchthedelaytimewith
thesongtempo.Youcanalsosynchronizethedelaytime
withthearpeggiatororsequencer.Ifyouprogramthetempo
beforeperformance,youcanachieveadelayeffectthat
synchronizeswiththesonginrealtime.Delaytimeissetby
notes.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Level
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Rhythm ,...,,,_
Selects a rhythm
pattern
p.269
Tap1 Pan L, 1...99, R
Sets the panning of
Tap1
Tap2 Pan L, 1...99, R
Sets the panning of
Tap2
Tap3 Pan L, 1...99, R
Sets the panning of
Tap3
Tap4 Pan L, 1...99, R
Sets the panning of
Tap4
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
feedback amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod
+
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Rythm Pattern
Pan
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Time Over? ---, OVER!
Displays an error
message when the
delay time exceeds
the upper limit p.270
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Spread 0...50
stereo image of the
effect sound p.264
L Delay
Base Note
L Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time for TapL
p.270
Times L Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
delay time for TapL
p.270
Level L Level 0...50
of TapL
C Delay
Base Note
C Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time for TapC
p.270
Times C Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
delay time for TapC
p.270
of TapC
C Delay
Feedback
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount of TapC
R Delay
Base Note
R Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time for TapR
p.270
Times R Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
delay time for TapR
p.270
C Delay
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
L Delay
Input Level D-mod
+
Level
Level
Level
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
R Delay
Effect Guide
270
BPM
Delay Base Note
Times
ThedelaytimeisthedurationofTimesnumberofDelay
BaseNotenotevaluesattheBPMtempo(orifBPMissetto
MIDI,thetempodeterminedbyMIDIClock).
Time Over?
Youcansetthedelaytimeupto5,460msec.Ifthedelaytime
exceedsthislimit,theerrormessageOVER!appearsinthe
display.Setthedelaytimeparameterssothatthismessage
willnotappear.TimeOver?isonlyadisplayparameter.
100: St.DlyBPM (Stereo BPM Delay)
Thisstereodelayenablesyoutosetthedelaytimetomatch
thesongtempo.
Time Over? L, R
101: St.MtdBPM
(Stereo BPM Multitap Delay)
Thisisastereomultitappeddelaythatletsyousetthedelay
timetomatchthetempoofthesong.
Level R Level 0...50
of TapR
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the TapC feedback
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the TapC
feedback
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
L Delay
Time Over?
T.OverL? ---, OVER!
Display the error
message if the left
channel delay time
exceeds the upper
limit p.270
Base Note L Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
left channel delay
time p.270
Times L Time x1...x32
Sets the number of
left channel delay
time p.270
Adjust [%] 2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the left
channel delay time
Left
Right
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Adjust [%]
Delay
Delay
Sets the feedback
amount for the left
channel
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
feedback amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the left
channel feedback
R Delay
Time Over?
T.OverR? ---, OVER!
Display the error
message if the right
channel delay time
exceeds the upper
limit p.270
Base Note R Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
right channel delay
time p.270
Times R Time x1...x32
Sets the number of
right channel delay
time p.270
Adjust [%] 2.50...+2.50
Fine-adjust the right
channel delay time
Sets the feedback
channel
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the right
channel feedback
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Mode
Normal,
Cross
Feedback,
Cross Pan1,
Cross Pan2
Switches the left and
right delay routing
p.264
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Feedback
Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Delay
Feedback
Tap1 Level Mode Mode
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Single size effects 101: St.MtdBPM (Stereo BPM Multitap Delay)
271
102: St.ModBPM
(Stereo BPM Modulation Delay)
Thisisastereomodulationdelaythatletsyousynchronize
thedelaytimetothetempoofthesong.
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Tap1
Time Over?
T.OverL? ---, OVER!
Displays an error
message when the
delay time for Tap1
exceeds the upper
limit p.270
Base Note T1 BaseNote ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time for Tap1
p.270
Times T1 Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
delay time for Tap1
p.270
Tap1 Level 0...100
level
p.265
Tap2
Time Over?
T.OverR? ---, OVER!
Displays an error
message when the
delay time for Tap2
exceeds the upper
limit
p.270
Base Note T2 BaseNote ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time for Tap2
p.270
Sets the number of
delay time for Tap2
p.270
Feedback
(Tap2)
100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the Tap2 feedback
amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the Tap2
feedback amount
Spread 100...+100
stereo image of the
effect sound
p.264
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the effect sounds
stereo image width
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
sounds stereo image
width
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Delay BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Modulation
Mode
Mode Mode LFO, D-mod
Switches between
LFO modulation
control and
modulation source
control
Dmod
Modulation
L/R:+/+,
L/R:+/
Reversed L/R control
by modulation source
p.265
Selects the
modulation source
that controls delay
time
Response 0...30
Sets the rate of
response to the
modulation source
LFO Dmod
Sync
Off, On
Switches LFO reset
off/on p.265
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO p.225
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
that resets the LFO
L Delay
Time Over?
T.OverL? ---, OVER!
Display the error
message if the left
channel delay time
exceeds the upper
limit p.272
Selects the type of
left channel delay
time p.270
Sets the number of
left channel delay
time p.270
Sets the feedback
amount of left delay
Depth L Depth 0...200
left LFO modulation
LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase
obtained when the
left LFO is reset p.265
R Delay
Time Over?
T.OverR? ---, OVER!
Display the error
channel delay time
exceeds the upper
limit p.272
R Delay Base
Note
R Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
right channel delay
time p.270
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Feedback
LFO Phase
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Modulation Mode
D-mod
LFO
D
-mod
Delay
Delay
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
Response
LFO Sync
Effect Guide
272
Time Over? L, R
103: St.ApdBPM
(Stereo BPM Auto Panning Delay)
Thisstereoautopanningdelayenablesyoutosetthedelay
timetomatchthesongtempo.
Sets the number of
right channel delay
time p.270
Sets the feedback
amount of right delay
R LFO Phase
[deg]
180...+180
Sets the phase
obtained when the
right LFO is reset
p.265
Depth R Depth 0...200
right LFO modulation
BPM/MIDI
Sync
LFO MIDI
Sync
Off, On
LFO speed is set by
BPM, Base Note, and
Times, instead of
Frequency
p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
LFO speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
LFO speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Wet...
1 : 99, Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
p.225
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Delay BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range p.264
Pan Depth 0...100
Sets the panning
width
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the panning width
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
Pan
Pan
LFO: Tri / Sin
Depth
Delay
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
Amount 100...+100
Set the modulation
amount of the
panning width
L Delay
Time Over?
T.OverL? ---, OVER!
Display the error
message if the left
channel delay time
exceeds the upper
limit p.270
Selects the type of
left channel delay
time p.270
Sets the number of
left channel delay
time p.270
Sets the feedback
amount for the left
channel
R Delay
Time Over?
T.OverR? ---, OVER!
Display the error
channel delay time
exceeds the upper
limit p.270
Base Note R Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
right channel delay
time p.270
Sets the number of
right channel delay
time p.270
Sets the feedback
channel
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
Shape 100...+100
Changes the
Waveform p.224
Phase [deg] 180...+180
Sets the LFO phase
difference between
the left and right
p.237
Panning Freq
[Hz]
Pan [Hz] 0.02...20.00
Sets the panning
speed p.223
BPM/MIDI
Sync
Pan MDI
Sync
Off, On
pan LFO speed is set
by BPM, Base Note,
and Times, instead of
Frequency p.223
BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Base Note ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time for the
panning speed p.223
Times x1...x32
Sets the number of
delay time for the
panning speed p.223
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Single size effects 103: St.ApdBPM (Stereo BPM Auto Panning Delay)
273
104: TapeE BPM (Tape Echo BPM)
Thisisatapeechothatletsyousynchronizethedelaytime
tothetempoofthesong.
Tap1 Delay Note
Times
Source
Tap1 Dmod Note
Times
IfSourceisOffortheselectedmodulationisat0,the
delaytimewillbethelengthspecifiedbyTap1DelayNote
andTimes.
IfSourceisotherthanOff,thedelaytimewillchangeso
thatitwillbeasspecifiedbyTap1DmodNoteand
Timeswhenthemaximummodulationisreached.
Time Over?
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Trim 0...100 Sets the input gain
Pre Tone 0...100
input
Wow Flutter
[Hz]
0.02...1.00
which pitch variation
will occur
Depth 0...100
Sets the depth of
pitch variation
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range
Saturation 0...100
Sets the distortion
amount
Time Over? ---, OVER!
Displays an error
message when the
delay time exceeds
the upper limit p.273
Delay BPM BPM
MIDI,
40.00...
300.00
MIDI syncs to the
system tempo; 40
300 sets the tempo
manually for this
Tap1
Delay Note
T1 BaseNote ,...,_
Selects the type of
delay time (tap1)
p.270, p.273
Sets the number of
delay time (tap1)
p.270, p.273
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
the delay time p.273
Dmod Max
Note
,...,_
Selects the note value
used to specify the
delay time when the
modulation is at
maximum p.273
Times x1...x32
Specifies the number
of notes used to
specify the delay time
when the modulation
is at maximum p.273
Level 0...100
level
Pan L, 1...99, R
of tap1
Feedback
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Tap1
feedback amount
p.267
Tap2
Position [%]
0...100
depth of pitch
variation p.267
Level 0...100
level
Pan L, 1...99, R
of tap2
Feedback
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
p.267
Wah Flatter
D
-mod
Tap2/3 Position
+
Tape
Saturation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Trim
Pan Level
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Feedback Amt
High / Low Damp Pre Tone
Delay
(1)
(2)
(3)
Delay Time
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Tempo
Tap3
Position [%]
0...100
depth of pitch
variation p.267
Level 0...100
level
Pan L, 1...99, R
of tap3
Feedback
Amount
100...+100
Sets the Tap3
feedback amount
p.267
Feedback
Level
Feedback 0...100
Sets the amount of
feedback for Taps 1, 2,
and 3 p.267
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
feedback amount
Amount 100...+100
Sets the depth by
which feedback
amount will be
modulated
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Effect Guide
274
105: Rev.Hall (Reverb Hall)
Thishalltypereverbsimulatesthereverberationofmidsize
concerthallsorensemblehalls.
106: Rev.Plate (Reverb Plate)
Thisplatereverbsimulateswarm(dense)reverberation.
Pre Delay Thru [%]
PreDelayThruletsyouaccentuatetheattackbymixingin
soundthatdoesnotpassthroughthedelay.
107: Rev.Room1 (Reverb Room)
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundtighter.Changingthebalancebetweenthe
earlyreflectionsandreverbsoundallowsyoutosimulate
nuances,suchasthetypeofwallsofaroom.
108: Rev.Room2 (Reverb Room)
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflectionsthat
makethesoundbrighter.
Pre Delay
Pre Delay Thru [%]
PreDelayspecifiesthedelaytimeforthesoundthatis
inputtothereverb.Thiscontrolsthespaciousness.
PreDelayThruletsyouaccentuatetheattackbymixingin
soundthatdoesnotpassthroughthisdelay.
ER Level
Reverb Level
Theseparameterssettheearlyreflectionlevelandreverb
level.
Changingtheseparametervalueswillallowyoutosimulate
thetypeofwallsintheroom.Thatis,alargerERLevel
simulatesahardwall,andalargerReverbLevelsimulates
asoftwall.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Sets the EQ input
level
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
LEQ Gain
[dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
EQ
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
Pre HEQ Gain
[dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
EQ
Reverb Time
[s]
Times[s] 0.1...10.0
Sets the reverber-
ation time
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Pre Delay
[msec]
0...200
Sets the delay time
from the dry sound
p.274
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
0...100
Sets the mix ratio of
non-delay sound
p.274
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
Pre Delay Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Time
Reverb - Hall / Plate Type
Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
Dry
Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Pre Delay Reverb Time
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
LEQ Gain
[dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
EQ
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
HEQ Gain
[dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
EQ
Reverb Time
[sec]
Times [s] 0.1...3.0
Sets the reverber-
ation time
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Pre Delay
[msec]
PreDly[ms] 0...200
Sets the delay time
from the dry sound
p.274
Pre Delay
Thru [%]
preDlyThru 0...100
Sets the mix ratio of
non-delay sound
p.274
ER Level 0...100
Sets the level of early
reflections p.274
Reverb Level Rev Level 0...100
Sets the reverber-
ation level p.274
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
LEQ HEQ
Pre Delay Reverb Reverb Level
ER Level
ER Level
Pre Delay Thru
ERs
ERs
Single size effects 109: R2.Spring (Reverb2 Spring)
275
109: R2.Spring (Reverb2 Spring)
TheR2typereverbsR2.SpringR2.Roomhaveadifferent
soniccharacterthanRev.HallRev.Room2.Theymodelthe
springreverbsystemsthatarebuiltintosomeamps.
110: R2.Hall (Reverb2 Hall)
Thismodelsthereverberationofaconcerthallthatincludes
numerousechocomponents.
111: R2.Plate (Reverb2 Plate)
Thismodelsatypeofreverbunitthatvibratesametalplate
ratherthansprings.Thereverbtimeisrelativelyshort.
Becausethereverberationhasafastattack,itissuitablefor
percussiveplaying.
112: R2.Room (Reverb2 Room)
Thismodelsthereverberationofatypicalroomthat
includesnumerousearlyreflections.
Time
Inthesereverbs,Timeisnotexpressedinseconds,but
insteadisavaluefrom1to100.Avalueof1producesthe
shortestreverb,and100providesthelongestreverb.
113: Early Reflections
Thiseffectisonlytheearlyreflectionpartofareverberation
sound,andaddspresencetothesound.Youcanselectone
ofthefourdecaycurves.
Type
Thisparameterselectsthedecaycurvefortheearly
reflection.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Time [sec] 0...100
Sets the reverber-
ation time p.275
High Damp
[%]
Hi Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Low Damp
[%]
Lo Damp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the low
range
Pre Delay
[msec]
PreDly [ms] 0...200
Sets the delay time
from the dry sound
p.275
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Reverb - Room Type
Time
Level
L
o
u
d
e
r
ER
(Early Reflections)
Dry
Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Pre Delay Reverb Time
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+ Pre Delay Reverb
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Sets the input level of
EQ applied to the
effect sound
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
LEQ Gain
[dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
Low EQ
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
HEQ Gain
[dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
High EQ
Type
Sharp, Loose,
Modulated,
Reverse
Selects the decay
curve for the early
reflection p.275
ER Time [ms] Times[ms] 10...800
Sets the time length
of early reflection
Pre Delay
[ms]
PreDly[ms] 0...200
Sets the time taken
from the original
sound to the first
early reflection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
Pre Delay Early Reflections
LEQ HEQ
Sharp
Loose
Modulated
Early Reflections - Type
Reverse
Dry
Pre Delay ER Time
Effect Guide
276
114: P4EQ - MDly
(Parametric 4-Band EQ - Multitap Delay)
andamultitapdelay.
115: Comp - MDly
(Compressor - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonocompressorandamultitap
delay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffects.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Trim E Trim 0...100
Sets the parametric
EQ input level
Band1
Cutoff [Hz]
E1 F[Hz] 20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 1
Band1 Q E1 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 1 p.221
Band1
Gain [dB]
E1 G[dB] 18...+18
1
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 F[Hz] 50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 2
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 2 p.221
Band2
Cutoff [Hz]
E2 G[dB] 18...+18
2
Band3
Cutoff [Hz]
E3 F[Hz] 300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 3
Band3 Q E3 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 3 p.221
Band3
Gain [dB]
E3 G[dB] 18...+18
3
Band4
Cutoff [Hz]
E4 F[Hz] 500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of Band 4
Band4 Q E4 Q 0.5...10.0
Band 4 p.221
Band4
Gain [dB]
E4 G[dB] 18...+18
4
Multitap Delay
Tap1
Time [ms]
D T1[ms] 0.0...549.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
Tap1 Level D T1 Level 0...100
level
p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
D T2 [ms] 0.0...549.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback
(Tap2)
D F.back 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
[Dly]Wet/Dry D W/D
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap
delay effect balance
[Dly]Source Off...Tempo
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
for the multitap delay
[Dly]Amount 100...+100
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Trim
+
Parametric 4Band EQ Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Compressor
p.217
p.217
Sets the compressor
output level p.217
Pre EQ Trim Route 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Multitap Delay
Tap1
Time [ms]
DT1[ms] 0.0...548.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
Tap1 Level DT1 Level 0...100
level
p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
DT2 [ms] 0.0...548.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback
(Tap2)
D F.back 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
[Dly]Wet/Dry D W/D
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the multitap
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Routing Route
Cmp Dly,
Dly Cmp
the compressor and
multitap delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Compressor
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Comp
Single size effects 113: Early Reflections
277
116: Lmtr - MDly
(Limiter - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonolimiterandamultitapdelay.
117: Xctr - MDly
(Exciter - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoexciterandamultitapdelay.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Limiter
Ratio L Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.244
Threshold
[dB]
L Trsh [dB] 40...0
which the
p.244
Gain Adjust
[dB]
L G [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
Sets the limiter
output gain p.244
Multitap Delay
Tap1
Time [ms]
DT1[ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
level p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
DT2 [ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback
(Tap2)
D F.back 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
[Dly]Wet/Dry D W/D
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap
Selects the multitap
delays Wet/Dry
modulation source
Sets the multitap
delays Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Routing Route
Lmt Dly,
Dly Lmt
the limiter and
multitap delay
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Routing
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Limiter
Limiter
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Exciter
Sets the intensity
effect p.222
Emphasis
Freq
X Freq 0...70
Sets the frequency
range to be empha-
sized p.222
Pre Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
Multitap Delay
Tap1
Time [ms]
DT1[ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
level
p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
DT2 [ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback
(Tap2)
D F.back 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
[Dly]Wet/Dry D W/D
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
LEQ HEQ EQ Trim
Exciter
Exciter
Effect Guide
278
118: OD - MDly
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain - Multitap Delay)
andamultitapdelay.
119: Flng - Dly
(Chorus/Flanger - Multitap Delay)
Thiseffectcombinesamonochorus/flangerandamultitap
delay.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Overdrive/Hi-Gain
Drive Mode O Mode
Overdrive,
Hi-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and high-
gain distortion
Sets the degree of
distortion p.229
Sets the overdrive
output level p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the overdrive
output level
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
amount of the
Low Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
(shelving type)
Low Gain
[dB]
O Low [dB] 18...+18
EQ
Mid1 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Mid1 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
Mid Gain
[dB]
O Mid1 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 1
Mid2 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Mid2 Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
Mid2 Gain
[dB]
O Mid2 [dB] 18...+18
High EQ 2
Multitap Delay
Tap1
Time [ms]
DT1[ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
level p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
DT2 [ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback
(Tap2)
D F.back 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
[Dly]Wet/Dry D W/D
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
3 Band PEQ
Output Level
Drive
Driver
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Chorus/Flanger
LFO
Waveform
Triangle,
Sine
Selects the LFO
Waveform
LFO Freq
[Hz]
F LFO[Hz] 0.02...20.00
LFO
Delay Time
[ms]
modulation
Sets the feedback
amount
p.254
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
[LEQ Gain
[dB]
15...+15
EQ
EQ Gain [dB] 15...+15
EQ
Wet/Dry F W/D
Wet...1 : 99,
Dry,
1 : 99...Wet
Sets the effect
balance of the
chorus/flanger p.225,
p.254
Multitap Delay
Tap1
Time [ms]
D T1[ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap1 delay
time
Tap1 Level D T1 Level 0...100
level
p.265
Tap2
Time [ms]
D T2[ms] 0.0...1360.0
Sets the Tap2 delay
time
Feedback
(Tap2)
D F.back 100...+100
Sets the Tap2
feedback amount
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range p.264
[Dly]Wet/Dry D W/D
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the multitap
Selects the Wet/Dry
modulation source
Sets the Wet/Dry
modulation amount
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
LEQ HEQ EQ
Trim
Multitap Delay
Feedback
High Damp
Delay
(2)
(1)
Chorus/Flanger
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
Mt.Dly
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
LFO: Tri / Sine
Single size effects 119: Flng - Dly (Chorus/Flanger - Multitap Delay)
279
120: Rev - Gate (Reverb - Gate)
Thiseffectcombinesamonoreverbandagate.
Envelope Select
Source
Input Reverb Mix
Threshold
TheEnvelopeSelectparameterenablesyoutoselect
whetherturningthegateonandoffistriggeredbytheinput
signallevelorcontrolleddirectlybythemodulationsource.
YoucanselectfromOfftoGate2+DmprfortheSource
parametertospecifythemodulationsource.
WhenEnvelopeSelectissettoInput,thegateiscontrolled
bythelevelofsignalsthatarethecombinationofthedry
soundandthereverbsound.Whenthesignallevelexceeds
thethreshold,thegateopensandthereverbsoundis
output.
Normally,setInputReverbMixtoDry(thegateis
controlledonlybythedrysound).Ifyouwishtoextendthe
gatetime,settheInputReverbMixvaluehigherand
adjusttheThreshouldvalue.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Reverb
Reverb Time
[sec]
R Time[s] 0.1...10.0
Sets the reverber-
ation time
Pre EQ Trim 0...100
Sets the EQ input
level
PreLEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
LEQ Gain
[dB]
15.0...+15.0
EQ
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
HEQ Gain
[dB]
15.0...+15.0
EQ
High Damp
[%]
R HiDmp[%] 0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Pre Delay
[ms]
R PreD[ms] 0...200
the reverb sound and
gate control signal
Reverb
Balance
R Bal
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the reverb effect
balance
Gate
Envelope
Select
G Env Sel
D-mod,
Input
Switches between
modulation source
control and input
signal control p.279
Selects the
modulation source
that controls the gate
when Envelope Select
is set to D-mod p.279
Input Reverb
Mix
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the dry and
reverb sounds of the
gate control signal
p.279
Polarity G Polarity +,
Switches between
non-invert and invert
of the gate on/off
state p.220
Threshold G Threshold 0...100
Sets the gate
threshold level p.279
Attack 1...100
p.220
Release G Release 1...100
p.220
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Reverb
Balance
+
LEQ HEQ
EQ Trim
Reverb Pre Delay
Envelope - Control
D-mod
Input
Envelope Select
Gate
Input Reverb Mix
Reverb
Gate
Gate+Dmpr
Effect Guide
280
Double Size effects
D00: St.MltLmt
(Stereo Multiband Limiter)
Thisisastereomultibandlimiter.
D01: OD/HG Wah
(Overdrive/Hyper Gain Wah)
Thisdistortioneffecthastwomodes:overdriveandhyper
gainthatproducesastrongdistortion.Ahigherhighgain
settingisrequiredforthiseffectrelativetoanormalsize
effect.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Ratio
1.0 : 1...
50.0 : 1, Inf : 1
Sets the signal
compression ratio
p.244
Threshold
[dB]
Thresh[dB] 40...0
which the
p.244
Attack 1...100 Sets the attack time
Release 1...100 Sets the release time
Low Offset
[dB]
LowOfst[dB] 40...0
Sets the low range
gain of trigger signal
p.219
Mid Offset
[dB]
MidOfst[dB] 40...0
Sets the mid range
p.219
High Offset
[dB]
Hi Ofst[dB] 40...0
Sets the high range
p.219
Gain Adjust
[dB]
Gain [dB]
Inf,
38...+24
p.244
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the output gain
Amount 63...+63
Sets the modulation
gain
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Limiter
Low
Mid
High
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Low
Mid
High
Offset
Band-Pass Filters
Limiter
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Wah Off, On
Switches Wah on/off
p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
on and off p.229
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
Selects the switching
mode for the
modulation source
on and off p.229
Sweep
Range
10...+10
Sets the range of Wah
p.229
Selects the
modulation source
that controls the Wah
p.229
Drive Mode Mode
Overdrive,
Hyper-Gain
Switches between
overdrive and hi-gain
distortion
Drive 1...120
Sets the degree of
distortion p.229
Pre Low Cut 0...10
Sets the low range
cut amount of the
distortion input p.229
p.229
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
Amount 50...+50
Sets the modulation
level
Low
Cutoff [Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
(shelving type)
Gain [dB] Low G[dB] 18...+18
EQ
Mid1
Cutoff [Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 1 (peaking
type)
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 1
p.221
High EQ 1
Mid2
Cutoff [Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency for Mid/
High EQ 2 (peaking
type)
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets the band width
of Mid/High EQ 2
p.221
High EQ 2
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
3 Band EQ
Output Level
Direct Mix
Pre Low-cut
D
-mod
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hyper-Gain
Drive
Driver +
Double Size effects D02: GAmp + P4EQ (Guitar Amp Model + Parametric 4-Band EQ)
281
D02: GAmp + P4EQ
(Guitar Amp Model +
Parametric 4-Band EQ)
This combines a guitar amp simulation (which even faithfully
replicates the distortion and tone control circuitry) with a four-
band equalizer.
Byusingthisinconjunctionwith021:St.GtCab(Stereo
GuitarCabinet)p.229,youcanobtainanevenmore
realisticguitarsoundthatsimulatesaguitaramp+speaker
cabinet.
Amp Type
Presence
IftheAmpTypeisVOXAC15...VOXAC30TB,thissetsthe
attenuationofthehighfrequencyrange.Forothertypes,
thissetstheboostofthehighfrequencyrange.
ThiscorrespondstotheCutknobcontrolofampsmadeby
theVOXCorporation.
Post P4EQ
BychainingthiswithS021:St.GtCabyoucansimulatethe
combinationofaguitarampandspeakercabinet.Inthis
case,werecommendthatyousetPostP4EQtoThru,but
ifnecessaryyoucanturnitOnandadjustthetone.
Recommended Combinations of Guitar Amp Models
and Cabinet Simulators:
Direct Mix 0...50
Sets the amount of
the dry sound mixed
to the distortion
Speaker
Simulation
SpeakerSim Off, On
simulation on/off
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Guitar Amp
Amp Type
Amp
VOX AC15,
VOX AC15TB,
VOX AC30,
VOX AC30TB,
UK BLUES,
UK 70'S,
UK 80'S,
UK 90'S,
UK MODERN,
US MODERN,
US HIGAIN,
BOUTIQUE
OD,
BOUTIQUE
CL,
BLACK 2x12,
TWEED -
1x12,
TWEED -
4x10
Selects the type of
the amplifier p.281
Drive Gain 0...100 Sets the input gain
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
level
Bass 0...100
Sets the bass (low
range) level
Middle 0...100
range) level
Treble 0...100
range) level
Presence Cut/Presen 0...100
Sets the presence
p.281
P4EQ
EQ Switch
Post P4EQ Thru, On
Selects through or on
for the equalizerp.281
Band1 Cutoff
[Hz]
20...1.00k
Sets the center
frequency of
Band 1
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
D
-mod
Guitar Amp Model
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets Band 1s
bandwidth
Gain [dB] B1 G[dB] 18...+18
1
Band2 Cutoff
[Hz]
50...5.00k
Sets the center
frequency of
Band 2
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets Band 2s
bandwidth
Gain [dB] B2 G[dB] 18...+18
2
Band3 Cutoff
[Hz]
300...10.00k
Sets the center
frequency of
Band 3
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets Band 3s
bandwidth
Gain [dB] B3 G[dB] 18...+18
3
Band4 Cutoff
[Hz]
500...20.00k
Sets the center
frequency of
Band 4
Q 0.5...10.0
Sets Band 4s
bandwidth
Gain [dB] B4 G[dB] 18...+18
4
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
VOX AC15 VOX AC15 - 1x12
VOX AC15TB VOX AC15 - 1x12
VOX AC30 VOX AC30 - 2x12
VOX AC30TB VOX AC30 - 2x12
UK BLUES UK H30 - 4x12
UK 70'S UK H30 - 4x12
UK 80'S UK T75 - 4x12
UK 90'S UK T75 - 4x12
UK MODERN UK T75 - 4x12, US V30 - 4x12
US MODERN US V30 - 4x12
US HIGAIN US V30 - 4x12, UK T75 - 4x12
BOUTIQUE OD UK H30 - 4x12
BOUTIQUE CL UK H30 - 4x12
BLACK 2x12 BLACK - 2x12
TWEED - 1x12 TWEED - 1x12
TWEED - 4x10 TWEED - 4x10
Effect Guide
282
D03: GAmpCLEAN
(Guitar Amp Model CLEAN)
Thismodelsthecleanchannelofaampthatwentonsalein
1975andcontainedtwo12speakers.Asthenamesuggests,
itproducesacleantonewithatightsoundingcharacter,and
adeepandcompactlowend.
D04: GAmpSUPER
(Guitar Amp Model SUPER)
ThisAmericancomboampwithfour10speakerswas
producedduringtheyears19631968,andwasknownfor
itsbig,cleansoundanditswarmandhuskysoundwhen
drivenheavily.
D05: GAmpTWEED
(Guitar Amp Model TWEED)
ThisAmericanmadetweedcovered1957modelcombo
ampwithtwo12speakersisknownforitsrich,cleantone
thatisidealforclassicrock,blues,andcountry.Byraising
thevolumeyoucanalsoproduceapowerfulandpunchy
overdrivesound.
D06: GAmpUS-HG
(Guitar Amp Model US-HG)
Thismodelsa100WboutiqueampheadproducedinNorth
Hollywood.Anoverdrivetonewitharichharmonic
structureiscombinedwitharelaxedsustain,makingforan
enjoyableplayingexperience.
Examples of amp and cabinet combinations
Werecommendthatyouusetheseampmodeleffectsina
chainwiththecabinetmodeleffect(S21:St.GtCab).Youare
freetouseanycombinationtocreateavarietyofsounds,so
tryoutvariouscombinationsandlistentotheresult.Here
aresometypicalcombinations.
D07: B.TubeAmp
(Bass Tube Amp Model + Cabinet)
Thissimulatesabassamp(withgainanddrive)andspeaker
cabinet.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Drive 0...100 Sets the input gain
Bass 0...100
Sets the bass (low
range) level
Middle 0...100
range) level
Treble 0...100
range) level
Presence 0...100
Sets the presence
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Wet / Dry
Guitar Amp Model
D03: GAmpCLEAN
1x12 TWEED
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
D04: GAmpSUPER
1x12 TWEED
4x10 TWEED
2x12 BLACK
4x12 UK H30
D05: GAmpTWEED:
1x12 TWEED
2x10 BLACK
2x12 BLACK
D06: GAmpUS-HG
4x12 UK T75
4x12 US V30
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Bass Amp
Amp Type
Amp
Selects the type of
the amplifier
p.281
STUDIO
COMBO
A tube combo ideal
for the Motown
sound
VOX AC100
A 100W tube amp
AC100 made by Vox
UK MAJOR
A 200W tube amp
made in the UK
Drive Gain 0...100 Sets the input gain
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
level
Bass 0...100
Sets the bass (low
range) level
Middle 0...100
range) level
Treble 0...100
range) level
Presence 0...100
Sets the presence
Cabinet
Cabinet On
Cabnet Sim Off, On
Switches the cabinet
simulator on/off
+
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Volume
Drive
Wet / Dry
D
-mod
Bass Amp Model2 Cabinet Simulator
Double Size effects D08: St. Mic (Stereo Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
283
Amp Type
Cabinet Type
Recommended Combinations of Bass Amp Models and
Cabinets:
D08: St. Mic
(Stereo Mic Modeling + PreAmp)
Thisisastereomicandpreampsimulator(See028:Mic
Model(MicModeling+PreAmp)onpage 232.).For
exampleyoumightusethistosimulatemicingofastereo
sourcesuchasarotaryspeaker.
D09: Vocoder
Thiseffectappliesthetimbralcharacterofaonesignal(the
modulator)toasecondsignal(thecarrier).
OnthemicroSTATION,anexternalsourcesuchasamic
cannotbeusedasthemodulatorsource,butyoucancreate
uniqueeffectsbyusinganinternalsoundsourceasthe
modulator.Tryselectingvoicetypesounds,rhythms,or
soundeffectsasthemodulator.Themostsuitablechoicesfor
thecarrieraresoundsthatcontainalargenumberof
overtones,suchasstringsordistortedguitar.Fordetailson
howtoadjustthesettings,refertoExample:Vocoder
(Combination)onpage 207.
Formant Shift
ByoffsettingtheCarrierfilter,youcanadjusttheheightof
thefrequencyrangewherethevocodereffectisapplied.The
tonalqualitywillchangesignificantly.
Noise Level
Thisparameterenablesyoutomixwhitenoisewiththe
Carrier.
Type Cab
LA - 4x10,
MODERN -
4x10,
METAL - 4x10,
CLASSIC -8x10,
UK - 4x12,
STUDIO - 1x15,
JAZZ - 1x15,
VOX AC100 -
2x15,
US - 2x15,
UK - 4x15,
LA - 1x18,
COMBI -
1x12 & 1x18
Selects the cabinet
type
p.231, p.283
Wet/Dry
Dry,
1 : 99...99 : 1,
Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
STUDIO COMBO STUDIO - 1x15
AC100 VOX AC100 - 2x15
UK MAJOR UK - 4x15, UK - 4x12
Tube Pre Amp Mic Simulation
Tube Pre Amp Mic Simulation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Carrier Trim 0...100
Sets the Carrier input
level
Noise Level 0...100
Sets the noise mix
level to the Carrier
p.283
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the noise mix level
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for the noise
mix level
Modulator
Trim
0...100
Sets the Modulator
input level
Source Mod Src
Input,
FX Control 1,
FX Control 2
Selects the modulator
input
Select
L/R Mix,
L Only,
R Only
Selects whether to
use the left/right mix,
only left, or only right
of the modulator
input
Formant
Shift
Formant Sft 2...+2
Sets the height of the
frequency for the
vocoder effect p.283
Response 0...100
response to the
modulator input
Low Gain
[dB]
LowGain[dB] 12...+12
Sets the low-range
output level of the
vocoder
High Gain
[dB]
HiGain[dB] 12...+12
Sets the high-range
output level of the
vocoder
Mod. High
Mix
0...100
Sets the high-range
output level of the
modulator p.283
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Wet: Stereo In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Band Pass Filter
Envelope
Carrier Trim
Modulator Trim
Modulator High Mix
Noise
Generator
Noise Level
+
+
FX Control BUS 1
FX Control BUS 2
Modulator Source
Modulator Select
+ +
Effect Guide
284
Mod. High Mix
Thisparametersetsthehighrangeoutputlevelofthe
modulatorsound.Ifthemodulatorisahumanvoice,itwill
makethewordsmoreclear.
D10: Rotary OD
(Rotary Speaker Overdrive)
Thisisastereorotaryspeakereffect.Ithasaninternal
speakersimulatorthatsimulatesoverdrive(recreatingthe
ampdistortion)andcharacteristicsoftherotaryspeaker,
producingaveryrealisticrotaryspeakersound.
Switch Mode
Thisparameterdetermineshowtoswitchon/offthe
overdriveviaamodulationsource.
WhenSwitchMode=Toggle,overdriveisturnedon/off
eachtimethepedalorjoystickisoperated.
Overdrivewillbeswitchedon/offeachtimethevalue
ofthemodulationsourceexceeds64.
WhenSwitchMode=Moment,overdriveisappliedonly
whenyoupressthepedaloroperatethejoystick.
Onlywhenthevalueforthemodulationsourceis64or
higher,theoverdriveeffectisapplied.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Overdrive Off, On
Switches overdrive
on/off
source to switch
overdrive on/off
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
for overdrive on/off
modulation p.284
Gain OD Gain 0...100
Determines the
degree of distortion
Level OD Level 0...100
Sets the overdrive
output level
Tone OD Tone 0...15
Sets the tonal quality
of the overdrive
Speaker
Simulator
SpeakerSim Off, On
simulation on/off
Mode Switch Mode SW Rotate, Stop
Switches between
speaker rotation and
stop
Source Off...Tempo
source for Rotate/
Stop
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
for Rotate/Stop
modulation p.250
Speed
Switch
Speed SW Slow, Fast
rotation speed
between slow and
fast
source for Slow/Fast
Switch Mode
Toggle,
Moment
for Slow/Fast
modulation p.250
H/R. Balance
Rotor, 1...99,
Horn
Sets the volume
balance between the
high-range horn and
low-range rotor
Manual
Speed
Off...Tempo
Sets a modulation
source for direct
control of rotation
speed p.250
Horn
Acceleration
0...100
Sets how quickly the
horn rotation speed
changes p.250
Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-
frequency) horn
rotation speed.
Standard value is
1.00. Stop stops the
rotation
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Horn/Rotor
Balance
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
D
-mod
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop
Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
On/Off
Speaker Simulation
Overdrive
Horn
Rotary Speaker
Rotor
+
Rotor
Acceleration
0...100
Sets how quickly the
rotor speed changes
p.250
Ratio
Stop,
0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-
frequency) rotor
rotation speed.
Standard value is 1.0.
Stop stops the
rotation
Mic Distance 0...100
Distance between the
microphone and
rotary speaker p.250
Spread 0...100
Angle of left and right
microphones p.250
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Double Size effects D11: Mtap Cho (Multitap Chorus/Delay)
285
D11: Mtap Cho
(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
ThiseffecthassixchorusblockswithdifferentLFOphases.
Youcanproduceacomplexstereoimagebysettinga
differentdelaytimeanddepthforeachblock.Youcan
controlthedelayoutputlevelviaamodulationsource.
Status
TheseparameterssettheoutputstatusofeachTap.
AlwaysOn:Outputisalwayson.(Nomodulation)
AlwaysOff:Outputisalwaysoff.(Nomodulation)
OnOff(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromontooff
dependingonthemodulationsource.
OffOn(dm):Outputlevelisswitchedfromofftoon
dependingonthemodulationsource.
Combiningtheseparameters,youcanchangefrom4phase
chorustotwotapdelaybycrossfadingthemgraduallyvia
themodulationsourceduringaperformance.
Panning Preset
Thisparameterselectscombinationsofstereoimagesofthe
tapoutputs.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
LFO Freq
[Hz]
LFO [Hz] 0.02...13.00
LFO
Tap1
Delay (000)
[ms]
Tap1 [ms] 0...2000
Sets the Tap1 (LFO
phase=0 degrees)
delay time
depth
Status Tap1
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or
modulation source
for the control of Tap1
output
p.285
Tap2
Delay (180)
[ms]
Tap2 [ms] 0...2000
Sets the Tap2 (LFO
phase=180 degrees)
delay time
depth
Status
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff (Dm),
OffOn (Dm)
Selects on, off, or
modulation source
output
p.285
Tap3
Delay (060)
[ms]
Tap3 [ms] 0...2000
Sets the Tap3 (LFO
phase=60 degrees)
delay time
depth
Status Tap3
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or
modulation source
output
p.285
Tap4
Delay (240)
[ms]
Tap4 [ms] 0...2000
Sets the Tap4 (LFO
phase=240 degrees)
delay time
depth
Status Tap4
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or
modulation source
output
p.285
Tap5
Delay (120)
[ms]
Tap5 [ms] 0...2000
Sets the Tap5 (LFO
phase=120 degrees)
delay time
depth
Status Tap5
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or
modulation source
output
p.285
Tap6
Delay (300)
[ms]
Tap6 [ms] 0...2000
Sets the Tap1 (LFO
phase=300 degrees)
delay time
Left
Right
Feedback Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
+
LFO: Triangle
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
60 [degree]
240 [degree]
120 [degree]
300 [degree]
Tap1 Delay
Tap2 Delay
Tap3 Delay
Tap5 Delay
Tap6 Delay
Tap4 Delay
D
-mod
On/Off Control
Panning Preset
depth
Status Tap6
Always On,
Always Off,
OnOff
(Dm),
OffOn
(Dm)
Selects on, off, or
modulation source
output
p.285
Tap1
Feedback
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the Tap1
feedback amount
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the Tap output
level, feedback
amount, and effect
balance
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of Tap1
feedback amount
Panning
Preset
1 : L 1 2 3 4 5 6 R
2 : L 135 246 R
3 : L 1 3 5 2 4 6 R
4 : L 1 4 5 6 3 2 R
Selects the stereo
panning pattern for
each tap
p.285
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Effect Guide
286
D12: St.P.Sftr
(Stereo Pitch Shifter)
Thisisastereopitchshifter.Thepitchshiftamountforthe
leftandrightchannelscanbereversedfromeachother.
L/R Pitch
WhenyouselectUp/Downforthisparameter,thepitchshift
amountfortherightchannelwillbereversed.Ifthepitch
shiftamountispositive,thepitchoftheleftchannelis
raised,andthepitchoftherightchannelislowered.
D13: Early Ref (Early Reflections)
Thisearlyreflectioneffecthasmorepreciseearlyreflections
withtwicethemaximumlengthofanormalsizeeffect(See
113:EarlyReflectionsonpage 275.).Youcancreateavery
smoothanddensesound.
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Input Lvl
Dmod [%]
100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount of the input
level p.258
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
modulation source
for the input level
p.258
Mode
Slow,
Medium,
Fast
Switches Pitch Shifter
mode
p.250
L/R Pitch L/R
Normal,
Up/Down
Determines whether
or not the L/R pitch
shift amount is
inverted p.286
Shift
[1/2tone]
Pitch 24...+24
amount in steps of a
semitone p.259
Source Off...Tempo
Selects the
pitch shift amount
p.259
Amount 24...+24
Sets the modulation
amount p.259
Fine [cents] Fine [c] 100...+100
amount in steps of
one cent p.259
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount p.259
L Delay Time
[ms]
L Dly[ms] 0...2000
Sets the delay time
R Delay Time
[ms]
R Dly[ms] 0...2000
Sets the delay time
Feedback
Position
FB Posit Pre, Post
Switches the
feedback connection
p.259
Feedback 100...+100
Sets the feedback
amount
p.259
High Damp
[%]
0...100
Sets the damping
amount in the high
range
Spread 100...+100
stereo image of the
effect sound
p.264
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Feedback Spread
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
High Damp
High Damp
Input Level
Input Level
Feedback Position
Pre
Pre
Post
Post
Delay Pitch Shifter
Delay Pitch Shifter
Full
parameter
Quick
parameter
Value Explanation
Sets the input level of
EQ applied to the
effect sound
Pre LEQ Fc
Low,
Mid-Low
Selects the cutoff
frequency (low or
range equalizer
LEQ Gain
[dB]
LEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
EQ
Pre HEQ Fc
High,
Mid-High
Selects the cutoff
frequency (high or
mid-high) of the
HEQ Gain
[dB]
HEQ [dB] 15.0...+15.0
EQ
Type
Sharp, Loose,
Modulated,
Reverse
Selects the decay
curve for the early
reflection p.275
ER Time [ms] Time [ms] 10...540
Sets the time length
of early reflection
Pre Delay
[ms]
PreDly[ms] 0...200
Sets the time taken
from the original
sound to the first
early reflection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1 : 99...
99 : 1, Wet
Sets the balance
between the effect
and the dry input
Source Off...Tempo
source for Wet/Dry
Amount 100...+100
Sets the modulation
amount for Wet/Dry
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
+
EQ Trim
Pre Delay Early Reflections
LEQ HEQ
287
Appendices
Source (AMS)
Alternate Modulation Overview
Alternate Modulation Sources
AlternateModulationletsyouusecontrollers,envelopes,
LFOs,etc.tomodulateProgramparameters.Youcanuse
onecontrollertomodulatemultipleparameterssimultane
ously.Youcanalsocreatecomplexmodulationsetupsin
which(forexample)anenvelopemodulatesthefrequency
ofanLFO,andthatLFOisthenusedtomodulateafilter.
Programsprovide46types(84destinations)foralternate
modulation.
AMS Mixers
TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,or
processanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomethingnew.
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether,oruse
oneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.Youcan
alsousethemtochangetheshapesofLFOsandEGsinvari
ousways,modifytheresponseofrealtimecontrollers,and
more.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMSsources,
justliketheLFOsandEGs.
Theoriginal,unmodifiedinputstotheAMSMixersarestill
availableaswell.Forinstance,ifyouuseLFO1asaninput
toaAMSMixer,youcanusetheprocessedversionofthe
LFOtocontroloneAMSdestination,andtheoriginalver
siontocontrolanother.
Finally,youcancascadetwoAMSMixerstogether,byusing
oneastheinputofanother.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOSC1AMSMixon
page 122.
AMS (Alternate Modulation
Source) List
Physical and MIDI controllers
Off
Thismeansthatnomodulationsourceisselected.
Note Number
ThisisthenotesMIDInotenumber,from0(C2)to127
(G9).
Velocity
ThisisthenotesMIDInoteonvelocity.
Exp. Velocity (Exponential Velocity)
ThisisMIDInoteonvelocitythroughanexponentialcurve.
Thecurvemeansthatlowvelocitieswonthaveverymuch
effect,andthedifferencebetweentwolowervelocityvalues
wontbeverynoticeable.
Ontheotherhand,highvelocitiesproduceincreasingly
greatereffects,andthedifferencebetweenanytwohigher
velocityvalueswillbemorepronounced.
Poly After
Polyphonicaftertouchallowsadifferentaftertouchvalue
foreachnote.ThiscanbereceivedfromexternalMIDI
devicesorgeneratedbytheinternalsequencer.ThemicroS
TATIONkeyboarditselfdoesnotgeneratepolyaftertouch,
however.
After Touch
Theeffectwillbeappliedbychannelaftertouchmessages
fromthemicroSTATIONssequencedataorreceivedfrom
MIDIIN.
OSC1 Filter1 A Filter1 B Amp 1
Pitch EG
Level Mod 1
Level Mod 2
Time Mod
Intensity Mod
Filter1 EG
Intensity Mod to A Intensity Mod to B
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Amp1 EG
Level Mod
Time Mod 1
Time Mod 2
Cutof Mod 1
Cutof Mod 2
Cutof Mod 1
Cutof Mod 2
Pan Mod
LFO1 LFO2
Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to A
Intensity Mod to B
Intensity Mod to B Intensity Mod
Intensity Mod
Pitch Mod
Resonance Mod
Frequency Mod 2
Frequency Mod 1
Frequency Mod 2
Frequency Mod 1
Amp Mod
OSC 1
OSC 2
Output Level Mod
Resonance Mod
Output Level Mod
Intensity Mod to A Intensity Mod to B
Common LFO
Time Mod 3 Time Mod 3
Frequency Mod
Intensity Mod Intensity Mod Intensity Mod
Reset Reset
Reset
Reset
Shape
Shape Shape
Appendices
288
JS X
Thisisthehorizontalmovementofthemainjoystick.Italso
receivesMIDIPitchbend.
JS+Y: CC#01
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,upwards
fromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#01(modwheel).
JSY: CC#02
Thisistheverticalmovementofthemainjoystick,down
wardsfromthecenter.ItalsoreceivesMIDICC#02(breath
controller).
JS +Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)
Theeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystick+Y(Vertical
upward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectofafter
touchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
JS Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick Y & After Touch/2)
TheeffectwillbecontrolledbythejoystickY(Vertical
downward)andbyaftertouch.Inthiscase,theeffectof
aftertouchwillbeonlyhalfofthespecifiedintensity.
Pedal: CC#04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
IfyouwanttousetheassignablefootpedalasanAMS,set
thePEDAL/SWPdl(p.65)toFootPedal(FootPedal
Assignonpage 296)).
ThisletsyouuseafootpedalconnectedtoDAMPER/
PEDAL/SWtocontrolparameters.
KnobMod 1: #17 (Realtime Knob Modulation 1: CC#17)
IfyouwanttouseRealtimeControlBmodeknobs14as
AMS,youllneedtomakeKnobAssignsettingsindividu
allyforeachprogram,combination,andsong;setKnob
1BtoKnobMod.1(CC#17),Knob2BtoKnobMod.2
(CC#19),Knob3BtoKnobMod.3(CC#20),andKnob
4BtoKnobMod.4(CC#21)(RealtimeControlKnob14
Assignonpage 294).
SetRealtimeControltoBmode,andthenoperateknobs14
toapplymodulation.
IftheAMSintensityisapositive(+)value,settingtheknob
inthecenterwillapplyanAMSeffectof0.Turningtheknob
towardtherightofcenterwillapplyaneffectinthepositive
direction,andturningittowardtheleftwillapplyaneffect
inthenegativedirection.(Withnegative()values,theeffect
willapplyintheoppositedirection.)
KnobMod1[+] (Realtime Knob Modulation1[+])
WiththeseAMSsources,theknobpositionandthedirec
tionoftheresultingchangearedifferentthanKnobMod1:
#17KnobMod4:#21.IfAMSintensityissettoapositive(+)
value,rotatingtheknobtothefarleftwillproduceanAMS
effectof0.Rotatingtheknobtowardtherightwillapply
changeonlyinthepositivedirection.(Iftheintensityisset
toanegativevalue,theresultwillbetheopposite.)
Damper: #64
ThisistheDamperpedal,alsosometimescalledthesustain
pedal.ItcorrespondstoMIDICC#64.
WhenusingKorgsoptionalhalfdamperpedal,theDS1H,
thisAMSsourceiscontinuousnotjuston/off.
Portamento SW: #65
ThisistheMIDIportamentoswitch(CC#65),whichalso
enablesanddisablesportamento.
Sostenuto: #66
ThisistheMIDIsostenutopedal(CC#66).
Soft: CC#67
ThisistheMIDIoftpedal(CC#67).
SW 1: CC#80 (SW 1 Modulation: CC#80)
MIDIcontrolchange(CC#80)
SW 2: CC#81 (SW 2 Modulation: CC#81)
Foot SW: #82 (Foot SW: CC#82)
IfyouwanttousetheassignablefootswitchasanAMS,set
thePEDAL/SWSW(p.65)toFootswitch(Foot
SwitchAssignonpage 295)).
ThisletsyouuseafootswitchconnectedtoDAMPER/
PEDAL/SWtocontrolparameters.
MIDI: CC#83
Tempo
Thisletsyouusethesystemtempoasamodulationsource.
120isthecenter,foravalueof0;60BPMis99,and240BPM
is+99.
Notethatthisisdifferentfromactuallysyncingtotempo;
forthatpurpose,usethededicatedsynchronizationfunc
tionsfortheLFOs,effects,etc.
Gate1
Gate1+Damper
Gate1istriggeredbyanewnoteafterallnoteshavebeen
released,suchasatthebeginningofaphrase.Gate
1+Damperissimilar,exceptthatitistriggeredbyanew
noteonafterallnotesandthedamperarereleased.
YoucanusethistoresettheCommonLFO.Forinstance,to
createaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOandStep
SequencersKeySyncOffsetting,useGate1+Damperas
theresetsource.
Gate2
Gate2+Damper
Gate2issimilartoGate1,butittriggerswitheverynew
noteon,eveninthemiddleofalegatophrase.
Gate2+Damperincludesthedamperpedalintheequation,
asshowninthediagrambelow.
WhenusedasaresetcontrollerforCommonLFO,Gate2
andGate2+Damperwillhavethesameeffect.
Gate1,Gate1+Dmpr
Gate1
Note
Dmpr
1 2 3 1 2 3
Damper Pedal
Gate1+Dmpr
Time
On
Of
Alternate Modulation Source (AMS)
289
Alternate Modulation settings
WhenyouuseanAMS(AlternateModulationSource),the
modulationdestinationwillbeaffectedasshowninthe
tablebelow.
Byusingalternatemodulation,youcancreatecomplexsys
temsofmodulationinwhichEG,LFO,keyboardtracks,and
controllersworktogether.
YoucanapplycomplexchangetoanLFOorEG,for
examplebyusingthepitch/filter/ampEGtocontrolthe
frequencyorintensityofanLFOthatmodulatesthe
pitch/filter/amp,orbyusingLFO2tocontrolthe
frequencyofLFO1.
Thetone,EG,andLFOetc.canbecontrollednotonlyby
keyvelocityorthejoystick,butalsofromaknob,or
pedaletc.
Panningcanbecontrolledinrealtimefromacontroller,
EG,orLFOetc.
YoucanusethefilterEGtocontrolpitchorvolumeatthe
sametimethatitcontrolsthefilter.
Controllersetc.canbeusedtocontrolEGlevelsortimes.
ThisletsyoushapetheEGinrealtime.
Filter/ampkeyboardtrackingornotenumbercanbe
usedtocontroltheEGorLFOaccordingtothekeyboard
pitchthatisplayed.
Pitch,tone,EGorLFOcanbecontrolledbythetempoof
thearpeggiatorand/orsequencer.
AMS operations and their result
AMS source
& value range
Amp EG
0...+99
Pitch & Filter
EGs
99...0...+99
LFO1 & 2
99...0...+99
Common
LFO
99...0...+99
Filter & Amp
Key Track
99...0...+99
Common
Key Track
1 & 2
99...0...+99
Note
Number
C1...C4...C9
EXT(+/) *1
Max...0...+Max
EXT (Tempo) *2
,=...60.00...120.00...240.
00...
EXT(+) *3
0...127
Parameter
AMS
Intensity
Pitch (+12.00) 0...+1
Octave
10+1
Octaves
(Filter EG as
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
for Pitch EG)
Dedicated
parameter
1...0...+1
Octaves
Dedicated
parameter
1...0...+1
Octaves
0...+1
Octave
Pitch EG Int. (+12.00) Dedicated
parameter
for Pitch EG
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
0...+1
Octave
Pitch LFO1/
2 Int.
(+12.00) 0...+1
Octave
1...0...+1
Octaves
1...0...+1
Octaves
0...+1
Octave
Filter
Frequency
(+99) 0...+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
(Pitch EG as
AMS;
dedicated
parameter
for Filter EG)
Dedicated parameter Dedicated
parameter
for Filter
KTrk
100+10
Octaves
100+10
Octaves
0...+10
Octaves
Filter
Resonance
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Filter EG Int. (+99) Dedicated
parameter
for Filter EG
99...0...+99 99...0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Filter LFO1/2
Int.
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Filter Output
Level A/B
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Amp (+99) Dedicated
parameter
0...1x...8x Dedicated
parameter
0...1x...8x Dedicated
parameter
for Amp
KTrk
0...1x...8x 1x...8x
Amp LFO1/2
Int.
(+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Pan (+50) 0...+63 63...0...+63 0...+63
EG Level (+66) 99...0...+99 0...+99
EG Time (+49) 1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
LFO 1
Frequency *4
(+99) 1x...64x 1/64x...
1x...64x
(LFO2 only)
1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
LFO 2
Frequency *4
(+99) 1x...64x 1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
Common LFO
Frequency *4
(+99) 1/64x...1x...64x 1x...64x
LFO 1 Shape (+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99
(LFO2 only)
99...0...+99 0...+99
LFO 2 Shape (+99) 0...+99 99...0...+99 0...+99
Common LFO
Shape
(+99) 99...0...+99 0...+99
Appendices
290
Notes for the table
*1 EXT(+):JSX,Ribbon:CC#16,KnobMod1(CC#17),Knob
Mod2(CC#19),KnobMod3(CC#20),KnobMod4
(CC#21)
*2 WhenTempoisselectedasanAMSsource,thebase
valueis,=120.00.
ForexampleifthePitchAMSissettoTempo,andInten
sityissetto12.00,doublingthetempovalue(,=120.00
240.00)willraisethepitchoneoctave,andhalvingthe
tempo(,=120.0060.00)willlowerthepitchoneoctave.
Thestatedmodulationresultsarefortempovalues
between60bpmand240bpm.Asthetempodecreases
from60to0bpm,AMSmodulationwillhaveincreas
inglynegativeeffects;asitincreasesfrom240to250bpm,
modulationwillhaveincreasinglypositiveeffects.
*3 EXT(+):Velocity,Exp.Velocity,PolyAfter,AfterTouch,
JS+Y:CC#01,JSY:CC#02,JS+Y&AT/2,JSY&AT/2,
Pedal:CC#04,ValueSlider:#18,KnobMod1[+],Knob
Mod2[+],KnobMod3[+],KnobMod4[+],
Damper:CC#64,PortamentoSW:CC#65,Soste
nuto:CC#66,Soft:CC#67,SW1:CC#80,SW2:CC#81,
MIDI:CC#83,MIDI:CC#85,MIDI:CC#86,MIDI:CC#87,
MIDI:CC#88.
*4 ItispossibletocontrolLFOFrequencybyusingTempo
AMSandIntensity.HoweverifyouusetheFrequency
MIDI/TempoSyncfunction(p.119),theLFOfrequency
canbesynchronizedtothetempoandnotevalue.
The effects of AMS on various param-
eters, and example applications
Welldescribesomeexamplesofusingalternatemodula
tion.
Note:Theparameternamesandvaluesusedintheseexpla
nationscanbeviewedandeditedinmicroSTATIONEditor/
PlugInEditor.
Pitch (p.91)
PitchcanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,filter/ampEG,
controllers,ortempoetc.
IfyouselectFilterEGorAmpEGastheAMSandset
Intensityto+12.00,thepitchwillchangeupto1octave
insynchronizationwiththeEG.
IfyouselectTempoastheAMSandsetIntensityto
+12.00,doublingthetempo(basedon, =120.00)willraise
thepitchoneoctave,andhalvingthetempowilllower
thepitchoneoctave.
Pitch EG (p.96)
PitchEGintensitycanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,
keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo.
IfyouselectJS+Y:CC#01astheAMSandsetIntensityto
+12.00,movingthejoystickinthe+Ydirectionwill
graduallyincreasetheeffectofthePitchEGtoa
maximumof1octave.IfIntensityhasanegativevalue,
theeffectofthePitchEGwillbeinverted.
LFO 1/2 (p.118)
PitchmodulationintensityoftheLFO1/2canbecontrolled
bytheCommonLFO,anEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,
ortempoetc.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,thepitchchangewidthof
LFOmodulationetc.canbecontrolledinsynchroni
zationwiththelevelchangesoftheEG.Withpositive(+)
settingsofIntensity,thevibratoeffectwillgradually
deepenastheEGlevelrises,orgraduallylessenasthe
EGleveldecreases.Withnegative()settingsof
Intensity,theLFOphasewillbeinverted.
Ifacontrollersuchasafootswitchconnectedtothe
DAMPER/PEDAL/SWjackisselectedasAMS,youcan
applyapitch/vibratoeffectbyturningonthefootswitch
onlywhenyouwanttheeffect.
Filter (Cutoff) Frequency (p.100)
ThecutofffrequencyoffilterA/Bcanbecontrolledbythe
pitch/ampEG,Commonkeyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempo.UsetheFilterModulation1(2)pageFilterA/BMod
ulation(p.102)tosetAMSandIntensityforFilterAorB.
IfyouselectJSXastheAMS1orAMS2andsetIntensity
toapositive(+)value,movingthejoysticktowardthe
rightwillraisethecutofffrequency,andmovingit
towardtheleftwilllowerthecutofffrequency.Negative
()settingswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
IfyouselectthesamecontrollerasanAMS1orAMS2
andsetseparateintensitiesforFilterA(LowPassFilter)
IntensityandFilterB(HighPassFilter)Intensity,youcan
useasinglecontrollertosimultaneouslycontrolthe
cutofffrequenciesofbothfilters.
Resonance (p.101)
YoucanusetheEG,LFO,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontroltheresonancelevel.
IfyouselectFilterKTrkorAmpKTrkastheAMS,you
canusethefilterorampkeyboardtrackingsettingsto
controltheresonancelevel.Forexampleiftheamp
keyboardtrackingparametersRampBtmLoandRamp
HiToparesettopositive(+)values,AmpKTrkisselected
astheAMS,andIntensityitsettoapositive(+)value,
playingtowardeitherendofthekeyboardwillcause
ampkeyboardtrackingtoincreasethevolume,andAMS
toraisetheresonancelevel.
YoucanselectacontrollerastheAMS,andapply
resonancewhendesiredbyusingthecontroller.
YoucanselectCommonLFO,LFO1or2astheAMS,and
usetheLFOtocontroltheresonancelevel.
Output (p.101)
tempoetc.tocontroltheoutputlevelofFilterA/B.
Setfilterrouting(Routing)toParallel,andspecifythe
desiredfiltertypeforeachfilterAandB.ChooseLFOas
AMSforfiltersAandB,andsetIntensityto+99and
99respectively.ThisallowstheLFOtocyclically
crossfadebetweentheoutputsoffiltersAandB.
Filter EG Intensity (p.104)
FilterEGintensitycanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,
Commonkeyboardtracking,acontrollerortempoetc.You
canuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBtoindependently
specifytheintensityforFilterAandB.
IfyouselectJSY(CC#02)astheAMSandsetIntensity
toAandIntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,movingthe
joystickintheYdirectionwillgraduallyincreasethe
effectoftheFilterEG.IfyousetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoanegative()value,theeffectofthe
FilterEGwillbeinverted.
IfyouselectJSXastheAMSandsetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,movingthejoystick
towardtherightwillgraduallyincreasetheeffectofthe
FilterEG.Movingthejoysticktowardtheleftwill
graduallyincreasetheeffectoftheFilterEGwithan
invertedphase.
Alternate Modulation Source (AMS)
291
Filter LFO1/2 Intensity (p.105)
TheLFO1/2filtermodulationintensitycanbecontrolledby
theEG,CommonLFO,keyboardtracking,controller,or
tempoetc.YoucanuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBto
independentlyspecifytheintensityforFilterAandB.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,theautowaheffect
producedbyLFOmodulationwillbecontrolledbythe
changesinEGlevel.IfyousetIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoBtoapositive(+)value,thewaheffectwill
deepenastheEGlevelrises,andwilllessenastheEG
levelfalls.Withnegative()valuesofIntensitytoAand
IntensitytoB,thephaseoftheLFOwillbeinverted.
Ifacontrollersuchasafootswitchconnectedtothe
DAMPER/PEDAL/SWjackisselectedasAMS,youcan
applytheautowaheffectbyturningonthefootswitch
onlywhenyouwanttheeffect.
Filter Common LFO (p.120)
tempoetc.tocontroltheCommonLFOfiltermodulation
intensity.YoucanuseIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBto
specifytheintensityseparatelyforFilterAandB.
YoucansetAMStoacontroller,andusethecontroller
onlywhendesiredtocontrolthedepthofthefilter
sweepproducedbytheCommonLFO.
Amp (p.110)
Thevolumecanbecontrolledbythepitch/filterEG,Com
monLFO,controllers,ortempoetc.
IfanEGorcontrollerthatchangeswithapositive(+)
value(EXT(+))isselectedastheAMS,settingthe
Intensityto+99willallowyoutoincreasethevolume
toamaximumofeighttimesthatofthecurrentvolume.
IfanEG,LFO,orcontrollerthatchangeswithavalue
(PitchEG,FilterEG,LFO,KT,EXT(+)isselectedasthe
AMS,settingtheIntensityto+99willallowyouto
increasethevolumetoamaximumofeighttimesthatof
thecurrentvolume(forpositive(+)changesoftheAMS),
ortodecreasethevolumetozero(fornegative()
changesoftheAMS).
Inadditiontothetimevariantchangesinvolume
producedbytheampEG,youcanalsomakethevolume
changeinsynchronizationwiththepitch/filterEG.Select
PitchEGorFilterEGastheAMS,andadjustIntensity.If
youwishtocanceltheeffectoftheAmpEGandusethe
pitch/filterEGtocontrolthevolume,setalllevelsofthe
AmpEGto+99.
Amp LFO1/2 Intensity (p.112)
The amp modulation intensity of LFO 1/2 can be controlled by the
EG, Common LFO, keyboard tracking, controllers, or tempo etc.
IfyouselectEGastheAMS,thedepthofthetremolo
effectproducedbyLFOmodulationwillchangein
synchronizationwiththechangesinEGlevel.Ifyouset
Intensitytoapositive(+)value,thetremoloeffectwill
deepenastheEGlevelrises,andlessenastheEGlevel
falls.IfIntensityissettoanegative()value,thephase
oftheLFOwillbeinverted.
IfafootswitchconnectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SW
jackisselectedasAMS,youcanapplythetremolo
effectbyturningonthefootswitchonlywhendesired.
Pan (p.110)
TheoscillatorpancanbecontrolledbytheEG,LFO,key
boardtracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
IfyouselectNoteNumberastheAMSandset
Intensityto+50,panningwillbecontrolledbythe
keyboardposition:centerattheC4note,farrightatC9
orabove,andfarleftatC1orbelow.
IfEGisselectedastheAMS,theoscillatorpanwillbe
controlledinsynchronizationwiththechangesinEG
level.IfIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,thepan
willmovetowardtherightastheEGlevelincreases,and
towardtheleftastheEGleveldecreases.IfIntensityis
settoanegative()value,theoppositeeffectwilloccur.
EG Reset
Pitch EG (p.98)
Filter EG (p.109)
Amp EG (p.115)
tempoetc.tocontrolEGReset.UsetheThresholdsettingto
specifytheAMSvalueatwhichresultwilloccur.
BysettingAMStoCommonLFO,youcanresetthe
envelopecyclicallyattheintervaloftheCommonLFO.
Theresultisjustasiftheshapespecifiedbytheenvelope
werebeingusedasaspecialLFO.
YoucanresettheenvelopebysettingAMStoacontroller
suchasJS+Y,andusingthecontrollerwhendesired,
producingaoneshotfilterenvelopesweep.
EG Level
Pitch EG (p.97)
Filter EG (p.107)
Amp EG (p.113)
EGlevelscanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Start,Attack,Break).IfyousettheIntensityvalueto+66,
youwillbeabletocontroltherespectiveleveloveramaxi
mumrangeof99.
SetAMStoVelocityforAmpEGLevelModulation,
IntensityStartto+00,Attackto+66,andBreakto66.
SetallAmpEGlevelsto+00.Asyouplaywithincreasing
velocity,theEGlevelswillchangemoregreatly.Atthe
maximumvelocity,theStartLevelwillstayat+00,but
theAttackLevelwillchangeto+99andtheBreakLevel
willchangeto99.
EG Time
Pitch EG (p.96)
Filter EG (p.108)
Amp EG (p.113)
EGtimescanbecontrolledbytheCommonLFO,keyboard
tracking,controllers,ortempoetc.
YoucanspecifyanIntensityvalueforeachEGsegment
(Attack,Decay,Slope,Release).EGtimesaredeterminedby
theAlternateModulationvaluewhentheprecedingpointis
reached.Forexample,theAlternateModulationvalueatthe
momenttheenvelopereachestheattacklevelwilldeter
minethedecaytime.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof8,17,25,33,41,or49,thecor
respondingtimecanbemultipliedbyamaximumof2,4,8,
16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32,1/
64).
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetAMSIntensityto+8,
Atto+,Dcto,andSlandRlto0.Whenyou
movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,theAttackTime
willbelengthenedbyamaximumof2times.TheDecay
Timewillbeshortenedbyamaximumof1/2.TheSlope
andReleasetimeswillnotchange.
LFO Frequency (p.117)
ThefrequencyofLFO1,2orCommonLFOcanbecon
trolledbytheEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo
etc.
YoucanalsousetheLFO2frequencytomodulateLFO1,or
usetheCommonLFOfrequencytomodulateLFO1/2.
IfIntensityissettoavalueof16,33,49,66,82,or99,thecor
respondingfrequencycanbemultipliedbyamaximumof
2,4,8,16,32,or64times(ordividedby1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/
32,1/64).
Appendices
292
SelectJS+Y:CC#01forAMS,andsetIntensityto+16.
Whenyoumovethejoystickinthe+Ydirection,theLFO
frequencywillbeincreasedbyamaximumof2times.If
yousetIntensityto16andmovethejoystickinthe+Y
direction,theLFOfrequencywillbedecreasedbyupto
1/2.
LFO Frequency AMS Intensity (p.118)
YoucanusetheEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,or
tempoetc.tocontroltheintensityoftheAMSthatcontrols
thefrequencyoftheLFO1,2,orCommonLFO.
ForexampleifyoureusingthepitchEGtomodulatethe
LFOfrequency,youcoulduseaseparateAMStocontrolthe
depthofthiseffect.
IfafootswitchconnectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SW
jackisselectedasAMS,thepitchEGwilllightly
modulatetheLFOfrequencywhenthefootswitchisoff;
thepitchEGwilldeeplymodulatetheLFOfrequency
whenthefootswitchison.
LFO Shape (p.117)
YoucanuseaEG,keyboardtracking,controllers,ortempo
etc.tocontroltheshapeoftheLFO1,2,orCommonLFO
waveform.YoucanalsousetheLFO2frequencytomodu
lateLFO1,orusetheCommonLFOfrequencytomodulate
LFO1/2.
YoucancontroltheLFOwaveformbysettingAMStoa
controllersuchasJS+Y,andusingthecontrollerwhen
desired.
Common LFO Reset (p.120)
Youcanuseacontrollerortempoetc.toresettheCommon
LFO.
BysettingAMStoGate1,youcanmaketheCommon
LFOresetwhenanoteisplayedfromastateinwhichall
notesareoff.Forexample,thiswillensurethatafilter
sweepalwaysstartsfromthesameplace.
YoucansetAMStoacontrollersuchasJS+Y:CC#01,and
usethecontrollerwhenyouwanttoresettheLFO.
Dynamic Modulation
Source (Dmod)
Youcancontrolcertaineffectparametersusingthejoystick,
realtimecontrolknobs,etc.onthefly.
Theseparameterscanalsobecontrolledbythesequencer.
ControllingeffectsinthiswayisreferredtoasDynamic
Modulation.Forexample,youcanusejoysticktospeedup
theLFOofthechorusandflanger,ortosweepawaheffect.
Thisletsyoutakefulladvantageoftheeffectsaspartofthe
expressivepotentialofyourinstrument.
Mostoftheparametersfordynamicmodulationconsistof
parametervaluesforSourceandAmount.TheSourcefield
selectsthemodulationsource,andAmountsetsthemodu
lationintensity.WhentheSourceisatitsmaximumvalue
(forinstance,whenJS+Yismovedallthewayup),theactual
degreeoftheeffectwillbetheparametervalueplusthe
Amount.
Example:
Wet/Dry10:90,SourceJS+Y:#01,Amount+50
Inthiscase,theeffectbalancewillnormallybe10:90,and
movingthejoystickinthe+Ydirectionwillgradually
increasetheproportionoftheeffectsound.Whenthejoy
stickismovedallthewayinthe+Ydirection,theeffectbal
ancewillbe60:40.
Seetheindividualeffectsdescriptionsforexplanationsof
otherdynamicmodulationparameters.Parameterswhich
canbecontrolledthroughdynamicmodulationaremarked
bythe symbol.
InProgrammode,dynamicmodulationisalwayscon
trolledviatheglobalMIDIChannel.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,dynamicmodu
lationiscontrolledviatheMIDIchannelindependently
specifiedbytheCh(ControlChange)forIFX15,
MFX1,2,andTFX.
Note:Mostdynamicmodulationsettingscanbeeditedonly
byusingtheincludededitor;theycannotbeeditedfromthe
microSTATIONitself.
Dmod List (Dynamic Modulation Source List)
Off dynamic modulation is not used
Gate1 note on/off p.293
Gate1+Dmpr note on + damper on/off p.293
Gate2 note on/off (retrigger) p.293
Gate2+Dmpr note on + damper on/off (retrigger) p.293
Note Numbr note number
Velocity velocity
Exp Velocity exponential velocity p.293
After Touch aftertouch (Channel After Touch) reception
JS X joystick X (horizontal) direction
JS+Y: #01 joystick +Y (Vertical upward) direction (CC#01)
JSY: #02 joystick Y (Vertical downward) direction (CC#02)
Pedal: #04 assignable foot pedal (CC#04) p.293
Wet / Dry
Max Zero Higher
D
-mod
Dry
Wet
60:40
10:90
Dynamic Modulation (Example)
Wet / Dry=10:90
Amt= +50
Wet / Dry=60:40
Amt= 50
Dynamic Modulation Source (Dmod)
293
Gate1, Gate1+Dmpr (Gate1, Gate1+Damper)
Theeffectisatmaximumduringnoteon,andwillstop
whenallkeysarereleased.WithGate1+Damper,theeffect
willremainatmaximumevenafterthekeysarereleased,as
longasthedamper(sustain)pedalispressed.
Gate2, Gate2+Dmpr (Gate2, Gate2+Damper)
ThisisessentiallythesameasforGate1orGate1+Dmpr.
HoweverwhenGate2orGate2+Damperareusedasa
dynamicmodulationsourcefortheEGof075:St.Env.
Flangeretc.ortheAUTOFADEof076:StereoVibrato,atrig
gerwilloccurateachnoteon.(InthecaseofGate1and
Gate1+Dmpr,thetriggeroccursonlyforthefirstnoteon.)
Exp Vel (Exponential Velocity)
Modulationwillbeappliedexponentiallyaccordingtothe
velocityvalue.Weakvelocityvalueswillproducelittle
effect,buttheeffectwillincreaserapidlyasthevelocityval
uesrise.
Pedal #04 (Foot Pedal: CC#04)
Ifyouwishtousetheassignablefootpedalasadynamic
modulationsource,setPEDAL/SWPdl(Globa/Media:
Controllers)toFootPedal.(FootPedalAssignon
page 296)
Afootcontrolleretc.connectedtotheASSIGNABLE
DAMPER/PEDAL/SWjackcanbeusedtocontrolaneffect.
KnobM1 #17 (Knob Modulation1: CC#17)
Ifyouwanttouseknobs14asadynamicmodulation
sourcewhentheRealtimeControlBmodeisselected,use
theKnobAssignRealtimeControlKnobAssignparameter
toassignKnob1BtoKnobMod.1(CC#17),Knob2Bto
KnobMod.2(CC#19),Knob3BtoKnobMod.3(CC#20),
andKnob4BtoKnobMod.4(CC#21)foreachprogram,
combination,orsong.(RealtimeControlKnob14
Assignonpage 294)
ThenselecttheRealtimeControlBmode,andyoucanuse
knobs14tocontroltheeffects.
Iftheknobissettothe12oclockposition,theresulting
effectasadynamicmodulationsourcewillbezero.Ifthe
Amountisapositive(+)value,rotatingtheknobtowardthe
rightwillapplypositivechange,androtatingittowardthe
leftitwillproducenegativechange.(Withnegativevalues,
theresultwillbetheopposite.)
KnobM1 [+] (Knob Modulation1 [+])
Theknobpositionandthedirectionoftheresultingchange
aredifferentthanKnobMod.1(CC#17)KnobMod.4
(CC#21).IfAmountissettoapositive(+)value,rotatingthe
knobtothefarleftallthewaywilproduceaneffectof0as
thedynamicmodulationsourceallthewaywillapply
changeonlyinthepositivedirection.(IftheAmountissetto
anegativevalue,theresultwillbetheopposite.)
FootSW #82 (Foot Switch: CC#82)
Ifyouwishtouseanassignablefootswitchasadynamic
modulationsource,setPEDAL/SWSW(Globa/Media:
Controllers)toFootSwitch(CC#82)(FootSwitch
Assignonpage 295)
Theeffectwillbecontrolledwhenyouuseafootswitchetc.
connectedtotheASSIGNABLEDAMPER/PEDAL/SWjack.
Tempo
Theresultingmodulationwillbezeroat120BPM,themaxi
mumpositivevalueat300BPM,andthemaximumnegative
valueat40BPM.
FXCtrl1: #12 MIDI effect control 1 (CC#12)
FXCtrl2: #13 MIDI effect control 2 (CC#13)
CC#16 (Rbn) MIDI Control Change (MIDI Control Change CC#16)
CC#18 (Vol) value slider (CC#18)
KnobM1 #17
realtime control B knob (knob modulation 1 CC#17)
p.293
KnobM2 #19
p.293
KnobM3 #20
p.293
KnobM4 #21
p.293
KnobM1 [+] realtime control B knob 1 [+] p.293
Damper #64 damper pedal (CC#64)
PrtaSW #65 portamento switch (CC#65)
Sostenu #66 sostenuto pedal (CC#66)
Soft #67 soft pedal (CC#67)
CC#80 (SW1) MIDI Control Change (CC#80)
CC#81 (SW2) MIDI Control Change (CC#81)
FootSW #82 assignable foot switch (CC#82) p.293
CC#83 MIDI Control Change (CC#83)
Tempo
tempo (internal clock or external MIDI clock tempo
data) p.293
Gate1,Gate1+Dmpr
Gate1
Note
Dmpr
1 2 3 1 2 3
Damper Pedal
Gate1+Dmpr
Time
On
Of
Gate2,Gate2+Dmpr
Gate2
Note
Dmpr
1 2 3 1 2 3
Damper Pedal
Gate2+Dmpr
Time
On
Of
Appendices
294
Realtime Control Knob 14
Assign
Thefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedasthefunctionof
knobs14whentheRealtimecontrolsBmodeisselected.
KnobassignmentsaresavedseparatelywitheachProgram,
Combination,andSong.
Formoreinformation,see:
Programs:KnobAssignp.9
Combinations:KnobAssignp.23
Sequencermode:KnobAssignp.45
List of Knobs 14 assignments
ThefollowingfunctionscanbeassignedtoRealtimeControl
knobs14.
Off
Thissettingdisablestheslider.
Knob Mod14 (CC#s17, 19, 20, 21)
ThesesettingsletyouusetheknobasanAMSorDmod
source.Notethatyoullalsoneedtoassigntheknobtocon
trolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Master Vol
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitstheUniver
salSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,7FH,
nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthevol
umesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,whilepre
servingtheirrelativebalance.
Porta. Time (CC#05)
Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Notethatadifferentcon
troller,CC#65,turnsPortamentoonandoff.
Volume (CC#07)
Controlsthevolume,andtransmitsCC#7.
Post IFX Pan (CC#08)
ControlsthepanningafterthelastInsertEffectinthechain,
andtransmitsCC#8.
Pan (CC#10)
Controlsstereopan,andtransmitsCC#10.
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.
Whenusedoneatatime,MIDIVolumeandExpression
affectlevelinexactlythesameway:aMIDIvalueof127is
equaltoProgramsmainLevelsetting,andlowervalues
reducethevolume.
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously,theonewith
thelowervaluedeterminesthemaximumvolume,andtheone
withthehighervaluescalesdownfromthatmaximum.
FX Ctrl 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)
TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamicModu
lation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFXCon
trol1or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheEffect.
Cutoff (CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.
Forinstance,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
Resonance (CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.For
instance,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
Filt EG Int (CC#79)
Itaffectsallofthefiltersatonce;forinstance,itaffectsboth
FiltersAandB.
F/A Attack (CC#73)
WhentheCCvalueisabove64,thisalsoaffectstheAmp
EGsStartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,andAttack
TimeAMS,asdescribedbelow:
Betweenvaluesof65and80,theStartLevel,StartLevel
willchangefromitsprogrammedvalueto99.
F/A Decay (CC#75)
EGs.
F/A Sustain (CC#70)
F/A Release (CC#72)
P. LFO1 Spd (CC#76)
P. LFO1 Dep (CC#77)
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
P. LFO1 Dly (CC#78)
CC#80(SW 1) & CC#81(SW 2)
Normally,theseareusedforthetwoassignableswitches
butyoucanassignthemtotheslidersinstead,ifyoulike.
Foot Switch (CC#82)
YoucanusethisgeneralpurposecontrollerasanAMSor
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFootSW
(CC#82)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthePro
gramorEffect.
MIDI CC#83 (CC#83)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignMIDI
CC#83tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgram
orEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
MIDI CC#0095 and 102119
ThesesettingsletyoutransmitanyMIDICC,exceptforreg
isteredandnonregisteredparameters(CCs96101).Ifyou
chooseaCCwhichisusedbyAMS,Dmod,orthestandard
CCroutings,thenitwillaffectthecorrespondingmicroSTA
TIONparameters.
WhentheRealtimeControlAmodeisselected,the
functionofknobs14isfixed.
Knob 1A: CUTOFF (Filter Cutoff: CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersatonce.
Knob 2A: RESONANCE (Filter Resonance: CC#71)
Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.
Knob 3A: EG INTENSITY (Filter EG Intensity: CC#79)
Knob 4A: EG RELEASE (Filter, Amplifier EG Release:
CC#72)
Foot Switch Assign
295
Foot Switch Assign
Hereyoucanspecifythefunctionofanassignableswitch
(separatelysoldPS1)connectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/
SWjack.
SettheGlobal/Media:ControllersPEDAL/SWType
toSwitch,andusetheSwparameter(p.65)tospecify
thefunction.
IfyouselectafunctionthatincludesaCC#,thatMIDI
controlchangemessagewillbetransmittedeachtime
thefunctionisturnedon/off(Off:0,On:127).
IfyouselectRTCKnob1BKnob4B,theMIDIcontrol
changemessagespecifiedbytheKnobAssignsetting
ofeachmodewillbetransmittedeachtimethefunction
isturnedon/off(Off:0,On:127).
List of Foot Switch assignments
Off
Thissettingdisablestheswitch.
Foot Switch (CC#82)
ThisletsyouusetheswitchasanAMSorDmodsource.
NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFootSW(CC#82)tocon
trolthedesiredparameterwithintheProgramorEffect.
Porta. SW (CC#65)
Thiscontrolsportamentoon/off.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePortamentoswitch
(CC#65)[Bn,41,vv]onpage 304.
Sostenuto (CC#66)
Thiscontrolsthesostenutoeffect,whichholdsonlythe
notesbeingplayedatthemomentthatthefootswitchis
turnedon.
Soft (CC#67)
Turnsthesoftpedaleffectonandoff.
Damper (CC#64)
Turnsthedamperpedaleffectonandoff.
Program Up
ThisletsyouusetheswitchtoincrementthecurrentPro
gramorCombinationnumber,forhandsfreepatch
changes.NotethatthisisonlyactivewhileonthePROG
PLAYorCOMBIPLAY,respectively.
Whenyouusethiscontrol,themicroSTATIONwillalso
transmitthecorrespondingMIDIProgramChangeand
BankSelectmessages.
Program Down
ThisdecrementsthecurrentProgramorCombinationnum
ber,forhandsfreepatchchanges.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgramUp,above.
Value Inc
Usingthefootswitchwillproducethesamefunctionas
pressingthebutton.
Value Dec
Usingthefootswitchwillproducethesamefunctionas
pressingthebutton.
Song S/S
Thefootswitchwillcontrolsequencerstart/stop.Simultane
ously,aMIDIStartorStopmessagewillbetransmitted.
PunchIn/Out
IfSEQ:RECM(Recordingmode)issettoMPI(Manual
PunchIn,)theswitchcanbeusedtopunchinandpunch
outwhenrecordingonthesequencer.
Tap Tempo
Thefootswitchwillcontrolthesystemtempoinrealtime.
ARP ON/OFF
Thefootswitchwillturnthearpeggiatoron/off.
ARP LATCH
ThefootswitchwillturnthearpeggiatorLatch.
JS+Y (CC#01)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward).
JSY (CC#02)
Theswitchwillcontroltheeffectproducedbyjoystick
movementintheYdirection(Verticaldownward).
RT Knob1A4A, RT Knob1B4B
Usetheswitchtocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlAorBmodeisselected.
(Footswitchonisequivalenttoturningtheknobtothefar
right;footswitchoffisequivalenttoturningtheknobto
thefarleft.)
ARP GATE
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
thefarleft.)
ARP VEL
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
thefarleft.)
ARP SWING
UsetheswitchtocontrolthearpeggiatorsSwing.
thefarleft.)
Appendices
296
Foot Pedal Assign
Hereyoucanspecifythefunctionthatwillbecontrolledby
anassignablepedal(separatelysoldXVP10,EXP2)con
SettheGlobal/Media:BasicControllersPEDAL/SW
TypetoPedal,andusethePdlparameter(p.65)to
specifythefunction.
SomeoftheassignmentsincludeMIDICCs,whichare
transmittedwheneverthesliderismoved.Notethat
theMIDICCscanstillbereceivedeveniftheyarenot
assignedtoaphysicalcontroller.
IfyouselectRTKnob1B4B,theMIDIcontrol
changemessagespecifiedbytheRealtimeControl
KnobAssignsettingsineachmodewillbetransmitted.
List of Foot Pedal assignments
Off
Thissettingdisablesthepedal.
Master Vol
Thiscontrolstheoverallvolume,andtransmitstheUniver
salSystemExclusiveMasterVolumemessage[F0H,7FH,
nn,04,01,vv,mm,F7H].Youcanusethistoadjustthevol
umesofallTracksorTimbresatthesametime,whilepre
servingtheirrelativebalance.
IfanexternalMIDIdeviceconnectedtothemicroSTATION
supportsthismessage,itsoverallsystemvolumecanbe
controlled.
Foot Pedal (CC#04)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFoot
Pedal(CC#04)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthe
ProgramorEffect.
Porta. Time (CC#05)
Controlsthespeedatwhichportamentowillchangethe
pitch.
Volume (CC#07)
ControlthevolumeofaProgram,Combination,orofa
MIDItrackinSequencermodes.
PostIFXPan (CC#08)
ControlthepanafterpassingthroughtheInsertEffect.
Pan (CC#10)
ControlthepanofaProgram,ofatimbreinaCombination,
orofaMIDItrackinSequencermodes.
Expression (CC#11)
Expressionisasecondaryvolumecontrol,whichyoucan
usetoscalelevelwithoutaffectingthemainvolumesettings
orCC#7values.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeExpression(CC#11)on
page 294.
FX Ctrl 1 & 2 (CC#s12 & 13)
TheseassignmentsareintendedforEffectDynamicModu
lation(Dmod).NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignFXCtrl1
or2tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithintheEffect.
MFX Send 1 & 2 (CC#s 93 & 91)
ThesecontrolthesendlevelstoMasterEffects1and2,
respectively.
CC#s93and91actuallycontrolsendlevelsintwodifferent
places:thesendsdirectlyfromtheProgramOSCandthe
sendlevelsofthelastInsertEffectinthechainwhich
matchestheCCsMIDIchannel.
JS+Y (CC#01)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJS+Y.WhateverJS+Yis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
JSY (CC#02)
ThisduplicatesthefunctionofJSY.WhateverJSYis
assignedtocontrol,thepedalwillcontrolaswell.
CC#16(Rbn)
Dmodsource.NotethatyoullalsoneedtoassignRibbon
(CC#16)tocontrolthedesiredparameterwithinthePro
gramorEffect.
RT Knob1A4A, RT Knob1B4B
Usethepedaltocontroltheeffectofknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlAorBmodeisselected.
ARP GATE
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsGate.
ARP VEL
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsVelocity.
ARP SWING
UsethepedaltocontrolthearpeggiatorsSwing.
MIDI transmission when the microSTATIONs controllers are used
297
MIDI transmission when
the microSTATIONs con-
trollers are used
ThefollowingtablesshowtherelationbetweentheMIDI
messagesthataretransmittedwhenthemicroSTATIONs
controllersareused,andtheAMS(alternatemodulation
source)orDMS(dynamicmodulationsource)thatcorre
spondtoeachMIDImessage.
# indicates a fixed function, and * indicates an assignable func-
tion.
ARP
Available
for AMS
Available
for Dmod MIDI messages Joystick
Realtime
Knob
1A4A
Realtime
Knob
1B4B
On/Off
LATCH
On/Off
Knob1
(GATE)
Knob2
(VELOCITY)
Knob3
(SWING)
Damper
Foot
Switch
Foot
Pedal
Note-off
Note-on (note number) * *
Note-on (velocity) * *
Poly aftertouch *
CC# 0 Bank select (MSB) * * * * * *
1 Modulation 1 #(+Y) * * * * * * * * * *
2 Modulation 2 #(Y) * * * * * * * * * *
3 * * * * * *
4 Foot controller * * * * * * * * *
5 Portamento time * * * * * * *
6 Data entry (MSB) * * * * * *
7 Volume * * * * * * *
8 Post Insert Effect panpot * * * * * * *
9 * * * * * *
10 Panpot * * * * * * *
11 Expression * * * * * * *
12 Effect control 1 * * * * * * * *
13 Effect control 2 * * * * * * * *
14 ARP On/Off control * [*] * * * * *(1)
15 * * * * * *
16 Controller (CC#16) * * * * * * * * * *
17 Knob modulation 5 * * * * * * * *
18 Controller (CC#18) * * * * * * * * * *
19 Knob modulation 6 * * * * * * * *
20 Knob modulation 7 * * * * * * * *
21 Knob modulation 8 * * * * * * * *
22 ARPGATE control * * * [*] * * *(1) *(1)
23 ARPVELOCITY control * * * * [*] * *(1) *(1)
24 ARPLENGTH control * * * * * [*] *(1) *(1)
25 * * * * * * * *
26 * * * * * *
27 * * * * * *
28 * * * * * *
29 * * * * * *
30 * * * * * *
31 ARPLATCK * * [*] * * *
32 Bank select (LSB) * * * * * *
33...37 * * * * * *
38 Data entry (LSB) * * * * * *
39...63 * * * * * *
64 Damper * * * * * * # * * *
65 Portamento On/Off * * * * * * * * *
66 Sostenuto * * * * * * * * *
67 Soft pedal * * * * * * * * *
68...69 * * * * * *
70 Sustain level * * * * * *
71 Filter resonance level # (Knob2) * * * * * * * *
72 Release time # (Knob4) * * * * * * * *
73 Attack time * * * * * *
74 Filter cutoff frequency # (Knob1) * * * * * * * *
75 Decay time * * * * * *
76 LFO1 speed * * * * * *
77 LFO1 depth (pitch) * * * * * *
78 LFO1 delay * * * * * *
79 Filter EG intensity # (Knob3) * * * * * * * *
80 Controller (CC#80) * * * * * * * *
81 Controller (CC#81) * * * * * * * *
82 Foot switch On/Off * * * * * * * * *
83 Controller (CC#83) * * * * * * * *
84 * * * * * *
85 Controller (CC#85) * * * * * * * *
86 Controller (CC#86) * * * * * * * *
87 Controller (CC#87) * * * * * * * *
88 Controller (CC#88) * * * * * * * *
89...90 * * * * * *
91 Effect depth 1 (send 2 level) * * * * * * *
92 Effect depth 2 (IFX 15 On/Off ) * * * * * *
93 Effect depth 3 (send 1 level) * * * * * * *
94 Effect depth 4 (MFX 1, 2 On/Off ) * * * * * *
95 Effect depth 5 (TFX 1, 2 On/Off ) * * * * * *
96 Data increment * * * * * *
97 Data decrement * * * * * *
98 NRPN(LSB) * * * * * *
99 NRPN(MSB) * * * * * *
100 RPN(LSB) * * * * * *
0: Bend range * * * * * *
1: Fine tune * * * * * *
2: Coarse tune * * * * * *
101 RPN(MSB) 0 * * * * * *
102 * * * * * *
103 * * * * * *
104 * * * * * *
105 * * * * * *
106 * * * * * *
107 * * * * * *
108 * * * * * *
109 * * * * * *
110 * * * * * *
111 * * * * * *
112 * * * * * *
113 * * * * * *
114 * * * * * *
115 * * * * * *
116 * * * * * *
117 * * * * * *
118 * * * * * *
119 * * * * * *
Program change
Channel aftertouch * *
Appendices
298
(1):WhenaarpeggiatorcontrollerisassignedtoaCC#indi
catedby[*](Global/Media:ControllersARPRTCCC#)
*: Assignable
[*]: TheARPControllerscanbeassignedtoCC#00119.
CC#sindicatedby[*]willbeassignedautomatically
whenyouusetheGlobal/MediacommandResetARP
CC#withtheCCDefaultsetting.
TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecommendedas
theCC#foreachofthesecontrollers.Normallyyou
shouldusethesesettingswhenassigningCC#s.
WhenyouoperateacontrolleronthemicroSTATION,the
correspondingorassignedcontrolchangewillbetransmit
ted.Theexceptionisthatwhenyoumovethejoystickinthe
X(horizontal)direction,pitchbendchangemessageswillbe
transmitted.
IfyouveselectedRTCKnob1BKnob4BinSW(Foot
Switchfunction)orPdl(FootPedalfunction),theMIDI
controlchangemessagespecifiedbytheKnobAssignset
tingofeachmodewillbetransmitted.
IfyouselectARPON/OFF,ARPLATCH,ARPGATE,ARP
VELOCITY,orARPSWING,theMIDIcontrolchangemes
sagespecifiedbytheGlobal/Media:ControllersARPRTC
CC#settingwillbetransmitted.
Operationsineachmodearedescribedbelow.(Herewewill
explainonlycontrolchanges,butthesameappliesforpitch
bendchange.)
Program mode
WhenoneofthemicroSTATIONscontrollersisused,acon
trolchangemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(p.60).
IftheRealtimeControlBmodeisselected,andknobs
14ortheassignablepedalareassignedtoMasterVol
ume,theuniversalexclusivemessageMasterVolume
willbetransmitted.
Combination mode
WhenoneofthemicroSTATIONscontrollersisused,acon
trolchangemessagewillbetransmittedontheglobalMIDI
channel(p.60).
Simultaneously,themessagewillalsobetransmittedonthe
MIDIchannel(MIDIChannelp.20)ofanytimbrewhose
Status(p.20)isEXTorEX2.
WhenoneofthemicroSTATIONscontrollersisused,its
effectwillapplytoanytimbrewhoseStatusisINTand
whoseMIDIChannelsettingiseitherGchorthesameasthe
globalMIDIchannel.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmittedonlyonthe
globalMIDIchannel.
YoucanusetheMIDIFiltersettings(p.22)toenable
ordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersforeachtim
bre.IfthesettingisOn,theaboveoperationswillbe
enabled.
Effectdynamicmodulationcanbecontrolledwhenthe
Ch(p.25)settingforIFX15,MFX1,2,orTFXiseither
settoGchortothesamechannelastheglobalMIDIchan
nel.(InthecaseofAllRouted,controlispossibleonthe
MIDIchannelofanyroutedtimbre.)
Sequencer mode
WhenyouuseacontrolleronthemicroSTATION,theeffect
willapplytotheMIDItrack116thatsselectedbythefront
panelfunction0116buttons.
IftheStatus(p.38)ofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelectis
EXT,EX2,orBTH,acontrolchangemessagewillbetrans
mittedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel
(p.39).
IftheStatusisINTorBTH,operatingoneofthemicroSTA
TIONscontrollerswillaffectonlythatMIDItrack.Simulta
neously,thesameeffectwillalsoapplytoanyMIDItrack
withthesameMIDIChannelsetting.
InthecaseofMasterVolume,theuniversalexclusive
messageMasterVolumewillbetransmitted.
YoucanusetheMIDIFiltersettings(p.40)toenable
ordisablecontrolchangesandcontrollersforeachtim
bre.IfthesettingisOn,theoperationseffectivefora
StatusofINTorBTHwillbeenabled.Trackswhose
StatusisEXT,EX2,orBTHwilltransmitcontrol
changesregardlessofthissetting.
EffectdynamicmodulationispossibleiftheChsetting
(p.46)oftherespectiveinserteffect15,mastereffects1
and2,ortotaleffectmatchestheMIDIchannelofthetrack
thatsselectedbythefrontpanelfunction0116buttons.(In
thecaseoftheAllRoutedsetting,controlispossibleusing
allMIDIchannelsoftheroutedtracks.)
IfoneofthemicroSTATIONscontrollersisoperatedduring
realtimerecording,thecorrespondingorassignedcontrol
changewillberecorded.
Pitch Bend # (X) * *
Universal exclusive
Master volume * *
Master balance
Master fine tune
Master coarse tune
ARP
Available
for AMS
Available
for Dmod MIDI messages Joystick
Realtime
Knob
1A4A
Realtime
Knob
1B4B
On/Off
LATCH
On/Off
Knob1
(GATE)
Knob2
(VELOCITY)
Knob3
(SWING)
Damper
Foot
Switch
Foot
Pedal
microSTATION and MIDI CCs
299
Responses to standard MIDI
controllers
ThefollowingtableshowshowthemicroSTATION
respondstoMIDIcontrolchangemessages,andtherela
tionbetweensettingsandcontrollermovementsonthe
microSTATION.
CC# Control Value Function
0 Bankselect(MSB) 0127 bankselectmessageMSB *1
1 Modulation1 0127 correspondstojoystickmovementinthe+Ydirection(Verticalupward)
2 Modulation2 0127
correspondstojoystickmovementintheYdirection(Vertical
downward)
3
4 Footcontroller 0127
correspondstowhentheassignablepedalfunctionissettoFoot
Pedal
5 Portamentotime 0127 portamentotime
6 Dataentry(MSB) 0127 MSBofRPNandNRPNdata *2
7 Volume 0127 volume *3
8 PostInsertEffectpanpot 0127 panaftertheInsertEffect
9
10 Panpot 0127 pan
11 Expression 0127 volume *3
12 Effectcontrol1 0127 correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl1(p.305)
13 Effectcontrol2 0127 correspondstoeffectdynamiccontrolsourceFXControl2(p.305)
14 ARPON/OFFcontrol
063(Off),
64127(On)
equivalenttoon/offwhenCC#14isassignedtotheARPON/OFF
button
*7
15
16 Controller(CC#16) 0127 forcontrollingAMSorDmod
17 Knobmodulation1 0127
correspondstowhentherealtimecontrolknobfunctionissettoKnob
Mod.1
18 Controller(CC#18) 0127 forcontrollingAMSorDmod *8
Mod.2
Mod.3
Mod.4
22 ARPGATEcontrol 0127
equivalenttowhenCC#22isassignedtoarpeggiocontrolknob1
(GATE)
*7
23 ARPVELOCITYcontrol 0127
(VELOCITY)
*7
24 ARPSWINGcontrol 0127
(SWING)
*7
25 *7
2630
31 ARPLATCHcontrol
063(Off),
64127(On)
equivalenttoon/offwhenCC#14isassignedtotheARPLTACH
button
*6
32 Bankselect(LSB) 0127 LSBofbankselectmessage *1
3337
38 Dataentry(LSB) 0127 LSBofRPNorNRPNdata *2
3963
64 Damper 0127 dampereffect
65 PortamentoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turntheportamentoeffecton/off
66 SostenutoOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
turnthesostenutoeffecton/off
67 Soft 0127 softpedaleffect
6869
70 Sustainlevel 0127 sustainlevelsofthefilterEGandampEG *4
71 Filterresonancelevel 0127 resonancelevelofthefilter *4
72 Releasetime 0127 cutofffrequencyofthehighpassfilter *4
73 Attacktime 0127 releasetimesofthefilterEGandampEG *4
Appendices
300
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theRealtimeControlKnobs1B4B.Inthiscase,thetrans
mittedvalueswillallbe0127.
Youcanassignanycontrolchangenumber(CC#00119)to
theARPON/OFFbutton,ARPLATCHbutton,andReal
timecontrolsCmodeknobs14.Inthiscase,ARPswitches
willtransmitvaluesof0(Off)or127(On),knobs14will
transmitvaluesof0127.
*1 InthemicroSTATIONsequencer,bankselectmessages
arenormallyspecifiedasprogramchangeevents.How
everinsomecasesthiswillbeinsufficientwhenyou
wishtochangebanksonanexternaldevice.Insuch
cases,youcanuseCC#00andCC#32tospecifythe
banks.
Forinformationontherelationbetweenbankselect
numbersandthebanksofyourexternaldevice,referto
theownersmanualforyourexternaldevice.
*2 Unlikeconventionalcontrolchanges,pitchbendrange,
finetune,andcoarsetunesettingsaremadeusingRPC
(RegisteredParameterControl)messages.InProgram,
Combination,andSequencermodes,youcanuseRPC
messagestocontrolthebendrangeandtuningforeach
program,Timbre(Combination),orTrack(Sequencer).
TheprocedureistouseanRPN(RegisteredParameter
Number)messagetoselecttheparameterthatyouwish
toedit,andthenuseDataEntrytoinputavalueforthat
parameter.Toselecttheparameter,useCC#100(witha
valueof0002)andCC#101(withavalueof00).use
CC#06andCC#38toenterthedata.
Thedataentryvaluesforeachparameterandthecorre
spondingsettingsareasfollows.
74 Filtercutofffrequency 0127 cutofffrequencyofthelowpassfilter *4
75 Decaytime 0127 decaytimes/slopetimesofthefilterEGandampEG *4
76 LFO1speed 0127 LFO1speed *4
77 LFO1depth 0127 pitchLFO1intensity *4
78 LFO1delay 0127 LFO1delay *4
79 FilterEGintensity 0127 filterEGintensity *4
80 Controller(CC#80)
063(Off),
64127(On)
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
81 Controller(CC#81)
063(Off),
64127(On)
forcontrollingAMSorDmod
82 FootswitchOn/Off
063(Off),
64127(On)
correspondstoon/offwhenthefunctionoftheassignablefootswitchis
settoFootSW
84
89,90
91 Effectdepth1(send2level) 0127 send2level
92
Effectdepth2(InsertEffect15
On/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
turnInserteffect15on/off *5
93 Effectdepth3(send1level) 0127 send1level
94
Effectdepth4(mastereffect1,2
On/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
mastereffect1,2on/off *5
95 Effectdepth5(totaleffectOn/Off)
063(Off),
64127(On)
totaleffecton/off *5
96 Dataincrement 0
97 Datadecrement 0
98 NRPN(LSB) LSBofNRPN
99 NRPN(MSB) MSBofNRPN
100 RPN(LSB)
0 selectsthepitchbendrange *2
1 controlsFineTune *2
2 controlsCoarseTune *2
101 RPN(MSB) 0 MSBofRPN
102...
109

110
111
112
113
114...
119

CC# Control Value Function
301
Forexample,ifinSequencermodeyouwishtoseta
MIDItrackthatisreceivingchannel1toatranspose
(coarsetuning)valueof12,youwouldfirsttransmit
[B0,64,02](64H=CC#100)and[B0,65,00](65H=CC#101)
tothemicroSTATIONtoselecttheRPNcoarsetune.
Thenyouwouldsetthisto12bytransmitting[B0,06,
34](06H=CC#6),34H=52(correspondsto12),and[B0,
26,00](26H=CC#38,00H=0).
*3 ThevolumeofthemicroSTATIONisdeterminedbymul
tiplyingtheVolume(CC#07)withtheExpression
(CC#11).InSequencermodewhenyoustopthesong
playbackandreturnthelocationtothebeginningofthe
track,theVolumewillbesettothestartingvalue,and
theExpressionwillbesettothemaximumvalue(127).
*4 Avalueof64willcorrespondtothevaluespecifiedby
theprogramparameter.0istheminimum,and127isthe
maximum.Changingfrom631orfrom65126will
adjusttheeffectfromtheprogramparametersetting
towardtheminimumvalueormaximumvalue.
Fordetailsaboutthespecificparameterscontrolledby
theseCCs,pleaseseeParameterscontrolledbyMIDI
CCs#7079onpage 301
*5 ControlledontheglobalMIDIchannel.
*6 IfyouassignaCC#totheARPON/OFFbutton,ARP
LATCHbutton,andRealtimecontrolsCmodeknobs1
4,andperformtheseoperationsonthemicroSTATION,
theassignedCC#willbetransmitted,andthemicroSTA
TIONitselfwillalsobecontrolledatthesametime.If
thismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameasif
themicroSTATIONitselfhadbeenoperated.
TheCC#settingsforeachknobandbuttonaremadein
theGlobal/MediaControllers,ARPRTCCC#.Usethese
settingsifyouneedtoassigncontrolchangemessages,
forexamplewhenyouwanttorecordswitchoperations
ontheinternalsequenceroranexternalMIDIsequencer,
ortocontrolthearpeggiatorfromanexternalMIDI
device.
Eachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedtoanydesired
MIDIcontrolchangemessageCC#00119,butnormally
youwillchoosetheGlobal/MediacommandResetARP
CC#andusetheCCDefaultsettings.
ThistableshowstheoperationsfortheCCDefaultset
tings.TheCCDefaultsettingsaretheCC#srecom
mendedforusewiththesecontrollers.Normally,you
willassigntheseCC#s.
Parameters controlled by MIDI CCs
#70-79
CC#7079correspondtothemicroSTATIONsprogram
parameterslistedbelow.
InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogramparameters
willbetemporarilyeditedwhenCC#7079messagesare
receivedontheglobalMIDIchannel(p.60),whenknobs
14areoperatedwhentheRealtimeControlAmodeis
selected,orwhenknobs14areoperatedwhenassignedto
CC#7079withtheRealtimeControlBmode.
Inmostcases,youcanusetheWriteProgramcommandto
savetheeditedvalues,overwritingthepreviousProgram
settings.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanuse
theseCCstotemporarilyedittheparametersforall
TimbresorTracksonagivenMIDIchannel.However,
editsmadeinthiswaycannotbesavedbackintoaPro
gram.
CC#06 CC#38
00
01
12
00
00
0
0
+ 1
+12
CC#06 CC#38
40
52
64
88
00
00
00
00
24
12
0
+24
CC#06 CC#38
32
48
64
96
00
00
00
00
50
25
0
+50
RPN=0 (Pitch bend range)
RPN=1 (Fine tune)
RPN=2 (Coarse tune)
Parameter value (Semitone steps)
Parameter value (Semitone steps)
Parameter value (1 cent steps)
CC# Internal parameters controlled by the CC
70(Sustainlevel)
Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel(p.6,p.107,p.113)
AmpEG1/2Sustain(p.6,p.113)
71(Filterresonance) FilterA/B,1/2Resonance(p.5,p.101)
72(Releasetime)
FilterEG1/2Release(p.6,p.107),AmpEG1/2Release(p.6,
p.114)
73(Attacktime)
EGTimes:FilterEG1/2Attack(p.6,p.107)
AmpEG1/2Attack(p.6,p.113)
AmpEG1/2TimeModulation:Attack(p.114)
EGLevels:AmpEG1/2LevelStart(p.113)
AmpEG1/2LevelAttack(p.113)
AmpEG1/2LevelModulation:Start(p.114)
74(Filtercutofffrequency) FilterA/B,1/2Frequency(p.100)
75(Decaytime)
FilterEG1/2Decay(p.6,p.108),FilterEG1/2Slope(p.108)
AmpEG1/2Decay(p.113),AmpEG1/2Slope(p.113)
76(LFO1speed) LFO1Frequency(p.117)
77(LFO1Pitchintensity) PitchLFO1Intensity(p.6,p.93)
78(LFO1delay) LFO1Delay(p.118)
79(FilterEGintensity) FilterEG1/2IntensitytoA(p.104),FilterEG1/2IntensitytoB(p.104)
Appendices
302
MIDI applications
About MIDI
MIDIstandsforMusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface,andis
aworldwidestandardforexchangingvarioustypesof
musicaldatabetweenelectronicmusicalinstrumentsand
computers.WhenMIDIcablesareusedtoconnecttwoor
moreMIDIdevices,performancedatacanbeexchanged
betweenthedevices,eveniftheyweremadebydifferent
manufacturers.
Settings when connected to a MIDI
device or computer
HerewewillexplainthesettingsyoullmakeonthemicroS
TATIONwhenconnectingittoanotherdevice.
The Convert Position setting
ThemicroSTATIONssettingsTranspose,VelCurve,
andATCurve(p.57,p.182)respectivelyallowyouto
adjustthetransposition,velocitysensitivity,andaftertouch
(receivedonlyfromtheinternalsequencerorfromMIDIIN)
sensitivity.
Theaftertouchcurveisappliedonlytodatareceived
fromtheinternalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.TheAT
CurvesettingdoesnothingifConvt(p.61)isPre
MIDI.
Theeffectthatthesesettingswillhaveontheinternal
sequencerandontheMIDIdatathatistransmittedand
receivedwilldependonConvt(p.61)setting.
IfyouwanttocontrolanexternalMIDItonegenerator
fromthemicroSTATION,setConvttoPreMIDI.The
varioussettingslistedabovewillbereflectedintheMIDI
datathatistransmitted.Thesesettingswillalsobe
reflectedinthedatathatisrecordedontheinternal
sequencer.
IncomingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,VelocityCurve4,andAfter
TouchCurve3.
WhencontrollingthemicroSTATIONstonegenerator
fromanexternalMIDIdevice,selectPostMIDI.The
abovelistedsettingswillaffecttheMIDIdatathatis
received.Thesesettingswillalsoaffectthedatathatis
playedbackfromtheinternalsequencer.
OutgoingMIDIdatawillbehandledwithsettingsequiv
alenttoKeyTranspose0,andVelocityCurve4.
Local Control On settings
IfyouveconnectedthemicroSTATIONtoacomputeror
externalMIDIsequencerandwanttousetheechoback
fromthatdevicetoplaythemicroSTATION,turnechoback
onforyourexternalMIDIsequencerorcomputer(sothat
thedataitreceivesatMIDIINwillberetransmittedfrom
MIDIOUT),andturnoffthemicroSTATIONslocalcontrol
setting(sothatthemicroSTATIONskeyboardsectionand
soundgeneratorwillbeinternallydisconnected).
WhenyouplaythekeyboardofthemicroSTATION,the
musicaldatawillbetransmittedtotheexternalMIDI
sequencerorcomputer,andthenechoedbacktoplaythe
microSTATIONstonegenerator.Inotherwords,byturning
LocalControlOFF,youcanpreventnotesfrombeing
soundedinduplicate,aswouldotherwiseoccurifanote
weresoundedbythemicroSTATIONsownkeyboardand
againbythedatathatwasechoedback.
Ifthearpeggiatorfunctionison,playingthemicroSTA
TIONskeyboardwillnotcausethearpeggiatortooperate,
andonlythemusicaldataproducedbyplayingthekey
boardwillbetransmitted.Thearpeggiatorwilloperateonly
inresponsetothenotesthatareechoedbackandreceived
atMIDIIN.Inthisway,turningoffLocalControlprevents
thearpeggiatorfromoperatinginduplicate.
Usethissettingwhenyouwishtorecordontheexternal
MIDIsequencerorcomputeronlythenotesthattriggerthe
arpeggiator,andtousetheechoedbacknotestooperatethe
arpeggiatorwhilemonitoringyourrecordingorduring
playback.
Ifyouwantthenotedataproducedbythearpeggiatortobe
recordedontheexternalsequencer/computer,setLocal
Controlon,andturnofftheEchoBacksettingoftheexter
nalsequencer/computer.
WhenusingthemicroSTATIONbyitself,leaveLocalCon
trolturnedon.(IfthisisoffwhenthemicroSTATIONis
usedbyitself,playingthekeyboardwillnotproduce
sound.)
Messages transmitted and
received by the microSTATION
Inthetextbelow,[]indicateshexadecimalnotation.
MIDI channels
MIDImessagescanbeexchangedwhenthetransmitting
andreceivingdevicesaresettothesameMIDIchannel.
MIDIusessixteenchannels,numbered116.Thewayin
whichchannelsarehandledwilldifferdependingonthe
mode.
Program mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisthebasicchannelthatthe
microSTATIONusesforMIDItransmission/reception,
andissetbyMIDIChannel(p.60,p.184).
Combination mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
messagesforselectingacombinationandturningeffects
on/off,andtotransmit/receiveexclusivedata.
Eachtimbrewilltransmit/receiveMIDIdataontheMIDI
Channel(p.20,p.145)thatisspecifiedforthattimbre.
TheChMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffect(p.25,
p.155)isusedtocontroldynamicmodulationofthe
insert/master/totaleffect,thepanfollowingtheinsert
effect,andsend1and2.
WhenyouusethekeyboardorcontrollersofthemicroS
TATION,messageswillbetransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel,andwillalsobetransmittedontheMIDI
channelofanytimbrewhoseStatus(p.20,p.145)is
settoEXTorEX2.
Channelmessageswillbereceivediftheymatchthe
MIDIchannelofatimbrewhoseStatusissettoINT.
Sequencer mode
TheglobalMIDIchannelisusedtotransmit/receive
exclusivedataandformessagesthatswitcheffectson/
off.
MIDI applications
303
MIDIdatatransmission/receptionforeachMIDItrack
willoccurontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachMIDI
trackbyMIDIChannel(p.39,p.166).
TheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeacheffectbytheCh
parameter(p.46,p.173)isusedtocontroldynamic
modulationoftheinsert/master/totaleffect,thepan
followingtheinserteffect,andsend1and2.
WhenyouusethekeyboardorcontrollersofthemicroS
TATION,MIDIdatawillbetransmittedontheMIDI
channeloftheMIDItrackselectedbythefrontpanel
function0116buttons.However,thedatawillbetrans
mittedonlyforMIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,
orEX2.
Whenthesequencerisplayedback,musicaldataof
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2willbe
transmittedonthespecifiedMIDIchannels.
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisINTorBTHwillreceive
channelmessagesofthematchingMIDIchannel.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeStatusonpage38,166
andMIDIChannelonpage39,166.
Note on/off
Note-on [9n, kk, vv]
Note-off [8n, kk, vv]
(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:velocity)
WhenyouplayanoteonthemicroSTATIONskeyboard,it
willtransmitnoteon/offmessages.
Whenthearpeggiatorisrunning,noteon/offmessagesgen
eratedbythearpeggiatoraretransmitted.IfLocalisOff,
noteon/offmessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatorwillnot
betransmitted.SeeLocalControlOnsettingsonpage 302.
However,mostinstrumentsdonotreceiveortransmitnote
offvelocity,andneitherdoesthemicroSTATION.
Program changes / Bank select
WhenyouselectaprogramonthemicroSTATION,youll
useanumberthatstartswith1foreachcategoryshownin
thedisplay.MIDIusesbanknumbersandprogramnumbers
toselectprograms.Youcanviewthisbanknumberandpro
gramnumberinthefollowingway.
Accessapageinwhichyoucanselectprograms,pressthe
NUMLOCKbuttontoturnNumLockon,andthenpress
theENTER(14)button.
ThebankwillbeindicatedasA,B,C,orD.Thecorrespond
ingMIDIbankselectnumberwilldependontheBank
Mapsetting(p.59,p.182).
Changing the program/bank
Program change [Cn, pp]
(n:channel,pp:programnumberthatallows128soundsto
beselected)
Programs000127inbanksAEcorrespondtoprogram
changes[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Programs001128inbanksGM,g(1),g(2),g(3),g(4),g(5),
g(6),g(7),g(8),g(9),andg(d)correspondtoprogram
changes[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Bank select MSB (CC#0) [Bn, 00, mm]
Bank select LSB (CC#32) [Bn, 20, bb]
(n:channel,mm:banknumberupperbyte,bb:banknumber
lowerbyte)
Theinternalbanksthatcorrespondtoeachbankselect
numberwilldependontheBankMapsetting(p.59,
p.182).KORGisthedefaultsetting.
SimplyreceivingaBankSelectmessagewillnotcausethe
programorbanktochange.Theprogramorbankwillactu
allychangewhenaProgramChangemessageisreceived.
Program mode
InPROGPLAY,thesemessageswilltransmitandreceive
programchangeandbankselectoperations.
Combination, Sequencer modes
Programchangeandbankselectmessagescanbe
receivedontheMIDIchannelspecifiedforeachtimbre/
MIDItracktoselectprogramsonthattimbre/track.
Whenyouselectacombination,programchangeand
bankselectmessageswillbetransmittedbytimbres
whoseStatusisEXTorEX2.
InSequencermode,programchangeorbankselect
messageswillbetransmittedbytrackswhoseStatusis
BTH,EXT,orEX2whenyouselecttheProgramSelect
parameter(p.36,p.163),whenyouselectasong,or
whenyoureturntothebeginningofameasure.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/
receptioncanbeswitchedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
SeeEnableProgramChangeonpage22,40,150,and
Global/Media:SEQMIDIOutTrkonpage62,184.
Selecting combinations
Youcanuseprogramchangeandbankselectmessagesto
selectcombinationsinthesamewaythatyouselectpro
grams.
Combinations000127inbanksACcorrespondto
programchanges[Cn,00][Cn,7F].
Similarlyasforprogrambanks,theinternalbanksthat
correspondtoeachbankselectnumberwilldependon
theBankMapsetting.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
BankMaponpage59,182.
InCOMBIPLAY,programchangeandbankselectmessages
aretransmitted/receivedontheglobalMIDIchannel.They
arenotreceivedinCOMBIEDIT.
AllprogramchangescanbeturnedoffinMIDIFilter
(p.63,p.185)
Asneeded,youcanindependentlyturnallprogram
changeson/off,specifywhetherornotincomingmessages
willbeabletochangecombinations,andturnreception/
transmissionofbankselectmessageson/off.
IfCombinationChange(p.63,p.185)isoff,the
combinationwillnotchangeevenifaprogramchange
ontheglobalMIDIchannelisreceivedinCOMBIPLAY.
Inthiscase,theprogramofthetimbrethatmatchesthe
MIDIchannelofthereceivedmessagewillchange.
IfBankChange(p.63,p.185)isoff,bankselect
messageswillnotbetransmittedorreceived.
Aftertouch
Channel aftertouch [Dn, vv]
(n:channel,vv:value)
Whenthismessageisreceived,theaftertoucheffectwillbe
applied.Theassignedalternatemodulationordynamic
modulationeffectwillalsobeapplied.
ThekeyboardofthemicroSTATIONitselfcannottrans
mitaftertouch.Aftertouchcanbereceivedonlyfrom
theinternalsequencerorfromMIDIIN.
Aftertouchreceptionfortheentireinstrumentcanbeturned
on/offinEnableAfterTouch(p.63,p.185).
Appendices
304
InCombinationandSequencermodes,aftertouchcanbe
turnedon/offindependentlyforeachtimbre/track.
Polyphonic aftertouch [An, kk, vv]
(n:channel,kk:notenumber,vv:value)
ThereisanothertypeofaftertouchcalledPolyphonicKey
Pressure,whichallowsaftertouchtobeappliedindepen
dentlyforindividualkeys.Thismessagecanbeusedasan
alternatemodulationsource,butcannotbetransmittedby
themicroSTATIONskeyboard.Inordertousethismessage,
itwillhavetobereceivedfromanexternaldevice,or
recordedonyoursequencer.
TheaftertouchmentionedinthismanualreferstoChannel
AfterTouch.
Pitch bend
Pitch bend change [En, bb, mm]
(n:channel,bb:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteof
thevalue,togetherexpressingavalueof16,384stepswhere
8,192[bb,mm=00H,40H]isthecentervalue)
WhenthemicroSTATIONsjoystickismovedintheXaxis
(left/right),apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied,andpitch
bendermessageswillalsobetransmitted.Whenthesemes
sagesarereceived,apitchbendeffectwillbeapplied.
Therangeofpitchchangethatisproducedbypitchbend
messagescanalsobeadjustedviaMIDI.(SeeChangingthe
pitchbendrangeonpage 308.)
Control change
[Bn, cc, vv]
Transmittedandreceivedas(n:channel,cc:controlchange
no.,vv:value)
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDItransmissionwhen
themicroSTATIONscontrollersareusedonpage 297and
microSTATIONandMIDICCsonpage 299.
Controlchangescanbeturnedon/offasawholein
EnableControlChange(p.63,p.185).
InCombinationandSequencermodes,theMIDIFilter
settingsallowtransmission/receptionofcontrolchanges
tobeindividuallyturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
Fortheassignablecontrollers(RealtimeControlKnob1
B4B,andFootPedal/Switch),MIDIfiltersettingswill
applytothecontrolchangenumberwhereeach
controllerisassigned.OtherControlChangeappliesto
controlchangesthatarenotcoveredbytheitemsofthe
othercheckboxes(p.150,p.169).
Note:YoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119forknobs14
whentheRealtimeControlBmodeisselected.
AlthoughyoucanselectMIDICC#00CC#119fortheARP
Controllers,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthat
areassignedwhenyouusethecommandResetARPCC#
withCCDefaultSetting,andARPControllersSWARP
ON/OFFatCC#014,SWLATCHON/OFFatCC#031,
KNOB1ARPGATEatCC#022,KNOB2ARPVELOCITY
atCC#023,KNOB3ARPSWINGatCC#024.
Selecting program/combination banks
Bank select (CC#00, CC#32)
Technically,BankSelectisacontroller.Inpractice,however,
itisacomponentofProgramChange.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeProgramchanges/Bank
selectonpage 303.
Using the joystick to apply modulation
Modulation 1 depth (CC#01) [Bn, 01, vv]
WhenyoumovethemicroSTATIONsjoystickinthe+Y
direction(Verticalupward),Modulation1Depthmessages
willbetransmitted.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,the
sameeffectwillbeappliedaswhenthemicroSTATIONs
joystickisused.Normallythiswillapplyavibratoeffect
(pitchLFO).
receptioncanbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track.
(JS+Yp.22,p.41,p.150,p.169)
Modulation 2 depth (CC#02) [Bn, 02, vv]
WhenyoumovethemicroSTATIONsjoystickintheY
direction(Verticaldownward),Modulation2Depthmes
sageswillbetransmitted.Whenthesemessagesare
received,thesameeffectwillbeappliedaswhenthemicro
STATIONsjoystickisused.Normallythiswillapplyawah
effect(filterLFO).
(JSYp.22,p.41,p.150,p.169)
Othermanufacturersusethismessageforotherpurposes
(e.g.,breathcontroller,etc.)
Controlling portamento
Portamento time (CC#05) [Bn, 05, vv]
IfyouassigntheaboveCC#toanAssignablePedalorknobs
14whentheRealtimeControlBmodeisselected,rotating
thatknobwilltransmitPortamentoTimemessages,andwill
modifythespeedatwhichtheportamentopitchchanges.
Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethesameas
whenthecontrollerisused.
Portamento switch (CC#65) [Bn, 41, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignableSwitch,
usingthatswitchwilltransmitvv=127[7F]forONorvv=0
[00]forOFF,andtheportamentoeffectwillbeswitchedon/
off.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethe
sameaswhenthecontrollerisused.(vvof63[3F]orless
willbeOFF,and64[40]orgreaterwillbeON.)(Foot
SwitchAssignonpage 295)
receptionofthismessagecanbeturnedon/offindepen
dentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnablePortamentoSW
p.150,p.169).
InSequencermode,portamentotime/switchmessages
willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2whenyousetPortamento,reselectasong
orSMF,orreturntothebeginningofameasure.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePortamentoonpage
39,166.
MIDI applications
305
Controlling volume
Volume (CC#07) [Bn, 07, vv]
WhentheaboveCC#isassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlBmodeisselected,
usingthatcontrollerwilltransmitVolumemessages,and
thevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,the
resultwillbethesameaswhenthecontrollerisused.
Expression (CC#11) [Bn, 0B, vv]
WhentheCC#aboveisassignedtotheAssignablePedalor
usingthatcontrollerwilltransmitExpressionmessages,and
thevolumewillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,the
ThevolumeofthemicroSTATIONisdeterminedbymulti
plyingthevalueoftheVolumemessagewiththevalueof
theExpressionmessage.
IfadjustingtheVolumemessagedoesnotincreasethevol
umeasyouexpect,orifthereisnosound,transmitMIDI
messagesfromanexternaldevicetoresetthevalueofthe
Expressionmessage(setvvto127).
Note:InSequencermode,thiswillberesetwhentheLoca
tionofthesongismovedto001:01.000.
InCombinationmode,Volumemessageswillbetrans
mittedbyeachtimbrewhoseStatusisEXTorEX2
whenyoureselectthecombination.
WhenyouchangetheVolumesettinginSequencer
mode,orwhenyoureselectthesongorreturntothe
beginningofthesonginSequencermode,volume
messageswillbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhose
StatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.
SeeTrk(TrackMIDIOut)onpage62,184.
Note:RegardlessoftheStatussettings,reselectingasong,
orreturningtothebeginningwillresettheinternalVolume
valuetothevaluespecifiedbyeachtrack(thestartingset
tings),andwillresettheExpressionvaluetothemaximum.
Note:Thismessagecanbeusedtocontrolthevolumeof
eachMIDItrack.Normally,youwillincludeaVolumemes
sageintheMIDItracksettingdata(thesettingsatthebegin
ningofthetrack)tosettheinitialvolume,anduse
Expressiontocreatechangesindynamicsasthesongpro
gresses.
ByusingtheuniversalexclusiveMasterVolumemessage,
youcanadjusttheoverallvolumewithoutchangingthevol
umebalancebetweentimbresortracks.(SeeAboutsystem
exclusivemessagesonpage 308.)
Controlling pan (stereo position)
Pan (CC#10) [Bn, 0A, vv]
(vv:value,where00isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right)
usingthatcontrollerwilltransmitPanmessages,andthe
panningwillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,the
WhenyousetthePaninSequencermode,orwhenyou
reselectthesongorreturntothebeginningofthemeasure
inSequencermode,Panpotmessages(exceptforRND)will
betransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,or
EX2.
SeePanonpage37,163,Trk(TrackMIDIOut)onpage
62,184.
Post insert effect pan (CC#08) [Bn, 08, vv]
(vv:value,where00isfarleft,64iscenter,and127isfar
right)
usingthatcontrollerwilltransmitPostInsertEffectPanpot
messages,andthepanningofthesoundfollowingtheinsert
effectwillchange.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresult
willbethesameaswhenthecontrollerisused.
InProgrammode,thismessageistransmitted/receivedon
theglobalMIDIchannel.InCombination,andSequencer
modes,thismessageistransmitted/receivedontheMIDI
channelspecifiedforeachinserteffect.
WhenyousetPan(CC#8)inSequencermode,orwhenyou
reselectthesongorreturntothebeginningofthemeasure
inSequencermode,PostInsertEffectPanpotmessageswill
betransmittedbyeachtrackwhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,or
EX2.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeIFX1,IFX2,IFX3,IFX4,
IFX5onpage 25.
Controlling effects
Effect control 1 (CC#12) [Bn, 0C, vv]
Effect control 2 (CC#13) [Bn, 0D, vv]
usingthatcontrollerwilltransmitEffectControl1/2mes
sages,andthespecifieddynamicmodulationwillbecon
trolled.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethe
sameaswhenthecontrollerisusing.
Althoughvarioustypesofcontrolchangecanbeselectedas
dynamicmodulationsources,EffectControl1(CC#12)and
2(CC#13)arededicatedfordynamicmodulation.
Effect 1 depth (Send 2) (CC#91) [Bn, 5B, vv]
Effect 3 depth (Send 1) (CC#93) [Bn, 5D, vv]
RealtimeControlknobs14,usingthatcontrollerwilltrans
mitEffect1Depth(Send2)orEffect3Depth(Send1)mes
sages,andthesendlevel1or2tothemastereffectsMFX1or
MFX2willbecontrolledrespectively.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontroller
isused.
OnthecorrespondingMIDIchannels,thiswillsimultane
ouslycontrolthetimbre/tracksettingaswellasthesetting
followingtheInsertEffect.
InCombination,andSequencermodes,theactualsend
levelofthetimbre/trackisdeterminedbymultiplying
thisvaluewiththesend1/2settingsforeachoscillator.
(SeeSend1(MFX1),Send2(MFX2)onpage12,129,
154,Trk(TrackMIDIOut)onpage62,184.)
WhenyouadjustSend1(MFX1)orSend2(MFX2)in
Sequencermode,orwhenyoureselectasongorreturn
tothebeginningofthemeasureinSequencermode,
Send1/2willbetransmittedbyeachtrackwhose
Effect 2 depth (IFX15 on/off) (CC#92) [Bn, 5C, vv]
Effect 4 depth (MFX1, 2 on/off) (CC#94) [Bn, 5E, vv]
Effect 5 depth (TFX on/off) (CC#95) [Bn, 5F, vv]
Separatelyfromtheeffecton/offsettingsineachmode,
EffectSW(p.59)allowsyoutoturnoffinserteffectsIFX1
5andmastereffectsMFX1,2andtotaleffectTFX.
IfyouturnonIFX15Off,MFX1&2OfforTFXOff,thecor
respondingmessagewillbetransmittedwithvv=0[00].If
youturnoffthesesettings,thecorrespondingmessagewill
betransmittedwithvv=127[7F].Ifyouturnontheseset
Appendices
306
tings,thecorrespondingeffect(s)willbeturnedoffasa
group.Ifyouturnoffthesesettings,theon/offsettingsof
eachmodewillbeused.Thesameappliestoreception.(vv
of00isoff,and01orgreateristheoriginalsetting.)These
messagesaretransmitted/receivedontheglobalMIDIchan
nel.
Thesemessagesaredefinedsimplyforuseinadjustingthe
effectlevels,andmaynothavethesamefunctionon
anotherinstrumentconnectedtothemicroSTATION.
Using various controllers
Herewewillexplaintypicalwaystousethevariouscon
trollers.YoucanchoosefromMIDICC#00CC#119for
knobs14whentheRealtimeControlBmodeisselected.
Foot pedal (CC#04) [Bn, 04, vv]
IftheCC#aboveisassignedastheAssignablePedalfunc
tion,thismessagewillbetransmittedwhenthecontrolleris
used.
dentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableFootPedal/Switch
p.150,p.169).
Knob modulation 1B, 2B, 3B, 4B (CC#17, 19, 20, 21)
[Bn, 11, vv], [Bn, 13, vv], [Bn, 14, vv], [Bn, 15, vv]
IftheCC#aboveareassignedtotheknobs14whenthe
RealtimeControlBmodeisselected,thesemessageswillbe
transmittedwhentheknobsareused.
dentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableRealtimeControl
Knob1B,2B,3B,4Bp.22,p.41,p.151,
p.170).
Controller (CC#18) [Bn, 12, vv]
Controller (CC#83) [Bn, 53, vv]
IfyouassigntheCC#abovetoaknobs14whentheReal
timeControlBmodeisselected,thismessagewillbetrans
mittedwhenyouusetheknobs14.
Damper pedal (CC#64) [Bn, 40, vv]
Thismessageistransmittedwhenyouuseadamperpedal
(optionalDS1H)connectedtotheDAMPER/PEDAL/SW
jack,andthedampereffectwillbeturnedon/off.IftheDS
1Hisused,ahalfdampereffectcanbeapplied.
dentlyforeachtimbre/track(EnableDamperp.22,
p.40,p.150,p.169).
Foot switch (CC#82) [Bn, 52, vv]
IftheCC#aboveisassignedasthefunctionofthefoot
switch,usingtheswitchwilltransmitthismessagewith
vv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]forOFF.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,transmission/recep
tionofthismessagecanbeturnedon/offindependentlyfor
eachtimbre/track(EnableFootSwitchp.23,p.41,
p.150,p.169).
Sostenuto (CC#66) [Bn, 42, vv]
switch,usingtheswitchwilltransmitthismessagewith
vv=127[7F]forON,andvv=00[00]forOFF,andthesoste
nutoeffectwillbeturnedon/off.Whenthismessageis
received,theresultwillbethesameaswhenthecontroller
isused(OFFforvv=63[3F]orbelow,andONforvv=64[40]
orabove).
Soft pedal (CC#67) [Bn, 43, vv]
switch,usingtheswitchwilltransmit,andthesoftpedal
effectwillbeturnedon.Whenthismessageisreceived,the
WhenFootpedal(CC#04)Softpedal(CC#67)areused
onthemicroSTATION,thespecifiedalternatemodulation
ordynamicmodulationetc.willbecontrolled.Whenthese
messagesarereceived,theresultwillbethesameasifthe
controllerhadbeenused.ForFootswitch(CC#82)Soft
pedal(CC#67),vvof63[3F]orlesswillbeOFF,and64[3F]
orgreaterwillbeON.
Controlling via the controllers of a connected
MIDI instrument such as the M3
Ribbon Controller (CC#16) [Bn, 10, vv]
Whenacontrolchangeisreceivedfromtheribboncontrol
lerorotherassignedcontrollerofaMIDIinstrument(such
astheM3),thespecifiedeffect(e.g.,alternatemodulationor
dynamicmodulation)willbeapplied.
InCombinationorSequencermodes,transmissionand
(EnableRibbonCC#16onpage104,page161)
SW1 modulation (CC#80) [Bn, 50, vv]
SW2 modulation (CC#81) [Bn, 51, vv]
WhenthecontrolchangeassignedforSW1orSW2ofa
MIDIdevicesuchastheM3isreceived,theassignedalter
natemodulationordynamicmodulationeffectwillbe
applied.
InCombinationorSequencermode,transmission/reception
canbeturnedon/offforeachtimbre/track(EnableOther
CCp.150,p.169).
Controller (CC#85, 86, 87, 88)
WhentheVALUEsliderofMIDIinstrumentssuchasthe
M3,oracontrolchangeassignedtoacontrollerisreceived,
thespecifiedalternatemodulationordynamicmodulation
effectwillbeapplied.
Controlling Program tone & envelope
shapes
CC#7079controlspecificparametersofaprogram.
Fordetailsontheprogramparametersthatcorrespondto
eachcontrolchange,andhowthemicroSTATIONwill
respondineachmodewhenthesearereceived,referto
microSTATIONandMIDICCsonpage 299
Filter cutoff (CC#74) [Bn, 4A, vv]
Resonance level (CC#71) [Bn, 47, vv]
Filter EG intensity (CC#79) [Bn, 4F, vv]
Release time (CC#72) [Bn, 48, vv]
ThesemessagesaretransmittedwhenyouusetheRealtime
ControlBmodeknobs14.(TheycanalsobesetasRealtime
Controlknob1B4Bfunctions.)
Sustain level (CC#70) [Bn, 46, vv]
Attack time (CC#73) [Bn, 49, vv]
Decay time (CC#75) [Bn, 4B, vv]
LFO 1 speed (CC#76) [Bn, 4C, vv]
LFO 1 depth (pitch) (CC#77) [Bn, 4D, vv]
LFO 1 delay (CC#78) [Bn, 4E, vv]
ThesemessagesaretransmittedwhenassigntheaboveCC#
totheRealtimeControlBmodeknobs14function.
Whenyouusethese,thecorrespondingprogramparame
terswillbecontrolled,andthesoundandenvelopewill
change.Whenthesemessagesarereceived,theresultwillbe
thesameaswhenthecontrollerisused.(Whenthemessage
MIDI applications
307
hasavaluevv=64[40],thesettingwillhavethevaluethat
wassetbytheprogramparameter.)
receptioncanbeturnedon/offindependentlyforeach
timbre/track(EnableRealtimeControlsKnob1A4B
p.22,p.41,p.151,p.170).
Note:InProgrammode,thecorrespondingprogramparam
eterswillbetemporarilyeditedbythesemessages.Youcan
Writetheprogramtosavethemodifiedstate(exceptforcer
tainparameters).TheWriteoperationcanalsobeperformed
byaMIDISystemExclusiveProgramWriteRequestmes
sage,inadditiontotheusualmethodofusingthemicroS
TATIONsswitches.Whenyouwritethedata,thevaluesof
thecorrespondingprogramparameterswillberewritten.
Note:Theresultsofreceivingthesemessageswilldepend
ontheinstrument.Theoperationmaybedifferentwhena
deviceotherthanthemicroSTATIONisconnected.
Control the arpeggiator
IfyouassignthefollowingCC#stoknobandbuttonof
arpeggiator,thespecifiedCC#willbetransmittedwhenyou
operatethemicroSTATION,andthemicroSTATIONitself
willbecontrolledsimultaneously.Whenthesemessagesare
received,theresultwillbethesameasifyouoperatedthe
microSTATIONitself.
TheCC#settingsfortheknobsandswitchesaremadeinthe
Global/Media:ControllersARPRTCCC#.However,you
caneditthesesettingsifyouneedtoassignMIDIcontrol
changemessagestothecontrollers,suchaswhenyouwant
torecordtheRealtimecontrolCmodeknobs,ARPON/OFF
button,andARPLATCHbuttonoperationsontheinternal
sequenceroranexternalMIDIsequencer,ortocontrolthe
arpeggiatorfromanexternalMIDIdevice.IfGlobal/Media:
MIDIARPRTCMIDI,MIDIOutissettoCC,MIDIcon
trolchangemessageswillbetransmitted.(MIDIOuton
page 63,185)
EachknobandbuttoncanbeassignedanyMIDIcontrol
changeCC#00CC#119,oradesiredMIDInotenumber.
However,youwillnormallyusethedefaultsettingsthatare
assignedwhenyouusethemenucommandResetControl
lerMIDIAssignwithCCDefault.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeResetARPCC#on
page 66.
TheoperationsdescribedbelowarefortheseCCDefault
settings.TransmittedwhenthecorrespondingmicroSTA
TIONcontrolleristransmitted.Whenthisisreceived,the
sameeffectwillapplyaswhenthemicroSTATIONscontrol
lerisoperated.
ARP ON/OFF (CC#14) [Bn, 0E, vv]
CorrespondstotheARPON/OFFbutton.Itwilltransmit
vv=127[7F]whenOn,andvv=127[7F]whenOff.
ARP LATCH ON/OFF (CC#31) [Bn, 1F, vv]
CorrespondstotheARPLATCHbutton.Itwilltransmit
vv=127[7F]whenOn,andvv=127[7F]whenOff.
KNOB1 ARP GATE (CC#22) [Bn, 16, vv]
KNOB2 ARP VELOCITY (CC#23) [Bn, 17, vv]
KNOB3 ARP SWING (CC#24) [Bn, 18, vv]
Correspondstoknobs13whentheRealtimecontrolsisset
toCmode.
Silencing all notes on a specific channel
All note off (CC#123) [Bn, 7B, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,allcurrentlysoundingnotesonthat
channelwillbeturnedoff(asthoughthekeyshadbeen
released).However,thereleaseportionofthenoteswill
remain.
All sound off (CC#120) [Bn, 78, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,allcurrentlysoundingnotesonthat
channelwillbesilenced.WhiletheAllNoteOffmessage
allowsthereleaseportionofthenotestoremain,theAll
SoundOffmessagewillsilencethenotesimmediately.
However,thesemessagesareprovidedforemergencyuse,
andarenotsomethingthatyouwillusewhileperforming.
Resetting all controllers on a specific
channel
Reset all controllers (CC#121) [Bn, 79, 00] (value 00)
Whenthisisreceived,thevalueofallcontrollersonthat
channelwillbereset.
Using RPN (Registered Parameter
Numbers)
RPN(RegisteredParameterNumbers)areatypeofmessage
thatallowsettingstobemadeinawaythatiscommon
betweeninstrumentmanufacturers.(NRPN(Nonregistered
ParameterNumbers)andexclusivemessagescanbefreely
usedinnoncompatiblewaysbydifferentmanufacturers
andmodelsofinstrument.)
RPNmessagescanbeusedforeditingwiththefollowing
procedure.
1. UseRPNMSB(CC#101)[Bn,65,mm]andRPNLSB
(CC#100)[Bn,64,rr](n:channel,mm,rr:upperand
lowerbytesoftheparameternumber)messagestoselect
theparameter.
2. UsedataentryMSB(CC#6)[Bn,06,mm]anddataentry
LSB(CC#38)[Bn,26,vv](n:channel,mm,vv:upperand
lowerbytesofthevalue,togetherexpressing16,384
levels)tospecifythevalue.
3. Youcanusedataincrement(CC#96)[Bn,60,00]ordata
decrement(CC#97)[Bn,61,00](n:channel,valueisfixed
at00)tochangethevalueinstepsofone.
ThemicroSTATIONcanreceivethefollowingthreeRPN
messages(tuning,transpose,andpitchbendrange).
Tuning
RPN fine tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 01]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthedetuningfora
programortimbre(inCombinationmode),orforatrack(in
Sequencermode).
Theprocedureisasfollows.
[Bn,65,00,64,01]:SelectRPNparameter01.
[Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.Avalue
of8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,0[mm,vv=00,00]is100
cents,and16383[mm,vv=7F,7F]is+99cents.
Note:YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveFineTunemes
sagetoadjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstothe
MasterTune(p.57,p.182)parameter.(SeeAboutsys
temexclusivemessagesonpage 308.)
Appendices
308
Transposing
RPN coarse tune [Bn, 65, 00, 64, 02]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthetransposition
foraprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode),orfora
track(inSequencermode).
1. [Bn,65,00,64,02]:SelectRPNparameter02.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,
00]is12semitones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12semi
tones.
YoucanusetheuniversalexclusiveCoarseTunemessageto
adjusttheoveralltuningthatcorrespondstotheKeyTrans
pose(p.57,p.182)parameter.(SeeAboutsystemexclu
sivemessagesonpage 308.)
Changing the pitch bend range
RPN pitch bend range [Bn, 64, 00, 65, 00]
ThisRPNmessagecanbeusedtoadjustthepitchbend
rangeforaprogramortimbre(inCombinationmode)orfor
atrack(inSequencermode).
1. [Bn,65,00,64,00]:SelectRPNparameter00.
2. [Bn,06,mm,26,vv]:Usedataentrytosetthevalue.
Normallyonlytheupperbyteisused.
Avalueof0[mm,vv=00,00]is+00,andavalueof1536
[mm,vv=0C,00]is+12(oneoctave).Althoughitispossible
tosetanegativevalueforatimbre/track,onlypositiveval
uescanbesetusingRPNmessages.
About system exclusive messages
Inadditiontothechannelmessagesthathandleperfor
mancedata,MIDIprovidesatypeofmessagecalledsys
temmessageswhichareusedtosendandreceivedata,
controlcommands,andsettingsbetweenMIDIdevices.
Ofthesesystemmessages,thereisasubsetcalledsystem
exclusivemessages;theseareMIDImessagesthatcanbe
freelyusedbyeachmanufacturer.Systemexclusivemes
sagesprovidetheflexibilitytotransmitandreceivedata
andsettingsthatarespecifictoanindividualmanufacturer
ormodelofdevice.
Systemexclusivemessagesthatarespecifictoamanufac
turercontainthefollowinginformation:
ManufacturerID
ModelID
DeviceID
Thesemessagesareusedforcommunicationbetween
devicesofthesamemodel,ortocommunicatewithdedi
catedcomputereditingsoftware.
Sincethewayinwhichthesemessagesareusedisleftupto
eachmanufacturer,theyaremainlyusedtotransmitand
receivesounddataandeditingdataforparametersthatare
uniquetoaparticularinstrument.ThemicroSTATIONssys
temexclusivemessageformatis[F0,42,3n,00,01,0D,ff,.
F7]
F0:exclusivestatus
42:KorgID
3n:[n=0F]globalMIDIchannel116
mm:ModelIDbyte1(00)
mm:ModelIDbytes2(01)
mm:ModelIDbytes3(0D)
ff:functionID(typeofmessage)
:
:
F7:endofexclusive
ToobtainacopyoftheMIDIImplementationwhich
includesMIDISystemExclusiveformatinformation,please
contactyourKorgdistributor.
Universal system exclusive messages
Somesystemexclusivemessageshaveafunctionthatis
agreeduponbyallmanufacturers;thesearecalleduniver
salsystemexclusivemessages,anddonotcontainamanu
facturerIDormodelID.
ThismeansthattheycansimultaneouslycontrolallMIDI
devicesthathaveamatchingdeviceID.
Oftheuniversalsystemexclusivemessagesthataredefined,
themicroSTATIONsupportsthefollowingsix.
Inquiry message request [F0, 7E, nn, 06, 01, F7]
Inquiry message [F0, 7E, nn, 06, 02, (nine bytes), F7]
Whenaninquirymessagerequestisreceived,themicroS
TATIONwillrespondbytransmittinganinquirymessage
thatmeansIamaKorgmicroSTATION,withsystemver
sion
GM system on [F0, 7E, nn, 09, 01, F7]
WhenthismessageisreceivedinSequencermode,the
microSTATIONwillbeinitializedforGMplayback.
Master volume [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 01, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps)
ThismessageistransmittedifyouassignMasterVolumeas
thefunctionofthefootpedalorasaRealtimeControlB
knobs14.Thiswilladjusttheoverallvolumebalancewith
outchangingtherelativevolumebalancebetweentimbres/
tracks.Whenthismessageisreceived,theresultwillbethe
sameaswhenthecontrollerisused.
Master balance [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 02, vv, mm, F7]
(vv:lowerbyteofthevalue,mm:upperbyteofthevalue,
togetherindicating16384steps,where8192isthedefault
position,andlowervalueswillmovethesoundtowardthe
left)
Whenthisisreceived,theoverallpanningwillbeadjusted
withoutchangingtherelativepanningbetweentimbres/
tracks.
Master fine tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 03, vv, mm, F7]
(Avalueof8192[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,4096[mm,vv=20,
00]is50cents,and12288[mm,vv=60,00]is+50cents.)
Whenthisisreceived,theMTune(MasterTune)parame
terwillbeset.
Master coarse tuning [F0, 7F, nn, 04, 04, vv, mm, F7]
(Normallyonlytheupperbytemmisused.Avalueof8192
[mm,vv=40,00]iscenter,6656[mm,vv=34,00]is12semi
tones,and9728[mm,vv=4C,00]is+12semitones.)
Whenthisisreceived,theTransposeparameterwillbe
set.
MIDI applications
309
Transmitting sound settings data (Data
Dump)
Dataforprograms,combinations,drumkits,userarpeggio
pattern,globalsettings,andsequencerdatacanbetransmit
tedasMIDISystemExclusivemessages.Theoperationof
sendingthissystemexclusivedatatoanexternaldeviceis
calledadatadump.
Byperformingadatadump,youcanstorethemicroSTA
TIONssoundsandsettingsonanexternaldevice,orrewrite
thesoundsandsettingsofanothermicroSTATION.
IftheSysEx(EnableExclusive)(p.63)settingison,data
willalsobedumpedinresponsetoaDumpRequestmes
sage.Thisdataistransmittedandreceivedontheglobal
MIDIchannel.
WhenthemicroSTATIONreceivesthisdata,thedatawillbe
writtenintotheeditbuffer.Ifyouwanttosavethedatainto
internalmemory,youllhavetosavebyusingtheWrite
operation.ThiscanbedoneeitherbyexecutingtheWrite
operation(SeeWritingtointernalmemoryonpage58of
theOperationGuide)onthemicroSTATIONitself,orbya
MIDISystemExclusiveprogramwriterequest,combina
tionwriterequest,drumkitwriterequest,userarpeggio
patternwriterequestorglobalsettingwriterequest.
Editing sounds via SysEx
ByusingvariousMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps,you
canrewriteallprogramsoranindividualprogram.By
usingparameterchangemessages,youcaneditindividual
parametersasfollows.
Parameter changes
InProgrammode,allparametersotherthantheprogram
namecanbeedited.
InCombinationmode,parametersotherthanthecombi
nationnamecanbeedited.
InSequencermode,youcaneditthetrackparameters,
arpeggiator,inserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffects
parameters.(SeeSystemExclusiveeventssupportedin
Sequencermodeonpage 55.)
Drum kit parameter change, User arpeggio pattern
parameter change
InmicroSTATIONEditorsGlobalmode,youcaneditdrum
kitsanduserarpeggiopatterns.TheglobalMIDIchannelis
usedtotransmitandreceivethisdata.FirstturnSysEx
(p.63)Onsothatexclusivedatacanbetransmittedand
received.WhenyouswitchmodesonthemicroSTATION,a
modechangeistransmitted.Whenyoueditaparameter,a
parameterchangewillbetransmitted.
Whenthesemessagesarereceived,thesameeditingopera
tionwillbeperformedasonthetransmitteddevice.
Cautionsregardingdatadumpsandsoundediting
AfterMIDISystemExclusivedatahasbeenreceivedand
processed,aDataLoadCompletedmessagewillbe
transmitted.Thecontrolmasterdevicemustnottransmit
thenextmessageuntilthismessageisreceived(oruntila
sufficientintervaloftimehaselapsed).
Whenyouchangeuseparameterchangestoedit,the
changeswillaffectthedataintheeditbufferandwillnot
bestoredininternalmemoryunlessyouWrite,sothat
thechangeswillbelostifyoureselecttheprogramor
combination.TheWriteoperationcanbeperformedbya
MIDISystemExclusiveProgramWriteRequestor
CombinationWriteRequestmessage,inadditiontothe
usualmethodofusingthemicroSTATIONsswitches.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeWritingtointernal
memoryonpage58oftheOperationGuide.
Thereisnoneedtowriteasong,butitwillnotbe
backedupwhenyouturnoffthepower.Importantdata
thatyouwanttokeepmustbesavedtoanSDcard
beforeyouturnoffthepower.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeSavingtomediaonpage60oftheOperation
Guide.
If notes are stuck
Ifaproblemhascausednotestocontinuesoundingeven
thoughyouvestoppedplayingthekeyboard(orstopped
playingviaMIDI),youcanstopthestucknotesbyswitch
ingmodesonthemicroSTATION.
Playing the microSTATION multi-
timbrally from an external device
ThemicroSTATIONcanbeconnectedtoanexternaldevice
andplayedmultitimbrallyinthefollowingways.
MIDImessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanplayacombi
nation(16partmultitimbralperformance).Youcanchange
theoverallsettings(programs,levels,andeffects)byusing
programchangemessagestoswitchcombinations.
MIDImessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanbeusedtoplay
asong(16partmultitimbralperformance).Overallset
tings(programs,levels,effectsetc.)canbechangedbyusing
aSongSelectmessagetoswitchsongs.
MIDIClockmessagesfromtheexternaldevicecanbeused
tomakethemicroSTATIONplaybackasong(setClock
(MIDIClock)toExt.MIDI,andrunthemicroSTATIONs
sequencer).(SynchronizingtheplaybackoftheArpeggi
atororsequencer)Youcanchangetheoverallsettings
(programs,levels,effects)byusingsongselectmessagesto
switchsongs.
ClockExt.USBwilloperateinthesamewayasExt.MIDI.
WiththeAutosetting,anexternalMIDIclockreceivedat
theMIDIINconnectorortheUSBBconnectorwillautomat
icallycausethemicroSTATIONtoswitchtothesame
methodofoperationasExt.MIDIorExt.USB.
Synchronizing the playback of the
Arpeggiator or sequencer
ThechoiceofwhetherthemicroSTATIONwillbethemaster
(thecontrollingdevice)ortheslave(thecontrolleddevice)is
madebyClock(MIDIClock)(p.62).
WhenClockissettoAuto,themicroSTATIONwillnor
mallyoperateinthesamewayasfortheInternalsetting.
WhenanexternalMIDIclockisreceivedfromtheMIDIIN
orUSBconnector,themicroSTATIONwillautomatically
operateasfortheExternalMIDIsetting.
Using the microSTATION as master and the exter-
nal MIDI device as slave
ConnectthemicroSTATIONsMIDIOUTconnectorto
theMIDIINconnectoroftheexternalMIDIdevice.
ConnectthemicroSTATIONsUSBBconnectortoyour
computersUSBport.
WhenyousetClocktoInternal,themicroSTATION
willbethemasterdevice,andwilltransmitMIDItiming
clockmessages.
Arpeggiator:Thetempocanbecontrolledfromthe
microSTATION.
PerformancedatawillbetransmittedviaMIDI.(Perfor
Appendices
310
mancedatafromtheArpeggiatorinCombinationor
Sequencermodewillbetransmittedfromtimbresor
MIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2.)An
externaltonegeneratorconnectedtoMIDIOUTorUSB
willsound,andthetempoofanexternalsequencercan
becontrolled.
Sequencer:Themusicaldatacanbeplayedbackand
controlledonthemicroSTATION.
Simultaneously,thesequencerplaybackwillbetrans
mittedviaMIDIfromMIDItrackswhoseStatusis
BTH,EXT,orEX2.Anexternaltonegeneratorconnected
toMIDIOUTorUSBwillsound,andthetempoofan
externalsequencercanbecontrolled.
Using the external MIDI device as master and the
microSTATION as slave
ConnectthemicroSTATIONsMIDIINconnectortothe
MIDIOUTconnectoroftheexternalMIDIdevice.Connect
themicroSTATIONsUSBconnectortoyourcomputersUSB
port.
IfyouusetheMIDIconnectorstomakeconnections,set
ClocktoExternalMIDI.IfyouusetheUSBconnector
tomakeconnections,setittoExternalUSB.ThemicroS
TATIONwillbetheslave.
Arpeggiator:ThetempowillfollowtheMIDItiming
clock.Ifyouplaybacktheexternalsequencer,themicroS
TATIONsArpeggiatorwillsynchronizetotheexternal
timingclock.
EvenifClockisExt.MIDIorExt.USBandthemicroS
TATIONisbeingcontrolledfromtheexternaldevice,the
performanceoftheArpeggiatorwillstillbetransmitted
viaMIDI.(Performancedatafromthearpeggiatorin
CombinationorSequencermodewillbetransmitted
fromtimbresorMIDItrackswhoseStatusisBTH,
EXT,orEX2.)
Sequencer:ThemicroSTATIONwillnotbeableto
controltheperformancedata;itwillbecontrolledbythe
externalMIDIdeviceconnectedtoMIDIINorthe
computerconnectedtoUSB.Ifyouwishtoplaybackthe
externalsequencertomakethemicroSTATIONs
sequencerplaybackinsynchronizationtotheexternal
timingclock,youmustfirstsetthesametimesignature
andstartingmeasurelocationsonbothdevices.
EvenifClockissettoExt.MIDIorExt.USBandthe
microSTATIONisbeingcontrolledfromanexternal
device,musicaldatawillbetransmittedbytrackswhose
Recording musical data from an external
device
Therearetwowaysinwhichyoucanplaybackanexternal
sequencerandrecorditsplaybackonthemicroSTATION.
SetClock(MIDIClock)(p.62)toInternal,begin
recording,andthenstarttheexternalsequencer.With
thismethod,theMIDImessageswillberecorded
withoutthetwodevicesbeingsynchronized.Sincethe
incomingmusicaldatawillsimplyberecorded,this
methodallowstheperformancetobereproducedfaith
fully,butsincemeasuredivisionsetc.willnotbekept
trackof,thismethodisnotsuitableifyouintendtoedit
thedatalater.
IfyousetClocktoExt.MIDIorExt.USB,thestartof
recordingandthetempoetc.willallbeunderthecontrol
oftheexternalsequencer.
Sincethetwodeviceswillbesynchronizedduringthe
recordingprocess,measuredivisionsetc.willbe
accuratelypreserved.(Youwillneedtosetthetime
signaturebeforerecording.)
Recording MIDI data from an external sequencer
etc. to multiple MIDI tracks simultaneously
1. MakesurethatyourexternalsequencersMIDIOUTis
connectedtothemicroSTATIONsMIDIINviaaMIDI
cable.
Ifitsnotconnected,turnoffthepower,maketheconnec
tion,andthenturnthepoweronagain.
2. InGlobal/Mediamode,settheMIDIMIDIClock,
ClocksettingtoExternalMIDI.NowthemicroS
TATIONwillsynchronizetotheMIDIclockofyour
externalsequencer.
MakesurethatRcvExtRTCisOn.
3. InSequencermode,createanewsong.
4. InSEQ:EditTracks,Track01Track16,useMIDICh.
tospecifytheMIDIchannelofeachtrack.SettheMIDI
channelsofthemicroSTATIONstrackstomatchthe
MIDIchannelsofeachtrackonyourexternalsequencer.
DataofthesamechannelwillberecordedtothemicroS
TATIONscorrespondingtrack.
MakesurethatStatusissettoINTorBTH.
5. UseSetLocationtosetthelocationto001:01.
6. PresstheRECbuttontoenterrecordstandbymode.
7. SetM(RecordingMode)toOVW(Overwrite),andusethe
0116buttonstoselectthetracksthatyouwanttorecord.
8. Startyourexternalsequencer.
WhentheMIDIstartmessagetransmittedbyyourexter
nalsequencerisreceived,themicroSTATIONwillauto
maticallystartrecording.
9. Whenrecordingisfinished,stopyourexternal
sequencer.ThemicroSTATIONssequencerwillreceive
theMIDIstopmessagetransmittedbyyourexternal
sequencer,andwillstoprecordingautomatically.You
canalsostoprecordingbypressingthemicroSTATIONs
START/STOPbutton.
10.Playback.
11.InGlobal/Mediamode,MIDIMIDIClock,setClock
toInternal.
SEQ:SettheSongSongTempoModetoAuto.
PresstheSTART/STOPbuttontoplayback.
Recording the MIDI output of the microS-
TATIONs controllers, Arpeggiator and
internal sequencer to an external
sequencer/computer
IfyouwishtorecordtheMIDIoutputofthemicroSTA
TIONscontrollers,Arpeggiator,andinternalsequenceron
anexternalsequencerorcomputerandusethemicroSTA
TIONasthemonitoringandplaybacktonegeneratorwhile
yourecord,youmustturnoffthemicroSTATIONsLocal
Controlsetting(LocalCtrlp.61),andsetyourexternal
sequencer/computerforechoback(afunctionbywhichthe
datareceivedatMIDIINisretransmittedwithoutchange
fromMIDIOUT)sothatthedatafromthemicroSTATIONs
controllers,Arpeggiator,andinternalsequencerwillnotbe
appliedinduplicatetothetonegenerator.
MIDI applications
311
Using the Realtime Control Knob 14 to
record MIDI control changes on an
external MIDI sequencer/computer
SetthemicroSTATIONtoLocalControlOff.
SettheexternalMIDIsequencer/computertoEchoBack
On.
Withthesesettings,recordingandplaybackwilloccurcor
rectly,andthecontrolchangeswillnotbeappliedtothe
tonegeneratorinduplicate.
Recording the Arpeggiator on an
external MIDI sequencer/computer
Whenthearpeggiatorison,playingthekeyboardoroperat
ingthecontrollersofthemicroSTATIONwilloperateand
controlthearpeggiator.
Inthesameway,thearpeggiatorwillbecontrolledbyMIDI
messagesreceivedfromMIDIIN.
NotestransmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB)bythearpeggiator
arecontrolledasfollows,accordingtothelocalcontrolset
ting(LocalCtrlp.61).
LocalControlOn:Notesfromthearpeggiatorwillbetrans
mittedfromMIDIOUT(USB).
LocalControlOff:Notesfromthearpeggiatorwillnotbe
transmittedfromMIDIOUT(USB).ThemicroSTATION
willsoundonlyinresponsetoMIDImessagesreceivedat
MIDIIN,orgeneratedbythearpeggiator.
Setting example 1
Recordthenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatoron
theexternalMIDIsequencer/computer.
1. Turnonthisinstrumentsarpeggiator.Setthisinstrument
toLocalControlOn.
2. TurnLocalControlOnforthisinstrument.
TurnEchoBackOffonyourexternalsequencer/com
puter.
Byturningechobackoff,youwillpreventthearpeggia
torfromperformingduplicateprocessingonthemoni
torednotesduringrecording.
3. Duringplayback,turnoffthearpeggiatorofmicroS
TATION.
Setting example 2
UsetheexternalMIDIsequencer/computertorecordonly
thenotesthattriggerthearpeggiator,andoperatethis
instrumentsarpeggiatorformonitoringwhilerecording,
andduringplayback.
1. TurnonthemicroSTATIONsarpeggiator.
2. SetthemicroSTATIONtoLocalControlOff.
Thenotemessagesgeneratedbythearpeggiatorwillnot
beoutput.
3. OnyourexternalMIDIsequencer/computer,turnecho
backon.
Withthesesettings,thedatawillberecordedandplayed
correctly,andthearpeggiatorwillnotbeappliedin
duplicate.
About GM (General MIDI)
ThemicroSTATIONsupportstheGMstandard.Italsosup
portstheGM2soundmap(includingbankselect)with256
programsand9drumprogramsprovidedinROMbanks
GM,g(1)g(9),andg(d).(Banksg(1)g(9)areGM2variation
programs,andg(d)containsdrumprograms.)
GMisastandardthatensuresbasiccompatibilityofsounds
andcontrollersbetweenGMcompatibleinstrumentsmade
bydifferentmanufacturers.WhenusingGMwithmicroS
TATION,beawareofthefollowing.
GMSystemOnissupportedinSequencermode.For
moreinformation,pleaseseeGMInitializeonpage 49.
WhenyouwishtoplayaGMsequence,orloadGMdata
intoasong,setBankMap(p.59)toGM(2).
About standard MIDI files
StandardMIDIfiles(SMF)makeitpossiblefordifferent
computerprogramsormusicalinstrumentsmadebydiffer
entmanufacturerstoexchangetimebasedMIDIdata.Each
standardMIDIfilecontainsonesong.ThemicroSTATION
supportsformat0(type0)inwhichalloftheMIDIdatais
combinedintoonetrack,andformat1(type1)inwhichthe
dataisseparatedbytrack.
WhenaSMFisloadedintoasonginGlobal/Mediamode,
theprogrambankthatisselectedwilldifferdependingon
theBankMap(p.59)setting.Whenplaying/loadingSMF
datathatconformstotheGMspecifications,setBank
MaptoGM(2).
Sequencer mode
InGlobal/MediamodewhenyouconvertasongintoaStan
dardMIDIFileandsaveit,youcanchooseeitherformat0
orformat1.
IfmicroSTATIONsongdatathatwassavedasaformat1
SMFfileisloadedintoanotherdevice,thetrackconfigu
rationmaybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeingsaved.
ThisisbecauseMIDItracksthatcontainnomusicaldata
areomitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
Ifsongdatathatwassavedbyanotherdeviceasaformat
1SMFfileisloadedintothemicroSTATION,thetrack
configurationmaybedifferentthanitwasbeforebeing
saved.Thisisbecausetracksthatcontainnomusicaldata
areomitted,andtheremainingtracksaremovedintothe
unusedtracks.Thiswillnotaffecttheplaybackitself.
WhenexchangingsequencedatabetweentwomicroSTA
TION,werecommendthatyousavethesequencedatain
themicroSTATIONsnativeformat(SaveSEQ).
WhensequencedataissavedinthemicroSTATIONsnative
format,allofthesettingsandpatternsuniquetothemicroS
TATIONwillbesaved,whichwillensureahigherlevelof
reproducibilitythanwhenthedataissavedasaStandard
MIDIFile(SavetoStdMIDIFile).
Parameterchangesandotherrecordeddataisincludedin
thesongdataasSystemExclusiveevents,soitcanbesaved
toorloadedfrommediaasusual.Exclusivemessagescan
alsobeloadedorsavedasSMF(StandardMIDIFile)data
(LoadStandardMIDIFile,SaveSongasStandardMIDI
File).ThisallowsrecordedSystemExclusiveeventstobe
savedasSMFdata,orexclusivemessagesincludedinSMF
datatobeconvertedintosongdata.
Duringplayback,thisdatacanbetransmittedtoanexternal
MIDIdevice,orusedtocontroltrackparametersoreffect
parametersofthesong.
Appendices
312
Shortcuts
REC button
BeginstheAutoSongSetupfunction.
InProgramorCombinationmode,pressingthisbutton
willautomaticallyassigntheprogramorcombination
settingstoaSequencermodesong,andputthemicroS
TATIONinrecordreadymode.
KEY button + keyboard
Entersanotenumbervalueorvelocityvalue.
InSequencermodewhileusinglooprecordingorgrid
sequence,youcanholddowntheKEYbuttonandpress
anotetodeletethedataforthatnotenumber.
WRITE button
Writesaprogramorcombination.Whenyoupressthe
WRITEbuttonitwillblink,andwhenyoupressthe
buttononceagainthedatawillbewritten.Tocancel
withoutwriting,pressthebuttonwhiletheWRITE
buttonisblinking.
WRITE button + LOCATE button
InSequencermode,thisspecifiesthelocationwhere
youllmovewhentheLOCATEbuttonispressed.
Power-on while holding down the PLAY/MUTE
button + function 08 button
ThiswillinitializethemicroSTATION.
ThedisplaywillindicateInitializing...whilethedatais
beingloaded.
Afterinitializationiscompleted,youllneedtoloadthe
preloaddata.UseGlobal/Mediamodetoloadthedata
fromanSDcardthatcontainsthepreloaddata.
View bank and program numbers
Inapagewhereyoucanselectaprogram,pressthefront
panelNUMLOCKbuttontoturnNumLockon,and
thenpresstheENTER(14)button.
IndicationssuchasA000thatareshownasthewriting
destinationorcopydestinationforWriteProgram,Write
Combination,orvariouscopycommandswillcorre
spondtothisbankandprogramnumber.Asdesired,
youcanswitchthisbetweendisplayedandhidden.MIDI
Implementation
MIDI Implementation
313
MIDI Implementation
mm ii c c rr oo SS T T AA T T II O O NN MM II D D II II M M PP LL E E M M EE NN TT AA TT I I O O N N
8,Dec,2009
Consult your local Korg dealer for more infomation on MIDI System Exclusive implementation.

11 . . TT RR A A N N S S MM II T T T T E E DD DD A A T T A A
11 -- 1 1 C C HH AA N N N N EE LL M M EE S S SS A A GG E E SS
[H] :Hex, [D] :Decimal
|Status| Second Third | Description ( Transmitted by ....) |ENA |
|[Hex] | [H][D] [H][D] | | |
| 8n kk (kk) 40 (64) | Note Off ( Key Off ) *1| A |
| 9n kk (kk) vv (vv) | Note On (vv)=1-127 ( Key On ) *1| A |
| An kk (kk) vv (vv) | Poly Key Pressure ( Sequence data ) | T,Q|
| Bn 00 (00) mm (mm) | Bank Select(MSB) ( Prog/Combi change ) *2| PB |
| Bn 01 (01) vv (vv) | Modulation1 ( Joystick +Y, ASW/Pdl ) | C |
| Bn 02 (02) vv (vv) | Modulation2 ( Joystick -Y, ASW/Pdl ) | C |
| Bn 04 (04) vv (vv) | Foot Pedal ( Pdl = Foot Pedal ) | C |
| Bn 05 (05) vv (vv) | Portamento Time ( Knob/Pdl = Porta.Time, S Chg ) | C |
| Bn 07 (07) vv (vv) | Volume ( Knob/Pdl = Volume, S/C Chg ) | C |
| Bn 08 (08) vv (vv) | Post IFX Panpot ( Knob/Pdl = Post IFX Pan, S Chg ) | C |
| Bn 0A (10) vv (vv) | Panpot ( Knob/Pdl = Pan, S Chg ) | C |
| Bn 0B (11) vv (vv) | Expression ( Knob/Pdl = Expression ) | C |
| Bn 0C (12) vv (vv) | Effect Control 1 ( Knob/Pdl = FX Control1 ) | C |
| Bn 0D (13) vv (vv) | Effect Control 2 ( Knob/Pdl = FX Control2 ) | C |
| Bn 0E (14) 00/7F (00/127) | ( ARP ON/OFF, ASW ) *3| C |
| Bn 10 (16) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl1 ( ASW/Pdl = CC#16(Rbn) ) | C |
| Bn 11 (17) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl2 ( Knob = Knob Mod1 ) | C |
| Bn 13 (19) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl4 ( Knob = Knob Mod2 ) | C |
| Bn 14 (20) vv (vv) | ( Knob = Knob Mod3 ) | C |
| Bn 15 (21) vv (vv) | ( Knob = Knob Mod4 ) | C |
| Bn 16 (22) vv (vv) | ( ARP Knob1 GATE, ASW/Pdl ) *3| C |
| Bn 17 (23) vv (vv) | ( ARP Knob2 VELOCITY, ASW/Pdl ) *3| C |
| Bn 18 (24) vv (vv) | ( ARP Knob3 SWING, ASW/Pdl ) *3| C |
| Bn 1F (31) 00/7F (00/127) | ( ARP LATCH, ASW ) *3| C |
| Bn 20 (32) bb (bb) | Bank Select(LSB) ( Prog/Combi change ) *2| PB |
| Bn 40 (64) vv (vv) | Hold1 ( Damper, ASW ) | C |
| Bn 41 (65) 00/7F (00/127) | Portamento Off/On ( ASW = Porta.SW, S Chg ) | C |
| Bn 42 (66) 00/7F (00/127) | Sostenuto Off/On ( ASW = Sostenuto ) | C |
| Bn 43 (67) 00/7F (00/127) | Soft Pedal ( ASW = Soft ) | C |
| Bn 46 (70) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 1 ( Knob = F/A Sustain ) | C |
| Bn 47 (71) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 2 ( Knob2A, Knob = Resonance, ASW/Pdl ) | C |
| Bn 48 (72) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 3 ( Knob4A, Knob = F/A Release, ASW/Pdl ) | C |
| Bn 49 (73) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 4 ( Knob = F/A Attack ) | C |
| Bn 4A (74) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 5 ( Knob1A, Knob = Filter Cutoff, ASW/Pdl ) | C |
| Bn 4B (75) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 6 ( Knob = F/A Decay ) | C |
| Bn 4C (76) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 7 ( Knob = Pitch LFO1 Spd ) | C |
| Bn 4D (77) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 8 ( Knob = Pitch LFO1 Dep ) | C |
| Bn 4E (78) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 9 ( Knob = Pitch LFO1 Dly ) | C |
| Bn 4F (79) vv (vv) | Sound Controller 10 ( Knob3A, Knob = Filter EG Int, ASW/Pdl ) | C |
| Bn 50 (80) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl5 ( Knob = SW1 Mod. ) | C |
| Bn 51 (81) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl6 ( Knob = SW2 Mod. ) | C |
| Bn 52 (82) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl7 ( ASW/Knob = Foot SW ) | C |
| Bn 53 (83) vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl8 ( Knob = MIDI CC#83 ) | C |
Appendices
314
| Bn 5B (91) vv (vv) | Effect 1 Depth ( Knob/Pdl = MFX Send2, S Chg ) | C |
| Bg 5C (92) 00/7F (00/127) | Effect 2 Depth ( All Insert FX Off/On ) | C |
| Bn 5D (93) vv (vv) | Effect 3 Depth ( Knob/Pdl = MFX Send1, S Chg ) | C |
| Bg 5E (94) 00/7F (00/127) | Effect 4 Depth ( Master FX1/2 Off/On ) | C |
| Bg 5F (95) 00/7F (00/127) | Effect 5 Depth ( Total FX Off/On ) | C |
| Bn cc (cc) vv (vv) | Control (cc)=0-119 ( Sequencer data ) | Q |
| Bn cc (cc) vv (vv) | Control (cc)=0-119 ( Knob = MIDI CC#00-119 ) | C |
| Bn cc (cc) vv (vv) | Control (cc)=0-119 ( ARP Controllers = MIDI CC#00-119 ) | C |
| Bn cc (cc) vv (vv) | Control (cc)=0-119 ( External Mode = MIDI CC#00-119 ) | A |
| Cn pp (pp) -- -- | Program Change ( Prog/Combi change ) *2| P |
| Dn vv (vv) -- -- | Channel Pressure ( Sequence data ) | T,Q|
| En bb (bb) bb (bb) | Bender Change ( Joy Stick X ) | C |

Pdl : Assignable Pedal
ASW : Assignable Switch
Knob : Realtime Knob1B,2B,3B,4B
S Chg : Transmitted when change a Song No.(Seq. mode). (Status = EXT,EX2,BTH)
C/S Chg : Transmitted when change a Combination or Song No.(Seq. mode). (Status = EXT,EX2 or BTH)
n : MIDI Channel No. (0 - 15) Usually Global Channel.
When in Combination/Sequencer mode, each timbre's/track's channel. (Status = EXT,EX2 or BTH)
g : Always Global Channel No. (0 - 15)
ENA = A : Always Enabled.
C : Enabled when Enable Control Change in Global mode is on.
P : Enabled when Enable Program Change in Global mode is on.
PB: Enabled when Enable Program and Bank Change in Global mode is on.
T : Enabled when Enable After Touch in Global mode is on.
Q : Enabled when Sequencer is playing(transmit), recording(receive)
*1 : kk = 24 - 108 : 61keys + Transpose
= 00 - 127 : Sequencer and ARP
*2 : Program Combination MIDI Out[Hex] (Bank Map is KORG) (Bank Map is GM(2))
Bank A 000 - 127 : Bank A 000 - 127 : mm,bb,pp = 00,00, 00 - 7F = 3F,00, 00 - 7F
B 000 - 127 : B 000 - 127 : 00,01, 00 - 7F 3F,01, 00 - 7F
C 000 - 127 : C 000 - 127 : 00,02, 00 - 7F 3F,02, 00 - 7F
D 000 - 127 : 00,03, 00 - 7F 3F,03, 00 - 7F
GM 001 - 128 : 79,00, 00 - 7F 79,00, 00 - 7F
g 001 - 128 : 79,01-09, 00 - 7F 79,01-09, 00 - 7F
g(d) 001 - 128 : 78,00, 00 - 7F 78,00, 00 - 7F
*3 : When CC# by "CC Default" is assigned to the ARP Controllers in Global Mode.
Reset ARP CC# = CC Default
ARP ON/OFF :CC#14
ARP LATCH :CC#31
ARP Knob1 GATE :CC#22
ARP Knob2 VELOCITY :CC#23
ARP Knob3 SWING :CC#24
MIDI Implementation
315
6th byte 42 : KORG ID
7th byte 0D : microSTATION series ID
8th byte 01 : microSTATION series ID
9th byte 05 : microSTATION member code
11th byte vv : System Version 1st ( 1 - )
12th byte ww : System Version 2nd ( 0 - )
13th byte xx : System Version 3rd ( 0 - )
(i.e. Version 1.0.2: vv=01, ww=00, xx=02 )

1-4-2 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES ( REALTIME )
Master Volume
[ F0,7F,0g,04,01,vv,mm,F7 ] 3rd byte g : Global Channel
6th byte vv : Value(LSB)
7th byte mm : Value(MSB)
mm,vv = 00,00 - 7F,7F : Min - Max
1 1 - - 22 SS YY SS TT E E MM C C O O MM MM OO NN M M EE SS SS A A GG EE SS
Status Second Third Description ( Transmitted when )
[Hex] [H] [D] [H] [D]
F2 ss (ss) tt (tt) Song Position Pointer
ss : Least significant [LSB] *4
tt : Most significant [MSB] *4
F3 ss (ss) Song Select
ss : Song(0-127)

Transmits Song Position Pointer message when in Sequencer mode. (Internal Clock)
Transmits Song Select message when in Sequencer mode.
*4 : For example, if time signature is 4/4 or 8/8, tt,ss = 00,10 means one measure.

11 -- 33 S S Y Y S S TT EE M M RR E E A A L L T T I I M M E E MM EE SS SS AA GG EE SS

Status[Hex] Description ( Transmitted when ... )
F8 Timing Clock ( Always in Prog/Combi/Seq mode ) *5
FA Start ( START in Seq mode ) *5
FB Continue ( Continue START in Seq mode ) *5
FC Stop ( STOP in Seq mode ) *5
FE Active Sensing ( Always ) *6
*5 Transmits these messages when MIDI Clock in Global mode is Internal.
*6 Transmits these messages when MIDI Clock in Global mode is External.
11 - - 44 SS YY SS T T EE MM EE XX CC L L U U S S II V V EE
1-4-1 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE ( NON REALTIME )
DEVICE INQUlRY REPLY ( Transmits when received a INQUIRY MESSAGE REQUEST )
[ F0,7E,0g,06,02,42,0D,01,05,00,vv,ww,xx,00,F7 ] 3rd byte g : Global Channel
Appendices
316
22 . . RR EE C C OO GG N N II Z Z EE DD RR EE C C EE I I VV EE DD AA TT A A
22 - - 1 1 C C H H A A N N N N E E L L MM E E S S SS AA GG E E SS
|[Hex] | [H][D] [H][D] | | |
Status Second | Third | Description ( Use ..... ) |ENA |
[Hex] [H] [D] | [H] [D] |
8n kk (kk)| xx (xx) | Note Off A |
9n kk (kk)| 00 (00) | Note Off A |
9n kk (kk)| vv (vv) | Note On (vv) = 1-127 A |
An kk (kk)| vv (vv) | Poly Key Pressure ( as AMS ) T,Q|
Bn 00 (00)| mm (mm) | Bank Select(MSB) ( for Prog/Combi change ) *1 P |
Bn 01 (01)| vv (vv) | Modulation1 ( as Joy Stick +Y ) C |
Bn 02 (02)| vv (vv) | Modulation2 ( as Joy Stick -Y ) C |
Bn 04 (04)| vv (vv) | Foot Pedal ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Foot Pedal ) C |
Bn 05 (05)| vv (vv) | Portamento Time C |
Bn 06 (06)| vv (vv) | Data Entry (MSB) ( for RPC edit ) C |
Bn 07 (07)| vv (vv) | Volume C |
Bn 08 (08)| vv (vv) | Balance Control ( for Post IFX Panpot control ) *2 C |
Bn 0A (10)| vv (vv) | Panpot C |
Bn 0B (11)| vv (vv) | Expression C |
Bn 0C (12)| vv (vv) | Effect Control 1 ( as FX Dmod Src = Fx Control1 ) C |
Bn 0D (13)| vv (vv) | Effect Control 2 ( as FX Dmod Src = Fx Control2 ) C |
Bn 0E (14)| vv (vv) | ( as ARP ON/OFF ) *4 C |
Bn 10 (16)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl1 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#16(Rbn) ) C |
Bn 11 (17)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl2 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod1 ) C |
Bn 12 (18)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl3 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#18(Val) ) C |
Bn 13 (19)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl4 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod2 ) C |
Bn 14 (20)| vv (vv) | ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod3 ) C |
Bn 15 (21)| vv (vv) | ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Knob Mod4 ) C |
Bn 16 (22)| vv (vv) | ( as ARP Knob1 GATE) *4 C |
Bn 17 (23)| vv (vv) | ( as ARP Knob2 VELOCITY ) *4 C |
Bn 18 (24)| vv (vv) | ( as ARP Knob3 SWING ) *4 C |
Bn 1F (31)| vv (vv) | ( as ARP LATCH ) *4 C |
Bn 20 (32)| bb (bb) | Bank Select(LSB) ( for Prog / Combi change ) *1 P |
Bn 26 (38)| vv (vv) | Data Entry (LSB) ( for RPC edit ) C |
Bn 40 (64)| vv (vv) | Hold1 ( as Damper) C |
Bn 41 (65)|
3F/
40 ( 63/ 64) | Portamento Off/On C |
Bn 42 (66)|
3F/
40 ( 63/ 64) | Sostenuto Off/On C |
Bn 43 (67)| vv (vv) | Soft Pedal C |
Bn 46 (70)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 1 ( for Sustain Level control ) C |
Bn 47 (71)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 2 ( for Resonance control ) C |
Bn 48 (72)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 3 ( for Release Time control ) C |
Bn 49 (73)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 4 ( for Attack Time control ) C |
Bn 4A (74)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 5 ( for Filter Cutoff control ) C |
Bn 4B (75)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 6 ( for Decay Time control ) C |
Bn 4C (76)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 7 ( for LFO1 Speed control ) C |
Bn 4D (77)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 8 ( for LFO1 Pitch Depth control ) C |
Bn 4E (78)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 9 ( for LFO1 Delay control ) C |
Bn 4F (79)| vv (vv) | Sound Controller 10 ( for Filter EG Intensity control ) C |
Bn 50 (80)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl5 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#80 ) C |
Bn 51 (81)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl6 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#81 ) C |
MIDI Implementation
317
Bn 7B(123)| 00 (00) | All Notes Off A|
Bn 7C(124)| 00 (00) | Omni Mode Off ( as All Notes Off ) A|
Bn 7D(125)| 00 (00) | Omni Mode On ( as All Notes Off ) A|
Bn 7E(126)| 10 ( 16) | Mono Mode On ( as All Notes Off ) A|
Bn 7F(127)| 00 (00) | Poly mode On ( as All Notes Off ) A|
Cn pp (pp)| -- -- | Program Change ( for Prog/Combi change ) *1 P|
Dn vv (vv)| -- -- | Channel Pressure ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = After Touch ) T|
En bb (bb)| bb (bb) | Bender Change C|

AMS : Alternate Modulation Source
FX Dmod Src : Effect Dynamic Modulation Source

n : MIDI Channel No. (0 - 15) Usually Global Channel.
When in Combination/Sequencer mode, each timbre's/track's channel.(Status is INT or BTH)
g : Always Global Channel No. (0 - 15)
x : Random
ENA : Same as Transmitted data
*1 : When Bank Map in Global mode is KORG;
MIDI In [Hex] Program Combination
mm,bb,pp = 00,00, 00 - 7F : Bank INT-A 000 - 127 : Bank INT-A 000 - 127
00,01, 00 - 7F : INT-B 000 - 127 : INT-B 000 - 127
00,02, 00 - 7F : INT-C 000 - 127 : INT-C 000 - 127
00,03, 00 - 7F : INT-D 000 - 127 :
79,00, 00 - 7F : G 001 - 128
79,01-09, 00 - 7F : g(1)-g(9) 001 - 128
78,00, 00 - 7F : g(d) 001 - 128
38,00, 00 - 7F : G 001 - 128
3E,00, 00 - 7F : g(d) 001 - 128

When Bank Map in Global mode is GM(2);
Bn 52 (82)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl7 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = Foot Switch ) C|
Bn 53 (83)| vv (vv) | Multi Purpose Ctrl8 ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#83 ) C|
Bn 55 (85)| vv (vv) | ( as AMS & FX Dmod Src = CC#85 ) C|
Bn 5B (91)| vv (vv) | Effect 1 Depth ( for Send 2 Level control ) C|
Bg 5C (92)| 00/ 00 (00/ 000) | Effect 2 Depth ( for All Insert FX Off/On ) C|
Bn 5D (93)| vv (vv) | Effect 3 Depth ( for Send 1 Level control ) C|
Bg 5E (94)| 00/ 00 (00/ 000) | Effect 4 Depth ( for Master FX1,2 Off/On ) C|
Bg 5F (95)| 00/ 00 (00/ 000) | Effect 5 Depth ( for Total FX Off/On ) C|
Bn 60 (96)| 00 (00) | Data Increment ( for RPC edit ) C|
Bn 61 (97)| 00 (00) | Data Decrement ( for RPC edit ) C|
Bn 64(100)| 0r (0r) | RPN Param No. (LSB) ( for RPN select ) *3 C|
Bn 65(101)| 00 (00) | RPN Param No. (MSB) ( for RPN select ) *3 C|
Bn cc (cc)| vv (vv) | Control data ( for Seq. recording (cc) = 0-119 ) C,Q|
Bn 78(120)| 00 (00) | All Sound Off C|
Bn 79(121)| 00 (00) | Reset All Controllers C|
Bn 7A(122)| 00/7F (00/127) | Local Control Off/On A|
Appendices
318
22 -- 22 SS YY SS TT E E M M C C O O MM MM OO NN M M EE SS SS A A GG EE S S

|Status| Second | Third | Description ( Use for ..... ) |
|[Hex] |[H] [D] | [H] [D] | |
| F2 | ss (ss)| tt (tt) | Song Position Pointer ( Location ) *6|
| | | | ss : Least significant [LSB] |
| | | | tt : Most significant [MSB] |
| F3 | ss (ss)| | Song Select |
| | | | ss : Song(0-127) No. |
Receive when in Sequencer mode.
22 -- 33 S S YY SS TT E E MM RR EE A A LL TT II M M EE MM EE SS S S AA GG EE S S
|Status[Hex] | Description ( Use for..... ) |
| F8 | Timing Clock ( Tempo, AMS & FX Dmod Src ) *5|
| FA | Start ( Seq Start & Arpeggiator Control ) *6|
| FB | Continue ( Seq Continue start & Arpeggiator Control ) *6|
| FC | Stop ( Seq Stop & Arpeggiator Control ) *6|
| FE | Active Sensing ( MIDI Connect check ) |

*5 Receive when MIDI Clock in Global mode is External MIDI.
*6 Receive when MIDI Clock in Global mode is External MIDI
and Receive Rcv ExtRTC(Ext. Realtime Commands) in Global mode is on.

MIDI In [Hex] Program Combination
mm,bb,pp = 3F,00, 00 - 7F : Bank INT-A 000 - 127 : Bank INT-A 000 - 127
3F,01, 00 - 7F : INT-B 000 - 127 : INT-B 000 - 127
3F,02, 00 - 7F : INT-C 000 - 127 : INT-C 000 - 127
3F,03, 00 - 7F : INT-D 000 - 127 :
79,00, 00 - 7F : G 001 - 128
79,01-09, 00 - 7F : g(1)-g(9) 001 - 128
78,00, 00 - 7F : g(d) 001 - 128
00,00, 00 - 7F : G 001 - 128
38,00, 00 - 7F : G 001 - 128
3E,00, 00 - 7F : g(d) 001 - 128
3F,7F, 00 - 7F : Mute (KORG MUTE)
*2 : When in Program, Global channel.
When in Combination/Sequencer mode, each IFX's channel.
*3 : r = 0 : Pitch Bend Sensitivity ( Bend Range )
= 1 : Fine Tune ( Detune )
= 2 : Coarse Tune ( Transpose )
For drum program, both of Fine Tune and Coase Tune affect to Detune.
Data Entry LSB value has no effect for Pitch Bend Sensitivity and Coarse Tune.
*4 : When CC# by "CC Default" is assigned to the ARP Controllers in Global Mode.
n : When in Program/Combination mode, Global channel.
When in Sequencer mode, current selected track's channel.
MIDI Implementation
319
GM System On ( Receive when in Sequencer mode )
[ F0,7E,nn,09,01,F7 ] 3rd byte nn : Channel = 0 - F : Global Channel
= 7F : Any Channel

2-4-2 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES ( REALTIME )
Master Volume
mm,vv = 00,00 - 7F,7F : Min - Max
Master Balance
mm,vv = 00,00:Left, 40,00:Center, 7F,7F:Right

Master Fine Tune ( Control Master Tune(cent) in Global )
mm,vv = 20,00:-50, 40,00:+00, 60,00:+50
Master Coarse Tune ( Control Transpose (chromatic step) in Global )
mm,vv = 34,00:-12, 40,00:+00, 4C,00:+12
22 - - 4 4 S S Y Y SS T T E E MM EE XX CC LL U U S S I I VV E E
2-4-1 UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES ( NON REALTIME )
DEVICE INQUlRY ( When received this message, transmits INQUlRY MESSAGE REPLY )
[ F0,7E,nn,06,01,F7 ] 3rd byte nn : Channel = 0 - F : Global Channel
= 7F : Any Channel
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan
2010 KORG INC.
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS
This product has been manufactured according to strict specications and voltage
requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should
be used. If you have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a
telephone sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in
which you reside.
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could
be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturers or distributors warranty.
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be
disqualied from the manufacturers or distributors warranty.

microSTATION Param

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

microSTATION Param

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 E

You might also like